Skip to main content <#maincontent> We will keep fighting for all libraries - stand with us! Internet Archive logo A line drawing of the Internet Archive headquarters building façade. Search icon An illustration of a magnifying glass. Search icon An illustration of a magnifying glass. Upload icon An illustration of a horizontal line over an up pointing arrow. Upload User icon An illustration of a person's head and chest. Sign up | Log in Web icon An illustration of a computer application window Wayback Machine Texts icon An illustration of an open book. Books Video icon An illustration of two cells of a film strip. Video Audio icon An illustration of an audio speaker. Audio Software icon An illustration of a 3.5" floppy disk. Software Images icon An illustration of two photographs. Images Donate icon An illustration of a heart shape Donate Ellipses icon An illustration of text ellipses. More Hamburger icon An icon used to represent a menu that can be toggled by interacting with this icon. Internet Archive Audio Live Music Archive Librivox Free Audio Featured * All Audio * This Just In * Grateful Dead * Netlabels * Old Time Radio * 78 RPMs and Cylinder Recordings Top * Audio Books & Poetry * Computers, Technology and Science * Music, Arts & Culture * News & Public Affairs * Spirituality & Religion * Podcasts * Radio News Archive Images Metropolitan Museum Cleveland Museum of Art Featured * All Images * This Just In * Flickr Commons * Occupy Wall Street Flickr * Cover Art * USGS Maps Top * NASA Images * Solar System Collection * Ames Research Center Software Internet Arcade Console Living Room Featured * All Software * This Just In * Old School Emulation * MS-DOS Games * Historical Software * Classic PC Games * Software Library Top * Kodi Archive and Support File * Vintage Software * APK * MS-DOS * CD-ROM Software * CD-ROM Software Library * Software Sites * Tucows Software Library * Shareware CD-ROMs * Software Capsules Compilation * CD-ROM Images * ZX Spectrum * DOOM Level CD Books Books to Borrow Open Library Featured * All Books * All Texts * This Just In * Smithsonian Libraries * FEDLINK (US) * Genealogy * Lincoln Collection Top * American Libraries * Canadian Libraries * Universal Library * Project Gutenberg * Children's Library * Biodiversity Heritage Library * Books by Language * Additional Collections Video TV News Understanding 9/11 Featured * All Video * This Just In * Prelinger Archives * Democracy Now! * Occupy Wall Street * TV NSA Clip Library Top * Animation & Cartoons * Arts & Music * Computers & Technology * Cultural & Academic Films * Ephemeral Films * Movies * News & Public Affairs * Spirituality & Religion * Sports Videos * Television * Videogame Videos * Vlogs * Youth Media Search the history of over 835 billion web pages on the Internet. Search the Wayback Machine Search icon An illustration of a magnifying glass. Mobile Apps * Wayback Machine (iOS) * Wayback Machine (Android) Browser Extensions * Chrome * Firefox * Safari * Edge Archive-It Subscription * Explore the Collections * Learn More * Build Collections Save Page Now Capture a web page as it appears now for use as a trusted citation in the future. Please enter a valid web address * About * Blog * Projects * Help * Donate * Contact * Jobs * Volunteer * People * Sign up for free * Log in Search metadata Search text contents Search TV news captions Search radio transcripts Search archived web sites Advanced Search * About * Blog * Projects * Help * Donate Donate icon An illustration of a heart shape * Contact * Jobs * Volunteer * People Full text of "Britannica Illustrated Science Library Collection, 16 Volume " See other formats UNIVERSE * o oe About the pagination of this eBook Due to the unique page numbering scheme of this book, the electronic pagination of the eBook does not match the pagination of the printed version. To navigate the text, please use the electronic Table of Contents that appears alongside the eBook or the Search function. For citation purposes, use the page numbers that appear in the text. UNIVERSE Wy, y Vere! \e Ve v \ we v > | by BAA MOAR mae” Britannica Illustrated Science Library Britannica Illustrated Science Library © 2008 Editorial Sol 90 All rights reserved. Idea and Concept of This Work: Editorial Sol 90 Project Management: Fabian Cassan Photo Credits: Corbis, ESA, Getty Images, Graphic News, NASA, National Geographic, Science Photo Library Illustrators: Guido Arroyo, Pablo Aschei, Gustavo J. Caironi, Hernan Cafiellas, Leonardo César, José Luis Corsetti, Vanina Farias, Joana Garrido, Celina Hilbert, Isidro Lopez, Diego Martin, Jorge Martinez, Marco Menco, Ala de Mosca, Diego Mourelos, Eduardo Pérez, Javier Pérez, Ariel Piroyansky, Ariel Roldan, Marcel Socias, Néstor Taylor, Trebol Animation, Juan Venegas, Coralia Vignau, 3DN, 3DOM studio Composition and Pre-press Services: Editorial Sol 90 Translation Services and Index: Publication Services, Inc. Portions © 2008 Encyclopzedia Britannica, Inc. Encyclopaedia Britannica, Britannica, and the thistle logo are registered trademarks of Encyclopeedia Britannica, Inc. Britannica Illustrated Science Library Staff Editorial Michael Levy, Executive Editor, Core Editorial John Rafferty, Associate Editor, Earth Sciences William L. Hosch, Associate Editor, Mathematics and Computers Kara Rogers, Associate Editor, Life Sciences Rob Curley, Senior Editor, Science and Technology David Hayes, Special Projects Editor Art and Composition Steven N. Kapusta, Director Carol A. Gaines, Composition Supervisor Christine McCabe, Senior I/lustrator Media Acquisition Kathy Nakamura, Manager Copy Department Sylvia Wallace, Director Julian Ronning, Supervisor Information Management and Retrieval Sheila Vasich, Information Architect Production Control Marilyn L. Barton Manufacturing Kim Gerber, Director Encyclopzedia Britannica, Inc. Jacob E. Safra, Chairman of the Board Jorge Aguilar-Cauz, President Michael Ross, Senior Vice President, Corporate Development Dale H. Hoiberg, Senior Vice President and Editor Marsha Mackenzie, Director of Production International Standard Book Number (set): 978-1-59339-797-5 International Standard Book Number (volume): 978-1-59339-798-2 Britannica Illustrated Science Library: Universe 2008 Printed in China ENC YCLOPADIA Britannica www.britannica.com PICTURE ON PAGE 1 Image of a planetary nebula. Planetary nebulae are among the most photogenic objects in astronomy. What Is the . Universe? a Page 6 4 : __-What Is in the x Universe? Page 18 The Solar : i _ System a Page 38 The Earth and the Moon Page 66 Observing the Universe Page 80 Ke , s koe 2 . Ss | q me v 4 : | "4g rl / eB he Universe here was a time when people believed - that the stars were bonfires lit by other tribes in the sky, that the universe was a flat plate resting on the shell of a giant turtle, and that the Earth, according to the Greek astronomer Ptolemy, was at the center of the universe. From the most remote of times, people have been curious about what lies hidden beyond the celestial sphere. This curiosity has led them to build telescopes that show with clarity otherwise blurry and distant objects. In this book you will find the history of the cosmos illustrated with spectacular images that show in detail how the cosmos was formed, the nature of the many points of light that adorn the night sky, and what lies ahead. * You will also discover how the suns that inhabit space live and die, what dark matter this vastness. Certainly, the opportunity to . and black holes are, and what our place is in a tw VK J Oi compare the destiny of other worlds similar to ours will help us understand that for the time being there is no better place than the Earth to live. At least for now. n the Milky Way—according to mathematical and physical calculations—there are more than 100 billion stars, and such a multitude leads to the question: Is it possible that our Sun is the only star that possesses an inhabited planet? Astronomers are more convinced than ever of the possibility of life in other worlds. We just need to find them. Reading this book will let you become better acquainted with our neighbors in the solar system—the other planets—and the most important characteristics that distinguish them. All this information that explores the mysteries of space is accompanied by recent images captured by the newest telescopes. They reveal many details about the planets and their satellites, such as the volcanoes and craters found on the surface of some of them. You will also learn more about the asteroids and comets that orbit the Sun and about Pluto, a dwarf planet, which is to be visited by a space probe for the first time. Less than a decade ago, astronomers began observing frozen worlds, much smaller than a planet, in a region of the solar system called the Kuiper belt. We invite you to explore all of this. The images * and illustrations that accompany the text will prove very helpful in studying and understanding the structure of all the visible and invisible objects (such as dark matter) that form part of the universe. There are stellar maps showing the constellations, the groups of stars that since ancient times have served as a guide for navigation and for the development of calendars. There is also a review through history: from Ptolemy, who ~ thought the planets orbited around the pa Earth, and Copernicus, who put the Sun in the center, and Galileo, the first to aim a telescope skyward, up to the most recent. astronomical theories, such as those of Stephen Hawking, the genius of space and time who continues to amaze with his discoveries about the greatest mysteries of the cosmos. You will find these and many more topics no matter where you look in this. fantastic book that puts the universe and its secrets in your hands. / ~ What Is the Universe’? he universe is everything that exists, from the smallest particles to the largest ones, together with all matter and energy. The universe includes visible and invisible things, such as dark matter, the great, secret component of the cosmos. The search for dark matter is currently one of the most important tasks of cosmology. Dark matter may DARK MATTER Evidence exists that dark matter, though invisible to telescopes, betrays itself by the gravitational pull it exerts over other heavenly bodies. literally determine the density of all of space, as well as decide the destiny of the universe. Did you know that, second by second, the universe grows and grows? The question that astronomers X-RAY OF THE COSMOS THE INSTANT OF CREATION EVERYTHING COMES TO AN END THE FORCES OF THE UNIVERSE are asking—the question that concerns them the most—is how much longer the universe can continue to expand like a balloon before turning into something cold and dark. 8 WHAT IS THE UNIVERSE? X-Ray of the Cosmos he universe, marvelous in its majesty, is an ensemble of a hundred billion galaxies. Each of these galaxies (which tend to be found in large groups) has billions of stars. These galactic concentrations surround empty spaces, called cosmic voids. The immensity of the cosmos can he better grasped by realizing that the size of our fragile planet Earth, or even that of the Milky Way, is insignificant compared to the size of the remainder of the cosmos. @ Capricornus Supegcluster / ulptor Z f / a \ \ . Pisces-Cetus . Superclusters 1. EARTH Originated, together with the solar system, when the universe was already 9.1 billion years old. It is the only known planet that is home to life. The Universe Originating nearly 14 billion years ago in an immense explosion, the universe today is too large to be able to conceive. The innumerable stars and galaxies that populate it promise to continue expanding for a long time. Though it might sound strange today, for many years, astronomers thought that the Milky Way, where the Earth is located, constituted the entire universe. Only recently—in the 20th century—was outer space recognized as not only much vaster than previously thought but also as being in a state of ongoing expansion. Uranu: “ / Sati NEAR STARS Found closer than 20 light-years from the Sun, they make up our solar neighborhood. Ross Lalande 51-15 | 128 21185 Struve Wolf 359 2398 12.5 Bees Procyon one NEIGHBORS Within a space Luyten’s | 15 j of one million light-years, Star R , Bernard's ' e we find the Milky Way and : SUN }) Stary 61 cygni its closest galaxies. | Alpha . Siviue| | Centauri , Ross irius } ’ 248 Sextans 270° | Groombridge 0° Dwarf , 34 gloss Ursa ot L789-6 Minor Dwai 180° | Epsilon | Eridani | L726-8° : ‘1789-6 es MluCyway ae, acam alll ts Cani L372-58 | Epsilon Lacaille 0.12 a Leary Major vCeti Indi 9359 0.25 Bos L725-32 0.37. Sagittarius 0.5 Large Dwarf Magellanic : Cloud Carina | Dwarf o° * Small Magellanic | Cloud 750 1,000 | . Horologium Superclusters ’ Draco Dwarf N\ ~. SUPERCLUSTERS. Within a distance of a billion light-years, groups of millions of galaxies, called superclusters, can be seen. 6. Corona Borealis Supercluster * Dorado o. Hercules Bott Supercluster a4 eS Bootes Supercluster Pavo-Indus = Supercluster Shapley : Centaurus Supercluster sal ile a - « —— Sculptor —~ a \ ] * Void ‘ \ - VIRGO . } i } 3 __ Coma Py Ursa Major / : : ~~ -Supercluster Supercluster” 250 Hydra F Leo} Supercluster Pisces-Perseus Supercluster 0° Sextans Supercluster Columba Supercluster NGC. | 7582 = y yes 315 50 | : | | Fornax Cluster Eridanus Sextans B Cluster Sextans A y y y j LeoA NGC 3109 | Antil Dwali VA t +] 3 . / | Tc 10 \ \ | / nec 5 NGC 25 ti $4 147 Bhi / M110. < | @ Andromeda ) ‘ M32 Triangl LOCAL GROUP. Ten | million light-years away pnenlx Les 3 5 wai is Andromeda, the IC | Aquarius closest to the Earth. 1613) Dwarf Pegasus Dwarf Cetus Dwarf Sagittarius Tucana Irregular Dwarf Dwarf WLM ‘UNIVERSE 9 - - FILAMENTS. From five billion light-years away, the immensity of the cosmos is evident in its galactic filaments, each one home to millions and, millions of galaxies. Virgo IIT Group 180° NGC 6744 LOCAL GROUP NGe = 5033 ae M101 Virgo \ NGC Sculptor f T canis rou. ) ee Maffei } = 3s ter sep hen teames ty - - (ES = Fe ose eS ~E . - ; —_- The Instant of Creation *. oe tis impossible to know precisely how, out of nothing, the universe began té exist. £ Accortiy to the big bang theory—the theory most widely accepted in the scientific community—in the beginning, there appeared an infinitely small and dense burning ball that gave-rise to space, matter, and energy. This ‘happened 13,7 billion years ago. The great, unanswered question i is what caused a ‘small dot: of light—filled with concentrated energy from which matter and antimatter ‘were created—to arise from.nothingness. In very little time, the young universe began to expand and cool. Several cule years later, it gecuired the . ~ form we @ know oo eo TL. eae =!" _ "HOW IT GREW ae ~. Cosmic inflation was ” an expansion of the © ‘entire universe. The ° Earth's galactic ~ neighborhood appears fairly uniform. Everywhere you look, Energetic Radiation The burning ball that gave rise to the universe remained - HOW IT DID . Had the universe not Cosmic Inflation Theory Although big bang theorists understood the universe as originating in an extremely small, hot, and condensed ball, they could not understand the reason for its staggering growth. In 1981, physicist Alan Guth proposed a solution to the problem with his inflationary theory. In an _ extremely short period of time (less than a thousandth of a second), the universe grew more than a trillion trillion trillion times. Near the end of this ~~ period of expansion, the temperature approached absolute zero. Region 1 z Region 3 NOT GROW undergone inflation, it would bea collection of different regions, each with its own particular types of galaxies and each “UNIVERSE 11 WMAP (WILKINSON MICROWAVE ANISOTROPY PROBE) NASA's WMAP project maps the background radiation of the universe. In the image, hotter (red-yellow) regions and colder (blue-green) regions can be observed. WMAP makes it possible to determine the amount of dark matter. _THE SEPARATION OF FORCES Before-the t universe expanded, during a period of radiation, only one unified force governed all physical i jateractions The first distinguishable . '-force was gravity, followed by electromagnetism. * and nuclear interactions. Upon the eevgion ofthe ~~ universe's forces, matter was« created. Gravity Strong nuclear source of permanent radiation. Subatomic particles and antiparticles annihilated each other. The ball's high density spontaneously produced matter and destroyed it. Had this state of affairs continued, the universe would never have undergone the ® growth that scientists believe followed cosmic inflation. Scientists theorize that, front nothing, something infinitely 595 small, dense, and hot appeared All that exists today was © compressed into a ball smalle! the nucleus of an atom. <_ and the background the types of galaxies temperature are ‘ essentially the same. 107° F (and C) At the closest moment to zero time, which physics has 1 been able to reach, the temperature is extremely high. Before the universe's inflation, a superforce governed everything. ELEMENTARY PARTICLES 10”° F (andC) - - The universe is unstable. Only 10-38 seconds after the big bang, the universe increases in size more than a trillion trillion trillion times. The expansion of the universe and the division of its forces begin. clearly distinguishable from the others. 10°° F (and.C) The universe experiences a gigantic cooldown..Gravity has already become distinguishable, and the electromagnetic force and the strong and weak nuclear interactions appear. Protons and neutrons bs appear, formed by three 10”° F (and C) quarks apiece. Because all light is trapped within the web of particles, the universe is still dark. SUPERFORCE. EXPANSION |" The electrons and their antiparticles, positrons, annihilate each other until the positrons disappear. The» remaining electrons form atoms. 9x10°° F (5x10"° C). . Weak:nuclear . Electromagnetism 7 The nuclei of the helium, form. lightest elements, Protons and neutrons unite to 2x10°° F.(1x10°’° C) hydrogen and form the nuclei of atoms. Photon : . Massless elemental e¢ luminous particle Electron ; Negatively charged © elemental particle In its beginnings, the universe was a soup of articles that interacted with each other because of high levels of radiation. Later, as the universe expanded, quarks formed the nuclei of the elements and then joined with electrons to form atoms. . Ay Gluon Responsible for the interactions =a between quarks Graviton Quark It is believed to Light, elemental transmit gravitation. 4 particle © 1 sec FROM PARTICLES TO MATTER The quarks, among the oldest particles, Quark interact with each other by forces transmitted through gluons. Later protons and neutrons will join to form nuclei. Gian c A gluon interacts 3 with a quark. The neutrinos separate from the initial particle soup through the disintegration of neutrons. Though having extremely little mass, the neutrinos might nevertheless form the greatest part of the universe's dark matter. a Neutron Quarks join by means of gluons to form protons and neutrons. neutrons unite to create nuclei. _ S : @) . a “now direct its own destiny. The gaseous lumps that were present in this a: i Gravitation gave shape to the first galaxies some 500 million years after the a “st : - galaxies. One mystery that could not be solved was why galaxies were _be formed at the atomic level. They are the main * components of stars and planets. 12 WHAT IS THE UNIVERSE? The Transparent | Universe With the creation of atoms and ‘overall cooling, the once opaque and dense universe became transparent. Electrons were attracted by the protons of hydrogen and helium nuclei, and together they formed atoms.” Photons (massless particles of light) could now pass freely through the universe. With the cooling, radiation remained abundant but.was no longer the | sole governing factor of the universe. Matter, through gravitational force, could” process grew larger and ‘larger. After 100 million years, they formed eveh . ‘larger objects. Their shapes not yet defined, they constituted protogalaxies. big bang, and the first stars began to shine in the derisest régions‘of these ss + distributed and shaped the way they were. The solution that astronomers have ag: been able to find through indirect evidence is that there exists material called dark matter whose pi seuce oe have played 2 rofe in ‘Galaxy, formation: ee DARK MATTER _The visible objects in the _cosmos represent only a ~ small fraction of the total . matter within the universe. ~ Most of it is invisible even to ” the most. powerful . . _. telescopes. Galaxies and their stars move as they do * because of the gravitational * forces exerted by this ~ material, which astronomers call dark matter. TEMPERATURE 4,900° F (2,700° C) ; 380,000 years after the big . bang, atoms form. Electrons - orbit the nuclei, attracted by -_ the protons. The universe becomes transparent. Photons travel through space. “NUCLEUS 1 Proton FIRST ATOMS Hydrogen and helium were the first elements to y are by far the most abundant. elements in the'tniverse. = Electron Neutron Helium Since the nucleus has two protons, two electrons are attracted to it. Hydrogen An electron is attracted by and orbits the nucleus, which has a proton and a neutron. NUCLEUS 2 . a s = 3 a. - Steere + : F% é , 5 : > . ? p e . i Rated ale EW) First filaments ees ; | Because of the Goedour clea eet __ gravitational pull of dark ~ matter, the gases joined . WERE in the form of filaments. -and dust resulting from the Big Bang formacloud. ~ EVOLUTION OF MATTER What can be observed in the universe today is a great quantity of matter grouped into galaxies. But that was not the original form of the universe. What the big bang initially produced was a cloud of uniformly dispersed gas. Just three million years later, the gas began to organize itself into filaments. Today the universe can be seen as a network of “galactic filaments with enormous voids between them. “405° F(-243°C) ss Galaxies acquire their definitive shape: islands of millions and . inillions of stars and masses of - gases and dust. The stars explode . as supernovas and disperse heavier elements, such as carbon. oe bd Carbon With time, heavier and more complex elements were formed. Carbon, the key to human life, has six protons in its nucleus and six electrons orbiting it. ae +e? a come ne ee "UNIVERSE 13 Filament networks The universe has large-scale filaments * that contain millions and millions of galaxies. : — a oe Elliptical a galaxy en a " ” > * ‘ | * _ . e ‘ ¢ =“35= _ ‘ . ' ” 9.1 billion ™ clay ’ = cluster : - = . THE EARTH IS CREATED. F “ * . ve. Like the rest of the planets, the Earth i ismadeof = : : c material that remained after the formation of the solar i . ; system. The Earth is the only planet known to have life. BOE Sica eee : net ° Nine billion years after the big bang, the solar system «432° F (-258° C) 10 emerged. A mass of gas and dust collapsed until it gave rise to the Sun. Later the planetary system was formed from the leftover material. The universe continues to expand. Countless galaxies -454° F (-270° C) are surrounded by dark matter, which represents 22 percent of the mass and energy in the universe. The ordinary matter, of which stars and planets are made, represents just 4 percent of the total. The predominant form of energy is also of an unknown type. Called dark energy, it °_ constitutes 74 percent of the total mass and energy. : TIMESCALE The vast span of time related to the history of the universe can be readily understood if it is scaled to correspond to a single year—a year that spans the beginning of the universe, the 11:56 P.M. on December 31, and Columbus sets sail on the last second of the last day of the year. One second on this timescale is equivalent to 500 true years. appearance of humans on the Earth, and the voyage of Columbus to America. On January 1 of this imaginary year—at midnight—the big bang takes place. Homo sapiens appears at BIG BANG THE SOLAR COLUMBUS'S occurs on the SYSTEM ARRIVAL: : first second of is created on takes place on the first day of August 24 of the last second the year. this timescale. of December 31. * JANUARY DECEMBER 1 14 WHAT IS THE UNIVERSE? es Beers” Gertie és She Algo ee ee UNIVERSE 15 Everything Comes to auerid. Tees The key discovery that led to the big bang theory was made in the early he big bang theory helped solve the enigma of the early fisnenté of the’ universe. What has ve WO: . 1920s by Edwin Hubble, who be resolved is the mystery surrounding the future that awaits. To unravel this mystery, the total . —__—_—|__Sjsrevarel that adianies. wore moving mass of the universe must be known; but that figure hasnot yet been reliably determined. The ~ -* | _ Gaorge Gamow developed the idea ‘most recent observations have removed some of this uncertainty: It seems that the-mass ‘of the universe leider eked hee —! 3 : sex is far too little to stop its expansion. If this is this case, the universe's present: growth is merely the last. i pce ion eet wend ete crinerte sean eon ea oS a is he eR step before its total death in complete darkness. @ we . Sats ees ek "| which Armo Pezis and Robert Haar Hae wera todovonaate tet “hiling tate eoryunterse ass” tatcane fom anos tenie act | ys ae é ANS ss ; : 2 3 ; - ae Soe hee detected in the galaxies were moving away from each other. “cauldron” of particles. * uniform signal of background radiation. Gravity is not sufficient to bring a * , complete stop to the universe's expansion. = = paren fue The universe” Teyuniversé's Flat Universe ee continuously expansion is . Rin _ expands and ° : unceasing but @ There is a critical amount of mass evolves» ever slower. for which the universe would ~~ ; : expand at a declining rate without: ” ever totally stopping. The result of this eternal expansion would be the existence of an ever-increasing number of galaxies and stars. If the universe were flat, we could . talk about a cosmos born from atrexplosion, but it would bea universe continuing outward forever. It is difficult to think, ‘ about a universe with these characteristics. = Self-yenerated. Universes ; . A less widely accepted theory about — @ the nature of the universe suggests ~~ that universes generate themselves. Tf this is the case, universes would be é created continuously like the branches of a ~ - treé, and they might be linked by supermassive black holes: - The universe bd _ expands indefinitely. ; , ° Aer | Black hole THE HAWKING UNIVERSE oi ; ” : The universe was composed originally of four i : BLACK HOLES . Spatial dimensions without the dimension of . : i— 7. \ a) ee | Open Universe , Some theorists believe time. Since there is no change without time, 4 : After the original | Expansion is” 3 reaches a oti where : The most accepted theory about that, by entering a one of these dimensions, according to Hawking, hk expansion, the con inuo isand — everything grows dark the future of the cosmos says black hole, travel transformed spontaneously on a‘small scale , , iverse grows. Soe Nea ; andi eet eqn ed that the universe possesses a through space to are into a temporal dimension, and the universe BIG BANG t ae a of universal gravitation was a : = S _ to show how all forces are manifestations: a a single type, EE exchange. ° Se | interaction as 6. The'shortcoming of _ foundation for Einstein's theory. 7 “4 f {-—-f—+} } f | i } i—4 \ \ : A — > Ps aad A a? ¢ LE 7. f- y= a L- . 7 y “if 7 - rs f +} ; } / t } - . f | PME, "2 f+ p—? it ALT bs bs ls aS ET | - : ; . - Strong Nuclear Force ae Po fF ts ati / f eal | ‘Ma! ace CRE General Theory of Relativity vee ee oer Fa es q -f: Na Sr > The: biggest contribution fe our r comprehension Oi ae aa iguoear TL workings was madeby Albert Einstein in 1915, Building on Newton's ~~. theory of universal gravitation, Einstein thought of space ; as linked to time. To y CS a Xe NON wa S S The strong nuclear'force holds | the protons and neutrons y : i atomic nuclei together. Both protons and neutrons are \ tak as subject to this force. Gluons are-particles that carry the \ No at Ne x - strong nuclear force,” and they bind. quarks t together to form: SoA — protons and neutrons. Atomic nuclei are held together by | | +f ~ j . rE Newton, gravity was merely the force that attracted two objects, but Einstein Tack re ‘ g \ x hypothesized that it was a consequence of what he cal lled ‘the curvature of space-: an Ne pela < : sresidual ates in ‘the interaction between quarks, “eh ucts time. According to his ‘general theory | of relativity, ‘the universe curves i the fies "S X : < \ i ~ ~ To . aE m3 aN x > b, x 2 es presence ¢ of objects with mass. Gravity, according to this ‘theory, is a di tortion « of a “space | that determires whether one object. rolls toward another. Einstein’ s general 7 ‘Quarks and | gluons. The’strong nuclear interaction Fa s ~ theory of relativity required scientists to consider the universe in terms ofa non- ys 7. i —- . . - : ° . : % - Ee 0 - Euclidian g geometry, since-it is not “compatible with the i a of aflat “s) : a , 4 ] ad po: ‘ os wan . SEAN GE TS takes place veen the gon. 2 ; yA the force that affects _ \ \ Kes een with quarks. . x » %, Supa involved in the y Gas Ty Ty sr: we 4+ |Z In Ejnsteiniay share, Aa pa aga lines can ung mal ; WA Vie ‘es \ fat ta yen Nase \ ‘ ansformations of the : vz SENET Ne et te s elements. The Ne : = : S si ay x 2 we . - aun aA — : ax E a attraction ¢ x pul ion, : Um ae Nee yn a 4 — . x ne . VGeoai . » Nee 1 & Wo orm nuclear‘protons ai ae - Helium increases, and vice versa. Weak. Nuclear Force ae The weak nuclear force is not as strong as the other forces. TI Baka clear interaction influences the beta eases a proton anda ito an electron: This force take fenomena associated with certa HELIUM ISOTOPE R MAGNETISM atoms and molecules, the electromagnetic force is dominant. It is the force that causes the attraction between protons\and electrons in an atom and the - attraction or repulsion between ionized atoms. (WI iP): ‘Aneutrtys bottoi nh quark transfo > Ni ‘i 1 Light also bends because of the curvature of space-time. When seen from a telescope, the real position of an object is distorted. What is perceived through the telescope is a false location, generated by the curvature of the light. It is not possible to see By actual position of the object. \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ . N \ \ Electron The universe is deformed by the/mass of the objects it contains. / The universe, if it were empty, could be pictured in this way. | | , ETA CARINAE NEBULA LUMINOUS THE FINAL DARKNESS s © With a diameter of more than 200 light-years, it is one of biggest and brightest nebulae of our galaxy. STELLAR EVOLUTION ANATOMY OF GALAXIES e This young, supermassive star is expected to become a supernova in the near future. RED, DANGER, AND DEATH ACTIVE GALAXIES GAS SHELLS STELLAR METROPOLIS SUPERNOVAE he universe is populated on a other, triggering the formation of stars. that make up, for example, the Eta without a doubt that most of the atoms grand scale by strands of In the vast cosmos, there are also Carinae Nebula (shown), which is that make up our bodies have been born superclusters surrounding quasars, pulsars, and black holes. composed of jets of hot, fluorescent in the interior of stars. vacant areas. Sometimes the Thanks to current technology, we can gases. Although not all the objects in the galaxies collide with each enjoy the displays of light and shadow universe are known, it can be said WHAT IS IN THE UNIVERSE? Luminous or along time stars were a mystery to humans, and it was only as recently as the 19th century that astronomers began to understand the true nature of stars. Today we know that they are gigantic spheres of incandescent gas—mostly hydrogen, with a smaller proportion of helium. As a star radiates light, astronomers can precisely measure its brightness, color, and temperature. Because of their enormous distance from the Earth, stars beyond the Sun only appear as points of light, and even the most powerful telescopes do not reveal any surface features. Hertzsprung-Russell (H-R) Diagram The H-R diagram plots the intrinsic luminosity of stars against their spectral class, which corresponds to their those with greatest intrinsic luminosity. They include blue stars, red giants, and red supergiants. Stars spend 90 percent More than a million stars are grouped together into a spherical cluster called Omega Centauri. UNIVERSE Measuring Distance When the Earth orbits the Sun, the closest stars appear to move in front of a background of more distant stars. The angle described by the movement of a star in a six-month period of the Earth's rotation is called its parallax. The parallax of the most distant stars are too small to measure. The closer a star is to the Earth, the greater its parallax. The parallax of star B is greater than that of star A, so we see that B is closer to the Earth. Because the parallax of star A is small, we see that it is distant from the Earth. Position of temperature or the wavelengths of light of their lives in what is known as the The Pleiades are a formation of ithe Earth in they emit. The most massive stars are main sequence. some 400 stars that will eventually January move apart. INTRINSIC LUMINOSITY (SUN = 1) Supergiants Red giants Main sequence SUN TYPE 0 52,000-72,000° F (29,000-40,000° C) TYPEB 17,500-52,000° F (9,700-29,000° C) TYPEA 13,000-17,500° F (7.200-9,700° C) r TYPE F ‘ 10,500-13,000° F (5,800-7,200° C) TYPE G 8,500-10,500° F (4,700-5,800° C) ¢ TYPE K Wy) 6,000-8,500° F (3,300-4,700° C) TYPE M 4,000-6,000° F (2,100-3,300° C) SPECTRAL CLASSES Light-years and Parsecs In measuring the great distances between stars, both light-years (ly) and parsecs (pc) are used. A light-year is the distance that light travels in a year— 59 trillion miles (10 trillion km). A light- year is a unit of distance, not time. A parsec is equivalent to the distance between the star and the Earth if the parallax angle is of one second arc. A pc is equal to 3.26 light- years, or 19 trillion miles (31 trillion km). >» Bran Ue SER val COLORS The hottest stars are bluish-white (spectral classes 0, B, and A). The coolest stars are orange, yellow, and red Spectral Analysis The electromagnetic waves that make up light have different wavelengths. When light from a hot object, such as a star, is split into its different wavelengths, a band of colors, or spectrum, is obtained. Patterns of dark lines typically appear in the spectrum of a star. These patterns can be studied to determine the elements that make up the star. Calcium Hydrogen Hydrogen Sodium Hydrogen = Wavelength longest on the red side When a star moves toward or away from an observer, its wavelengths of light shift, a phenomenon called the Doppler effect. If the star is approaching the Earth, the dark lines in its spectrum experience a blueshift. If it moves away from the Earth, the lines experience a redshift. Wavelength is compressed by the movement of the star. Star | Earth (spectral classes G, KX, and M). Se Re. aa Dark lines deviate toward the blue end of the spectrum. SUN ALPHA SIRIUS PROCYON ALTAIR VEGA POLLUX ARCTURUS " : D % eho qtoTH BLUESHIFT of a star moving toward the Earth. (G2) CENTAURI (AO and (F5 and (A7) (AO) (KO giant) (K2 giant) : * , ' (AO giant) (G2, Kl, M5) dwarfstar) dwarf star) é ipa han ane REGULUS. . p MENKALINAN GACRUX ALGOL ( ¢ h (BZ.and KI). (A2 and A2) BM (M4 giant) (B8 and KO) | | ae Sue " : * ; & { | | ° ae | |e ae Sear ee ee | eal | re a | boohdkl SIE O2 6551 G45 GD COG sCoMiog) FON OIN92 69304 Nob OSm OT 98 N99R100 LIGHT-YEARS | | | a ee ee ee i | | 123 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ll 12 BW 1 16 7 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46547 43) (400m ol eoene oe | | | | | | | | | | | | | | ii : ; : iy ag EN en : I ] ] ] ] 2 3 4 5) 6 w 8 9 10 lil ie) 13) 14 ak, 7 Si 3 ene ; . : : sve 25 26 27 28 29 30 22 WHAT IS IN THE UNIVERSE? UNIVERSE 23 SUPERNOVA When the star can no longer fuse any more elements, its core collapses, Stellar Evolution tars are born in nebulae, which are giant clouds of gas (mainly hydrogen) and dust that float in space. Stars can have a life span of millions, or even billions, of years. The biggest stars have the shortest lives, because they consume their nuclear fuel (hydrogen) at a very accelerated rate. Other stars, like the Sun, burn fuel at a slower rate and may live some 10 billion years. Many times, a star's size indicates its age. Smaller stars are the youngest, and bigger stars are approaching their end, either through cooling or by exploding as a supernova. @ RED SUPERGIANT e@ causing a strong emission of energy. The star swells and heats up. e Through nuclear reactions, a heavy core of iron is formed. » \\N a STAR ey A star is finally born. It e fuses hydrogen to form helium and lies along the main sequence. PROTOSTAR A protostar has a e dense, gaseous core surrounded by a cloud of dust. Massive star More than 8 solar masses BLACK HOLE If the star's initial mass is 20 solar masses or more, its e N b | nucleus is denser and it turns into a e ul a black hole, whose gravitational force is extremely strong. NEUTRON STAR If the star's initial mass is between e eight and 20 solar masses, it ends up as a neutron star. A CLOUD OF GAS AND DUST collapses because of gravitational forces. In doing so it heats up and divides into smaller clouds. Each one of these clouds will form a protostar. BLACK DWARF ° If a white dwarf e fades out completely, it Small star becomes a black dwarf. Less than 8 solar masses RED GIANT The star continues to °® 5 expand, but its mass remains e constant and its core heats up. WHITE DWARF Life Cycle of a Star When the star's helium is depleted, The star remains it fuses carbon and oxygen. e@ surrounded by The evolution of a star depends on its mass. The gases and is dim. smallest ones, like the Sun, have relatively long and PROTOSTAR modest lives. Such a star begins to burn helium when its A protostar is formed hydrogen is depleted. In this way, its external layers @ by the separation of gas begin to swell until the star turns into a red giant. It and dust. Gravitational | ends its life as white dwarfs, eventually fading away effects cause its core to f completely, ejecting remaining outer layers, and forming rotate. a planetary nebula. A massive star, because of its higher density, can form elements heavier than helium from its . 95% of stars nuclear reactions. In the final stage of its life, its core wy : collapses and the star explodes. All that remains is a STAR The star shines and PLANE Y NEBULA When layers detach, expelling end their lives as white dwarfs. Other (larger) hyperdense remnant, a neutron star. The most massive slowly consumes its A the star's fuel is depleted, its gases in an expanding shell stars explode as supernovae, illuminating stars end by forming black holes. e@ hydrogen. It begins to fuse ———— e core condenses, and its outer of gases. galaxies for weeks, although their brightness is helium as its size increases. ‘ often obscured by the gases and dust. 24 WHAT IS IN THE UNIVERSE? UNIVERSE 25 43 Red, Danger, and Death, , sm White Dwar Fj Th After going through the red-giant stage, a solar-type star loses its 4 ie scale of the oe : 3 Z , . P N diameter of the Sun outer layers, giving rise to a planetary nebula. In its center remains a hen a star exhausts its hydrogen, it begins to die. The to the diameter of white dwarf—a relatively small, very hot (360,000° F [200,000° C]), dense a typical red giant. star. After cooling for millions of years, it shuts down completely and helium that now makes up the star's core begins to undergo nuclear reactions, and the star remains bright. When the star's helium is depleted, fusion of - ms carbon and oxygen begins, which causes the star's ere + core to contract. The star continues to live, though its © surface layers begin to expand and cool as the star turns into a red giant. Stars similar to the Sun (solar-type stars) follow this process. After billions of years, they end up as (2) white dwarfs. When they are fully extinguished, they will be black dwarfs, invisible in space. becomes a black dwarf. Red Giant f ‘s All stars go through a red-giant from a lack of hydrogen. A supergiant stage. Depending on a star's star (one with an initial mass greater mass, it may collapse or it may simply than eight solar masses) lives a much die enveloped in gaseous layers. The shorter life. Because of the high density core of a red giant is 10 times smaller attained by its core, it eventually than it was originally since it shrinks collapses in on itself and explodes. a WHITE DWARF After the nuclear reaction in the star's o ceases, the star ejects its outer layers, which then forma etary nebula. D Sun realy ee Mercury's ott solar system, it would Venus's orbit swallow up Mars and F ¥ When a white dwarf leaves the Jupiter. ‘_ Earth's orbit q red-giant stage, it occupies the 4 CS —_—_—_—_—__—____———\— Mars's orbit lower-left corner of the H-R a > Vv lense in the star's outer diagram. Its temperature may be > P \¥ later disperse in the form of double that of a typical red giant. The dust acquires a dark ' Ice and is swept into interstellar Red giant. Placed at nee . where new generations of stars will the center of the solar Jupiter's orbit \ fi e outer layer of the star may system, it could reach | \ end across several light-years of only the nearer planets, Saturn's orbit \ such as Mercury, Venus, and the Earth. A massive white dwarf can collapse in on itself and end its life as a neutron star. On leaving the main sequence, size decreases to between 10 and the star enlarges to 200 times 100 times the size of the Sun. the size of the Sun. When the The star then remains stable until star begins to burn helium, its it becomes a white dwarf. Mars Venus When the star exhausts its hydrogen, it leaves the main ’ CARBON AND OXYGEN sequence and burns helium Carbon and oxygen are produced by the fusion of helium within the Earth Mercury Earth r core of the red giant. : as ared giant (ora supergiant). The smallest stars take billions of years to leave the main sequences. 4 | TEMPERATURE , THE FUTURE OF THE SUN The color of a red giant is a As the helium undergoes fusion, Like any typical star, the Sun burns hydrogen brightness and expanding until it swallows : "i the temperature of the core during its main sequence. After taking Mercury. At its maximum size, it may even RED GIANT caused by its relatively cool reaches millions of degrees approximately five billion years to exhaust its envelop the Earth. Once it has stabilized, it will The radius of the surface temperature of Fahrenheit (millions of degrees supply of hydrogen, it will begin its continue as a red giant for two billion years and Sun reaches the 3,600° F (2,000° C). Celsius). transformation into a red giant, doubling in then become a white dwarf. Earth's orbit. WHAT IS IN THE UNIVERSE? UNIVERSE as Shells hen a small star dies, all that remains is an expanding gas shell known as a planetary nebula, which has nothing to do with the planets. In general, planetary nebulae are symmetrical or spherical LIFE CYCLE OF A STAR objects. Although it has not been possible to determine why they exist in such diversity, the reason may be related to the effects of the magnetic field of the 4 dying central star. Viewed through a telescope, several 2) nebulae can be seen to contain a central dwarf star, a mere remnant of its precursor star. @ 3 tons is the weight of a single tablespoon of a white dwarf. A white dwarf is very massive in spite of of gas, resembling the inside of an onion, forma the fact that its 4 multilayered structure around the white dwarf. diameter of 9,300 miles < . Each layer has a mass greater than the combined (or 15,000 km) is The Butterfly Nebula contains mass of all the planets in the solar system. comparable to the a star in addition to a white - dwarf. Each orbits the other Earth's. inside a gas disk that is 10 times larger than Pluto's " orbit. The Butterfly Nebula > The Helix is a is located 2,100 light-years from Earth. . planetary nebula that was created at the end of the life of a » solar-type star. It is Y * 650 light-years from hs. - the Earth and is TWICE THE ” located in the ‘ constellation Aquarius. La gal: OF eT Si is reached at the surface of a Wh ite 4 4 - white dwarf, causing it to appear white even though its Dwart of ; . { luminosity is a thousand times a - The remains of the red less than that of the Sun. ant. in which : fusion of carbon and j oxygen has ceased, lie ' at the center of the nebula. The star slowly cools and fades. oa > The Spi FANEBuIaihy The two rings of colored ee Cy GBS! gas form the silhouette of hot, luminous core that this hourglass-shaped excites nearby atoms, nebula. The red in the ape!) them to glow. The é photograph corresponds to Spirograph Nebula S about 7 nitrogen, and the green 0.1 light-year wide and is “s re corresponds to hydrogen. located 2,000 light-years * This nebula is 8,000 light- from Earth. 2 years from the Earth. “<_< , ' LARGER DIAMETER a 7 . Less massive white dwarf % The continuously expanding Theastrochysicict t ». masses of gas surrounding the Subeaneeiea J _ star contain mostly hydrogen, Chandrasekhar, winner of the i Pe ae a alla Nobel Prize for Physics in ’ , y bi pO uSaee ower 1983, calculated the maximum ‘ pone mass a star could have so that .. SMALLER DIAMETER —_— i it would not eventually collapse More massive white dwarf 4 on itself. If a star's mass exceeds 4 this limit, the star will eventually = explode in a supernova. % A 1.44 SOLAR MASSES The density of a white dwarf is a million The mass of a star is indirectly is the limit Chandrasekhar times greater than the density of water. proportional to its diameter. A white obtained. In excess of this value, In other words, each cubic meter of a dwarf with a diameter 100 times smaller a dwarf star cannot support its white dwarf star weighs a million tons. than the Sun has a mass 70 times greater. own gravity and collapses. 28 WHAT IS IN THE UNIVERSE? Explosion Supemmovae E> in Seek Other Elements « ss \ ‘ se The star's life ends in an immense & Ey ~ te . When a star's iron core upon itself. The resulting 5 explosion. During the weeks 1 i i i f° jj . increases in density to 144 explosion causes the _ + following the explosion, great supernova Is an extraordinary explosion of a giant star at { solar masses, the star can formation of elements that . quantities of energy are radiated i i i i a 7 accumulated in the two visible lobes FUSION { oy ¥ . pos i. 2S Fn as —~ ot absorb the blue light and ultraviolet A The nuclear : 7 a ;: i og , ale ; e % rays emitted from its center. i reactions ina ‘ ’ Wl BEFORE AND AFTER dying star occur : . ; at a faster rate The image at left shows a sector of years from the Earth, depicted before than they do ina the Large Magellanic Cloud, an the explosion of supernova 1987A. The red giant. irregular galaxy located 170,000 light- = image at right shows the supernova. Stellar Remnant When the star explodes as a supernova, it leaves as a legacy in space the heavy elements (such as carbon, oxygen, and iron) that were in the star's nucleus before its collapse. The Crab Nebula (M1) was created by a supernova seen in 1054 by Chinese astronomers. The Crab Nebula is located 6.5 light-years from Earth and has a diameter of six light-years. The star that gave rise to the Crab Nebula may have had an initial mass close to 10 solar masses. In 1969, a ous fila maar re ejected. . pulsar radiating X-rays and rotating 33 times per hessupernova at 620.miles ” second was discovered at the center of the ei (1,000. km) per second. nebula, making the Crab Nebula a very powerful Pe 4% ow source of radiation. ‘ arqgiantT Supergiant The diameter of the star may increase to more than 1,000 ~ times that of the Sun. Through i * nuclear fusion, the star can produce elements even heavier than carbon and oxygen. AMENTS ». oe 30 WHAT IS IN THE UNIVERSE? The Final Darkness he last stage in the evolution of a star's core is its transformation into a very dense, compact stellar body. Its particulars depend upon the amount of mass involved in its collapse. The largest stars become black holes, their density so great that their gravitational forces capture even light. The only way to detect these dead stars is by searching for the effects of their gravitation. e = Black hole LIFE CYCLE OF ; ASTAR ll Neutron star Discovery of Black Holes UNIVERSE 31 Neutron Star 1 | RED GIANT A red giant leaves the main sequence. Its diameter is 100 LOSS OF MASS Toward the end of its life, a neutron star loses more than 90 percent of its Fl When a star's initial mass is between Leg 10 and 20 solar masses, its final mass will be larger than the mass of the Sun. Despite losing great quantities of matter times greater than initial mass. during nuclear reactions, the star finishes the Sun's. with a very dense core. Because of its intense 4. magnetic and gravitational fields, a neutron 2. | DENSE CORE star can end up as a pulsar. A pulsar is a rapidly spinning neutron star that gives off a beam of radio waves or other radiation. As the beam sweeps around the object, the radiation is observed in very regular pulses. The core's exact composition is presently unknown. Most of its interacting particles are neutrons. SUPERGIANT A supergiant grows and rapidly fuses heavier chemical elements, forming carbon, oxygen, and Strong Gravitational | l “Wd Attraction a billion The star's iron core collapses. Protons and electrons The gravitational force of the black hole attracts gases from a neighboring star. This gas forms a large spiral that swirls faster and faster as it gets tons is what one tablespoon of a neutron star would weigh. Its small diameter causes the star to have a FR@h The only way of detecting the presence of Ll a black hole in space is by its effect on neighboring stars. Since the gravitational force exerted by a black hole is so powerful, the gases of nearby stars are absorbed at great speed, spiraling toward the black hole and forming a X-rays. The black hole, by exerting such powerful gravitational force, attracts everything that passes close to it, letting nothing escape. Since even light is not exempt from this phenomenon, black holes are opaque and invisible to even the most advanced telescopes. closer to the black hole. The gravitation field that it generates is so strong that it traps objects that pass close to it. annihilate each other and form neutrons. compact, dense core accompanied by intense gravitational effects. X-RAYS As gases enter the black hole, they are heated and emit X-rays. structure called an accretion disk. The friction Some astronomers believe that of the gases heats them until they shine supermassive black holes might have brightly. The hottest parts of the accretion disk amass of millions, or even may reach 100,000,000° C and are a source of billions, of solar masses. LIGHT RAY: Accretion Disk An accretion disk is a gaseous accumulation of matter that the black hole draws from nearby stars. In the regions of the disk very close to the black hole, X-rays are emitted. The gas that accumulates rotates at very high speeds. When the gases from other stars collide with the disk, they create bright, hot spots. Total escape Rays of light that pass'far from the center of a black - hole*continue ’ ; unaffected. Close to the limit Since the rays of light have not crossed the event horizon, they still'retain their brightness. Darkness Rays of light that pass close to the core of a\black hole are trapped. CROSS SECTION ACCRETION DISK BLACK HOLE Bright gases Since the accretion disk is fed by gases spinning at high speed, it shines intensely in the region closest to its core but at its edges is colder and darker. #4, © Pulsars FR The first pulsar (a neutron star radiating Ll radio waves) was discovered in 1967. Pulsars rotate approximately 30 times per second and have very intense magnetic fields. Pulsars emit radio waves from their two magnetic poles when they rotate. If a pulsar absorbs gas from a neighboring star, a hot spot that radiates X-rays is produced on the pulsar's surface. CURVED SPACE The theory of relativity suggests depth of which depends on the that gravity is not a force but a mass of the object. Objects are distortion of space. This distortion attracted to other objects through creates a gravitational well, the the curvature of space. ane THE SUN forms a shallow gravitational well. STRUCTURE OF A PULSAR Rotation axi: A WHITE DWARF generates a deeper gravitational well, drawing in objects at a higher speed. A NEUTRON STAR attracts objects at speeds approaching half the speed of light. The gravitational well is even more pronounced. ENTRANCE BLACK HOLE The objects that approach the black hole too closely are swallowed by it. The black hole's gravitational well is infinite and traps matter and light forever. The event horizon describes the limit of what is, and is not, absorbed. Any object that crosses the event horizon follows a spiral path into the gravitational well. Some scientists believe in the existence of so- called wormholes—antigravity tunnels, through which travel across the universe is hypothesized to be possible. By taking advantage of the curvature of space, scientists think it could be possible to travel from the Earth to the Moon in a matter of seconds. WORMHOLE f Devouring gas fro a supergiant 32 WHAT IS IN THE UNIVERSE? Anatomy of Gal alaxies are rotating groups of stars, gas, and dust. More than 200 years ago, philosopher Immanuel Kant postulated that nebulae were island-universes of distant stars. Even though astronomers now know that galaxies are held together by gravitational force, they. have not been able to decipher what reasons might be behind galaxies' many shapes. The various types of galaxies range from ovals of old stars to spirals with arms of young stars and bright gases. The center of a galaxy has the greatest accumulation of stars. The Milky Way Galaxy is now Known to be so big that rays of light, which travel at 186,000 miles (300,000 km) per second, take 100,000 years to cross from one end to the other. e Star Cities The first galaxies formed 100 million years after the big bang. Billions of these great conglomerates of stars can be found throughout space. The two most important discoveries concerning galaxies are attributed to the * astronomer Edwin Hubble. In 1926, he pointed out that the Spots, or patches, of light visible in the COLLISION 300 million light-years from the Earth, these* two colliding galaxies form a pair. Together they are called “The Mice” for the large tail of stars emanating from each galaxy. With time, these galaxies will fuse into a single, larger one. It is believed that in the future the . universe will consist of a few giant stars. NGCU6T6 night sky were actually distant galaxies discovery put an end to the view held l at the time that the Milky Way constituted the _ universe. In.1929, as a result of various observations fad 1.2 BILLION YEARS ago, the Antennae (NGC 4038 and NGC 4039) were two separate spiral galaxies. indicated the Milky 300 MILLION YEARS later, the galaxies collided at great speed. MILKY WAY . Seen from its side, the Milky Way looks like a flattened disk, swollen at the center. Around the disk is a spherical region, called a halo, containing dark matter and globular clusters of stars. From June to September, the Milky Way is especially bright, something that would make it more visible viewed from above than from the side. UNIVERSE 33 NGCSABS HERCULES, rm I CLASSIFYING GALAXIES ACCORDING TO HUBBLE ELLIPTICAL These galaxies are elliptical in shape and have little dust and gas. Their masses fall within a wide range. SUBCLASSIFICATIONS Ca oe EO E3 E5 E7 SPIRAL Ina spiral galaxy, a nucleus of old stars is surrounded by a flat disk of stars and two or more spiral arms. SUBCLASSIFICATIONS Galaxies are subdivided into different categories according to their tendency toward round shape (in the case of elliptical galaxies), as well as by the presence of an axis and the length of their arms (in the case of spiral a * a Suis é i -> Ph “a IRREGULAR . ; | - | Irregular galaxies have no defined shape and cannot be classified. They contain a large amount of gases and dust clouds. and barred spiral galaxies). An EO galaxy is elliptical but almost circular, and an E7 galaxy is a flattened oval. An Sa galaxy has a large central axis and coiled arms, and an Sc galaxy has a thinner axis and more extended arms. Galactic Clusters Galaxies are objects that tend to form groups or clusters. Acting in response to gravitational force, they can form clusters of galaxies of anywhere from two to thousands of galaxies. These clusters have various shapes and are thought to expand when they join together. The Hercules cluster, shown here, was discovered by Edmond Halley in 1714 and is located approximately 25,100 light-years from Earth. Each dot represents a galaxy that includes billions of stars. at Ing in can collide and ae 300 MILLION _ YEARS go by until the collision takes place and the shapes of the galaxies are distorted. ~ merge. When two galaxies collide, they can distort each other in various ways. Over time, there are fewer and fewer galaxies. Some galaxies exhibit very peculiar 300 MILLION YEARS later, the stars in the spiral arms are expelled from both galaxies. shapes. The Sombrero Galaxy, shown in the center of the page, has a bright white core surrounded by thin spiral arms. lage 37 ¢ NOW x two jets of expelled stars stretch far froni the original galaxies. 34 WHAT IS IN THE UNIVERSE? UNIVERSE 35 Galaxy Formation FI A theory of galaxy formation La associated with active galaxies holds that many galaxies, possibly including the Milky Way, were formed from the gradual calming of aquasar _ today. In 1994, astronomers studying , at their core. As the surrounding the center of the Milky Way ’ QUASARS The most gases consolidated in the formation of discovered a region that may contain powerful objects in the stars, the quasars, having no more a black hole and could be left over universe, quasars are so distant gases to absorb, lost their energetic from early galactic activity. Active Galaxies CLASSIICATION upon its distance from Earth and the perspective from which it is seen. Quasars, radio galaxies, and blazars are members of the same family of objects and differ only in the way they are perceived. fury and became inactive. According to this theory, there is a natural progression from quasars to active galaxies to the common galaxies of small number of galaxies differ from the rest by emitting high amounts of energy. The energy emission might be caused by the presence of black holes in -— its core that were formed through the gravitational collapse accompanying the hi death of supermassive stars. During their first billion years, the galaxies might have accumulated surrounding gaseous disks with their corresponding emissions of radiation. It from Earth that they appear to us is possible that the cores of the first galaxies are the quasars that are now observed at very HA Frias ttiance anne great distances. @ “4 oe Gaseous clouds appeared from the gravitational collapse of immense masses of gas during the early stages of the universe. Later, in the clouds' interior, stars began to form. RADIO GALAXIES Radio galaxies are the largest objects in the universe. Jets of gases come out from their centers that extend thousands of light-years. The cores of radio galaxies cannot be seen. = As two jets are expelled from the core, radio waves are emitted. If the waves collide with clouds of intergalactic gas, they swell and form gigantic clouds that Energetic Activity Fl Astronomers believe that active galaxies are LL a direct legacy from the beginning of the universe. After the big bang, these galaxies would have retained very energetic levels of radiation. Quasars, the brightest and most ancient objects in born from a supermassive black hole with a quasar that became inactive as stars formed and it was left without gas to feed it. This process of formation might be common to many galaxies. Today quasars represent the INCREAS PENTRAL R NITRAL The core of an active galaxy is obscured by a ring of dust and gas that is dark on the outside and bright within. MILLION DEGREES , It is a powerful Celsius is the temperature that the A“ source of core of a black hole can reach. energy. f Gravitational force begins to unite vast quantities of hot, gaseous clouds. The clouds attract one another and collide, forming stars. A large amount of gas accumulates at the center of the galaxy, intensifying gravitational forces until a massive black hole comes into being in the galaxy's core. can emit radio waves or X-rays. len me The quasar in the core ejects two jets of particles that reach speeds approaching the speed of light. The quasar stage is thought to have been the most violent stage in the formation of galaxies. The gases and stars arising from the jets are introduced as spirals into the black hole, forming a type of accretion disk known as a quasar. the universe, make up the core of this type of galaxy. In some cases, they emit X-rays or radio waves. The existence of this high-energy activity helps support the theory that galaxies could be limit of what it is possible to see, even with specialized telescopes. Quasars are small, dense, and bright. 3) Black Hole A black hole swallows the gas that begins to surround it. A hot, gaseous spiral forms, emitting high-speed jets. The magnetic field pours charged particles into the region around the black hole, and the exterior of the disk absorbs interstellar gas. BLAZARS Blazars may be active galaxies with jets of gas that are aimed directly toward Earth. The brightness of a blazar_ varies from day to day. The center of the black hole radiates charged particles. 100 Formed by interstellar gas and star remnants, the accretion disk can radiate X-rays because of the extreme temperature of its center. PARTICLES ejected from the black hole have intense magnetic fields. The jets of particles travel at speeds approaching the speed of light when they leave the core. GRAVITY Dark clouds of gas and dust on the outer edge of a black hole are gradually swallowed up. As the gases move inward, their temperature Thestrong increases. | gravitational force of the disk attracts and destroys stars. aww aAYy Nine billion years after its formation, with a supermassive black hole at its core, the galaxy drastically slows its energetic activity, forming a low- energy core. The stabilization of the galaxy allowed the formation of stars and other heavenly bodies. 36 WHAT IS IN THE UNIVERSE? UNIVERSE 37 e = Large Central Region HOT eular eCLrOPpOUS co Because the Mik Way iu of clos of st and rock deere el rake ar particles, its center cannot be seen from outside the galaxy. central region may be the is not absorbed by : The Milky Way's center can be seen only through telescopes result of violent explosions the black hole. Most that record infrared light, radio waves, or X-rays, which can in thovacerationtdick of them are young, pass through the material that blocks visible light. The central axis of the Milky Way contains ancient stars, some 14 : billion years old, and exhibits intense activity within its interior, where two clouds of hot gas have been found: or a long time, our galaxy (called the Milky Way because of its resemblance to a stream of milk in the night sky) was a Many astronomers bel ve that a black hole occupies the true enigma. It Was Galileo Galilei who, in 1610, first pointed Sagittarius A and B. In the central region, but outside the center of the Milky Way. Its a telescope at the Milky Way and saw that the weak whitish strip Peay a. TSU ee THis# Goble aPe soi with le stil ar tie fre was composed of thousands and thousands of stars that appeared Mee Tangle Re Wie We TGR Coats Inge eee orbit around it to almost touch each other. Little by little, astronomers began to Galaxy this region are cold and range in color from red to orange. realize that all these stars, like our own Sun, were part of the enormous ensemble—the galaxy that is our stellar metropolis. lark cloud in The center o he Milky The larges the central region of the Way is surrounded by Milky Way, Sagittarius B2 strong magnetic fields, contains enough alcohol to perhaps from a rotating ? A cover the entire Earth. black hole. Ns 1 outward because of forces in the Structure of the Milky Way Sagittarius A region. Because the The Milky W taini than 100 billi t hast iral ROTATION ; ; gas rotates at high speed but le Milky Way, containing more than MlOn Stars, Nas:tWo Spiral arms The speeds of the rotation of the various parts of the remains concentrated, it could be rotating around its core. The Sagittarius arm, located between the Orion arm Milky Way vary according to those parts’ distances from trapped by gravitational forces and the center of the Milky Way, holds one of the most luminous stars in the galaxy, the core of the galaxy. The greatest number of stars is exerted by a black hole. Eta Carinae. The Perseus arm, the main outer arm of the Milky Way, contains young concentrated in the region between the Milky Way's core and its border. Here the speed of rotation is much stars and nebulae. The Orion arm, extending between Perseus and Sagittarius, greater because of the attraction that the objects in this houses the solar system within its inner border. The Orion arm of the Milky region feel from the billions of stars within it, Way is a veritable star factory, where gaseous interstellar material can give birth to The Exact Center The core of the Milky Way galaxy is marked galaxy. The speed of its rotation is an piliggs olliar remnants 0 by very intense radio-wave activity that indication of the powerful gravitational stars Can also be found : 3 sg ~ ai might be produced by an accretion disk force exerted from the center of the Milky within it. 2 = made up of incandescent gas surrounding a Way, a force stronger than would be A oe ‘, - © =“. etn — ——— 7 massive black hole. The region of Sagittarius — produced by the stars located in the region. * ey oe A, discovered in 1994, is a gas ring that The hot, blue stars that shine in the center f° rotates at very high speed, swirling within of the Milky Way may have been born from several light-years of the center of the gas not yet absorbed by the black hole. z . > 1 oe A Diverse Galaxy Central protuberance The brightest portion of the Milky Way the Milky Way seem truly dark. The objects that that appears in photographs taken with can be found in the Milky Way are not all of one ou G optical lenses (using visible light) is in the type. Some, such as those known as the halo A ring of dark clouds of dust and constellation Sagittarius, which appears to lie in —_ population, are old and are distributed within a Semmgecules that is expanding as a the direction of the center of the Milky Way. The — sphere around the galaxy. Other objects form a ¥esult of a giant explosion. It is ‘ : 5 : . spected that a small object in bright band in the nighttime sky is made up of more flattened structure called the disk e central region of the Milky stars so numerous that it is almost impossible to _ population. In the spiral arm population, we find Way might be its source. count them. In some cases, stars are obscured the youngest objects in the Milky Way. In these by dense dust clouds that make some regions of arms, gas and interstellar dust abound. ¥ 240° : THE MILKY WAY IN VISIBLE LIGHT : Eta THE CONSTELLATION DARK REGIONS Eagle Ae ¢ Carinae ‘ SAGITTARIUS Dark regions are Nebula 7 Close to the center of produced by dense "4 S the Milky Way, clouds that obscure " 2 - A Sagittarius shines the light “ft 6. 4 ue ‘ : Aud intensely. of stars. he os - 7 . a 4 —— rion = * = 4 _ »% ¥ Nebula “a 210° STARS “ . rs = 1 So many stars compose the Milky Way that it is impossible for us to distinguish them all. = = _s 5 ° ae ' “ . rlisaeoee “a =. - >. LIGHT-YEARS 7 The 2 ‘ F F SECTORS The diameter of the Milky Way is Many different Crab * = large in comparison with other sectors make up the Nebula galaxies but not gigantic. Milky Way. 2 oe | ee i a OLYMPUS MONS, ON MARS ATTRACTED BY A STAR JUPITER, GAS GIANT PLUTO: NOW A DWARF Olympus Mons is the largest volcano of the solar system. It A VERY WARM HEART THE LORD OF THE RINGS DISTANT WORLDS is about two-and-a-half times as high as Mount Everest. MERCURY, AN INFERNO URANUS WITHOUT SECRETS CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS: ASTEROIDS AND METEORITES VENUS, OUR NEIGHBOR NEPTUNE: DEEP BLUE THOSE WITH A TAIL RED AND FASCINATING a tins mong the millions and Sun. To ancient peoples, the Sun was a around it, make up the solar system, the most explored planet. Here we see a millions of stars that form the god; to us, it is the central source of which formed about 4.6 billion years ago. photo of Olympus Mons, the largest Milky Way galaxy, there is a energy that generates heat, helping life The planets that rotate around it do not volcano in the entire solar system. It is medium-sized one located in exist. This star, together with the planets produce their own light. Instead, they almost two-and-a-half times as high as the one of the galaxy's arms—the and other bodies that spin in orbits reflect sunlight. After the Earth, Mars is tallest peak on the Earth, Mount Everest. 40 THE SOLAR SYSTEM UNIVERSE 41 Attracted by a Star lanets and their satellites, asteroids and other rocky objects, and an incalculable number of cometlike objects, some more than 1 trillion miles (1.6 trillion km) from the Sun, make up the solar system. In the 17th century, astronomer Johannes Kepler proposed a model to interpret the dynamic properties of the bodies of the solar system. According to this Outer Planets fies Planets located outside the asteroid belt. They are enormous gas spheres with small solid cores. They have very low temperatures because of their great distance from the Sun. The presence of ring systems is exclusive to these planets. The greatest of them is Jupiter: 1,300 Earths could fit inside of it. Its mass is 2.5 times as great as that of the rest of the planets combined. NEPTUNE DIAMETER 30,775 MILES (49,528 KM) MOONS 13 J) . Triton Proteus Nereid DIAMETER 31,763 MILES (51,118 KM) MOONS 27 . . . . Titania. Oberon Umbriel Ariel Miranda Puck DIAMETER 74,898 MILES (120,536 KM) MOONS 50+ e . . . Titan Rhea Tapetus Tethys DIAMETER 88,846 MILES (142,984 KM) MOONS 60+ & by rs Ganymede Callisto To Europa Asteroid Belt oe The border between the outer and inner planets is marked by millions of rocky fragments of various sizes that form a band called the asteroid belt. Their orbits are influenced by the gravitational pull exerted on them by the giant planet Jupiter. This effect also keeps them from merging and forming a planet. interpretation, the planets complete elliptical trajectories, called orbits, around the Sun. In every case, the movement is produced by the influence of the gravitational field of the Sun. Today, as part of a rapidly developing field of astronomy, it is known that planet or planetlike bodies also orbit other stars. ORBITS In general, the planets orbit in one common plane called the elliptic. Phobos Deimos MARS 2 : DIAMETER 4,217 MILES (6,786 KM) ’ MOONS 2 Inner Planets EARTH Planets located inside the asteroid o MOON [ A ie belt. They are solid bodies in which / DIAMETER 7,926 MILES internal geologic phenomena, such as (12,756 KM) volcanism, which can modify their surfaces, MOONS 1 are produced. Almost all of them have an % appreciable atmosphere of some degree of VENUS =~ 25 MERCURY thickness, according to individual circumstances, which plays a key role in DIAMETER 7,520 MILES DIAMETER 3,031 MILES the surface temperatures of each planet. (12,103 KM) (4,878 KM) MOONS 0 MOONS (0) _ ~ revolve in their orbits much faster than thse farther from it. S Earth's Venus's Mercury's Mars's Main orbit orbit orbit orbit belt =| ‘ ( — Wey ae, yo) ne erg pe / Jupiter's Saturn's Uranus's Neptune's orbit orbit orbit orbit The rotation of most planets around their own axes is in counterclockwise direction. Venus and Uranus, however, revolve clockwise. BUILDING PLANETS Early ideas suggested that the planets formed gradually, beginning with the binding of hot dust particles. Today scientists suggest that the planets originated from the collision and melding of larger-sized bodies called planetesimals. ORIGIN Remains from the formation of the Sun created a disk of gas and dust around it, from which the planetesimals formed. COLLISION Through collisions among themselves, planetesimals of different sizes joined together to become more massive objects. HEAT The collisions produced a large amount of heat that accumulated in the interior of the planets, according to their distance from the Sun. SOLAR GRAVITY The gravitational pull of the Sun upon the planets not only keeps them inside —_— the solar system but also influences the speed with which ~ they revolve in their ——_—— orbits around the Sun. Those closest to the Sun — y/ 42 THE SOLAR SYSTEM he Sun at the center of the solar system is a source of light ——— heat. This energy is produced by the fusion of atomic hydrogen nuclei, which generate helium nuclei. The energy that emanates from the Sun travels through space and initially encounters the bodies that populate the solar system. The Sun shines thanks to thermonuclear fusion, and it will continue to shine until its supply of hydrogen runs out in about six or seven billion years. Very Gassy oes The Sun is a giant ball of gases with very high density and temperature. Its main components are hydrogen (90%) and helium (9%). The balance of its mass is made up of trace elements, such as carbon, nitrogen, and oxygen, among others. Because of the conditions of extreme temperature and pressure on the Sun, these elements are ina plasma state. — : . Positron CHARACTERISTICS CONVECTIVE ZONE ° ret ; extends from the base of the CONVENTIONAL °* + photosphere down to a depth of PLANET 15 percent of the solar radius. SYMBOL . Here energy is transported up . : toward the surface by gas 2 = . currents (through convection). ESSENTIAL DATA . Average distance 93 million miles . : from Earth (150 millionkm) : . Equatorial 864,000 miles ‘ oF diameter - (1,391,000 km) RADIATIV E ZONE 5 . = . : This portion of the Sunis , Orbital 7,456 miles per. traversed by particles coming speed x second (12,000 km/s) from the core. A proton can take Mass* - 332,900 _ a million years to cross this zone. Gravity* =e 28 : Density ‘0-81 ounce per cubic _ inch (1.4 g per cucm) - J Average 9,932° F | * * \ temperature (5,500° C) ; x 8 ‘ Atmosphere *_. Dense Moons : None ° *In both cases, Earth = 1 3 : i , NUCLEAR FUSION OF HYDROGEN The extraordinary temperature of the nuclear core helps the hydrogen nuclei join. Under conditions of lower energy, they repel each other, ; but the conditions at the center of . the Sun cari overcome the repulsive . forces, and nuclear fusion occurs. «For every four hydrogen nuclei, a series of nuclear reactions produce one helium nucleus. HELIUM NUCLEUS Deuterium 2 HELIUM NUCLEI The group of two protons and a neutron collides with another such group. A . *» helium nucleus forms, and a 2 J pair of protons is released. ¢ » Proton 1 PHOTONS ~ The deuterium formed . 4 collides with a proton. ae UNIVERSE 43 - Surface and Atmosphere > The visible portion of the Sun is a sphere of light, or photosphere, made of boiling gases emanating from the solar core. The gas flares form plasma, which passes through this layer. Later the — a es = as iit SL ESS ee a i] SY = —— eee eee se ee eee cca a en a eee ea | toward its outermost region. Above the photosphere lies the solar atmosphere—the chromosphere and the corona. The energy generated at the core moves through the surface of gas flares enter a vast gas layer called the solar atmosphere. The density of this layer decreases : _ PHOTOSPHERE e visible surface of the Sun, a boili ‘is thick with gases in a plasma sta uppermost layer, its density decre transparency increases, and he escapes from the Sun as light. The Spectrographic study of this layer has al scientists to confirm that the main components of e@ | the Siirere hydrogen and helium. ) 10,112° F (6j600° CH ys - 1 CORE ae ; . The core occupies only 2 percent \ of the total volume of the Sun, but in it is concentrated about i) half the total mass of the Sun. The great pressures and ; temperatures in the core produc ‘ thermonuclear fusion. > »* = . : 27,000,000° F (15,000,000° C) —_—*_ CHROMOSPHERE f @— sPICULES i rar oy MACROSPICULES @— CORONA the photosphere and solar atmosphere for thousands of years in search of an exit into space. SUNSPOTS are regions of gases that are generally colder (7,232° F [4,000° C]) than the photosphere (10,112° F [5,600° C)). For that reason, they appear dark. PENUMBRA ‘ Peripheral region. It is the hottest and brightest part of the Sun. UMBRA Central region. It is the coldest and darkest . part. Above the photosphere, and of less density, '» lies the chromosphere, a layer 3,110 miles (5,000 kinJ thick. Its temperature ranges frdm 8,100° F (4,500° C) to 900,000° F . (500,000° C) with increasing altitude. The Sais Jv temperature of the corona can reach MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE 1,800,000° F (1,000,090° C). OF THE CHROMOSPHERE Vertical jets of gasethat spew from the chromosphére, ysually * reaching 6,200 miles (10,000 km) in height. They originate in upper convection cell and can rise as high as.the corona. 2 This type of vertical eruption is similar to a * .. spicule, but it usually reaches up to 25,000 miles (40,000 km) in height. Located above the chromosphere, it extends: . millions of miles into space and O reaches temperatures nearing © * * 1 ) 800 000 F 1,800,000° F (1,000,000° €). . * 5 nO Tt has some holes, or low- (1,000,000 C) . density regions, throtigh which Bg ; gases flow into the’solar wind. THE TEMPERATURE IN THE CORONA SOLAR WIND Consists of a flux of ions emitted by the solar atmosphere. The composition is similar to that of the corona. The Sun loses approximately 1,800 pounds (800 kg) of matter per second in the form of solar wind. 0 " This collision releases one photon and gamma rays. - * The high-energy photon e tea e.. needs 30,000 years to e are ; : von f reach the photosphere. LAR PROMINEN ; pncsosP ‘Clouds and layers of gas from _ - the chromosphere travel thousands of miles until they - a reach the corona, where the influence of magnetic fields ~ -~ causes them to take on the ~ shape of an arc or wave. | _ @—— SOLAR FLARES : e - These eruptions come out of the solar a , _ atmosphere and can interfere with radio : Proton 2 4 U - communications on Earth. * e . © = ‘ = : = 44 THE SOLAR SYSTEM UNIVERSE 45 ercury is the planet nearest to the Sun and is therefore the one that has to withstand the harshest of the Sun's effects. Due to its proximity to the Sun, Mercury moves at great speed in its solar orbit, completing an orbit every 88 days. It has almost no - atmosphere, and its surface is dry and rugged, covered with craters caused by the impact of numerous meteorites; this makes it resemble the Moon. Numerous faults, formed during the cooling of the planet when it was young, are also visible on the surface. Constantly baked by its neighbor, the Sun, Mercury has an average surface temperature of 333° F (167° C). @ _| A Scar-Covered Surface The surface of Mercury is very similar to that of the Moon. It is possible to find craters of varying sizes. The largest one has a diameter of some 810 miles (1,300 km). There are also hills and valleys. In 1991, radio telescopes were able to detect possible evidence of the presence of frozen water in Mercury's polar regions, information that Mariner 10 had been unable to gather. Mariner 10, the only mission sent to Mercury, flew by the planet three times between 1974 and 1975. The polar ice was found at the bottom of very deep craters, which limit the ice's exposure to the Sun's rays. The spacecraft Messenger, launched in 2004, is scheduled to orbit the’planet Mercury in 2011 and is expected to provide new information about Mercury's surface and magnetic field. ; | , CALORIS CRATER - ot — - OC) The largest impact crater in the solar system, it has a diameter - of 810 miles (1,300 km): s | The crater © | F Solar orbit 224 days ATMOSPHERE 2 MANTLE CORE (Venusian year), 17 hours Venus's glowing appearance * 5O | } ) ile tS) Made of molten rock, it It is believed that Venus's core is Equatorial Z 7,520 miles is caused by the planet's thick, ‘ constitutes most of the similar to the Earth's, containing diameter * (12,100 km) suffocating atmosphere, (80 km) planet. It traps the solar metallic elements (iron and _which is made up of carbon radiation and is between nickel) and silicates. Venus has no VENUS'S PHASES As Venus revolves around the Sun, its solar illumination varies - as is seen from the Earth depending upon its position in relation to the Sun and the Earth. Thus Venus has phases similar to the Moon's. During its elongations, when Venus is farthest from the Sun inthe sky, Venus appears at its brightest. The surface of Venus is rocky and dry. Most of the planet is formed by volcanjc plains and other, elevated regions. Orbital d 22 mil (ls Ss ; : : foeat hee vase Pte dioxide and sulfuric clouds IS THE THICKNESS OF 37 and 62 miles (60 and magnetic field—possibly because that reflect sunlight. THE ATMOSPHERE. 100 km) thick. of its slow axial rotation. Mass* 0.8 Gravity* ; 09 . ey a = Density 3.03 ounces per cubic : ; inch (5.25 g/cu cm) Carbon Nitrogen and ; ne Average temperature 860° F (460° C) dioxide eae = if a O) « Atmosphere Very thick - i Moons None *Tieboth cases, Earth = 1 . AXIS INCLINATION 117° Rotates on its own axis every 243 days GREENHOUSE EFFECT Only 20 percent of the Sun's light reaches the surface of Venus. The thick clouds of dust, sulfuric acid, and carbon dioxide that constitute Venus's atmosphere reflect the remaining light, leaving Venus in permanent darkness. SOLAR RADIATION Venus is kept hot by its thick SULFURIC atmosphere, which retains the ACID energy of the Sun's rays. 864° F (0) Venus lacks water. A U.S. e (462 C) robot probe sent to Venus in ered - 1978 found some evidence Hy ee : ! that water vapor could have ee a Is ' » The surface of Venus radiates existed in the atmosphere thic Ge than the Earth's crust. hundreds of millions of years ago, but today no trace of water remains. infrared radiation. Only 20 percent of the Sun's rays pass through Venus's thick clouds of sulfuric acid. UNIVERSE 47 = ~~ soe ww eee eZ qe ne re - aio _ aoe ~~ VENUS'S PHASES oy WAXING rest WAXING WANING LAST me WANING CRESCENT QUARTER AS SEEN FROM GIBBOUS GIBBOUS QUARTER CRESCENT EARTH THE NEW AND FULL o PHASES ARE NOT : VISIBLE FROM EARTH. Surface Ny > The Venusian surface has not remained the same throughout its life. The : current one is some 500 million years old, but the rocky landscape visible A . today was formed'by intense volcanic activity. Volcanic rock covers 85: percent of the planet. The entire planet is crisscrossed by vast plains and enormous rivers of lava, as Well asa number of mountains. The lava flows have created a great number of grooves, some of whieh — are very wide. The brightness of Venus's:surface is the result of . metallic compounds. ° 8 AY MAGELLAN [ ¥, Venus was’exjilored by the } Magellan spacecraft ‘ et between 1990 and 1994. The % 5 “probe was equipped with a radar system to observe the surface through its dense atmosphere. ISHTAR TERRA One of the raised eee of Venus, it is similar in size to Australia and is located close to Venus's north pole. It has four main rocky mountain ranges called Maxwell Montes, Freyja Montes, Akna Montes, and Dam Montes. APHRODITE TERRA Larger than Ishtar Terra, it is the size of South America. Aphrodite Terra : lies near the equator and consists mostly of mountainous regions to the east and west, which are separated by a low-lying region. 48 THE SOLAR SYSTEM si 1 Boe Zs ¥ ——_— UNIVERSE 49 Red and Fascinating ars is the fourth planet from the Sun. Of all the planets, Mars most closely resembles the Earth. It has polar ice caps, and the tilt of its axis, FX period of rotation, and internal structure are similar to those of the Earth. Known as the "Red Planet because of the reddish iron oxide that covers its surface, Mars has a thin atmosphere ‘composed essentially of carbon dioxide. Mars does not have water, though it did in the past, and there is evidence some water might exist underground. Many spacecraft have been sent to explore Mars, in part because it is the planet other than Earth most likely to have developed some form of life, and it will probably be the first planet humans leave the Earth to visit. Surface fee It is a place of geologic extremes, shaped by volcanic activity, meteorite bombardment, windstorms, and floods (though there is little or no water on Mars today). Mountains dominate the southern hemisphere, but lowlands are common in the northern hemisphere. MANTLE It is made of molten rock of greater density than the Earth's mantle. Martian Orbit Composition Because Mars's orbit is more a oles Mars, a rocky planet, has an iron-rich core. Mars elliptical than that of Earth, j e uae aS IN WINTER is almost half the size of the Earth and has a Mars's distance from the Sun varies é \ similar period of rotation, as well as clearly evident widely. At its perihelion, or closest clouds, winds, and other weather phenomena. Its thin approach to the Sun, Mars receives atmosphere is made up of carbon dioxide, and its red 45 percent more solar radiation than color comes from its soil, which is rich in iron oxide. _ at its aphelion, or farthest point. Temperatures on Mars range from -220° F to 62° F (-140° C to 17° C). EARTH sun - +} MARS coRE ———_—_—_@ Small and likely composed of iron IN SUMMER CRUST is thin and made up of solid rock. It is 31 miles (50 km) thick. Moons Mars has two moons, Phobos and Deimos. Both have a lower density than Mars and are pitted with craters. Phobos has a diameter of 17 miles (27 km), and Deimos has a.diameter of nine miles (15 km). Deimos orbits Mars in 30 hours*at an altitude of 14,627 miles (23,540 km), and Phobos orbits Mars in eight hours at an altitude of 5,840 miles (9,400 km). Astronomers believe that the moons are asteroids that were captured by Mars's gravity. DEIMOS PHOED ATMOSPHERE Thin and continuously ~ thinning as solar winds DIAMETER 9 MILES (15 KM) DIAMETER DISTANCE 14,627 MILES DISTANCE 5,840 FROM MARS (9,400 FROM MARS (23,540 KM). Carbon dioxide Nitrogen MISSIONS TO MARS After our own Moon, Mars has been a more attractive target for exploratory missions than any other object in the solar system. Oxygen, carbon monoxide, water vapor, and other gases 2.1% 1997 1965 1969 A 1971 1973 1976 1997 The first mission sent i studied the photographed the searched for traces of life. was took more to Mars, it made only southern hemisphere Olympus volcano Russian spacecraft They were the first spacecraft the third successful than 100,000 photos brief flyovers. and equator of Mars. for the first time. successfully sent to Mars to land on Martian soil. ‘Mars landing. of the planet. ee eee 29,000 FEET Olympus Mons 5 ols LLacus 2001 : 2003 2004 mapped the mineralogy _ Orbiting probe. First and morphology of spacecraft sent by the surveyed many square Mars's surface. European Space Agency. miles of the surface. (8,848 METERS) This gigantic, inactive volcano is not only the largest on Mars but also in the solar system. OLYMPUS 72,200 FEET (22,000 METERS) VALLES MARINERIS The canyon system of the Valles Marineris was likely caused naturally, primarily by water erosion. CHARACTERISTICS CONVENTIONAL PLANET SYMBOL ESSENTIAL DATA Average 141,600,000 distance from miles the Sun (227,900,000 km) Solar orbit 1.88 years (Martian year) Equatorial 4,222 miles diameter (6,794 km) Orbital 15 miles per speed second (24 km/s) Mass* 0.107 Gravity* 0.38 Density 2.27 ounces per cubic inch (3.93 g/cu cm) Average -81° F temperature (-63° C) Atmosphere Very thin Moons 2 *In both cases, Earth = 1 AXIS INCLINATION 25.2° One rotation lasts 1.88 years. 2006 made a detailed study of the Martian surface while orbiting the planet. 50 THE SOLAR SYSTEM UNIVERSE 51 sey is the a planet in the solar system. Its diameter is 11 times that Jupiter rotates at 25,000 miles per hour (40,000 km/hr). One of the most distinctive elements of the Earth, and its mass is 300 times as great. Because the speed of Jupiter's rotation . AMALTHEA THEBE | GANYMEDE SJ flattens the planet at its poles, its equatorial diameter is greater than its polar diameter, eggs a will Eee EUROPA if 15 “of Jupiter's atmosphere is its so-called Great Red Spot, a giant high-pressure region ay turbulence that has been observed from the Earth for more than 300 years. The planet is orbited by numerous satellites and has ames a wide, faint ring of particles. Composition tp Jupiter is a giant ball of hydrogen and helium that have been compressed into liquid in the planet's interior and into metallic rock in its core. Not much is known about Jupiter's core, but it is ~ believed to be bigger than the Earth's core. INNER MANTLE 38,470 MILES Lradius 2 (61911 KM) ATMOSPHERE measures 620 miles (1,000 km). Surrounds the core. It is made of liquid metallic hydrogen, an element only found under hot, high-pressure conditions. The inner mantle is a soup of electrons and nuclei. CHARACTERISTICS CONVENTIONAL PLANET, SYMBOL ESSENTIAL DATA : Average ° 483,000,000 distance from miles the Sun (778,000,000 km) Solar orbit 11 years (Jovian year) 312 days Equatorial 88,700 miles diameter (142,800 km) Orbital speed 8 miles per second (13 km/s) Mass* 318 Gravity* 2.36 Density 0.77 ounce per cubic _ inch (1.33 g/cu cm) Average -184° F temperature (-120° C) Atmosphere Very dense Moons More than 60 *In both cases, Earth = 1 One rotation lasts 9 hours and 55 minutes. _ CORE Its size is similar to that of the Earth's core. AXIS INCLINATION = a OUTER MANTLE Made of liquid molecular hydrogen. The outer mantle merges with the atmosphere. The Moons of Jupiter ip Jupiter has more than 60 moons. Many of not even have names. Jupiter's rotation is gradually them have not been officially confirmed and do — slowing because of the moons' tidal effects. panueu) LEDA HIMALIA LYSITHEA ELARA ANANKE CARME PASIPHAE SINOPE a OL lL! __. 160/63/67 a 302 322 335/8 Winds The winds on Jupiter blow in contiguous bands > and opposing directions. The bands' small differences in temperature and chemical composition give the planet its multicolored appearance. Jupiter's inclement environment, in which winds blow at more than 370 miles per hour (600 km/h), can cause large storms, such as the Great Red Spot in the southern hemisphere of the planet. The Great Red Spot, which is 16,155 miles (26,000 km) long, is believed to be composed mainly of ammonia gas and clouds of ice. RINGS Jupiter's rings are made of dust from the planet's four inner moons. These rings were first seen in 1979 by the space probe Voyager 1 and later by Voyager 2. OUTER GOSSAMER RING aE INNER GOSSAMER —— e@ MAIN RING ——————_@ HALO ———Y—_—_—_®@ - vs JUPITER'S MAGNETISM Jupiter's magnetic field is 20,000 times stronger than the Earth's. Astronomers believe the field is caused by the electrical currents that are created « by the rapid rotation of metallic hydrogen. Jupiter ATMOSPHERE ee eee pected surrounds the inner : ° ; liquid layers and the Jupiter's magnetosphere is solid core. Itis620 . the largest object in the solar miles thick (1,000 km). system. It varies in size and shape in response to the solar : wind, which is composed of Hydrogen the particles continuously radiated from the Sun. Helium With traces of methane and ammonia GALILEAN MOONS Of Jupiter's 63 moons, four are visible from Earth with binoculars. These are called the Galilean moons.in honor of their discoverer, Galileo Galilei. Astronomers believe that Io has active volcanoes and that Europa has an ocean underneath its icy crust. EUROPA _ GANYMEDE 2,000 MILES : 3,270 MILES At (3,200 KM) ~ (5,268 KM) t py alee j e+ Gis oF iad \ Pe 10 CALISTO 2,264 MILES 2,986 MILES (3,643 KM) (4,806 KM) GREAT RED SPOT | RING MATERIAL is surrounded by a huge magnetic bubble, the magnetosphere. The magnetosphere's tail reaches more than 370,000,000 miles (600,000,000 . km)—beyond the orbit of Saturn. 52 THE SOLAR SYSTEM UNIVERSE 53 - | The Lord of the Rings - aturn is the solar system's second largest planet. Like Jupiter, it is a large ball of gas surrounding a small, solid core. Saturn was the most distant planet discovered before the invention of the telescope. To the naked eye, it looks like a yellowish star, but with the help of a telescope, its rings are clearly visible. Ten times farther from the Sun than the Earth, Saturn is the least dense planet. If an ocean could be found large enough to hold it, Saturn would float. Rings > Saturn's rings, the brightest rings in the solar system, are made of rock and ice and orbit Saturn's equator. The rings are probably remains of destroyed comets that were trapped by Saturn's gravitational field. RINGS G ANDE 3 0 Miles . al Go = 0 km) 91 THICKNESS * AND WIDTH, Although Saturn's rings are very * ENCKE DIVISION A small gap that separates ring A into two parts F RING A RING The farthest Saturn's visible ring outer ring | e CASSINI DIVISION 3,100 miles (5,000 km) wide, it is : located between the A and B rings. B RING Saturn's brightest and ~ widest ring D RING The closest ring to the surface of Saturn—so near that it almost. touches the planet C RING Saturn's only transparent ring Surface Like Jupiter, Saturn has a surface of clouds that form bands because of the planet's rotation. Saturn's clouds are less. turbulent and less colorful than Jupiter's. The higher, white clouds reach temperatures of -220° F (-140° C). A layer of haze. extends above the clouds. - WHITE CLOUDS DEEP AND ORANGE CLOUDS § BLUISH CLOUDS . WINDS : Saturn's winds generally reach speeds of about 220 miles per hour (360 km/h), causing strong storms. Gaseous Exterior a Saturn and Jupiter differ very little in their composition. Both | are gaseous balls surrounding solid cores. What sets Saturn apart are its rings, formed by clustered pieces of ice that range in size from small particles to large chunks. Each particle in a ring is a satellite orbiting Saturn. From the Earth, the massed debris seems to form large structures, but each discrete piece actually has its own orbit. > ATMOSPHERE <1% ; Sulfur gives it a yellowish appearance. — Helium Hydrogen COMPONENTS ~ The main components of Saturn's atmosphere are hydrogen (97%). and helium (2%). The rest is composed of sulfur, methane, and other gases. . - * AXIS INCLINATION - CHARACTERISTICS CONVENTIONAL PLANET SYMBOL 887,000,000 miles ~ ESSENTIAL DATA Average distance - from the Sun (1,427,000,000 km) Solar orbit 29 years (Saturnine year) _ 154 days Equatorial 74,940 miles diameter (120,600 km) . Orbital speed 6 miles per second ; (10 km/s) Mass* - 95 . Gravity* 092 _ ‘Density 0.4 ounce per cubic : inch (0.7 g/cu cm) Average temperature -193° F (-125° C) Atmosphere Very dense Moons More than 45 “*In both cases, Earth =1 _ 26.7° One rotation lasts 10 hours * and 39 minutes. OUTER MANTLE This layer is formed by'liquid molecular * hydrogen. Sate . i ATMOSPHERE _ oy * Mainly hydrogen : °° and helium : . INNER MANTLE > . It is made up of etc metallic hydrogen. wide, their thickness + . is sometimes less + __ than’33 feet ~ (10m). — Sy, 4 os m = > = : ~~ The Moons of Saturn ‘Saturn has more than 45 moons, making, Saturn's sy e » family of moons one of the largest in the solar system. The sizes of the moons vary from Titan's 3,200 miles (5,150 2) - cone: to tiny Calypso's 10 miles (16 km). Composed of rock and * 2 a metallic elements, such as ‘ silicates and iron - ‘PANDORA EPIMETHEUS ENCELADUS POLYDEUCES g : PROMETHEUS- JANUS TETHYS TITAN ATLAS’ es caLyPso j ie 1 Hien ¥ DIONE ng . DAPHNIS "HELENE . ; * er aes te : ; RADIUS = 37500 MILES 1 aii 2 ~ . (60,300 KM) 4 Titan has a larger diameter than | HYPERION ‘ Aes ialolete| Mercury. It has an ——tr = , _ . atmosphere that is 25 : 61 220 ‘mostly made of © : R . ° ! nitrogen. . 54 THE SOLAR SYSTEM. re Sars ete 3 = Ars . o the unaided eye, Urairiie looks like a star at the. lirnit of ee It i is the. seventh farthest planet from the Sun and the third largest planet in the solar system. aig One peculiarity distinguishing it from the other planets is its anomalous axis of - Pe rotation, tilted. nearly 98 degrees around the plane of its orbit, so that one or the other of ‘..Uranus's poles points, toward the Sun. Astronomers speculate that, during its formation, Uranus may have suffered an impact with a protoplanet, which could have altered Uranus's UNIVERSE 55 Rings Like all giant planets-of the solar system, Uranus has a ring system, but it is much darker than Saturn's and more difficult to see. The planet's 11 rings, which orbit the planet's equator, were discovered in 1977. In 1986, they were explored by Voyager 2. Satellites Sse ‘ a . a . 979° _ tilt. Uranus's orbit is so large that the planet.takes 84 years to completely orbit the Sun. ‘Uranus's period of rotation i is 17 hours and 14 minutes. @ MAGNETIC FIELD Uranus generates a ‘magnetic field 50 times more powerful than Earth's. This field is not *_ centered on the planet, but is ~ offset and tilted 60 degrees from Uranus's axis. If this were the case on Earth, the magnetic north pole would be located in Morocco. Unlike other planets, Uranus's magnetic.field *_ originates in the planet's mantle, not its core. Composition Uranus's core is made of abundant amounts of silicates and ice. The planet is almost four times larger than the Earth, andits - atmosphere is made up of hydrogen, _ * helium, and methane. Uranus has an * almost horizontal tilt, causing it to have very long seasons. CHARACTERISTICS CONVENTIONAL PLANET SYMBOL ESSENTIAL DATA Average distance —_1,780,000,000 miles from the Sun (2,870,000,000 km) Solar orbit 84 years : (Uranian year) 4 days Equatorial 32,200 miles diameter (51,800 km) Orbital speed 4 miles per second (7 km/s) Mass* 145 Gravity* E 0.89 Density 0.8 ounce per cubic inch (1.3 g/cu cm) Average temperature -346° F (-210° C) Atmosphere Less dense Moons 27 * In both cases, Earth = 1 ia AXIS INCLINATION One rotation lasts 17 hours and 14 minutes. Uranus has 27 moons. The first four were discovered in 1787, and another 10 were identified in 1986 by the space probe Voyager 2.Uranus's moons were named in ‘ - i honor of characters from the works, of William . . o. ? “ j { CRESSIDA DESDEMONA MIRANDA : BIANCA JULIET | Some scientists suggest that Uranus's anomalous magnetic field may indicate that the convection of Uranus's core has stopped because of cooling—or, has happened on the OPHELIA , : : CORDELIA } 5 . ~ perhaps, that the planet is err : . currently undergoing a 15,882 MILES sil radius 2 Sic magnetic inversion, as (25557 KM) ae PORTIA . * ROSALIND. BELINDA e Shakespeare and Alexander Pope,.a naming convention that distinguishes them from the other moons in the solar system. Some of Uranus's moons are large, but most is measure only ce of miles. : OBERON I}. ARIEL” UMBRIEL TITANIA = — Earth. Enlarged i nee. - mals - region * 2001U3 : Ss sere S - * 2003U3 _ 3 . 3 P , (FRANCISCO) ? CALIBAN STEPHANO TRINCULO SYCORAX (MARGARET) | * PROSPERO | “SETEBOS 169 283 314 339 ‘. 482 580 654 698 ° - = = . o CORE . i ; Made up . TITANIA of silicates si MOONS : . - 980 MILES. and ice Uranus has small, dark moons, discovered by Voyager 2, as well as bigger * (1,578 KM) moons, such as Miranda, Ariel, Umbriel, Oberon, and Titania. These last two are approximately 930 miles (1,500 km) in diameter. - Miranda, only 293 miles UMBRIEL (472 km) in diameter, is 730 MILES the smallest of Uranus's (1,170 KM) : INNER MANTLE e five main moons. It has an irregular surface with grooves and a Probably icy water, methane, ~ and ammonia. (According to some models, the materials of bright mark. the mantle and core do not ° form layers.) ° MIRANDA 293 MILES (472 KM) : ARIEL > OUTER MANTLE 720 MILES Composed primarily of hydrogen and helium, as well (1,158 KM) as a small amount of methane ATMOSPHERE = : Uranus's atmosphere is made up Surface REFRACTION OF RAYS of hydrogen, methane, helium, and small amounts of acetylene and other hydrocarbons. Fora long time, Uranus was believed to have a smooth surface. The Hubble Space Telescope, however, curtain of clouds that lie underneath l ~ In Uranus, sunlight is reflected by a e a layer of methane. 0 showed that Uranus is a ATMOSPHERE 4 (8) F 85 % dynamic planet that has the Pe SUNLIGHT a Hydrogen solar system's brightest A f S 3 ° clouds and a fragile ring é — Z (-2 10 C) 3% ce system that wobbles like an f _— AVERAGE TEMPERATURE Helium unbalanced wheel. ‘ Methane OBERON 946 MILES (1,522 KM) When sunlight passes through this layer, the methane absorbs the red light waves and lets the blue light e waves pass through, producing the planet's hue. ATMOSPHERE ies = aa ™,, SUNLIGHT ' é 56 THESOLARSYSTEM . : . > winds | Neptune: Deep Blue een from our planet, Neptune appears as a faint, blue point invisible to the naked eye. Images sent to Earth by Voyager 2 show the planet as a remarkably blue sphere, an effect produced by the presence of methane in the outer part of Neptune's atmosphere. The farthest of the gaseous planets, Neptune is 30 times farther from the Sun than the Earth is. Its rings and impressive clouds are noteworthy, as is its resemblance to Uranus. Neptune is of special interest to astronomers because, before its discovery, its existence and location were predicted on the basis of mathematical calculations. = ———— Surface >>> “ ee White methane clouds surround Neptune, circulating at some of the fastest speeds in the solar system. Neptune's winds reach 1,200 miles per hour (2,000 km/h) from east to west, swirling against the direction of the planet's rotation. Moons Se: «(Neptune has 13 natural satellites, nine of which are > named. Triton and Nereid were the first moons observed by telescope from Earth. The 11 remaining moons were observed from space by the U.S. space probe Voyager 2. All the names of Neptune's satellites correspond to ancient Greek marine deities. ’ DESPINA PROTEUS TRITON NEREID GALATEA LARISSA : %0 “ NEPTUNE'S Ries His eae Ee tat aL , : mae Rapwus= | Lradius 2 3° 4 5 6 7. 8 9°10 ll 12 13> 14 222 . (24,764 KM) : . . .. TRITON : ~ Its diameter is 1,681 miles (2,706 km). Triton orbits | = _ Neptune in a direction 6 * opposite that of the other - moons. Its surface has dark stripes formed by the 5 material spewed from its y j geysers and volcanoes. his is its temperature, making » Triton one of the coldest bodies in the solar system. ~ Rings ‘Uranus has faint rings of dust. When they were discovered from the Earth, _ astronomers thought the rings formed incomplete arcs. The ring names Sa LE VERRIER j " ie -honor the first scientists a LASSELL I o to study Neptune. — chy : seas. i : f . — ——— mantle of icy water, ammonia, hydrogen, and methane. According to some models, however, the materials of the mantle and core do not form layers. CORE Made up of oo silicates and ice ‘ INNER MANTLE Probably icy water, - methane, and ammonia a ah Average distance 2,800,000,000 miles ; oe g ee from the Sun (4,500,000,000 km) — OQUTERMANTLE © ~> Solar orbit 164 years Composed primarily of = (Neptunian year) * 264 days hydrogen and helium, as well. F - Equatorial 30,800 miles asa oat ET: of methane eh Foes (49,500 km) oS : Orbital speed 3.4 miles per second tie : : ~ G5 km/s) ATMOSPHERE eee - a " Banded, like the atmospheres © = SS : of the other gas giants, A Gravity* Bu . 1.12, Neptune's atmosphere formsa _ + Density 1 ounce per cubic inch “ cloud system at-least as active ~ . : (6 g/cu cm) as Jupiter's. Average temperature -330° F (-200° C) Atmosphere ~ Dense Moons 5 13 UNIVERSE 57 THE GREAT SPOT This giant storm, called . the Great Dark Spot, was s first seen on the surface of Neptune in 1989 and was as large as the Earth. By 1994, it had disappeared. CHARACTERISTICS ~-- © CONVENTIONAL : : - *PLANEF. « ~ : ears ~~ SYMBOL ‘ * ESSENTIAL DATA» *TIn both cases, Earth = 1. Hydrogen - “AXIS INCLINATION 28.3° One rotation lasts _ 16 hours and 36 © ~ Helium : minutes. * 58 THESOLARSYSTEM Me eee ae ve ee Say - UNIVERSE 59 é . : 7 mignae : : Pluto: Now a Composition ance q e . L ; : : F j 3 AP ¢ Ste .: ‘ ; Scientific calculations have deduced that 75 Pluto is an object that belongs to the Kuiper belt, a group FOANET SYNNEOL “as percent of Pluto consists of a mixture of rocks and _ of objects left over from the formation of the outer “ . Pluto sidppied being the ainth planet of the solar eget in 2006 when ice. This frozen surface is made up of 98 percent : planets. In addition’to large amounts of frozen nitrogen, ESSE AL wee ¢ - ak nitrogen, as well as traces of solidified carbon monoxide Pluto has simple molecules containing hydrogen and: iis! Cie aber te caboaigradegebe mic “ the International Astronomical Union decided to change the classification of cold, distant Pluto to aiid methane! Recently sclentists have conchidalithak. cosaeniathe bullding ulocke ofits ; ete eG ean that of dwarf planet. This tiny body in our solar system has never had an imposing profile, and it aienen 2479 years | has not yet been possible to study it closely. All that.is knowri about Pluto comes through observations ATMOSPHERE . Equatorial * 1,400 miles Sa Se -Pluto's very thin atmosphere freezes and ~ diameter (2,247 km) _+|°.made from the Earth_or Earth orbit; stich as those made by the Hubble Space Telescope. Despite the lack . falls to the dwarf planet's surface as 4 =e ontareeceas of information gathered about Pluto, it is notable for its unique orbit, the tilt of its axis, and its location i tla a al Saas : ong) Thecrmst ofttis uel ao Bes > Seune . i jass* ths . _ within the Kuiper | belt. All these characteristics Hele Pluto: especially ine e yan SN ee ietieppe Sect S arene meee TS 0.067 ~ < oO. and water frozen = - Density 1.2 ounces per cubic inch 2 : : Hi = Nitrogen on the surface. we i (2.05 g/cu cm) ‘ ‘ é 3 5 ‘ s . 2 a : Ae temperature -380° F (-230° C) “? oe . . : 2% . oars . : Surface Pear, Atmosphere .Very thin “ . Moons 3 A Double WwW orld na ‘ — With some * In both cases, Earth = 1 r : nly a little is known about Pluto, : traces of- carbon . Pluto anid its largest satellite, ROTATION ~ but the Hubble Space Telescope - *- monoxide AXIS INCLINATION : Charon; have a very special : Lae showed a surface covered by a frozen : opt 5 o relationship. They have been called mixture of nitrogen and methane. The . ae oy 122° i double planets—the diameter of Charon presence of solid methane indicates that “One rotation . is about that of Pluto. One theory its temperature is less than -333° F lasts 6.387 (-203° C), but the dwarf planet's eats days. temperature varies according to its A a place in orbit, ranging between 30 and hypothesizes that Charon was formed from ice that was torn from Pluto when _ another object collided with the dwarf * planet. 50 astronomical units from the Sun. . ° . @——__ CORE The core is SYNCHRONIZED ORBITS 7 . : + _made of iron, ; The orbital arrangement of Pluto and Charon is unique. Each an observer on one side of Pluto would be able to see Charon, 5 as tae i always faces the other, making the two seem connected by an but another observer standing on the other side of the planet 2 . invisible bar. The synchronization of the two bodies is such that “could not see this moon due to the curvature of the planet. _ MANTLE The mantle is a layer of frozen water. BEST VIEW OF PLUTO AVAILABLE NEW HORIZONS MISSION DENSITY The first space probe to be sent to Pluto was launched on January 19, 2006. It is to reach the dwarf planet in July 2015 and achieve the first flyby of Pluto and Charon. Moons In addition to Charon, which was discovered in 1978, Pluto is orbited by two additional moons, Nix and Hydra, first observed in 2005. Unlike the surface of Pluto, which is made of frozen nitrogen, methane, and carbon dioxide, Charon appears to be Charon's density is between 0.7 and 0.8 ounce per cubic inch (1.2 and 1.3 g/cu cm), indicating that its composition does not include much rock. covered with ice, methane, and carbon A PECULIAR ORBIT \ dioxide. One theory holds that the matter that ° Pluto's orbit is noticeably elliptical, and it is tilted 17° 6 3 8 fe formed this satellite was ejected from Pluto 730 miles from the plane of the planets' orbits. The distance y) as a result of a collision, an origin similar to between Pluto and the Sun varies from 2,500,000,000 ; that ascribed to Earth's moon. (1 l TZ km) : to 4,300,000,000 miles (4,000,000,000 to terrestrial days is the time : ! 7 Sr’ , 7,000,000,000 km). During each 248-year orbit, Pluto a ee Charon's diameter—half of Pluto's orbits closer to the Sun than Neptune for nearly 20 years. Although Pluto appears to cross paths with Neptune, it is impossible for them to collide. 60 THE SOLAR SYSTEM Distant Worlds — arther even than Neptune, the eighth planet, we find frozen a) OR bodies smaller than the Earth's Moon—the more than 100,000 Pn nea objects forming the Kuiper belt, the frozen boundary of our solar system. Recently astronomers of the International Astronomical Union decided to reclassify Pluto as a dwarf planet because of its size and eccentric orbit. Periodic comets (comets that appear at regular intervals) originate in the Kuiper belt. Nonperiodic comets, on the other hand, come from the Oort cloud, a gigantic sphere surrounding the entire solar system. @ = : 2 3e wm i . ad Vaprnat, Sof ee 2 1 440 miles” Extending outward from the orbit of Neptune are many frozen worlds similar in some ways to (2 ) y, 74 km) planets but much smaller. They are located in the Kuiper belt, the frozen boundary of our solar wen? RPT a eye . satnb re ~ ¢ a ” nh Re ee ¥ gee 7 btn eyes : ‘ b ee y BP ps Wat ‘ . BP aT : Serie ee eb tent a, ae ik 4 % . #> t% + Eee gas Cen? 228% % os aay . 7 ee , ‘% by bs w %, 4 “ . ' < ie , ; e . ‘ Fe . ' <* eat eo hae atx « ‘es @, a - te LPL OR a in. # Pes . % bd “SATURN'S URANUS'S. NEPTUNE'S ie y 5 eee Se is ORBIT ORBIT a ORBIT oe ‘ vos é é ars *s PLUTO'S ~ _ ORBIT _ — Nn “ — . m ~~ “ bs o ‘ sis v = * o Bes ~ > re ety . ¢ ae ; ce Now of oa nm.” 5 8 : 4 “ ae po “55 i ra Se ae) ¢ bose rs Te ae r oe te ewer. = es ¢ JS ue 9 ® Bee he 36 * + . of N OR " - : ’ _ e358 %. a > ww rt ae 4 Ss i 1 2 Wwe ee ae ae ‘ 4 4 . ‘ Ms 2 % . ei Bs Oi: ‘ rs ae sy - wh i #¢ . by NESS. ep BD - . ,* * Res eas i fed me * ' Ga 2 s : 5 . . ! ( ; f . ‘ Ps ; 4 , © es ay 2 » - - q . . a - mare a. et 2 : < ‘, 2 system. So far, almost a thousand objects have been cataloged, including Quaoar, which has a diameter of 810 miles (1,300 km). The Kuiper belt, estimated to contain more than 100,000 bodies of ice and rock larger than 60 miles (100 km) in diameter (including Pluto), spreads out in the shape of a wide ring. Many of the comets that approach the Sun come from the Kuiper belt. is the diameter of Pluto—750 miles (1,200 km) smaller than the Earth's Moon. Because of its size and orbit, Pluto is considered a dwarf planet instead of a planet. ” Comparable Sizes The discovery of Quaoar in 2002 allowed scientists to find the link they had long looked for between the Kuiper belt and the origin of the solar system. Quaoar's almost circular orbit helped prove that some objects both belong to the Kuiper belt and orbit the Sun. At the official meeting of the International Astronomical Union, on August 24, 2006, Pluto was reclassified from a planet to a dwarf planet. For the time being, any further objects discovered in the Kuiper belt will be classified in the same category. QUAOAR SEDNA has a diameter Its diameter is of 810 miles estimated at 1,000 (1,300 km). miles (1,600 km). thea THE FARTHEST ONE Eris is 97 astronomical units (9,040,000,000 miles [14,550,000,000 km]) from the Sun, making it the most distant object observed in the solar system. This dwarf planet follows an oval, eccentric orbit that takes 560 years »@ PLUTO possesses a diameter of 1,400 miles (2,300 km). 200 to complete. The dwarf planet measures about 1,900 miles (3,000 km) in diameter, and traces of methane ice have been detected on its surface. UNIVERSE 61 ERIS Larger than Pluto, its diameter is about 1900 miles (3,000 km). OR MORE, POSSIBLE EXTRASOLAR PLANETS HAVE BEEN DETECTED. ve . 6 62 THE SOLAR SYSTEM Construction Debris: — &, x2 ver since the formation of the solar system, the melting, collision, and rupture of various materials played an essential role in the formation of the planets. Remnants - of this process remain in the form of rock debris, which serves as witnesses to the formation of the solar system. These objects are also associated with episodes that influenced subsequent evolutionary processes on Earth. They are a possible cause of the mass extinction of dinosaurs more than 60 million years ago. @ Extraterrestrial ~ One of the main goals of scientist who study meteorites is to understand their nature. Meteoric material holds extraterrestrial solids and gases. Scientific tests have confirmed that some meteorites are from the Moon or Mars, but most meteorites are associated with asteroids. The samples obtained TYPES OF METEORITES STONY meteorites contain silicate minerals. from meteorites are analyzed and classified by their composition. They are subdivided into chondrites and achondrites. A HUGE METEORITE STRIKES A meteorite is an object from space that does not completely vaporize as it penetrates the Earth's atmosphere. Larger meteorites can forma crater when they strike the Earth. Shown is the impact of an exceptionally large meteorite, such as the one ARON that many scientists believed might have. led to the extinction of dinosaurs and many other species’ about 65 million years ago. meteorites contain a high percentage of iron and nickel compounds. They are created in the rupture | Hag of asteroids. EXPLOSION The friction created as a meteorite falls through the air increases its temperature. ° This is how an ignition. process is started. MESOSIDERITES contain similar quantities of iron, nickel, and silicates. ‘7 miles per second | (12 kcn/S ) amacr VELOCITY , DIVISION The fragmentation of a meteorite causes a visual effect called a shooting star. ° IMPACT (Wr The collision of the S e@ meteorite compresses ;f oe and excavates the J ground, leaving a crater. s= a r their composition, they are grouped as siliceous, carbonaceous, and metallic. IDA - An asteroid 35 miles (56 km) long, its surface is marked by collisions with other bodies. oe ia Z C3 on. £ pr { ome 4 4 a ae Ops = ° s - z ae. Ef? othe . — o - — - y" ) - ee . $ = . 7 - £ — « ¢ © $2 . 4% “ay a ©}; & oe 4. : Sa ‘& e¢ ij Ho “ } -%~& : al. . fs , Asteroids o* A , , | © git Satut Also called minor planets, they are the millions of rock and : et & - metal fragments of various shapes and sizes that orbit the a Sun. They are mostly located in a belt between the orbits of Mars é © and Jupiter, but a few, such as those that belong to the Amor, et # Apollo, and Aten asteroid groups, orbit closer to Earth. ¢ é & ° . es” ’ £ ' & HIDALGO & € completes a solar orbit ¢ se 4 every 14 Earth years. f ¢ ae Pa = aa © Py é Aah = = ih "\ Ga if" 4 5 f, t C g: Y ee ee a e% The Trojans trace an orbit | { similar to Jupiter's, one Mars's Jupiter's group in front of the planet ., - ‘< q and another behind it. che beg 4 sf ord TYPES OF ASTEROIDS se Despite a great variety in size and shape, three types of G . f Vi minor planets, or asteroids, are known. Classified by S > a UNIVERSE 63 15% The percentage of the total mass of the asteroids compared with the mass of the Moon Tighten Your Belt More than a million asteroids at least a mile in diameter are distributed in the main asteroid belt. Ceres was the first asteroid discovered (in 1801). It is the largest known asteroid, with a diameter of 580 miles (932 km). KIRKWOOD ¢ The Kirkwood gaps are the open areas in the main asteroid g belt that are devoid is of asteroids. Ferrous-type rocks dominate its composition. i # f { @ee v 4 x A eT ¢ : = i - ; bate 4 { = $$ r . ‘s, d 64 THE SOLAR SYSTEM TER “ 7 es Seren - = — x ae — a os — Those with a Tail omets are small, deformed objects a few miles in diameter that are : > ie normally frozen and dark. Made of dust, rock, gases, and organic molecules rich in carbon, comets are usually found in orbits beyond that of Neptune in the Kuiper belt or in the Oort cloud. Occasionally a comet, such as Halley's comet, veers toward the interior of the solar system, where its ice is heated and sublimates, forming a head and long, spectacular tails of gases and dust. e Types of Comets LONG-PERIOD SHORT- iodi ION TAIL yp COMET plese Periodic comets The trail of re Comets with short periods Comets that leave their original ey, lumina Fion have orbits around the Sun orbits and approach the Sun with a bluish color. The gas that are shorter than 200 years. Those with a period of more than KUIPER 200 years travel tens or hundreds Hany of times farther from the Sun than Pluto. generally settle into new trajectories. molecules lose an electron Halley's comet, for example, completes poate eee an its elongated orbit in 76 years. oe OORT SOLAR CLOUD HEAD SYSTEM Formed by the nucleus . and the coma. The front part is called the impact front. cOMA Envelops the nucleus. It is formed by the gases and dust that it releases. DUST TAIL The suspended dust particles trail behind the comet, reflecting sunlight Deep Impact Mission On January 12, 2005, as part of the PROBE LAUNCH Discovery program, NASA launched Deep Impact launches the the space probe Deep Impact, which, in e@ 770-pound (350-kg) turn, sent a projectile on a collision course copper projectile that will and making the luminous toward the comet 9P/Tempel 1, where it collide with the comet. - , ible. obtained samples to be studied on Earth. NUCLEUS : Frozen water, ‘ methane, carbon dioxide, ammonia, rock, and dust , The projectile | searches the IN POSITION impact front. 5 De e By means of infrared cameras Ly ANS ® and spectrometers, “SS / SOW : the ship follows the , w 3 comet to analyze ¢ Saga of the impact on the Mitt E--'% = 4 nucleus. NUCLEUS f As the comet moves away from the Sun, its tails Close to the Sun, -f the tails reach maximum length. £ WIE 9 3 70 E ,@ ir IMPACT WITH THE COMET YY 3 took place on July 4, 2005. e miles per hour Tine mua projectile generated a ; < F Sie FORMATION OF THE TAIL (36,000 km/h) crater the size of a football ; AND HEAD field and seven stories deep. VELOCITY OF THE ® COMET IMPACT i Because of the effects of solar radiation and visite ° the solar wind, gases and-dust are released from an accelerating comet. The dust Earth Mars PREVIOUS MISSIONS particles tend to-form a curving trailwhich GIOTTO Waarehdles a SUELIES! is less sensitive to the pressure-of-the solar NASA has sent other unmanned missions to Launched in 1986, ee ee ae eae Pe hes wind. As the comet leaves-the confines of ee ee ce et me the solar system is tals coincide once | ended after crossing the tail of the Giacobini- distance of 310 miles in 2001. and sent them more, but they disappear as the nucleus Jupiter Comet orbit Zinner comet in September 1985. (500 km) in 1992. -.. to Earth, cools down and ceases releasing gases. The Earth and the Moon n the beginning, the Earth was an incandescent mass that slowly began to cool, allowing the continents to emerge and acquire their current form. Although many drastic changes took place during these early eras, our blue planet has still not stopped changing. It must be recognized that life on Earth would be impossible without the presence of the AERIAL VIEW OF THE EARTH In this partial image of the Earth, we can see Bora-Bora, an island that forms part of the Leeward Islands, located in French Polynesia. atmosphere—the colorless, odorless, invisible layer of gases that surrounds us, giving us air to breathe and protecting us from the Sun's harmful radiation. Although the atmosphere is THE BLUE PLANET THE MOON AND TIDES JOURNEY TO THE CENTER OF THE EARTH ECLIPSES ONCE UPON A TIME MOVEMENTS AND COORDINATES approximately 435 miles (700 km) thick, it has no clear boundary and fades into space until it finally disappears. 68 THE EARTH AND THE MOON ie atta : : : iS : vir i ake UNIVERSE 69 T BI : ' . ; = ~ AXIS bs : M Ae is : " CHARACTERISTICS ~ Density 3.2 ounces per Re i 1e ue ? ane < INCLINATION ~ CY) PPO. ns . : inch (5.52 g/cu cm) sa. ( 7 / eC re * CONVENTIONAL Average ‘ ‘ F . . Ne ° Pen os “et Pei aga. : temperature 59° F (15° C) . he Earth is known as the blue planet because of the color ——— ks eartlisenis fama the! piace eee Ee penta oie eae of the oceans that cover two thirds of its surface. This planet, BS ae ess tarak atte ae a2 he ei Ea Unt spe ee a the third planet from the Sun, is the only one where the right _ Maer em 02 i = SMU rece mote o “Llethesun GSOmlionIeM pgp _ | conditions exist to sustain life, something that makes the Earth POLE “four seasons. - & ' "Revolution around ‘ ; & ANE: G é ‘ - «, ri the Suh (Earth year)» 365.25 days One rotation special. It has liquid water in abundance, a mild temperature, and ee a. *"~ Diameterat 7930 miles ~ lasts 23:56 an atmosphere that protects it from objects that fall from ice eit ee NS 2 ad a 1 5 ‘ re ".. i . Orbiting 17 miles per second .° outer space. The atmosphere also filters solar radiation "speed @r7gkms)) te, : ° Mass* ’ | ‘ * Fem he . thanks to its ozone layer. Slightly flattened at its poles PRECIPITATION ~ icra 2 , ae The atmosphere loses : ° gtr ae . s water through : 4 ° . pas : ; m condensation Gravity > «Magnetism .and Gravity > ~ . - causes rain, snow, and ae eae : $ * hail. Dew and frost : . The Earth’s magnetic field originates in the planet's outer core, directly alter the state of | -s and wider at its equator, the Earth takes 24 hours to revolve once on its axis. . hel cumeiaithey cover! ~~ where turbulent currents of molten iron generate both electrie and * ar et eR rn magnetic fields. The orientation of the Earth's magnetism varies over ~ —* “ e F ° ‘Hy ' time, causing the magnetic poles to fluctuate. ‘ « The Phenomenon of Life 70% i f,.. St 9 pace sca ea eet Lar Fa 0 ; Ss ‘X \ hy Magnetic © clipe Water, in liquid form, makes it possible for life to . : . : ; . \ ; The Earth's Sa nite WA \l | / ZZ fovea exist on the Earth, the only planet where 0 Ae of the Earth's surface ' . : ; - : Bae SS se 4) : core works as \\ ite temperatures vary from 32° F to 212° F (0° C to 100° C), is water. From space, wn. ss : fr a magnet. af = allowing water to exist as a liquid. The Earth's average pipe planet eats ae é distance from the Sun, along with certain other- factors, 4 allowed life to develop 3.8 billion years ago. . x ee ' . J CONDENSATION 7 ‘ e@ The Earth's winds transport The Earth's magnetic * moisture-laden air until field is created by ‘ ~The liquid Go a weather conditions cause the convective currents so Al oh, Mas auteriCoreis ‘ Waa > water vapor to condense into in its outer’ core. ee Ne Fab AMEN in constant 4 a clouds and eventually fall to the /, \ motion. ‘ . ’ ground as rain or other forms ‘ me ae of precipitation. _ WHAT IT DOES : y a Some particles are + - attracted to the poles. . - : : ‘ e The magnetic field Van Allen belt Mars is so far from On the Earth, water is On Mercury or Venus, which pabdacpres ted fas 9-5 ~—— the Sun that allits found in_all three of its are very close to the Sun, ad of thee’ A = water is frozen. possible states. water would evaporate. Ne = y e Beca energ vit Solar wind EARTH MOVEMENTS ¢ evapo! " - . — . = , a : fA 4 wi : sh PUREE RURUUEREEOTEED io atmosphere from oc , ; aes ’ FPL ree sue’ ; Pa ; —_ . and, toa : . . - The Earth moves, eer : * orbiting the Sun and Pants . rotating on its own axis. The Van Allen belts trap * the particles from the solar ~ wind, causing phenomena like the auroras. GRAVITY AND ’ LS ; : The Moon, our only natural SOUTH WEIGHT TE _ ROTATION: The Earth REVOLUTION: It takes the Earth 365 satellite, is four times smaller POLE Weight is the force of The Moon has less mass The object is drawn Jupiter has 300 times more revolves on its axis in 23 _ days, 5 hours, and. 57 minutes to travel than the Earth and takes the gravity that acts than the Earth and, as a toward the Earth's center. mass than the Earth and hours and 56 minutes. once around the Sun. 2732 days to orbit the Earth. on a body. result, less gravity. therefore more gravity. . 70 THE EARTH AND THE MOON : Spee ane ete Joumey to the Center — . ofthe Earth = & e ; -/ elive.on the Earth, but do we ee Whaat We alee So, 5 el standing on? The planet is made up of layers-of — y various materials, such.as solid and molten . rock, which in turn are composed-of such elements - as iron, nickel, and silicon. Our atmosphere is the layer of gases surrounding our planet. One of these gases, oxygen, does a-very Spécial job—it permits life to ener Internal Structure om | We live on a rocky surface similar to a shell. The ag rocks we live with are made mostly of oxygen and. silicon, but underneath them is the mantle, made of much heavier rocks. The mantle also surrounds the inner and outer cores with a region of constantly boiling liquid metals, creating the convective-currents that generate the Earth's magnetic field. The inner core, solid because of the great _pressure put upon it, is the densest part of the planet. | . i ee . . . . | HOW FAR HUMANS HAVE GONE ° _| Mount Everest Continental Oceanic INNER MANTLE ’ 5.5 miles _ penetration penetration - ; The solid, intermediate (8.85 km) H : : ma layer between the core ‘ pens 3 .% i and the crust. High- temperature S and P waves pass through it because of its contact with the core. INNER CORE : is made of the same , = metals as the outer core, —* _ but, despite its high . temperature, its center is | solid because of the enormous pressure that compresses it. 3, 965 miles 1G 380 km) - from the Earth's surface to its center. Direct solar radiation. Differences in temperature between the equator and the poles would be far more pronounced. ~ Above the Surface Eye } as The existence of life on.our planet would be ; impossible without the atmosphere that provides the air we breathe and the water we drink; it also protects us from the Sun's harmful ‘radiation, while ‘simultaneously maintaining t mild temperatures by ° retaining the Sun's warmth. The atmosphere is about — 435 HL thick see km) but lacks defined limits. The sunlight filters into _ the atmosphere. Winds — distribute the heat, cooling the tropics and warming the poles. _ 620 miles - (1,000 km) 370 miles” (600 km) 2 . crust, > Orbit of an arti cjal - of the mantl ‘ a satellite hydros| he ; ! ene 50 miles (80 km) Air is very rarefied. — ; The ozone layer, located here, absorbs the Sun's ultraviolet rays. ~ Vegetable and animal - life. Lithosphere and Hydrosphere The hydrosphere, the liquid part of the Earth, : includes the oceans, lakes, rivers, underground waters, snow, and ice. It almost*completely covers the crust, surrounds the shores of the continents, and covers 71 percent of the Earth's surface. The lithosphere _is a superficial, elastic region that is 4 to 7 miles Cs (6 to 11 km) thick under the oceans and up to 43 miles (70 km) thick under mountain ranges. ~ WATER AND EARTH TOTAL VOLUME OF WATER FRESHWATER ee 1.7% mad 3 % ice 70.8% 94% Sara ) water salt Tr ground eet. his 0.03% paz surface and atmosphere 72 THE EARTH AND THE MOON UNIVERSE 73 Once Upon a Time la ed edo cloud of dust and gas. In the beginning, it was a he Earth probably formed from material in the solar nebula—the cloud of gas and dust ll eben aur nce lh eect a i . . egan to cool, and the atmosphere began to clear as rain that led to the formation of the Sun. This material gradually grew into a larger and larger fell, creating the oceans. body that became a red-hot ball of rock and metal. Later the rocky crust formed, its surface cooling enough to allow the continents to appear. Even later the oceans arrived, as well Sailor he The planet cooled ieee bees ener appssredaniti as the tiny organisms that released oxygen into the atmosphere. Although much of this gas was eine.“ Meeetiate. “—tearaesrhe sap. Wetertch Earth initially consumed in chemical reactions, over time, it allowed the development of multicellular particles that planet cooled and Earth. As it cooled, the only planet in the coalesced in the began to emit it formed the solar system known to solar nebula. gases and steam. Earth's crust. have life. organisms and an explosion of life that took place at the start of the Paleozoic Era, 542 million years ago. ¢ Chronology Geology is the study of rocks in the Earth's Through the study of fossils—remains of creatures 7 7 crust. It divides the Earth's history into buried in the Earth's various sedimentary layers Continental Drift different eras, periods, and epochs lasting millions | and consequently at different times in the past- of years. Geology also helps us catalog the geology helps us trace the timeline of evolutionary We live on the continents, which are part of movable plates that drift across the Earth's surface at the rate a fingernail grows. 250 million years ago, India, Africa, Australia, and Antarctica were part of the same continent. When tectonic plates rub against each other, land and oceanic crust earthquakes occur. Where the plates separate, a rift forms. The mid-ocean ridges that run beneath the oceans are formed by lava that emerges from the rifts between tectonic plates. Where plates collide, a process called subduction takes place, in which the rocks of the oceanic floor are drawn under the continent and melt, reemerging in the form of volcanoes. Panthalassa > processes of evolution—changes in generations as _ history. species adapt to their environment and their AUSTRALIA competitors. AFRICA HOMO SAPIENS ANTARCTICA <4 LARGE The northern Atlantic Ocean slowly separated, completing the formation of : SMALL Europe and North Africa. MAMMAL 163 MILLION YEARS AGO Gondwana split, forming Africa and South America as the southern Atlantic Ocean was created. 250 MILLION YEARS AGO The Tethys Sea slowly split Pangea, creating two continents, known as Laurasia and Gondwana. 77%) ICYTHYOSTEGA 290 MILLION YEARS AGO (amphibian) The supercontinent called Pangea <—— formed. An immense ocean called __ > Panthalassa surrounded it. a 9 COOKSONIA . <——— a p __ lll —s | (plant) ‘ o> es 3 = A CRINOID ; 4 > . : ret <7. J x * FOSSILS are remains of living beings preserved in the rocks as a record of the Earth's history. UNICELLULAR ORGANISM wee 4 The majority are marine shells. Soft sediment Tectonic Plates The surface of the Earth is shaped by tectonic THE EARTH IN ONE DAY plates. There are eight major plates, some of If the Earth's history were compressed into which even encompass entire continents. The plates’ a normal day, Homo sapiens would appear borders are marked by ocean trenches, cliffs, chains at just one minute to midnight. of volcanoes, and earthquake zones. Hard sediment At a certain depth, the pressure destroys the fossils. Metamorphic rocks 74 THE EARTH AND THE MOON ® “s — at ares - _ = = ee eg ee > a= eS sere Movements and Coordinates es, it moves. The Earth rotates on its axis while simultaneously orbiting the Sun. The natural phenomena of night and day, seasons, and years are caused by these movements. To track the passage of time, calendars, clocks, and time zones were invented. Time zones are divided by meridians and assigned a reference hour according to their location. When fe, traveling east, an hour is added with each time zone. An hour is subtracted during west-bound travel. e The Earth's Movements Night and day, summer and winter, new year and old year result from the Earth's various movements during its orbit of the Sun. The most important motions are the Earth's daily rotation from west to east on its own axis and its revolution around the Sun. (The Earth follows an elliptical orbit that has the Sun at one of the foci of the ellipse, so the distance to the Sun varies slightly over the course of a year.) ‘once on its axis in 23 hours and 56 minutes. 365 days, 5 hours, _ and 57 minutes. — NUTATION 18.6 YEARS is a sort of nod made’ by the Earth, causing the displacement of the geographic poles by nine arc seconds. PRECESSION 25,800 YEARS A slow turning of the direction of the Earth's axis (similar to that of a top), caused by the ~ Earth's nonspherical shape and the gravitational forces of the Sun and the Moon ‘ROTATION - June 20 or 21 7 ere revolves i i *. Summer solstice in the Northern Hemi Equinox and Solstice Every year, around June 21, the Northern Hemisphere reaches its maximum inclination toward the Sun (a phenomenon referred to as the summer solstice in the Northern Hemisphere and the winter solstice in the Southern Hemisphere). The North Pole receives sunlight all day, while the South Pole is covered in darkness. Between one solstice and another the equinoxes appear, which is when the axis of the Earth points toward the Sun and the periods of daylight and darkness are the same all over our planet. and winter solstice in the Southern ‘Solstices exist because of the tilt of We see this as day ” The length of the day and the heig the Suninthe [" the Norther and night. sack Hemisphere — gn in winter. . < as and autumn _ equinox in the Southern , et Hemisphere. : The Sun passes REVOLUTION ’ ‘directly above the 1 YEAR "9 equator, and day: The Earths orbit . and night have the around the Sun lasts y same length. MEASUREMENT OF TIME Months and days are charted by calendars and clocks, but the measurement of these units of time is neither a cultural nor an arbitrary construct. Instead, it is derived from the natural movements of the Earth. TILT OF THE EARTH'S AXIS MILLION MILES (149 MILLION KM, THE EARTH'S ORBIT About 365 days - 1 day THE DAYS Period of time it takes _the Earth to rotate on its axis . THE MONTHS _ Each period of time, between 28 and 31 days, into which a year is divided About 30 days Time Zones - December 21 or 22 Winter solstice in the Northern Hemisphere and summer solstice in the Southern Hemisphere. Solstices exist because of the tilt of the Earth’s axis. The length of the day and the height of the Sun in the sky are greatest in summer and least in winter. UNIVERSE 75 APHELION The point in the Earth's orbit where it is farthest from the Sun (94 million miles [152 million km). This occurs atthe. beginning of July. The Earth is divided into 24 areas, or time zones, each one of which corresponds to an.hour assigned according to the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), using the Greenwich, JET LAG England, meridian as the base meridian. One. hour is added when crossing the meridian in. » - an easterly direction, and one hour is ‘subtracted when traveling west. The human body's biological clock responds to the rhythms of light and dark based on the The Sun passes directly above the equator, and day and. night have the same length. PERIHELION The point where the orbiting Earth most closely approaches the Sun (91 million miles [147 million km]) 12:00 15:00 18:00 2100 0:00 7 passage of night and day. Long air flights east or west interrupt and disorient the body's a? Sep temb er ; : clock, causing a disorder known as jet lag. It can cause fatigue, irritability, nausea, D) i y) 2 é ELS and difficulty sleeping at ee S or ‘ : fe eee ees : : 6:00 A.M Autumn equinox in the 12:00 A.M. Northern 12:00 P.M. ; : Northern Hemisphere Departure He Arrival time” and spring equinox in the es Southern Hemisphere. . 3:00 6:00 Geographic Coordinates Thanks to the grid formed by the lines of latitude and longitude, the position of any object on the Earth's surface can be easily located by using the intersection of the Earth's equator and the Greenwich meridian (longitude 0°) as a reference point. This intersection marks the midpoint between the Earth's poles. x o° GREENWICH MERIDIAN Northern Hemisphere PARALLELS — 66.5° N Arctic Circle Temperate 23.5° N Tropic of Cancer zone * 0° EQUATOR 23.5° S Tropic of Capricorn / _ 665° S Antarctic Circle : Tropical zone Polar zone Southern” Hemisphere , WEST 76 THE EARTH AND THE MOON : - 77 | e : CHARACTERISTICS : : ORIGIN OF THE MOON INNER STRUCTURE : The most widely accepted Y x Various seismic analyses of the Moon suggest that its CONVENTIONAL theory of the Moon's origin ° lid isolid PLANET - suggests that an object the size Gos ib Galle) Or SouTeaNt, SYMBOL . ° of Mars collided with the Earth 3 * es vo. during its f tion. : omance and terror, mystery and superstition-all these pee 2 160 (3476 iD ESSENTIAL DATA .* ‘ . 9 ’ Average distance 226,400 miles emotions are responses to the Moon, the Earth's one natural The diameter of the Moon is one from the Earth (364,400 km) The ejected material fourth of the Earth's. petal Satellite, which always hides one of its two faces. However, Bind siiaieeut > MANTLE Revoiton : ; i ] 1 i id the Earth, and s Less than half around the Eart! "273 days whatever symbolic meanings are attributed to the Moon, its eraunalin Eaten . the tikes Sara ee gravitational pull has a concrete effect on the Earth—it is a cause of into the Moon. oes the equator (3,476 kim) the tides. Depending on the distance of the Moon from the Earth, the : Orbiting speed O.ommiles per c < Soar OUTER second (L02 km/s) gravitational pull exerted by the Moon varies in strength and so can Ip CORE Mass" 0,01 _ high tides and low tides. To reach full height, tides need large open i Vichy! oS areas of ocean. For this reason, tides in closed or small bodies of 1 ea (3.34 g/cu cm) 4 emperature 302° F eC water are much lower. @ eae ipa Aa C100") igh vistarchus —_—__( ) if < Brightest spot , tf Volume* 0.02 on the Moon y . LL }! *Earth =1 - THE MOON'S MOVEMENTS j , . Oceanus - = eae AXIS INCLINATION As the Moon orbits the LUNAR MONTH SIDEREAL MONTH Stes alee Age Cate 514° Earth, it revolves onitsown __ It takes 29.53 It takes 2732, days itis al 4 bsy temperature e. axis in such a way that it ; days to complete _to orbit the Earth. meee of 2,730° F moncrottion always shows the Earth the _ * _jits phases. : } (1,500° C) lasts 2732 same side. 1 ee , . Earth days. - CRUST : Surface made of.rocks, such as granite, overeat by 65 feet (20 m) of ad Gis called regolith Spotted with dark areas, it always | p faces the Earth. Visible face - The Luriar Landscape Observing the Moon, the ancient astronomers 4 ” Grimaldi ——————_(). bry puget 2 decided that; as on the Earth, its plainly visible dark . . “: “ 24 7 spots must be seas. These dark | regions-of the Moon es ' Wi contrast against the bright ones, the highlands with ia tes? AD . a> , ‘ ° Gassendi a hal a, most impact Raves . . : : EW MOON : Pes ; z . The Tides mr Si 5 SCN SPRING FIDE Syceip : , a Be ses a ; : . : . , Hu : The water on the side of the Earth : Mik en the Sua he oon . Grats Praca in Pre 4 : : closest to the Moon feels the Moon's 3 tides and lowest low tides *, : : ° Ionok of the / » MOUNTAIN gravitational pull most intensely, and vice are produced. sy See snap sign | German naturalist % RANGES versa. Two tides are formed, and they track ; maeiiconiandithe:Suntarcate y When a meteorite strikes the Moon in its orbit around the Earth. © oo ges med ; ‘s right angles to the Earth,” the lunar surface, a However, they precede the Moon ‘instead of re ah as producing the lowest high tides ai age mountain range forms being directly inline with It x 8 - Jueeeeeestteens and the highest low tides. pang aera from the material ejected eG ‘ " 3 eeeale a auntaih during the cratering FULL MOON att hi SPRING TIDE . The Sun and the Moon align once again, and the ; . ‘ Sun augments ‘the Moon's js P a $ eaviteral pull, causing CRATERS SEAS 2 KEY OE ett! ee : a second spring tide. - can be from’40 inches (1 m) cover almost 16 percent of ; aay eames Neth 4 Feespsanzsenot 7) 3 “aan 3 AES Schickard ; to 620 miles (1,000 km) in the Moon's surface and . pull of the Moon \ ‘j| eyes ‘ 5 de , 3 ? . : : © ie : 5 Tycho Maguinus ; + diameter and are formed by were formed by flowing 4 Hl - : rH} pat ors : 100 million Copernicus —— ak 3 meteorites that strike the lava. Today the Moon has THIRD QUARTER years old : ona : Moon's surface with _ no volcanic activity. Gravitational NEAP TIDE : . : diamnatee incredible force. pull of the Sun . The Moon and the Sun : ; “again form a right = angle, causing a ~— Influence on **\ second neap tide. . i ; the tide by the ee aaa : THE PHASES OF THE MOON gravitational pull of the Sun Unique @ influence on ; . oo - . oe ¢ the tide by the The Sun's gravity . oe . a gravitational Fa also influences 7s —_— . -_ . The Moon is the.Earth’s pull of the the tides: Waxing First Waxing Waning Third Waning only natural satellite. Moon crescent quarter gibbous - gibbous quarter crescent ; . 78 THE EARTH AND THE MOON eeaes ms — Dh aia Eanes ee ee a eee aD ieee rg Th aR reer Sie a ee Eclipses ypically fate times a year, during the full or new moon, the centers of the Moon, the Sun, and the Earth become aligned, causing one of the most Bates marvelous celestial phenomena: an eclipse. At these times, - the Moon either passes in front of the Sun or passes through the Earth's shadow. The Sun—even during an eclipse—is not* oe safe to look at directly, since it can cause irreparable damage to the eyes, such as burns on the retina. Special high- . - quality filters or indirect: viewing by. projecting the Sun's* image ona sheet of paper are some of the ways in which this celestial wonder can be watched. Solar eclipses provide, in addition, a good opportunity for SoUDHUMIERS to conduct scientific research. @ Solar Eclipse Solar eclipses occur when the ‘Moon passes directly between the Sun ‘and the - Earth, casting a shadow along a‘path on ‘the Earth's surface. The central cone of the shadow ~ is called the umbra; and the area of partial shadow around it is called the penumbra. * Viewers in the regions where the umbra falls on : the Earth's’ surface see the Moon's disk x “ completely obscure the Sun—a total solar » _- eclipse. Those watching from the surrounding . areas that are located in the penumbra see the Moon's disk cover only part of the Suga ALIGNMENT Moon Sun Earth * During a solar eclipse, astronomers take advantage of the blocked view of the Sun in order to use devices designed to study the «Sun's atmosphere. partial solar clipes =~ So U8 Se eee “SUN'S APPARENT SIZE se Serna aA I PAROS _» “* TOTAL LUNAR '. ECLIPSE, SEEN FROM THE EARTH. . “ *. The orange color comes from Ee i es sunlight that has been refracted : * ~. * and colored by the Earth's. . : “atmosphere. ANNUAL ECLIPSE OF THE SUN, SEEN : FROM THE EARTH TYPES OF ECLIPSES . 4 ANNULAR : PARTIAL The Moontis The Sun appears The Moon does between the Sun larger than the _ “hot cover the Sun and the Earth and Moon, and it completely, so the creates a cone- remains visible Sun appears as a shaped shadow. around it. crescent. DISTANCE FROM THE SUN TO THE EARTH “A ; times larger times greater than ? \ than the the distance from the 7 z SJ Moon Earth to the Moon feet eee ee = CREE So Lunar a look at a lunar eclipse directly. NEW MOON TOTAL ECLIPSE THE ECLIPSE CYCLE Eclipses repeat every 223 lunations—18 years and 11 days. These are called Saros periods. ECLIPSES IN A YEAR ECLIPSES IN .A SAROS produces a clear orange Unmet . of the Sun. 2 o 4 a 29 70 MAXIMUM DURATION MAXIMUM DURATION Minimum Maximum Average ofthe ofthe Total 8 1 0 ) fj : : ; Sun Moon _ minutes minutes ECLIPSES IN 2006 AND BEYOND OF THE 3/29 9/22 3/19 9/11 2/07 1/26 7/22) 1/15 7/ll yw 11/25 5/20 11/13 5/10 11/3 4/29 10/23 3/20 9/13 SUN Total Total. Partial. Partial Total Total Total Total Total Partial Partial © Annular Annular Annular Hybrid Annular Partial Total Partial 2006 |. 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 or THE 3/14 ° 9/07 - 3/03 8/28 2/21 8/16 2/9 W7 6/26 12/21 6/15 12/10 6/4 12/28 4/25 10/18 45 10/08 4/4 9/28 Partial Partial Total Total Total Partial Partial Partial Partial Total Total Total Partial Partial Partial Partial Total Total Total Total ‘UNIVERSE 79 When the Earth passes directly between the ALIGNMENT TYPES OF ECLIPSES full Moon and the Sun, a lunar eclipse (which could be total, partial, or penumbral) occurs. Without the Earth's atmosphere, during each lunar oun Earth We eclipse, the Moon would become completely invisible ~ (something that never happens). The totally eclipsed _ Moon's characteristic reddish color is caused by light TOTAL PARTIAL PENUMBRAL refracted by the Earth's atmosphere. During a partial The Moon is The Moon is The Moon is in eclipse, on the other hand, part of the Moon falls in completely in only partially the penumbral the shadow cone, while the rest is in the penumbra, Baring an eclipse, the MOSHtienan permntrely i the shadow inside the cone. . the outermost, palest part. It is not dangerous to ‘ : cone. shadow cone. blacks+but appears reddish. Shadow cone PENUMBRAL ECLIPSE Penumbra “cone SOLAR ECLIPSES LUNAR ECLIPSES _ OBSERVATION FROM EARTH are the same for all observers. are different for each Prevents local observer. retinal burns A black, polymer filter, with an optical density of 5.0, 82-83 84-85 86-87 88-89 90-91 . 82 OBSERVING THE UNIVERSE Astronomical Theories, or a long time, it was believed that the Earth was stationary. The.Sun, the Moon, and the planets were thought to orbit it. To study the sky and calculate its movements, people began to build instruments, such as the astrolabe, armillary sphere, and telescope. The ~ telescope revolutionized the conception of the ~ universe. Instead of the Earth being at the center , of the universe, it was suggested that the Earth — and other planets travel around the Sun. The ‘Roman Catholic Church opposed the idea and, for a time, persecuted dissident astronomers | and banned their theories. -Geocentric Model > Before telescopes, binoculars, and.modern observatories existed, little was khown about the Earth. Many believed that the Earth was fixed and that the Sun, the Moon, and the five known planets orbited ‘itin circles. This geocentric model was promoted by the Egyptian astronomer Claudius Ptolemy, who in the 2nd century AD compiled’ the astronomical ideas of the ancient Greek astronomers (in MEASUREMENTS Noticing that the Sun, the Moon, and the stars 7 particular, those of Aristotle, who - a had proposed the Earth as the center of the universe, with the celestial objects revolving around it). Although other ancient astronomers, such as Aristarchus of Samus, proposed that the Earth was-round and rotated around the Sun, Aristotle's ideas were accepted as true for 16 centuries, and at times Aristotle's ideas were defended and preserved by the Roman Catholic Church. moved in cycles, ancient civilizations found they , could use the sky as both a clock and a calendar. However, ancient astronomers had difficulties performing the complex calculations needed to predict the _positions of stars accurately - _ enough to create a truly precise calendar. A useful tool developed to perform this task was the astrolabe. Its engraved plates reproduce the celestial sphere in two dimensions, allowing the elevations of the celestial bodies to be measured. ’ COSMIC CHARACTERS 100-170 Resurrected and compiled the works of great Greek astronomers into two books. His postulates held undisputed authority for centuries. Heliocentric Model SS > In 1543, a few months before his death, ow Nicolaus Copernicus published the book De revolutionibus orbium coelestium, inaugurating what is now known as the Copernican Revolution. The Polish astronomer developed the heliocentric theory (from helios, the Greek word for “the Sun"), which contradicted the ~* geocentric theory. Copernicus's new postulate inverted the argued that spheres moved in endless, circular orbits. Since the universe and all the celestial bodies were thought to be spherical, he argued that their movements must also be circular and uniform (the Ptolemaic system considered the planets’ circuits to be irregular). Copernicus reasoned that, since the movements of the planets appeared to be irregular, the Earth must not be the center of the universe. These discoveries were contrary to the views promulgated by the Roman Catholic Church. In fact, both Roman Catholics and N traditional relationship of Protestants suppressed y the Sun and the Earth, any writings \ . identifying the Sun as advocating these beliefs. a X the center of the When Galileo Galilei was ' universe and the Earth as one of many solar satellites. Copernicus = brought to trial by the Roman 7 Catholic Church for + advocating the Copernican. . Dy theory, he was forced to . renounce his views. ae ne d Ee. \ *GALILEO’S TELESCOPE ; The telescope is thought to have been inverted in 1609 by the Dutch optician Hans Lippershey but had no real scientific application until Galileo Galilei improved and adapted it to observe * celestial bodies. Galileo's first telescope, made ofa * leather tube covered by a lens at each end one lens convex and the other concave), magnified * objects up to 30 times. Using the telescope, Galileo discovered that the Sun's surface had imperfections (sunspots), that the Moon had mountains and craters, and that there were four moons, or ) satellites, that traveled around Jupiter. a THE TRAVELERS After many years and great advancements in technology, scientists decided that space . observation conducted only from the Earth's surface was insufficient. In 1959, the first space probe was launched, an automatic vehicle that flew to the Moon and photographed its hidden face. The space probes Voyager 1 and 2 explored the planets Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus, and Neptune, a milestone in space exploration. In 2005, Voyager 1 reached the region called TIME This astrolabe was used by ancient Persians. To them, sSconeny ? t) © Termination Shock, the frontier of the solar functioned as a kind 4 F of agricultural NX system, representing the farthest region explored calendar. . by humanity. Both probes carried with them golden discs, named Sounds of Earth, containing sounds and images portraying the diversity of life on Earth. “37th Centar: 17th Century ‘Yohannes Kepler. . Galileo Galilei 1473-1543 1571-1630 ae SOMO AZ 1642-1727 1889-1953 ®) (Built the first telescope, a primitive device with which he formulated three famous laws of -- discovered sunspots, four of The German astronomer, believer "k in Copernicus's heliocentric model, In his De revolutionibus orbium coelestium, the Polish astronomer postulated that the Sun—not the Earth—was the center of the universe. This concept is the foundation of our own astronomy.. He built upon the ideas of Galileo and developed the theory of universal gravitation, asserting that the movements of the Earth and the celestial bodies are governed by the same natural laws. In 1929, he began to investigate the expansion of the galaxies, allowing scientists to obtain an idea of the true scale of the universe as well as refine the big bang theory. Jupiter's moons, the phases of Venus, and craters on the Moon's surface. planetary movement, which ~ encouraged Galileo to publish his research. 84 OBSERVING THE UNIVERSE “e. } ; é ae aa ze . UNIVERSE 85 a ALM ES, ational eee ia a eat! ae : e Chil Orionis ae * . s ; ° ° . . . . : Sp l | i i kled W it} l Star S . Mythological Characters aa Different Cultures : , Since ancient times, animal figures have been Orionis Katis >. * y ite eo ® Magallanic Cloud AA | ~ Borealis A. ete mr . | “ © scan boot Volans . } Shanta . LATITUDES Mi raat aia - Atria : bed : sia some stars can be seen * rAun Pictor e cari pies: = “ ° / all year long, but others : (ewe . . Athague Draco Minor x hs Allien . > Ps -» coeab . sn : : Fou {Gemini f J Lynx f. a Castor @ 7 t . ed ¢ Corona Polinx@® « : Py . ’ Borealis ©. Mizar ' Canis ° . Minor 4 Alioth THE CELESTIAL i OF handle room phere SPHERE aw ’ uw 6 P a ee Serpens x The celestial sphere is imagined to Can extend around the Earth and forms Seal 7 = ee aa aaer gx the basis for modern star ve Bootes Cor Ce: - & cartography. The sphere is divided into Caroli »«e * xk ; a network of lines and coordinates . Po Yr Hydra (e) corresponding to those used on the Earth, Abetesibn : a vale # =a y & allowing an observer to locate constellations / pe nee x on the sphere. The celestial equator is a Coma a a > projection of the Earth's equator, the north and \ Berenices c PG ee sir: Re male r Ay south celestial poles align with the axis of the Earth, f a ee ae . Yy and the elliptic coincides with the path along which Pe nee ae ers, 1 iso Ras the Sun appears to move. e a9 emebils buw , 4 a 10 S Virgo A cn So ae L oe «> Measuring Distances ee oF g FULL MOON yw? THE SQUARE Once a star or constellation has been r BIG DIPPER OF PEGASUS located in the sky, hands and arms can serve as simple measuring tools. A single C) . (i) : extended finger, shown in the first u O eS) u illustration, can form a one-degree angle : ' from the observer's line of sight and is useful 1 a! for measuring short distances between stars. 5 5 The closed palm of the hand forms a 10° : i angle, and the open hand measures 20°. - f i ' : ONE FINGER CLOSED HAND OPEN HAND ii ies oe ee Norma a pes Circinus ° ; "Musca ® . Exgorp tS q 4 “95 ss Alpha ‘entaurt meg ‘ + Ac ee ; Monocerus fg . a 2 oe a aK. VA ve Vela Y Ui Hadar et Sefer LS Sur 2 bg Of Sait \ ie . 2 Lan ww 1 Pyxis f ° . i eal es ° ‘Centanrus ~ é oO ° : ° Antlia Menkent 2 - . . ig * Zabertesetamall o : she Lf 4 Oo . = ~ La <=. WE “Tabenelgennht ae 5 : F, seed = it A. me . - / } wars v ai) Corvus ” Algorab Different Types of Charts Throughout the year, different constellations are visible because the Earth moves along its orbit. As the Earth's place in its orbit changes, the night side of the planet faces different regions of space. To compensate for this shifting perspective, there are various kinds of planispheres: north and south polar maps and bimonthly equatorial maps. POLAR and south. Attire J Graffias The celestial sphere is generally divided into two polar maps: AT THE EQUATOR stars can be seen throughout the year, rising in the east and setting in the west. EQUATORIAL Six bimonthly maps depict all 88 constellations, which can be seen over the course of the year. north 88 OBSERVING THE UNIVERSE “ ; aa UNIVERSE 89 ) : SHOOTING STARS MOON yy | O Il | i ft : eC | t O i I i e e Garden [ 2 : = Se Observable Objects Very short flashes of The illuminated face of : J —— . light lasting only a the Moon can always be : = The sky is a very busy place. Not only are there stars “actin Gia Seenitl P meentaticonrentinge ‘ining ~\ and planets, but there are also satellites, airplanes, the night, at least partially, except around the new moon. targazing is not difficult. After learning to locate colestial objects, many * people find the hobby very gratifying. With the aid of a star map, you can recognize galaxies, nebulae, star clusters, planets, and other objects. Some _ comets, and meteorites. Fortunately all become recognizable by their appearance as well as their movement. \ of these treasures of the universe are visible with the unaided eye, but.others X @ vs oe SATELLITES COMETS \ can generally be seen The bigger ones are visible to the naked eye require binoculars or even more eres TelescOnes Familiarity with the - \ Fe ae aia ete oe Salata Bs ayniee ; night sky i IS useful i In many Ways. @. 24. e . ; dusk or dawn. Some take a while to cross years and are visible for S : the sky. weeks or even months. Basics Shigee a, ce, . ire bee BARREL Before stepping out to observe the night sky, make sure you have everything you need. Tf you collect all your supplies beforehand, you will avoid. having to expose your eyes to bright-light once they have adjusted to darkness. In addition to binoculars, star maps, and a notebook, you should bring warm clothes, a comfortable seat, and something to drink. Flat Perspective A constellation is a group of stars that, when viewed from a certain angle, seem to assume a specific shape. However, these stars that seem closely joined together are, in fact, separated by great distances. o__—————_ OBJECTIVE OPTIC TUBE 17,000 LIGHT-YEARS FROM EARTH OMEGA Planisphere = ‘ Compass Se Flashlight with vie . . ’ red cellophane How to Look at the Moon Under various degrees of magnification, the Moon and,stars : take on different appearances. In some cases, you can make observations of the Moon with the unaided eye as well as ~ with binoculars.or a telescope. *. 4 - A y _— er Focusin “fe _ WHEE LIGHT-YEARS : FROM EARTH = Measurement methods CENTAURI = A planisphere is a circular star chart that is used to locate celestial bodies in the celestial sphere. To identify 10 TIMES 50 TO 100 FOCUSING a particular object, your own arms and body can be used to LARGER TIMES LARGER EYEPIECE measure its direction and altitude in relation to the horizon. Normal F F : View with aH view ee a aoe as fslescope ZA, , f MEASUREMENT OF ELEVATION MEASURING DIRECTION A M4 oO oO oO ADJUSTMENT Ge 90) . . 90) A5 - } SCREW THE MOTION OF ; releas CONSTELLATIONS ‘ The Earth's rotation makes the 9:00 P.M. planets and stars appear to move through the nighttime sky in a general east-to-west .direction. When the southern constellation Orion, visible from "UPITER 3:00 AM. Horizon November through March, is Starting at the horizon, To measure a 45° angle, move The planisphere indicates the A star to the southwest could viewed from the Northern extend one of your arms your arm halfway up from the principal direction of a star. be located with your arms at Hemisphere, it appears to move EAST SOUTH WEST until it is perpendicular to horizon. Place the arms at 902, using 45°. Combine the directional from left to right. : the other. north or south as the base. angles with your hand measurements for elevation. 90 OBSERVING THE UNIVERSE A Four-Eyed Giant he Paranal Observatory, one of the most advanced in the world, is located in the region of Antofagasta, Chile. It uses four identical telescopes to obtain enough light- gathering power that it could see the flame of a candle on the surface of the Moon. This sophisticated collection of digital cameras, reflecting mirrors, and other instruments is mounted in the interior of four metallic structures weighing hundreds of tons. The Very Large Telescope (VLT) is operated by a scientific consortium drawn from eight European countries. One of their stated objectives is to discover new worlds orbiting other stars. © CLIMATIC CONDITIONS Cerro Paranal is located in the driest part of the Atacama desert, where the conditions for astronomical observation are extraordinarily favorable. It is an 8,645-foot- (2,635-m-) tall mountain that has about 350 cloudless nights a year. 10.9 0.06 (750) (0.96) LB PER SQ IN (MBAR) LB PER CU FT (KG/M3) Air pressure Air density ARMILLARY SPHERE Invented by Eratosthenes in the year 225 BC, it was used as a teaching aid and became especially popular in the Middle Ages thanks to Danish astronomer Tycho Brahe. MAOU 2500-2000 BC STONEHENGE Located in Wiltshire, England, it is an observatory temple dating from the Neolithic Period. @— DOME Its protective cover perceives changes q in the weather by \ means of thermal Telescope ee tee “ units 4 + MELIPAL KUEYEN ANTU YEPUN jo; Light iceloeaniea’s tunnels for Men 2 og NL) interferometry There are four, each 59 feet (1.8 m) in diameter. They assist with interferometry. Rails to transport the AT AD Ce rr : The Telescope The main feature of the VLT is its revolutionary optical design. By WIT using adaptive and active optics, it achieves ! resolution similar to that possible from space. ACTIVE OPTICS — 39-foot- (1.2-m-) diameter secondary mirror Mechanical 435-455 BC CARACOL It is located in the ruins of the Mayan city of Chichén Itza. The structure was used for venerating the Sun, the Moon, and Venus. structure ADAPTIVE OPTICS 150-piston cell UNIVERSE 91 Cerro Paranal Observatory The ESO's Very Large Telescope is located to the north of the Atacama desert, on Cerro Paranal. Completed in 2006, it has four 26.9-foot- (8.2-m-) wide reflector telescopes capable of observing objects four billion times fainter than those visible to the unaided eye. It also has three 5.9-foot- (1.8-m-) wide movable auxiliary telescopes that are used in conjunction with the larger ones to simulate the light-gathering power of a 52-foot- (16-m-) wide mirror (with the resolution of a 656-foot- [200-m-] long telescope). This is enough to see an astronaut on the Moon. The above technique is called interferometry. 215,000 SQ FT (20,000 SQ M) TOTAL SURFACE 7,109 FEET (2,365 M) ABOVE SEA LEVEL ADAPTIVE OPTICS To prevent the primary mirror from deforming because of gravitational effects, the VLT has an adaptive optics system that maintains the mirror in optimal shape, with 150 supporting pistons that continually adjust the shape of the mirror. ACRONYM FOR Very Large Telescope 1888 1897 1979 LICK YERKES MAUNA KEA Located in India, it was built Located on 4,265-foot- (1,300- Located in Wisconsin, it An international complex by the maharajah Sawai Jai m-) high Mount Hamilton. It contains the largest located in Hawaii, with large Singh and has a large sextant was the first observatory to refracting telescope in British, French-American, and and a meridional chamber. be located on a mountain. the world. American observatories Light Reflected Yy enters light beam Uncorrected Yj vision '— Curved Corrected mirror vision 92 GLOSSARY Annihilation Total destruction of matter in a burst of energy, as when it encounters antimatter. Antigravity Hypothesized force, equal to gravity and diametrically opposed to it. Antimatter Matter formed from subatomic particles with shared properties. Its electrical charge is opposite that of normal matter. Aperture Diameter of the main mirror of a telescope or eyepiece. The larger the aperture, the more light the device receives. Aphelion The point in a celestial body's orbit farthest from the Sun. The Earth reaches aphelion on or about July 4, when it is 95,000,000 miles (152, 600,000 km) from the Sun. Apogee The farthest position from the Earth reached by the Moon or any of the artificial satellites that orbit the planet. Asteroids Minor bodies of the solar system, formed by rock, metal, or a mixture of both. Most asteroids orbit the Sun between the orbits of Mars and Jupiter. Their size ranges from dozens of feet to hundreds of miles. Astrolabe Ancient astronomical instrument for measuring both the positions and the movements of celestial objects. Astronomy Science that studies the universe. It is concerned with the physical characteristics, movements, distances, formation, and interactions of galaxies, stars, planets, moons, comets, asteroids, and other celestial bodies. Atmosphere Layer of gas retained around a planet by its gravity. It is also the outer layer of matter in a star, where the energy produced in the star's interior is emitted in the form of radiation. Atom The smallest part of an element that partakes of all the element's properties. It is generally composed of three subatomic particles: the neutron, the proton, and the electron. Aurora Luminous phenomenon, with red and green layers, visible in the skies of the polar regions. The auroras are caused by the collision of solar particles with the Earth's atmosphere. Austral Related to the Southern Hemisphere. Big Bang Cosmological theory asserting that the universe began to exist as a result of a great explosion that occurred some 14 billion years ago. Big Crunch Cosmological theory asserting that the universe would undergo a final, complete collapse if it were to begin to contract. Black Hole Celestial body so dense that not even light can escape its gravity. Black Hole, Stellar-Mass Black hole produced by the explosion of a massive star as a supernova. Its mass is typically about 10 times that of the Sun. Black Hole, Supermassive Black hole located at the center of a galaxy and formed by material that falls into the central region of the galaxy. Its mass can be a billion times that of the Sun. Carbon One of the most common elements in the universe, produced by stars. All known life is carbon-based. Chromosphere The lowest layer of the Sun's atmosphere. It emits a pinkish-red light that can be seen only when the brighter photosphere is obscured during a total eclipse. Circumpolar Star Any star always visible to an observer on the Earth as it rotates about the celestial pole. Comet Object made of ice and rock dust. When a comet approaches the Sun, the growing heat causes the ice to evaporate, forming a gaseous head and a tail of dust and gas pointing away from the Sun. Constellation Group of stars in the sky. Constellations tend to bear the names of mythological characters or creatures. To astronomers, the constellations demarcate regions of the sky. Core Ina planet, a solid, high-pressure central mass; in a star, the central region undergoing nuclear fusion; in a galaxy, the innermost light-years. Corona Upper atmosphere of the Sun. It is visible as a pearly halo during a total solar eclipse. Cosmos Another name for the universe. Crater Circular depression formed by the impact of a meteorite on the surface of a natural satellite or a planet. Crust Rocky layer of the surface of a planet or natural satellite. Curvature of Light Distortion of light rays when passing through regions with strong gravitation. Decay Process by which radioactive elements and unstable particles become stable substances. Also the way in which black holes eventually disappear. Density Degree of solidity of a body (its mass divided by its volume). Eclipse Visual concealment of one celestial body by another. A lunar eclipse occurs when the Moon passes into the Earth's shadow, and a solar eclipse takes place when the Earth passes into the Moon's shadow. Ecliptic Imaginary line around the sky along which the Sun moves during the year. The orbits of the Earth and the other planets generally lie along the ecliptic. Electrical Charge Property of particles causing them to either attract or repel each other because of electrical forces. Electrical charges are either positive or negative. Electromagnetic Radiation Radiation composed of magnetic and electric fields moving at the speed of light. It encompasses radio waves (long wavelengths), visible light, and gamma rays (very short wavelengths). Element A basic substance of nature that cannot be diminished without losing its chemical properties. Each element (such as hydrogen, helium, carbon, oxygen) has its own characteristics. Elliptical Orbit Orbit shaped like a flattened circle. All orbits are elliptical. A circle is a special form of an ellipse. Energy The capacity to do work. Event Horizon The edge of a black hole. Extraterrestrial Foreign to the Earth. Force Something that changes the motion or shape of a body. Galactic Filament Structure formed by superclusters of galaxies stretching out through great portions of space. Filaments are the largest structures in the universe and are separated by great voids. Galaxy Collection of billions of stars, nebulae, dust, and interstellar gas held together by gravity. Galaxy Cluster Group of galaxies linked together by gravity. Gamma Rays Form of electromagnetic radiation with greatest energy and shortest wavelength. It is generated by only the most powerful phenomena in the universe, such as supernovae or the fusion of neutron stars. UNIVERSE 93 General Relativity Theory formulated by Albert Einstein in 1915. In part, it holds that gravity is a natural consequence of the curvature of space-time caused by the presence of a massive body. In general relativity, the phenomena of classical mechanics (such as the orbit of a planet or the fall of an object) are caused by gravity and are represented as inertial movements within space-time. Gravitational Wave Waves in space that travel at the speed of light and are produced by the movements of very massive bodies. Gravity Attractive force between bodies, such as between the Earth and the Moon. Greenhouse Effect Temperature increase caused by gases (such as carbon dioxide and methane) that prevent the surface heat of a planet from escaping into space. Heliosphere The region of space around the Sun in which its effects are evident. It extends some 100 astronomical units around the Sun. Helium The second most common and second lightest element in the universe. It is a product of the big bang and of nuclear fusion of stars. Hubble Constant Number that measures the rate of expansion of the universe. It is expressed in kilometers per second per millions of parsecs. It is currently estimated at 70 km/s/Mpc. Hydrogen The most common and lightest element in the universe; the main component of stars and galaxies. 94 GLOSSARY UNIVERSE 95 Hypernova Destruction of a massive star, which emits a wave of gamma rays extending great distances across the universe. Implosion Collapse of a body upon itself in response to great external pressure. Infrared Radiation Heat radiation, with a wavelength between visible light and radio waves. Intergalactic Space Space between galaxies. Interstellar Space Space between the stars. Ionosphere Region of the Earth's atmosphere that is electrically charged and is located between 30 and 370 miles (50 and 600 km) from the Earth's surface. Kuiper Belt Region of the solar system that is home to millions of frozen objects, such as comets. It stretches from the orbit of Neptune to the inner limit of the Oort cloud. Light Electromagnetic radiation with a wavelength visible to the human eye. Light Pollution Brightness of the sky originating in street illumination and other artificial lighting, which impedes the observation of dim celestial objects. Light-Year Standard astronomical measurement unit equivalent to the distance traveled by light, or any form of electromagnetic radiation, in one year. Equivalent to 6,000,000,000,000 miles (10,000,000,000,000 km). Lunar Mare The large, dark regions of the surface of the Moon. They were originally thought to be seas, but they are actually great depressions covered by lava. Magnetic Field The area near a magnetic body, electric current, or changing electric field. Planets, stars, and galaxies have magnetic fields that extend into space. Magnetosphere Sphere that surrounds a planet with a magnetic field strong enough to protect the planet from the solar wind. Mantle Layer that lies between the crust and the core of a planet. Mass Measure of the amount of matter in an object. Matter The substance of a physical object, it occupies a portion of space. Meteorite Rocky or metallic object that strikes the surface of a planet or satellite, where it can form a crater. Milky Way The galaxy to which the Sun and the solar system belong. It is visible as a pale band of light that crosses our night sky. Molecule Smallest unit of a pure substance that has the composition and chemical properties of the substance. It is formed by one or more atoms. Moon The Earth's natural satellite is called the Moon. The natural satellites of other planets are commonly known as moons and have their own proper names. Nebulae Clouds of gas and dust in space. Nebulae can be seen when they reflect starlight or when they obstruct light from sources behind them. Neutron Electrically neutral subatomic particle. It makes up part of an atom's nucleus (with the exception of ordinary hydrogen). Neutron Star Collapsed star consisting mostly of neutrons. Nova Star that increases greatly in brightness for several days or weeks and then slowly fades. Most novae probably occur in binary-star systems in which a white dwarf draws in matter from its companion star. Nuclear Fusion Nuclear reaction in which relatively light elements (such as hydrogen) form heavier elements (such as helium). Nuclear fusion is the source of energy that makes stars shine. Oxygen Chemical element vital to life and to the expansion of the universe. Oxygen makes up 21 percent of the Earth's atmosphere. Particle In particle physics, a tiny, individual component of matter with characteristic mass, electrical charge, and other properties. Perihelion The point in a celestial body's orbit closest to the Sun. The Earth reaches perihelion on or about January 4, when it is 92,000,000 miles (147,500,000 km) from the Sun. Photon Elemental particle responsible for electromagnetic radiation. Photons are the most common particles in the universe. Planet Roughly spherical object made of rocks or gas orbiting a star. A planet cannot generate its own light but reflects the light of its parent star. Polestar Polaris, a star that lies near the celestial north pole. Polaris is commonly called the North Star. Over thousands of years, other stars will become the polestar. Proton Subatomic particle with positive electrical charge. It forms part of the nucleus of an atom. Radio Galaxy Active galaxy emitting energy as both radio waves and light. Most of the radio emission originates at the core of the galaxy. Solar Flare Immense explosion produced on the surface of the Sun by the collision of two loops of the solar magnetic field. Solar Mass Standard unit of mass against which other objects in the universe can be compared. The Sun has 333,000 times as much mass as the Earth. Space The medium through which all celestial bodies move. Space-Time Four-dimensional conception of the universe in which length, width, and height constitute three dimensions and time acts as the fourth. Spectral Analysis Study of spectral lines that provide information about the composition of stars or galaxies and their redshifts. Spectrum The result of dispersing the electromagnetic radiation of an object so that the wavelengths of which it is composed can be seen. Dark lines that originate from elements that are present and punctuate the spectrum at specific wavelengths reveal the composition of the object. Speed of Light The distance traveled by light in a vacuum in one second (approximately 186,000 miles, or 300,000 km). No object can move faster than the speed of light. Star Enormous sphere of gas (generally hydrogen) that radiates light and heat. The Sun is a star. Star Cluster Group of stars linked together by gravity. Open clusters are scattered groups of several hundred stars. Globular clusters are dense spheres of several million old stars. Sunspots Dark, relatively cool spots on the surface of the Sun. They tend to be located on either side of the solar equator and are created by the solar magnetic field. Supernova Explosion of a massive star at the end of its life. Tide The effect of the gravitational pull of one astronomical object upon the surface of another. Ocean tides on Earth are an example. Unstable Tendency to change from one state into another less energetic one. Radioactive elements decay into more stable elements. Vacuum Space occupied by little or no matter. Van Allen Belt Radiation zone surrounding the Earth, where the Earth's magnetic field traps solar particles. Wavelength Distance between the peaks of any wave of electromagnetic radiation. Radiation with a short wavelength (such as X-rays) has more energy than radiation with a longer wavelength (such as radio waves). Zenith Point in the sky 90° above the horizon (that is, immediately above an observer). Zodiac Twelve constellations through which the Sun, the Moon, and the planets appear to move. 96 INDEX UNIVERSE 97 Index A accretion disc, 30, 34, 35, 37 active galaxy, 34-35 adaptive optics system, 91 annular solar eclipse, 78 Antennae (NGC 4038 and NGC 4039), galactic collisions, 32-33 anti-gravity, 15, 16 antimatter, 10 antiparticle, 10, 11 aphelion, 75 Aristarchus of Samus, 82 Aristotle, 82 armillary sphere, 82, 90 asteroid (minor planet), 5, 63 asteroid belt, 40, 41, 63 astrolabe, 82 astrology, zodiac, 84-85 astronomy, 40, 80-91 big bang theory, 10, 12, 13, 14, 15, 32, 34, 83 geocentric model, 82 heliocentric model, 83 Roman Catholic Church opposition, 82, 83 See also space exploration; stargazing atmosphere Earth, 46, 66, 68, 70, 71 Jupiter, 50 lunar eclipse, 79 Mars, 49 Mercury, 45 Neptune, 57 Pluto, 59 Saturn, 53 solar, 42 thickness, 71 Uranus, 54, 55 Venus, 46 atom, 10, 11, 12, 16, 17, 31 attraction, forces of nature, 16, 17, 31 B baby universe, 15 Babylon, 85 background radiation, 11, 15 big bang theory, 10, 12, 13, 14, 15, 32, 34, 83 Big Crunch, 14, 15 bimonthly star map, 86 black dwarf (star), 23 black hole, 4, 15, 19 active galaxies, 34 anti-gravity, 15, 16 discovery, 30 formation, 22, 23, 29, 30 gravitational force, 30, 31 Milky Way, 37 temperature, 35 blazar (galaxy), 35 blueshift, Doppler effect, 21 Butterfly Nebula (M2-9), 26 C calendar, 5, 74, 82 carbon, 12, 24 Cassini division, rings of Saturn, 52 Cat's Eye Nebula (NGC 6542), 26-27 celestial cartography, 86-87 See also star chart celestial equator, 86, 87 celestial sphere, 86, 87 Ceres (asteroid), 63 Cerro Paranal Observatory: See Paranal Astronomical Observatory Chandrasekhar limit, stellar collapse, 26 Charon (moon of Pluto), 58 chromosphere, 43 clock, 74, 82 closed universe, 14 color, stars, 20-21 comet, 5, 64-65, 89 formation, 65 Gacobini-Zinner, 64 Halley's, 64 Kuiper belt, 6, 60, 64 missions to, 64 parts, 64, 65 types, 64 condensation, 69 Cone Nebula, 4 constellation, 5, 84-85 Andromeda, 9, 85 Aquarius, 85, 87 Aries, 84, 86 Cancer, 74, 86 Capricorn, 85, 87 Cassiopeia, 85 celestial sphere, 86-87 Centaur, 85 cultural interpretations, 85 discovery, 84 flat perspective, 89 Gemini, 74, 86 Leo, 84, 86 Libra, 85, 87 locating, 86, 88-89 measuring distances, 86 motion, 88 mystery of Giza, 85 mythological characters, 85 naming, 84 near equator, 84 number, 84 observing, 84, 88-89 Ophiuchus, 85 origin, 84 Orion, 85, 88 Perseus, 85 Pisces, 84, 86 Sagittarius, 37, 85, 87 Scorpius, 85, 87 sky changes, 84 Taurus, 74, 85, 86 Ursa Major, 85 Virgo, 85, 87 zodiac, 84-85, 86-87 continental drift, 72-73 Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), 75 Copernican Revolution, 83 Copernicus, Nicholas, 5, 82 corona (Sun), 43 cosmic inflation theory, 10, 11 cosmic void, 8 cosmos: See universe Crab Nebula (M1), 29 crater Earth, 62 Mercury, 44 Moon, 77 creation, 10-11 big bang theory, 10, 12, 13, 14, 15, 32, 34, 83 cosmic inflation, 10, 11 time and temperature, 10-13 critical mass, 14, 15 curvature of space-time, 16, 31 D dark energy, 13, 14 dark matter, 4, 6-7, 11, 12, 13 declination, 87 dew, 69 dinosaur, mass extinction, 62 Doppler effect, 21, 32 double planet, 58 dwarf planet, 5, 57, 58, 60, 61 See also Pluto E E=mc? (equation), 16 Earth, 39, 41, 66-75 aerial view, 66-67 aphelion, 75 atmosphere, 46, 66, 68, 70, 71 axis inclination, 69, 74, 75 center of universe, 4, 5, 82 chronology, 73 comparison to Mars, 48 composition, 70 continental drift, 72 continental penetration, 70 cooling, 73 distance from Sun, 68 eclipses, 78-79 equinox and solstice, 74, 75 essential data, 69 evolutionary process, 62 formation, 13, 72-73 geographical coordinates, 75 gravity, 69 hydrosphere, 71 internal structure, 70-71 lithosphere, 71 magnetic field, 69, 70 magnetic inversion, 54 moon and tides, 68, 76-77 movements, 74-75 night sky, 84-85, 88-89 nutation, 74 oceanic penetration, 70 oceans, 68, 73 one day, 72 orbit, 75 origin, 8, 73 ozone layer, 71 perihelion, 74 revolution, 68, 74 rotation, 21, 68, 74 solar radiation, 71 thermosphere, 71 tides, 76 time zones, 75 water, 68-69, 71, 73 earthquake, 72 eclipse, 78-79 lunar, 79 observation from Earth, 79 solar, 78 Einstein, Albert, 16 electromagnetism, 11, 16, 17, 69 electron, 10, 11, 12 elliptical galaxy, 33 energy, 16, 34, 42 Enke division, 52 equinox, autumn and spring, 74 Eris, Kuiper belt objects, 61 Eta Carinae Nebula, 18-19, 29, 36 evaporation, 68 event horizon, black holes, 31 evolution, timeline, 72-73 extrasolar planet, discovery, 61 F filament, 9,12, 29 flat perspective, 89 flat universe, 14, 16 forces of nature, 16-17 electromagnetism, 11, 16, 17, 69 gravity, 11, 14, 16, 69, 76 nuclear interactions, 11, 16, 17 unified, 11, 16 fossil, 73 frost, 69 G Gacobini-Zinner comet, 64 galactic cluster, 33 galaxy, 8, 9 active, 34-35 anatomy, 32-33 classification, 33, 35 clusters, 33 collision, 19, 32-33 energy emission, 34 expansion, 8, 83 formation, 12, 32, 33, 35 galactic clusters, 33 Mice, The, 32 Milky Way, 5, 8, 32, 33, 36-37 number, 9 shape, 12, 32 98 INDEX UNIVERSE 99 stabilization, 35 subclassification, 33 superclusters, 9, 19 total number, 9 types, 32 Galileo Galilei, 5, 36, 51, 83 Gamow, George, 15 gas, 12, 34, 37 general theory of relativity, 16, 31 geocentric model (astronomical theory), 82 geology, 73 Gliese (star), extrasolar planet, 61 globular cluster, 21 gluon, 10, 11, 17 graviton, 10 gravity (gravitation), 11, 12, 14, 16, 17 black holes, 30, 31 dark matter, 7 Earth, 69 galaxy formation, 12, 34, 35 Jupiter and asteroid belt, 41 Milky Way, 37 moon, 76 Newton's theory, 16, 17 precipitation, 69 Sun, 40, 41 tides, 76 weight, 69 Great Dark Spot (Neptune), 57 Great Red Spot (Jupiter), 50, 51 greenhouse effect, Venus, 46 Greenwich meridian, 75 Guth, Alan, 11 H hail, 69 Halley, Edward, 33 Halley's comet, 64 Hawking, Stephen, 5, 14 heliocentric model (astronomical theory), 83 helium, 11, 12, 17, 20, 22, 24, 42, 57 Helix Nebula (NGC 7293), 27 Hercules Cluster (NGC 6205), 33 Hertzsprung-Russell diagram (H-R diagram), 20, 24, 25 Homo sapiens, first appearance, 13, 72, 73 Hourglass Nebula (MYCN 18), 27 Hubble, Edwin, 15, 32, 33, 83 Hubble Space Telescope, 55, 58 hydrogen, 11, 12, 17, 20, 21, 22, 24, 26, 42, 57 Ida (asteroid), 63 impact crater, 44, 62, 77 inner planet, 41 interferometry, 91 International Astronomical Union, 57, 60 intrinsic luminosity, stars, 20 iron meteorite, 62 irregular galaxy, 33 J jet lag, 75 Jupiter, 41, 50-51 missions to, 51, 83 K Kant, Immanuel, 32 Kepler, Johannes, 40, 82, 83 Kirkwood gap, asteroid belt, 63 Kuiper belt, 5, 59, 60-61, 64 L Large Magellanic Cloud (galaxy), 28, 36 latitude, 75, 87 life, existence of, 5, 8, 12, 68, 72-73, 83 light bending, 17 spectral analysis, 20, 21 light-year, 8, 20 longitude, 75, 87 luminosity, stars, 20-21, 24, 25 lunar eclipse, 79 M macrospicule, 43 magnetic field, 37, 45, 51, 54, 69 magnetic inversion, 54 magnetosphere, 51 main sequence, stellar life cycle, 20 map, celestial cartography, 86-87 Mars, 39, 41, 48-49 exploration, 48-49 Olympus Mons, 38-39, 49 mass, 16, 17 matter, 10, 11, 12, 13, 30 Mercury, 41, 44-45 mesosiderite (meteorite), 62 meteorite, 62-63 See also asteroid methane, 58 Mice, The (NGC 4676), galactic collision, 32 Milky Way, 5, 8, 32, 33, 35, 36-37 moon Earth: See Moon Galilean, 51 Jupiter, 51 Mars, 48 Neptune, 56 Pluto, 58 Saturn, 52 Uranus, 55 Moon (Earth's), 68, 76-77, 89 eclipses, 79 landscape, 77, 83 looking at, 88 mythology, constellations, 85 N neap tide, 76 nebula, 22 Butterfly, 26 Cat's Eye, 26-27 Cone, 4 Crab, 29 Eta Carinae, 18-19, 29, 36 Helix, 27 Hourglass, 27 NGC 6751, 25 planetary, 3, 22, 23, 25, 26 solar, 72 Spirograph, 26 Neptune, 40, 56-57 missions to, 56, 83 orbit, 60-61 neutrino, 11, 17, 42 neutron, 11, 17, 42 neutron star, 22, 23, 29, 31 Newton, Isaac, 16, 17, 83 NGC 6751 (nebula), 25 1987a supernova, 28 nuclear interaction, 11, 16, 17 O observation: See stargazing observatory Caracol, 90 Jaipur, 90-91 Lick, 90 Mauna Kea, 90 Paranal, 90 Stonehenge, 80-81, 90-91 Yerkes, 90 ocean, creation, 73 Olympus Mons (Mars), 38-39, 49 Omega Centauri (star cluster), 21 Oort cloud (region of Solar System), 60, 64 open cluster, 21 open universe, 15 orbit, 40 Earth, 75 Eris, 60-61 Mars, 48 Mercury, 44, 45 Neptune, 60 Pluto, 58, 59, 60-61 Saturn, 60 Uranus, 60 outer planet, 40 ozone layer, 68, 71 P parallax, 21 parallels, geographical coordinates, 75 Paranal Astronomical Observatory, 90, 91 See also Very Large Telescope parsec, 20 partial eclipse lunar, 79 solar, 78 penumbra, 43, 78, 79 penumbral lunar eclipse, 79 Penzias, Arno, 15 perihelion, 74 phase Moon, 77 Venus, 47 photon, 10, 12, 42 photosphere, Sun, 43 planet, 5, 40-41 extrasolar discovery, 61 formation, 41, 62 inner, 41 irregular movement, 83 observation, 89 orbits, 40 outer, 40 remnant materials, 62 revolution, 40 See also under specific name, for example Earth; Mars planetary nebula, 1, 22, 23, 25, 26 planetesimal, 41 planisphere (star wheel), 86, 88, 89 plasma, 43 plate tectonics, Earth, 73 Pleiades, The (star formation), 21 Pluto, 5, 58-59 diameter, 60, 61 orbit, 58, 59, 60-61 polar star map, 86 Pope, Alexander, 55 positron, 11, 42 precipitation, 69 protogalaxy 12 proton, 11, 12,17, 42 protostar, 22 Ptolemy, Claudius, 4, 5, 82 pulsar, 19, 29, 31 Q Quaoar, Kuiper belt objects, 60, 61 quark, 10, 11, 17 quasar, 19, 34, 35 R radiation, 10, 11, 12, 29 background, 11, 15 solar, 41, 67, 71, 76 radio galaxy, 35 rain, 69 red giant (star), 23, 24, 25, 31 red planet: See Mars red supergiant (star), 23, 24 redshift, Doppler effect, 21, 32 relativity, general theory of, 16, 31 repulsion, forces of nature, 17 rift, 72 right ascension, 87 100 INDEX UNIVERSE 101 ring system Jupiter, 51 Neptune, 56 Saturn, 52 Uranus, 55 S Sagittarius A and B (gas clouds), 37 Saros period, eclipses, 79 satellite, 5,55, 56, 59 See also moon Saturn, 40, 52-53 missions to, 83 orbit, 60-61 Scorpius (region of space), 20-21 Sedna, diameter, 61 self-generated universe, 15 Shakespeare, William, 55 shooting star, 62, 89 snow, 69 solar eclipse, 78-79 solar flare, 43 solar nebula, 72 solar prominence, 43 solar radiation, 41, 67, 71, 76 Solar System, 5, 38-65 components, 39, 40-41 Earth, 39, 41, 66-67 Eris, 61 formation, 13 inner planets, 41 Jupiter, 40, 41, 50-51 Mars, 39, 41, 48-49 Mercury, 41, 44-45 Neptune, 40, 56-57 origin, 60 outer planets, 40 Pluto, 5, 58-59 Saturn, 40, 52-53 “Termination Shock” region, 83 Uranus, 40, 54-55 Venus, 41, 46-47 solar wind, 43, 49, 51, 69 solstice, summer and winter, 74, 75 Sombrero Galaxy, 32-33 Sounds of Earth (Voyager recording), 83 space exploration, 44, 47, 48, 49, 55, 56, 64, 76, 83 space-time, 16 spatial dimension, 14 spectral class, stars, 20 spectrum, 21 spicule, 43 spiral galaxy, 32, 33 Spirograph Nebula (IC 418), 26 spring tide, 76 star, 84-85 black dwarf, 23, 24 blue, 20 brightness, 20 calendar, 5, 82 celestial sphere, 86-87 chart: See star chart color, 20 composition, 12, 20, 21, 29 constellations, 37, 74, 84-85, 88 convection cells, 24 core, 24, 28, 31 death, 24-25, 28, 29 distance from Earth, 20, 21 Doppler effect, 21 dust grains, 25 end, 29 final darkness, 30-31 formation, 12, 22-23, 28, 34 gas shells, 26-27 groups, 5, 21 Hertzsprung-Russell diagram, 20, 24, 25 hot spots, 25 life cycle, 22-23, 24-25, 26, 28, 30 luminosity, 20-21, 24, 25 main sequence, 20 maximum mass, 26 navigation, 5 near, 8 origin, 22-23 parallax, 21 planetary nebulae, 26 principal, within 100 light-years from Sun, 20-21 red giant, 20, 23, 24, 25, 31 red supergiant, 20, 23, 24 reference points, 84 shooting, 62 size, 22, 24, 26 stellar movement, 87 stellar remnant, 29 study, 80 supergiant, 24, 28, 31 supernovae, 28-29 superstition and ritual, 80 temperature, 20, 24 white dwarf, 23, 24, 25, 26-27, 31 See also Sun star chart celestial sphere, 86 equatorial, 87 measuring distances, 86 observer's latitude, 87 polar, 87 reading a map of the sky, 87 stellar movements, 87 stellar north pole, 86 stellar south pole, 87 types, 87 star wheel (planisphere), 86, 88, 89 stargazing, 88-89 auxiliary telescope, 90 basics, 88 binoculars, 88 comets, 89 flat perspective, 89 history, 82-83 instruments for, 82 measuring direction, 89 moon, 88, 89 motion of constellations, 88 night sky, 88 observable objects, 88 observatories, 80-81, 90-91 recognizing objects, 88, 89 satellites, 89 shooting stars, 89 supplies, 88 telescope, 88 unaided eye, 88 Venus, 89 Very Large Telescope, 90-91 stellar map, 5, 86-87 stellar wind, 25 Stonehenge (United Kingdom), 80-81, 90-91 stony meteorite, 62 strong nuclear force (strong nuclear interaction), 11, 16, 17 subatomic particle, 10 subduction, 72 Sun (Earth's), 22, 42-43 ancient peoples, 38 astronomical theories, 82, 83 convective zone, 42 core, 43 corona, 43 distance to earth, 78 eclipses, 78-79 essential data, 42 formation, 13, 72 future, 25 gravitational pull, 31, 40, 41 luminosity, 20 photosphere, 43 radiation, 41, 67, 71, 76 radiative zone, 42 size, 31, 78 surface and atmosphere, 43 sunspot, 43, 83 supercluster (galaxy), 9, 19 supergiant (star), 28, 31 supernova, 12, 19, 22, 23, 26, 28-29 T tectonic plate, 72, 73 telescope, 4, 82 auxiliary, 90 early, 81 Galileo, 5, 36, 83 Hubble Space Telescope, 55 object position, 17 parts, 88-89 Very Large Telescope, 90-91 visible matter, 5,12, 20, 30, 34, 52, 56 temperature black holes, 35 stars, 20, 24 temporal dimension, 14 Termination Shock (solar system region), 83 thermonuclear fusion, 42 tide, 51, 76 time, 16, 17 curvature of space-time, 16, 31 Greenwich median, 75 measurement, 74, 82 zone, 75 total eclipse lunar, 79 solar, 78 U umbra, 43, 78 universal gravitation, theory of, 16, 17 universe background radiation, 11, 15 composition, 8-9, 14 cooling, 12 creation, 10-11 curvature of space-time, 16 defined, 6-7, 18-19 expansion, 7, 8, 10, 11, 13, 16, 32, 83 expansion theories, 14-15 forces, 11, 16-17 future, 14 geocentric model, 82 heliocentric model, 83 history, 13 observation, 80-81, 90-91 secrets, 4-5 size/immensity, 8 transparent, 12-13 Uranus, 40, 54-55 missions to, 55, 83 orbit, 60-61 Vv Valles Marineris canyon, Mars, 49 Van Allen belts, Earth, 69 Venus, 41, 46-47, 89 Very Large Telescope (VLT), 81, 90-91 auxiliary telescope, 90 dome, 90 optics, 90, 91 photograph, 90-91 volcanism, 41, 47, 49, 77 W water, 44, 46, 48, 61, 68, 71 weak, light particle (WIMP), 17 weak nuclear force (weak nuclear interaction), 11, 16, 17 weight, relation to gravity, 69 white dwarf (star), 23, 25, 26-27, 31 Wilson, Robert, 15 wind, 51, 53 WMAP (Wilkinson Microwave Anisotropy Probe) project, 11 wormhole, 31 X-Z X-ray, black holes, 30 zero time, 10 zodiac, constellations, 84-85 ‘* UNIVERSE Britannica Hlustrated Science Library eherecorewra BA gS ‘a pote Britannica Illustrated Science Library ue * ~K About the pagination of this eBook Due to the unique page numbering scheme of this book, the electronic pagination of the eBook does not match the pagination of the printed version. To navigate the text, please use the electronic Table of Contents that appears alongside the eBook or the Search function. For citation purposes, use the page numbers that appear in the text. ROCKS AND MINERALS Britannica Illustrated Science Library Encyclopaedia Britannica, Inc. Chicago = London = New Delhi = Paris = Seoul = Sydney ® Taipei = Tokyo Britannica Illustrated Science Library © 2008 Editorial Sol 90 All rights reserved. Idea and Concept of This Work: Editorial Sol 90 Project Management: Fabian Cassan Photo Credits: Corbis, ESA, Getty Images, Graphic News, NASA, National Geographic, Science Photo Library Illustrators: Guido Arroyo, Pablo Aschei, Gustavo J. Caironi, Hernan Cajfiellas, Leonardo César, José Luis Corsetti, Vanina Farias, Joana Garrido, Celina Hilbert, Isidro Lopez, Diego Martin, Jorge Martinez, Marco Menco, Ala de Mosca, Diego Mourelos, Eduardo Pérez, Javier Pérez, Ariel Piroyansky, Ariel Roldan, Marcel Socias, Néstor Taylor, Trebol Animation, Juan Venegas, Coralia Vignau, 3DN, 3DOM studio, Jorge Ivanovich, Fernando Ramallo, Constanza Vicco, Diego Mourelos Composition and Pre-press Services: Editorial Sol 90 Translation Services and Index: Publication Services, Inc. Portions © 2008 Encyclopzedia Britannica, Inc. Encyclopaedia Britannica, Britannica, and the thistle logo are registered trademarks of Encyclopaedia Britannica, Inc. Britannica Illustrated Science Library Staff Editorial Michael Levy, Executive Editor, Core Editorial John Rafferty, Associate Editor, Earth Sciences William L. Hosch, Associate Editor, Mathematics and Computers Kara Rogers, Associate Editor, Life Sciences Rob Curley, Senior Editor, Science and Technology David Hayes, Special Projects Editor Art and Composition Steven N. Kapusta, Director Carol A. Gaines, Composition Supervisor Christine McCabe, Senior I/lustrator Media Acquisition Kathy Nakamura, Manager Copy Department Sylvia Wallace, Director Julian Ronning, Supervisor Information Management and Retrieval Sheila Vasich, Information Architect Production Control Marilyn L. Barton Manufacturing Kim Gerber, Director Encyclopzedia Britannica, Inc. Jacob E. Safra, Chairman of the Board Jorge Aguilar-Cauz, President Michael Ross, Senior Vice President, Corporate Development Dale H. Hoiberg, Senior Vice President and Editor Marsha Mackenzie, Director of Production International Standard Book Number (set): 978-1-59339-797-5 International Standard Book Number (volume): 978-1-59339-799-9 Britannica Illustrated Science Library: Rocks and Minerals 2008 Printed in China ENC YC OR, ZAIDI A Britannica www.britannica.com Rocks and Minerals Contents A ta is Dynamics of the Earth's Crust Page 6 ee = af Minerals Page 18 Formation and Transformation of Rocks Page 40 , ae of Rocks Page 60 » ee eee » —_ p “i , _ Use of Rocks or, and Minerals Page 76 =F Pe Ron - = (y ™ ae x [Z rocks _ like ait flight recorders). es ">. store in their interior very useful “2a _ information about what has happened i in the past. Whether forming cavesiin the middle of mountains, mixed among folds, or lying at the bottom of “lakes and oceans, stones are everywhere, and they hold clues to the past. By studying rocks, we can reconstruct the history of the Earth. Even the most insignificant rocks can tell stories about ~~ other times, because rocks have been around since the beginning of the universe. They were part of the cloud of dust and gases that revolved around the Sun over four billion years ago. Rocks have been “ ee “er hata = et . SEL. “ag che f nw rel a fabs > e silent witnesses to the cataclysms our planet‘has experienced. They know-the cold of the glacial era, the intense heat of the:Earth's interior, and the fury of the oceans. They store much information about how external agents, suchas wind, rain, ice, and temperature changes, have been altering the planet's surface for millions of years. or ancient civilizations, stones symbolized eternity. This idea has persisted throughout time because stones endure, but they are recycled time and again. Fifty million years from now, nothing will be as we now know it—not the Andes, nor the Himalayas, nor the ice of Antarctica, nor the Sahara Desert. Weathering and erosion, though slow, will never stop. This should free us from any illusion of the immortality of the Earth's features. What will everything be like in the future? We don't know. The only sure 7 adie _— _ a RAMP TL ee ov — ~ e STAY -« “hy “ft at ad THE MONK'S HOUSE _ ‘ This orthodox monk fiveswes volcanic cave, very, close to the 11 Christian churches located in the Ethiopian town of Lalibela; ~~ ing is that there will be rocks. Only ‘stones will remain, and their chemical ” composition, shape, and texture will . -_. provideclues about previous geological ~ events and about what the Earth's surface was like in the past. In the pages‘of this book, illustrated with stunning images, you will find invaluable information about the language of rocks and natural forces in geheral. You will also learn to identify the most important minerals, know their physical and chemical properties, and discover the environments in which they form. id you know that the Earth's crust and its oceans are sources of useful and essential minerals for human beings? Coal, petroleum, and natural gas found in the crust allow us to travel and to heat our homes. Furthermore, practically. all the products that surround us have elements provided by rocks and minerals. For example, aluminum is used to produce beverage cans; copper is used in electric cables; and titanium, mixed with other durable metals, is used in the construction of spacecraft. We invite you to enjoy this _ book. It is full of interesting and worthwhile information. Don't miss out on it! h, Dynamics of the Earth's Crust he Earth is like a blender in which rocks are moved around, broken, and crumbled. The fragments are deposited, forming different layers. Then weathering and erosion by wind and rain wear down and transform the rock. This produces mountains, cliffs, and sand dunes, among other features. The deposited material settles into layers of MOUNTAINS OF SAND Corkscrew Canyon in Arizona contains an array of shapes, colors, and textures. The sand varies from pink to yellow to red depending on the sunlight it receives. sediment that eventually become sedimentary rock. This rock cycle never stops. In 50 million years, no single mountain we know will exist in the same condition as it does today. TRAVERSING TIME — UNDER CONSTRUCTION — A CHANGING SURFACE BEFORE ROCK, MINERAL : % . as 8 DYNAMICS OF THE EARTH'S CRUST ROCKS AND MINERALS 9 < >) COLLIsION AND FUSION Heavy elements Traversing ‘Time = eologists and paleontologists use many sources to reconstruct the Earth's history. The analysis of rocks, minerals, and fossils found on the Earth's surface provides data about the deepest layers of the planet's crust and reveals both climatic and atmospheric changes that are often associated with catastrophes. Craters caused by the impact of meteorites and other bodies on the surface of the Earth also reveal valuable information about the history of the planet. © Complex Structure WM) THE FORMATION OF THE INTERIOR Laff Cosmic materials began to accumulate, forming a growing celestial body, the precursor of the Earth. High temperatures combined with gravity caused the heaviest elements to migrate to the center of the planet and the lighter ones to move toward a Small bodies and dust accumulate to become the size of an asteroid. 1,100 the surface. Under a rain of meteors, The oldest —. the external layers began to minerals, such as ‘ Rodinia, an early consolidate and form the Earth's crust. zircon, form. / \ supercontinent, | ) forms. The oldest rocks \ j metamorphose, X y forming gneiss. " a In the center, metals such as iron concentrated into a red-hot nucleus. A meteorite falls in Sudbury, Ontario, Canada. Age in millions of years ERA 4,600 Hadean > Pregeologic “, +a ieee 2.500 Proterozoic > Precambrian PERIOD EPOCH Climate a“ ~~ 2,500 Glaciations: White Earth j The Earth undergoes the first of its j massive global cooling events 4 (glaciations). The Earth cools y . and the first / \ ocean is formed. Consolidation begins under a rain of meteors. ELEMENTS PRESENT ACCORDING TO THE TABLE ! Existing in different combinations, the crust of the Earth 0 contains the same elements today as those that were present when the planet was formed. The most abundant element in the crust is oxygen, which bonds with metals Si and nonmetals to form different compounds. 277% 800 Second glaciation ER vers 600 cast massive glaciation Ey Transition metals =a] Nonmetals i] Noble gases ler] Lanthanide series i] Actinide series Life THE FIRST ANIMALS Among the most mysterious fossils of the Precambrian Period are the remains of the Ediacaran fauna, the Earth's first-known animals. They lived at the bottom of the ocean. Many were round and reminiscent of jellyfish, while others were flat and sheetlike. Mg 21% Q' METALLIC CORE The light elements “
) in the contained far less carbon — mandibles, such today, and oxygen forests in atmosphere is 16 dioxide during the as the placoderms, (02) levels attained swamplands. times higher than it Ordovician than today. osteichthyans their maximum. is today. Temperatures fluctuate (bony fish), and within a range similar to acanthodians, have already emerged. perience —_ SILURIAN One of the first pisciform vertebrates, an armored fish without mandibles Amphibians diversify and reptiles originate from one amphibian group to become the first amniotes. Winged insects such as dragonflies emerge. THE CAMBRIAN EXPLOSION Fossils from this time attest to the great diversity of marine animals and the emergence of different types of skeletal structures, such as those found in sponges and trilobites. The rocks of this period contain an abundance of fish fossils. TRILOBITES Marine arthropods with mineralized exoskeletons Areas of solid ground are populated by gigantic ferns. The fragments of continents combine to form a single continent called Pangea. The largest carbon deposits we observe today form where forests previously existed. Palm trees and conifers replace the vegetation from the Carboniferous Period. MASS EXTINCTION Near the end of the Permian Period, an estimated 95 percent of marine organisms and over two thirds of terrestrial ones perish in the greatest known mass extinction. 10 DYNAMICS OF THE EARTH'S CRUST ROCKS AND MINERALS 11 IMPACT FROM THE OUTSIDE The heat caused by the It is believed that a large meteor fell on expansion of fragments Chicxulub, on the Yucatan Peninsula from the impact together CRUST (Mexico), about 65 million years ago. The with the greenhouse effect The Earth's crust can reach impact caused an explosion that created a brought about by the a thickness of up to 6 miles . cloud of ash mixed with carbon rocks. When spreading of ashes in the (10‘km)/at the bottom of the ha it hee Fi ocean and up to 30 miles . a tw the debris fell back to Earth, some experts stratosphere provoked a (50 km) on the continents. ‘ 3 believe it caused a great global fire. series of climatic changes. J IFS It is believed that this v process resulted in the Py de ns y extinction of the dinosaurs. North America and LITHOSPHERE Europe drift apart. The solid rock coating North and South of the Earth, which America are joined at includes the exterior of aaiate the mantle the end of this time period. The formation of MANTLE Patagonia concludes, The mantle is 1,800 miles and an important (2,900 km) thick and is composed mainly of solid rock. Its temperature increases with depth. A notable component of the upper mantle is the asthenosphere, which is semisolid. In the asthenosphere, superficial rock layers that will eventually form the Earth's crust are melted. overthrust raises the Andes mountain range. Gondwana reappears. Africa separates . te ey : = The African Rift Zone and from South America, the Red Sea open up. The and the South Atlantic Save 2 Indian protocontinent Ocean appears. ‘ . llides with Eurasia. te ae 199.6 i | dod. Mesozoic THE ERA OF REPTILES ; » Cenozoic THE AGE OF MAMMALS : a CORE THE ACE OF FLOWERING PLANTS er sides posse HE LAST GLACIATION Outer Core Carbon dioxide The level of oxygen At the end of the Cretaceous Period The global Temperatures drop : i ei cs 2 Sed Tt ti 1400 levels increase. (O>) in the the first angiosperms—plants with average to levels similar to he ae ae je u Leal a ie (2.270 cn thick Average atmosphere is much protected seeds, flowers, and temperature is those of today. The a a Fae place years and contains melted iron, temperatures lower than today. fruits—appear. at least 62° F lower temperatures oo Cases retry oh eno ao nickel, and other minor are higher than (17° C). The ice cause forests to pee Siscnaty beg Mer Sia OORT POARKES today. layer covering shrink and grasslands Be ae tale cust rte Oi Inner Core Antarctica later to expand. the Nor SLED) fnfetaelie|slalehee (elseel uals The inner core has a diameter of Printer covered in ice. 756 miles (1,216 km). It is made of iron and nickel, which are solidified due to their exposure to high pressure and temperature conditions. Vast development of feathered bird species and mammals covered _ with long fur ANOTHER MASS EXTINCTION Toward the end of the Cretaceous Period, about 50 percent of existing species disappear. The dinosaurs, the HUMAN BEINGS Although the oldest hominid fossils (Sahelanthropus) date back to seven million years ago, it is believed that modern humans APPEAR ON EARTH Proliferation of Birds emerge. insects The dinosaurs Appearance of undergo adaptive large marine reptiles (such as the emerged in Africa at the end of the dinosaurs radiation. Plesiosaurs), the flying creatures of that a Pleistocene. Humans migrated to Europe period (such as the Pterosaurs), and the a 100,000 years ago, although settling there ammonites (cephalopod mollusks) | was difficult because of the glacial climate. The first mammals ALLOSAURUS disappear from the Earth. At the MAMMOTHS I According to one hypothesis, our ancestors evolve from a group Thictcannivare i beginning of the Cenozoic Era, most of Mammoths lived in Siberia. reached the American continent about of reptiles called measured 39 feet the habitats of these extinct species The cause of their extinction 10,000 years ago by traveling across the Therapsida. (12 m) long. begin to be occupied by mammals. is still under debate. area now known as the Bering Strait. 12 DYNAMICS OF THE EARTH'S CRUST ROCKS AND MINERALS 13 Under Construction Abcam ur planet is not a dead body, complete and unchanging. It is an ever-changing system whose alee activity we experience all the time: volcanoes erupt, earthquakes occur, and new rocks Longitude 155° W emerge on the Earth's surface. All these phenomena, which originate in the interior of the planet, are studied in a branch of geology called internal geodynamics. This science analyzes processes, such as continental drift and isostatic movement, which originate with the movement of the crust and result in the raising and sinking of large areas. The movement of the Earth's crust also generates the conditions that form new rocks. This movement affects magmatism (the melting of materials that solidify to become igneous rocks) and metamorphism (the series of “ transformations occurring in solid materials that give rise to metamorphic rocks). — al « ae —s -« *- .. +o ~ . = : - os : at - Se ss i - So - 7 , - ee ~ es aT —_ ” 7 1 = ~~, eee ee a 74 b 4 ~¢ a « . = it - i) . ~~ Magmatism Metamorphism Folding a ae Magma is produced when the temperature in the mantle or crust reaches a level at An increase in pressure and/or temperature causes Although solid, the materials forming the Earth's ’ hen the forces acting upon rocks become too intense, which. minerals with the lowest fusion point begin to melt. Because magma is less rocks to become plastic and, theirminerals to “ crust are elastic. The powerful forces of the Earth the rocks lose their plasticity and break, creating two dense than the solid material surrounding it, it rises, and in so doing it. cools and begins to become unstable. These rocks then chemically react with place stress upon the materials and create folds in the pes of fractures: joints and faults. When this process happens crystallize. When this process occurs in the interior of the crust, plutonic or intrusive the substances surrounding themcreating different rock. When this happens, the ground rises and sinks. When too abruptly, earthquakes occur. Joints are fissures and cracks, rocks, such as granite, are produced: If this process takes place on the outside, volcanic chemical combinations and:thus causing new rocks to this activity oceurs on a large scale, it can create mountain whereas faults are fractures in which blocks are displaced or effusive rocks, such as basalt, are formed. form. These rocks are called metamorphic rocks. Examples ranges or chains. This activity typically occurs in the - parallel to a fracture plane. of this type of rock are marble, quartzite,and gneiss. ' subduction Zones. OUTER PRESSURE TEMPERATURE FOLDS RUPTURE CRUST This force gives rise to new High temperatures make For folds to form, rocks When rocks Volcanic Crust metamorphic rocks, as older the rocks plastic and must be relatively rupture quickly, an rocks rocks fuseywith the minerals their minerals unstable. plastic and be acted earthquake occurs. . that surround them. upon by a force. ue (100 .km) Plutonic <_ . Rocks 124 miles + (200 km) 14 DYNAMICS OF THE EARTH'S CRUST A Changing Surface he molding of the Earth's crust is the product of two great destructive forces: weathering and erosion. Through the combination of these processes, rocks merge, disintegrate, and join again. Living organisms, especially plant roots and digging animals, cooperate with these geologic processes. Once the structure of the minerals that make up a rock is disrupted, the minerals disintegrate and fall to the mercy of the rain and wind, which erode them. yp j 4° a » i? 4 Erosion es External agents, such as water, wind, air, and living beings, either acting separately or together, wear down, and their loose fragments may be transported. This process is known as erosion. In dry regions, the wind transports grains of sand that strike and polish exposed rocks. On the coast, wave action slowly eats away at the rocks. HYDROLOGIC PROCESSES All types of moving water slowly wear down rock surfaces and carry loose particles away. The size of the particles that are carried away from the rock surface depends on the volume and speed of the flowing water. High-volume and high- velocity water can move larger particles. | i A , CESSES The wind drags small particles against the rocks. This wears them down and produces new deposits . of either loess or sand depending ~ “s on the size of the particle. y a ——— Weathering Mechanical agents can disintegrate rocks, and 1 chemical agents can decompose them. Disintegration and decomposition can result from the actions of plant roots, heat, cold, wind, and acid rain. The breaking down of rock is a slow but inexorable process. MECHANICAL PROCESSES A variety of forces can cause rock fragments to break into smaller pieces, either by acting on the rocks directly or by transporting rock fragments that chip away at the rock surface. ROCKS AND MINERALS 15 CORKSCREW CANYON Arizona Latitude 36° 30° N Longitude 111° 24° W Water _ current CHEMICAL : — PROCESSES ; ———— The mineral components of rocks are altered. They either become new minerals or are released in solution. Limestone * TEMPERATURE When the temperature of the air changes signifi ly over a few hours, it ¢ expand and contra The daily repetition of : Lae. phenomenon can cause rocks: 2 Transportation and Sedimentation In this process, materials eroded by the wind or water are carried away and deposited at lower elevations, and these new deposits can later turn into other rocks. to rupture. WATER Ina liquid or frozen state, water penetrates into the rock fissures, causing them to expand and shatter. Composed of silica, quartz gives rock a white color. amet Composed of thin, shiny sheets of silicon, aluminum, potassium, "9 and other minerals, mica can be black or colorless. Rock composed of © A light-colored feldspar, quartz, and | ™ silicate, feldspar mica makes up a large y~-S “~~ part of the crust. TORRES DEL PAINE Chilean Patagonia Latitude 52° 20’ S Longitude 71° 55° W Composition Highest summit Surface emperature and pressure play a prominent part in rock transformation. Inside the Earth, liquid magma is produced. When it reaches the surface, it solidifies. A similar process happens to water when it freezes upon reaching 32° F (0° C). Torres del Paine National Park is located in Chile between the massif of the Andes and the Patagonian steppes. Minerals allol is basically a desert of minerals whose ivory- colored crust is scattered with green ponds and towers of sulfur salts in shades of orange. Some minerals belong to a very special class. Known as gems, they are sought and hoarded for their great beauty. The most valuable gems are diamonds. DALLOL VOLCANO Located in Ethiopia, Dallol is the only non- oceanic volcano on Earth below sea level, making it one of the hottest places on the planet. Sulfur and other minerals that spring from this volcano create very vivid colors. Did you know it took human beings thousands of years to separate metal from rock? Did you also know that certain nonmetallic minerals are valued for their usefulness? YOU ARE WHAT YOU HAVE CRYSTALLINE SYMMETRY A QUESTION OF STYLE PRECIOUS CRYSTALS HOW TO RECOGNIZE MINERALS DIAMONDS IN HISTORY A DESERT OF MINERALS THE MOST COMMON MINERALS THE ESSENCE OF CRYSTALS THE NONSILICATES Graphite, for instance, is used to make pencils; gypsum is used in construction; and halite, also known as Salt, is used in cooking. 20 MINERALS You Are What You Have, inerals are the “bricks” of materials that make up the Earth and all other solid bodies in the universe. They are usually defined both by their chemical composition and by their orderly internal structure. Most are solid crystalline substances. However, some minerals have a disordered internal structure and are simply amorphous solids similar to glass. Studying minerals helps us to understand the origin of the Earth. Minerals are classified according to their composition and internal structure, as well as by the properties of hardness, weight, color, luster, and transparency. Although more than 4,000 minerals have been discovered, only about 30 are common on the Earth's surface. Components The basic components of minerals are the chemical elements listed on the periodic table. Minerals are classified as native if they are found in isolation, contain only one element, and occur in their purest state. On the other hand, they are classified as compound if they are composed of two or more elements. Most minerals fall into the compound category. NA E MINERALS These minerals are classified into: A- METALS AND INTERMETALS Native minerals have high thermal and electrical conductivity, a typically metallic luster, low hardness, ductility, and malleability. They are easy to identify and include gold, copper, and lead. GOLD An excellent thermal and electrical conductor. Acids have little or no effect on it. B- SEMIMETALS Native minerals that are more fragile than metals and have a lower conductivity. Examples are arsenic, antimony, and bismuth. BISMUTH ROCKS AND MINERALS 21 eo: Polymorphism A phenomenon in which the same chemical composition can create multiple structures and, consequently, result in the creation of several different minerals. The transition of one polymorphous variant into another, facilitated by temperature or pressure conditions, can be fast or slow and either reversible or irreversible. Chemical Crystallization Mineral Composition System CaCO, I Trigonal Calcite CaCO; | Rhombic Aragonite FeS, a | Cubic Pyrite a FeS, i | Rhombic | Marcasite ‘ ME FRUN & | 1°¢) c GP Cubic Diamond — E : Cc I | Hexagonal | Graphite listed in the periodic table. DIAMOND AND GRAPHITE A mineral's internal structure influences its hardness. Both graphite and diamond are composed only of carbon; however, they have different degrees of hardness. Diamond Graphite SILVER The close-up image shows the dendrites formed by the stacking of octahedrons, sometimes in an elongated form. Microphotograph of have been recognized by the : International Association of Mineralogy. silver crystal dendrites Isotypic Minerals Isomorphism happens when minerals with the same structure, such as halite and galena, 3 P exchange cations. The structure remains the same, but the resulting substance is different, i because one ion has been exchanged for another. An example of this process is siderite (rhombic : : ; : : 2 ° > FeCO3), which gradually changes to magnesite (MgCO3) when it trades its iron (Fe) for similarly- ; . sized magnesium (Mg). Because the ions are the same size, the structure remains unchanged. Model demonstrating ata. how one atom bonds to the other four MINERALS Compound minerals are created when chemical bonds form between atoms of more than one element. The properties of a compound mineral differ HALITE is composed of chlorine and sodium. C- NONMETALS An important group of minerals, which includes sulfur from those of its HALITE AND GALENA CES e Sen Halite NaCl Galena PbS Each atom is joined to four other Atoms form hexagons that cl Na Pb atoms of the same type. The are strongly interconnected SULFUR | d | s e carbon network extends in three in parallel sheets. This Steet ° dimensions by means of strong structure allows the sheets r) 4 @: 2 covalent bonds. This provides the to slide over one another. mineral with an almost e a e unbreakable hardness. ' r) os 2 ° 2 vd c _@s ° Hardness of 10 Hardness of 1 " a a on the Mohs scale on the Mohs scale ? 2 _ 2 é 3 P) ® EXOTIC COLOR A mineral can have several shades, depending on its impurities or inclusions. ROCK CRYSTAL Colorless; the purest state of quartz Other secondary minerals, known as exotic minerals, are responsible for giving quartz its color; when it lacks exotic minerals, quartz is colorless. 00) (0) g is one of the most striking properties of > minerals. However, in determining the identity of a mineral, color is not always useful. Some minerals never change color; they are called Some minerals idiochromatic. Others whose colors are variable are always have the called allochromatic. A mineral's color changes can same color; one be related, among other things, to the presence of example is impurities or inclusions (solid bodies) inside of it. malachite. ROSE The presence of manganese results in a pink color. CITRINE The presence of iron produces a very pale yellow color. SMOKY Dark, brown, or gray minerals AMETHYST The presence of iron ina ferric state results ina purple color. Streak Color: Reddish Brown Luminescence > Certain minerals emit light when they are exposed to particular sources of energy. A mineral is fluorescent if it lights up when exposed to ultraviolet rays or X-rays. It is phosphorescent if it keeps glowing after the energy source is removed. Some minerals will also respond to cathode rays, ordinary light, heat, or other electric currents. Refraction and Luster Refraction is related to the speed with which light moves through a crystal. Depending on how light propagates through them, minerals can be classified as monorefringent or birefringent. Luster results from reflection and refraction of light on the surface of a mineral. In general, it depends on the index of refraction of a mineral's surface, the absorption of incident light, and other factors, such as concrete characteristics of the observed surface (for instance, degree of smoothness and polish). Based on their luster, minerals can be divided into three categories. AGATE A type of chalcedony, a cryptocrystalline variety of quartz, of nonuniform coloring Agates crystallize in banded patterns because of the environments in which they form. They fill the cavities of rocks by precipitating out of aqueous solutions at low temperatures. Their colors reflect the porosity of the stone, its degree of inclusions, and the crystallization process. METALLIC Minerals in this class are completely opaque, a characteristic typical of native elements, such as copper, and sulfides, such as galena. SUBMETALLIC Minerals in this class have a luster that is neither metallic nor nonmetallic. NONMETALLIC Minerals in this class transmit light when cut into very thin sheets. They can have several types of luster: vitreous (quartz), pearlescent, silky (talc), resinous, or earthy. Streak is the color of a mineral's fine powder, which can be used to identify it. g «Ne a "Exfoliation and Fracture " . -_ 24 MINERALS When a mineral tendsito break along the "}, planes of weak bonds jin its crystalline ~ steer it separates into flat sheets parallel to its surface. This is called exfoliation. Minerals that do not exfoliate when they break are said to exhibit fracture, which typ ally occurs in irregular patterns. TYPES OF EXFOLIATION . ee " ; / FRACTURE ue can be irregular, Cubic Octahedral Dodecahedral poncseal smooth, splintery, or earthy. IRREGULAR FRACTURE An uneven, splintery mineral surface Rhombohedral _—_ Prismatic Pinacoidal Pc (Basal) a magnet. © = e Minerals erties are very important for recognizing it at first glance. derty is hardness. One mineral is harder than another when the rcan s atch the latter. A mineral's degree of hardness is based ona to 10, that was created by German mineralogist Friedrich er physical property of a mineral is its tenacity, or cohesion—that is, . degree ‘of resistance to rupture, deformation, or crushing. Yet another is Bpaonetism, the ability of a mineral to be attracted by TOURMALINE isa mineral of the silicate group. COLOR Some tourmaline crystals can have two or more colors. TALC | GYPSUM CALCITE r ; is the softest L can be scratched is as hard as a /@ mineral. e@ bya fingernail. e@ bronze coin. _ on FLUORITE a can be scratclied) " e bya nif dO > APATITE can be scratched e@ by apiece of glass. 6 = ROCKS AND MINERALS 25 ESS OE—Ee——— ELSE P- LAR MS _* GS Electricity Generation Piezoelectricity and pyroelectricity are phenomena exhibited by certain crystals, such as quartz, which acquire a polarized charge because exposure to temperature change or mechanical tension creates a difference in electrical potential at their ends. PIEZOELECTRICITY The generation of electric currents that can occur when mechanical tension redistributes the negative and positive charges in a crystal. Tourmaline is an example. PRESSURE => ite ‘ Negative ; charge PYROELECTRICITY The generation of electric currents that can occur when a crystal is subjected to changes in temperature and, consequently, changes in volume. " Positive -—) charge sam. Positive 77 charge Negative charge DENSITY reflects the structure and chemical composition of a mineral. Gold and platinum are among the most dense minerals. : 7 to 7.5 IS THE HARDNESS OF THE TOURMALINE ON THE MOHS SCALE. we "= " 4 * : ‘4 | = DIAMOND r hed is the hardest } ond. e@ mineral. TOPAZ can be scratched © with a steel file. ; : 26 MINERALS — A Desert of Minerals (§ «7 — % © he Dallol region is part of the Afar depression in Ethiopia. It is known as “the = "* devil's kitchen” because it,has the highest average*temperature in the world, a ’ 93° F (34° C). Dallol is-basically a desert of minerals with an ivory-colored® ihe crust, sprinkled with green ponds-and-towers of sulfurous salt, in shades of orange, 6 Tnactive? F called hornitos (8 to 10:feet [2.5-3 m] high), many of which. are active and spit.out : WO boiling water. ~ a" -_ / —_— = eo oe ; a et eee ETHIOPIA Latitude 9°N Longitude 39° E CROSS SECTION DALLOL VOLCANO Location Afar Depression Type of volcano Explosion Crater Sea Level Elevation -125 feet (-48 m) RAEN yh Last eruption 1926 Dallol is located at 125 feet _. . (48 m) below sea level |, Annual salt extraction 135,000 tons gi m) Peery s ; : 3.3 billion tons : ° . . * (3 billion metric tons) PS om TOTAL RESERVE OF ROCK SALT a Ani IN THE AFAR DEPRESSION we fc = - . - as slg < YOUNG DEPOSIT al P 4 Newer deposits have a - i? white color, which MINERALIZATION PROCESS aS 4 ; rm C) becomes darker over time. ll Water expelled from its magmatic a ; | , spring erupts, surfacing as thermal ry £ wG ® water. When the water evaporates, on al 4 - x POND sali’ depositsiaré formed ag o-' od , Boiling water emerges from theshornitos and forms small ponds on the surface. OLD DEPOSIT The dark coloring indicates that this deposit 3 HEAT The heat causes the is several months old. water to evaporate. Salt deposits form on the surface. TYPES OF HORN ne ety ad a Salt Deposits’ is Hydrothermal activity occurs when with volcanic heat. The heat cai water to rise at high pressure through layers of salt and sulfur. The water then dissolves the.salt and sulfur, which precipitate out as the water cools at-the surface. ponds and.hornitos arecreated of their coloring may be explained by their sulfurous composition and by the presence of certain bacteria. ere are two types of | active.ones, which forcefu expel boiling water, and inactive ones, which’simply contain salt. ACTIVE It expels boiling water, and it is constantly growing. Boiling water Bae 7 7). ee ee oa + EXIT “ = - The hot water is underground water comes in contact . expelled through uses the ’ ee the hoxnito. As a result, , . The richness é. HEAT Contact with hot rock maintains the water's temperature. ~~ . = * 8 to 10 feet (2.5-3 m) — high j Hot water ae rising from ASCENT the subsoil The hot water starts to rise underground. INACTIVE Composed of salt, the hornito 5 no longer expels water. It was me YOUNG, active.in the past. ACTIVE HORNITO \ ___ When its exterior Manual Extraction BF, is dark,.a hornito is <¥ several months olds » Salt is extracted without machinery. Defying the arid plnetesaseie “v < inhabitants.of the Borena'region’in southern Ethidpia.ext xa SS 7 the mineral by hand for a living ae | They’ wear turbans@0 protect |» 7 Ea themselves from the harmful.effects of the Sum@amels then carry ~ _ Bstiat fi " yy the day's load to the nearest village. ; ~ [2] Water rises to the = m surface through layers of salt and sulfur deposits. B 148,500 t orena 1 ie, + oor 135 000 ; ONS A Black, Muslim, Afar- olcanic hea’ 4 + F metric tons speaking ethnic group, warms the water 4 ( 2 ) whose members extract underground. per year salt in the Dallol. The : Borena represent 4 Amount of salt obtained manually percent of the Ethiopian nthe Afar (or Danakil) depression population. 5 gun 2 fia e. ed . TURBAN This piece of clothing , oleae workers from the xeme temperatures of me the desert and the intensity of the Sun while p they extract salt. eee OTHER MINERALS In addition to sulfurs and sulfates, potassium chloride, an excellent soil fertilizer, is also extracted from the Dallol. 28 MINERALS ROCKS AND MINERALS 29 INTERNAL CRYSTALLINE NETWORK A crystal's structure is repeated on the inside, even in the arrangement of its smallest parts: chlorine and sodium ions. In this case, the electrical forces (attraction among opposite ions and repulsion among similar ones) form cubes, which creates stability. However, different mineral compositions can take many other possible forms. The Essence of Crystals | Il minerals take on a crystalline structure as they form. Most crystals originate when molten rock from inside the Earth cools and hardens. Crystallography is the branch of science that studies the growth, shape, and geometric characteristics of crystals. The arrangement of LEGEND atoms in a crystal can be determined using X-ray Ciioring Anion Sodium Cation : . , 7 . This nonmetal can : This metal can diffraction. The relationship between chemical only acquire a only acquire a composition of the crystal, arrangement of atoms, and maximuminegatve ©; maximum positive charge of 1. charge of 1. bond strengths among atoms is studied in crystallographic chemistry. @ The combination of two 7 Crystalline ions results in a cubic form. When there are more than two ions, other Syst e m S structures are formed. IONIC BOND Typical of metallic elements that tend to lose electrons in the presence of other atoms with a negative charge. When a chlorine atom captures an electron from a sodium atom (metallic), both become electrically BEFORE : AFTER BONDING : BONDING BASIC FORMS OF ATOMIC BONDING This graphic represents an atom's internal crystalline network. a 4 charged and mutually attract each other. The sodium Tie Chinen tee atom shares an electron (negative charge) and Na Nat (n a ae chataer SP eace sie becomes positively charged, whereas the chlorine negatively charged ion (anion). completes its outer shell, becoming negative. (2) © cl Cl- Sodium Atom The sodium atom loses an electron and becomes CUBE TETRAHEDRON positively charged. ys Salt (Halite) Silica Chlorine @y* : os Atom 1 chlorine atom + 1 silicon atom + 1 sodium atom 4 oxygen atoms The anion and the cation (positive ion) are electrically attracted to one another. They bond, forming a new, stable compound. - Example: Chlorine Halite (salt) Atom : DIFFERENCES BETWEEN CRYSTAL AND GLASS Glass is an amorphous solid. Because it solidifies quickly, the particles lose mobility before organizing themselves. He CUBIC STRUCTURE ATOMIC MODEL OF A ATOMIC MODEL OF GLASS is created through the CRYSTAL Solidification prevents the spatial equilibrium between COVALENT BOND This type of bond occurs between two nonmetallic elements, such as nitrogen and oxygen. The atoms are geometrically organized to share electrons from their outer shells. This way, the whole structure becomes more stable. The nitrogen atom needs three electrons to stabilize its outer shell; the hydrogen Nitrogen - CRYSTALS OF COMMON SALT atom needs only one. ; A : ran ape re When salt forms larger crystals, different ions, which attract The particles combine particles from organizing Example: UTS UTE their shape can be seen under a * each other, and similar ions, slowly in regular, stable themselves. This makes the Ammonia atoms creates a stable microscope. which repel each other. shapes. structure irregular. state.asi la logran. 30 MINERALS ROCKS AND MINERALS 31 Crystalline Symmetry se eee SRE Rhone ' , , MONOCLINIC aa crystalline systems. ieee here are more than 4,000 minerals on Earth. They appear in nature in two ways: without an 32% cusic Ree ieee mact at 902 angles identifiable form or with a definite arrangement of atoms. The external expressions of these aanenes 12% grouped into these crystalline systems. Tee arrangements are called crystals, of which there are 32 classes. Crystals are characterized by 7% Ua ae Tri ] their organized atomic structure, called a crystalline network, built from a fundamental unit (unit PAE ican ons Roses detrns ees cell). These networks can be categorized into the seven crystalline systems according to the crystal's 8% 9% characteristic rhombohedrons, arrangement. They can also be organized into 14 three-dimensional networks, known as the Bravais = bye Hei ald ae lattices. @ axes meet at 1202, Triclinic with one axis These crystals have very odd nes ng - Zoe . mate . Tetra onal shapes. They are not Oee celle Pinacoids Typical Characteristics Cubic These crystals are shaped like symmetrical from one end to Rhodochrosite es A crystal is a homogeneous solid ane pies foarapite ates Cubes, but one of their facets is pace Spears { / Prism and whose chemical elements exhibit an mec ak a auc, longer than the AUNTS: All three a } F 2 Basal organized internal structure. A unit cell Diamond axes meet at 90° angles, but one ts Labradorite % Pinacoid refers to the distribution of atoms or axis is longer than the other two. P ; : molecules whose repetition in three Hexagon al Mono clinic Shen Bipyramid > Pee tes ne ae prisms have six sides, with 1202 Prisms look like tetragonal CAYO emt eeecocecterte angles. From one end, the cross crystals cut at an angle. existence of elements with shared symmetry allows the 32 crystal classes to be categorized into seven groups. These groups section is hexagonal. Their axes do not meet at 902 angles. Prism and ‘= Domes | Vanadinite Prisms, eae planer aie QO |) dl ‘i zi : + Two Brazilianite Wit dral Pinacoids THE MOST COMMON Shapes ee (ERAN SHAPES = Rags 54 Simple Cube | — Rhombus Trigonal US hed Ls Trapezohedron \ Soa Octahedron 17 centered CRYSTALLINE y Triclinic YA Rhombus SYSTEM Shapes = hese utes Rhombo- Lor, ; . Ditrigonal /I\ Centered dodecahedron MO ‘= Tetragonal Scalenohedron 1 ]/ Rhombus Hexagonal 1 Prism and Prism Ditetragonal a etrahedron saa i a er a Face- with Pinacoids AWN Triclinic Triclinic centered penis ete lbs y Network Network Rhombus gulens Bete X\/ Prism Tetragonal | Bipyramid Hexagonal 4. Prism Combined | ||] WEES al ae Simple Vertical Axis Bipyramid Monoclinic Hexagonal Network et ete 4 A Prism f : CRYSTAL Bravais Lattices Combined with Bipyramid Simple Cubic leant mreciie SYMMETRY CRYSTALLOGRAPHIC In 1850, Auguste Bravais Network seen Ae Ree A crystal's ideal plane of symmetry OR COORDINATE AXES Frontal demonstrated theoretically Cantera passes through its center and divides it Plane that atoms can be organized into oe on into two equal, symmetrical parts. Its its Bases . : only 14 types of three-dimensional Transverse Axis networks. These network types are therefore named after him. three crystallographic axes pass through Simple its center. A crystal's longest vertical Tetragonal axis is called “c," its transverse axis “b,” and its shortest (from front to back) “a. Body-centered Cubic Network Only 14 network ° . . ‘ Anteroposterior Axis combinations are possible. The anglebetween Gahdl bls calle Horizontal i natok THESE COMBINATIONS ARE CALLED BRAVAIS LATTICES. eeaibes sles HOE Die Rebweea aati ety, hay rae ubic Network B Tetragonal and the one between a and b, gamma. Plane eae 32 MINERALS Precious Crystals recious stones are characterized by their beauty, color, transparency, and rarity. Examples are diamonds, emeralds, rubies, and sapphires. Compared to other gems, semiprecious stones are composed of minerals of lesser value. Today diamonds are the most prized gem for their “fire,” luster, and extreme hardness. The origin of diamonds goes back millions of years, but people began to cut them only in the 14th century. Most diamond deposits are located in South Africa, Namibia, and Australia. e Diamond fF Mineral composed of crystallized carbon ina [Lei cubic system. The beauty of its glow is due to a very high refraction index and the great dispersion of light in its interior, which creates an array of colors. It is the hardest of all minerals, and it originates underground at great depths. EXTRACTION Diamonds are obtained from kimberlite pipes left over from old volcanic eruptions, which brought the diamonds up from great depths. KIMBERLEY MINE RING OF WASTE MATERIAL ERODED LAVA MOUTH 0O3mi— - (0.5 km) COOLED LAVA 0.6 mi — (1.0 km) 0.9 mi — (1.5 km) MAIN CONDUIT 12mi— 74 (2.0 km) ROOT 1.5 mi — (2.5 km) PRESSURE ZONE Gems fF Mineral, rock, or petrified material that, (Lei after being cut and polished, is used in making jewelry. The cut and number of pieces that can be obtained is determined based on the particular mineral and its crystalline structure. CUTTING AND CARVING The diamond will be cut by another diamond to reach final perfection. This task is carried out by expert cutters. ra CUTTING: Using a fine steel blade, the diamond is hit with a sharp blow to split it. , INSPECTION: Exfoliation is determined in order to cut the diamond. 6.5 CARATS 0.3 inch (6.5 mm) of mineral must be removed to obtain a 1 carat diamond. 0.5 inch (13 mm) PRECIOUS STONES ti>, - det ==” DIAMOND The presence of any color is due to chemical impurities. EMERALD Chromium gives it its characteristic green color. OPAL This amorphous silica substance has many colors. CARVING: With a chisel, hammer, and circular saws, the diamond is shaped. 0.03 CARAT 0.08 inch (2 mm) RUBY Its red color comes from chromium. ROCKS AND MINERALS 33 POLISHING The shaping of the facets of the finished gem : enters the diamond. BRILLIANCE LIGHT 100 The internal faces of the — The facets of the I i 1 diamond act as mirrors pavilion reflect the light : BEZEL because they are cut at exact among themselves. 13.53 ear own | CROWN ‘ angles and proportions. 19 GIRDLE \ “> The light is reflected nS | —_~ STAR back to the crown in 40.9° i the opposite direction. “33 SF TABLE FIRE LIGHT PAVILLION Flashes of color from a well- //m The rays divide cut diamond. Each ray of light into their is refracted into the colors of components. IDEAL DIAMOND the rainbow. STRUCTURE - Each color reflects separately in the lege crown. MEASURED VERTICALLY THE CHEMISTRY OF DIAMONDS Strongly bonded carbon atoms crystallize in a cubic structure. Impurities or structural flaws can cause diamonds to show a hint of various colors, such as yellow, pink, green, and bluish white. BRILLIANT EMERALD PRINCESS TRILLION COMMON CUTS A diamond can have many shapes, as long as its —-- facets are carefully PEAR HEART OVAL calculated to maximize its brilliance. MARQUISE SEMIPRECIOUS STONES OF AMETHYST TOPAZ Quartz whose color is determined A gem of variable color, composed by manganese and iron of silicon, aluminum, and fluorine SAPPHIRE Blue to colorless corundum. They can also be yellow. GARNET A mix of iron, aluminum, magnesium, and vanadium TURQUOISE Aluminum phosphate and greenish blue copper 34 MINERALS -————— loo —___, Diamonds in History iamonds are a sign of status, and their monetary value is determined all oo by the law of supply and demand. First discovered by Hindus in 500 < : . BC, diamonds gained fame in the early 20th century when they were “7) SOK advertised in the United States as the traditional gift from husbands to INCA their wives. Some diamonds became famous, however, not only for their f J ‘ : FINAL CUT f economic value but also for the tales and myths surrounding them. @ K} Ay The Great Koh-i-noor Diamond \ fF This diamond, which originated in India, now belongs to the British Lal royal family. The raja of Malwa owned it for two centuries, until 1304, when it was stolen by the Mongols. In 1739 the Persians took possession of it. It witnessed bloody battles until finding its way back to India in 1813, after which point it reached the queen. ORIGINAL CUT It formerly weighed 186 carats with 30 facets that merged into six facets, _ which, in turn, became vs one. This explains its name: Mountain of Light. Coronation of the Queen Mother History In 1856 this diamond was offered to Queen Victoria as compensation for the Sikh wars. She then had it recut. The Koh-i-noor was diminished to 109 carats. The Queen Mother's Crown ONLY FOR WOMEN Because this diamond was believed to bring unhappiness to men, the superstitious Queen Victoria added a clause to her will stating that the diamond should only be handed down to the wives of future kings. ROCKS AND MINERALS 35 THE TAYLOR-BURTON DIAMOND This diamond, with a weight of 69.42 carats, was auctioned in 1969. The day after buying it, Cartier sold it to the actor Richard Burton for $1.1 million. His wife Elizabeth Taylor tripled its value when she sold it & after divorcing him. F The Misfortune of Possessing Hope 4 The Hope Diamond is legendary for the harm it brought to its owners La since being stolen from the temple of the goddess Sita in India. According to the legend, its curse took lives and devoured fortunes. In 1949 diamond expert Harry Winston bought it and in 1958 donated it to the Smithsonian Institution, in Washington, D.C., where it can be viewed by the public. Legen Over the years, belief in the curse of the Hope Diamond was reinforced as its owners fell into ruin. Evalyn Walsh McLean, the last private owner of the diamond, did not sell it even after several tragedies befell her family. 1 6 69 Louis XIV acquires the gem. He died in agony of gangrene. 1 8 3 () Henry Hope buys the diamond and suffers under the curse; he soon sells it. 1 While the stone is in the hands 1 9Q 8 of members of the McLean family, the patriarch and two of his daughters die. ORIGINAL CUT The purest of blue from the ~ presence of boronic impurities, the diamond's color is also influenced by the presence of nitrogen, which adds a pale yellow shade. Elizabeth Taylor Evalyn Walsh McLean THE LEGEND OF THE VALLEY OF DIAMONDS Alexander the Great introduced the legend of the Valley of Diamonds to Europe. According to this ancient account, later incorporated into the book The Thousand and One Nights, there was an inaccessible valley located in the mountains of northern India. The bed of this valley was covered with diamonds. To obtain them, raw meat was thrown in the valley and then fetched by trained birds, which would return it encrusted with diamonds. Cullinan, the Greatest Find fF Discovered in 1905 in South Africa, this diamond is the biggest ever iLe@ found. It was sold to the government of Transvaal two years after its discovery for $300,000 (£150,000). It was then given to Edward VII on the occasion of his 66th birthday. The king entrusted the cutting of the diamond to Joseph Asscher of The Netherlands, who divided it into 105 pieces. 9 LARGE AND 96 SMALL PIECES Joseph Asscher studied the huge stone for six months to decide how to cut it; he then divided it into nine primary stones and 96 smaller diamonds. THE GREAT STAR OF AFRICA This gem is the second largest cut diamond in the world, weighing 530 carats. Because it belongs to the British Crown, it is on display in the Tower of London. 4 Pd 5310 Barats is the weight of the Cullinan I, the largest stone obtained from the original Cullinan find. It is followed by Cullinan II, which weighs 317 carats and is set in the imperial crown. FINAL CUT 36 MINERALS The Most Common Minerals ilicates, which form 95 percent of the Earth's crust, are the most abundant type of mineral. Units of their tetrahedral structure, formed by the bonding of one silicon and four oxygen ions, combine to create several types of configurations, from isolated simple tetrahedrons to simple and double chains to sheets and three-dimensional complex networks. They can be light or dark; the latter have iron and magnesium in their chemical structures. Structures p- The basic unit of silicates consists of four oxygen ions located at the vertices of a tetrahedron, surrounding a silicon ion. Tetrahedrons can form by sharing oxygen ions, forming simple chains, laminar structures, or complex three- dimensional structures. The structural configuration also determines the type of exfoliation or fracture the silicate will exhibit: mica, which is composed of layers, exfoliates into flat sheets, whereas quartz fractures. All silicates have the same basic component: a silicon-oxygen tetrahedron. This structure consists of four oxygen ions that surround a much smaller silicon ion. Because this tetrahedron does not share oxygen ions with other tetrahedrons, it keeps its simple structure. UNCOMBINED SILICATES This group includes all silicates composed of independent a tetrahedrons of silicon € and oxygen. Example: fi : olivine. a P| €. * ‘ 4 OXYGEN SILICON This structure occurs when the tetrahedrons share three of their four oxygen ions with neighboring tetrahedrons, spreading out to form a wide sheet. Because the strongest bonds are formed between silicon and oxygen, exfoliation runs in the direction of the other bonds, parallel to the sheets. There are several examples of this type of structure, but the most common ones are micas and clays. The latter can retain water within its sheets, which makes its size vary with hydration. COMPACTED KAOLINITE SILICATE MOLECULES WATER MOLECULES SILICATE MOLECULES AUGITE CHAINS Clays are complex minerals with a very fine grain and a sheetlike structure. Three fourths of the Earth's crust is composed of silicates with complex structures. Silicas, feldspars, feldspathoids, scapolites, and zeolites all have this type of structure. Their main characteristic is that their tetrahedrons share all their oxygen ions, forming a three- dimensional network with the same unitary composition. Quartz is part of the silica group. THREE- DIMENSIONAL STRUCTURE a Quartz has a complex a three-dimensional a Ns structure composed only of silicon and oxygen. $ se Yy ey >) Se LATERAL VIEW An ," VIEW FROM A ABOVE ROCKS AND MINERALS 37 ( > >». Iron is MINERAL COMBINATIONS " added toyits composition.» IRON AND MAGNESIUM EXAMPLE: BIOTITE S| The color and heaviness of this mineral are caused bt . ee =A by the presence of iron and magnesium ions. ~~ leds, 4 fj Sarees x Known as a ferromagnesian mineral, biotite's 4 od specific gravity varies between 3.2 and 3.6. Calcium is added to MAGNESIUM EXAMPLE: MINERAL TALC This mineral contains variable amounts of cA calcium, aluminum, sodium, and potassium. Its specific gravity is, on average, 2.7—much lower than that of ferromagnesian minerals. The quartz crystal maintains a hexagonal shape with its six sides converging to a tip (pyramid). For a quartz crystal to acquire large dimensions, it needs a great deal of silicon and oxygen, much time, and ample space. hs a 38 MINERALS The Nonsilicates | ulfurs, oxides, sulfates, pure elements, 5, carbona i roxi de: S, and phosphates are less abundant than, silicates e| act crust. They make up eight percent of minerals : important economically. They are also important, ent: Since ancient times, some have been appreciat a Use simply for their beauty. oes ave still being sear ae of ory industrial uses. @ 7 0s: Very Few ina Pure State - It is rare for native chemical elements to be found in the ~ Earth's crust in a pure state.In general, they must be extracted from other minerals by means of industrial chemical processes. However, they can occasionally be found in rocks in a pure state. Diamonds, for instance, are pure carbon. ‘ | Native ‘Bley In addition to carbon as diamond an copper, gold minerals that ane fi el Cry stallized—o er, and platinum are other d’as native elements. “ASSOCIATION The greenish color indicates the formation of copper sulfate. DENDRITES Microscopic forms that appear when copper solidifies and crystallizes “S412 inches, (CM) Copper nuggets can reach a high ay of purity, LIMONITE . e Hydroxides. “Known in chemical terms as a base, MAGNETITE .-. _ theseitypes of minerals appear through the association of oxide with water. Limonite, an iron ore used as pigment because of its reddish color, and bauxite (or aluminum hydroxide) are among the most abundant hydroxides. Bauxite is the ore fromwhich aluminum, a metal that is becoming more and more widely used, is extracted. Se SoOxideés ? Metal associations with oxygen atoms. Ilmenite, hematite, and chromite are ores from which titanium, iron, and chrome as ‘ _are extracted. Rubies and sapphires are - extracted from corundum. . Phosphates Both apatite, used as’fertilizer, and the semiprecious stone turquoise are phosphates. These material§ have a_ complex structure basedion an ion composed of one phosphorus and four oxygen atoms. These ions, in turn, are associated with compound ions of other elements. <— i barium is extracted. ay - cae : ) . ROCKS AND MINERALS 39 [EE SS = SS Fi s PYRITE a — Sit. “scrystals"comes from = cee Wont = ~ me = ea. S Se - eS ag itn Se 3 oii aa = Formation and Transformation of Rocks atural forces create an incredible variety of landscapes, such as deserts, beaches, elevated peaks, ravines, canyons, and underground caves. Settings like the one in the picture amaze us and arouse our interest in finding out what is hidden in the cave's depths. Rocks subjected to high pressure and temperatures can SUBTERRANEAN WORLD This awe-inspiring limestone cave in Neversink Pit (Alabama) looks like no other place on Earth. _- undergo remarkable changes. An initially igneous rock can become sedimentary and later metamorphic. There are experts who overcome every type of obstacle to reach inhospitable ROCKS OF FIRE IF STONES COULD SPEAK SCULPTED VALLEY METAMORPHIC PROCESSES EVERYTHING CHANGES THE BASIS OF LIFE DARK AND DEEP DIVINE AND WORSHIPED places, even in the bowels of the Earth, in search of strange or precious materials, such as gold and silver. They also look for fossils to learn about life- forms and environments of the past. 42 FORMATION AND TRANSFORMATION OF ROCKS ROCKS AND MINERALS 43 Rocks of Fir e VOLCANIC ROCK Volcanic, or extrusive, rocks are those that reach BASALT ROCK SILICA CONTENT Peo ; ; the surface as lava because of volcanic activity. originates from highly a / According to the gneous (from Latin ignis, “fire”) rocks form when magma coming from the rocky mantle (underneath ey niey relatcly qulstiy ne tie sre nue ta rragrralat type of lava . Pee CY at Per ee at ome, like the obsidians, solar 00 quic Oo Bi the crust) rises, cools, and solidifies. When magma comes to the surface as lava and solidifies vrcilise Thee deesot recio's distingdished by cee ee relatively quickly, it creates extrusive rocks, such as basalt or rhyolite. On the other hand, when ee eee poe Ora . Oe ee at . . . Issoive aS a ie moment of eruption, whic magma seeps into caves or between rock layers and slowly solidifies, intrusive igneous rocks, such as alve ee see ae Highly liquid gabbro and granite, are formed. These rocks usually have thicker grains and are less dense than the lava, such as basalt, usually covers large surfaces : h di lled dik ill d batholiths b hth £ because it solidifies on the outside while still is located between extrusive ones. They are arranged in structures called dikes, sills, and batholiths beneath the surface. fenalninig fluid underground ea acre superficial layers. Igneous rocks make up most of the Earth's crust. intruded into a vertical fracture Composed of rhyolitic eS . . BRANCHING A Complex Process ranet P volcanic lava (rich in silicon) atten 5 8 ; an LACCOLITH The Earth's crust is 44 miles (70 km) Rigid, outermost - 2 ak, a ‘< peo ag deep at most. Farther down, rocks are layer ; molten or semimolten, forming magma that Collapsed volcanic we —~ ight at rises through the crust and opens paths through ROCKY MANTLE crater covered with * . patie cracks, cavities, or volcanoes. Magma can 1,800 miles Rock fragments water solidify when it is moving or still or when (2,900 km) thick and ash that underground or expelled to the surface. All spread out over these characteristics together with different CORE miles mineral compositions create a wide variety of igneous rocks. The outer core is made of solid iron and melted nickel. TH TI PLUTONIC ROCKS Most magma is underground in the form of plutons, which undergo a solidification process. This forms intrusive (or plutonic) rocks. When magma intrudes into vertical fissures, the resulting rock formations are called dikes; those between sedimentary layers are sills; and batholiths are masses hundreds of miles long. In general, intrusive LAVA IN THE CRUST 9 (1 rocks crystallize slowly, and their minerals / A ~) () ) form thick grains. But the solidification y4UU LU ) process will determine the structure; the occupy the spaces between canta Tra reRTCe aT A rock will be different depending on whether overlying layers of rocks. DEPTH OF 125 MILES (200 KM) solidification is slow (over millions of years) or fast and whether it loses or gains . . materials along the way. ; Bowen's Reaction Series Different magma materials solidify at different temperatures. Minerals with calcium, iron, and magnesium crystallize first, giving them a dark coloring (olivine, pyroxene). But sodium, potassium, and aluminum crystallize at lower temperatures, remaining in the residual magma until the end of the process. They are present only in pale-colored rock, which crystallizes later. Sometimes different stages of the process can be seen in the same rock. receives magma GRANITE material from the Composed of feldspar and mantle. quartz crystals, it is rich in sodium, potassium, and silica. SILICA are massive plutons smaller than batholiths. DIKES AGATE The structure of the rock depends on its formation process. Thus, a rock resulting from magma intrusion into a dike will have a structure and INTRUSIVE coloring different from the ROCK rock around it because of having crystallized faster. SURROUNDING ROCK LAST LAYER can be an old magma TO CRYSTALLIZE chamber that has solidified over thousands of years. because of the melted rock's low density. FIRST LAYER TO CRYSTALLIZE 44 FORMATION AND TRANSFORMATION OF ROCKS sculpted Valley osemite National Park is located 200 miles (320 km) east of San Francisco, California. This park is known worldwide for its granite cliffs, waterfalls, crystalline rivers, and forests of giant sequoias. It covers an area of 1,190 square miles (3,081 sq km) and extends along 103 the eastern slopes of the Sierra Nevada range. Yosemite National Park has over three million visitors every year. ~ Million Years Ago One of the main rock formations, with compacted and 103 87 » ae Million Million (188 m) Years Years Ago FREE FALL 300-foot-high (1,000 m) Granite monolith of This huge waterfall n, - granite cliff used for unique beauty. It is lower formed as a consequence ah, mountain climbing than El Capitan, being of glacial thaw ina , ‘ 2,160 feet (660 m) high. “hanging” valley. > This park has an average elevation of 1,300 to 2,000 feet (400-600 m) above sea level! The geology of the area is mostly composed offa granitic batholith, but five percent of the park is composed of formations from the metamorphism of volcanic and sedimentary rocks. Erosion at different elevations and fracture systems created valleys, canyons, hills, and other current geological formations. The wide separation between fractures and joints is caused. by the amount of silica present in the granite and. in the metamorphic rocks. a Erosion in the joints resulted in valleys strongest erosive forces of the last se' od + - Pty %, 7m ral ea PS n = ar 4 : ae ; - = : ph y Stree ! ers yi BATHOLITH FORMATION ~~ , ’ ; (3) EROSION _*+ MINT yt? Sa a= ile! Almost all rocky formation “ay 2 . ‘x »One million years ago, ‘ 7 i ay : ft 4 £3 9 at Yosemite Park are composed ~ the descending flow of were ' se of granite; they belong {Othe 1 feapet . ve glacial ice gave the original batholith. «. zie. y > oT “ valley a U shape. > v . > GRANITE ‘ELEVATION —~ U-SHAPED GLACIATION CANYONS Compact granite forming a large batholith FISSURE Produced by erosion at rock joints ~ ROCKS AND MINERALS 45 YOSEMITE NATIONAL PARK United States Latitude 37°N Longitude 119° W Location California Surface 1,190 square miles (3,081 sq km) Visitors in 2005 3,380,038 Opened on 9/25/1890 Administered by National Park Service CASCADES Some rock formations in the park serve as platforms for waterfalls, especially in April, May, and June when the snow melts upstream. The valley has nine waterfalls, five of which are over 1,000 feet (300 m) high; Yosemite Falls is 2,600 feet (800 m) high. This is the highest waterfall in North America and the third highest in the world. a The park has three oh groves of giant sequoias, _ "among other species. fray * FISSURES . FS, The erosion at rock joints causes fissures within them, and this process leads'to.the formation of valleys and canyons. The downward flow,of the glacial’mass of ice cut and sculpted the valley into.a U shape. .. Today this unique landscape attracts great numbers of visitors. \ . Rates 46 FORMATION AND TRANSFORMATION OF ROCKS ROCKS AND MINERALS 47 Everything Changes renrrosomars DESERT GLACIER ind, ice, and water. These natural elements cause great changes in the Earth's landscape. Tn the desert, the wind Glaciers transport rock Erosion and transportation are processes that produce and spread rock materials. Then, ee enn, wibeanes They af Paleo when these materials settle and become compacted, new rocks are created, which in turn tranerert Che noe ] 2aNoues titati tgetnr nth rade oe will revert to sediment. These are sedimentary rocks: the most widely known rocks, they cover 70 pastes aug slg garried slooaiby the alan percent of the Earth's surface. By observing sedimentary rocks of different ages, scientists can estimate how the climate and the environment have changed. @ GLACIAL CIRQUE At the upper end of the valley, the walls erode ina TRANSPORT After erosion, fragments are transported to an area where they will be deposited. In deserts, the wind transports the sand grains, forming dunes; with COLUMNS Formed by the action id y . ° € of the wind and sand i m® ALLUVIAL CONE © EROSION semicircular form. abrasion ’ Sediments are deposited Tha wucar and mavement Gf iaterakonthe glaciers, the debris forms frontal and lateral moraines. en y at the mouth of canyons. : : , =; DESERT < surface through the action of water, wind, or PLATEAU > ice. It can start when rocks are broken down SLOPES by physical or chemical forces. Rocks fall from slopes onto glaciers. They are included in the material that makes CANYON f up the moraine. Typical result of strong temperature variations between night and day CENTRAL-AJORAINE forms when two valley glaciers meet, PEDESTALS Cracks created by creating only one the wind and mass of ice. , watercourses = DEPOSITS Sand accumulates in low areas. CRACKS ‘ona TRANSPORTED ROCK will be deposited on the moraines. LATERAL MORAINE Formed by the fragments accumulated along the sides of the glacier MUSHROOM FORMATION Sand transported by the wind molds stratified shapes such as mushrooms. ERRATICS are large rock fragments that INSELBERG A solitary mound less eroded than U-SHAPED the glacier WIND FINE SEDIMENT The wind and the flat ground VALLEYS is deposited under the ee sand constant sand over which it rises Glaciers erode GLACIER glacier and at its front ro Mass of ice that flows down over a landmass. valleys, forming a U shape because erosion is greatest at the bottom. end. The deposited material is called till. abrasion erode the base of a stone peak. GLACIER I TERMINAL Deserts bee Glaciers els yt liek IS The largest environments sculpted by wind are the deserts. Because EROSION I These huge ice masses form on the ground, slowly moving downward Rocks that fall onto the [Leal of the scarcity of water and the widely varying temperatures, the rock By transporting sand grains fLefl_ through the action of gravity. As they advance, they carry away rocks in glacier, along with the is broken down by physical forces. Rocks fragment and are swept to low-lying from the crest of the ridge, their path. At the head of a glacier valley, the walls erode in a semicircle, forming rock it was already carrying, areas by occasional water currents. Then sand and mud will be swept away the wind moves the dunes. what is called a glacial cirque. The simultaneous, progressive erosion of the walls accumulate at the front of by the wind in a process called deflation. Through this process particles can The grains can be transported ACCUMULATED d creates a pyramidal horn, or peak. The valleys through which a glacier has passed the glacier and form what is ACCUMULATED be transported into semiarid regions. up to 100 feet (30 m) per year. SEDIMENTS are U-shaped instead of the V shape typical of the erosion of river valleys. called a terminal moraine. SEDIMENTS 48 FORMATION AND TRANSFORMATION OF ROCKS TRANSPORT OF SEDIMENTS BEACH BOULDER A river can transport After each wave breaks, sediments over great the undertow descends the distances. Rivers originate in beach slope, creating an elevated areas, from which accumulation of sand that they flow to lower areas and has been transported by the then to the sea. When the waves in a process called a current gathers speed, it coastal current. Sand is also SAND transports big boulders. When transported by rivers, which OR PEBBLES the energy is less, the current deposit sediments in their carries only smaller rocks. deltas. Softer rock erodes, forming a cave with a rocky ceiling that will finally crumble and fall When the currents that transport sediment lose energy, the sediment is deposited in layers and distributed over extensive areas. River valleys are steep because they are composed of layers of hard rock. In these geographic features, a high volume of matter is A product of lateral transported by river erosion. undermining The outside of the curve is where the most sediment is deposited. FORMATION OF V-SHAPED VALLEYS Unlike glacial valleys, which are eroded in the shape of a U, river valleys are V-shaped. Composed of sediments Close to the river's source, the current is very strong, and it erodes and digs into the riverbed to form V-shaped valleys. <> INITIAL PHASE Rivers Close to their source, rivers flow through areas of high elevation. The water descends there with great force and energy, which enables the current to transport large boulders. At low elevations, rivers flow more smoothly over sediments, forming meanders and with sandbars through eroding laterally. On reaching the coast, rivers deposit sediments and which the river flows in form estuaries or deltas. various directions. The sediment deposited at the river's mouth FINAL PHASE creates a delta, an area ROCKS AND MINERALS 49 MINERAL DEPOSITS CEMENTATION PROCESS This is the most important process that transforms sediment into rock. Cementation occurs when particles join with the materials precipitated from the water currents. Sedimentary rocks are formed through the union of different minerals that have been dissolved in water. When the water evaporates or cools, the dissolved minerals can precipitate and form deposits that accumulate with other sediments, or they can form rocks on their own. Salts and sandstone are common examples of cemented rocks. yt SEPARATION —— BY WEIGHT SEDIMENT BANKS Interrupts the shoreline and delivers continental sediments. The successive layers of sedimentary deposits compact the lower ones by exerting pressure on them. This gives rise to diagenesis and lithification, processes that will form new rock. COASTAL PLAIN Aplain that usually .- lies inward from beach Flat surface created by a receding cliff Caves are cut into the E rock through abrasion. ESTUARY Former river valley that isnow flooded. It offers the necessary Ss conditions for depositing much: =~ | sediment. ; CLIFFS SEDIMENTARY DEPOSIT UNDERWATER SLOPE Along the coast, the effects of erosion caused by waves are easy to spot. Cliffs are created through the erosive action of the waves against the base of coastal terrain. As the erosion progresses, the undermining of the cliff's base leaves higher rock layers jutting outward, which then collapse. The cliff recedes, leaving a flat surface in the form of a bank called an abrasion platform. Different layers of lithified sediments Coasts Ocean coasts are the most changing landscapes in the Earth's geography thanks to a process called coastal drift. The elements Beaches are formed from the that build up the coastline—wind, rain, and waves—also erode and mold gradual deposits of waves in it. Thus, the waves that bring the sediments that form beaches and carry low-energy coastal zones. They them away are the same waves that can create or knock down a cliff or can be made of fine sediment, . cave. Its remnants will be the building material for another beach, along such as mud and sand, or of larger ACCUMULATED with the sediment that comes from rivers and their deltas. materials, such as boulders. SEDIMENTS ROCKS AND MINERALS 51 50 FORMATION AND TRANSFORMATION OF ROCKS MN ” Dark and Deep hStalactite Formation cave is a hollow space created essentially through the chemical action of water x Limestone is a rock composed on a soluble, usually chalky, material. Caves have three strictures: stalactites . Saas a tly 38 (conical structures that hang from the cave ceiling), stalagmites (structures 4 “ater inwater absorbs carbon dioxide that jut from the cave floor), and columns (created when stalactites and stalagmites join). id microorganisms from the gra a weak acid. i it can disso! Over time. If this water drips into a ca dioxide to the air and deposits the exces: stalactites and stalagmites, thereby maintai equilibrium. Stalactites are excellent examples of chemical sedimentary rocks. ) 65° F The cycle of cave formation is called the karst*cycle, whieh lasts a total of around one million years. For this reason, young, active caves havewnoisy streams and cascades, whereas old caves are silent wonders decorated with stalagmites, stalactites, and egioriys.- 1 WATER DROPLET Every stalactite starts from a simple water droplet containing dissolved salts. 2 CALCITE When the droplet falls, it leaves behind a narrow calcite trail. The Karst Cycle > When water dissolves high calcium content abrasive action of pebbles and otherinsoluble rock through the corrosive effect of carbonic _ elements: Water is filtered) until it reaches lower , va, | VIN 1 go C 3 MORE LAYERS acid, it forms networks of conduits and galleries. levels, leaving it in its 3 wake Openin Js arrang din . * | ffstalactites : ( )) ! * ‘ Each successive droplet The initial fissures widen not only through this levels ahd Separated by vertical pi Ss and Passages ; . and stalagmites be | \ ; ‘al that falls deposits another chemical process but also mechanically through the _—_ that conheet: ‘71 fi ‘evi : : grow until they . _ IDEAL TEMPERATURE FOR ; \ i} : fine calcite layer. - AnH \ "THE PRECIPITATION OF Ww join together, < 1% ' we " _ CARBONATE 4 AL ie)! PA - 7 they become ; i|| INTERIOR TUBE 7 J a * columns. 7% Ae 1 RUCTURE OF THE = : 4 The layers form around a GROUND STRATUM FA CAVE) vf i narrow pipe (0.02 inch [0.5 F The ground''s original 4 : structure is Composed of - ak te which the permeable limestone. It aft ps. has fissures through iy I which river or rainwater ' / | r is filtered. This starts the THE HIGHEST COLUMN Ua 5 oT ; erosive process. ; » IN THE WORLD many droplets are a deposited over this pipe, : stalactites are formed. ® ai) ; 7 &, IMPERMEABLE ROCK STALACTITES INITIAL CAVE can form on ceilings and cement Water, following the floors, although they form much CANGO lle of a lh ( , ; i faster in a cave's natural CAVES orms an underground river. i : a > UNDERGROUND environment that contains The first calcite or calcium ; " f Fz SEQUENCE carbon-rich solutions. SOUTH AFRICA carbonate deposits start Latitude 33°S 3 CALCITE to form in the shape of DEPOSITS a fe et Longitude 182 E stalactites. (7 m) SINKHOLE VAULT THE BIGGEST STALACTITE Length 3.3 miles (6.3 km) IN THE WORLD Depth 200 feet (60 m) Location East of Cape Town STALAGMITE Oth F ti 3 EXTENDED CAVE Water droplets containing er Formations SYSTEM dissolved carbonate Formed when several create stalagmites as they A passing underground current forms two types CANGO CAVES tunnels are joined drip down. > of landscape: canyons and tunnels. Underground Isolated in a narrow strip of limestone from the together. Sometimes the rivers and waterfalls above the water table create Precambrian, in the highlands of Oudtshoorn, the Cango DRY GALLERY surface of the soil starts 1 OO feet deep, undulating canyons by eroding and dissolving Caves are remarkable for their abundant deposits of to sink, creating limestone and by abrading the rock layers with sediment. calcite. They are left over from a larger channel below TUNNEL sinkholes. If the cave (30 m) Below the water table, caves are full of water that moves the water table. This channel dried up when the extends below the water slowly, dissolving walls, floors, and ceilings of carbonate neighboring surface valleys were worn down to lower table, tunnels are formed. ie eS eA ECoRE Te rock to create tunnels. levels. The impressive stalagmites were then formed.. IN THE WORLD 52 FORMATION AND TRANSFORMATION OF ROCKS ROCKS AND MINERALS 53 If Stones Could Speak A Fossi's Age When it dies, an animal can 2 : . ope eAcgs be submerged on a riverbed, Fossils are remains of organisms that lived in the past. Today scientists ; ; GRAND CANYON tected fi Th use several procedures, including carbon-14 dating, to estimate their age. ock strata form from sediments deposited Colorado River adi eoriel SORE The skeleton is completely This method makes it possible to date organic remains with precision from as over time in successive laye rs. Someti mes Arizona covered with sediments. long ago as 60,000 years. If organisms are older, there are other methods for th di t b . f Fi j Over the years, new layers are absolute dating. However, within a known area, a fossil's location in a given ese sediments bury remains oT organisms Latitude 36° N added, burying the earlier layers. sedimentary layer enables scientists to place it on an efficient, relative time scale. that can later become fossi Is, which provide key Length 112° W Following principles of original horizontality and of succession, it is possible to find out when an organism lived. data about the environment and prehistoric life on Earth. The geologic age of rocks and the The Grand Canyon tells the history Once the water disappears, the » of the Earth in colorful layers on its fossil is already formed and processes th ey have U nd ergone Can be N walls. The Colorado River has been crystallized. The crust's d iscovered th roug h d iffe re nt m ethods » carving its way through the plateau movements raise the layers, for six million years. The layers along the river provide an uninterrupted account of geological history. bringing the fossil to the surface. Erosion exposes the fossil to full view. With carbon-14 dating, scientists can determine if it is less than 60,000 years old. that combine analyses of successive layers and the fossils they contain. During fossilization, molecules of the original tissue are replaced precisely with minerals that petrify it. Rock Layers and the Passage of Time Period Rock layers are essential for time measurement because they retain information not only about the geologic past but also about past life-forms, climate, and more. The principle of original horizontality establishes that the layers of sediment are deposited horizontally and parallel to the surface and that they are defined by two planes that show lateral continuity. If layers are folded or bent, they must have been altered by some geologic process. These ruptures are CARBONIFEROUS called unconformities. If the continuity between layers is interrupted, it means that there was an interval of time and, N consequently, erosion in the layer Limestone below. This also is called Bright Angel unconformity, since it interrupts Shale the horizontality DEVONIAN principle. - CAMBRIAN 7 > Peal es ; PRECAMBRIAN ee ' Wy | ' TONTO GROUP Zoroaster : / q | | Granite 1,000 feet (310 m) are extinct arthropods. They were solitary marine creatures, and they had a segmented body and an exoskeleton of the protein chitin, with pairs PRINCIPLE OF SUCCESSION Re : Fossils succeeded one another in a of Jo unteg limbs. Together definite order, which makes it with graptolites they are 5 one of the most EUROAMERICA possible to date past events. The characteristic fossils existence of identical fossils on Unconformity between from Paleozoic marine different continents helps establish the Tonto Group and the Colorado River = =. <= s ad nj; UNKAR GROUP sediments. . . Redwall Limestone indicates correlations and assigns the same age a temporal hiatus. Between to widely separated geographic areas. the Redwall Limestone and - \ \ GONDWANA ; the Supai Group, there is temporal continuity. 54 FORMATION AND TRANSFORMATION OF ROCKS Metamorphic Processes hen rocks are subjected to certain conditions (high pressure and temperature or exposure to fluids with dissolved chemicals), they can undergo remarkable changes in both their mineral composition and their structure. This very slow process, called metamorphism, is a veritable transformation of the rock. This phenomenon originates inside the Earth's crust as well as on the surface. The type of metamorphism depends on the nature of the energy that triggers the change. This energy can be heat or pressure. @ a ae % Wad —_ - , che 4E ¥ ¢ . © a ? ee = . = : ; : oP eer Dynamic Metamorphism- < SCOTLAND, y amor} United Kingdom The least common type of metamorphism, Latitude 57°N dynamic metamorphism happens when Longitude 04° W the large-scale movement of the crust along fault systems causes the rocks to be compressed. Great rock masses thrust Scotland was raised:in the Caledonian over others. Where they come in contact orogeny 400 million years ago. This. pressure hew. metamorphic rocks, called produced the gneiss shown in the photo. cataclasites and mylonites, are formed. —-. 570° F ‘ (300° C) SLATE = : * Metamorphic rock of low grade ~ that forms through pressure “ at about 390° F (200° C). . . Tt becomes more compact and dense. . 4 _— = i — Schist PRESSURE As the pressure increases on the rocks, with high temperature the mineralogical f and pressure, slates will structure of rocks is become phyllites. reorganized; which reduces their size. Slate In environments Regional. Metamorphism os As mountains form, aargeamount of rock is deformed i Magmatic rocks transmit heat, soa body of magma and transformed. Rocks buried close to the surface descend to greatér depths and are modified by higher temperatures and pressures. This. metamorphism covers 3 - -— sSeet™thotisandsiof square miles and is classified according to the — SS temperatiire and pressure reached. Slate is an example of = = = rock.affected by this type of process. ROCKS AND MINERALS 55 930° F (500° C) SCHIST Very flaky rock produced by metamorphism at intermediate temperatures and depths greater (e) x than six miles (10 km). The minerals 2 recrystallize. ) (650° C) O GNEISS Produced through highly metamorphic processes more than 12 miles (20 km) beneath the surface, it involves extremely powerful tectonic forces and temperatures near the melting point of rock. 1,470° F (800° C) FUSION At this temperature, most rocks start to melt until they become liquid. Contact Metamorphism can heat rocks on contact. The affected area, located around an igneous intrusion or lava flow, is called an aureole. Its size depends on the intrusion and on the magma's temperature. The minerals of the surrounding rock turn into other minerals, and the rock metamorphoses. Sandstone Schist Intermediate Crust Limestone Lower Crust f o Quarzite TEMPERATURE The closer the rock is to the heat source and the ae dil greater the temperature, the higher the degree of Marble - metamorphism that Sa takes place. 56 FORMATION AND TRANSFORMATION OF ROCKS The Basis of Life rganisms are born, live, reproduce, and die on a natural layer of soil. From this layer, crops are harvested, livestock are raised, and construction materials are obtained. It establishes the link between life and the mineral part of the planet. Through the action of climate and biological agents, soil forms where rocks are broken down. Different Characteristics Observing the soil profile makes it possible to distinguish layers called horizons. Each layer has different characteristics and properties, hence the importance of identifying the layers to study and describe them. The surface layer is rich in organic matter. Beneath is the subsoil, where nutrients accumulate and some roots penetrate. Deeper down is a layer of rocks and pebbles. Types of Soil In the soil we find bedrock materials that have been greatly altered by air and water, living organisms, and decomposed organic materials. The many physical and chemical transformations that it undergoes produce different types of soil, some richer in humus, other with more clay, and so on. The soil's basic texture depends to a great extent on the type of bedrock from which the soil is formed. RANKER develops on top of slightly altered bedrock. It is typical in high mountains, especially if it forms on granite or other acidic rocks. PERMAFROST ——————- Areas near the poles The soil is saturated with frozen water. In the parts that thaw, big puddles are formed. Because of its characteristics, many animals cannot live there. UPPER LAYER This layer is: dark and rich in nutrients. It contains a network of plant roots along with humus, which is formed from plant.and.animal residues. 3 ft (dm) SUBSOIL™ “contains many mineral particles drock=It is formed ; e) humus, ; 7ft (2m) DESERTIC Arid soil Containing very little humus, it rests directly on mineral deposits and rock fragments. LATERITE Typical tropical soil With abundant rains and humidity in these zones, the soil is well drained. The rain leaves a mix of oxides and hydroxides of aluminum, iron, manganese, nickel, and other minerals in the soil. This represents 70 percent of the world's iron reserves. BEDROCIC The glacier The bare Moss and Small trees Animals and plants that The. continuous breakdown drags rock and dwarf manage to die help to enrich the and erosion of the bedrock. Much of the Earth's crust is covered with a layer of sediments. gravel shrubs take root. soil. helps increase the thickness — remain. grow. sediment and decomposing organic matter. This layer, ‘ called soil, covers everything except very steep slopes. Although it is created from decomposing plant and animal remains, the soil is a living and changing system. Its tiniest cavities, home to thousands of bacteria, algae, and fungi, are filled with water or air. These microorganisms speed up the decomposition process, turning the soil into a habitat favorable to plant roots as well as small animals and insects. of the soil..Soil texture also depends to a great extent on the type of bedrock on-which it forms. ie . ¢ Years passed since glaciation. 150 100 200 250 ROCKS AND MINERALS 57 Living Organisms in the Soil Many bacteria and fungi live in the soil; their biomass usually surpasses that of all animals living on the surface. Algae (mainly diatoms) also live closest to the surface, where there is most light. Mites, springtails, cochineal insects, insect larvae, earthworms, and others are also found there. Earthworms build tunnels that make the growth of roots easier. Their droppings retain water and contain important nutrients. It takes approximately 6,000 earthworms to produce 3,000 pounds (1,350 kg) of humus. HUMUS is the substance composed of organic materials, usually found in the upper layers of soil. It is produced by microorganisms, mainly acting on fallen branches and animal droppings. The dark color of this highly fertile layer comes from its high carbon content. Rock Cycle Some rocks go through the rock cycle to form soil. Under the action of erosive agents, rocks from the Earth's crust take on characteristic shapes. These shapes are a consequence partly of the rock's own composition and partly of several effects caused by erosive agents (meteorological and biological) responsible for breaking down rocky material. Clouds of dust and ash are released to the atmosphere. Ash and other pyroclastic J materials Avolcano 4 rt. are expels lava and ge? Igneous deposited pyroclastic t rock cools in layers. material down and . erodes. & Some sedimentary These : and metamorphic layers Extrusive rocks rocks erode, compress form as the lava forming new and harden. cools. strata. Magma rises to the surface and comes out as lava through the volcano. Heat and pressure can recrystallize the rock without melting it, turning it into another Igneous and plutonic rocks form as magma cools and solidifies below the Earth's surface. type of rock. The rock melts to a en If itis hot enough, the rock can turn into magma again. LE 58 FORMATION AND TRANSFORMATION OF ROCKS ROCKS AND MINERALS 59 Divine and Worshiped ormed millions of years ago, some rocks enjoy the privilege of being considered deities. Pagans, Christians, Muslims, and Aborigines of Australia base part of their oe ae Uluru 7 beliefs on the myths, properties, or legends of a rock. Among the best known are Groove BF ee ena Cre ones td 0 nee CO ae eee Uluru (Ayers Rock), the Black Stone located in the cube-shaped sepulcher of the Ka‘ bah, Abo gn oO ae rises 1,100 feet (340 m) above the Australian desert. Uluru was fi f fi ree H F ‘ oritices symbolize the eyes of a discovered by Caucasians in 1872 and renamed Ayers Rock in honor and the rocks of Externsteine, a destination of Christian pilgrimages and a sacred site dead eneiny of the Australian Pere hMIneees Eetey eT ee for many ancient pagan religions. Their origins are described and studied in theology as sandstone mass, dozens of dream paths traversed by the Aborigines A H f F H and the paths already traveled by their ancestors in the past well as in geology. Resistant to the passing of time, they are transformed into myths converge throlgh a series Gk nivdte TRH ee tte eee that remain to the present. places are connected. On the rock are forms such as Kuniya women ye . — and the wounded head of the Liru warrior, among others. a CS 3] yy "GAVE PAINTI ye Ki r ‘Uluru contains s dst | featu ( Lf if i ancestral histo eunr the rock ha origi : 5 FI ’ ee hg hs Ae Fa lacie MUSLIM TRADITION Muslims who have the necessary means are expected to go to Mecca at least once in their lives. es e thetheight of the Externsteiie = mes hale alg raing to ARIE forngation. It consists of five = stones were placed there at night by giants; tl «-liitieStone pillarsptiddled. with caves, " Z ae rd , 3 > were then bur! e devil, which explains passages, andeseeret-chainbers. 4 ‘ 5 grot ‘al caehanet ©. 62-63 70-71 64-65 72-73 66-67 74-75 68-69 62 CLASSES OF ROCKS How to Identify Rocks ocks can be classified as igneous, metamorphic, or sedimentary according to the manner in which they were formed. Their specific characteristics depend on the minerals that constitute them. Based on this information, it is possible to know how rocks gained their color, texture, and crystalline structure. With a little experience and knowledge, poo can learn to recognize and identity some of the socks that they _offen’see: Shapes The final shape that a rock acquires depends to a great extent on its resistance to outside forces. The cooling process and subsequent erosion also influence the formation of rocks. Despite the changes caused by these processes, it Being able to accurately determine ANGULAR is possible to infer information about a the age of a rock is very useful in Rocks have this shape rock's history from its shape. the study of geology. when they have not been worn down. ROUNDED The wear caused by erosion and transport gives rocks a smooth Mineral Composition Rocks are natural combinations of two or more minerals” The properties of rocks will change in accordance with their mineralogical composition. For instance, granite contains quartz, feldspar, and mica; the absence of any of these elements would result in a different rock. Color ROCKS AND MINERALS 63 L WHITE The color of a rock is determined by the color of Tf the rock is a marble the minerals that compose it. Some colors are generated by the purity of the rock, whereas others are produced by the impurities present in it. Marble, for composed of pure calcite or dolomite, it is usually white. instance, can have different shades if it contains BLACK impurities. Various impurities give rise to different shades a " ° in the marble. e@ Fracture WHITE Texture When a rock breaks, its surface displays LEN ail refers to the size and arrangement of grains that fractures. If the fracture results in a flat IMPURITY ae form a rock. The grains can be thick, fine, or even surface breaking off, it is called exfoliation. Rocks usually break in locations where their mineral structure changes. CRYSTALS form when a melted rock cools and its chemical elements organize themselves. Minerals then take the shape of crystals. imperceptible. There are also rocks, such as conglomerates, WHITE whose grains are formed by the fragments of other rocks. <> MARBLE If the fragments are rounded, there is less compaction, and bane eS the rock is therefore more porous. In the case of PEGMATITE & ae. sedimentary rocks in which the sedimentary cement prevails, the grain is finer. WHITE a —a a | MARBLE r 4 a 64 CLASSES OF ROCKS Igneous Rocks ormed from magma or lava, igneous rocks can be classified according to their composition. This classification specially takes into account: the relative proportion of silica, magnesium, and iron minerals found in these type of rocks; their grain size (which reveals how fast they cooled); and their color. Rocks that contain silica, along with much quartz and feldspar, tend to have pale colors; those with low silica content have dark colors created by iron and magnesium-containing minerals, such as olivine, pyroxene, and amphiboles. A rock's texture is determined by the configuration of its crystal grains. Underground: Plutonic or Intrusive Rocks Rocks of this type formed through the solidification of magma masses deep within other rocks. In general, they have undergone a slow cooling process in the Earth's crust, which has permitted the formation of pure mineral crystals large enough to be seen with the unaided eye. Usually they display a compact structure and have low porosity. Depending on the composition of the magma, there are acidic plutonic rocks (rich in silicon) or basic rocks (with low silicon content). Granite is the most common type of intrusive rock. === MACROPHOTOGRAPHY oe OF PINK GRANITE 4 | v. GRANITE GABBRO This rock is formed by big grains of This rock contains ferromagnesian feldspar, quartz, and mica. Its light- minerals, such as olivine, pyroxene, and colored components indicate an augite, which form dark-colored abundance of silicon and that the crystallizations, and feldspars, which give a rock is acidic. Because of its great white coloring to some of its parts. Gabbro resistance to wear, granite is often generally solidifies slowly, leaving it with used as a construction material. thick grains. ( J KI ) THE MINIMUM DEPTH AT WHICH GRANITE FORMS PERIDOTITE This rock is mainly composed of olivine (which gives it a greenish color) and pyroxene. It is less than 45 percent silicon and is rich in magnesium, a very light metal. It is abundant in the upper layers of the mantle (at a depth of about 40 miles [60 km)]) as a residue of old crust. GRANODIORITE This rock is often confused with granite, but it is grayer since it contains larger numbers of quartz and sodic plagioclase crystals than it does feldspar. It has thick grains and contains dark crystals called nodules. MACROPHOTOGRAPHY OF GRANODIORITE Dikes and Sills: Rocks Formed in Seams Some types of igneous rocks are formed from ascending magma that solidifies in seams or fissures. The resulting sheetlike body of rock is called a dike if it has a vertical orientation or a sill if it has a horizontal orientation. The composition of these rocks is similar to those of intrusive and extrusive rocks. In fact, like dikes and sills, intrusive and extrusive rocks can also form in cracks. However, the manner in which the materials in a sill or dike solidify causes them to form crystalline structures different from those of their volcanic and plutonic relatives. Extrusive Rocks, Products of Volcanoes Extrusive rocks form through the fast cooling of magma on or near the BASALT Earth's surface. Their structure and composition are closely related to the This rock forms most of the oceanic volcanic activity in the areas where they emerge. Because they are typically crust. Its low silicon content gives it products of a fast solidification process, they usually have a very fine grain. When its characteristic dark color (between they are expelled from a volcano, they do not have a chance to crystallize before blue and black). Its rapid cooling and they cool, so they acquire a vitreous (glasslike) texture. PUMICE This rock is produced from lava with a high silicon and gas content, which gives it a foamy texture. This explains its porous consistency—acquired during rapid solidification—which enables it to float in water. OBSIDIAN This rock is black; its shades vary in accordance with its impurities. Because it undergoes rapid cooling, its structure is vitreous, not crystalline; thus, it is commonly called volcanic glass. Strictly speaking, obsidian is a mineraloid. It was often used to make arrowheads. ROCKS AND MINERALS 65 CRYSTAL JOINED BY VITREOUS MASS PORPHYRITICS These rocks solidify in two phases. In the first, slower phase, thick phenocrystals form. Then in the second phase, the phenocrystals are dragged along by magma, which causes the formation of smaller, vitreous crystals. The name porphyritic alludes to the color purple. PEGMATITE IS NATURALLY SMOOTH. PEGMATITE This very abundant, acidic rock has a mineral composition identical to that of granite. However, its solidification process was very slow, thus enabling its crystals to grow to a size of several feet. BULAN X PEGMATITE IS ASSOCIATED WITH THE PRESENCE OF GEMS AND RARE METALS. solidification gives it a very fine grain. Because of its hardness, it is used to build roads; it is not, however, used to make paving stones because it is too slippery. GEOMETRIC PRISMS , These prisms were formed in ———+~—() the Giant's Causeway = (Northern Ireland) through J contraction, expansion, and rupture of basaltic lava flows that crystallized gradually. THE MOST COMMON SHAPE INTO WHICH BASALT CRYSTALLIZES 66 CLASSES OF ROCKS ROCKS AND MINERALS 67 _—————{> . * eee = | 2 w oa,)' Marine Sediments x ia: edimentary rocks can also for 0 of organic remains, The most underwater, surrounding the coas 4 are ocky’sti resistant to the action of waves and BARRIER REEF to the movement of the water. They are formed and/or PARALLEL TO a THE COAST -. ~~ colonized by photosynthetic organisms and marine animals, -— ~~ some of which have calcareous skeletons, as in the case of ; 4 f bo . _ © *coral polyps. These soft organisms, related’to anemones and “J ta jellyfish, live in colonies. When their solid calcareous skeletons “ee ; y, a ~~» .« Sediment, they turn into calcite. They live in symbiosis with limestone rocks also originate this way; they are nade of cal te ae i ae a ae ee oF 3 algae known as zooxanthellae. (calcite) or calcium and magnesium (dolomite). Because heir p a ATURE NEEDED .~ Ss *# consistency, they often serve as repositories for fossil fuels, v which, Iso | “i a aoa a REEF — organic origin. Other rocks, like coquina, form through the accumu ation of a Fe ~~ , fragments of marine shells, lithified over time as materials filled and-< ere = —— - , “ * ~~” their interstices. — = fa - Living ‘ Af . Polyp 7 ~ = - ~ 2 - CONTINENTAL Scien, : = 4 FROM SEDIMENT TO ROCK ‘ > sna a Under pressure from overlying layers, ak - sediments are compacted and lithified, r a , reducing their volume by 40 percent. > em” 7” . 4 : Other substances dissolved in water % ire} r DS fe ) (calcite, silica, and iron oxide) fill up the * 7 ar y ie 7 ae ) Pear, Jewel of the Sea interstices between the particles of ie a ie as . may In order to protect themselves from the intrusion sediments, and when the water - - - - oe B ; Cand al a “es Y 4 = of a foreign body—such as a sand grain that evaporates, cementation occurs. P > »y 3 ri * oe i, a4 . becomes lodged between their mantle and shell—bivalve - ‘( “ ~ {BRAIN CORAL / mollusks cover the intruding object with alternating concentric layers of protein (conchiolin) and calcite. This process ultimately yields a pearl. Fine pearls are produced by pearl oysters (Pinctada) in the warm, clear waters of tropical seas. CORALS IN ARIZONA In the first phase of the Paleozoic Era (500 million years ago), the pee mountainous region of the / West was a coastal-area with Rich activity. This is how the abundant *~ 7 , ’ 2 F i> > 2 hs calcareous formations that can . ~ ' ) 7 t. ’ $ ~ . . 3 be seen today in Arizona's : " . J : . , P ¥ ~— q x € ’ s Grand Canyonjoriginated. ay LAYERS OF MOTHER-OF-PEARL Combination of calcite and a protein called conchiolin Oyster These formations also : coexist with much ag ‘I younger rocks. a 4 ee A « . . - Pe . “ ’ yf > ' : A ¢ y) » ; » Sie Old Reefs PEARL LUS FLAT CORAL results fro _ Corals typically grow enata pro 7 in colonies and create : ‘crystallized 1 ~ Current— hi : ; +4 , a : ' real Me reefs, layer by layer. tial a -pearl. State : . . Boundary ; 4 : ° . . . - r 7 ‘ " eet Paleozoic ; ~ * ‘ a » é | ’ ".. Boundary Coastal : : . i ; ‘ Nail Area “SF th 68 CLASSES OF ROCKS Collection of Detrital Rocks mong the sedimentary rocks, detrital rocks are the most abundant. They form through the agglomeration of rounded fragments (clasts) of older rocks. Depending on the size of the clasts, they are classified as (from smallest to largest) pelite, lutite and limestone, sandstone, and conglomerates. The analysis of their components, cementation matrix, and arrangement in layers makes it possible to reconstruct the geologic history both of the rocks and of the areas in which they are found. Some break off easily and are used in industrial processes and construction as rock granules, whereas others are appreciated for their toughness and hardness. Clay, Lime, and Ash These materials form the less porous, fine-grained detritic rocks. Lutites are rocks of clay, composed of particles whose diameter does not exceed 0.0002 inch (0.004 mm). In general, they are compacted and cemented through chemical precipitation. Limestone rocks are also called limolites, named after lime, a sedimentary material with a somewhat thicker grain (up to 0.0025 inch [0.06 mm]). Some rocks composed of volcanic ash have a similar granulation. These rocks are very important in construction. COMPACTED ASH It is possible to find one or more layers of fine-grained pyroclastic material (volcanic ash) in many sedimentary rocks. Rocks formed from larger pyroclasts, which solidified in the air during an eruption before they touched the ground, are rarer. Their origin is igneous, but their formation is sedimentary. TUFF is rock that is formed from deposits of ie volcanic ash that has been cemented together. / i There are several types: crystalline tuff, which £ % is largely composed of igneous glass; lithic THE REDUCTION IN THE VOLUME tuff, which contains rock fragments; and OF CLAY AS IT IS COMPACTED hybrid tuff, which is formed from fragmented volcanic material combined with some clay. When hydrated, it increases in size. CLAY The substance commonly known as clay is an unconsolidated rock, made of hydrated aluminum silicates and typically full of impurities. Kaolin is the name for pure granular clay; it is soft and white and keeps its color even after it has been fired in a kiln. It has scale-shaped microcrystals and generally contains impurities. CHALK Composed of calcite debris of biochemical origin, this mineral originates in the sea near the coast. After being eroded and transported, it accumulates on slopes where it becomes compacted. The chalk we use on blackboards is, in reality, gypsum. Very fine sediment ROCKS AND MINERALS 69 A Variety of Sandstones Sandstone is rock composed of grains that are mostly between 0.003 and 0.08 inch (0.06 and 2 mm) in size. Sandstones are classified according to their mineral composition, their level of complexity (or geologic history), and the proportion of cementation material they contain. Quartzarenite (which is more than 95 percent quartz), arkose (which is mostly feldspar), red sandstone (which is cemented by iron compounds), and graywacke belong to this class of rocks. ARKOSE possesses a varied composition, although it contains up to 25 percent quartz and feldspar. Generally, it has a porous consistency, and less than one percent of its interstices are empty. In this specimen, the pinkish section is composed of feldspar, and the white portion is quartz. SANDSTONE is made up of small grains of sand that are here stratified by color and texture. This type of sandstone indicates that an alternating process of sedimentation involving two types of particles has occurred. GRAYWACKE has a defined proportion of calcium carbonate, quartz, feldspar, and mica. It differs from common sandstone because it contains a higher amount of cementation materials (more than 15 percent), which form its grain matrix. This makes it more compacted. 20% OF SEDIMENTARY ROCKS ARE SANDSTONES. Conglomerates Most of the grains that compose these rocks are larger than 0.08 inch (2 mm). In some cases, it is possible to identify with the unaided eye the primary rocks from which a conglomerate is formed. As a result, it is possible to determine the areas where the sediments originated. Accumulations of gravel and cementation material can indicate either slopes in the rocks where the conglomerates formed or the action of fluvial currents. All this information makes it possible to reconstruct the geologic history of a rock. MICROPHOTOGRAPH OF BRECCIA CONGLOMERATE Formed by large fragments, they are good examples of sediments that have been compacted after landslides. The irregularity of this specimen's clasts points to a chaotic origin, which could be alluvial in nature or associated with a glacial moraine. : QF o/ O0D% PERCENTAGE OF CLASTS LARGER THAN BRECCIA 0.08 INCH (2 MM) Its grains are thick but with straight angles and edges. This shows that the sediments have not traveled far and that cementation has taken place near the area from which the materials originated. 70 CLASSES OF ROCKS Organic Rocks rganic rocks are composed of the remains of 26% living organisms that have undergone OF THE PRIMARY ENERGY hi 4 CONSUMED IN THE WORLD processes of decomposition and compaction , cones Paanicall. millions of years ago. In these processes, the Y greater the depth and heat, the greater the caloric power and thermal transformation of the rock. The change experienced by these substances is called carbonization. e \ Coal Formation fg Plant materials, such as leaves, woods, barks, and [Lefl spores, accumulated in marine or continental basins 285 million years ago. Submerged in water and protected from oxygen in the air, this material slowly became enriched with carbon through the action of anaerobic bacteria. Transformation of Vegetation into Hard Coal 1 . Vegetation Organic compounds on the surface became covered by oxygen-poor water found in a peat bog, which effectively shielded them from oxidation. 2, - Peat Through partial putrefaction and carbonization in the acidic water of the peat bog, the organic matter changes into coal. Contains 60% carbon 3. Lignite is formed from the compression of peat that is converted into a brown and flaky substance. Some primary plant structures can still be recognized in it. Contains 70% carbon A. coal has a content of less than 40 percent mineral substance on the basis of dry material. It has a matte luster, is similar to charcoal, and is dirty to the touch. Contains 80% carbon 5D. Anthracite is the type of coal with the greatest concentration of carbon. Its high heat value is mostly due to this type of coal's high carbon content and low concentration of volatile material. It is harder and denser than ordinary coal. Contains 95% carbon WORLD COAL RESERVES Billions of tons ij North Europe and ANTHRACITE America . > Eurasia ROCK j 254.4 », 287.1 Central and } / Middle “* Asia South America —— ~ Africa East ‘y _» Pacific 199 q 50.3 296.9 fossils. FORMATION OF PETROLEUM In an anaerobic environment at a depth of about 1 mile (2 km), organic sediments that developed in environments with little oxygen turn into rocks that produce crude oil. KEY Gas Petroleum (Oil) [7 Coal: At times, the surface of anthracite can appear to have traces of plant gas and fuel is obtained Metamorphism where gases and oils are released ROCKS AND MINERALS 71 PETROLEUM TRAPS Caprock Storage Sehieacenenes STRATIGRAPHIC SALINE DOME ie TRAP LOCATION INSIDE The movements of the THE EARTH Earth's crust subjected the strata rich in Fest) as) organic remains to ey great pressure and Vegetation transformed them into that will hard coal over the form peat course of 300 million after dying years. SURROUNDING TEMPERATURE LEGEND Exerted Pressure. Peat i DEPTH eatis compacted up to 1,000 feet and (800 m) iat TEMPERATURE up to 77° F (25° C) DEPTH 1,000 to 5,000 feet Coal rich i : (800 to 1,500 m) in humic acids TEMPERATURE up to 104° F (40° C) DEPTH 5,000 to 20,000 feet (1,500 to 6,000 m) TEMPERATURE up to 347° F (175° C) DEPTH 20,000 to 25,000 feet (6,000 to 7,600 m) TEMPERATURE up to 572° F (300° C) WORLD PETROLEUM RESERVES Billions of barrels North America Central and South America 103.5 Europe and Eurasia . 140.5 Africa Pacific 114.3 72 CLASSES OF ROCKS ROCKS AND MINERALS 73 Marble and Quartzite These rocks are compacted and Common ae a = ea pe gee a A - oe ant p<. 2, 4 - a “ 7 . ‘ : <7 , e , \ ; E ’ st a ea an Hi i Pe ss rah, iv y ade « y nonfoliated. Marble is a thick-grained etamorp C OC S seg ie Se O- re en GARNETIFEROUS SCHIST etystalline rock, detived trons imestorte/or ; rd ; ’ uA ¥ , 4 dolostone. Because of its color and 4 a Pe a at . my ay The dark red crystals of * cod ee . 4 - 4 se garnet formed during y J narra rt ae nar: isa he classification of metamorphic rocks is not simple because the e —— e.g ie eG metaorphisgy -pamaane very hard rock, usually made of sandstone same conditions of temperature and pressure do not always produce Bik r ee 5 il carga alla ee ee the same final rock. In the face of this difficulty, these rocks are glass. Quartzite is normally white, but iron divided into two large groups, taking into account that some exhibit ad le oe aera ia UL es foliation and others do not. During the transformation process, the density of rock increases, and recrystallization can induce the formation of bigger crystals. This process reorganizes the mineral grains, resulting in laminar or 4 banded textures. Most rocks derive their color from the minerals of which & PIAS they are composed, but their texture depends on more than just their Wy composition. yo h nae ee nce. ( J 2 ae a ri IS THE LEVEL OF { HARDNESS OF a QUARTZITE. GARNETIFEROUS SCHIST This rock is more prone to foliation, and it QUARTZITE This rock's name comes from its can break off in small sheets. It is more ‘ Pa F 2 It is hard and tough; it is components. Schist determines than 20 percent composed of flat, elongated ted b th its texture and garnet its color minerals, which normally include mica and Rh Sch tea pret quartz grains entwine. and distinctive features. amphiboles. For schist to be formed, a more intense metamorphism is needed. The different schistose rocks' names and characteristics ” depend on the predominant mineral that composes them or on the one that produces exfoliation. Among the most important schistose rocks are mica, hornblende, and talc. Because this type of rock has different layers, it has been used in sculpture. ~ SLATE. + MICROGRAPHY Composed of foliated or. laminated clay minetals SLATE Its black color comes from the carbon in organic matter HORNBLENDE present in sediments. MICACEOUS SCHIST nanpaie SCHIST It contains some sodium re ; . Its characteristic coloringis as well as considerable Tt is highly E determined by colorless or amounts of iron and valued for its Slates and Phyllites white muscovite crystals. aluminum. OR MORE. THE SIZE OF MICA GRAINS IN texture and . SCHIST—LARGE ENOUGH TO SEE WITH color Ip is eed These foliated rocks recrystallized under THE UNAIDED EYE. in sculpture and moderate pressure and temperature Gneiss architecture. : conditions. Slate has very fine grains made of small mica crystals. It is very useful in the production of Striped rock that usually contains long and granular roof tiles, floor tiles, blackboards, and billiard tables. PHYLLITE minerals. The most common types are quartz, potash It almost always is formed through low-grade Similar to slate, it is feldspar, and plagioclase. It can also have smaller amounts metamorphism in sediments and, less often, from notable for its silky luster. of muscovite, biotite, and hornblende. Its characteristic volcanic ash. Phyllite represents a gradation in stripes are due to a segregation of light and dark silicates. metamorphism between slate and schist; it is Gneiss rock, which has a mineral composition similar to that of granite, is formed through sedimentary processes or derived from igneous rocks. However, it can also form through high-grade metamorphism of schists. It is the last rock of the metamorphic sequence. composed of very fine mica crystals, such as muscovite or chlorite. GNEISS = .* “~~ MARBLE MICROGRAPH LAMINATED OR STRIPED TEXTURE, SLATE MAKE IT POSSIBLE TO DETERMINE Heat and pressure $ > sa Impurities and accessory RESULTING FROM THE PRESSURE TO Because of exfoliation, it tends THE DIRECTION IN WHICH PRESSURE can change granite : *» x . minerals color the marble. WHICH THE ROCK WAS SUBJECTED to break into flat sheets. WAS EXERTED ON THE ROCK. into gneiss. a . 74 CLASSES OF ROCKS i. God of prosperity and concealed mysteries. iconography, Serapis a ee ae 2 c Incredible Petra istorians from ancient Rome used to talk-about a mysterious city of stone. In 1812 Johann Ludwig Burckhardt of Switzerland rediscovered it. Traces of Neolithic civilizations were found in Petra; however, its foundation in the 4th century BC is attributed to the Nabataeans, a nomadic people..the Nabataeans were merchants and raiders who became prosperous by controlling the spice trade. The city, carved in sandstone, Knew times of splendor, ROCKS AND MINERALS 75 sx i —_ HIDDEN IN THE DESERT Petra is hidden in the mountains 155 miles (250 km) south of Amman, the capital of Jordan, and north of the Red Sea and the Great Rift Valley in Africa. yaa On the Rift Mv ITS CLIFFS ARE PART OF THIS FRACTURE; IN THE YEAR 363, IT WAS DAMAGED BY AN EARTHQUAKE. Uncertain Origins pe Petra's architecture is dominated by, Greek, Egyptian, and Roman features) however, their symbiosis with Eastern elements is so great that to this day experts find it difficult to establishyPetra’s origin and dates of construction? The city's exterior adornments contrast with the. interior sobriety of its temples: It contained sumptuous publi¢ baths that date froma time of splendor @st century BC). However, most of Petra's, population, which reached.apeak of 20,000 inhabitants, lived in adobe houses. ELEPHANTS (Interpretation) Native to Africa or India, elephants were, not représented.in classic culture. Here, however, they are seen adorning Greek- style capitals. This particular merging of cultures created expressions found nowhere else-in.the-ancient world. Archaeologists find it difficult to date the pieces of art found in’Petra. SANDSTONE A sedimentary rock with medium-sized grains (less than 0.08 inch [2 mm]), with great toughness and hardness. Its mineralogical composition can vary. In the Jordanian, desert, it forms cliffs. CORINTHIAN CAPITAL (Interpretation) One of the most classic capitals ofrGreek architecture, along with the Ionic and. Doric styles WINGED LIONS (Interpretation) These carvings were located in the temple of Atargatis, goddess of fertility in the Nabataean culture. Carved in Stone wife The construction over sandstone respects and takes advantage of the characteristics-of the landscape. To create openifigs, builders used'the cracks and fissures that already, existed in the rock. The sandstone in Petra is composed of at t. two original types of sediments. of ~ a colors. Some peoplembelieve = _— re from different geologic phases, but it is more likely that the original sand. wasmade of different grains. e Use of Rocks and Minerals Calo ns are eee seen oe Coal is found in almost all regions of the world, but today the only MOUNTAINS OF GOLD AND SILVER BLACK GOLD deposits of commercial importance are located in Europe, Asia, AN OPEN-AIR MINE RADIOACTIVE MINERALS Australia, and the Americas. BLINDED BY BRILLIANCE we wae ary 7 = ewe, ar S. > , A Tr a = - . Me. J e 7 J er rT ; ae at : gree Fe ay nag! ‘ = a , Ths ¥ ’ ‘ : ri ® . e . Ss ” . ' e uman beings have been hundreds of feet down. Human beings material from which many products being sought. One of these alternative extracting coal since ancient have to make incursions into the bowels people use are made. Unfortunately, the sources is nuclear energy. It requires times, and mining generally of the Earth to extract its wealth. The Earth's reserves of coal, oil, and gas are uranium, an element found in certain takes place underground materials extracted from the Earth are being depleted. For this reason, other rocks. because most veins are the basis of modern civilization, the raw sources of energy to replace them are 78 USE OF ROCKS AND MINERALS ROCKS AND MINERALS 79 e e In D aily Life latches of a car is made of iron (present in both [Leaf steel and magnetite), aluminum, and magnesium. t is impossible to conceive of modern life without the constant use of objects and ea eee ee ee ipa vir a | materials made of rocks and minerals, metallic or nonmetallic. To illustrate this, afd corrosion uc and he) Baru ane et natn a engine and ismade aac it is enough simply to consider the elements that make up a car, trace them BODYWORK icra MACRO re of magnetite, an Glass fiber back to their origins, and consider the processes that shaped them. In some cases, Ao lt SpaiNe’ the texture and characteristics of each material can be easily seen. Other 20% (OOD) Steel materials, especially nonmetals such as coal and sulfur, are less noticeable, but 0 they are a part of the production process as well. REQUIRED BY VOLUME cea preaaaciaccs This process tends to emphasize and improve the FOR THE SAME WEIGHT OF STEEL. physical, chemical, and electric characteristics of each material. @ Hydrocarbons, the Source of Energy fe The combustion of petroleum derivatives provides energy for (Leg propulsion. The combustion pathway begins with the storage of gas in the tank and ends with the expulsion of waste gases through the exhaust pipe. There a catalyst with thousands of cells filters the most toxic gases: carbon monoxide and nitrogen oxide. FUEL O——— ALUMINUM TANK Light and durable ENGINE Aluminum Magnesium Iron EXHAUST 4 a PIPE IRON Strong and resistant Electric Properties: Conductors, Insulators, and Semiconductors ro FH Metals, which tend to lose electrons, are the soul of electric cables ° Le § and circuits. Nonmetals (and their polymeric derivatives) hinder the MAGNESIUM flow of electrons and are used as insulators. Other minerals, such as silicon, Adds flexibility have intermediate properties: electronic components are manufactured by adding impurities to modify their properties. @) @) a A Nonmetals CONTROL PANEL pound §™™ Silicon and its derivatives (silicone, silica, and silicates such as WHEELS In smaller contact areas, more expensive (0 03 kg) Lf asbestos) are omnipresent materials in car manufacturing. They Titanium is often metals are used (gold is the best conductor). appear in crystallized form, such as quartz, and in noncrystallized—or used in alloys and in Chips and other electronic components PER CUBIC INCH glass—form. Other nonmetals aid in the strengthening of metals—for the car's finish. contain silicon. Phosphorescent displays MAGNESIUM IS THE LOCKS example, carbon in the production of steel and sulfur in the have strontium paint. LIGHTEST METAL USED FOR Covered with zinc vulcanization of rubber. INDUSTRIAL PURPOSES. > CIRCUITS DISTRIBUTOR —_— Gold, silver, Platinum IGNITION MIRRORS palladium COIL Glass and lead |e) Barium HEADLIGHTS — DISPLAYS Tungsten . O—————— WINDOWS STEERING ENGINE JOINTS SPARK PLUGS TIRES Strontium Glass (silica) WHEEL Asbestos Porcelain Vulcanized Silicon coating (kaolin) steel mesh 80 USE OF ROCKS AND MINERALS ROCKS AND MINERALS 81 Mountains of Gold and Silver murray With capacity to COST: $547 MILLION store big vehicles ae : : : fob Once th d cost ; * rom the decision to exploit an area where valuable minerals are suspected to exist to obtaining Bias caine Treen terran these minerals in major amounts, large-scale mining operations require complex work that lasts pid oa ks Ade eae a: . . . . . . . environmental impact 0 @ operation. for years. For instance, the exploitation of Veladero, an open-air gold-and-silver mine located in HE Een Gee eer GEE SYSTEM included paths, houses, and river the province of San Juan in the Argentinean Andes and exploited by the Canadian company iclude Barrick Gold, required more than a decade of research and development before the first Seal ingots were obtained in October 2005. To reach the deposits, roads and housing were built for the workers. The potential environmental impact of the mine was analyzed since explosives had to be used and toxic substances, such ~~ ~ as cyanide, were needed for extracting and separating the 4 , OPEN CUT I rock from other metals. - (FEDERICO EDGE) VELADERO HILL VELADERO, Areas that do not ARGENTINA yield satisfactory Latitude 29° S mining results Sturdy buildings Longitude 70° W at 12,470 feet Opened by means (3,800 m) above Total land area 1,158 square miles of perforations and sea level (3,000 sq km) explosions OPEN CUT II Employed builders (peak) 5,000 ESL BEI Gold reserves (1st estimate) 900 tons During prospecting, field Estimated life span 17 years samples are collected for analysis. Used to extract rocks located deep within the Earth HUGE OPEN-AIR MINE Veladero—located in the Argentinean province of San Juan, as shown on the map—required 2,300 tons of metallic structures and consumes 2,520 tons of sodium cyanide per year for extracting gold. 164 FEET (50 M) VELADERO MINE co | Leaching Ground (Potrerillos Ravine) HERE GOLD IS SEPARATED FROM THE ROCKS. — — SAN JUAN ABOVE SEA LEVEL The elevation of the mine EXPLORATORY . PERFORATION 1TO 3 YEARS COST: $10 MILLION Prospecting began in 1994. During this phase, the possible existence of a deposit 2 TO 5 YEARS COST: $90 MILLION Based on these features, covering a vast area was analyzed. It Wes geologic maps of the The first phases are involved with field prospecting. During this necessary to draw maps, conduct studies, area are drawn. process, preliminary research is confirmed or revised. Once the is evaluated by make satellite images, and undertake field Geologists visit the area existence of the deposit is confirmed, the next step is to taking samples from trips to analyze superficial rocks. and take rock samples. establish its dimensions, reserves, yield, and extraction costs. deep in the Earth. st P - : 7+ ee" be an . - ‘«@ here are many types of mines. Some ate loc ted in the Earth, and: some show their contents at | ‘ obon| 5 ‘only one rgestiexca bits Canyon, a copper mine located in Utah, is | most important open-air mines but also one of the larges' in the.world. It is so larc seen from spat operation since 1903, an xcavated.in the fo like those,used in agriculture Ttsiactiy ever, stopSycontin weekends anid days: The ma i not only.the us SOrciiaahe lnery OT. use ofc ea emica pure state fron per kg) of ra — — How the Metall Extracte Thousands of pounds of ex; tsfesanticks and sI love is a large as a house, and massive grinding machines that car reduce hard rocks to dust are involved in the extraction proces ( and rock temperatures are raised to 4,500° F (2,500° C). In this calle d 1 viation is hyd way, copper is extracted from one of the largest open-air mines treatme it tha al e to obtain cop on the planet. The raw material excavated from the terraces in oxidized minerals. The treated material begins tl the mine contains oxidized copper minerals. This material is sulfatation of copper contained in the oxidized minet als. _ o HOW MATERIAL IS OBTAINED The process begins with rock perforation and blasting. The rock is removed from the pit and loaded by large shovels onto trucks. Then it is unloaded onto a mobile grinder. The ground rock is removed from the mine on conveyor belts and then sprayed with a TRANSMISSION PULLEYS LOADERS/CHARGERS ARRANGEMENT OF THE STACK When on the conveyor belts, the material solution of water and sulfuric acid. is taken to a place where it will forma lixiviation pile or stack, and a trickle COPPER RECOVERY O irrigation system is installed on top of this The resulting copper solution is collected in conduits O pile. Sprinklers cover the entire exposed and then undergoes a process of electrolytic refining. ~ area. The material will spend 45 days here. During this process, electricity passes between two COPPER CONCENTRATION copper plates suspended in the solution; copper from IN THE RAW MATERIAL 6 the solution adheres to the sheets as it is separated ounces vi through electrolysis. SPRINKLERS SEWER ACID SOLUTION _— gallon Ci¥7/)) O9 OQ % TERRACES OF COPPER IN THE SOLUTION — AT THE END OF THE COPPER IN A PURE STATE LIXIVIATION PROCESS BOTTOM OF THE MINE RAW MATERIAL The material extracted from the pit is loaded on a mobile grinder. MAXIMUM PHREATIC LEVEL 26 FEET oe 25MILES 3 — (8 M) (KM) —— COPPER LIXIVIATION SHEETS FORMATION OF THE MINE The hydro-metallurgic process that makes Surface mines take the shape of large terraced it possible to obtain copper from the pits, which grow ever deeper and wider. Viewed from above, an enormous spiraling hollow can be seen. This is a relatively inexpensive and simple method to extract high-purity materials. oxidized minerals by applying a solution of sulfuric acid and water. Oxidized minerals are sensitive to attack by acid solutions. COLECTOR 84 USE OF ROCKS AND MINERALS Blinded by Brilliance Ld OF ag Ss er United States he discovery of gold in the Sacramento River in California in the mid-19th century started one of In 1848, California had a the largest migrations of its time. Fortune hunters came from the Americas as well as from Asia, ielieal feet Frychgh Mexico but few were able to achieve their goal of striking it rich. Each year, obtaining gold required a and with the gold fever at “ larger investment of time and equipment, and equipment suppliers ee ae were the ones who ultimately earned the highest profits. Gold was the key force in settling California, now the ea s+, 6 & Key wealthiest state in the United States. At its peak, s * = ; By Boat vaaagrants ie immigration overwhelmed the state's social and = - ; oe aces municipal services as up to 30 houses were = "4 a o : Ae being built each day. Bad living conditions led to the death of many workers; , E many were also ° - . : DRAGGING killed by epidemics ; F Mules dragged large stones, used and illnesses. > P = - to break other quartz stones, thus releasing the gold within. WASHED PARTICLES CONTAINERS : z = ye _—_. : . : J ; “ and:deposited : < gold at the HOPPER The gravel was placed in the PAN CHINESE hopper and the deposited The swirling movement of Chinese immigrants, material was moved with a the pan allowed for the attracted by the lever. When water was separation of sediments, and prospect of wealth, added, the dirt could be BY HAND the gold could be identified constituted most of carried away, leaving the Resources and tools were by a difference in weight. the labor force. gold at the barrier since the In 1853, $3 million was density of gold i ti Be ee invested to change the scarce. Almost everything was ROCKS AND MINERALS 85 UNITED STATES California Sacramento River SLUICE BOX Water flowed through the artificial canal, where riffles (barriers) along the bottom of the sluice box caught the gold and let the other material pass through. SLUICE BOXES COULD BE USED IN THE CONSTRUCTION OF JUST ONE WASHER. WASHING a ; . = _ ee ce : The water flowed serrated bottom. ORIGINAL RIVERBED Once the water had been used to pan for gold, it was channeled back into the river from which it came. done by hand. than that of water. : course of the Yuba River, which merged with the On the morning of January 24, while California became the 31st state of the Union. Slavery was See ples When the surface gold was exhausted, more James Marshall was building a sawmill abolished because of the large influx of immigrants and the was used to wash the gold complex technology was required to extract for his employer John Sutter, he fear that it would reduce workers’ salaries. However, the : it from the ground. Hydraulic mining, which discovered gold on the banks of the WAS THE PRICE OF A PLOT Fugitive Slave Act was sanctioned by the state. According MILLION IN GOLD WAS used water jets, was a technique used for Sacramento River. This irrevocably OF LAND; 18 MONTHS LATER, to this law, every fugitive slave that entered California had EXCHANGED DURING this purpose. Miners then became changed the history of California. IT WAS PRICED AT $45,000. to be returned to his or her owner. THE ENTIRE DECADE. employees, enduring long workdays. 86 USE OF ROCKS AND MINERALS ROCKS AND MINERALS 87 Black as Coal n gallery or subterranean mines people must enter the bowels of the Earth to be able to extract the planet's mineral wealth. Some mines for extracting coal—the legendary driving force of the MAIN PRODUCERS Industrial Revolution—are a clear example of this type of exploitation. Although these mines AAO? DUAL. imply higher costs and labor risks, they have a lower environmental impact. © fe - ee United States 1,070 India 503 Russia 294 How Coal Is Extracted ok South Africa 264 DISTRIBUTION i soe ebeakey MAIN CONSUMERS Mine trains transport the coal from the | 4 tI rt Year 2003. In millions of tons. mine to the point of consumption. _— | , kit Hig China EE 1,531 Eyiniece is United States ~ 1094 WASHING AND CLASSIFICATION | ak ct ; Rea te India aa Coal that leaves the mine is mixed with mud 7a ; Ras ; Germany 273 and rocks. It must be washed and classified { i \ { EXTRACTION : { Y , South Africa 264 according to quality and size. ‘i Le : TOWER { ; ta} OF EXPLOITATION IS CARRIED OUT UNDERGROUND. Coal with Coal is separated impurities from other materials Water through decantation. | VENTILATION Without good ventilation, methane, an explosive gas, : | ‘Condenses in the + { ~ an ’ 7 i galleries and creates | | ee Kn the risk of explosions. Coal Coal bs U dust pellets Coal gravel Impurities — WASHING AND CLASSIFICATION ———O BUILDING vw FRESHAIRA SE sy Sees "a “ENTRANCE? -- rt Se Pg ae St A Se Pas oe sh ie a From the main shaft, te “© the'coal is) ~~ 7 Se 83 Sa "transferred to cargo AS ©» elevators that.—- 2. > transport it to the ; “surface. _- EXIT FOR e CONTAMINATED AIR oe. MINER'S MOVEMENT IN TRANSPORT THE GALLERIES The miners travel on foot or by train ae to the coal vein. GALLERY ——____-® Tunnel that is used for communication in the mine TRANSPORTATION The extracted coal is placed on the conveyor belts that take it to the main shaft, and from there.it.is taken to the surface. Pi EXTRACTION The method that is widely used is that of continuous mining. A machine extracts the coal mechanically. THE SHAFTS CAN REACH ie THIS DEPTH. oe 3 TRANSPORTER : Adip | BELT PERFORATION 7 i in A vertical shaft is rhe perforated, aa 4 allowing access to A the coal vein. |) i p. IS THE AMOUNT OF COAL THE PERFORATOR ©—__ CARGO ELEVATOR EXTRACTS IN’‘AN HOUR. Dy USE OF ROCKS AND MINERALS lack Gold ecause of its economic importance as a source of energy, petroleum, or oil, is called black gold. Searching for it requires large amounts of money and years of investigation and exploration, all with no guarantees. Once discovered, petroleum extraction entails the use of expensive machinery, which ’ includes everything from oil pumps to refineries that convert oil into many derivative products. The oil trade is one of the most lucrative businesses worldwide, and a change in its price can affect national economies and put EXTRACTION If the well is productive, the drilling towers are removed and extraction systems are installed. NATURAL WAYS TO PUMP PETROLEUM The driving —=() force is the gas dissolved in a petroleum deposit. TRANSPORTATION Tankers transport crude oil to the refinery, where various products can be derived from it. REFINING The components of crude oil are separated, making use of the fact that each component boils at a different temperature. Refining is carried out by means of two main processes: fractional distillation and cracking. FRACTIONAL DISTILLATION Distillation Column Crude Oil Heat e———Light Molecules Molecules of &| Weight Intermediate CRACKING Big molecules are broken ROCKS AND MINERALS PRODUCTS OF DISTILLATION down to create smaller ones. Approximate Boiling Point Gas 212° F Gasoline (1002 C) f} t 392° F (2002 C) Kerosene Diesel Oil 5722 F (3002 Cc) ; Fuel Oil The gas —4 Vibrating —— Sheet ae, Indirect methods are used to detect the presence of hydrocarbons. However, the information obtained is not conclusive. SEISMIC TRUCK These machines are located at different points within the research area. % oe eee Seismic Waves penetrate the layers of the Earth's crust and bounce back to the surface when the type of rock they pass through changes. =~ Bounced Wav Geophones register these waves. A seismic section is generated based on the data obtained. GEOPHONE . F lated . | whole countries on guard. Petroleum is a nonrenewable source of energy. (ithadenest Crsae-08 4 it | pushes the Deposit ™ = ~ ' r ; Reside petroleum = c Fractioning on outward. = TANKER e o * 1 4 => Columns rire os Later as water - — a r gn ar = i din, — i 0 ee How Petroleum Is Obtained String it mecumiets — af This pipe will underneath SEARCH EXPLORATION be lowered into the petroleum a det and pushes it Once a deposit is detected, upward. the soil is drilled to verify that there is petroleum with economic potential. the ground. Pipe for Delivering Drill Mud > Machi ‘ 1) a jachinery “ Room \ . Cargo space divided \) 6 into compartments a\ d Kal. PUMP ENGINE ‘ * Electric Motors Pool for Recovering Drill Mud CONTINENTA CRUST 7 ~ rise faster. MAIN CONSUMERS Detail of Year: 2004 the Drill Bit DRILL MUD North Pacific- pe flows down MAIN EXTRACTORS America Asia Ps sera ee . f Year: 2004 >— 28.8% gr i pipe and exits : i F i 7 , ‘CAUTION ee the 3 =f vt gc i Middle Europe : Africa at e oil is detected, drill orifices. es au oe 3.3% prt the drilling proceeds orth ; 259% | Io more slowly, and As the mud CAS 1 Central | North ; é Middle East Central and South America valves are closed to rises, it carries iA, Saige and South America prevent the oil from rock ee a, ; : ee 18.2% 59% 6.0% . ss reveals wnicn gushing to the surface re aaa PETROLEUM 20 aie ; North America and Pacific-Asia account under high pressure. eek perforated eg 3 x? , Pacific-Asia Africa for 90 percent of the increase in petroleum Pp 7 WATE 4 , S 10.2% 10.8% consumption over the last 10 years. 90 USE OF ROCKS AND MINERALS Radioactive Minerals ranium and plutonium were used for the first time—for military purposes—in the 1940s. Once World War IT ended, nuclear reactors and their fuels began to be used as sources of energy. To process these minerals, nuclear plants are necessary. They must be built following many safety guidelines, since nuclear energy is considered to be very risky. Accidents like the one in Chernobyl and, more recently, in Tokaimura, Japan, are clear examples of what can happen when control of this form of energy is lost. These images show the structure and heart of a nuclear reactor, the way uranium is processed, and the peaceful uses of this type of energy. Pressure Vessel THE NUCLEUS OF THE REACTOR is in the lower part of the safety vessel, in which there are about 200 groups of fuel sheaths sized 0.4 inch (1 cm) in diameter and 13 feet (4 m) in height. The nuclear reactor is inserted into a vessel formed by steel that is approximately 1.6 feet (0.5 m) thick. The fuel, which is encapsulated in zirconium alloy sheaths, is located inside the hollow space of the vessel. This design helps to meet one of = es the first goals in nuclear safety: to prevent radioactive products r/o JU from leaking into the surrounding environment. URANIUM HANDLING : Ec Uranium 235 is the only isotope that is found in a natural THE TEMPERATURE OF state, easily fissionable. For this reason, it is the main fuel THE WATER PELLET used in nuclear power plants. Even though it is rare to find it in the Earth's crust, it can be found in enriching deposits in watercourse beds. CONTROL PROTECTION RODS GLOVES RAW URANIUM URANIUM PELLETS FOR USE INA FUEL ROD GROUPS OF FUEL RODS THAT GENERATE THE NUCLEAR REACTION FUEL RODS IN EACH GROUP REACTOR Baia m7) =) Ss 4 = =) = z =< fe =) REINFORCED CONCRETE WALL STEEL STRUCTURE REINFORCED CONCRETE WALL ROCKS AND MINERALS 91 Carbon 14 is a method for dating organic fossil samples based on the exponential decay law of radioactive isotopes. After a living organism has been dead for 5,730 years, the amount of 14C present in its body has decreased by half. Thus, when the amount of latent 4C is measured in organic materials, it is possible to calculate the amount remaining in the material and, therefore, to calculate when the organism died. MAMMOTH CUB USE OF URANIUM IN MEDICINE The application of nuclear energy helps with the diagnosis and treatment of diseases such as cancer. It can detect alterations long before symptoms develop clinically, which allows for more effective early treatment. THYROID TAKES IN 99MTC-PERTECNETATE. i | THYROID SCINTILLOGRAPHY USING POSITRON EMISSION TOMOGRAPHY SAFETY SUIT To handle radioactive material, such as spent fuel bars, workers must wear a special suit because of the high levels of radiation. THE SUIT IS HERMETIC. IT —} MUST ISOLATE THE WORKER \ FROM THE OUTSIDE. THE WORKER CARRIES AN OXYGEN TANK. A HOSE IS CONNECTED TO THE TANK SO THE WORKER CAN BREATHE. hi THE HANDS MUST BE —Sy) \ PROTECTED WITH INSULATING GLOVES. in Human iy . | » Scale . 92 GLOSSARY Alkalines Minerals that have a high content of potassium, sodium, lithium, rubidium, and calcium. Amorphous Mineral with fractured surfaces instead of crystalline faces. Noncrystalline. Anticline A fold of sedimentary strata sloping upwards like an arch. Asthenosphere Layer inside the Earth, below the lithosphere. It is part of the upper mantle and is composed of easily deformable rock. Atom The smallest unit of matter. Bacteria Microscopic and unicellular life-form found in air, water, plants, animals, and on the Earth's crust. Batholith Great mass (larger than 60 square miles [100 sq km] of surface) of intrusive igneous rocks. Bravais Lattices Three-dimensional crystal systems, based on certain mathematical principles, that represent the 14 types of cell units. Butte Hill with a flat top and sloping sides, found in areas that have undergone intense erosion. Canyon Deep, narrow valley formed by fluvial erosion. Carat Unit of weight used in jewelry, variable in time and place, equivalent to 0.007 ounce (0.2 g). Cave Subterranean cavity formed through the chemical action of water on soluble, generally calcareous, ground. Cementation Process by which sediment both loses porosity and is lithified through the chemical precipitation of material in the spaces between the grains. Cementation Zone Place where lithification occurs. Water infiltrates the area, fills up the spaces between the grains of sediment, and transforms loose sediment into a solid mass. Chasm, or Rift Wide valley formed as a consequence of the extension of the crust at the boundaries of diverging tectonic plates. Chemical Compound Substance formed by more than one element. Chemical Element Substance that contains only one type of atom. Clay Fine-grained sediments formed by the chemical decomposition of some rocks. It is malleable when wet and hardens as it dries. Coal Combustible black rock of organic origin. It is produced through the decomposition of plant materials that accumulate in swamps or shallow marine waters. Concretion Hard mass of mineral material that usually holds a fossil inside. Contact Metamorphism Large-scale transformation of a rock into another type of rock. This happens mostly as a consequence of a sudden temperature increase. Convection Currents Moving pathways of material that occur inside the mantle as a consequence of the transfer of heat coming from the Earth's core. The hottest zones of the mantle rise, and the coldest ones sink. These movements are probably responsible for the movement of tectonic plates. Crack Fissure or cavity in the rock that results from tension. It can be completely or partially filled with minerals. Crust External layer of the Earth. There are two types of crust: continental crust forms large terrestrial masses, and oceanic crust forms the bottoms of the oceans. Crystal Organized, regular, and periodically repeated arrangement of atoms. Crystalline System It includes all crystals that can be related to the same set of symmetric elements. Density Amount of mass of a mineral per unit of volume. Deposit A natural accumulation of a rock or mineral. If it is located at the site where it formed, the deposit is called primary. Otherwise, it is called secondary. Diatomite Light, porous rock. It has a light color, and it is consolidated. Composed exclusively (or almost) of diatoms. Dolostone Carbonated sedimentary rock that contains at least 50 percent or more carbonate, of which at least half appears as dolomite. Earthquake The sudden and violent release of energy and vibrations in the Earth that generally occurs along the edges of tectonic plates. Elasticity Tendency of a mineral to recover its shape after being subjected to flexion or torsion. Era Division of time in the Earth's history. Geologists divide eras into periods. Erosion Removal and transport of sediment through the action of water, ice, and wind. Evaporation Process through which a liquid becomes gas without boiling. Exfoliation The tendency for certain minerals to fracture along regular planes within their crystalline structure. Fault Fracture involving the shifting of one rock mass with respect to another. Flexibility Ability of minerals to bend without fracturing. Fluorescence Property of some minerals that enables them to emit a certain level of light when exposed to ultraviolet rays. The fluorescent properties present in a metal can make it look as if it were truly fluorescent. Fold Bending and deformation of rock strata due to the compression caused by the movements of tectonic plates. Fossil Any trace of an old life-form. It can be the petrified remains of an organism or an impression of an organism left in rock. Fossil Fuel Fuel formed from the partially decomposed remains of deceased organisms. These mixtures of organic compounds are extracted from the subsoil with the goal of producing energy through combustion. They are coal, oil, and natural gas. Fracture Break of a mineral along an irregular surface. It can be conchoidal, hooked, smooth, or earthy. Gem Mineral or other natural material that is valued for its beauty and rarity. It can be polished and cut to produce jewels. Geode Spherical, rocky cavity covered with well- formed crystals. Geology Study of the Earth, its shape, and its composition. ROCKS AND MINERALS 93 Rocks, minerals, and fossils offer information that helps us reconstruct the history of the planet. Glacier A large mass of ice formed through the accumulation of recrystallized and compacted snow occurring either on a mountain or over a large area on a landmass. Ice moves slowly and both excavates rock and carries debris. Granite Intrusive igneous rock composed mainly of quartz and feldspar. It can be polished and used in decoration. Habit External aspect of a crystal that reflects its predominant shape. Hardness Resistance offered by a mineral to scratching and abrasion. One mineral is said to be harder than another if the former can scratch the latter. Hot Spot Place within a tectonic plate where active volcanoes form. Hydrothermal Process involving the physical and chemical transformations suffered by rocks or minerals through the action of hot fluids (water and gases) associated with a magma body. Igneous Rocks Rocks formed directly from the cooling of magma. If they solidify inside the crust, they are said to be plutonic (or intrusive); if they solidify on the surface, they are said to be volcanic (or extrusive). Impermeable Rock Rock through which liquids cannot be filtered. 94 GLOSSARY ROCKS AND MINERALS 95 Intrusion A large mass of rock that forms in empty spaces underground when magma infiltrates strata, cools, and solidifies. Jade White or green metamorphic rock formed by a compact and tenacious filter of very fine needles of tremolite. It is a rare rock used in art objects. Karst Cycle Formation cycle of caves that lasts a total of about one million years. Kimberlite Type of rock usually associated with diamonds and other minerals coming from the depths of the Earth. Lava Magma expelled on the surface of the Earth. Limestone Rock containing at least 50% calcite. It can also have dolomite, aragonite, and siderite. Lithosphere Exterior, rigid layer of the Earth formed by the crust and upper mantle. Lode Sub-superficial rock intrusion of tabular-shaped rock. Luster Level of light reflection on the surface of a crystal. Magma Hot, rocky material from the crust and upper mantle in liquid state that forms crystals as it cools. When magma is expelled at the Earth's surface, it is called lava. Magmatic Rock Rock that forms when magma cools off and solidifies. Magmatic intrusive rocks solidify underground, while the extrusive ones solidify on the surface. Magnetism Property of some minerals that allows them to be attracted by a magnet and to change the direction of a compass needle. Malleability Mechanical property of a mineral that makes it possible for the mineral to be molded and formed into a sheet through repeated blows without breaking. Mantle The layer between the crust and external core. It includes the upper mantle and lower mantle. Marble Metamorphosed limestone rock composed of compacted calcite and dolomite. It can be polished. Massive One of the possible habits of a consistent mineral that refers to the tendency for certain crystals to intertwine and form a solid mass rather than independent crystals. Metal Any element that shines, conducts electricity, and is malleable. Metamorphic Rock Type of rock resulting from the application of high pressure and temperature on igneous and sedimentary rocks. Mineral Inorganic solid of natural origin that has an organized atomic structure. Mohs Scale A tool designed to test the hardness of a given mineral by comparing it to 10 known minerals, from the softest to the hardest. Each mineral can be scratched by those following it. Molecule Chemical compound formed when one or several types of atoms are joined together. Native Element An element that occurs in nature that is not combined with other elements. Sulfur and gold are examples of native elements. Oceanic Trench Narrow and deep submarine depression formed when the oceanic crust of one tectonic plate moves beneath another. Ornamental Stone It is not a precious stone, but it can be used in jewelry or for other ornamental purposes. Outcrop Part of a rock formation devoid of vegetation or soil that stands out from the Earth's surface. Oxidation Zone Deposit of minerals with oxidizing properties, formed through the effect of meteorization or weathering. Petrifaction Cell-by-cell replacement of organic matter, such as bones or wood, with minerals of the surrounding solutions. Piezoelectric Property that some minerals have to produce a difference in potential when subjected to compression, traction, or torsion. Placer Mineral concentrations as deposits of placer during time lapses that vary from a few decades up to millions of years. Pyroelectric Property that some nonconductor minerals have to create difference in power transmissions from differences in temperature. Quartzite Metamorphic rock formed by the consolidation of quartz sandstone. It is extremely hard. Quartzite can also be a sedimentary rock, which is sandstone with a very high content of quartz; it is very hard and it has light color. Regional Metamorphism Metamorphism occurring in rock over large areas. Rock Natural aggregate of one or more minerals (sometimes including noncrystalline substances) that constitute an independent geologic unit. Sedimentary Rock Rock that forms through accumulation of sediments that, when subjected to physical and chemical processes, result in a compacted and consolidated material. Sediment can form on river banks, at the bottom of precipices, in valleys, lakes, and seas. Sedimentary rock accumulates in successive layers, or strata. Sediments Rock fragments or remains of plants or animals deposited at the bottom of rivers, lakes, or oceans by water, wind, or ice. Seismic Waves Elastic waves that travel through the Earth after an earthquake. They can also be produced artificially through explosions. Silicates They make up about 95 percent of the Earth's crust. Their tetrahedral structure, with one silicon and four oxygen ions, creates different types of configurations through the union of the ions. According to their composition, members of this mineral group are differentiated into light and dark. Slate Bluish black, fine-grained metamorphic rock. It can be easily divided into sheets. Solution Mixture of two or more chemical substances. It can be liquid, solid, or gaseous. Stalactite Internal structure of a cave. It is conical and hangs from the cave ceiling. Stalagmite Internal structure of a cave. It is conical and rises from the cave floor. Streak Characteristic color of the fine dust obtained from a mineral by rubbing it over an unglazed porcelain plate. Streak Test A test that involves rubbing a mineral against an unglazed white porcelain sheet to obtain dust. The color of the dust left on the tile can help identify the mineral. Symmetry Axes Symmetry element that enables the repetition of crystalline faces to form different shapes. Syncline Concave fold of sedimentary rock strata. The younger rocks are located at the center of the concave. Talus Slope Accumulation of fragments resulting from the mechanical weathering of rocks. The sediment deposit forms more or less in situ as the result of the transport of materials through gravity over a small distance. Tectonic Elevation Rising of rocks as a consequence of the movements of tectonic plates. Tectonic Plates Rigid fragments of the lithosphere that move on the asthenosphere. Tenacity The level of toughness that a mineral offers to fracture, deformation, crushing, bending, or pulverization. Transparent It is said that a mineral is clear when light goes through it without weakening. When only some light passes through, the mineral is called translucent. If no light passes through, it is called opaque. Vein Fracture that cuts through rocks and is filled by some mineral. Volcanic Outcropping Isolated pile of hard magmatic rocks that remain after the disappearance of the rest of the volcano due to erosion. Weathering The breaking down of a material by sustained physical or chemical processes. 96 INDEX abrasion platform, 49 agate, 23 crystallizing pattern, 43 Alexander the Great, Valley of Diamonds, 35 allochromatic mineral, 22 Allosaurus, 10 alloy, 39 Alps, formation, 10 aluminum, 79 amethyst, 22 color, 33 ammonia, covalent bond, 28 ammonite, extinction, 10 Andes mountain range, formation, 11 angiosperm, 10 anhydrite, 39 anion, 28 anthracite, 71 apatite, 38 hardness, 24 Appalachian Mountains, formation, 9 aragonite, chemical crystallization, 21 Argentina, Veladero mine, 80-81 arkose (sandstone), 69 ash cone, 43 Asscher, Joseph, 35 asthenosphere (Earth's mantle), 11 atom, crystalline structures, 28, 29 augite, 36 aureole, 55 Australia, Uluru-Kata Tjuta National Park, 58-59 automobile: See car Ayers, Henry, 59 Ayers Rock (Australia): See Uluru-Kata Tjuta National Park Baltica, Ural Mountains formation, 9 barytine, 39 basalt, 43 eruptions, 9 formation, 12, 65 batholith, 16, 42, 43 Yosemite National Park, 44 bauxite, 38 beach, formation, 49 bedrock, 57 Bering Strait, modern humans, 11 Bingham Canyon (Utah, United States), 82-83 biotite, 37 birefringent mineral, 23 bismuth, 20 Black Stone of the Ka'bah (Mecca, Saudi Arabia), 59 blackboard chalk, 68 Borena (ethnic group), 27 Bowen's reaction series, 43 Bravais, Auguste, 30 Bravais lattices, 30 brazilianite, crystalline system, 30 breccia, 69 Bridal Veil Falls (Yosemite National Park, United States), 45 Burkhardt, Jean L., 74 calcite, 66 chemical crystallization, 21 hardness, 24 calcium sulfate, 39 caldera, 43 Caledonian range, 9 California (United States), gold rush, 84-85 Cambrian explosion, 9 Cambrian Period, 9 Cango Caves (South Africa), 50-51 canyon Bingham Canyon, 82-83 formation, 46, 51 Grand Canyon, 52-53, 66 car, elements, 78-79 carbon, mineral structure, 21 carbon-14 dating, 53, 91 carbonate, 39 Carboniferous Period, 9 carbonization, 70 cascades, 45 cataclasite, formation, 54 Cathedral Rocks (Yosemite National Park, United States), 45 cation, 28 cave, 50-51 Australian Aborigine paintings, 59 formation, 49 Neversink Pit, 40-41 cementation (sedimentary rock), 49, 69 Cenozoic Era, 10-11 Central Rocky Mountains (United States), formation, 10 chalcopyrite, 38 chalk, 68 chemical element, 8, 16, 20 chemical weathering process, 15 Chicxulub (Mexico), meteor impact, 10 Chile, Torres del Paine National Park, 16-17 citrine, 22 clast, detrital rocks, 68 clay kaoline, 68 lutite, 68 structure, 36 cliff, formation, 49 coal deposits, 71, 77 formation, 70-71 mining, 76-77, 86-87 coastal drift, 4 coastal plain, 49 color mineral, 22: See also streak color rock, 63 column (cave structure), 50 compaction (sedimentary rock), 49 compound mineral, 20 conglomerate (sedimentary rock), 69 contact metamorphism, 55 See also metamorphism copper, 38 mining, 82-83 coquina, 66 coral reef, 66-67 Corkscrew Canyon (Arizona, United States), 6-7, 14-15 corundum, hardness, 25 covalent bond, 28 Cretaceous Period, 10 crystal atomic model, 29 Bravais lattices, 30 characterization, 30 crystallographic axes, 31 crystallographic chemistry, 28 formation, 63 internal network, 29 precious stones, 32 crystalline network, categorization, 30 crystalline system, 30-31 crystallization system, 21 crystallographic axis, 31 crystallographic chemistry, 28 crystallography, 28 cubic crystalline system, 30 Cullinan diamond, 35 Dallol volcano (Ethiopia), 18-19, 26-27 deflation, geologic processes, 46 delta, formation, 48 dendrite, 38 density (mineral), 25 desert, 46 desertic soil, 56 detrital rock, 68-69 Devonian Period, 9 diamond, 19, 32-33 cuts, 33 hardness, 21, 25 history, 34-35 structure, 21, 30, 33 dike, 42, 43, 65 dinosaur, mass extinctions, 10 dolomite, 66 dune, erosion, 46 dynamic metamorphism, 54 See also metamorphism Earth history, 4-5, 8-9 layers, 11 earthquake, causes, 13 Earth's core, 9, 11, 42 Earth's crust, 8, 11, 42 Earth's mantle, 11, 42 earthworm, humus production, 57 Ediacaran fauna, 8 effusive rock, formation, 12 Egyptian iconography, 75 El Capitan (Yosemite National Park, United States), 44 electric current, 25 element, chemical, 8, 16, 20 emerald, color, 32 Eocene Epoch, 10 eolian process (erosion), 14 erosion, 14, 46 rock formation: See sedimentary rock soil formation, 57 erratics, glaciers, 47 estuary, 49 Ethiopia Borena ethnic group, 27 Dallol volcano, 18-19, 26-27 volcanic cave house, 4-5 exfoliation, 24, 63 exotic mineral, quartz color, 22 ROCKS AND MINERALS 97 extended cave system, 50 Externsteine rock formation (Germany), 58 extinction: See mass extinction extrusive rock (volcanic rock), 65 formation, 12, 42, 43 rock cycle, 57 fault (rock fracture), 13 feldspar, 17 fissure, granite rock, 45 flowering plant, Cretaceous Period, 10 fluorite, 39 hardness, 24 foliation, 72 fool's gold: See pyrite fossil Cambrian explosion, 9 dating, 53, 91 formation, 53 hominid, 11 succession, 52, 53 fractional distillation, 89 fracture, 13, 24, 63 temperature effects, 15 Fugitive Slave Law, 84 fusion (rock), 55 gabbro (rock), 64 galena, structure, 21 garnet, color, 33 garnetiferous schist, 72-73 gas: See petroleum gem (precious stone), 18-19, 32-33 geode, 60, 61 geologic process: See erosion; weathering 98 INDEX ROCKS AND MINERALS 99 geologic time scale, 8-11 rock layers, 53 geology, branches, 16 Germany, Externsteine rock formation, 58 Giant's Causeway (Northern Ireland), 65 glacial cirque, 47 glaciation Precambrian Period, 8 Quaternary Period, 11 glacier, 44, 47, 56 glass, atomic model, 29 gneiss, 72 formation, 9, 55 metamorphism, 73 gold gold rush, 84-85 metals, 20 mining, 80-81 Gondwana (continent), 9 grain (rock), 63 Grand Canyon (United States), 52-53, 66 granite, 12,17, 42, 44, 45, 64 granodiorite, 64 graphite chemical crystallization, 21 hardness, 21 use, 19 Yosemite National Park, 44-45 graywacke, 69 Great Koh-I-Noor diamond, 34 Great Star of Africa diamond, 35 Greece, ancient, architecture in Petra, 75 gypsum, 39 hardness, 24 use, 19 H Hadean Era, 8 Half Dome (Yosemite National Park, United States), 45 halide, 39 halite: See salt hardness (mineral) diamond, 21 graphite, 21 Mohs scale, 21, 24 quartzite, 73 hematite, 23 hexagonal crystalline system, 30 Himalayas (Asia), formation, 10 Holocene Epoch, 11 Hope Diamond, 35 hopper (mining equipment), 85 hornblende schist, 72 hornito (salt formation), 26, 27 human being, emergence, 11 humus, 57 hydraulic mining, 85 hydrocarbon, 78 hydrologic process, erosion, 14 hydroxide, 38 I idiochromatic mineral, 22 igneous rock, 64-65 formation, 42-43 rock cycle, 57 immigrant labor, gold mining, 84 India, diamond history, 34, 35 inselberg, 46 internal geodynamics, 12 intrusive rock (plutonic rock), 64 formation, 12, 42 rock cycle, 57 ionic bond, 28 iron, 79 isomorphism, 21 J-K joint (rock fracture), 13 Jordan, Petra, 74-75 Jurassic Period, 10 kaoline, 68 See also clay kaolinite, 36 karst cycle, 50 Kilauea Crater (Hawaii, United States), 12-13 Kimberley mine, 32 Koh-I-Noor diamond, Great, 34 L labradorite, 31 laccolith, 43 laterite soil, 56 lava, 43 leaching (lixiviation), 82 lignite, 71 limestone, 68 Externsteine formation, 58 formation, 66 karst cycle, 50 Neversink Pit, 40-41 stalactite formation, 51 limolite: See limestone limonite, 38 lithosphere, 11 lixiviation (leaching), 82 luminescence, 23 luster, 23 pearl, 67 lutite, 68 M magma, rock formation, 42, 43 See also igneous rock; volcanic rock magmatism, 12 magnesite, structure, 21 magnesium, 78, 79 magnetite, 38 malachite, 22, 39 mammal, Cenozoic Era, 10-11 mammoth, 11, 91 marble, 73 colors, 63 marcasite, chemical crystallization, 21 mass extinction Cretaceous Period, 10 Permian Period, 9 Mauna Loa volcano (Hawaii, United States), 12-13 McLean, Evelyn Walsh, 35 Mecca (Saudi Arabia), Black Stone of the Ka'bah, 59 mechanical weathering process, 15 Mesozoic Era, 10 metal car parts, 78-79 luster, 23 native minerals, 21, 22 metamorphic rock, 12 classification, 72 rock cycle, 57 metamorphism, 12, 54-55 meteor, Yucatan Peninsula, 10 Mexico, Yucatan Peninsula meteor, 10 mica, 17 micaceous schist, 72 mineral, 18-39 chemical perspective, 17 classification, 20-23 optical property, 22-23 physical properties, 24-25 radioactive, 90-91 sources, 5 structure, 21 mineralization process, Dallol volcano, 26 mining coal, 76-77, 86-87 copper, 82-83 gold, 80-81, 84-85 hydraulic, 85 open-air mine, 82-83 silver, 80-81 types, 82 Miocene Epoch, 11 Mohs, Friedrich, 24 Mohs scale of hardness, 24-25 diamonds, 21 graphite, 21 monoclinic crystalline system, 30 monorefringent mineral, 23 moraine, 47 mother-of-pearl, 67 mountain formation, 9, 10, 11, 13 See also specific names, for example Sierra Nevada range Mountain of Light (diamond): See Great Koh-I-Noor diamond mylonite, formation, 54 N Nabataean people, Petra, 74-75 native mineral, 20 Neversink Pit (Alabama, United States), 40-41 nonmetal mineral, 20, 38 car parts, 79 luster, 23 nonsilicate mineral, 38-39 Northern Ireland, Giant's Causeway, 65 nuclear energy, 77, 90-91 nuclear reactor, 90-91 O obsidian, 43, 65 ocean first, 8 marine sediments, 66-67 Oligocene Epoch, 11 olivine, 36 opal, 32 open-air mine, 82-83 optical property (mineral), 22-23 Ordovician Period, 9 organic rock, 61, 70 original horizontality principle, 53 orogeny, 9 orthoclase, hardness, 25 oxide, 38 P-Q Paleocene Epoch, 10 Paleozoic Era, 9 calcareous formations, 66 Pangea (continent), 9 Panotia (supercontinent), 9 Patagonia, formation, 11 pearl, formation, 67 peat bog, coal formation, 70 pegmatite, 65 peridotite, 64 permafrost, 56 Permian Period, 9 Petra (Jordan), 74-75 petrographic microscope, 22 petroleum (gas) combustion, 78 formation and reserves, 70-71 production process, 88-89 phosphate, 38 phraetic layer, mining, 83 phyllite, formation, 54, 72 100 INDEX ROCKS AND MINERALS 101 piezoelectricity, 25 Pleistocene Epoch, 11 Pliocene Epoch, 11 plutonic rock (intrusive rock), 64 formation, 12, 42 rock cycle, 57 polymorphism, 21 porphyritic rock, 65 positron emission tomography, 91 Precambrian Period, 8 precious stone, colors, 32-33 See also specific types, for example diamond pressure, effect on rock structure, 55 prism, 30 Giant's Causeway, 65 Proterozoic Era, 8 pumice, 65 pyrite (fool's gold) chemical crystallization, 21 structure, 39 pyroclastic material: See volcanic ash pyroelectricity, 25 Quaternary Period, 11 quartz agate, 23 color, 22 composition, 17 hardness, 25 structure, 37 quartzite, 73 R radioactive mineral, 90-91 ranker (soil type), 56 rapids, 48 refining, petroleum, 89 refraction, 23 regional metamorphism, 55 See also metamorphism reptile Cretaceous Period extinction, 10 Mesozoic Era, 10 rhodochrosite, 31 rhombic crystalline system, 31 river, sediment transportation, 48-49 rock, 60-75 color, 62 formation, 16-17, 62 identification, 62-63 mineralogical composition, 62 shape, 62 transformation: See metamorphism See also specific types, for example granite rock crystal, 22 rock cycle, 6-7, 57 Rocky Mountains (North America), formation, 10 Rodinia (early supercontinent), 8 rose quartz, 22 ruby, color, 32 S safety measure, radioactive material, 90, 91 salt (halite), 19, 20 extraction, 27 ionic bond, 28 structure, 21, 28-29 salt deposit, hornito formation, 27 sandstone classification, 69 Petra, 74-75 Uluru, 58-59 sapphire, color, 33 Saudi Arabia, Black Stone of the Ka'bah, 59 scheelite, 31 schist, 55 types, 72-73 Scotland, gneiss formation, 9, 54-55 sediment soil formation, 56 water transportation, 48-49 wind transportation, 47 sedimentary rock detrital rock, 68-69 formation, 46-49, 57 marine organic remains, 66-67 See also stalactite; stalagmite sedimentation, 15, 48 semimetal mineral, 20 semiprecious stone color, 33 See also precious stone Serapis (Egyptian god), 75 Siberia, Ural Mountains formation, 9 siderite, structure, 21 Sierra Nevada range (United States), 44-45 silicate, structures, 29, 36-37 silicon, 79 sill (rock formation), 42, 65 Silurian Period, 9 silver crystal dendrite, 20 mining, 80-81 sinkhole, 50 slate, 39, 72 formation, 9 micrography, 72 phyllite formation, 54, 72 sluice box, 85 Smithsonian Institution, Hope Diamond, 35 smoky quartz, 22 soil formation, 56 humus, 57 profile, 57 types, 56 South Africa Cango Caves, 50-51 diamonds, 35 stalactite, 50 formation, 51 stalagmite, 50 stock (rock formation), 43 streak color, 23 See also color stripe (rock), 72 subsoil, 57 sulfate, 39 sulfide, 39 sulfur, 19, 20, 22 supercontinent, 8, 9 T talc, 37 hardness, 24 Taylor, Elizabeth, 35 Taylor-Burton diamond, 35 temperature, degree of metamorphism, 55 terminal moraine, 47 Tertiary Period, 10-11 tetragonal crystalline system, 31 texture (rock), 63 thyroid, scintillography, 91 till, glaciers, 47 topaz, 31 color, 33 hardness, 25 Torres del Paine National Park (Chile), 16-17 tourmaline, 24-25 transportation, eroded materials, 15 Triassic Period, 10 triclinic crystalline system, 31 trigonal crystalline system, 31 trilobite, 9, 52 tropics, laterite soil, 56 tuff, detrital rocks, 68 tunnel, formation, 51 turquoise, color, 33 U Uluru-Kata Tjuta National Park (Australia), 58-59 unconformity, rock layers, 53 United Kingdom Giant's Causeway, 65 royal family's diamond ownership, 34, 35 United States of America Bingham Canyon, 82-83 Corkscrew Canyon, 6-7, 14-15 gold mining, 84-85 Grand Canyon, 52-53, 66 Mauna Loa volcano, 12-13 Neversink Pit, 40-41 Yosemite National Park, 44-45 Ural Mountains (Eurasia), formation, 9 uranium, 77 handling, 90 medical uses, 91 Vv Valley of Diamonds (legend), 35 vanadinite, 30 Veladero mine (Argentina), 80-81 Victoria, Queen, Great Koh-I-Noor diamond, 34 volcanic ash, 68 ash cone, 43 volcanic rock (extrusive rock), 65 formation, 12, 42, 43 rock cycle, 57 volcano caldera, 43 Dallol, 18-19, 26-27 Mauna Loa 12-13 rock formation, 42, 65 W water cave formation, 50-51 erosion, 14 hornitos, 26, 27 sediment transportation, 48-49 weathering, 15 waterfall formation, 48 Yosemite National Park, 45 weathering, 14, 15 wind deserts, 46 erosion, 14 sediment transportation, 47 Winston, Harry, 35 X-Z X-ray diffraction, 22 crystal structure identification, 28 Yosemite National Park (United States), 44-45 Yucatan Peninsula (Mexico), meteor, 10 zooxanthellae, coral reefs, 67 ROCKS AND MINERALS ERC YELORamTA Britannica VOLCANOES AND EARTHQUAKES About the pagination of this eBook Due to the unique page numbering scheme of this book, the electronic pagination of the eBook does not match the pagination of the printed version. To navigate the text, please use the electronic Table of Contents that appears alongside the eBook or the Search function. For citation purposes, use the page numbers that appear in the text. VOLCANOES AND EARTHQUAKES Britannica Illustrated Science Library Britannica Illustrated Science Library © 2008 Editorial Sol 90 All rights reserved. Idea and Concept of This Work: Editorial Sol 90 Project Management: Fabian Cassan Photo Credits: Corbis, ESA, Getty Images, Graphic News, NASA, National Geographic, Science Photo Library Illustrators: Guido Arroyo, Pablo Aschei, Gustavo J. Caironi, Hernan Cajfiellas, Leonardo César, José Luis Corsetti, Vanina Farias, Joana Garrido, Celina Hilbert, Isidro Lépez, Diego Martin, Jorge Martinez, Marco Menco, Ala de Mosca, Diego Mourelos, Eduardo Pérez, Javier Pérez, Ariel Piroyansky, Ariel Roldan, Marcel Socias, Néstor Taylor, Trebol Animation, Juan Venegas, Coralia Vignau, 3DN, 3DOM studio Composition and Pre-press Services: Editorial Sol 90 Translation Services and Index: Publication Services, Inc. Portions © 2008 Encyclopedia Britannica, Inc. Encyclopaedia Britannica, Britannica, and the thistle logo are registered trademarks of Encyclopaedia Britannica, Inc. Britannica Illustrated Science Library Staff Editorial Michael Levy, Executive Editor, Core Editorial John Rafferty, Associate Editor, Earth Sciences William L. Hosch, Associate Editor, Mathematics and Computers Kara Rogers, Associate Editor, Life Sciences Rob Curley, Senior Editor, Science and Technology David Hayes, Special Projects Editor Art and Composition Steven N. Kapusta, Director Carol A. Gaines, Composition Supervisor Christine McCabe, Senior I/lustrator Media Acquisition Kathy Nakamura, Manager Copy Department Sylvia Wallace, Director Julian Ronning, Supervisor Information Management and Retrieval Sheila Vasich, Information Architect Production Control Marilyn L. Barton Manufacturing Kim Gerber, Director Encyclopzedia Britannica, Inc. Jacob E. Safra, Chairman of the Board Jorge Aguilar-Cauz, President Michael Ross, Senior Vice President, Corporate Development Dale H. Hoiberg, Senior Vice President and Editor Marsha Mackenzie, Director of Production International Standard Book Number (set): 978-1-59339-797-5 International Standard Book Number (volume): 978-1-59339-800-2 Britannica Illustrated Science Library: Volcanoes and Earthquakes 2008 Printed in China ENC YC OR AID IA Britannica www.britannica.com Volcanoes and Earthquakes Contents Continuous Z Movement ' Page 6 Volcanoes Page 24 Study and Prevention - a y Rh, Page 44 ay Earthquakes : Page 58 Study and Prevention Page /4 Kashmir, 2005 Farmer Farid Hussain, 50, grasps the hand of his wife, Akthar Fatma, after the earthquake that rocked the Himalayas on the Indian subcontinent. Eighty thousand people were killed, and thousands of families were left homeless. The Power of Nature Some gestures communicate more than words ever could, like these clasped hands, which seek comfort in the face of fear of the unknown. The picture was taken Oct. 8, 2005, when aftershocks were still being felt from the strongest earthquake ever to strike Kashmir, in northern India. Those clasped hands symbolize terror and panic; they speak of fragility and < ome photos speak for themselves. helplessness, of endurance in the face of chaos. Unlike storms and volcanic eruptions, earthquakes are unpredictable, unleashed within seconds, and without warning. They spread destruction and death, forcing millions to flee from their homes. The day after the catastrophe revealed a terrifying scene: debris everywhere, a number of people injured and dead, others wandering desperately, children crying, and over three million survivors seeking help after losing everything. Throughout history Earth has been shaken by earthquakes of greater or lesser violence. These earthquakes have caused great harm. One of the most famous is the earthquake that rocked San Francisco in 1906. Registering 8.3 on the Richter scale, the temblor left nearly three thousand dead and was felt as far away as Oregon to the north, and Los Angeles in southern California. better understand the causes of fractures and the magnitude and violence of the forces deep within the earth. The full-color, illustrated book you hold in your hands contains shocking scenes of cities convulsed by earthquakes and volcanoes, natural phenomena that, in mere seconds, unleash rivers of fire, destroy buildings, highways and bridges, and gas and water lines and leave entire cities without electricity or phone service. If fires cannot be put out quickly, the results are even more devastating. Earthquakes near coastlands can cause tsunamis, waves that spread across the ocean with the speed of an airplane. A tsunami that reaches a coast can 7 he purpose of this book is to help you be more destructive than the earthquake itself. On Dec. 26, 2004, the world witnessed one of the most impressive natural disasters ever. An undersea quake with a magnitude of 9 on the Richter scale shook the eastern Indian Ocean, causing tsunamis that reached the coastal areas of eight Asian nations, causing about 230,000 deaths. The earthquake was the fifth strongest since the invention of the seismograph. Satellite images show the region before and after the catastrophe. peoples and large societies have thought of volcanoes as dwelling places of gods or other supernatural beings to explain the mountains’ fury. Hawaiian mythology, for instance, spoke of Pele, the goddess of volcanoes, who threw out fire to cleanse the earth and fertilize the soil. She was believed to be a creative force. Nowadays, specialists try to find out when a volcano might start to erupt, because within hours after an eruption begins, lava flows can change a lush landscape into a barren wilderness. Not only does hot lava destroy everything in its path, but gas and ash expelled in the explosion also replace oxygen in the air, poisoning people, animals, and plants. Amazingly, life reemerges once again from such scenes of destruction. After a time, lava and ash break down, making the soil unusually fertile. For this reason many farmers and others continue to live near these “smoking mountains,” in spite of the latent danger. Perhaps by living so close to the danger zone, they have learned that no one can control the forces of nature, and the only thing left to do is to simply live.e ne hroughout history, nearly all ancient Continuous Movement n the volatile landscape of Volcano National Park in Hawaii, the beginning and end of life seem to go hand in hand. Outpourings of lava often reach the sea. When the molten rock enters the water, the lava quickly cools and hardens into rock that becomes part of the coastline. By this process, volcanic islands grow constantly, and PAHOEHOE LAVA A type of Hawaiian lava that flows down the slopes of Mt. Kilauea to the sea. nothing stays the same from one moment to another. One day rivers of lava blaze down the volcano's slopes, and the next day there are new, silver- colored rocks. The ongoing SCORCHING FLOW OCEAN TRENCHES THE LONG HISTORY OF THE EARTH WRINKLES IN THE EARTH STACKED LAYERS FOLDS THE JOURNEY OF THE PLATES WHEN FAULTS RESOUND investigation of lava samples under the microscope helps volcanologists discover the rock's mineral composition and offers clues about how the volcano may behave. 8 CONTINUOUS MOVEMENT VOLCANOES AND EARTHQUAKES 9 ost of the Earth's interior is in a liquid and incandescent state at extremely high M Ug This vast mass of molten rock contains —_ ystals ani Scorching sal " (DIMENTARY ye. » METAMORPHIC ROCKS er vapor, among o r gases 10M sm \J / formed by Their original » —_ F *~ ; f , and ae structure is changed magm a : ‘ IC ACU = al , << incl pacted materials. ee : by heat and pressure. AWe Fy r , / F - ¥ é 4 TURNS BACK INTO , ar ee LAVA Earth S SUFTACE IS” ae c trea ert ie Lavais a the heart of every . LAVA ges" jome lava _ . c The state in which magma + * e oe <_ F(50 km/hr). flows to the Earth's outer _/ . crust, either reaching the ~ Pi — = surface or getting trapped < > within the crust. o "_ * ® is the average temperature * =| > " of liquid lava. ad 4 2 tee . a ~ . =% < TYPES OF LAVA << Basaltic lava is found mainly in islands and in mid-ocean ridges; it is so fluid that it tends to spread as it flows. Andesitic lava forms layers that can be up to 130 feet (40 m) thick and that flow very slowly, whereas rhyolitic lava is so viscous that it forms solid fragments before reaching the surface. Mineral Composition ee Lava contains a high level of silicates, light rocky minerals that make up 95 percent of the Earth's crust. The second most abundant substance in lava is water vapor. Silicates determine lava's viscosity, that is, its capacity to flow. Variations in viscosity have resulted in one of the most commonly used Andesitic Lava Rhyolitic Lava classification systems of lava: basaltic, andesitic, and rhyolitic, Silicates 63% Silicates 68% in order from least to greatest silicate content. Basaltic lava ———_—____—_—. ———— Other Other forms long rivers, such as those that occur in typical Hawaiian @) @) ' volcanic eruptions, whereas rhyolitic lava tends to erupt O (@) explosively because of its poor fluidity. Andesitic lava, named after the Andes mountains, where it is commonly found, is an Silicates Other Content . intermediate type of lava of medium viscosity. Content 37% Content 32% CONTINUOUS MOVEMENT The Long History of the Earth he nebular hypothesis developed by astronomers suggests that the Earth was formed in the same way and at the same time as the rest of the planets and the Sun. It all began with an immense cloud of helium and hydrogen and a small portion of heavier materials 4.6 billion years ago. Earth emerged from one of these “small” revolving clouds, where the particles constantly collided with one another, producing very high temperatures. Later, a series of processes took place that gave the planet its present shape. BILLION YEARS AGO Meteorite collisions, at a rate 150 times as great as that of today, evaporated the primitive ocean and resulted in the rise of all known forms of life. VOLCANOES AND EARTHQUAKES THE AGE OF THE SUPER VOLCANOES Indications of komatite, a type of igneous rock that no longer exists. When the first crust cooled, intense volcanic activity freed gases from the interior of the planet, and those gases formed the atmosphere and the oceans. BILLION YEARS AGO ARCHEAN EON The processes that formed the atmosphere, the oceans, and protolife intensified. At the same time, the crust stabilized, and the first plates of Earth's crust appeared. Because of their weight, they sank into Earth's mantle, making way From Chaos to Today's Earth for new plates, a process that continues today. Earth was formed 4.6 billion years ago. In the beginning it was a body of incandescent rock in the solar system. The first clear signs of life appeared in the oceans 3.6 billion years ago, and since then life has expanded and diversified. The changes have been unceasing, and, according to experts, there will be many more changes in the future. BILLION YEARS AGO The first crust formed as it was exposed to space and The oldest rocks cooled. Earth's layers became appeared. differentiated by their density. The accumulation of matter into solid bodies, a process called accretion, ended, and the Earth stopped increasing in volume. MILLION YEARS AGO MILLION YEARS AGO BILLION YEARS AGO PALEOZOIC ERA ™ EN ‘ x ay . ‘i e : ey SEF ey . floor contained - -_ : ‘ioe? " ets ‘ > ee hae : ’ aN ’ ' ~ } e | We KINGDOM _ sediments that now 2 i ; hae bP Pia ih BAY AS ON A Ay, 4 yy Latitude: 51° 30’ N form the bedrock of : } yi : ‘ \ ) 9? } i : ip i \\ c / Longitude: 003° 12’ W the coast of Wales. : : y , \ ‘ ; W NAA ' ay“ N eo { Cardigan Bay t O \ Length 40 miles (64 km) ) NS WS Rock Sedimentary » Fold Monoclinal Created them tJ , MILLION have ended, ey are being Worn away ¢ \ &> Sy gee : and sculpted by éonstat erosi \ Pr ee <- a - tle a . 22 CONTINUOUS MOVEMENT When the Faults Resound Sec Mean <>. VOLCANOES AND EARTHQUAKES 23 = — WEST = : 2 3 COAST aults are small breaks that are produced along the Earth's crust. Many, such as the bbe va Teleco and lee eiaen no. OF THE P : : : transform fault creates transverse faults UNITED San Andreas fault, which runs through the state of California, can be seen readily. and, at the same time, alters them with its Are Others, however, are hidden within the crust. When a fault fractures suddenly, an Movement nets ane separ eto eden aes = 3 San Andreas fault have three characteristic forms: Diverted Streambed Displaced Streambed oh RR ee ee ees, earthquake results. Sometimes fault lines can allow magma from lower layers to break streambeds with tectonic displacement, diverted The stream changes course The streambed looks Length of California 770 miles (1,240 km) through to the surface at certain points, forming a volcano. @ =trearmbeds, and streamiede with amonenta:lon as a result On tie Deca dekolte fe TaN iene: Length of fault 800 miles (1,300 km) i : that is nearly oblique to the fault. ; : Maximum 60 miles (100 km) width of fault —— Greatest 20 feet (6 m) H H , F i i Relative Movement Along Fault Lines < ys ERT ee Fault borders do not usually form straight lines or right angles; their direction along the surface changes. The angle of vertical inclination is called “dip.” The classification of a fault depends on how the fault was formed and on the relative movement of the two plates that Footwall Normal Pein Fault This fault is the product of horizontal tension. The movement is mostly vertical, with an overlying block (the hanging wall) moving downward relative to an underlying block (the footwall). The fault plane typically has an angle of 60 degrees from the horizontal. Hanging wall Footwall Dip angle This fault has horizontal as well as vertical movements. Thus, the relative displacement between the edges of the fault can be diagonal. In the oldest faults, erosion usually smoothes the differences in the surrounding terrain, but in more recent faults, cliffs are formed. Transform faults that displace mid-ocean ridges are a specific example of oblique-slip faults. form it. When tectonic forces compress the crust horizontally, a break causes one section of the ] i “ ~ — ground to push above the other. In contrast, é - . : when the two sides of the fault are under tension (pulled apart), one side of the fault will slip down the slope formed by the other side of the fault. — Juan de Fuca Plate The distance that the opposite sides of the fault have slipped past each PACIFIC PLATE other, throughout their history. a. Hanging wall NS ( East Pacific Ridge Reverse Fault This fault is caused by a horizontal force that compresses the ground. A fracture causes one portion of the crust (the hanging wall) to slide over the other (the footwall). Thrust faults me UF PACIFIC (see pages 18-19), are a common form Ss Oe of reverse fault that can extend up to . OCEAN hundreds of miles. However, reverse The northwestward faults with a dip greater than 45° are movement of the usually only a few yards long. Pacific Plate and the The average interval between major ruptures that have taken place along the fault. The interval can vary between 20 and 300 years. southeastward movement of the North American Plate cause folds and fissures throughout the region. Strike-Slip Fault Fatal Crack ‘ F The great San Andreas fault in the plates. The system contains many complex lesser In this fault the relative movement of the plates pi 2 : < is mainly horizontal, along the Earth's surface, " western United States is the backbone of faults, and it has a total length of 800 miles parallel to the direction of the fracture but not a system of faults. Following the great (1,300 km). If both plates were able to slide past parallel to the fault plane. Transform faults Fl : earthquake that leveled San Francisco in 1906, each other smoothly, no earthquakes would between plates are usually of this type. Rather Some 30 million years ago, the Peninsula this system has been studied more than any result. However, the borders of the plates are in than a single fracture, they are generally made up of California was west of the present th arth: Tt is bacically ahori \ fact with hother: Whenith lid k of a system of smaller fractures, slanted from a coast of Mexico. Thirty million years other on Earth. It is basically a horizontal contac WI eacn ower. : en e soll roc centerline and more or less parallel to each other. from now, it is possible that it may be transform fault that forms the boundary cannot withstand the growing strain, it breaks Elevated block The system can be several miles wide. some distance off the coast of Canada. between the Pacific and North American tectonic and unleashes an earthquake. Volcanoes ount Etna has always been an active volcano, as seen from the references to its activity that have been made throughout history. It could be said that the volcano has not given the beautiful island of Sicily a moment's rest. The Greek philosopher Plato was the first to study Mount Etna. He traveled to Italy especially to see it MOUNT ETNA With a height of 10,810 feet (3,295 m), Etna is the largest and most active volcano in Europe. up close, and he subsequently described how the lava cooled. Today Etna's periodic eruptions continue to draw hundreds of thousands of tourists, who enjoy the spectacular fireworks FLAMING FURNACE CLASSIFICATION AFTERMATH OF FURY JETS OF WATER FLASH OF FIRE RINGS OF CORAL MOUNT ST. HELENS FROZEN FLAME KRAKATOA _ ty - _ - re ead - i | — : y produced by its red-hot explosions. This phenomenon is visible from the entire east coast of Sicily because of the region's favorable weather conditions and the constant strong winds. 26 VOLCANOES VOLCANOES AND EARTHQUAKES 27 - e Flaming Furnace ae a : _ Many volcanoes are caused by phenomena occurring in pale aed subduction zones along convergent plate boundaries. olcanoes are among the most powerful mani i , our planet's dynamic interior. The magma the Earth's surface can cause phenomena thai surrounding areas: explosions, enormous flows of mo fire and ash that rain from the sky, floods, and mudslides. — Since ancient times, human .beings have feared volca even seeing their smoking craters’as an entre ~»}e underworld. Every volcano has a-life cycle, di it can modify. the topography and the clime after whichit becomes extinct. _ When two | plates The rock melts and converge, one moves forms new magma. under the other Great pressure builds up ¢ (subduction). between the plates. LIFE AND DEATH OFA VOLCAN( y ; ia see ; ; ; hea The heat and pressure in the crust force the > \ aoe ‘ iat = magma to seep through cracks in the rock and rise to the surface, causing volcanic eruptions. quantities of la gas, and rock. Depression or hollow ~ from which eruptions expel magmatic materials (lava, gas, steam, ash, etc.) PARASITIC VOLCANO ~. Composite volcanic scones have more thanvone crater. A void is left in the conduit e and inthe internal chambek k, formed , evious eruptions. lava flow addsa ~ new layer, 5 a ac ") if) hh fs ft .* Molcanic LF The cone*breaks up cise intoconcentric > @ ‘ings and sinks into 7 e chamber, es, pon ‘ it Za. RS Se oo “oe + ae ala _ .* It connects the. © magma. chamber ~ _with the surface, ~ SEEPAGE OF © — GROUNDWATER ~ Oe FPS ee a tm Magma can reach the a Y : ei ive ‘surface, or it can stay ~~ ‘ ; Ms ~~. pet ae yer of magma = Vertical Channel)» VOLCANO £ below ground and exe’ = mt : : os Ea : ‘ ‘eae pressure between the” = D : \ {> UNDER THE VOLCANO In its ascent to the surface, the magma may be blocked in various chambers at » different levels of the lithosphere. layers of rock, These seepages of magma ° have various names. . vila om ~ MAGMA CHAMBER — Mass of molten rock at temperatures that may e 2,000° (1,100° Cy © Ocean crust Continental crust Lithosphere Asthenosphere Mesosphere 1,790 (2,880) In an active volcano, magma in the chamber is in constant motion because of fluctuations of temperature and pressure (convection currents). Liquid core 5,140) Piso) Solid core 3,960 (6,370) 28 VOLCANOES VOLCANOES AND EARTHQUAKES 29 CHAPEL OF ST. MICHAEL Built in Le Puy, France, on top C las sifi C ati O n IGNEOUS INTRUSIONS: A PECULIAR PROFILE FORMATION OF Lava INITIAL atop THE NECK of a volcanic neck of hard THE VOLCANIC PLUG | solidifies EROSION ; FORMS. H is not The waleat rock that once sealed the o two volcanoes on Earth are exactly alike, although they have and forms osion of eriected) TresearounisMiee nec ennai conduit of a volcano. The terrain is flat. volcano's cone has long since been worn away by erosion; the lava plug remains. characteristics that permit them to be studied according to six basic rock. types: shield volcanoes, cinder cones, stratovolcanoes, lava cones, fissure volcanoes, and calderas. A volcano's shape depends on its origin, how the eruption began, processes that accompany the volcanic activity, and the degree of danger the volcano poses to life in surrounding areas. ee eee = 262 THE N - FEET (80 M) Stratovolcanoes, or composite cones, , The height of the plug, from are strung along the edges of the base to peak. Pacific Plate in the region known as the “Ring of Fire.” " z | LAVA DOME Formation of new ) cone DLCANO POSITE VOLCANO) early symmetrical in appearance, formed by layers of fragmented 4 ad material (ash and pyroclasts) volcanoes, and they are typically filled v of between lava flows. A stratovolcano lakes. Some calderas ni formed lows, SO is structured around a main conduit, cataclysmic explosions that complete OW, with gently although it may also have several the volcano. Others were formed when, 2 g sides, and they branch pipes. This is usually the most successive eruptions, the empty cone could no Pare nearly flat on top. violent type of volcano. longer hold up the walls, which then Ollapsed. K MOUNT MOUNT FUJI CALDERA 3 = — _. MAUNAULU KILAUEA Composite BLANCA ‘ ‘ i oa Fissure volcano, Cinder cone located Shield volcano volcano 12,400 Located on F Yee about 5 miles (8 km) 45 miles (65 km) in Hawaii. One feet (3,776 m) Lanzarote, Canary - from the top of west of the capital of of the most high, the highest Islands, in the Kilauea (Hawaii). This El Salvador. Its last active shield in Japan. Its fissure zone known is one of the most recorded eruption volcanoes on last eruption as the Montafias active volcanoes in was in October 2005. Earth. was in 1707. de Fuego (Fire the central Pacific. Mountains). 30 VOLCANOES VOLCANOES AND EARTHQUAKES 31 e Fl as a of Fire EFFUSIVE ACTIVITY TYPES OF EFFUSIVE ERUPTION Mild eruptions with a low frequency of explosions. The Dome Low, like a A photo of lava has a low gas content, and it flows out of openings shield volcano, with Augustine i : . SAS and fissures. a single opening Fissure Lava alli volcanic eruption is a piteciistic Often seers the March 27, 1986, process that can last from f Fragments na eal ae a few hours to several fs alg dle | Frequent : Lava Flows decades. Some are devastating, but others are mild. The severity = = of the eruption depends on the Lava Flows = dynamics between the magma, ule aaa dissolved gas, and rocks within the composition. HAWAIIAN FISSURE Vol has M Typical i ift % be volcano. The most potent ee rae pete — amounts of basaltic lava sides of composite cones such and ice explosions often result from & thousands of years of accumulation of magma and gas; as pressure builds up inside the chamber. Other volcanoes, such.as Stromboli and Etna, reach an explosive point every few months and have frequent emissions. with a low gas content, so their eruptions are very mild. They sometimes emit In mid-ocean vertical streams of bright ridges and on lava (“fountains of fire”) that as Etna (Italy) or near shield volcanoes (Hawaii). The greatest eruption of this type was that of Laki, Iceland, in 1783: 29 cubic miles (12 cu km) of lava was expelled from a crack 16 miles (25 km) long. volcanic islands. can reach up to 330 feet (100 m) in height. EXPLOSIVE ACTIVITY Comes from the combination of high levels of gas with TYPES OF EXPLOSIVE es a Poole relatively viscous lava, which can produce pyroclasts and ERUPTION 3 ke. build up great pressure. Different types of explosions are distinguished based on their size and volume. The greatest explosions can raise ash into a column several miles high. The column can reach a height of 49,000 feet (5 km) HOW IT HAP PENS Plume of ash Cloud of burning material from about . HE E: E : 330 to 3,300 feet Burning cloud é Burning (100-1,000 m) high moving down When the mounting clouds the slope pressure of the magma neo ' becomes greater than the poundant re 4 terials bet th pyroclastic Lava plug materials between the aaments magma and the floor of the volcano's crater can bear, Lava flows these materials are ejected. Viscous and dome-shaped lava IN THE CONDUIT Lava Andesitic or A solid layer of fragmented materials blocks the magma that contains the volatile rhyolitic STROMBOLIAN VULCANIAN VESUVIAN PELEAN The volcano Stromboli in Named after Vulcano in Also called Plinian, the A plug of lava blocks the : Sicily, Italy, gave its Sicily. As eruptions eject most violent crater and diverts the gases. As the magma rises name to these high- more material and become explosions raise column to one side after a and mixes with volatile frequency eruptions. The more explosive, they columns of smoke and large explosion. As with Mt. gases and water vapor, the WHERE relatively low volume of become less frequent. The ash that can reach into Pelée in 1902, the pyroclastic pockets of gases and steaieh Along the expelled pyroclasts 1985 eruption of Nevado the stratosphere and flow and lava are violently 5 ; ¢ margins of allows these eruptions del Ruiz expelled tens of last up to two years, expelled down the slope ina that form give the nfagma continents and to occur approximately thousands of cubic yards as in the case of burning cloud that sweeps its explosive pgwer. island chains. every five years. of lava and ash. Krakatoa (1883). away everything in its path. IN THE CHAMBER. LAVA FLOWS MAKA-O-PUHL, HAWAIT MT. KILAUEA, HAWAII There is a level at which . On the volcanic island of 7 SS liquefaction takes place and Hawaii, nonerupting flows 7 EDs 7 . . at which rising magma, Gas Molten of lava abound. Local terms j { Yous under pressure, mixes with Particles Rock for lava include “aa,” * 7 >> gases in the ground. The viscous lava flows that x Si AS rising currents of magma increase the pressure, hastening the mixing. MAGMA CHAMBER sweep away sediments, and “pahoehoe,” more fluid lava that solidifies in soft waves. 32 VOLCANOES VOLCANOES AND EARTHQUAKES 33 9,680 feet (2,950 m) -1,315 feet (-401 m) : ‘mountain flew off like the c ; 8,363 feet i : of ashaken bottle of soda. (2,549 m) _ <— a 4 = / 8 miles st a SURFACE DESTRUCTION —-, sane * OLD DOME A 4, The effects were devastating: ~ . ea! (1980-86) TP / 13 km 250 houses, 47 bridges, rail ~ — pam... ‘ BL lines, and 190 milésG00. km) . eee SNE Pulverized and incinerated CRRA Pet loom GLACIER by the force of the lava TONGUE , . Y Site: ( yA and the pyroclastic flow. Temperatures rose above mre 15 miles , YW, 1,110° F (600° C). 24 km < é E E j Range of the shock wave from the jel 7 ig ye : é : ys f j y pyroclastic flow. The heat and ash left ; Z ps = yf E Fiche volar Aotile Ay 7 AG rd acres of forest completely destroyed. ZN 4% ofchampagne;the to ’ ¢ : 4 ’ Yt, Tea 42 f of the mourttain burst “f ; (Ts = ~ ie 7} ; «4 y / off because of pressure f? . = : 3! es oy 4 #7 from the magma. y ? ~ . } YF, f as O44 ; Ss fi 47 y — 8 et Me} ; - 4 i = ~ 7 = Mp g \ ° : — 4 3 A The Forest ~—>- Zs * q ait nl Burned trees covered , ' ~~ roe with.ash, several miles ‘ ~ = —— } from the volcano g 2 7 . - ? an . Warning Signs SWELLING ~ : ae PRESSURE ON THE NORTH SLOPE INITIAL ERUPTIONS EXPLOSION AND VERTICAL COLLAPSE OLYMPIA > Two months before the great ] The uninterrupted flow of magma towarty. ‘ = The swelling of the mountain was no 3 The north slope gave way fo the great At the foot of the volcano, a valley 640 WASHINGTON explosion, Mount St. Helens © the volcano's Surface caused the north ~ ; ©. doubt caused by the first eruption, © pressure of the magma in’an explosive © feet (195 m) deep was buried in Volcanic STATE gave several MD Ors OS aeeries of i slope of thé mountain to swell) and later “Sag 07. almost two months before the final ; eruption. The lava traveled 16 miles 00: 5 material. Over 10 million trees were Seismic movements, small explosions, QU: 0 collapse in.an avalanche; ~*~ ot OU: 40 explosion. UU: 50 (25 km) at 246 feet (75 m) per second: i destroyed. and a swelling of the mountain's north ss : % c / , slope, caused by magma rising toward A, Type of Volcano Stratovolcano the surface. Finally on May 18, an Influx of Unchanged Precollapse Secondary Graben: Blocked Having, tio Side The crater The side block gave A vertical Profile Size of Base 59 mi (9.5 km) earthquake caused a landslide that magma. profile. swelling. dome of Depression Crater escape route, block of exploded. way, causing a powerful column of before the ! earlier rocks. caused by the magma pyroclastic flow. smoke and ash collapse Type ofActivity Explosive carried away the top of the volcano. movement in exerts pressure rose 12'miles - Biriaa Later, several collapses at. the base of the Earth's sideways and (19 km)-high. > Type‘of Eruption the column caused numerous crust breaks through os t Most Recent Eruptions 1980,.1998, 2004 pyroclastic flows with temperatures of the north slope. _ SY Profile Aichtes 57 nearly 1,300° F (700° C). Hk Rieti ater the i Foam >s. collapse =, 34 VOLCANOES Krakatoa n early 1883, Krakatoa was just one of many volcanic islands on Earth. It was located in the Straits of Sundra, between Java and Sumatra in the Dutch East Indies, now known as Indonesia. It had an area of 10.8 square miles (28 sq km) and a central peak with a height of 2,690 feet (820 m). In August 1883, the volcano exploded, and the island was shattered in the largest natural explosion in history. VOLCANOES AND EARTHQUAKES 35 KRAKATOA Latitude 6° 06’ S Longitude 105° 25° E Surface Area 10.8 square miles (28 sq km) Remaining Surface Area 3 square miles (8 sq km) Range of the Explosion 2,900 miles (4,600 km) Range of Debris 1,550 miles (2,500 km) Tsunami Victims 36,000 The height of the column of ash. - j © AFTER A crater nearly 4 miles (6.4 km) in diameter was left where the volcano ~ ‘tes: | e.; had been. About 1927, new volcanic activity was observed in the area. pace Sages Cre In 1930, a cone emerged. Anak Krakatoa (“daughter of Krakatoa") so violent that, according : i: to the descriptio appeared in 1952; it grows at a rate of nearly 15 feet (4.5 m) per year. “ The Island That Exploded Krakatoa was near the subduction volcano was extinct. On the morning of of sailors, they zone between the Indo-Australian Aug. 27, 1883, the island exploded. The reached up to 37 and Eurasian plates. The island's inhabitants —_ explosion was heard as far away as miles (80 km) FRACTION Aftereffects were unconcerned about the volcano Madagascar. The sky was darkened, and from the island. Two thirds of the because the most recent previous eruption the tsunamis that followed the explosion ey e island was The ash released into the atmosphere had been in 1681. Some even thought the were up to 130 feet (40 m) high. ‘ . | , destroyed, and only left enough particles suspended in the f a part of Rakata air to give the Moon a blue tinge for years survived the afterward. The Earth's average temperature explosion. also decreased. Long-Term Effects o WATER LEVEL PRESSURE WAVE y The water level The atmospheric pressure ri fluctuated as far away —_ wave went around the as the English Channel. — world seven times. English s Channel BEFORE DURING g In May the volcano began showing At 5:30 a.m. the island - * Madagascar Stratosphere signs in the form of small quakes and burst from the = spouting vapor, smoke, and ash. None accumulated pressure, Atmosphere of this served to warn of the terrible opening a crater 820 feet ea explosion to come, and some even (250 m) deep. Water e lingered for years took trips to see the volcano's immediately rushed in, *) cr. ‘a “pyrotechnics.” causing a gigantic tsunami. 5 y az ~ . MEGATON / is Be soi [a= bay Dg Eto. &. ~ oh "+ The energy released, es - + oe as tic (i cAuivalent to 25,000 ae . . rd » eo. 4 A on ato ic bombs such ie dropped hima. ‘nae, ——— a, ~ 30 feet 2 me zi ce ie 36 VOLCANOES VOLCANOES AND EARTHQUAKES 37 Aftermath of ramen yO oe Incandescent masses of ash, gas, 6 ie 1 32 930- if 830° F 30-6 1 and rock fragments that come miles per hour —_(500-1000° C) miles per hour from sudden explosive eruptions (100-200 km/h) (50-100 km/h) flow downhill at high temperature, : In rhyolitic eruptions. burning and sweeping away everything in their path. hen a volcano becomes active and explodes, it sets in motion a chain of events beyond the mere danger of the DE. ow burning lava that flows down its slopes. Gas and ash are Ps Lighter particles A ied caught n-th eruption of expelled into the atmosphere and affect the local climate. At ay fessor arate doer id ese urea times they interfere with the global climate, with more Ree) BAe enl qn hed Gal MEPS completely destroyed. devastating effects. The overflow of lakes can also cause mudslides called lahars, which bury whole cities. In coastal areas, lahars can cause tsunamis. VOLCANO ) & Nonturbulent dense flow Ahead of the burning cloud, a wave of hot air destroys the forest. Turbulent expanded flow “y LAVA FLOWS In volcanoes with calderas, low-viscosity lava can flow without erupting, as with the Laki fissures in 1783. Low-viscosity lava drips with the consistency of clear honey. Viscous lava is thick and sticky, like crystallized honey. AFTEREFFECTS CINDER CONE MOLDS OF TREES LAVA TUBES Cone with As the lava Burned tree The petrified Outer Inside, walls of flows upward, underneath mold forms a layer of the lava hardened the cone cooled lava. _ minivolcano. hardened stays hot explodes. lava. and fluid. \ i oP 5 Particles of volcanic ash intensify => yellow and red colors. After ] the eruption of Tambora in | Indonesia in 1815, unusually colorful ak sunrises were seen worldwide. : MUDSLIDES Mudslide after the OR LAHARS aera ae Rain mixed with snow and rescue worker helps a melted by the heat, along boy trapped in a lahar. with tremors and overflowing lakes, can cause mudslides called “lahars.” These can be 6.0 Yh 50) =. x. * : ee GRAPHICAL even more destructive than te ’ ak . JER RECONSTRUCTION the eruption itself, destroying “i ae we a - gallons (30,000 |) OF WATER cae) OTHER POSTVOLCANIC eet 3 ACTIVITY a ae FUMAROLE Nae, a = i. T This is a place where there is a constant emission OO ——————————————————— CL. !|lUlUC<“‘i‘iéilieé™ ; . of water vapor because the temperature of the meth a ye te magma is above 212° F (100° C). — | © the'cone at irregular bs w. — ___ intervals. The lapse 3 ~ between spurts depends The average height reached x; on the time it takes for of the spurt of water is about 4 Water the chambers to fill up with water, come to a boil, and produce steam. 148 feet a (45 m) = — oe Hot TALLEST U.S. RECORD BUILDING HEIGHT ele BURSTING FORTH SOLFATARA The water rises by The thermal layers emit sulfur and sulfurous ® convection and spurts CONVECTION FORCES anhydride. out the main vent to the This is a phenomenon equivalent to boiling water. : chimney or cone. The Se suits 4 deepest water becomes ; Gases steam and explodes A 3 outward. Water cools and sinks back to the interior, where it is reheated. TERRACES These are shallow, quickly drying MOUNTING PRESSURE FO B pools with stair- The underground chambers Bubbles of hot gas Stelsitey Steam © fill with water, steam, and WwW rise to the surface and gas at high temperatures, give off their heat. AS and these are then expelled at through secondary conduits to the main vent. MUD BASIN HEATED WATER Thousands of years after the ® eruption of a volcano, the area beneath it is still he reach temperatures of up to 518° F (270° C), but pressure from cooler water above keeps it from boiling. == MORPHOLOGY OF THE CHAMBERS | a MAIN CHIMNEY These basins produce their own mud; sulfu acid corrodes the rocks on the surface and creates a mud-filled hollow. mineral deposits, VENT The heat of a magma chamber warms water in the y cavity, the chamber fills, and the water rises to the = MINERAL SPRINGS Steam Energy surface. The pressure in the cavity is released, and the 5 TThel: Water Containeineny iiirerale In Iceland, Meter sucierly bods arelispixts out RESERVOIR OR art Penis known since antiquity for their eerie geothermic steam is CHAMBER CONDUIT i used not only in Great Geysir Grand Fountain Old Faithful prones tess Among otfier'siistalices tia thermal ee but (Iceland) (Yellowstone) (Yellowstone) include sodium, potassium, calcium, Bees poner a magnesium, silicon oxide, chlorine, sulfates b ~ Geyser with (S04), and carbonates (HCO3). They are turbines that fth multiple very helpful for rheumatic illnesses. gercralemostof the chambers country's electricity. Round Geyser Great Fountain Narcissus HEAT SOURCE (Yellowstone) (Yellowstone) (Yellowstone) Magma _ = between 2 and 6 miles (3-10 km) deep, at 930-1,110° F 4 (500-600° C). ~~ 7 ) EARTHQUAKES 41 ~ OPTIMAL CONDITIONS Coral is mainly found in the photic zone (less than 165 feet [50 m] deep), where sunlight reaches the bottom and provides sufficient energy. For reefs to grow, the water temperature should be between between the Tropic é ~ = of Cancer and t =. ; a ae Tropic of Capers TOPIC OF CAPRICORN See : 68° and 82° F | (20-28° C). onl A How does the process work? Gradually, volcanic islands sink, barrier. Finally, the volcano is completely submerged; no longe ar i) a ee irae: . A ‘eefs | fo visible, it is replaced by ana TAKARAYAN A - FORMATION OF = W f RAWANNAWI AN ATOLL VOLCANIC CORAL a CONE REEF p ; ; ic, The undersea flanks of an extinct volcano are colonized by corals, which continue to grow. THE BEGINNING l OF AN ATOLL. e INNER LAKE Scale in miles (km) » THE CORALS e XO) 0.6 (1) GAIN GROUND. ‘= : - 0.3 (0.5) ; As the surrounding “ reef settles and continues to expand, it becomes a barrier reef that surrounds the summit of the ancient volcano, now ‘ inactive. INACTIVE VOLCANO Country Republic of Kiribati Ocean North Pacific Archipelago Gilbert Islands Surface area 10.8 square miles (28 sq km) Altitude 69 ft (2.1 m) LEGEND @ Town Ok] Capital The coral THE ATOLL h . - reef forms SOLIDIFIES. / a ring. e Eventually the island rif a4 \ will be completely covered and will sink below the water, leaving a ring of growing coral with a shallow lagoon in the Kah ttat otk ig a oat at lal gad ne | ” Ml iad |) HAWAIIAN ARCHIPELAGO 7) & Oahu Molokai Maui Nihau Kauai REEF LEVELS CREST Barrier that protects the shore from waves. Deep pssaaulieezeeseasetes dwewsvaaueesN> middle. grooves and tunnels let @ s Lanai 5 af seawater inside the reef. j * ¢ TM BGTIVE VOTGONG Ra | LIMESTONE F Kahoolave FACE 2 : Z Branching corals grow here, : é though colonies can break . ~ 4 £ loose because of the steep “Say ~ t | s slope. . i F ea rs i FORMATION OF A VOLCANIC ISLAND v é Molokai Kohoolave Lanai Maui Hawaii CORALS? HARD CORAL BRANCHING CORAL bit 1,476 ft 3,369 ft 3,369 ft (10,023 ft 13,799 ft POLYP ; tes Volcanoes form when When a plate of the crust (450 m) (1,027 m) (1,027 m) = (3,055 m) (4,206 m) Corals are formed from the Polyps on Polyp Forming Branches J » ¢ A magma rises from deep moves over a hot spot, a exoskeletons of a group of ue ane of eS i é within the Earth. Thousands volcano begins to erupt Cnidarian species. These Tentacles —@ rane "Oe re of volcanoes form on the and an island is born. marine invertebrates have “oaly seafloor, and many emerge from the sea and form the a sexual phase, called a Mouth base of islands. medusa, and an asexual phase, called a polyp. The Throat polyps secrete an outer COMPACT skeleton composed of Gastrointestinal CORAL Plate calcium carbonate, and Cavity Original polyp movement they live in symbiosis with formation (dead) one-celled algae. Mineral Layer of live polyps Base 42 VOLCANOES VOLCANOES AND EARTHQUAKES 43 ——ESS — = — = ——_ = = ee ozen Flame t is known as the land of ice and fire. Under Iceland's frozen surface there smolders a volcanic fire that at times breaks free and causes disasters. The island is located over a hot spot on the Central Atlantic Ridge. In this area the ocean bed is expanding, and large quantities of lava flow from vents, fissures, and craters. ICELAND Latitude 64° 6'N Surface Area 39,768 sq miles (103,000 sq km) Population 293,577 Population density 1 per sq mile (2.8 per sq km ) 1,064 sq miles (2,757 sq km) Glaciers 4,603 sq miles (11,922 sq km) Area of lakes Split Down the Middle f Part of Iceland rests on the North American Plate, which is L drifting westward. The rest of Iceland is on the Eurasian Plate, drifting eastward. As tectonic forces pull on the plates, the island is slowly splitting in two and forming a fault. The edges of the two plates are marked by gorges and cliffs. Thus, the ocean bed is growing at the surface. North Eurasian American Plate Plate a REYKJAVIK The magma that emerges at the surface comes from a series of central volcanoes separated by fissures. Mid-Atlantic ie Ridge Atlantic Ocean Longitude -21° 54’ E ENERGY The islanders use geothermal (steam) energy from volcanoes and geysers for heat, hot water, and electric energy. REYKJAVIK The capital of Iceland is the northernmost capital in the world. This volcano has been very active throughout history. Of its 29 active periods, the most recent was in eae — —> pea RIFT ZONE 100_75 5025 55075 100 Tf the rift zone that crosses the "A J \ ~~» island from southwest to north were cut in two, different ages of the Earth would be revealed Depth in miles (km) of all the lava that according to the segment being ee has ona on the analyzed. For example, the rock Earth's surface 60 miles (L00 km) from the rift since 1500 has is six million years old. come from Iceland. Crater of 1,640 feet (500 m). The caldera measures 6 miles (10 km) across. o Sake Viti (Hell if Icelandic)? “Krafla Volcano 3 a GLACIAL CAP OF VATNAJOKULL - + REYKJAVIK © > 3 ",,, HENGILL (MA oe VATNAFJOL JOUER 4 Repose ape . - - ss a ERUPTION UNDER THE ICE In 1996 a fissure opened up between Grimsvétn and Bardarbunga. The lava made a hole 590 feet (180 m) deep in the ice and released a column of ash and steam. The eruption lasted 13 days. Birth of an Island pe On Nov. 15, 1963, an undersea volcanic eruption off the southern coast of Iceland gave rise to the island of Surtsey, the newest landmass on the planet. The eruption began with a large column of ash and smoke. Later, heat and pressure deep within the Earth pushed part of the Mid-Atlantic Ridge to the surface. The island R The first eruptions were caused by Repeated eruptions expelled vapor The entire process lasted three-and- kept growing for several months, and today it has a x the interaction of magma and and ash into the air, forming a achalf years. Over 0.25 cubic mile (1 hee . water. The explosions were column over 6 miles (10 km) high. cu km) of lava and ash was expelled, surface area of LO square mile (2.6 sq km). The island was infrequent, and rocks were thrown The island was formed from with only 9 percent of it appearing named after Surtur, a fire giant from Icelandic mythology. SURTSEY only a few yards from the volcano. volcanic blocks and masses of lava. above sea level. Study and Prevention arge eruptions often give warning signs months in advance. These signs consist of any observable manifestation on the exterior of the Earth's crust. They may include emissions of steam, gases, or ash and rising temperatures in the lake that typically forms in the crater. This is why volcanic seismology is INCANDESCENT ROCK A river of lava from Mt. Kilauea flows constantly, forming surface wrinkles that deform under the lightest step. considered one of the most useful tools for protecting nearby towns. Several seismic recording stations are typically placed around the cone of an active volcano. Among other things, LATENT DANGER BURIED IN A DAY LEARN MORE PREPARATIONS FOR DISASTER ERUPTIONS THROUGH TIME the readings scientists get give them a clear view of the varying depths of the volcano's tremors-extremely important data for estimating the probability of a major eruption. 46 STUDY AND PREVENTION Bi ome locations have a greater propensity for |. volcanic activity. Most of these areas are 7 found where tectonic plates meet, _whether they are approaching or moving y Sod e away from each other. The largest . | concentration of volcanoes is found in aregion of the » | Pacific known as the — AVACHINSKY ~ “Ring of Fire.” Volcanoes Bussi2 are also found in the Mediterranean Sea, in NOVARUPTA Alaska, U.S. It is in the Valley } of Ten Thousand VESUVIUS +" Africa, and i In the — Smokes. Italy ; Atlantic Ocean. @ arodney toi ice . , Th e P a cifi c ST. HELENS NORTH AMERICAN 20th century. ; z PLATE Washington, U.S. “Ri f Fir 9 It had an Ing O Ce unexpected, violent Formed by the edges of the Pacific tectonic plate, eruption in 1980. MA where most of the world's volcanoes are found. The Antilles d tai The Lesser Antilles is a cred mountain ountry's jolcano. ' Ocean Philippines ) © MT. PELEE Philippines: c \—— MT. In 1991 it 50 Volcanbes Martinique _ Indonesia has the highest MAUNA LOA KILAUEA a second most = Hawaii, U.S. Hawaii, U.S. eruption of ped ae E aietear cova a : The largest active The most active shield Rama 5D acne veicamg, =| maar ER oka fs va fs . as : ocean floor and than 40 square miles é i . takes up nearly « (100 sq km) since * z ~ half of the island: KRAKATO Indonesia » OCE ANIA volcanoes erupt volcanically active region. Its eruption completely Iceland , Eurasian Plate. ELDFELL Iceland ¥ During one eruption, it expelled 3,500 cubic feet (100 cu m) } of lava per second. “4 ETNA The western half of per year. Iceland lies on the North American Plate, but the eastern half is on the VOLCANOES AND EARTHQUAKES 47 EURASIAN PLATE Italy 10,990 feet (3,; m) high; has been active for Atlantic thousands of years. © destroyed the city of Saint-Pierre and its port in 1902. ‘ On May 2, the first rain of asirfe Saint-Pierre. The sky around the i Y t foe Pie ps e . ; — oe « *., Pacific Ocean island was darkened for several days. entire island. = = i, NAZCAN EASTEPI*, . | a. - %6 PLATE TAMBORA fanuatu * es ee Indonesia This is an 1 In 1815 it produced undersea caldera . Subduction “a nm 35 cubic miles with slow 7 (150 cu km) of ash. ) eruptions lasting ee ee pepe It was the largest for months. wae rae Plate Chile/argents SOUTH On May 5, near the summit, the caldera recorded eruption g The tall Zi AMERICAN PLATE Etang Sec ruptured, releasing the water in human history. Mus talles VO) that it contained. A large lahar formed. SCOTT BLAE i the world, its Z Indian om a 1 ee ee AL ea ae ast eruption we Ocean AUSTRALIAN PLATE Ww a eI, The tallest : MAUNA LOA Rh These are found in the 3 Hawaii The “top five” list “ On May 8, Saint-Pierre was destroyed (Lei middle of the Andes 0JOS DEL SALADO LLULLAILLACO ~ { TIPAS INCAHUASI SAJAMA Shield volcano changes when the > by a burning cloud that devastated an range, which forms part of Chile/Argentina Chile/Argentina Argentina Chile/Argentina _ Bolivia 13,680 feet volenhorereineccied ibe of eee hae km), the Pacific Ring of Fire. They fa pes i fe rah) aaes He raed hy rene’ a eHean, ae from the base rather ee ee . : F m) , A , m , m , m sea level. Ve were most active 10,000 fs) SS | than from their altitude “ years ago, and many are above sea level. ‘ - now extinct or dampened ANTARCTIC PLATE ” by fumarolic action. SEA LEVEL a «Cf e | Indian Ocean AFRICAN PLATE ® 4 Danger The most dangerous volcanoes are those located near densely populated areas, such as in Indonesia, the Philippines, Japan, Mexico, and Central America. VOLCANOES AND EARTHQUAKES 49 = = Zz . F ¥ =e oes VOLCANIC GASES ic a | i from far off. Gas and water vapor dissolved in 10 up close, they must scale ade span eaie | id mudslides. Only then can emissions, such as sulfur and steam, are measured, as are invisible gases. Analyzing the gases' composition makes it possible to predict the beginning and end of an eruption. mors and sounds. — wv GAS MASK >; = ~~ Volcanologists Taking Gas Pimati ae . . - id - - “ot ce. Samples from a Fumarole on deformations in th -_ : ‘ , . - : ' ‘ R ‘a Lipari Island, Italy jes in electromagnetic LAVA -MIBL ._ MUTHE SIZE LAVA COLLECTION TEMPERATURE __ EARTH | © 4 © “ne © OF THE CRATER. MONITORING The study of lava can is measured with a thermometer of a volca 4 TEM (GPS) Portable seismographs are used - “The widening of the crater a Mudslides, or lahars, can bury determine its | a “J called a Thermopar; glass change ebb! in the magma cause . . +» to detect movements in the LomNly ~ ©. «« caused by volcanic activity and ™ te large areas. Monit ing composition and its origin. thermometers would melt from eruption. indreneer cracks in'the cone. A _. within 6 miles (10 km) of the “= the growth of the solid lava volume of water in the area makes Lava deposits are also analyzed the heat. Temperatures of water (A-B) to monitor how pressure "GPS system records images volcano thatis being studied. These domes are measured. This it possible to alert and evacuate because the history of a and of nearby rocks are other from the magma deforms the continuously and analyzes the tremors can give clues about the ~~ growth implies certain risks for the population when the amount volcano's eruptions can give Thermopar variables to take into account. surface between them. deformation over a period of time. movements of the magma. * the proximity of aferuption. of water passes critical points. clues about a future eruption. STUDY AND PREVENTION Preparations for Disaster olcanic eruptions are dangerous to surrounding populations for two basic reasons. One danger is posed by the volcanic material that flows down the sides of the volcano (lava flows and mudslides), and the other danger is from the volcano's pyroclastic material, especially ash. Ash fallout can bury entire cities. Experts have developed an effective series of prevention and safety measures for people living in volcanic areas. These measures greatly reduce the highest risks. @ a Ze - ~ = = . —_ e ~ . : - 7 . * yy @“—27 — ~ . 7 ~ _ Se - ~ ? had f a - ‘ why - = yA Before an Eruption % It is best to get informed about safety Do not carry more than am measures, evacuation routes, safe areas, and alarm systems before a volcanic eruption. ~ Other safety measures include stocking up on ~s"_-nonperishable food, obtaining gas masks and —_— potable water, and checking the load-bearing x capacity of roofs. an —S See ~~ Evacuation — = of Nearby Areas > In the immediate area (within 12 miles /F | [20 km) of the volcano, evacuation is the only possible safety measure. Returning home will be*possible only when permission is Given: Keep in mind that it takes a long time for life to return to‘hormal after an evacuation: MEDICAL PRECAUTIONS Keep a first-aid kit and essential medications on hand, and keep vaccinations up to date. BOTIOUIN Nee PROVISIONS Water and food-are indispensable,. especially if you evacuate the area on your own. 44 pound (20 kg) Pe ee MAIN ROUTES These usually cross low-lying areas. They can be a potential path for flows of lavasor mud. CIVIL DEFENSE Follow all - recommendations, be alert to official information, and do not spread rumors. electricity, gas, and water. Tape doors and windows shut. 12 miles (20 km) oo ie RIVERS — Bie a fn Se eee a pt ee Rt ae, ae me fot ot pose a threat of mudslides. _ 2 Avoid these areas. ~ . ene ~ i ae BRIDGES. When possible, do not use for your evacuation route because they | might.collapse. alge ae HIGHER ELEVATIONS Before leaving a These are the preferred sites for house, shut off the evacuations from volcanic eruptions. High ground is safe from lahars and lava flows, and if there is shelter there, it is also safe from rains of ash. Areas of Falling Ash Most of the population lives outside the volcano's range, but ash from an eruption can become highly volatile and ~ fall over wide areas. Wind-can carry ash to other areas, so the best preventive efforts are focused on A : A Zz : preferred because they a warning people about what to do in case of falling ash. SVATER TANK cannpbibereacheii = Roof-mounted water lava and mudflows. tanks should be disconnected and covered until the roof has been AT HOME cleared of ashes. It is best to stay indoors during an ashfall. One of the main precautions is to provide for potable drinking water, because the usual water supply will be interrupted because of pollution risks, especially if the water supply comes from lakes or rivers in the area. AVOID DRIVING Tf you must drive, do so slowly and turn on your headlights. It is best to leave the car parked in an enclosed space or under cover. VOLCANOES AND EARTHQUAKES Lahars (mudflows) can form from rainwater or melting snow. Volcanic danger zones often have strategies to divert rivers and reduce the volume of water in dams and reservoirs. 12 miles (20 km) Considered to be the critical distance from a volcano in emergency relief efforts. DOORS AND not collapse. WINDOWS It is best to always leave doors and windows shut tightly, as airtight as possible, for as long as the a ashfall continues. \ Le 4 washing with water will form a sticky and heavy paste that will be very hard to remove. my \ ASH ON THE ROOF Ash should be removed immediately (before it rains) so the roof does . 7 s _ — ; ) “INFORMATIO B % | Listen to the radi i ‘ | at all times! DO NOT WASH ye. WITH WATER. = sil After the/ashtfall, CHILDREN . ¥ \ If children are at : Wind is a risk factor that spreads volatile ash over a large area so that settlements at a distance greater than 60 miles (100 km) can be affected. The greatest danger posed by falling ash is that it can mix with rain falling on the roofs of houses and form a heavy mass that will collapse the buildings. ALTERNATIVE ROUTES ~~ Roads running through higher elevations are AIR CONDITIONING Air conditioners and large clothes dryers should not be used during an eruption. MASKS Use masks and special ash-protective clothing when outdoors. school, do not go to pick them up: they will be safe there. 52 STUDY AND PREVENTION Buried in One Day t noon on Aug. 24, AD 79, Mount Vesuvius erupted near the coast of Naples Bay. The Roman cities of Pompeii and Herculaneum were completely buried in ashes and pyroclasts, in what would become one of the worst natural tragedies of ancient times. Many details from that day have reached us thanks to the narrative of Pliny the Younger. His well-known description of the eruption column as “shaped like a pine” caused this type of eruption to be named after him: a “Plinian eruption.” @ AN ALMOST NORMAL DAY Tremors and earthquakes had been felt in without any consequences, the the city for four days. Hanging lamps inhabitants of Pompeii continued with swayed, furniture moved, and some door their normal lives. The public forum was frames had even cracked. Because these filled with people. The festivities of Isis things happened about once a year were celebrated in the temple of Apollo. ae P 3 M -# POMPEII'S FORUM : — 5 a 0 ERUPTION. This was the political, religious, —— Re and commercial heart of the . -» Ss spe ed out a huge city. Every day the forum was and ash that alive with Pompeii's citizens, as it was on August 24. ard Pompeii. People ran in all directions seeking efuge in houses. The roughness of the sea made escape Several precious objects such as this > gold bracelet have | been unearthed. The Violent Awakening > Mount Vesuvius had been inactive for more than 800 years, until the pressure that had accumulated inside produced its explosion in the year 79. Most of the deaths during this tragedy were originally blamed on the ash that buried parts of the neighboring settlements (Herculaneum and Stabiae, as well as Pompeii). Now, though, the eruption is believed to have produced the typical “burning clouds” of a Plinian eruption: Flames of incandescent ash and gases were expelled at high spi eruptive pressure. Suspended moist particles charged electricity, causing an intense electric storm, whose flashe lightning would have been the only source of light under tht 23 feet Since then Vesuvius has had a dozen other important eruptions. T (7m) The maximum epth of the ashes. RAIN OF STONES Moments after the eruption, incandescent pumice stones fell from the sky. worst killed 4,000 people in 1631. The first volcanology observatory in the world was installed at Vesuvius in 1841. 9 PM. A TWO-DAY NIGHT The tongues of lava from the volcano were seen better at night. The next morning the Sun's light could not be seen through the ash cloud. Pliny's narrative mentions a constant rain of SEQUENCE OF THE ERUPTION For more than 20 hours (the time the eruption lasted), the ash column rose and then fell on the surrounding area. After the first explosion, the column of smoke began its vertical climb. The wind blew it toward the southeast. The cloud spread nearly 60 miles (100 km) from side to side, and ash fell on the city for a whole day. By 7:30 A.M. on August 25, the pyroclastic flows reached Pompeii. These flows are estimated to have reached temperatures of 1,022° F (550° C). VOLCANOES AND EARTHQL 6 miles (10 km) Distance from Vesuvius Population in the year AD 79 20,000 people Current population 27,000 people Ash dispersion (79) 60 miles (100 km) (SE) Last Eruption of Vesuvius 1944 pyroclasts, continuing on the following morning, and emissions of sulfuric gases that killed many people. Many sought shelter on the beaches. Only on August 26 did the ashfall begin to disperse. 54 STUDY AND PREVENTION In the House of the Faun Objects and human bodies were found under Pompeii's ashes, preserved in the position in which the disaster surprised them. These valuable testimonies to the past have made possible the reconstruction of daily life in ancient Rome. THE CATASTROPHE Several corpses were covered by volcanic ash, which had accumulated in layers and later hardened. The bodies had decomposed, but their forms were molded in the VOLCANOES AND EARTHQUAKES 55 RECONSTRUCTION The work of Fiorelli was to fill these natural “tombs” (ash molds) with plaster. When the plaster hardened, the surrounding layers of ash were removed, leaving the outlines or molds of the The House of the Faun was one of the most luxurious villas in Pompeii. a volcanic rock. bodies. The name given to the house is from this statue found in the villa's atrium. The faun was considered a wild deity, with the ability to predict the future. Slaves worked in the kitchens, and there were utensils similar to those we use As in That Moment In 1709, some of Pompeii's artifacts were found buried under volcanic ash, and that started a treasure hunt. It was not until 1864, though, that reconstruction and conservation of materials began with the work of Giuseppe Fiorelli. The exhibits that are the most fascinating to people who visit Pompeii's ruins today (about two million people every year) are his reconstructions of the bodies. THE FORM, UNTOUCHED Making plaster casts allowed precise reconstructions of the people's postures at the time of the disaster, and we have been able to learn details such as the hairstyles and dress of these people. Animal forms and other organic objects have also been reconstructed. Today the use of resins and silicones In a Pompeii Bar There were several types of food and drink establishments in Pompeii, from food vendors in the streets to luxury services. These food places with the flora served many different social makes it possible to obtain even greater detail. and fauna of purposes but acted primarily as the Nile. Tiles decorated places for businessmen to meet. They were run mostly by slaves, men as well as women. Wine was served Some of these in small cups called houses were “carafes.” The typical bar had a long marble tabletop This merchant home was with embedded the largest in Pompeii, containers in which food with 32,290 square feet could be kept warm. (3,000 sq m). Good Eating and Drinking Romans were more than fond of feasts. A dinner for the whole family, which normally began at : Food included four in the afternoon, could last for more than four hours. Meals were sumptuous affairs, and no one left was the ne Rips 5 a until completely satisfied. Pompeii's wine was famous approximate bread senenaee There were frescoes on > throughout Rome. Kept in pitchers, it was always number of places of and cffeaiiel the walls showing obscene served watered down. The Romans sometimes added this type in the city. ‘ images and pictures of flavorings, commonly including honey and pepper. drunken customers: na * 7 4e*o" — - « > — 7,% 2 ed Fs °F ~ = . — —- : . ‘. j ~ - -— a “= »o on ad be vr = — _ . pete Soe - = fr tS oe de => == a et Ca gg Sg —s oe = EERE Se Pete Di a 56 ee AND®PREVENTIONS 0 os Bat my es he Sey = Se : cee - ~ _. * - " ~~? +, . : 4 - may -. ye : . ™ ’ =. - . . 7 . yA — 4 v5 Y ie ‘ -< — . SS. = - : —o aa Saree oooeosiw. Sige epee Ses ee ~ ee eo . — ol" > a - = aw” —_ = - — ts = re pete — seater ae es peepee 2 —* = ni a ee as 3 al : eaee en ae Oe oP a 2 re ag | oe eel Se ee ae TY ae > . 3 an =. 7. ‘ a = ~ ~ . =. “= Bee" —— . = poe Fa a a < a oo ree > “_* i = wee Tolthno Heimaey Islands, Icelan - a = he tia falls a fiows. sweepitig: cae Sti in its path, This happens ina slow, “uninterrupted. Onn aes +. ~~ way, and the lava.destroys entire cities, towns,.and-forests‘and: claims thousands ofhuman lives.” ~ = = eae 2 aoe One of the most famous examples was:the eruption of Mount Vesuvius in AD'79, which ‘wiped out”: SL Sr seg No figures y *) Volume of ejectéd ash : - . —_— . 3 (canals. available se Sit cube ese (cu m) in cul two cities and two cultures, those of Pompeii and Herculaneum. In the 20th century, the eruption of Mount. =. ae Ta ~Vietinsp ==: = SS 30,000 Vitis a a, “| ~Pelée destroyed the city of Saint-Pierre in Martinique i in a few minutes and instantly-killed almost | its ST Saw 3. . SF otsethsies “Sak Ss 5 > eek: ~ Cikxacteratics® © SE 200m) . = sr : ~ > ar =», S ; ~ oa Pae 4% = —.. ~ eo — —mey ?e | 7 Pepulguoe Volcanic SLY also seems .to be" closely. mies to- cpanges4 in climate. © S..3 <<. ~ e ce ‘Even though Kfakata> SS | burs olaad Sid 3 flok mass of ac sR Seria ates aii oe sai} ; ; - _ . ~ “— ae ~ - SS. - “ > ~~ ‘= < is becueeete = announce its forthcoming eruption “= =~ as at = ae hot lava were shot from this small- La ~. would take everything in its | path.” a . oe : ee 7 =A ear Tee a a a> ‘eee a Fe __ clouds of vapor and smoke, these signs, - =< thaticompletely destroyed ‘the ™o vx lolcanologists decided that Heimae a™, 2 ands $ : - Rg tte Sy, ea Oo Ae enero — . "Winstead of preventing a disaster; —— an city of Saint-Pierte. Most striking =S *sTslandsouth of Iceland, ee . i ooo ae pet. <8 be aS oe Se : a tourist attra agicn When the explosion SR: _is the fact that this destruction tool © “evacuated. But a physics pi . AD 19- = aere, Te nal: Climate a <¥ a a a 4 $0 ‘ . , There is a strongly Supported'theory |». material blocks a portion of solar radiation; “= ~.— x oS gy ~ » * reached a height of 34 miles (55 km)-see* ge “"» . uprooted. Almost the entire po} — Peet erect VESUVIUS- that relates Climate changes to volcanic™ ‘Yeducing air temperatures around the world. =. "a “* “» _ beyond the stratosphere. A crater 4 “7 “died, and only three people survived, © *” = 5 million tons — Naples, Italy " F, ’ : m4 éruptions. The idea of linking the two ~ Pefhaps the most notable cold period related'to’ «~ ee TF a Ss _.. miles (6.4 km) in,diameter openeia “e —" , one of them because he as trappelli eee ; , the la ce the port + ee, tec ‘ ash <<. : . = * _- phenomena is based on the fact that ee _ volcanic activity was the one that followed'the, ~~ “. . re ’ 1. ae ; As sie feet (250 m) deep. Land and © ‘ 4 -the city jail.» ~ % =. ‘Was saved.” uption | begat ‘ © incubic fect (cum) .. -141,000 (4,000) ~~ mes explosive eruptions spew huge amounts of = > eruption of Tambora in 1815. Some areas of \) —— eh a al a nds ta a oe a ns} = ;™ as _ % ae a= FS 4 Victims 2.200 _ gases and fine particles high into the - »-North America and Eakope bas Lal especially” ; > ye e* = os. ¥ Sw - - ra pas Sx OO eeS . » es ~ — — “, Stratosphere, where'they spread around the harsh Winter. *, 4 ee . wis: Ry — wy ™ ar 2 noon — : t to, — . > ae =. Ad en ieee > Active- ~< = _ Earth and remain for years. 7 The yori, ; — = 2 — Fr - ae nee ; aX. =: as ‘he, —— hal : ail a 3° 1 4~ — . -> . <—e P : . . Se . _ -< ae AS v ‘ tala ‘ . > The’cities of Pompeii and Heredlinesim . _ a aa aa US a 28 . = : Paha * |}. Vesuvius. erupted. Until that day, it was.” _— : a eg tee . 72 *. + “MOUNT < not known that the mountain was Ame ont KALAPANA. After the Kilauea “ ’ >> “> State’ eof Was b - volcano because it had been inactive for. * Ee volcano (Hawaii) erupted in 1991, — Slee 1 over 300 years. This was one of the first bs a lava flow advanced on the city, - in os = | eruptions to be recorded: Pliny the. . ~. covering everything in its path. : J» Younger stated in.one of his manuscripts amt s r : that he had seen how the mountain ed > 2 * exploded. He described the gas and ash - , al - w “ y wt = a ST eo ee — - cloud rising above Vesuvius and how -"°" “Ge - = ee a ae ae a ai Khown as the Mount Fuji ofthe, thick, hot lava fell. Many people died ~ - = -: x - ‘= ~ American continent. During the "1980, because they inhaled the poisonous gases. » ae > ‘Wexplosion, 1,315 feet (401 m) of ~~ , y j —* . ‘ => © mountain's top gave way throug| — . - wf eee — aw ™. fault on its side. A few minutesafter” — 2 | = - x, — — =r the-volcano began its. eruption, rivers) : “" > > ant ~_ of lava flowed down its sides, carrying ~ -. . — Ss os: _ away the trees, houses, and bridges in ¥p_.. : = SS eS =e “their path. The eruption destroyed ’ . et ; oe ~ = . © swhole forests, and the volcanic debris ; 2 — —— ~~» “devastated entire Shs ce ; ; mins . 1783. ae ~ wt r . LAKT VOLCANO ~ ; Iceland " ~~ ~~ " a, : ie ‘ HON VOLCANO. > . Volume of ejected ash » ‘ exico i . ' » in cubic feet (cu m) * = < -~ ~ = x \ = ere Wictine = ~ x —> © ‘ ~ - Sie ¢ ie echash No figure ~ hs a 2 - ——— - —- . . 5 < Iycubic feet (cu - le p “Characteristics Very active . ; r TAMBORA VOLCANO . +h. * 5 Ls E of mn , ~ . a)" . £ $ + ‘ * ao = : > = Sete: - a ~ ‘> 4 = <9 Indonesia 2a he ee, me MOUNT vesuius SS ae Se > mars = = , In spite of the fact that the eruptions == a Fe a OF te: See soll » Naples, Ttaly , * ~ the previousone in 1906, caused severe, © Character stics = = Aetie , . folume of ejected ash 100 billion ey t es eS < —— | are related to conic forms, most of the % rnccubiGrean cum) Ghillions: 24, ).+ . 370 miles (600 km) away from the epicenter ~~ =% i material damage. The'eruptions were — volcanic material comes out through = . ea “* S sof theeruption, and it was so thick that it ‘SS Volume ae 2 ae a. _ responsible for more than 2,000'deaths™_ On Sunday, Marchi2e, after 100 years of fractures in the crust, called “fissures.” ‘ak =eePe hid the Sun for two days. The ashfall, covered == — — “fi eannches and lava bombs. 4 »._ inactivity, this ‘volcano became active ya The fissure eruptions of Laki were the ©» Characteristics Stratovolcano ¢ an area of 193,051 square miles (500,000 sq > Sane Victims pitas © 2,000 ‘Additionally, the 1944 eruption took. » « gs. again and unleashed an eruption on April’. a: greatest in Iceland; they created more : ; 4 . km). It is considered to be the most ~\"». = > SS Characteristics ty End ofacycle =~ uch dan World War II and caused RY ‘4. The eruption caused the deaths of # ~ than 20 vents in a distance of 15 miles = ~ After giving off fumes for seven monn destructive volcanic explosion that ever took, ~~ ah 4 s <2} E* is much damage as the eruption at the ~ mJ g ~ about 2,000 people who lived in the 2 , * (25 km). The gases ruined grasslands and © * Tambora erupted, and the ensuing place. More than 10,000 people died during is oe . With ‘this last activity, the Vesuvius eee ning of the 20th century had, "> surrounding area, and it destroyed ni ~ J ~ _ a ~~ - ” % — ad i - - all . = el = -~ -— ~*~ —¥ A * ‘. *- 60 EARTHQUAKES Deep Rupture arthquakes take place because tectonic plates are in constant motion, and therefore they collide with, slide past, and in some cases even slip on top of each other. The Earth's crust does not give outward signs of all the movement within it. Rather energy builds up from these movements within its rocks until the tension is more than the rock can bear. At this point the energy is released at the weakest parts of the crust. This causes the ground to move suddenly, unleashing an earthquake. FORESHOCK Small tremor that can anticipate an earthquake by days or even years. It could be strong enough to move a parked car. EARTHQUAKES PER YEAR 8 or Greater | 1 7to 79 18 30 Seconds 6 to 69 120 The time lapse 5 to 59 800 between each 4 to 49 6,200 tremor of the Earth's crust 3 to 39 49,000 AFTERSHOCK New seismic movement that can take place after an earthquake. At times it can be even more destructive than the earthquake itself. SOUTHERN ALRS Point on the Earth's surface located directly above the focus. Point of rupture, where the disturbance originates. Can be up to 435 miles (700 km) below the surface. FAULT PLANE Usually curves rather than following a straight line. This irregularity causes the tectonic plates to collide, which leads to earthquakes as the plates move. FOLDS These result from tension that accumulates between tectonic plates. Earthquakes release part of the tension energy generated by orogenic folds. 15 miles (25 km) | a Average depth of the Earth's crust 7 SOUTH ISLAND CA VOLCANOES AND EARTHQUAKES 61 ORIGIN OF AN EARTHQUAKE Tension Is Generated Tension Versus Resistance The plates move in opposite Because the force of ~~ directions, sliding along the displacement is still active fault line. At a certain point even when the plates are along the fault, they catch not moving, the tension } on each other. Tension grows. Rock layers near begins to increase between the boundary are distorted the plates. and crack. The main movement or tremor lasts a few seconds, after which some alterations become visible in the terrain near the epicenter. Riverbeds follow a curved path because of movement along 9 the fault line. D- om 2. a TEKAP SEISMIC WAVES transmit the force of ALPINE FAULT IN NEW ZEALAND Earthquake When the rock's resistance is overcome, it breaks and suddenly shifts, causing an earthquake typical of a transform-fault boundary. NEW ZEALAND Latitude 42° S Longitude 174° E Surface area 103,737 square miles (268,680 sq km) Population 4,137,000 Population density 35 people per square mile (13.63 people per sq km) Earthquakes per year (>4.0) 60-100 Total earthquakes per year 14,000 the earthquake over ee As seen in the cross-section, South Island is divided by a large great distances ina il igi fault that changes the direction of subduction, depending on characteristic back-and- (4 nes the area. To the north the Pacific Plate is sinking under the forth movement. Their i ‘ ae Indo-Australian Plate at an average rate of 1.7 inches (4.4 cm) intensity decreases with SD NM Bh | per year. To the south, the Indo-Australian Plate is sinking 1.4 distance. ¥ ; i x / inches (3.8 cm) per year under the Pacific Plate. below the island. = Pacific 2 million Plate years FUTURE DEFORMATION OF THE ISLAND y ot At To the west there \% S; is a plain that has ° i HH traveled nearly = t ° 310 miles (500 > km) to the north y: in the past 20 million years. pS ( Pee 4'million years 62 EARTHQUAKES VOLCANOES AND EARTHQUAKES 63 only along the surface, at 90 lastic Waves ~ | Surface Wa | 2 Speed of surface waves in . aes Focus appear on the surface after the P and S waves reach the the same medium. percent of the eismic energy is a wave phenomenon, similar to the effect > tAbctione olen Having ve frequency, a waves have a greater of S waves. i H F x travel outward effect on solids, which makes them more destructive. of a stone nee into a se of vias Sent waves = abs f , Shaki radiate out in all directions from the earthquake's coe ea eta iuates These waves spread with an up-and-down motion, similar to ocean waves, causing fractures perpendicular to their travel by stretching the ground. hypocenter, or focus. The waves travel faster through hard rock and more slowly through loose sediment and through water. The forces produced by these waves can be broken down into simpler wave types to study their effects. S waves are 1.7 times as slow as P waves. They travel only through solids. They cause splitting motions that do not affect liquids. Their direction of travel is ., perpendicular to the direction of travel. Different Types of Waves There are basically two types of waves: body waves and surface waves. The body waves travel inside the Earth and transmit foreshocks that have little destructive power. They are divided into primary (P) waves and secondary (S) waves. Surface waves travel only along the Earth's surface, but, because of the tremors they produce in all directions, they cause the most destruction. E> Direction of seismic waves Vibration of rock particles The ground is moved in an elliptical pattern. Typical Speed of P Waves in the Crust. The soil is moved to both sides, perpendicular to the wave's path of motion. P waves travel through all types of material, and the waves themselves move in the direction of travel. ~ > < -. o Body waves that shake the rock up and down and side to side as they move. SPEED IN DIFFERENT MATERIALS MATERIAL Granite Basalt | Limestone | Sandstone Wave speed in feet | 9,800 1,500 4,430 7,050 persecond (m/s) | (3,000) | (3,200) | (1,350) | (2,150) Epicenter The seismic station registers both waves. TRAJECTORY OF P AND S WAVES The Earth's outer core acts as a barrier to S waves, blocking them from reaching any point that forms an angle greater than 105° from the epicenter. P waves are transmitted farther through the core, but they may be diverted later on. Thus they are detected at points that form an angle of greater than 140° from the epicenter. The seismic station does not register waves. High-speed waves that travel in straight lines, compressing and stretching solids and liquids they pass through. Es The seismic station 105° SPEED IN DIFFERENT MATERIALS MATERIAL Granite | Basalt |Limestone/Sandstone| Water The ground is registers only P waves. Wi: din feet} 17,000 21,000 7,900 11,500 4,800 COINS seea andl Strceeied ea lave speed in fee’ é , f : : per second (m/s) | (5,200) | (6,400) | (2,400) | (3,500) | (1,450) Bysturns along ale pas ak Secondary (S) Waves wave propagation. 4 These waves travel LOVE WAVES These move like horizontal S waves, trapped at the surface, but they are somewhat slower and make cuts parallel to their direction. speed The soil is moved to both sides. Types of Earthquakes Although earthquakes generally cause all types of waves, some kinds of waves may predominate. This fact leads to a classification that depends on whether vertical or horizontal vibration causes the most movement. The depth of the epicenter can also affect its destructiveness. BASED ON TYPE OF MOVEMENT epi I Located near the epicenter, where the vertical component of the movement is greater than the horizontal. When a wave reaches soft soil, the horizontal movement is amplified, and the movement is said to be oscillating. BASED ON FOCUS DEPTH Earthquakes originate at points between 3 and 430 miles (5 and 700 km) underground. Ninety percent originate in the first 62 miles (100 km). Those originating between 43 & and 190 miles (70 and 300 km) are considered intermediate. Superficial earthquakes (often of higher magnitude) occur above = > that level, and deep- I focus earthquakes occur below it. ‘430 miles (700 km) 64 EARTHQUAKES OAKLAND, CALIFORNIA Latitude 37° 46' N Longitude 122° 13’ W Surface area of 156,100 square miles state (404,298 sq km) Range of Damages 68 miles (110 km) State population 36,132,147 Earthquakes per 15-20 year (>4.0) Earthquake 63 victims Magnitude on 71 Richter scale eismic of nucle be causes ase its destructi occurred whe plummeted Loma Priet =? J | ‘i THE HIGHWAY ~ te * SEISMOGRAPH READOUT Each soil type # differently to The figure same qua waves Of | in diff com fom 7) te tvs od SOCIAL Quality of construction Preparedness of the population — Time of day == =; —— Ee cao AY ss 000 tons rg es fF . . ‘Magnitude Energy ol by TNT fo agi 1 of magnitude 4 on the Richter scale is equal to the energy released by a low-power atomic bomb. DIRECT AND INDIRECT EFFECTS Direct effects are felt in the fault zone and are rarely seen at the surface. Indirect effects stem from the spread of seismic waves. In the Kobe earthquake, the fault caused a fissure in the island of Awaji up to 10 feet (3 m) deep. The indirect effects had to a with liquefaction. jie ry ihe VOLCANOES AND EARTHQUAKES 65 why 7 7 = 32 million tons 12 = 160 quadrillion tons Magnitude Energy released by TNT Magnitude Energy released by TNT The energy released by an earthquake of The energy released by a hypothetical magnitude 7 on the Richter scale, such as the earthquake of magnitude 12 on the Richter 1995 earthquake in Hyogo-Ken Nanbu, Japan, scale (the greatest known earthquake was 9.5) is equal to the energy released by a high- would be equal to the energy released if the powered thermonuclear bomb (32 megatons). Earth were to split in half. Liquefaction Seismic tremors apply a force to muddy or water-saturated soils, filling the empty spaces between grains of sand. Solid particles become suspended in the liquid, the soil loses its load-bearing capacity, and buildings sink as if the ground were quicksand. That displaces some of the water, which rises to the surface. Water Gravity liquefies the soil y | | Building The soil is compact, During the earthquake, Solid structures even though it the water causes the sink, and water contains water. solid particles to shake. rises. F 66 EARTHQUAKES VOLCANOES AND EARTHQUAKES 67 EMS 98 SCALE In use since 1998 throughout the European Union and other countries that use the protocol, including those of northern Africa. This scale describes the intensity of earthquakes in European contexts, where the most modern construction may be found side by side with ancient buildings. Earthquakes there can have widely varying effects. The scale has 12 points that combine magnitude readings with levels of destruction. Measuring an Earthquake arthquakes can be measured in terms of force, duration, and location. Many scientific instruments and comparative scales have been developed to take these measurements. Seismographs measure all three parameters. The Richter scale describes the force or intensity of an earthquake. Naturally, the destruction caused by earthquakes can be : Ve CHARLES RICHTER GIUSEPPE MERCALLI measured in many other ways: numbers of people left injured, dead, or RE eae USE OF SCALES WORLDWIDE e Z merican seismologist Italian volcanologist (1850- _ homeless, damage and reconstruction costs, government and business (1900-85) who developed 1914) who developed the expenditures, insurance costs, school days lost, and in many more ways. a a ret stale tee measuring We ears his name. intensity of an earthquake. 9 o_o Intensity Gr >< J new Glass windows The shaking is Everyone is aware Buildings are Bestruction. : objects may interior of a break. perceptible to of the earthquake. damaged. Waves are visible Soncept ot the destmucuan Gabe ey swing. building vibrates. everybody. People flee outside. Cracks form in Won the ground. aS mans the ground. Walls po > Widespread Modified Mercalli Scale The shaking is felt > “i Trees &: of their a * panic. a by people inside. shake. frames. Between 1883 and 1902, this Italian volcanologist : y developed a scale to measure the intensity of earthquakes. It originally had 10 points based on the observation of the effects of seismic activity; it was later modified to 12. The first few levels consist of barely perceptible sensations. The highest levels apply to the destruction of buildings. This scale is widely used to compare levels of damage among different regions and socioeconomic conditions. Fires break out. a... ~~ SN > = 4 = 5 ~ Richter Scale In 1935, seismologist Charles Richter designed a scale to measure the amplitude of the largest waves registered by seismographs. An important feature of this scale is that the levels increase exponentially. Each point on the scale represents 10 times the movement and 30 times the energy of the point below it. Temblors of magnitude 2 or less are not perceptible to humans. This scale is the most widely used in the world because it can be used to compare the strength of earthquakes apart from their effects. M agnitude ————)—_—_(——_ ————}.—_—_6—__()——_ B os ——$j}—- Registered Very few The tremor is Most people Some buildings May cause Unstable May cause heavy Major earthquake. Considered Causes very Very great The energy released in a seismic event. only by people feel felt. Only minor perceive the are lightly severe buildings are damage in Causes extensive a great extensive earthquake. Total seismographs. the tremor. damages. quake. damaged. damage. destroyed. populated areas. damage. earthquake. damage. destruction. 68 EARTHQUAKES VOLCANOES AND EARTHQUAKES 69 WHEN THE WAVE HITS THE COAST COMPARISON OF THE SIZE OF THE WAVE 3 3 e 10 e | | | Cas Sea level drops abnormally low. oe a Water is “sucked” away from the coast by the growing wave. 25 feet fe t g ig (8m) e e large earthquake or volcanic eruption can cause a tsunami, which (10 m) means “wave in the harbor” in Japanese. Tsunamis travel very fast, Alig nicl ae i . The giant wave forms. ypical elg > up to 500 miles per hour (800 km/h). On reaching shallow water, Ate hlohest ewiane f 6 feet a major tsunami may become nearly (8 m) can reach. they decrease in speed but increase in height. A tsunami can become a wall of water more than 33 feet (10 m) high on approaching the shore. The height depends partly on the shape of the beach and the depth of coastal waters. If the wave reaches dry land, it can inundate vast areas and cause considerable damage. A 1960 earthquake off the coast of Chile caused a tsunami that swept away communities along 500 vertical. The wave breaks along the coast. The force of the wave is released in the impact against the coast. There may be one wave or several waves. The land is flooded. The water may take several miles (800 km) of the coast of South America. Twenty-two CANT IGUAKE hours or even days to return hours later the waves reached the coast of Japan, where A movement of the ocean floor displaces they damaged coastal towns. e yen nd ei water upward. THE WAVES ARE FORMED As this mass of water drops, the water begins to vibrate. The waves, however, are barely 1.5 feet (0.5 m) high, and a boat may cross over them without the crew even noticing. How It Happens FF“ A tremor that generates vibrations (Lefl on the ocean water's surface can be caused by seismic movement on the Float seafloor. Most of the time the tremor is System of caused by the upward or downward glass spheres, movement of a block of oceanic crust that 7 Displacement of the plate. : CREST | é 7 THE WAVES ADVANCE Waves may travel thousands of miles without weakening. As the TROUCH sea becomes shallower near the moves a mass of ocean water. A volcanic i 2 coast, the waves become closer eruption, meteorite impact, or nuclear Detection device. 4 CREST together, but they grow higher. explosion can also cause a tsunami. P Located ata depth Za — of 160 — LENGTH OF THE WAVE (5,000 m). d F TSUNAMI 90% From 62 to 430 miles Movement of . (100 to 700 km) on the On reaching the coast, tectonic plates 518 miles/hour 7 open sea, measured from the waves find their path 10% (835 km/ h) crest to crest. ~ blocked. The coast, like a Other causes Speed of the tsunami ramp, diverts all the force = of the waves upward. Buildings on the coast may be damaged or destroyed. RISING PLATE ; 210 miles/hour (340 km/h) 18,000 feet ee } (5,500 m) Speed of t eee Water level rises Water level drops 3,000 feet SINKING PLATE com \ ; 31 miles per hour Between 5 and 30 (50 km / h) minutes before the , tsunami arrives, the sea Speed of the Tsunami level suddenly drops. 65 feet (20 m) Polyester: DETECTION DEVICE = The displaced water tends to level out, generating the force that causes waves. Acoustic be The tsunami passes above the BPR and activates the _ Satellite notification procedure. / f- \ f | 4 A x { ‘i L 7 5 Batteries BPR ———/ -———+ vax = | Detects am variations in the ~ The buoy sends the column of water Column satellite encoded information. Only earthquakes above this magnitude on the Richter scale can produce a tsunami strong enough to cause damage. Sensor BPR: Registers pressure on the ocean floor. : The hypothetical line shows hov Everything swept ‘ t »-far inland the tsunami reached. away by the wave e . <3: ee : : Over half a mile (1 km)-of the: was left piled up The coastline is eo) ~ Cages pt ey oe 2 Re: ‘ > tidalawaye. Eighty percent of the on the beach. Wage ct : 2 : G25). suffave-in Khao Lak's tourist aréa was destroyed. r) De - greatest number 6 “tourist deaths, The river's mouth Persons missing in i 4,49 . eere'stely \ Se 1,000-1, 4,900 feet U0 Indian Ocean . bn “= 2 ~~ VOLC NOES AND EARTHQUAKES | > oa B Ye. Le z » Ni wie , #5 : ea \ a LEGEND “@ > Most-affected areas, ” BANGLADESH | a ee Pop. 141,340,476 Pi => Plate movements at . : ry r = different speeds b Time it tookthe wave to reach the indicated: 4 dotted line. as Movement of the wave. 4s INDIA \ ¥ '_,On this.map, the number of confirmed deaths a * and the number of missing persons in each country are added together, giving an estimated total death toll. In addition, *__ | 1,600,000 persons had to be evacuated. . > Deer i Gi hn Bees ae \ " ra Duration The tremor lasted between 8 and 10 minutes, one of the longest on record. The waves took six hours to reach Africa, over 5,000 miles (8,000 km) away. Surface area 28.3 million square miles (73.4 million sq km) Percentage of Earth's surface 14% y Percentage of total volume 20% 4 of the oceans ARABIAN PLATE Length of plate boundaries 745 miles (1,200 km) (in focus) Countries affected in 2004 a } PA ; 4 ] ; : \/ 7% . ; / < A Ie 16 ls z fe $ . 3 ™ , & aes 5 tei al — SOMALIA | Ms i F F “0 4 INDIAN PLATE it % % MA ae RICA Pop. 8,863,338 ' : “ig v 289 dead ; ed ad : Zi [3 KENYA MALDIVES Pop. 34,707,817 PoP ea ldead 108 dead AFRICAN PLATE : Py , TANZANIA : { ss Pop. 37,445,392 13 dead 74. “. . ode : } ~ Indian Ocean * » 4 a 4 te / Sa. \ / ‘\ f : “™ 4 a 7:58 7, - a I Local time when the Pe 7% J7 tsunami was unleashed © © J ’ Bs, (00:58 universal time) ~* f / ; if At 7 _ , ia é 9 Aid; 7 THE VICTIMS Estimated dead j Gili ) 30 percent were children z Pop: 1.065 billion & 18,045 dead ry Vishakhapatnam) (_ ) Bangali e@ A 500 miles f per hour (800 km/h) j i Speed of the first wave Cochin y= Madras Pid . — . ‘ Palmoddaly Ge : a et Batticaloa > P Le (he : Colombo ( ) 7 7 ne ee . Matara () PACIFIC PLATE ; i SRI LANKA Pop. 19,905,165 35,322 dead ™ j 5 % Magnitude 9 Multiple aftershocks of up to magnitude 7.3. >a Undersea earthquake ~ Displacement of 50 feet (15 m) along the edge of the Indian Plate, 18 miles (30 km) below the seabed. The tsunami's advance. A seismic station in Australia detected the . seismic movement that later caused the great tsunami that struck the nearest coastlines with wav: f yf pas more than 33 feet (10 m) high. An hour and a half later, 4d | { the tsunami reached Sri Lanka and Thailand. The vf . Thetwavelenine a> tsunami had seven crests, which reached the coasts é iy Large waves are” at 20-minute intervals. By the time the tsunami - detected northwest an arrived at the coast of Africa hours later, ee. southeast pie epicenter. the waves had been greatly a diminished. oo — 4 + x 1 The wave 4 >. reaches land = 3 Ps X First'impact— nd % A 33-foot-high (10 m) _ wave destroys Banda Aceh, Indonesia, reaching 2.5 miles (4 km) inland. 76-77 84-85 82-83 76 STUDY AND PREVENTION VOLCANOES AND EARTHQUAKES 77 Risk Areas ce seismic area is found wherever there is an active fault, and these faults are very numerous throughout the world. These fractures are especially common near mountain ranges and mid-ocean ridges. Unfortunately, many population centers were built up in regions near these dangerous places, and, when an } earthquake occurs, they become disaster areas. Where the r, tectonic plates collide, the risk is even greater. e Lasted between three and five minutes and caused a tsunami responsible for Indo-Australian Pacific Ocean 122 deaths. Plate 8.3 San Francisco, 1906 Major fires Pacific contributed to a Plate the devastation of the city. Subduction A ., zone "Sal 4 PACIFIC 81 . arn PLATE es AUSTRALIAN S Mexico, 1985 PLATE Two days later ~ MARIANA TRENCH there was a 76 7 aftershock. More PACIFIC . The deepest marine trench on than 11,000 PLATE the planet, with a depth of » 35,872 feet (10,934 m) below . » sea level. It is on the western _ side of the north Pacific and ~ east of the Mariana Islands. Pacific Ocean COCOS AND* Coes CARIBBEAN PLATES = *","° Contact between these two plates is of the convergent type: ‘the Cocos” : Plate moves under the Caribbean Plate, aoe phenomenon known as © subduction. This causes a _ great number of tremors and volcanoes. Caribbean Plate Indian Ocean AUSTRALIAN PLATE Fiji Plate NEW ZEALAND FAULT A large fault that moves horizontally, crosses the lithosphere, accommodating the movement between two large crust plates; it is Pa a special type of directional plate called a transforming plate. \ Pacific Plate | ANTARCTIC PLATE people died. te Most-vulnerable regions fF They are unpredictable, and which seismic activity and a high Lefi among the most destructive population density coincide. But of natural phenomena. Earthquakes in the open country, where shake the earth. They open an earthquakes have much less effect, s, wecan conclude that it is not iawn a peaceful city into earthquakes, but bales Fee: area, ai .) that kill peopl ~ Atlantic Ocean ~ “=. NORTH AMERICAN PLATE Atlantic —* ol OR a Ocean ; a0 erinitueriinny ize ICA ~ ~- CARIBBEAN zy PLATE arin U7] nytt 7 SOUTH AMERICAN PLATE , Chile, 1960 ; The most powerful © earthquake ever registered: 5,700. - South people died and ~ American two million were = Plate left homeless. RE So i Hi ANTARCTIC SCOTIA ve PLATE W PLATE a U7) eM nnwinnim COT 7 Min ~~ formed the Red Sea, whic ‘% EURASIAN PLATE Lisbon, Portugal, 1755 More than 60,000 people died, anda tsunami followed the earthquake. Iran, 199 f More than 60,006 Indian AFRICAN Ocean AND ARABIAN PLATES The African Plate incl part of the Atlantic, — Indian, and Antarctic — oceans. To the north if borders with the Avail an Plate. When these two plates separated, they — KEY Pa! an 4444 Convergent boundary and direction | Oceanic fault is still widening. \. MID-OCEAN RIDGE A submarine mountain range tun Transform fault formed by the displacement ‘ 3 Movement and of tectonic plates, these are direction of the active formations. These oceanic fault mountain systems are the Movement and longest in the world. direction of fault Epicenter Important - earthquake ps te e EL] Seismic area mM ANTARCTIC PLATE Disaster area me Thin, HOW MN, Ae NWN 78 STUDY AND PREVENTION VOLCANOES AND EARTHQUAKES 79 Precision Instruments he destructive potential of earthquakes gave rise to the need to study, measure, and record them. Earthquake records, called “seismograms,” are produced by instruments called “seismographs,” which basically capture the oscillations of a mass and transform them into signals that can be measured and recorded. An earthquake is usually analyzed by means of three seismographs, each oriented in a unique direction at a given location. In this way one seismograph detects the vibrations produced from north to south, another records those from east to west, and a third detects vertical vibrations, those that go up and down. With these three l fe) QC STUDY AND PREVENTION Continuous Movement umankind has tried throughout history to find a way to predict earthquakes. Today, this is done through the installation of seismic observatories and of various field instruments that gather information and compare it to the data sent by scientists from other locations. Based on these records, it is possible to evaluate the chances that a great earthquake is developing and act accordingly. @ Fl Seismologists place LLa@ instruments at fault lines in earthquake-prone areas. Later, at the seismologic observatory, the information taken by field instruments is compiled, and any __ significant change is noted. If anything suggests that an = earthquake is about to take _ : place, emergency services/are alerted. Most of these” instruments are auto they send digit the telephone REGISTER TRANSMITTER SEISMOMETER } Registers ground vibrations, their LITHOSPHERE ~~ ds amplitude, and the direction in which they are produced. A seismometer can detect even the smallest tremor. Some, such as those pictured here, are powered by solar energy. SEISMOMETER Placement of the Seismometer The movement of the sensor mechanism, located under the ground, is converted into electric signals that are transmitted either to the recording module located on the surface or to computers. GPS The global positioning system (GPS) receiver picks up signals from the satellites and transmits them to the observatories. Because these signals register the receivers' exact locations, a change in their position over time indicates a movement in the crust. Seismologic Networks © Installing complex detection systems Le would not be of much use if the systems worked in an isolated manner and were not able to share the information they generated. There are national and international seismologic networks that, by means of communications technology, send their observations to other areas that might be affected. = ~ MAGNETOMETER The magnetic field of the Earth changes when the tensions between rocks vary. Therefore, a change in magnetism can indicate tectonic movement. The magnetometer can distinguish between these changes and those that are more general. NETWORK OF NETWORKS Findings in an area can have repercussions at a great distance. The immediate availability of data allows for linked work. LEVELED GROUND VOLCANOES AND EARTHQUAKES SATELLITES Some are used by the GPS systems, but others are critical because they take photographs with extreme accuracy, and they are thus able to record indicators that can be communicated quickly LABORATORY Networking at the research centers allows for the comparison to the base. Placement of a Creep Meter To measure the relative movement between the ends, two posts are fixed, one at each side of the fault, 6 feet (2 m) under the ground, or over the concrete base, at a fixed angle (but not at a right angle). of data and provides a global vision that broadens the predictive power of science. CREEP METER Measures the movement between earthquakes or time interval between the two boundaries of a fault. It includes a tension system with a calibrated mechanism. Any movement between the ends alters the magnetic field. Earthquakes cannot be predicted oe For a prediction system to be acceptable, it must be accurate and trustworthy. Therefore, it must have a small level of uncertainty regarding location and the timing, and it must minimize errors and false alarms. The cost of evacuating thousands of people, of providing lodging for them, and of making up for their loss of time and work for a false alarm would be unrecoverable. At this time there is no trustworthy method for predicting earthquakes. 82 STUDY AND PREVENTION VOLCANOES AND EARTHQUAKES 83 Stable Buildings | n cities located in seismic areas, buildings must be designed and constructed with an earthquake-resistant structure that can adequately withstand the movements La caused by an earthquake. Foundations are built with damping so that they can pe aay bs absorb the force of the seismic movement. Other buildings have a large metallic pe atry Sh axis, around which the stories of the building can oscillate without falling. ‘ euaury : Th Currently the amount of knowledge on the effect of earthquakes on structures, : a oar RO as well as knowledge on the behavior of different materials, allows for the ie Tao OS construction of less-vulnerable buildings. e@ ge sin ; ON io |} a ; | a | , Die 3S , 4 je ROPPONGI == Why Pagodas in Japan ay tokyo, JAPAN Do Not Fall gs ewer ' ay Latitude 36° N fl Japanese pagodas have survived centuries of j oar { _ Longitude 140° E (Lefl earthquakes. They are five stories tall, and higher sections i Ay —— of the building are smaller than lower parts. The pagodas are ae 4a . Covered area 4,089,930 square held up by a central pillar that acts as the only support for the f TL : Su feet (380.105 sq m) building. During a quake, each floor balances independently, . yi Stories 54 (+6 underground) without transmitting the oscillating gy je ear : al : force to the other floors. [ BO Width 275 feet (84 m) r ja Weer ay ' al Height 780 feet (238 m) i ewer ay aj oft S0- th) @— couu oor ' oma Fourth floor . 2A Se SANJU Swaying Principle jy er ' Ar = ) Third floor Each floor also has a symmetric pe er ay ' Mm structure. During an earthquake, | the ends cto me eae act jw ray : as a counterbalance to achieve [I SS NIJU equilibrium. ' = om cu Second floor ; ' tI ROPPONGI HILLS TOWER | = ; : , » a ee Se aT | = First floor tvs aad Leth re ) F ) i shape. The tower is formed by a massive central framework Pp SHINBASIRA and a lightweight and flexible Central pillar exterior framework. i Earthquake-Resistant Architecture There are many ways to design an earthquake- simulators are used to test materials and study the Lea resistant structure: the distribution of walls, the forces that act on them. A building's true earthquake ; joints between beams and columns, and geometric resistance, though, can be proven only when it has been simplicity. There are also earthquake simulators, large built and has survived actual earthquakes. platforms that shake a structure to test it. The STRUCTURE AVOIDANCE OF OFF-CENTER JOINTS To avoid imbalances, the upper elements of a structure must be Tf the beam remains still when the wall moves, the joint breaks. located over only a few axes, without any isolated vertical segments. Forces spread out over an axis with flexible material. ) COOO®@ Suspension System IR So that a building will suffer only small Le oscillations during an earthquake, it is isolated and built in a large trench, separated by special devices. In addition, because the higher floors move more than the lower ones, mechanical dampers are emplaced diagonally so as to be more highly tensioned on top than on the bottom. This makes the structure as a whole more flexible, but it also offers resistance to sudden variations. Strong rocking Slight rocking Conventional earthquake- resistant structure Active ? controller (mass-damping system) BASE ISOLATION — A system made of steel disks, interspersed with plates made ofa soft 1 material, softens the transmission of seismic movements from the ground to the building. Active controller (tension system) | ‘ Plates 0.12 inch (3 mm) Main computer Lead thick alternate with core COLUMNS An example of a building that shows simplicity in its geometric design and, therefore, in its behavior. Sensor THE INTELLIGENT BUILDING When an earthquake is detected, a computer-controlled system provides variable compression to the dampers, which absorb the movements according to the height of the floor and the intensity of the vibrations. 6 STORIES 84 STUDY AND PREVENTION VOLCANOES AND EARTHQUAKES 85 On (guar d AT THE OFFICE IN PUBLIC PLACES Offices are usually located in areas conducive to bringing large groups of When you are outside, it is important to keep away from tall buildings, light poles, and other people together. Thus it is recommended that you remain where you are objects that could fall. The safest course of action is to head to a park or other open space. If - - . F and not rush to the exits. When people panic, there is a greater probability the earthquake takes you by surprise while you are driving, stop and remain in the car, but make hen the earth shakes, nothi ng can stop it. Disaster seems inevitable, of their being crushed by a crowd than by a building, especially in buildings sure you are not close to any bridges. but, though it is inevitable, much can be done to diminish the extent Se ee ee of the catastrophe. Residents of earthquake-prone areas 1 H . . Mark escape routes and Know where emergency equipment, have incorporated a series of preventive measures to avoid keep them free of such as fire extinguishers, hoses, Head toward open spaces such as squares and parks, and move away from any Do not approach the coastline because of the trees to the extent possible. possibility of a tsunami. Also avoid rivers, which could develop strong currents. obstacles. and axes, is located. being surprised and to help them act appropriately at home, at the office, or outdoors. These are basic rules of behavior that will help you survive. Seek ie under a table or desk to avoid being hurt by falling objects. Prevention During an earthquake Tf you live in an earthquake- As soon as you feel the earth under your prone area, familiarize yourself feet begin to move, look for a safe place, } with the emergency plans for the such as beneath a doorframe or under a table, to ie Follow the community where you live, plan how take cover. If you happen to be ona street, head ‘ instructions of civil your family will behave in the event of to an open space such as a square or park. It is 1 defense officers. an earthquake, know first aid, and know important to remain calm and to not be ") how to extinguish fires. influenced by people who panic. * Do not use FIRST-AID KIT AT HOME elevators: the It is essential that the home rare 4 might be built following regulations eAcuUCy for earthquake-resistant Keep a first-aid kit, and keep your vaccinations Objects that could fall because of up to date. construction and that movement should |be someone be in charge of attached to the wall. shutting off the electricity and LIGHTS gas supplies. In case of evacuation, lighting, flashlights, a stairs are the safest is : 2 place, but they could transistor radio, and Recome filled with ; batteries on hand. j : people. . i Fixing breaks in Have emergency water and gas lines . a) , It is good to designate isla DHOng. SECURING ’ . a leader who can guide others. Form a human OBJECTS ; ( Toxic or chain to prevent Secure heavy objects H flammable getting lost and to such as furniture, * materials must prevent accidents. shelves, and gas not be in danger appliances to the wall of spilling. or to the floor. BREAKERS Have a breaker eg Once the earthquake ends, rescue tasks must begin. At this stage it is installed, and know imperative to determine whether anyone is injured and to apply first aid. Do TE erehe ! re > \ Dg ee Wek ‘l not move injured people who have fractures, and do not drink water from open ¥ ea matcnes or Tlames: a gas supply. “age ® Snot use flashlights. containers. ; RESCUERS DOGS TRANSPORTATION FOOD AND The first priority after Specially trained animals It is important to keep WATER an earthquake is to with protective helmets access routes to affected Store drinking search for survivors.. and masks can search for areas open to ensure entry water and people under the rubble. by emergency teams. nonperishable food. iy FIRST AID he Learn first aid, and 1) participate in . and utility poles). Do not leave i < v \ Vs community your car unless it becomes ni y if ‘ earthquake-response necessary to do so. YAS Tf you are in a vehicle, stop in the safest place possible (away from large buildings, bridges, f ) YY, i mace ee ( YY e<————] 86 STUDY AND PREVENTION san Francisco in Flames he earthquake that shook San Francisco on April 18, 1906, was a major event: in only a few seconds, a large part of one of the most vital cities of the United States was reduced to rubble. Suddenly, centuries of pent-up energy was released when the earthquake, measuring 8.3 on the Richter scale, devastated the city. Though the earthquake destroyed many buildings, the worst damage was caused by the fires that destroyed the city in the course of three days, forcing people to flee their homes. @ EVERYTHING STARTED LIKE THIS. On April 18, 1906, at 5:12 a.m., the Pacific Plate experienced movement of approximately 19 feet (6 m) along its 267- mile (430-km) length along the northern San Andreas fault. The earthquake's epicenter lay 39 miles (64 km) north of ?, reduced to rubble. t las GAS LIGHTING. ae ‘ Gas lighting was one of the signs of ead progress that gave prominence to the city. ra a wy 4 ~~ — es San Francisco. In seconds, the earth began to move, and the majority of the city's buildings collapsed. The trolleys and carriages that were moving through the cobblestoned streets of the city were CITY HALL The facade was crowned by a dome that was supported by a system of columns on a steel structure. It was considered one of the city's most beautiful buildings. a ‘ AY} heca « |} . i ae . a4 ; 5 ge pei 7 Rept e.- . fi? (0008 ‘oe rf tg N a me ie — or <> i History of City Hall (©) Until the earthquake struck, City Hall had been the seat of city government {L«@ and the symbol of the city. Built in the second half of the 19th century, it represented a time of accelerated growth, powered by the gold riches of the state of California. Construction began on Feb. 22, 1870, and ended 27 years later, after many revisions to architect Auguste Laver's original project. While it stood, City Hall was said to have been constructed with bricks held together with corruption, typical of a time of easy money and weak institutions. The total cost of the work rose to a little more than $6,000,000 of that time, and, according to current calculations, it is estimated that it was prepared to withstand an earthquake up to a magnitude of 6.6. Only the dome and the metal structure were left standing. — The remnants of the building were demolished in 1909. . THE FACE OF THE BUILDING COLLAPSED. The facade collapsed completely THE EARTHQUAKE AN Not only was the earthquake extremely violent, but it oscillated in every direction for 40 seconds. People left their houses and ran down the streets, completely stunned and blinded by fear. Many buildings split f on top of the rotunda at its base. ~~ open, and others became piles of rubble. A post office employee related that “The walls were thrown into the middle of the rooms, destroying the furniture and covering everything with dust.” VOLCANOES AND EARTHQUAKES 87 Surface area Population UNITED STATES SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA Latitude 42° 40'N Longitude 122° 18' W 46 square miles (120 sq km) 739,426 Population density 16,000 people per square mile (6,200 people/sq km) Perceptible earthquakes. 100 - 150 felt annually Total earthquakes per year ad — Se ~ 10,000 April 20 THE GREAT FIRE Two days later, what had begun as a localized fire had become an inferno that consumed the city. There were mass evacuations of people to distant areas, while the army dynamited some buildings. Firefighters had to control the i ng |Seawate se e yt a St % : : = wii ‘ 2 ' REBUILDING The city reemerged from the ashes, powered by its wealth and economic importance. Losses are estimated to have reached, $5,000,000,000 in present-day‘dollars, and, until Hurricane Katrina struck.in 2005, the 1906 earthquake was the greatest natural disaster the United States had experienced. Sree Here 88 STUDY AND PREVENTION VOLCANOES AND EARTHQUAKES 39 Clearing the Rubble Three Days of Fire The fire began in the During the third day, the It is calculated that some 3,000 people died rubble in the bay, forming new land, which is today The great fire that followed the earthquake Market Street area, fire swept through in the 1906 catastrophe, trapped in their known as the Marina District. Little by little, traffic expanded quickly. Firefighters, in a desperate south of the city in the Chinatown and North destroyed homes or burned by the fire the resumed in the major streets, and the trolley system attempt to block the spread of the fire, used explosives to worker's district, where Beach, causing heavy earthquake started. In the following weeks, the was reestablished. Six weeks after the earthquake, make firebreaks because there was no water supply many houses were made damage to the Victorian of wood. homes on North Beach hill. available. The army evacuated the area, and people could not take anything with them. During the three days when the city burned, it is speculated that many homeowners army, firefighters, and other workers deposited the banks and stores opened for business. On the second day, the burned their houses that had been partially destroyed by fire spread west. About the earthquake, in order to be able to collect insurance 300,000 people were : u i ted f Spek Once the fire was money. Other things that contributed to the fire were the ee rom the bay extinguished, Russian Hill intentional explosions that, at first badly implemented, spread the fire. By the fourth day, the center of the city was reduced to ashes. and Telegraph Hill (shown as white spots) were still intact, as was the port. The army set up kitchens in the camps. There was always food in these field kitchens, and there was even Workers pose a free ration of tobacco for every person. A while they : demolish a house. The army set up field camps in the parks to house those who had lost everything. Months later, the government built temporary homes See for about 20,000 people. \ “| | ‘ | Army tents to house refugees. By Saturday, April 21, some 300 plumbers had entered the city to reestablish services, mainly the water system. During the following weeks, thousands of workers tore down unstable buildings, prepared the streets for traffic, and cleared the city of rubble. Nearly 15,000 horses were used to haul rubble. The firefighters tried to extinguish the fire. This panoramic photograph shows sede wu Cao a ae are still standing, despite the 1906 earthquake -_———— MERCHANT EXCHANGE MILLS BUILDING The darnaije calculated: tn have heer eased oy tee city. Despite the destruction, many buildings were left standing. CHINATOWN and the tremors that passed through the city Built in 1903, it remained standing This building in the great earthquake. Many of these buildings, such as Was completely afterward. and was later refurbished. boca bei had been City Hall, were famous for their lavish architecture. uilt in . - destroyed by the fire. be" ° SAINT MARY'S CHURCH 90 STUDY AND PREVENTION Historic Earthquakes he Earth is alive. It moves, it shifts, it crashes and quakes, and it has done so since its origin. Earthquakes vary from a soft vibration to violent and terrorizing movements. Many earthquakes have gone down in history as the worst natural catastrophes ever survived by humanity. Lisbon, Portugal, 1755; Valdivia, Chile, 1960; and Kashmir, Pakistan, 2005, are only three examples of the physical, material, and emotional devastation in which an earthquake can leave a population. e 1995 KOBE, JAPAN : & Magnitude 6.8 (Richter) AN INFERNO The great earthquake of Hanshin that occurred on Jan. 17, 1995, in Kobe, a Japanese port, left behind more than 6,000 dead, 38,000 injured, and 319,000 people who had to be housed in more than Fatalities _ 6,433 1,200 emergency shelters. The $100 billion Nagata District was one of the hardest-hit areas. Almost 80 percent of the victims died because the old wooden homes crumbled in the generalized fires that followed the earthquake. m Ais a 3 ae . AFTER THE HORROR. The world was shaken, looking at. = the horrendous-images of how: | in all directions. This radiation occurs as a : Le i ~- emits solar j | The Earth's P The auroras are more duration of the flow of charged particles or plasma, which j ; a winds, which | magnetosphere is ; noticeable near the poles; phenomenon consists mainly of electrons and protons. The ‘SOLAR WIND sd cause serious : * responsible for they are called aurora plasma particles are guided by the magnetic ~ damage and an | J protecting the borealis in the Northern The amount of light emitted field of the Sun and form the solar wind, which 1, . 7 increase in | a planet from the Hemisphere and aurora oscillates between 1 and 10 million travels through space at some 275 miles per ; - - : ————— temperature. 7 : : O deadly and harmful australis in the Southern megawatts, equivalent to the second (450 km/s). Particles from the solar ———— 7 a solar winds. Hemisphere. energy produced by 1,000 to wind arrive at the Earth within four or five days. oe MAGNETOTAIL i. a i OVAL AURORA 10,000 large electric power plants. surface Factors mong meteorological phenomena, rain plays a very important role in the life of humans. Its scarcity causes serious problems, such as droughts, lack of food, and an increase in infant mortality. It is clear that an excess of water, caused by overabundant rain or the effects of gigantic waves, is also cause for alarm and concern. In VIETNAM, DECEMBER 1991 LIVING WATER MONSOONS The intense monsoon rains cased severe flooding in vast OCEAN CURRENTS GOOD FORTUNE AND CATASTROPHE regions of Cambodia, Vietnam, AN OBSTACLE COURSE THE ARRIVAL OF EL NINO Laos, and Thailand. THE LAND AND THE OCEAN THE EFFECTS OF EL NINO stole ie e< a 4 : fe, oa, oe Put uch ee ree . Southwest Asia, there are frequent typhoons and torrential rains during which millions of people lose their houses and must be relocated to more secure areas; however, they still run the risk of catching contagious diseases such as malaria. The warm current of El Nino also affects the lives and the economy of millions of people. 20 SURFACE FACTORS Living Water he water in the oceans, rivers, clouds, and rain is in constant motion. Surface water evaporates, water in the clouds precipitates, and this precipitation runs along and seeps into the Earth. Nonetheless, the total amount of water on the planet does not change. The circulation and conservation of water is driven by the hydrologic, or water, cycle. This cycle begins with evaporation of water from the Earth's surface. The water vapor humidifies as the air rises. The water vapor in the air cools and condenses onto solid particles as microdroplets. The microdroplets combine to form clouds. When the droplets become large enough, they begin to fall back to Earth, and, depending on the temperature of the atmosphere, they return to the ground as rain, snow, or hail. EVAPORATION Thanks to the effects of the Sun, ocean water is warmed and fills the air with water vapor. Evaporation from humid soil and vegetation increases humidity. The result is the formation of clouds. GASEOUS STATE The rays of the Sun increase the motion of atmospheric gases. The combination of heat and wind transforms liquid water into water vapor. a oe - »@ Pr] - s f Allthe ——i— ° molecules * « of water are Fd * freed. F * TRANSPIRATION Perspiration is a natural process that regulates body temperature. When the body temperature rises, the sweat glands are stimulated, causing perspiration. CONTRIBUTION OF LIVING BEINGS, ESPECIALLY PLANTS, TO O THE WATER THE HUMAN IN THE BODY IS O ATMOSPHERE 65% WATER. The water vapor 3 escapes via micropores in the leaves' surface. The water ascends i | l I _ via the stem. =, = Oe“ ‘ | The root DISCHARGE AREA cE F | absorbs water. = Root cells o_o CONDENSATION In order for water vapor to condense and form clouds, the air must contain condensation nuclei, which allow the molecules of water to form microdroplets. For condensation to occur, the water must be cooled. FORMATION OF DROPLETS The molecules of water vapor decrease their a J mobility and begin r to collect on F - ad * e . solid particles suspended ? in the air. pice # F * g ® ». ‘ * 2. 2% * ' e é “ CLOUDS RETURN TO THE OCEAN The waters return to the ocean, completing the cycle, which can take days for surface waters and years for underground waters. WATER AVAILABILITY (cubic feet [cu m] per capita/year) Less than 60,000 cu ft Noi ~ Europe 5 A (1,700 cu m) 60,000-175,000 cu ft (1,700-5,000 cu m) @ More than 175,000 cu ft (5,000 cu m) foe Atlantic Ocean Access to potable water Less than 50% of the South population America PRECIPITATION The wind carries the clouds toward the continent. When the humid air cools, it condenses and falls as rain, snow, or hail. (2 oe * Pe Og i OF WATER FALL EACH DAY IN 2? THE FORM OF PRECIPITATION. rt RAIN UNDERGROUND CIRCULATION There are two kinds, both of which are gravity driven. The first occurs in a shallow zone, in karstic rock such as limestone, and consists of a downward flow. The second occurs in aquifers, where interstitial water fills up the pores of a rock. Asia Pacific Ocean Africa Indian , Ocean Z Oceania LIQUID STATE A rise in temperature increases the kinetic energy of the molecules, which breaks the hydrogen bonds. Some of the molecules are set free. The majority of ‘- # © them remain ~ ‘LAYERS 300 years THE AVERAGE LENGTH OF TIME THAT A WATER MOLECULE REMAINS IN THE UNDERGROUND AQUIFERS WEATHER AND CLIMATE 21 WHERE IT IS FOUND ~—- FRESHWATER : A small percentage is 3 % freshwater; most of it is salt water. Lakes 0.029% FRESHWATER Underground : water = 0.03% = Atmosphere 1% water on 0.001% 1 the surface Rivers a and in the 2% atmosphere 0.00015% i. # s- F e Lo SOLID STATE F F The molecules have very little ____~ mobility because of the great e o number of bonds they establish rd . rl “ee with hydrogen atoms. They * # form snow crystals. - des, ERMEABLE..— RUNOFF Water in liquid form runs off the surface of the terrain via rivers and valleys. In climates that are not especially dry, this cubic phenomenon is the principal . geologic agent of erosion and miles transport. Runoff is reduced OF WATER CIRCULATE IN THE during times of drought. TERRESTRIAL HYDROSPHERE. 22 SURFACE FACTORS %. Alaska curtia curre’s Ocean Currents _ cean water moves as waves, tides, and currents. There are two types of currents: surface and deep. The surface currents, caused by the wind, are great rivers in the ocean. They can be some 50 miles (80 km) wide. They have a profound effect on the world climate because the water warms up near the Equator, and currents transfer this heat to higher latitudes. } i 5 Deep currents are caused by differences in water density.e q ~ oe : . 4 SUBPOLAR ARCTIC CIRCULATING SYSTEM For the last five decades, these currents have been shown to be undergoing dramatic changes. | 4 Pacific Ocean = : ia % Atlantic © & Ocean a ’ hel THE INFLUENCE OF THE WINDS TIDES AND THE CORIOLIS EFFECT The Coriolis effect, which influences the direction of the winds, drives the displacement of marine currents. GEOSTROPHIC BALANCE The deflection caused by the Coriolis effect on the currents is compensated for by pressure gradients between cyclonic and anticyclonic systems. This effect is called geostrophic balance. lo, etth E, quatorial Countercurrent “Tt Equatorial Countercurrent_ ‘urrent South Equatorial ¢4atorial Current |] ( , Core cigh pressure Low pressure c cs Subtropical high: Subpolar low pressure orce ___s pressure center —_ = a Pressure gradient Atlantic antic Ocean an Indian Winds Ocean , — = Pacific Ocean Currents in the In the Southern Northern Hemisphere, the Hemisphere travel currents travel ina in a clockwise counterclockwise direction. direction. —p Warm current ——p Cold current HOW CURRENTS ARE FORMED Wind and solar In the Southern energy produce Hemisphere, coastal winds e This slow ascent of deep water is called a surge. This DEEP CURRENTS a mRTAGe Currents push away the surface @ motion is modified by the L { water so that cold water Ekman spiral effect. i i i iat hotwatee bee Xo P have a vital function of carrying oxygen to deep water. This permits Warm surface EKIMAN SPIRAL life to exist in deep water. waters explains why the a Subsurface surface currents and is waters deep currents are Near Greenland, the North Atlantic water sinks, and the colder and more saline water is pushed southward. occupy the space left by the motion of the surface waters. opposite in direction. Wind energy is transferred to the water in friction layers. Thus, the velocity of the surface water increases more than that of the deep water. The Coriolis effect causes the direction of the currents to deviate. The surface currents travel in the opposite Deep cold direction of the deep water currents. 64° F (18 °C) 61° F (16 °C) 57° F (14 °C) 54° F (12 °C) Ocean conveyor belt Warm Cold WEATHER AND CLIMATE 23 THE FOUR SEASONS OF A LAKE Because of the physical properties of water, lakes and lagoons have a special seasonal circulation that ensures the survival of living creatures. SUMMER Stable summer temperatures prevent vertical circulation in the body of water of the lagoon. Summer stratification Fahrenheit Tr? 15° 64° 55° 46° 43° 41° AUTUMN Temperature decrease and temperature variations generate a mixing of the surface and deep waters. od Autumn mixture 41° as 46° | ais WINTER When the water reaches 39° F (4° C), its density increases. That is how strata of solid water on the surface and liquid water underneath are created. 2° * Winter mixture 5° 37 ° SPRING The characteristics of water once again initiate vertical circulation in the lake. Spring temperatures lead to this circulation. Spring mix 24 SURFACE FACTORS WEATHER AND CLIMATE 25 ¥ Tundra. Its rate of growth is slow and only during the MAJOR Rocky P VEGETATION oe summer. MOUNTAIN RANGES VU" jake TO ne, _—__, (4,000) Taiga. The vegetation is 1 Alps 4 F . ' ; 4 . Ps Mountain Elevation T = . conifer forest. he mountains are geographical features with a great influence on climate. Winds laden with Everest «29,035 feet g.8som _Himalayas si —_— ist llid ith th rtical obstacl dh to ri their sl t Aconcagua 22,834 feet (6,960 m) pe bpalachians ; (3,000) Mixed forest. Made up of moisture coilide wl ese vertical obstacies an ave to rise up their Slopes to pass over fate paw : ae ‘ Peres trees and conifers ; Es e : om ‘ aulagiri i eet (8,167 m : them. During the ascent, the air discharges water in the form of precipitation on the Makau 27766 feet (BAGS tm) j _——— ti . . . . . . 1 y Chaparral. Brush with windward sides, which are humid and have dense vegetation. The air that reaches the leeward Nanga Parbat 26,660 feet (8,126 m) _ Fe nc dry leaves | Pi d d th ta ti Tl . ts f . | d Kanchenjunga 28,169 feet (8,586 m) / 3.000 de AR ee slopes Is ary, an e vege 10n Usually CONSISTS OT Sparse grazing land. Ojos del Salado 22,614 feet (6,893 m) oe fi Baas : Grazing. Thickets Kilimanjaro 19,340 feet (5,895 m) ‘ “ predominate: low, perennial 0 feet (0 m) grazing plants with an herbaceous appearance. The Effect of the Andes Mou ntains a Western slopes Eastern slopes ch SNOW RAIN DESCENDING receive most of the moisture, which The rays of the Sun fall directly upon HUMID WINDS ASCENT AND CONDENSATION PRECIPITATION ae © Drops of super- The microdroplets WIND pea se abt LEN tsa ha bes! a beta Hh arid. In the mountains, the predominant Condensation occurs when a mass of air cools A natural barrier forces the "a ere ia i elie tt 1 and A natural se g p winds are moisture-laden and blow in until it reaches the saturation point (relative air to ascend and cool. The a oun ia eee neeat s barrier forces the direction of the coastal mountains. humidity 100 percent). The dew point rises when result is cloud formation 0 the air to the air becomes saturated as it cools and the and precipitation. et, ok When they fall, descend and pressure is held constant. The crystals i these drops collide warm up. IN THE CLOUD grow in size. with smaller ones. Temperature (in °F [°C]) Composition Successive Height in Moist adiabatic While they are collisions increase feet (m) 18° F gradient -40 to -4 (-40 to =20) Ice crystals falling, they combine the size of the 1816 ee 68°C) The temperature with other crystals. drops. (5,000) (O08 C) for every ~4 to 14 Gag 10) Fe j! HOW OBSTACLES WORK HIGH LEVEL OF 300 feet (100 m). we of % POLLUTIONIN =— . : re, Obstacles, such as buildings, FRONT VIEW Rotational flow SANTIAGO Dew point, or 14 to 32 (-10 to 0) ae wes Sf. / trees, and rock formations, This drawing shows the coast and the Andes near Santiago, Chile, at Uspallata Pass. Partly because it is the most urbanized and industrialized city of Chile, the capital, Santiago, faces serious pollution problems. In addition, it is located ina valley with characteristics that do not help disperse the pollution produced by vehicles and factories. Vifia del Mar n = — . decrease the velocity of the y wind significantly and often Greater than 32 (0) Drops of Dry adiabatic ¥ create turbulence around them. (12° € gradient . wale a ; y 6,500 |--- Hr ---F= j The temperature ‘ : i (2,000) declines 1.8° F % ‘ a. : _ yy a (1° C) every 300 * peal : as ~~ = a ; j 3,000 feet (100 m). 7 * At eal f (1,000) a f PLAN VIEW Flow and counterflow be = ‘ANDES MOUNTAIN RANGE Santiago, haS altitudes greater than ~~ Chile EE) eS / 29 Tt runs parallel to the Pacific Océan ; a =, | from Panama to southern Argentina. TYPES OF It is 4,500 miles (7,240 km) long and 150 miles (241 km) wide: OROGRAPHICAL EFFECTS DRY HUMIDS Area affected by Winds Winds precipitation “ ul VERY HIGH The most humid area is UNEVEN ; INTERMEDIATE This is produced on halfway up the slope, MOUNTAINSIDE COASTAL” Se DEPRESSION F mountains above on the windward side. The most humid MOUNTAIN RANGE : 16,400 feet (5,000 m) area is at the top of in height. the leeward slope. CLASSIC SCHEME The more humid zone —— is at the top. 26 SURFACE FACTORS WEATHER AND CLIMATE 27 WINDS OF THE MOUNTAINS Isotherms in a typical city CONTINENTALITY Daily variation of temperatures AND VALLEYS HEAT ISLANDS : = in the United States Cities are complex surfaces. Concrete 8l°F ar F In the interior of a landmass, The Sun heats the soil The air is cooled as it ascends, and asphalt absorb a large quantity of 82°F 82°F there is a wide variation of of the valley and the becomes more dense, and heat during sunny days and release it berg oar daily temperatures, while on e C ean. surrounding air, which descends. Then it heats up during the night. He ar the coasts, the influence of ascends by convection. again and repeats the cycle. +he ocean reduces this bale tae a SOT e tees variation. This continentality . H + ffect is quite noticeable i emperature distribution and, VALLEY i) thie United States, Rucsla above all, temperature RECENT SNOW India, and Australia. differences very much depend Continentality index on the distribution of land and water k= = surface. Differences in specific heat = ENERGY ; Less More moderate the temperatures of regions WET SAND WATER (WHEN THE SUN IS HIGH) close to great masses of water. Water They absorb a significant i amount of heat but remain cool COASTAL BREEZES absorbs heat and releases it more because much energy is used slowly than the land does, which is LIGHT CLOUDS FORESTS to evaporate the moisture. ON THE LAND why a body of water can heat or cool the environment. Its influence is unmistakable. Moreover, these differences between the land and the sea are the cause of the coastal winds. In clear weather, the land heats up during the day, which causes the air to rise rapidly and form a low-pressure zone. This zone draws marine breezes. @ ag ta —_— MEADOWS Cold air currents descend from the mountainside toward the floor of the valley, which is still hot. The air currents are heated and ascend by convection. When they rise, they cool and once again descend along the mountainside. MOUNTAINSIDE MOUNTAIN WINDS Chinook WINDS These winds are dry and warm, sometimes quite hot, occurring in various places of the world. In the western United States, they are called chinooks and are capable = eae VALLEY of making snow disappear within minutes. Humid winds are lifted over the slopes, creating clouds and precipitation on the windward side. These are called anabatic winds. The dry and cool wind descends down the mountain slope on the leeward side. It is called katabatic. = LEEWARD The air tends to descend in forested and rural areas. During the night, the city slowly releases heat that was absorbed during the day. | Nighy ~~" pp ay WINDWARD WARM AIR WHIRLWINDS Intense heat on the plains can generate a hot, spiral- formed column of air sometimes more than 300 feet (100 m) high. Winds Characteristics Location Autan wind — Dry and mild Southwestern France 1 Strong, high-speed winds move on A powerful air Berg Dry and warm South Africa top of weaker winds and cause the current lifts the Bora Dry and cold Northeastern Italy intermediate air to be displaced like spiral. Brickfielder Dry and hot Australia a pencil on a table. Buran Dry and cold Mongolia _ Harmattan Dry and cool North Africa _ Levant Humid and mild Mediterranean region q Mistral Dry and cold Rhéne valley \ SantaAna Dry and hot Southern California STRONG WIND f : Sirocco Dry and hot Southern Europe and North Africa : ri — _ Tramontana Dry and cold Northeast Spain rt ‘ Zonda Dry and mild Western Argentina i - WARM-AIR COLD-AIR \ ————— FLOW FLOW : - ie During the day, the land heats up more rapidly than the ocean. The warm air rises and is replaced by cooler air coming from the sea. Factories and vehicles emit large amounts of heat into the atmosphere. LAND Because it is opaque, the heat stays in the surface layers, which are heated and cooled rapidly. fe es, “WARM | | AIR | ho PT, IN THE OCEAN From the coast, the ocean receives air that loses its heat near the water. As a result, the colder air descends toward the sea. The heat penetrates into deeper layers thanks to the transparency of the water. A part of the heat is lost in evaporation of the water. ON THE LAND During the evening, the land radiates away its heat more rapidly than the water. The difference in pressure generated replaces the cold air of the coast with warm air. The flows tend toward equilibrium. When night falls, the land, which was hot, | cools rapidly. LAND IN THE OCEAN The loss of heat from the water is slower. When night falls, the water is lukewarm (barely a degree more than the land). 28 SURFACE FACTORS ONSOONS H The land is cold, so near the ground the breeze blows toward the ocean. The sea is a little warmer than the land; therefore, the humid air rises. The cool air colliding with it causes clouds and rain. WEATHER AND CLIMATE 29 The Earth is hot, and therefore the air rises and is replaced in the lower layers by cool breezes that blow in from the sea. The The sea is cold because the rays of the Sun heat up the water more slowly than the land. The cool air from the ne Strong Aum wince ge Ustaly are a oeeitoen _ | oe the tropical zone are called monsoons, an End of the Beginning of Cold and Cold and Cyclone Anticyclone ip. the continent. that are warmer. Arabic word meaning “seasonal winds.” NDE ee eRe Ge Aer ER een Atte ae During summer in the Northern Hemisphere, they incidence of blow across Southeast Asia, especially the Indian "| Weraerndree Mice a7 Oem pee a peninsula. Conditions change in the winter, and the z ne in ral and oa ae begin to drop. : winds reverse and shift toward the northern MPurter Re gits tp thiesParsbeett hens plier: ~- regions of Australia. This phenomenon, which is Northern Hemisphere ' also frequent in continental areas of the United Sun are cons Covell sae States, is part of an annual cycle that, as a result lg Ferrari teci of its intensity and its consequences, affects the a alg oe pee larger surface, so the average temperature is lower than in the Southern Hemisphere. lives of many people. Southern Hemisphere It is summer. The rays of the Sun strike the surface at a right angle; they are concentrated in a smaller area, so the temperature on average is higher than in the Northern Hemisphere. This phenomenon affects the climates in low latitudes, from West Africa to the western Pacific. In the summer, the monsoon causes the rains in the Amazon region and in northern Argentina. There in the winter rain is usually scarce. Predominant direction of the winds during the month of July T Ad] The masses of cold and dry air that predominate on the continent are displaced toward the ocean, whose waters are relatively warmer. Arabian =e Bay of Bengal Limit of the intertropical convergence Arabian Pre-monsoon. Month of May. Sea Monsoon. Month of July. A cyclone located in the ocean draws the cold winds from the continent and lifts the somewhat warmer and more humid air, which returns toward the continent via the upper layers of the VT INE = | The climate in India and Bangladesh is very hot and dry. When humid and cool winds come in from atmosphere. the ocean, they cause torrential rains in these regions. Cross section (enlarged area) =, ——— a \ Rays of the Sun Limit of the Intertropical 7 ; The circulation of the atmosphere between the Convergence Bay of i The humid winds are Descent of the air Des¢ent of the air tropics influences the formation of monsoon Zone (ITCZ) Bengal Ly deflected toward x from high fromphigh altitudes winds. The trade winds that blow toward the h h b Equator from the subtropical zones are pushed by 4 the nort east y the Hadley cells and deflected in their course by bd two mountain chains: the Coriolis effect. Winds in the tropics occur Ct . the Himalayas and the ansport of Western Sierra Transport of sad saa of low SiGcne around the au ) The cool and humid air # Ghat mountains. This zone ater vapor Madre water vapor called the Intertropical Convergence Zone (ITCZ). a A When this zone is seasonally displaced in the from the ocean blows enclosed by the mountains is the main one affected by the monsoons. toward the continent, which is quite hot and dry. warm months of the Northern Hemisphere toward the north, a summer monsoon occurs. < ™_ SURFACE FACTORS: Good Fortune and Catastrophe he monsoons are a climatic phenomenon governing the life and the economy of one of the most

increase in temperature. As the entire food chain deteriorates, other species also suffer the effects and AFRICA disappear from the ocean. In contrast, tropical marine species that live in warmer waters can flourish. The phenomenon affects the weather and climate of the entire world. It tends to cause flooding, food shortages, droughts, and fires in various locations. © = OCEANIA Normal conditions The phytoplankton promote Various marine species die Cold waters, rich in nutrients, the normal development of the scarcity of cold water off for lack of food or must ascend from the bottom of microorganisms, fish, and debilitates the phytoplankton migrate to other zones. the sea and provide favorable other creatures. population and alters the FLOODING conditions for the growth of marine food chain. Abnormal flooding caused by phytoplankton, the basis of EI Nifio in the desert regions the marine food chain. of Chile and the later evaporation of water leave behind hexagonal deposits of potassium nitrate. ATACAMA, CHILE Surface area 1,200 square miles (3,000 sq km) Laguna Blanca Cause Floods caused by EI Nifio Salt Marsh anomalies Latitude 22° 54’ S Yeap 1999 Longitude 68° 12° W 38-39 48-49 56-57 40-43 50-51 58-59 44-45 52-53 60-61 46-47 54-55 38 METEOROLOGICAL PHENOMENA Capricious Forms louds are masses of large drops of water and ice crystals. They form because the water vapor contained in the air condenses or freezes as it rises through the troposphere. How the clouds develop depends on the altitude and the velocity of the rising air. Cloud shapes are divided into three basic types: cirrus, cumulus, and stratus. They are also classified as high, medium, and low depending on the altitude they reach above sea level. They are of meteorological interest because they indicate the behavior of the atmosphere. @ Exosphere TYPES OF CLOUDS 300 miles NAME MEANING (500 km) CIRRUS FILAMENT CUMULUS | AGGLOMERATION STRATUS BLANKET Mesosphere NIMBUS RAIN 50 miles Stratosphere O0lkm) = e 30 miles T | (50 km) The layer closest to the Earth and in which 6 miles meteorological phenomena occur, including the formation of clouds fF (10 km) 0 HOW THEY ARE FORMED Clouds are formed when the rising air cools to water vapor condenses. Cumulonimbus clouds the point where it cannot hold the water are storm clouds that can reach a height of vapor it contains. In such a circumstance, the 43,000 feet (13,000 m) and contain more air is said to be saturated, and the excess than 150,000 tons of water. ees = ae =| Convection Convergence The heat of the Sun warms the air near the When the air coming from one direction ground, and because it is less dense than the meets air from another direction, it is surrounding air, it rises. pushed upward. ee Geographic elevation When the air encounters mountains, it is forced to rise. This phenomenon explains why there are often clouds and rain over mountain peaks. Presence of a front When two masses of air with different temperatures meet at a front, the warm air rises and clouds are formed. Temperature in = the upper part of eo the troposphere BS CIRROSTRATUS A very extensive cloud that Q eventually covers the whole sky Z and has the form of a c transparent, fibrous-looking veil 1S) wn i he tenper re e middle pa : r a 4 ’ CUMULUS A cloud that is generally ense with well-defined utlines. Cumulus clouds an resemble a mountain of cotton. (15° C) Temperature at the Earth's surface The year that British meteorologist Luke Howard carried out the first scientific study of clouds WEATHER AND CLIMATE 39 CIRRUS A high, thin cloud with white, delicate filaments composed of ice crystals CIRROCUMULUS A cloud formation composed of very small, granulated elements spaced more or less regularly ALTOCUMULUS A formation of rounded clouds in groups that can form straight or wavy rows ALTOSTRATUS Large, nebulous, compact, uniform, slightly layered masses. Altostratus does not entirely block out the Sun. It is bluish or gray. STRATOCUMULUS A cloud that is horizontal and very long. It does not blot out the Sun and is white or gray in color. NIMBOSTRATUS ~ Nimbostratus portends more or less continuous precipitation in the form of . = in or snow that, in most sre a A low cloud that extends over “ a large area. It can cause drizzle or light snow. Stratus clouds can appeanjas’a gray band aoe e horizon, - s — __ — Lines of cumulus The Inside | IM) The altitude at which clouds are (Lali formed depends on the stability of the air and the humidity. The highest and coldest clouds have ice crystals. The lowest and warmest clouds have drops of water. There are also mixed clouds. There are 10 classes of clouds depending on their height above sea level. The highest clouds begin at a height of 2.5 miles (4 km). The mid-level begins at a height of 1.2 to 2.5 miles (2-4 km) and the lowest at 1.2 miles (2 km) high. Thickness of a storm cloud can be contained in a storm cloud. The altitude at which it freezes DESCENDING — CURRENT hg winds ion andd Lenticular Rotating cloud cloud SPECIAL FORMATIONS CLOUD STREETS LENTICULAR CLOUDS The form of the clouds depends on the winds and the topography of the terrain Mountains usually create waves in the atmosphere on their lee side, and on the beneath them. Light winds usually produce crest of each wave lenticular clouds are lines of cumulus clouds positioned as if along streets. Such waves can be created by differences in surface heating. formed that are held in place by the waves. Rotating clouds are formed by turbulence near the surface. 40 METEOROLOGICAL PHENOMENA The Rain Announces Its Coming he air inside a cloud is in continuous motion. This process causes the drops of water or the crystals of ice that constitute the cloud to collide and join together. In the process, the drops and crystals become too big to be supported by air currents and they fall to the ground as different kinds of precipitation. A drop of rain has a diameter 100 times greater than a droplet in a cloud. The type of precipitation depends on whether the cloud contains drops of water, ice crystals, or both. Depending on the type of cloud and the temperature, the precipitation can be liquid water (rain) or solid (snow or hail). GROWTH The smallest clouds adhere to one another to form larger clouds, increasing their size and height. CONDENSATION NUCLEI Salt, dust, smoke, and pollen, among other particulates, serve as a surface on which water molecules, ascending by convection, can combine and form water droplets. a - Dilatation Condensation Collision-Coalescence The molecules The molecules group Via this process, of water are themselves around molecules collide > - free—water vapor. acondensation » and join ther to nucleus. L 3 ’ Water molecules Hydrogen ~~ ‘e » 2 — (Ee wi eee PO Sandstorm j particulates Particulates from Volcanic combustion in particulates factories and vehicles Forest fire 2 particulates Rock erosion particulates Sea-salt particulates WEATHER AND CLIMATE 41 RAIN DISSIPATION The upper part of the cloud spreads The descending currents are out like an anvil, and the rain falls stronger than the ascending ones from the lower cloud, producing and interrupt the feeding air, descending currents. causing the cloud to disintegrate.. MATURATION Mature clouds have very strong ascending currents, leading to protuberances and rounded formations. Convection occurs. When they begin to fall, = the drops have a size of 0.02 inch (0.5 mm), which © 0.6-1.2 miles -— 0.2 inch is reduced as they fall (1-2 km) 0.04 inch (5 mm) since they break apart. (1 mm) NS AT I Gi , C0 ND IE 0.04 inch “SOR molecules occupy 1 cubic millimeter under normal atmospheric conditions. 42 METEOROLOGICAL PHENOMENA SNOW Tiny ice crystals combine to ICE Be form a hexagonal star, or CRYSTAL oie es snowflake. They form at G km) -4° F (-20° C). Bor (-39° C) HOW CRYSTALS ARE FORMED The drop attaches itself to a nucleus or solid particle. Then the surface of Nucleus Periphery E Pa ad Tf the drops — ors d crystallize near ~~ ™ the freezing level, they fall in the form of sleet. ye, be SLEET 2 miles (3 km) -9°F (-23° C) 0.6 mile (1 km) 19° F (-7° C) - nowflake bit fegrate b j ‘t ey reach the ground. They a as Tsnowflakes only when. the air . the Ground is very ola 10 fee (3:11.m) The record of annual snowfall Mount Rainier, Washington. From February 19, 1971, to February.18, 1972. HYDROMETEORS Drops of condensed or frozen water in the atmosphere are called hydrometeors. These include rain, fog, hail, mist, snow, and frost. TYPES OF CRYSTALS Dendrite Needle clusters No two snowflakes are identical to each other. Water vapor that condenses during the night into very sma drops. The condensati on surfaces that radiate during the night, such as plant animals, and buildings. VARIED FORMS Snow crystals can have a variety of shapes; most of them have six points, although some have three or 12, and they have hexagonal symmetry in a plane. They can also be cubic crystals, but these form under conditions of extremely low temperature in the highest regions of the troposphere. aaceretion, increases - : “in diamet a } called allets. Most have = ' six points. i ‘= nd and ‘descend _— zs in the cloud. The flakes measure between 0.04 and 0.8 inch (1 and 20 mm). A cloud with a greenish tinge or rain witha whitish color can portend a hailstorm. ’ rT peste. ire of the air size of the hailstone. WEATHER AND CLIMATE 43 HAIL Precipitation in the form of solid lumps of ice. Hail is produced inside FROST Frost forms when the dew point of the air is less than 32° F (0° C), storm clouds in which frozen droplets grow in size as they rise and fall within the cloud. CROSS SECTION OF A HAILSTONE Layers of ice 0.2 to 2 inches (5 to 50 mm) The typical range of hailstone sizes | k The heaviest ( g) hailstones that fell on April 14, 1986, in Gopalganj, Bangladesh. HOAR FROST Similar to frost but thicker. It usually forms when there and the water vapor is fog. transforms directly into ice when it is deposited on surfaces. METEOROLOGICAL PHENOMENA WEATHER AND CLIMATE — e —— | Lost in the Fo eects IF Radiation fog forms during cold nights evaporate, and the air tends to become saturated. 4 : " (Le when the land loses the heat that was These fogs are thick and persistent. Advection FRONTAL FOG hen atmospheric water vapor condenses near the ground, it forms fog and mist. The Iie nial gor when, fog ofcurs when humid, warm alr fos Over alierdaicsc fog consists of small droplets of water mixed with smoke and dust particles. Physically than eee the des ch rain sortie Ai Caasices . the fog is a cloud, but the difference between the two lies in their formation. A cloud develops when the air rises and cools, whereas fog forms when the air is in contact with the 3 . ; RADIATION FOG ground, which cools it and condenses the water vapor. The atmospheric phenomenon of This fog appears only on the ground fog decreases visibility to distances of less than 1 mile (1.6 km) and can affect a cs ground, maritime, and air traffic. When the fog is light, it is called mist. In this case, visibility is reduced to 2 miles (3.2 km). @ 160 feet (50 m) The densest fog affects visibility at this distance and has repercussions on car, boat, and airplane traffic. In many cases, visibility can be zero. Fog and Visibility F™“ Visibility is defined as a measure of an observer's Leff ability to recognize objects at a distance through the atmosphere. It is expressed in miles and indicates the visual limit imposed by the presence of fog, mist, dust, smoke, or any type of artificial or natural precipitation in the atmosphere. The different degrees of fog density have various effects on maritime, land, and air traffic. mn "4 Vis = a organi barrier Fog develops on lee-side mountain slopes at high altitudes and occurs when the air becomes saturated with moisture. ADVECTION FOG Formed when a mass of humid and cool air moves over a surface that is colder than the air “— oa The air becomes saturated as it ascends. Dew The condensation of water vapor on objects that have radiated enough heat to decrease their temperature below the dew point a . } i. . High 4 ’ landmasses Mist Mist consists of salt and other dry particles imperceptible to the naked eye. When the concentration of these particles is very high, the clarity, color, texture, and form of objects we see are diminished. = INVERSION FOG When a current of warm, humid air flows over the cold water of an ocean or DENSE — THICK FOG lake, an inversion fog can form. The FOG FOG warm air is cooled by the water, and its Means of moisture condenses into droplets. The transport +f = > . warm air traps the cooled air below it, areaffected aaitlmeay 6 miles near the surface. High coastal by visibility. landmasses prevent this type of fog = 0.6 mile (10 km) from penetrating very far inland. at Normal visibility © PETG EEE TT ha = < 160 feet 660 feet (50 m) (200 m) af 46 METEOROLOGICAL PHENOMENA WEATHER AND CLIMATE 47 Brief Flash lectrical storms are produced in large cumulonimbus-type clouds, which typically bring heavy rains in addition to lightning and thunder. The storms form in areas of low pressure, where the air is warm and less dense than the surrounding atmosphere. Inside the cloud, an enormous electrical charge accumulates, which is then discharged with a zigzag flash between the cloud and the ground, between the cloud and the air, or between one cloud and another. This is how the flash of lightning is unleashed. Moreover, the heat that is released during the discharge generates an expansion and contraction of the air that is called thunder. Cold ai rm air eo! ELECTRICAL CHARGES The cloud's negative charges are attracted to the positive charges of the ground. The difference in electrical potential between the two regions produces the discharge. + ® eo. & INSIDE THE CLOUD Electrical charges are produced from the cumulonimbus storm clouds. . collisions between ice or hail crystals. Lightning bolts can have negative or Warm air currents rise, causing the positive electric charges. s ____ charges in the cloud to shift. Lightning originates within large INDUCED CHARGE The negative charge of the base of the cloud induces a positive charge in the ground below it. Lightning can be distinguished primarily by the path taken by the electrical charges that cause them. Cloud-to-air Cloud-to-cloud The electricity moves from the cloud toward an air mass of opposite charge. LIGHTNING RODS The primary function of lightning rods is to the electrostatic discharge, which follows of least electrical resistance. yi — | THUNDER This is the sound produced by the air when it expands very rapidly, generating shock waves as it is heated. Ge. =°*S DISCHAI The discharge takes place f toward the ground after the tep leader, a channel of ionized down to the gro f tning bolt: 8,700 miles per second (140,000 km/s) Airplane: 0.2 mile per second (0.3 km/s) Fl car: 0.06 mile per second (0.1 km/s) Tip of the ~ e e i ( million volts IE ELECTRICAL POTENTIAL OF A LIGHTNING BOLT. a A windmill 110 volts is Lightning generates 200 consumed by rod volts. a lamp. con . RETURN STROKE In the final phase, the discharge rh rises from the Earth to the cloud. el fi bh ARGE SEQUENCE = Die = 2nd a 3rd phase *>@e@eeee 1st return Q nd return i) ! 3rd return BB icrevics bot ar channel elect) alsctarse to dhe points A B c , that it does no harm to buildings or people. A famous experiment by POINT OF IMPACT Benjamin Franklin led to the invention of this apparatus. During a lightning storm, he flew a kite into clouds, and it received a strong discharge. That marked the birth of the lightning rod, which consists of an iron rod placed on the highest point of the object to be protected and connected to the ground by a metallic, insulated conductor. The principle of all lightning rods, which terminate in one or more points, is to attract and conduct the lightning bolt to the ground. The lightning bolt propagates through an ionized channel that branches out to reach the ground. Electrical charges run along the same channel in the opposite direction. 65 feet 20m) This is the radius of a lightning bolt's effective range on the surface of the Earth. Tf the cloud has additional electrical charges, they are propagated to the ground through the channel of the first stroke and generate a second return stroke toward the cloud. This discharge, as in the second stroke, does not have branches. When the return discharge ceases, the lightning flash sequence comes to an end. “AU uolyenjeAy 40 Cd 1x04 Ag palip r00g ‘Auedwoy asemyos x04 Aq (9) }yHuAdo JOVP 48 METEOROLOGICAL PHENOMENA WEATHER AND CLIMATE 49 When Water Accumulates Torrent a ee Be eA eek Soe Rains raise the level of into the rivers. , H i : . y Caused by | the water in the . E ater is a vital element for life, but in excess it leads to serious consequences for people Store ieGuiG rivers and the and their economic activity. Flooding occurs when certain areas that are normally dry ae riage and high ase: are covered with water for a more or less prolonged period. The most important causes are excessive rains, the overflow of rivers and lakes, and giant waves that wash over the coast. Such waves can be the result of unusually high tides caused by strong surface winds or by submarine earthquakes. Walls, dikes, dams, and embankments are used to help prevent flooding. Flooded Land When land is flooded for days or months, the air in the soil is replaced by water, which prevents the buildup of oxygen, thus affecting the biological activity of plants and the soil itself. In the latter case, if the water does not have sufficient salt, the incomplete decomposition of organic matter and the significant washing away of nutrients make the soil more acidic. If the water contains a great deal of salt, the salt will remain in the soil, causing a different problem: salinization. Solid particulates ave ( The water ee causes a dectine Kg The components of the soil that in oxygen in the are oxidized can be reduced and aerated spaces of thus change their properties. the soil. Flood Control With the construction of dikes and embankments, the flow of rivers prone to flooding is largely contained. Agriculture is more productive when water can be controlled. Floodplains Plants with thick, Floodplains are areas adjacent droopy stems to rivers or streams that are a subject to recurrent flooding. oe There is so much water on the surface that the soil cannot absorb it. The soil cannot carry oxygen to “a = the roots. 250 0,000 ) Victims of ace in the Bay jouses and : of Bengal, Bangladesh, in 1970 | ; i . ; are trees covered ees | £ D P a, with water a i - Dam Filtering grates - : Transformers stores water to prevent the passage of Vike c A 0 z! al ~ Le Their job is to divert it or to unwanted objects in the ll : : the river. - a transform the voltage regulate its flow water used to produce :—* A of the electric current. outside the riverbed. hydroelectric power. ‘ Channeling water> via turbines also a generates . < Cseiricity AG rgy can be J made available to houses. Hydroelectric Plants Elevation 2 5 of the EMBANKMENT use the force and velocity of running paearaale Earthen embankments help water to turn turbines. There are two contain rivers that tend to STORM a types: run-off-river (which uses the Electrical generator overflow and temporarily DIKES = Fé -. natural kinetic energy of the river's Equipment that change course. In areas where the coast — ey r fe running waters) and reservoir (where the produces electricity by is low and exposed to flooding, =< —— 7 - water accumulates behind dams and is Electrical converting the protective dikes have been constructed he ——_ hal then released under increased pressure to power lines @; mechanical energy of against high tides and powerful waves. = “ the power plant). the rotating turbine into electrical energy 50 METEOROLOGICAL PHENOMENA WEATHER AND CLIMATE 51 Water Scarcity n deserts, drought from lack of rain is customary, but in arid, semiarid, and subhumid regions, _— - desertification occurs when for weeks, months, or years the land is degraded because of climatic variations. A high-pressure center that stays in a certain location longer than usual can be the cause of this phenomenon. Soils are able to put up with a certain dry period, but when the water table decreases TwIhhsF PE a BE cold drastically, the drought can turn into a natural catastrophe. , 4 1f-2 a3 iF eg particles FIELD CAPACITY a The amount of moisture in the soil remaining after water has run off the surface. Field capacity determines whether, even with a meteorological drought, the land can continue to absorb existing water between soil particles. a WILTING This results when less water is available in the upper layers of the soil. RAIN Caused b (low pr currents. Capillary water i and» SATURATED SOIL ' Aten 5 ah The water that falls as 4! bea 4 MS i" i i ae ation i io precipitation may be ‘ erie : f oie , AG ete more than the soil can j absorb, and it descends toward aquifers. Solid particles Solid particulates 7 HIGH-PRES® Remaining water METEOROLOGICAL DROUGHT The condition that results when precipitation is much lower than normal levels for that location. It is generally THE DRIEST ZONES determined based on comparison with coincide with deserts. For example, in the average rainfall. Atacama Desert in northern Chile, not a single drop of water fell between 1903 and 1917. Hygroscopic water 1975-76 Less than 50% of the average rainfall Solid particles The region of the Sahel has ENGLAND endured periods of devastating Space droughts lasting this long. between 1933-37 —— “=uUNITEDI pt the pores a . 15 million deaths b The Dust Bowl STATES © ' caused by Solid was created. INDIA — drought particles 1962-66 AHE é i KEY Affected the states = @ Areas of insufficient rain of the Northeast THE PROPORTION Excess Saturation Level of Hygroscopic AGRICULTURAL DROUGHT 4 for normal vegetation 1977 1967-69 —— OF WATER INTHE = water threshold wilting coefficient When soil moisture exists only at the hygroscopic and harvests Water is rationed in Numerous AUSTRALIA SOIL (saturation) (field (minimum of level (surface moisture on soil particles), there is California. forest fires capacity) water) no water available for vegetation. 52 METEOROLOGICAL PHENOMENA Lethal Force ornadoes are the most violent storms of nature. They are generated by electrical storms (or sometimes as the result of a hurricane), and they take the form of powerful funnel-shaped whirlwinds that extend from the sky to the ground. In these storms, moving air is mixed with soil and other matter rotating at velocities as high as 300 miles per hour (480 km/h). They can uproot trees, destroy buildings, and turn harmless objects into deadly airborne projectiles. A tornado can devastate a whole neighborhood within seconds. © How They Form TOP The top of the tornado remains inside the cloud. WEATHER AND CLIMATE 53 6 miles (10 km) Maximum height that it can attain Maximum 26 Mile diameter pm Tornadoes begin to form when a current of warm air ascends inside a cumulonimbus cloud and begins to rotate under the influence of winds in the upper part of the cloud. From the base of the column, air is sucked toward the inside of the turning spiral. The air rotates faster as it approaches the center of the column. This increases the force of the ascending current, and the column continues to grow until it stretches from high — in the clouds to the ground. Because of their short ~ duration, they are difficult to study and predict. Strong wind ROTATION The circulation of the air causes a decrease in pressure at the center of the storm, creating a Convection central column of air. ae aad eal 4 ) Cumulonimbus Cold and ; 2 dry wind i e | DESCENT 1 The central whirling column 7 continues to descend within the cloud, perforating it in the direction of the ground. Storm THE OUTCOME The tornado reaches the Earth and depending on its intensity can send the roofs of buildings flying. cloud funnel t can then hth ; ; Thetornado ™ i , generally Wg = 113-157 (181-253) WIND VELOCITY MILES PER HOUR (KM/H) 40-72 (64-116) 73-112 FUJITA SCALE (117-180) The Fujita-Pearson scale was created by Theodore Fujita to classify tornadoes according to the damage caused by the wind, from the lightest to the most severe. CATEGORY Mobile homes destroyed, trees felled Mobile homes ripped from their foundations EFFECTS Damage to himneys, tree branches broken 300 miles per hour (480 km/h) it can be invisible. Where and When Most tornadoes occur in agricultural areas. The humidity and heat of the spring and summer are required to feed the storms that produce them. In order to grow, crops require both the humidity and temperature variations associated with the seasons. 3:00 pm-9:00 pm. The period of the day with the highest probability of tornado formation 1,000 tornadoes are generated on average annually in the United States. Some tornadoes are so powerful that they can rip the roofs off houses. over which a tornado can move 207-260 (333-418) 261-320 (420-512) 158-206 (254-332) Houses uprooted from their foundations and dragged great distances Roofs and walls demolished, cars and trains overturned Solidly built walls blown down 54 METEOROLOGICAL PHENOMENA Death and Destruction f the 1,000 tornadoes that annually strike the United States, there is one that has the unfortunate @ distinction of being one of the worst: the Tri-State tornado, which occurred on March 18, 1925, and caused extreme devastation. It moved across Missouri, Illinois, and Indiana, destroying homes and causing the confirmed deaths of 695 people, although it is believed that the number may have been much higher. The tornado traveled 230 miles (368 km) at an average velocity of 66 miles an hour (105 km/h), and its duration set a record at three hours and 30 minutes. It has been rated on the Fujita scale as an F5 tornado—one of the most damaging—and caused losses to the United States of $17 million. © 30 DE SOTO percent Partial destroyed destruction but MISSOURI a large number (U.S.) of victims “~e. 69 dead Latitude 37° N 100 Longitude 93° W i" i Le “= \ ercent 6 —————— "‘ 1 Pa >. = destroyed GORHAM Value on the Fujita scale F5 ~ s : aa Town in ruins = Duration 3 hours 5 anes 30 minutes 66 miles per hour Average velocity (105 km/h) e MURPHYSBORO Town with the Pal First contact with the gro greatest number of —[ fatalities 234 dead 40 percent ELLINGTON destroyed First o affecte One dead ANNAPOLIS AND LEADANNA Large number of victims 75 injured and 2 dead 90 230 miles (368 km) TOTAL PATH TRAVELLED 65 miles per hour (104. km/h) Average velocity PARRISH Almost total destruction 22 dead percent destroyed WEST FRANKFORT 20 Partial destruction percent 450 wounded destroyed and 127 dead ILLINOIS THE TOWN OF GRIFFIN, IN THE STATE OF INDIANA, WAS LEFT IN RUINS. Victimas 2,500 — 1,500 4 1,000 — 15,000 houses destroyed 500 — 17 million dollars in losses 70 miles per hour (115 km/h) Velocity 2,027 ‘o WEATHER AND CLIMATE 55 OWENSVILLE Serious damage to houses "i ih 4:30 PM. Final contact with the ground INDIANA PRINCETON Half of the town |. destroyed 65 deaths 50 percent GRIFFIN 150 houses destroyed destroyed, and many children fl ak killed. j ~~, d 7 ai” — Tornadoes in the United States Unlike hurricanes, which are tropical storms primarily affecting the Gulf of Mexico, tornadoes are phenomena that occur between the Great Plains of the United States, the Rocky Mountains, and the Gulf of Mexico and usually appear in the spring and summer. ml 3:00 pm. “fy =9:00 pw. The period of the day with the highest probability of tornado formation 1,000 The number of tornadoes occurring per year in the United States THE 10 MOST DEVASTATING TORNADOES Deaths @ Injuries Tri-State Natchez St. Louis Tupelo Gainesville Woodward Amite/ New Flint Waco 1925 1840 1896 1936 1936 1947 — Pine/Purvis Richmond 1953 1953 1908 1889 = - "i ss a f t ‘aid ee sr. fy iit I 4 } q ay j 2 mi L. P oe < = - a a = 1 d oF a Z 7 - - e oh e 4 ae ] =a | has CYGEO “a | 7 i , % ‘i 7 P F Forms over warm seas, aided 2 by winds in opposing directions, high temperatures, humidity, and the rotation of the Earth Begins to ascend, Ld twisting in a spiral around a low-pressure zone FRINGES OF STORM -— THE EYE Hurricanes in the CLOUDS Central area, VELOCITY AT WHICH IT - Northern Hemisphere otate violently around has very low APPROACHES THE COAST - rotate counterclockwise, the central zone. pressure : As they pass from the sea to = and those in the © the land, they cause enormous . Southern Hemisphere the hurricane reaches damage. Hurricanes gradually rotate clockwise. the mainland, it moves more dissipate over land from the slowly; it is very destructive in lack of water vapor. Descending == this stage, since it is here that air currents S—_— hk = ¥ ‘populated cities are located. a 4* Lae ™ " winds blow from outside the sto =. . = fam, d " u 1 } : i a i aa , ATH OF THE RRICE The air wraps around the eye. ‘ -_ = rOO (ao Ih) MAXIMUM HEIGHT a . 4 E a REACHED BY THE WAVES , ie stronges n winds are formed. ing a column of clouds. It rises 3.900 feet (1,200 m) in the center of the storm. CLASSIFICATION OF DAMAGE DONE Saffir-Simpson category Damage Speed miles High Tide per hour (km/h) feet (m) Strong ascendan currents \y WIND ACTIVITY CLASS1 minimum 74 to 95 (119 to 153) 4 to 5 (12 to 15) —_ CLASS 2 moderate 96 to 110 (154 to177) 6to8 (18 to 24) \ j CLASS 3 extensive 111 to 130 (178 to 209) 9 to 12 (27 to 3.6) is the minimum temperature The trade winds Light winds give The CLASS 4 extreme 131 to 155 (210 to 250) 13 to 18 (39 to 54) that Wakemeanne Sage Ch orepuleamaward it direction and | | winds flow GL ASs5 catastrophic more than 155 (250) __ more than 18 (5A) the ocean will evaporate at. the storm. permit it to grow. outward. 58 METEOROLOGICAL PHENOMENA amano What Katrina Took Away urricane Katrina lashed the south and the center of the United States H in August 2005. The force of the wind razed thousands of houses, buildings, oil installations, highways, and bridges, leaving a vast area of the country without communication and some heavily populated areas without provisions. It resulted in extensive material damage and thousands of deaths in Florida, the Bahamas, Louisiana, and Mississippi. Satellite images reveal the scope of the disaster, considered one of the most devastating in the history of the country. @ THE WINDS At 155 miles per hour (250 km/h), they force the water against the protective walls.. THE WATER advances toward the city, invading the central regions. LAKE PONTCHARTRAIN DIKES were breached by the water and the wind, causing a great flood. 600AM. (REM se) 6 ole Ue The time when ——— ; the hurricane made landfall w Area of New. Orleans’ affected by flooding CATEGORY 5 Areas most affectéd + Ls by tile flood, Area most affected by the flood z | Rds F of the inhabitants LE = Pied after Katrina" — ' __ of this'zone were | i i , " “evacuated. ; i * ! tjof the repairs. * The hurricane: wands ished the ~ water'14 feet (4. 3 nf) above the AUGUST 29 » A tropical depression forms in the Bahamas. It intensifies and becomes tropical storm Katrina. On August 25, it makes landfall in Florida as a category 1 hurricane. a WEATHER AND.CLIMATE 59 ip he. re = SE srt £ * * NEW ORLEANS Latitude 30° Nx * Longitude 90°,W 4 Area ~ 360 square miles (933 square kilometers) Number of inhabitants ~ 500,000 Altitude (above sea level) 10 feet (3 m) F — , AUGUST 27 "Leaves the Gulf of Mexico and : a | . reaches category 3. On August 28, ~ ss 1 it is transformed from category 3 ‘to category 5 and increases in size. ee a dg | a \ ‘ Fh rr" : 1 4A Huracanes fueron = registrados en 2005. , y El total de tormentas ! a f tropicales registradas en el afio 2005. / hn | AUGUST 29 In the early hours, it makes landfall in Louisiana as a category 4 hurricane. A little later, it makes landfall for the hird time, in Mississippi. CATEGORY 4 15D per hour (250 kra/h) MAXIMUM WIND SPEED SEPTEMBER 1 / What remains of the hurricane is weakened as it moves horth to Canada, where it'dissipates. | “normal sea le eis: ne al ie Se wi ede ‘a bid Paes eke Fe eee: a | ee Way SS _ Direction of 4? gion withthe tong! ince pi... “tg hog ail r" i= nid dey : a eh } TS the hurricane i Sede reaches the eh ac “Ac a a : ‘ : ee 3 ; ‘ “s : ye in ft Sy ese wa ws = ics ee BF iy le aa Ta be" : ' 7 F * a tae AE aa a Ld ae if, : OE ir pe tit, = ee es + = 4 , oi Sa a z i tJ ithe SS) = Pedal pions ey ore oe | Peg tte ge a 60 METEOROLOGICAL PHENOMENA WEATHER AND CLIMATE 61 AFTER THE HURRICANE First verify that everyone in the family is well and that there are no injuries. Do not touch loose cables or fallen poles. Call the fire Foresight to Prevent ‘Tragedies urricanes usually lash specific regions of the planet, and the population must become Ay Pv E HU ANE Hb sc RERIGHE OFSEnE Holos In easetvolllnced aware of the disasters that can strike the community. Each family must know which 2 eg LS el Yael food, clothing, or immediate medication. area of the house is the most secure in case the roof, a door, or a window collapses. “television about the path of the hurricane. They must also know when it is time to go to a shelter or if it is better to remain at home. Moceea Way eae oore ake winkatesbe 2 ’ z ' ‘i not leave until the authorities announce Hel | Keap'd ‘ Another important precaution is to organize and store all family documents and real-estate the danger from the hurricane has ended. oes pe aaa records in a water- and fireproof strongbox. & injured or ownership of trapped. property close at hand. Return home Do not drink BEFORE THE HURRICANE Chip ena Water unless Tf you live in a hurricane-prone anon are Me he ati R area, it is recommended that you TiaR hs sale: E potable: know the emergency plans of the Use the community and that you have a plan of action for your family. telephone only for emergency GI — ' Gy / calls. ee WS Securevall the Reinforce roof tiles = doors and to keep them from = i windows to keep being loosened. cael | pS i ear oe them from Store P or damage to the opening. A piesa electrical system. food and . Keep valuable potable water. [ objects and Follow news reports with | documents in a battery-powered radio. J : a waterproof —— = | container. | Disconnect all electrical _ devices and shi off the hous Keepthe car supplied with a full tank of fuel F i just in case. , _ : ’ | } ° , ; oe. — Check the most J ' : ’ fire-prone areas. Do not touch wires or damaged electrical equipmeht=. HOW TO PREPARE EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT HOW TO PREPARE A complete first-aid kit must be DOCUMENTATION frotfthe main prepared and available. Consult a To be prepared for water valve and pharmacist or your family physician. evacuation, keep family the main gas valve. documents in good order. Make a complete list of belongings of each person. ® Check the first-aid r kit and replace any expired items. When you are on L ; the move, use 4 = 4 ca — It is important = ot 0 | for everyone to sea ig : , —— have an ID card. : . You should be prepared for dealing with the most common symptoms and injuries. F Meteorology he use of satellites orbiting the Earth, recording the coming of rain, air currents, and clouds, allows us to know with some hours of advance warning if a severe storm is heading toward a certain point on the planet. Counting on this type of precise information about when and where tropical cyclones will occur, for example, has allowed government RITA, SEPTEMBER 2003 The image from the GOES-12 satellite shows the configuration of Hurricane Rita in the eastern portion of the Gulf of Mexico. : as ah ee lh A officials to coordinate the evacuation of people from the affected zones. The surface of the planet is also monitored by a system of meteorological stations placed hundreds of miles from each WEATHER FOLKLORE > COMPILATION OF INFORMATION — INSTANTANEOUS MAPS RAIN, COLD,ORHEAT MOBILE SATELLITES = other. These collect information from and send information to all areas of the world so that meteorologists can prepare maps, graphics, and predictions to inform the public. | 64 METEOROLOGY ~~ WEATHER AND CLIMATE 65 Weather Folklore efore the development of meteorology as we know it today, people observed in nature signs that allowed them to predict rains, floods, or strong winds. All this knowledge has been transmitted over the centuries in the form of proverbs or rhymes. Most of these fragments of meteorological knowledge lack a scientific foundation, but some of them reflect certain principles. Plants and animals play a major role in these observations. @ ® Moon i When the Moon has a halo, = tomorrow will have wet or bad weather. Halos occur as a consequence of the refraction of light by ice crystals in cirrostratus clouds covering the Sun or Moon. They portend a warm front, which will be followed by rain. Almanac Forecasts fF In the 16th century, almanacs with weather forecasts were (Le sold throughout Europe. Each month of the year has its own refrain, although this depends on the hemisphere a person lives in. The monthly and annual calendars offered agricultural and medical advice. From the most remote times, there was a general belief that the Moon determined the behavior of the atmosphere and that variations in the weather were caused by changes in the phase of the Moon. Some examples of these popular sayings are: “Sweet April showers do spring May flowers;” “After a dark winter's night, the next day will be bright.” . = * . Signs from Plants and Animals preg, [n every rural community, concern for the harvest and leg dependency on weather resulted in a series of beliefs, with varying degrees of accuracy, taken as prophesies of later events. In any case, even though it is certain that people as well as plants and animals react to the current weather, there is nothing to indicate that this might reveal anything about the weather in the future except to the degree that an incipient change is related to the current weather. For example, some signs accompany the increase in humidity that occurs prior to the passage of a cold front. «Swallow When swallows fly low, get your rain gear in tow. Swallows usually appear before — j a heavy rain. sl OPEN AND CLOSED PINECONES Open pinecones mean dry weather; closed pinecones mean humid weather. ’ DRY SEAWEED ' The lower the humidity, the D k ’ : more probable it is that the on ey ; next day will be dry. T hear donkeys braying; I am sure it will rain today. The animals react to the existing weather. It is a sign associated with the increased humidity in the environment. : a. | i * - S Me ay a OAK O a If the leaves of the oak fall before those When you see a toad walking, it : of the ash, the will be a wet spring. _ : summer will be dry. When a toad is swimming in the water, this means it will soon rain. If it stays in the water without moving, the rain will last for some time. ASH If the leaves of the ash fall before those of the oak, the summer will be wet. ‘ey Sed ~ i i Clouds Clouds with a fringe or lining— secure your sails well. This relates to clouds that are carried by winds at high altitudes; these clouds are often a sign that a low-pressure system, or cyclone, is approaching. WEATHER PREDICTION There are thousands of refrains that refer to changes in weather conditions. Here are some examples. WIND Wind from the east, rain like a beast. MORNING DEW Dew and cool in May, bring wine to the vine and hay to the cow. CLEAR SUNSET Rainbow at sundown, good weather at dawn. snails When you see a black slug in your way, rain is not far away. Snails are usually hidden in the garden. You see them only on humid days, just prior to the rain. 66 METEOROLOGY WEATHER AND CLIMATE 67 Compilation of Information WEATHER VANE MAXIMUM THERMOMETER ~ t PSYCHROMETER shows which way the shows the highest temperature of the day. The j : measures the . . . . . . Radar wind is blowing. It is a ‘ capillary with mercury is calibrated in the bulb. — relative humidity of ost of the information available regarding climatic ——— i era Ree Shs a if ee ene data comes from the record that 3 ee a mechanical system. ae eee | two thermometers . . ; . a . i a ira and two bulbs (one meteorologists everywhere in the world : aa —_ dayandole ui keep regarding cloud cover, temperature, the Indicates > = Pnnce with muslin that is i f f e direction i. | kept d i force and direction of the wind, air pressure, of the wind | aa ae = ~4 ahi a all visibility, and precipitation. Then from each een alcohol wie & HYGROTHERMOGRAPH ream meteorological station, the data is sent by g Nee atnutianbausly teers ie | \ Three equally air temperature and = Wet-bulb radio or satellite, and this makes it possible to foe oe perl be ee carina relative humidity. A rr ateemometee make forecasts and maps. intensity of agp measles the Speed THERMOMETER hipeiltadid ihe ee, the wind. of the wind. This indicates the lowest ae ri epeneen : ' | —# instrument is temperature of the day. It is 2 ed Sor papen rt Container of | activated by the has a fork-shaped bulb. the daily variations ue re _ distilled water = Teal Ae temperature and humidity. ‘i 1 wind, which turns i - | three hemispherical METEOROLOGICAL SHELTER ANEROID BAROMETER DATA cups mounted onal It is built of wood or fiberglass on a base that insulates it from measures atmospheric RECORDER vertical rod firmly the soil and protects certain instruments (thermometers, Pe p Anemometer pressure. Changes are records the placed in the ground. psychrometers, and others) from solar radiation. Screens in the shown by the pointers. data obtained. windows ensure good ventilation. - on 4 Atmospheric Double circulation of the air to prevent the pressure heating of the instruments when the radiation is very intense Psychrometer BAROGRAPH F Maximum and measures the | " Panini atmospheric pressure y ‘ thermometers and records its . changes overtime?” Hygrothermograph MERCURY BAROMETER An instrument used to measure atmospheric pressure. It consists of a glass tube full of mercury, with the open end submerged in Slats allow the air to flow through freely without creating currents. ao A typical rmeteordiegeen al ( temperature, humidity, wind velocity of a reservoir. rly gt | direction solar radiation, rain, and barometric . iy - — 7 n some places, soil temperature and cn, Sider oe me ue } vd : : ‘ . hag . a I en, are also monitored. The a Pe aot — coaered _ = = M he aa; 4 rh “7 a an a5 _ hygrometer for hu! ity, and a barometer for Poo eae pressure ap, ell SS i F : jill . i sd ai “ gid mpi 7 = if i mee mongtcr The light strikes and es is concentrated as it xo traverses the sphere. HELIOPHANOGRAPH IMPRESSION An instrument used to The concentrated rays of sunlight burn measure the number cardboard placed behind the glass sphere. F ca of hours of sunlight. It : “ 4 L i An. ie pach oF ca dation uses electrical is consists of a glass “ i \ u EVAPORIMETER " me i. | j ( Lee sensors | to record | temperature, humidity, wind velocity ‘ sphere that acts asa i 5 F 4 As its name indicates, l. en © Par ric pressure, and rainfall, among > ihe lens to concentrate ar + + + it measures the readings are processed by — aa sunlight. The light is ay \ —— “f oh effective evaporation insmitted via an automatic system. ‘ projected onto a piece ote TF on ari! . * of water from a mass RAIN METER itonomously, 24 hoursaday, = ~~~ ye of cardboard behind - ue , a of liquid in the open This is used to keep ar panels) or wind energy. i.* | the sphere. The air, from its loss from a chronological RAIN GAUGE sa Tey ; cardboard is burned Record ona strip The intervals burned give the surface through record of the The precipitation that falls on according to the of cardboard a count of the hours of transformation to amount of water the ground in the form of rain is intensity of the light. graduated in hours sunlight during the day. water vapor. falling as rain. collected by the rain gauge. 68 METEOROLOGY Instantaneous Maps eather maps represent at any given moment the state of the atmosphere at different altitudes. These maps are made based on the information provided by meteorological stations and are useful for specialists. The data collected by them include various values for pressure and temperature that make it possible to forecast the probability of precipitation, whether the weather will remain stable, or if it will change because a weather front is moving in. @ NOMENCLATURE LOW anne : OR veal aa Every meteorological map carries a label that SF cphirie indicates the date and ® ity wl. will b low given time it was made. the air is rising, and Isobar Maps ae eis a igh probably 12 indicates the houg IL One of the variables that provides the most information “obigheepitations) r and Z Greenwich - Fs = 4 cris : Le@ in real time for knowing meteorological conditions is Mean Time. : & eR, ! = atmospheric pressure, whose values over land (at sea level) vl ry is al : : are represented on what are called isobar maps, or ground- apne t This map is prepared level weather maps. The isobars, or lines that connect points LOW.PR i with the initial F ° é 1 % tha a pyrene values of Tuesday, of equal pressure, make it possible to estimate the velocity ay This is a low “ September 2. ‘ and direction of the wind at ground level. This information J pressur ‘one. The helps forecast the movement of cold or warm air masses. The - a 5 are increas eS letter A indicates an anticyclonic area, which indicates en igtbars toward the atmospheric stability and that the probability of rain is very ofa external isobars. low. The letter B indicates a low-pressure area and presages Ss a ial major atmospheric instability with possible rain. Fat a | ri It indicates the i, a initial values. i" i, PM Volek E ene WINDS ©. ANTICYCLONE ae ea a a In this area, the ae. A Fob lela * i" Tal, “le 1 6 Q 6 atmospheric stability is high, a ees Weircistetsroundthe since the downward motion : - center of the area. is the year in which English of the air prevents the E a astronomer Edmond Halley formation of clouds. There is 130 w\ made the first low probability of rain. = = th meteorological map. Mi HIGH PRESSURE by This is a high- ] y pressure area. The 1025 i pressure decreases ISOBARS SYMBOLS from the internal — are lines joining points There are a number of different isobars toward the ee > . of equal pressure. . external isobars. symbols to represent different kinds of fronts. ; WARM A warm air mass with local storms is advancing. | COLD A cold air mass with rain is advancing. 1 OCCLUDED FRONT indicates the line of collision between a cold front and a warm front. These are usually associated with severe storms. STATIONARY Moderately bad weather and little change of temperature j OCCLUDED FRONT It is mixed; it will act first as a warm front and then as a cold front. WEATHER AND CLIMATE 69 eather conditions, is an x al, maip: On these maps, : cated at the same level (normally _ Area of high geopotential values in which the chances , - L. P of rain are slight a my a Wins 5 a ilit andl probability eouabundant) ain _ Atmospheric __ stability and low expectation of precipitation 70 METEOROLOGY Rain, Cold, or Heat The damage resulting from a torrential rain or a heavy snowfall can be avoided thanks to | < nowing ahead of time what the weather will be is sometimes a question of life or death. the forecasts of meteorologists. The forecasts they make are based on information gathered from many sources, including instruments on the ground, in the air, and at sea. Despite the use of sophisticated information systems, the weather can he forecast only for the next few hours or days. Nonetheless, it is very useful in helping to prevent major catastrophes. e The World Meteorological Organization acts as a center for receiving and transmitting data coming from various stations located in the air, on the ocean, and on land. DATA COLLECTION 7 ‘s Station Launchable sounding probe | Radiosonde Airplane , ji. Meteorological center i = ® On Land In the Air FR! Data can be collected by Lf airplanes, satellites, or sounding probes. One single satellite can cover the entire surface of the Earth. Precise information helps prevent meteorological catastrophes such as hurricanes or flooding. RADIOSONDE 49,200 feet carries out airborne measurements of (15,000 m) temperature, pressure, and relative “ f humidity at different altitudes or . hs que ieee radiosonde can reach. atmospheric levels. It also indicates 32,800 feet the direction and speed of the wind. (10,000 m) METEOROLOGICAL AIRCRAFT — The height at which obtain temperature and humidity data they fly, near the and photograph particles contained in upper limit of the il the clouds. troposphere i -_ HURRICANE HUNTER P-3 AIRPLANE Parachutes Its Doppler radar has a resolution four lengthen the g time in the if air. te © Radiosonde ; sends information to 4 the base. times greater than the standard Doppler radar in conventional use. 14,000 feet (4,270 m) i r is the altitude that can be ‘el 1 200 feet reached by the P-3 aircraft. . if ¥ : (365 m) is the altitude that can be reached by a radio sounding probe. ARTIFICIAL SATELLITES provide images used for visualizing clouds and water vapor in the atmosphere and for measuring the temperature of land and ocean surfaces. 49,200 feet (13,000 m) is the altitude that can be reached by the G-IV airplane. LAUNCHABLE SOUNDING PROBE is launched from an airplane toward the ground. Its trajectory is followed as it relays information about wind velocity, temperature, humidity, and pressure. Better Forecasts Fl New models that measure changes in such Lefl variables as humidity, temperature, wind velocity, and cloud displacement may make it possible to improve forecasts by 25 percent over current ones. CURRENT Scale of 7 miles MODEL (12 km) per side IR@ The observations made at ground Boat aiding LLe@ level are more numerous than those probe made at higher altitudes. They include measurements of atmospheric pressure, temperature, humidity, wind direction and velocity, the extent and altitude of cloud cover, visibility, and precipitation. METEOROLOGICAL STATION bye Measurements at ground level permit the collection of partial data. Thermometers measure temperature, the hygrometer measures humidity, and the barometer measures atmospheric pressure. On the Sea FR Boats, buoys, and autonomous underwater vehicles help measure Le@ water temperature, salinity, density, and reflected sunlight. All the information gathered is sent to a meteorological center. AEROSONDE Pilotless weather aircraft capable of sending meteorological information at intervals of tenths of a second METEOROLOGICAL CENTERS They improve worldwide cooperation in meteorological observations, normalize the data obtained in different cities throughout the world, and promote the application of forecasts to various human activities. Strongest winds. “Scale of 1 mile They are not detected (1.3 km) per side by current models. OCEANOGRAPHIC SHIP gathers data on the direction and speed of the wind and the temperature of the air and water, among other things. ACOUSTIC SIGNAL : about conditions of the An acoustic depth oe sea in areas that are sounder sends out ene TORT overed by ships. sound waves to 7 lov measure the depth (2,000 m) of the water. AUTONOMOUS UNDER\ CLE abc MARITIME Images related to the physical : = - SOUNDING ocean water, such as the temperat : ; — PROBES density, are relayed to operators and its lo They are dropped depth tracked via the Global Positioning System (( from airplanes and then sink. RADAR STATION is utilized to measure the intensity with which rain, snow, or ice is falling. The radar sends radio waves that bounce off raindrops, and the return signal is displayed on a receiving screen. 72 METEOROLOGY Mobile Satellites eteorological satellites, which have been orbiting the Earth for more than 30 years, are an indispensable aid to scientists. Along with the images generated by these instruments, meteorologists receive data that can be used to prepare weather bulletins. These reports, circulated via the mass media, allow people all over the world to know the weather forecast. Moreover, the most advanced satellites are used to. study the characteristics of phenomena such as tropical cyclones (hurricanes, eines cyclones, and typhoons). e Polar Orbit They orbit from pole to pole with a synchronized period. As they move in their orbits, they scan swaths of the Earth's Geostationary . They orbit the Earth above.the Equator baile and are synchronized with the Earth's rotation—that is, as they orbit the Earth, surface. They pass over any given point they are always over the same geographic = A i twice a day. Their operational lifetime is point on the Earth's surface. ” : iis approximately éwo years. - = TWO ORBITS PER DAY ‘ 190 miles per second (305 km/sec) = is the velocity of a polar satellite at an altitude of 560 miles (900 km). J X-ray sensors POLAR ORBIT * 28,400 miles (45,700 km) Log periodic antenna GEOSTATIONARY Telemetry ORBIT - The velocity necessa antenna 22,245 miles to remain fixed over one (35,800 km) point on the Earth CHARACTERISTICS ORBITAL ALTITUDE 22,300 miles (35,900 km) ROTATIONAL VELOCITY | 100 RPM Magnetometer ORBITAL PERIOD 24 hours ACTIVE POLAR SATELLITES ACTIVE GEOSTATIONARY SATELLITES UHF antenna j | at : Image ohne "4 reception GOES 8 GOES 9 Sensors Transmitting antenna Solar NOAA-15 METEOR 3-5 METEOSAT-7 GMS all Receiving antenna WEATHER AND CLIMATE 73 GOES EAST =] Orbital altitude 22,370 miles (36,000 km) Weight 4,850 pounds (2,200 kg) Launch date 2001 : Orbit 75 - 88 feet (269 m) DARK ZONES Images,. Yesterday Low reflectivity and Today “The TIROS satellites (Television and , 2 Infra-Red Observation Satellite) of x . “the 1960s provided the first images of _ cloud systems. The modern GOES : Pi ‘ satellites (Geostationary Operational ‘ Environmental Satellites), which take more precise time and space measurements, provide higher-quality images of clouds, continents, and oceans. They also measure the humidity of the atmosphere and the temperature at ground level. * WHITE High clouds = VISIBLE IMAGE . » Oceans and continents have low albedo and appear as darker ORANGE areas. Areas with high albedo, in Dry and contrast, are clear and bright. ~ mountainous AREA OF GREATEST Pu HEAT EMISSION COMBINED IMAGES They are composed of infrared images (which permit differentiation of high and low clouds) and visible-light images (which measure the reflectivity of each climatic subsystem). INFRARED IMAGE represents infrared emissions or heat from the clouds and from the Earth's surface. Objects that are hotter appear darker. 76-77 84-85 78-79 86-87 80-31 88-89 82-83 90-91 76 CLIMATE CHANGE Gods and Rituals ’ redicting the weather was a subject of interest to all the early a civilizations that populated the Earth. Greeks, Romans, Egyptians, pre-Columbians, and Orientals venerated the gods of the Sun, the Moon, the heavens, the rain, storms, and the wind for centuries. In their own way, with rituals and praise, they tried to influence the weather to improve the bounty of the harvest. Egyptians les As in all ancient civilizations, the gods of weather were very much a part of Egyptian life. Civilization extended along the banks of the Nile, where water was crucial for survival—that is, where cities, temples, pyramids, and the entire economic life of the kingdom were concentrated. The weather influenced the rising of the river and the harvests. Therefore the Egyptians venerated Re (the god of the sun), Nut (the god of heaven), Seth (the god of the storm), and Toth (the god of the moon). ZEPHYRUS The Greek god of the west wind had an important presence. At times he was beneficial, and at other times catastrophic. Though incient Greeks were not hether the winds ale or female, they F did believe the winds had wings. 2 Greeks ; | The powerful Zeus was the king of the Greek I — and dispenser of divine justice. He was the soV@reign of heaven (his brothers Poseidon and Hades governed the ocean and the underworld, respectively). He carried a thunderbolt to represent his power, associated with the weather. Zeus lived on Mount Olympus, from where he could observe and often intervene in the affairs of humans. The Greeks believed that Poseidon, when annoyed, would break up the mountains and throw them into the sea to form islands. Uranus was a personification of heaven for the Greeks, and Apollo was the god of the sun, light, and creation. RE Egyptian sun god, the primordial creator. His center of worship was Heliopolis, or the City of the Sun. The Romans Greek oracles. The gods of weather were Jupiter (wise and just, who reigned over the earth), Apollo (the god of the sun), Neptune (the god of the sea and storms), and Saturn (the god of agriculture). Each god § had a specific function. As a result, any human activity could suffer or benefit from the attitude of the god in charge of that particular function. Thus, the urpose of ritual worship and sacrifice 9 the gods was to gain their favor. THE SCEPTER A symbol of command consisting of ornamented short sticks, the symbol of authority Pre-Columbians The pre-Columbian population believed water was a gift from the gods. For the Aztecs, Tlaloc was the god of rain, whereas the Incas called him Viracocha. Among the Mayans, he was known as Chac. He was the divinity of the peasants because water was the essential factor for stability and organization for these indigenous peoples. The calendar made it possible to forecast certain astrological events and rainstorms. THE LIGHTNING BOLT Jupiter reigned over the earth and heaven, and : he had the attributes of at an eagle, a lightning it bolt, and a scepter. The Romans worshiped many gods because they inherited them from the —= THE EAGLE Jupiter is the Roman supreme god, represented by the figure of the eagle. He is also first in wisdom and power. SURYA Hindu god of the sun. In India the sun personified as Surya SETH = was considered to be . harmful by the Egyptian god Dravidians of the south of the storm, but benevolent by the ee peoples of central regions. These peoples attributed great healing power to the god. dog, or a wolf. The son of Re and brother of Osiris. Mayan god of agriculture. The Mayans performed ceremonies petitioning Chac for rain when drought threatened the harvest. — which made the corn grow. FUJIN Japanese god of wind. Drawn as a dark monster, covered with leopard skin, he carried a bag of wind on his shoulders. WEATHER AND CLIMATE 77 TLALOC Venerated by the Aztecs, he was known as the provider because he had the power to bring rain, VIRACOCHA For the Incas, he was all powerful. Creator of the universe and of all the earth, he was linked with rays of light, thunder, lightning, and snow. ‘a wey a 2) The Orient Hinduism has various weather-related gods. The most popular is Surya (god of the sun). Next come Chandra (god of the moon), Indra (the god who governs heaven), and Parjanya (god of rain). Japanese mythology emphasizes the following: Fujin (god of wind), Amaterasu (goddess of the sun), Tsukiyomi (god of the moon), Amatsu-kami (god of heaven), Susanoo (god of storms), and Aji- Suki-Taka-Hi-Kone (god of thunder). 78 CLIMATE CHANGE Climate Zones ifferent places in the world, even if far removed from each other, can be grouped into climate zones—that is, into regions that are homogeneous relative to climatic elements, such as temperature, pressure, rain, and humidity. There is some disagreement among climatologists about the number and description of each of these regions, but the illustrations given on this map are generally accepted. @ Ice cap a PLAINS AND URBANIZATION si * Human settlements b - r Hudson —_ Bay Fe Fruit trees : bh i Natural brush 59 TEMPERATE HOUSTON, Us. 7 - ‘i Annual precipitation of oes ' © a Characterized by pleasant min : fe) abo oO je temperatures and moderate 300 eee a indo 4 Sia - rains throughout the year. , Pal are aa with long, 500 20 is the average annual rost-free periods. temperature of the Earth. Temperate regions are ideal 0 QIN TR A Tie, ° for most agricultural 250 MERIC =—™ products. “20 ' Atlantic 0 JFMAMJJASOND ‘i, Ocean ; = Pacific iT?) ; ‘* z i Ocean eo e TROPICAL High temperatures throughout RAINFOREST OR JUNGLE the year, combined with heavy brnicnliruite ‘a rains, are typical for this an aes hy DESERT climate. About half of the Lar Intermittent world's population lives in water regions with a tropical climate. Vegetation is abundant, and humidity is high because the water vapor in the air is not readily absorbed. Plentiful water sources Green and fertile soil MANAUS, BRAZIL Pes of Pampas fi aOR a ; arse uae be Maras °c vegetation r - vegetatiem 1,000 inches (1; mm) 40 j Patagonia 20 | . 500 G p () 4 250 DRY Lack of rain controls the arid climate in desert or semidesert regions, the result of the atmospheric circulation of air. In these regions, dry air descends, leaving the sky clear, with many hours of burning Sun. * Temperature and Rains O "FS FMAMJJASOND Fl The temperature of the Earth depends on the energy from the Sun, which is Le not distributed equally at all latitudes. Only 5 percent of sunlight reaches the surface at the poles, whereas this figure rises to 75 percent at the Equator. Rain is an atmospheric phenomenon. Clouds contain millions of drops of water, which collide to form larger drops. The size of the drops increases until they are too heavy to be supported by air currents, and they fall as rain. WEATHER AND CLIMATE 79 FORESTS AND LAKES MOSCOW, RUSSIA COLD : mm Annual precipitation °C é Coniferous F . Deciduous 1,000 25 inches (624 mm) fe Very cold winters, with forest ane a trees frequent freezing at night, are typical of these regions. 500 20 In these zones, the climate changes more often than 250 2 anywhere else. In most cold Juniper climate regions, the brus! -20 landscape is covered by (0) natural vegetation. JFMAMJJASOND 0 MOUNTAINOUS LIMATE ountains create their own imate that is somewhat independent of their location. Near the poles, the polar climate is dominated by very low temperatures, strong and irregular winds, and almost perpetual snow. The mountain peaks lack vegetation. Eternal snow on Caspian _ / = Black Sea - E Ce ~ the mountains bayepe : TUNDRA AND TAIGA Sparse conifers Arabian Sahara 4 Peninsula " Lichens &. Indian \ i Ocean \ O LHASA, TIBET ‘a Annual precipitation 5 ~ a mm 46 inches (408mm) — °C e _ __» 1,000 40 65°C aoe sa © a Fr = ' : ayes k oy 0 F _____ is the temperature decrease for OCEANIA” 250 i every 3,300 feet (1,000 m) of li -20 r ‘ i . Fo increase in elevation. Gane 0 Desert JFMAMJJASOND Dry soil PP Latitudes IL In 1936 Russian-born Ey Le climatologist Wladimir b62 K6ppen presented a climatological classification 408 KEY TIMBUKTU, MALI based on temperature and © Tropical forests, without adry season Glacial ae Cane precipitation. The table provides 20° Tropical savanna, with a dry winter ® Mountain climate ae e a broad OVERVIEW of the _ Steppes (semiarid) "Temperate cold continental F000 40 approximate distribution of o Bee (hot anime) 20 ely cea Ls boleiaiy lee: 2 Temperate humid, without a dry season Temperate cold continental 500 K6éppen classification does not 20 " (éold/eummet) discuss climatic regions but Temperate, with a dry winter 5 0 2 40° : © Temperate cold continental on rather the type of climate found © Temperate, with a dry summer (subarctic) ai in a given location according to re & Tundra specific parameters. 0 —— ee JFMAMJJASOND 80 CLIMATE CHANGE WEATHER AND CLIMATE 81 Paleoclimatology Se wa nl Leg Revolution. This graphic shows the progressive increase of CLOTHES halocarbon gases, methane, carbon dioxide, and nitrous oxide he climate of the planet is constantly changing. In approximately two million protect the scientists from between 1770 and 1990. It is clear that humans have contributed ; ee th th d it th inati : years, the Earth has gone through very cold periods, or glaciations, that lasted Gicmination of roe oe aaa eS thousands of years, alternating with warm periods. Today we live in an interglacial period that began some 10,000 years ago with an increase in average global temperature. These climatic changes can be analyzed over time periods fs i Year 1770 that exceed hundreds of thousands of years. Paleoclimatology uses records 350 fH Year 1990 derived from fossils, tree rings, corals, glaciers, and historical EVALUATION OF GREENHOUSE GASES ‘ 300 280 documents to study the climates of the past. e : 200 A ad Gas Measurement VOSTOK \ Latitude 7° § IF“) Vertical ice cores (or samples) allow ; Ll scientists to study the climate of 100 Y Longitude 105° E the past. The nearly 12-foot-long (3.6- i wF m) ice sample taken at the Russian Vostok station contains climatic 0.28 og 17 0.28 0.31 Surface area of the lake 5,405 square miles data ofols back 420,000 years, (14,000 sq km) nena Ee ona 4 5 a Halocarbons Methane Carbon Nitrous Inhabitants Only scientists parva eet, clk a F aa dioxide oxide other greenhouse gases in the if F Year of founding 1957 atmosphere. F : ii Temperature -67° F (-55° C) Surface 95% ice 1" 2 Composition SAMPLES IE The lower graphic shows the change in concentration of The cones wiarked’on the ail (Le methane in the atmosphere in the last 20,000 years until the y map are places where r J awe - end of the preindustrial era. The information collected was estimated ; Sue F —" on the basis of ice probes in Greenland and Antarctica. Dronning Maud Land scientists have gathered : - samples of ice, which were 7 a analyzed in the laboratories. * ‘ : ' fee an METHANE CONCENTRATION KEY “ Holocene ———________ ____________ Glaciation © South Pole @ Drillings Parts per me g lo Tce sheets b million 6 |. Greenland » Dominion Range a a © Antarctica 03 b Law Dome 9 - : Little oe Newall glacier ICE CORES America e Talos Dome Samples are taken at different depths. The surface snow becomes more compact in the lower layers. In the last layer, there are rocks and sand. Chronology ~ oe 0 2000 4.000 6000 8.000 10.000 12.000 14.000 16.000 18.000 20.000 §™_ During the history of the Earth's surface but also on animal _ | Time in years before the present Le@ Earth, climate has changed and plant life. This timeline shows the greatly, which has had a large effect planet's major climate changes and Feet | 174 177 | 6,024 6,027 | 10,007 10,010 not only on the appearance of the their consequences. (53 m) (54m) (1,836m) (1,837m) (3050m) (3,051 m) BY.A. = billions of years ago MY.A.= millions of yearsago _-Y.A. = years ago a I Se EE, SE) ET coy 4.5 BY.A. 2.7-1.8 BY.A. 544 MLY.A. 330 MY.A. 245 MLY.A. 65 MLY.A. 2 MY.A. 1.6 MY.A. 18,000 Y.A. 1,300-700 Y.A. 550-150 Y.A. In the beginning, Ice covers very Glacial climate in a Beginning of a long Drought and heat at the Paleocene and The cold continues; Interglacial. The begins the last Medieval warm period; Little Ice Age. Alpine there was heat. Life extensive areas. changing geography. period of glaciation. beginning. Abrupt beginning Eocene: very glaciation occurs beginning of a two- deglaciation. in some places warmer glaciers advance; more produces oxygen and Extinction of 70 percent Ice covers different cooling at the end of the warm climate. Middle every 100,000 years. million-year period. Increase in temperature; than today. Vikings severe winters. cools the climate. of marine species. geographic areas. period. Appearance of Eocene: cooling begins. melting of ice. arrive in Greenland... the dinosaurs. 82 CLIMATE CHANGE The Planet Warms Up % he increase in average temperature of the Earth's atmosphere and oceans is the result of - global warming. The main cause is an increase in carbon dioxide emissions by industrialized _ nations during the past 200 years. This phenomenon has increased the greenhouse effect. It is estimated that the average global temperature has increased more than 1.1° F (0.6° C) r. between the end of the 19th century and the year 2000. The consequences of this are already beginning to be noticed. Changes are observed in the global distribution of precipitation: there are regions where there is an increase of rain, and there are other regions where rain is diminishing. This generates, among other things, a redistribution —~ of fauna and flora, changes in ecosystems, and changes in human activities. — . ; = — = Product of Human Activity —— : = = —=— Our planet is going through an accelerated and carbon dioxide released into the atmosphere. ee — = process of global warming because of the Other aggravating human activities, such as —_ = ==accumulation in the atmosphere of a series of gases deforestation, have limited the regenerative capacity generated by human activity. These gases'not only of the atmosphere to eliminate carbon dioxide - = & =f L A a absorb the energy emitted by the surface of the through photosynthesis. These changes have caused a ~ % 4 Earth when it is heated by radiation coming from the _ slow increase in the average annual temperature of pis =a Sun, but they also strengthen the naturally occurring the Earth. Global warming, in-turn, causes humerous ~s greenhouse effect, whose purpose is to trap heat. One — environmental problems: desertification and: droughts i of the primary agents responsible for the growth of (which cause famines), deforestation (which further es ee the greenhouse effect is CO, (carbon dioxide), which increases climate change), floods, and the destruction ~, -_ - a Ki is artificially produced by burning fossil fuels (coal, of ecosystems. Because all these variables contribute Ue x a petroleum, and natural gas). Because of the intensive to global warming in complex ways, it is very difficult ‘ ae use of these fuels, there has been a notable increase to’predict with precision everything that will happen ~,’ ae =F in the quantity of both carbon and nitrogen oxides in the future. _ : .= 2 Z * - ail . S- ipsa yt a ee eee gt nie . = -, ‘ 1 ' . Pm i —s © = os = ? .- 1 4 a i ys * activities, suet as the burning "= , ™ ae of fuels and deforestation, ae : *) .» increase the concentration of L a 4 al. a 7 _ 7. 2 ‘ i — £ greenhouse gases: :* O oe tk LA A i a Li = rj |. = j 1 & F ., ib = _ » ‘ a = om, O . i a (29° C) - np at ‘ r . INCREASE OF The discoloration of coral occurs © j a PRIMARY when the temperature exceeds a hy GREENHOUSE .. 84° F (29° C). Algae are lost, the e © tes : coral weakens, and the color of ecole tiie | oT. : the coral fades. in - al - s “ | ‘ t a . ‘/, + PF aw e 3 . = a? * 7 a i - ) _ a *.. iS a ——" - ane a : =. , * és 3 be = ay ph - : ¥ a ea - - : > > “. a r “ "= = ¥ * a ri. +» ~~ | | ths 9 WEATHER AND CLIMATE 83 i Increase of the natural greenhouse * * effect of the «atmosphere \ ae The modified atmosphere retains. more heat emitted by the Earth and thus upsets the ¥ natural 3 = OZONE The ozone layer is in» © the sphere, above | the surface of planet. Ttacts asa powerful solar filter that prevents the passage of all but a small amount of ultaviol ea (UV). a 7 oe... THE TEMPERATURE OF THE EARTH THROUGH THE YEARS 5 GREAT The effects of global warming are already noticeable. It is estimated that the average globaltemperature BARRIER REEF has increased more than 1.1° F (0.6° C) between the end of the 19th century and the year 2000. Latitude 18°S 08 Longitude 147°E 06 04 Surface 1,430 miles (2,300 km) Oa Types of reefs 3,000 0 Age 300 million years 02 Discovery 1770, by James Cook 1860 1880 @ 1900 1920 1940 1960 1980 2000 . Ee. — = i = = =e, The 2 _— a - ————— a — “2 —_ — _ = 7 = — . = Sa E Te = = oa ee — a. * = - -- _— 7 oa l e l (0.6° C) APPROXIMATE INCREASE Of the Earth's global average temperature from 1860. A Different World With the changing patterns of precipitation and the shifting of air-pressure systems, some regions will become more humid, and others will. suffer droughts. One of the areas that will become drier will i be the western part of North America, where % desertification is already affecting agriculture. According to current forecasts, areas in high latitudes, closer to the poles, will go through a rapid warming in _, the next 40 years. Populations of animals will be forced . “to emigrate from their habitat to avoid extinction, and her animals, such as the polar bear and emperor penguin, will. have trouble subsisting as their habitats disappear: Ocean levels are rising between 0A and 0.8 jyinch (1 and 2 cm) per decade. Some Pacific island nations such as Tuvalu have contingency plans for evacuation. Another affected region is the Great Barrier 4 7 Reef of Australia. The coral is very sensitive to changes | oe sin. temperature. At temperatures above a normal 84° F * hon 7 [29 °C], the coral begin to.expel the algae on'which they depend for food, and then they die, ~~ = 84 CLIMATE CHANGE WEATHER AND CLIMATE 85 Accelerated Melting he climate is changing at a disconcerting speed. Glaciers are retreating, and sea level is rising because of a phenomenon known as thermal expansion. Scientists evaluating the planet's health deduce that this is the P. consequence of the Earth warming too rapidly. Human activity—in particular, the burning of fossil fuels and . the consequent accumulation of greenhouse gases in the atmosphere—has increased this trend. ARCTIC Latitude 66° N Longitude 0° 5,444,040 square miles (14,100,000 sq km) 13,100 to 6,600 feet (4,000 to 2,000 m) -58° F (-50° C) in winter Surface area Depth Temperature Why It Happens “ie The thawing at the poles is, in part, caused by the increase of greenhouse gases. They absorb the radiation emitted by the Earth and heat up the atmosphere, further increasing the Earth's temperature. The melting of glaciers puts more water in the oceans. North America EFFECT The Arctic heats up more rapidly than the global average because of the darkness of the soil and the water, which, once exposed, osphere. trap more heat from the a 5 Once exposed to the * air, the CO, is absorbed by the atmosphere. 1 Sunlight Where the ice is * reflects * the thinnest, or from cracked, radiation layers penetrates to the of ice. ocean. 3 Ice absorbs the heat fro * sunlight and releases a great quantity of trapped carbon particles. 4 These particles rise to * the surface, converted into CO. Via cracks in the ice, new marine routes can develop. When ships pass, the cracks rarely close, increasing the process of heat absorption and the release of CO,. of Greenland's ice is losing 3 feet (1 m) per year. POSSIBLE Pa FLOOD ZONES a , —— PROJECTIONS 2010-30 Summer sea ice, currently in decline, tends to diminish more and more rapidly in the future. In the period between 1993 and 2003, some coastlines were reduced by the rise in sea level. 2040-60 As the century progresses, sea ice continues to melt more and more along the coasts of the Arctic Ocean. OCEAN : ian ua leaves organic |” it jCURRENTS c, “material ex H) sed, The main cause of Pe \* tead of changes in ocean currents are changes in the water's salinity. ; 2070-90 radiation, absorbs it, increasing global — Ee temperature. Some scientific models ’ project that summer sea ice will be virtually eliminated during this century. starts in the Arctic™ and moves south, carrying cold water and loose iee. ADVANCING WATERS greenhouse gases will cause an increase in average global temperature of | between 3.2° and 7.2° F (1.8° and 4.0° C) over the next 100 years. — The accelerated melting raises sea level and floods coasts that have a gentle slope. As the sea level rises, the width of coastal areas diminishes. x + of the ice iy will be detrimental to people and Mw animals living in the Arctic. » 4 of the freshwater The amount of coastal = *° aoe area lost when sea level '" the world Sts rises 20 inches (50 cm) Antarctica. originates in the Gulf of Mexico and carries warm water to . 5 va . higher latitudes. a ie , Antarctica ee “a ihe The Antarctic loses 36 cubic miles (152 cu fed ~~ % e ean wl km) of ice per year, and the western ice sheet o a is becoming thinner at an accelerating pace. This is aan contributing to increases in sea level. Over the long —_— _— term, the effect on the climate could be disastrous for many regions of the planet. 86 CLIMATE CHANGE WEATHER AND CLIMATE 37 Toxic Rain urning fossil fuel releases into the air chemicals that mix with water vapor 4 and produce acid rain. The excess of sulfur dioxides and nitrogen dioxides in Sunlight in increases the speed at / bodies of water makes the development of aquatic life more difficult, ww wen eens substantially increasing the mortality rate of fish. Likewise, it affects vegetation on rapidly iediies ces land, causing significant damage in forested areas by, contamir animals a destroying substances vital for the soil the levels of toxic metals, such as « x © oy t Atmospheric circulation enhances F E i inl the dispersal of contaminants The regions most vulnerable to this phenomenon are In untreated drinking-water rese & over great distances. Mexico, Beijing, Cairo, Jakarta (Indonesia), and Los : el Angeles. * ee - : KF a > ACID RAIN YT A Fee tenon of water, fog, or a WHAT IS pH? - a Wie wy = dew and leaves the acids formed in wis GAS MIXTURES os the atmosphere on the ground. The degree of acidity of an aqueous solution. oe hb aeaae H e 5 It indicates the p e he concentration of hydrogen ions. ) Generated by burn ’ and the eruption c Acid rain * » ad + 2 oe Pi : i : ’ : 0 C0, sO, Petroleum Waste refineries incinerator ; r CONSEQUENCES Melting water carries ; ire FOR AGRICULTURE ao acidic particles that i i wl ; t “ Ve come from the rain. » , | Areas under cultivation are The leaves lose . not as vulnerable because they are generally improved ‘ ~ 'e isle / - : . by fertilizers that restore ! aft | a Pit Rel sald it nutrients to the soil an TYPES OF GASES EMITTED ~ a _» | CONSEQUENCES - peut alize. acidity. EFFECTS ON = é _ « .FORP yy F THE WATER im CO, (carbon dioxide) a ‘ 2 i, . A SO, (sulfur dioxide) The acidity of rainwater CH, (methane) —— j r plants; makihg them more q changes the neutral pH of a ; ' by vulnerable'to the effects of fr bodies of water. CO SO2 4 : : : wind, cold -drou . . = 7 - r on , ight,» . a : == H,S (hydrogen sulfide) . — . : F ; disease, and parasi ¥ i = 7 ie te 4 a = : =| Defoliation L : i : ie: (neutral) (acid) a oy —" C05, S0>, CHy, CO (carbon monoxide) NO, (nitrogen dioxide) In mountainous areas, fog and snow contribute significant quantities of the gases in question. The year when the phenomenon of acid rain was recorded for the first time Seriously affected species are lettuce and tobacco, especially because their leaves, destined for human consumption, must be of high quality. LEAVES This rain damages their surface, causing small lesions that alter the action of photosynthesis. [TY A SD LEVELAT WHICH FISH DO “+.¢) NOT SURVIVE IN THE WATER 88 CLIMATE CHANGE Weaker and Weaker WEATHER AND CLIMATE 89 UV RADIATION Ultraviolet radiation (UV) is a radiant form of energy that comes from the Sun. The various forms of radiation are classified according to the average wavelength measured in nanometers (nm), equivalent to one millionth of a millimeter. The shorter the wavelength, the greater the energy of the radiation. rtificial substances are destroying the ozone layer, which provides protection against ultraviolet rays. This phenomenon is observed every year in polar regions (primarily in the S, - vw i Ultraviolet radiation strikes with a molecule of ozone, destroy it, and form one chloromonoxide and one combines with an atom of free oxygen and releases J [1 Uitraviolet rays strike a molecule of oxygen which breaks up and releases its two atoms. 58 1) + HOW OZONE IS FORMED ~~ One of the released atoms combines with a molecule of oxygen. Together they form a molecule of ozone. In 1974, was discovered that industrial One of the released atoms combines with a molecule of oxygen. Together they form a molecule of ozone. $ Bak a ® @-%.- 5 a molecule of CFC gas. An atom of chlorine is released. CFC GASES are a family of gases with multiple applications. They are used in refrigeration chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs) affect the ozone layer. Chemists Mario Molina and F. Sherwood Rowland demonstrated that industrial CFCs are the gases that weaken the ozone layer by destroying the ozone molecules. oxygen atom. the chlorine atom. ry This atom, once again free, = 2 combines with os : another molecule of ozone. ~ THE NUMBER OF YEARS THAT CFC GASES SURVIVE IN THE ATMOSPHERE UV-A These rays easily Skin cancer. Damage to vision. Weakening of the immune system. Severe burns. Skin aging. UV-B are almost all absorbed = Destruction of phytoplankton. Inhibition of the photosynthesis process. Changes in growth. Reduced harvest yields. —_= Uv-C These are the most 2 enetrate the ozone by the ozone layer. damaging rays, but Antarctic) between August and October. Because of this, the Earth a fea erage oe ee Teen ear ies Pena aired is receiving more harmful rays, which perhaps explains the (28,000,000 sq km) Sul an dao net etna had ee er oh eae Slee 5 4 3 10,000,000 square miles skin cancer. the ozone layer. appearance of certain illnesses: an increase in skin cancer cases, (26,000,000 sq km) aia, . . 2004 damage to vision, and weakening of the immune system. @ Bene DOU ace rales sh (24,200,000 sq km) 10,400,000 square miles (27,000,000 sq km) THE SOUTHERN OZONE HOLE \ | ») The thinning of the ozone layer over | | the Antarctic is the result of a series | of phenomena, including the action of (I OZONE LAYER chlorine radicals, which cause the } i ' At an altitude of 12 to 19 miles (20 to 30 destruction of ozone. : km), the Earth is surrounded by a \ stratospheric ozone layer that is of vital importance for life on the surface. The layer is formed from oxygen molecules through 1 1 000 O00 (it the absorption of ultraviolet light from the 9 9M. i Sun. This reaction is reversible, that is, the It is popularly called a ozone can return to its natural state, oxygen. the ozone hole—a square miles os This oxygen is reconverted into ozone, decrease or abnormal (28,000,000 Sq km) e beginning a continuous process of formation thinning that occurs ib 5 and destruction of these components. in the ozone layer. is the size of the GIRE of attenuated ozone reached in 2000. Thelozonelayer functions as a natural filter, ' absorbing UV rays. (e —— ae HOW IT DETERIORATES Chlorine atoms combine The chloromonoxide = 715% OF SKIN CANCER IS ATTRIBUTED TO UV-B RADIATION. 1 1 Vi Diseases among farm animals. Destruction of links in the food chain. Increase of skin cancer. 90 CLIMATE CHANGE ean. From 1.8° to 3.6° F the ice is decreased by melting, and : .. i (1° to 2° C) KK freshwater flows into the ocean, 3 ~ : ¢ changing its salinity. : ; ‘ - e Solar rays ' - 1 is the length of time it THE ICY takes for a deciduous f forest to return to its COASTLINE _ o— CO, is ra ars natural state after it SURFACE OF» released a has heen laid to waste. THE EARTH THE EFFECT OF THINNING OF THE OZONE LAYER POLAR MELTING The ozone layer protects us from ultraviolet rays, 3 The snow-covered sea ice reflects but, because of the release of artificial substances, it between 85 and 90 percent of the is thinning out. This phenomenon is observed each year sunlight that strikes it, whereas sea over Antarctica between August and October and over water reflects only 10 percent. For the North Pole between October and May. Moreover, that reason, as the ice and snow melt, there is evidence that greater amounts of UV rays at many of today's coastlines will the Earth's surface are destroying or altering vegetable become submerged under water, marine curren cells and decreasing the production of oxygen. which will cause yet more ice to melt. 92 GLOSSARY Accretion Growth of an ice crystal in the atmosphere by direct capture of water droplets when the temperature is below 32° F (0° C). Acid Rain Rain resulting from the mixture of water vapor in the air with chemical substances typically released by the combustion of fossil fuels. Aerosol Aerosols are very small (liquid or solid) particles suspended in the atmosphere, with varied chemical composition. Aerosols play an essential role in the formation of clouds by acting as condensation nuclei. They are also important to the Earth's radiation balance since they help to increase the reflection and dispersion of radiation coming from the Sun. Air Mass Extensive volume in the atmosphere whose physical properties, in particular the temperature and humidity in a horizontal plane, show only small and gradual differences. An air mass can cover an area of a few million square miles and can have a thickness of several miles. Albedo A measure of the percentage of radiation reflected by a surface. Altitude Height relative to sea level. Anemometer Instrument for measuring wind velocity. Anticyclone Region where the atmospheric pressure is relatively high compared with neighboring regions. Normally the air above an anticyclone descends, which prevents clouds from forming at medium and high levels of the atmosphere. Hence an anticyclonic system is associated with good weather. Atmosphere The gaseous envelope that surrounds the Earth. Atmospheric Pressure The pressure or weight exerted by the atmosphere at a specific point. Its measurement can be expressed in various units: hectopascals, millibars, inches, or millimeters of mercury (Hg). It is also called barometric pressure. Aurora A phenomenon that is produced in the higher layers of the atmosphere at polar latitudes. An aurora occurs when there is a collision between the electrically charged particles emitted by the Sun and the magnetic field of the Earth. In the Northern Hemisphere, the phenomenon is called the aurora borealis, and in the Southern Hemisphere, it is known as the aurora australis. Avalanche A large mass of snow that flows down the side of a mountain. Barometer An instrument for measuring atmospheric pressure. A decrease in pressure usually means that storms are on the way. Increasing pressure indicates good weather. Beaufort Scale A scale invented at the beginning of the 19th century by a British sailor, Francis Beaufort, for estimating and reporting wind velocity. It is based on the different shapes taken by water waves at different wind velocities, and its graduation goes from O to 12. There is also a Beaufort scale for application on land based on observations of the wind's effect on trees and other objects. Carbon Dioxide An odorless, colorless gas emitted in the engine exhaust of automobiles, trucks, and buses. It is also produced by the combustion of coal and other organic material. Too much carbon dioxide in the atmosphere contributes to global warming. Chlorofluorocarbons Artificial chemical substances often contained in aerosols, refrigerants, and air conditioners. These chemicals are largely responsible for the damage to the ozone layer. Cirrus Wispy cloud formations at altitudes greater than 16,400 feet (5,000 m). Climate The average state of the meteorological conditions of a location considered over a long period of time. The climate of a location is determined by climatological factors: latitude, longitude, altitude, topography, and continentality. Cloud A visible mass of small particles, such as droplets of water and/or crystals of ice, suspended in the air. A cloud is formed in the atmosphere because of the condensation of water vapor onto solid particles of smoke, dust, ashes, and other elements called condensation nuclei. Coalescence The process of growth of drops of water ina cloud. Two drops collide and remain joined after the collision, constituting a bigger drop. This is one of the mechanisms that explains the growth of the size of drops in a cloud until precipitation (rain) is produced. Cold Wave A rapid drop in temperature to the point requiring special protective measures in agriculture, industry, commerce, or social activities. Condensation The process by which water vapor is transformed into liquid by the effect of cooling. Conduction The transfer of heat through a substance by molecular action or from one substance to another it is in contact with. Continentality The tendency of the interior regions of the continents to have more extreme temperature changes than coastal zones. Convection The process by which a heated surface transfers energy to the material (air, water, etc.) above it. This material becomes less dense and rises. Cooler material descends to fill in the void. Air rising as a result of the heating of the ground by the Sun's rays. Coriolis Force A fictitious or apparent force that applies when the Earth is used as a reference frame for motion. It depends upon the latitude and the velocity of the object in motion. In the Northern Hemisphere, the air is deflected toward the right side of its path, and in the Southern Hemisphere, the air is deflected toward the left side of its path. This force is strongest at the poles and does not exist at the Equator. Cyclone A climatic low-pressure system. Desert A hot or cold zone where annual precipitation is less than 1 inch (25 mm). Desertification A process that converts fertile land to desert through a reduction in precipitation. Dew Condensation in the form of small drops of water formed on grass and other small objects near the ground when the temperature has dropped to the dew point. This generally happens during the night. Dike An earthwork for containing or channeling a river or for protection against the sea. Drizzle A type of light liquid precipitation composed of small drops with diameters between 0.007 and 0.019 inch (0.2 and 0.5 mm). Usually drizzle falls from stratus-type clouds that are found at low altitudes and can be accompanied by fog, which significantly decreases visibility. Drought An abnormally dry climatic condition in a specific area where the lack of water is prolonged and which causes a serious hydrological imbalance. El Nino The anomalous appearance, every few years, of unusually warm ocean conditions along the tropical west coast of South America. Erosion Action in which the ground is worn down by moving water, glaciers, wind, or waves. Evaporation Physical process by which a liquid (such as water) is transformed into its gaseous state (such as water vapor). The reverse process is called condensation. WEATHER AND CLIMATE 93 Exxosphere The outermost layer of the Earth's atmosphere. Flash Flood Sudden flooding caused by the passage of a large quantity of water through a narrow space, such as a canyon or a valley. Fog Visible manifestation of drops of water suspended in the atmosphere at or near ground level; this reduces the horizontal visibility to less than a mile. It originates when the temperature of the air is near the dew point, and sufficient numbers of condensation nuclei are present. Forecast A statement about future events. The weather forecast includes the use of objective models based on a number of atmospheric parameters combined with the ability and experience of the meteorologist. It is also called weather prediction. Front The transition or contact zone between two masses of air with different meteorological characteristics, which almost always implies different temperatures. For example, a front occurs at the area of convergence between warm humid air and dry cold air. Frontogenesis The process of formation or intensification of a front. This happens when wind forces two adjacent masses of air of different densities and temperatures together, creating a front. It can occur when one of the masses of air, or both, move over a surface that reinforces their original properties. This is common on the east coast of North America or Asia, when a mass of air moving toward the ocean has a weak or undefined boundary. It is the opposite of frontolysis. 94 GLOSSARY WEATHER AND CLIMATE 95 Frost A covering of ice crystals on a cold object. Global Warming The heating of the atmosphere caused by increased concentrations of greenhouse gases due to human activities. Greenhouse Effect A phenomenon explained by the presence of certain components in the atmosphere (primarily carbon dioxide [CO,], water vapor, and ozone) that absorb a portion of the infrared radiation emitted by the surface of the Earth and simultaneously reflect radiative energy back to the surface. This process contributes to the increase in the average temperature near the surface. Gust A rapid and significant increase in wind velocity. The maximum velocity of the wind must reach at least 16 knots (18 miles per hour [30 km/h]), and the difference between the peaks and calm must be at least 10 knots (12 miles per hour [18 km/h]). It generally lasts less than 20 seconds. Hail Precipitation that originates in convective clouds, such as the cumulonimbus, in the form of masses or irregular pieces of ice. Typically hail has a diameter of 0.2 to 2 inches (5 to 50 mm) but may grow significantly larger. The smallest ice fragments—whose diameter is 0.2 inch (5 mm) or less—are called small hailstones, or graupel. Strong upward currents are required inside the clouds for hail to be produced. Heat Wave A period of abnormally hot and uncomfortable weather. It can last from a few days to a number of weeks. Hectopascal A pressure unit equal to 100 pascals and equivalent to 1 millibar—a millibar being equivalent to 0.031 inch (0.8 mm) of ordinary mercury. The millibar (mb) was the technical unit used to measure pressure until recently, when the hectopascal was adopted. The pascal is the unit for pressure in the MIS system, corresponding to the pressure exerted by the unit force (1 newton) on a unit surface (1 square meter—11 square feet); 1,000 hPa = 1,000 mb = 1 bar = 14.5 pounds per square inch. High A prefix describing cloud formations at an altitude between 6,560 and 16,400 feet (2,000 and 5,000 m). Humidity The amount of water vapor contained in the air. Hurricane The name for a tropical cyclone with sustained winds of 64 knots (74 miles per hour [119 km/h]) or more, which develops in the North Atlantic, the Caribbean, the Gulf of Mexico, and the Pacific Northeast. This storm is called a typhoon in the western Pacific and a cyclone in the Indian Ocean. Hygrometer An instrument used to measure humidity. Ice The solid state of water. It is found in the atmosphere in the form of ice crystals, snow, or hail. Jet Streams Air currents high in the troposphere (about 6 miles [10 km] above sea level), where the wind velocity can be up to 90 meters per second (200 miles per hour). This type of structure is seen in subtropical latitudes in both hemispheres, where the flow is toward the east, reaching its maximum intensity during the winter. Latitude A system of imaginary parallel lines that encircle the globe north and south of the Equator. The poles are located at 90° latitude north and south and the Equator at 0° latitude. Lightning A discharge of the atmosphere's static electricity occurring between a cloud and the ground. Mesosphere The layer of the Earth's atmosphere that lies above the stratosphere. METAR The name of the format airport meteorological bulletins are reported in. This includes data on wind, visibility, temperature, dew point, and atmospheric pressure, among other variables. Meteorology The science and study of atmospheric phenomena. Some of the subdivisions of meteorology are agrometeorology, climatology, hydrometeorology, and physical, dynamic, and synoptic meteorology. Microbarometer A very sensitive barometer that records pressure variations using a magnified scale. Mist Microscopic drops of water suspended in the air, or humid hygroscopic particles, which reduce visibility at ground level. Monsoon A seasonal wind that causes heavy rains in tropical and subtropical regions. Normal The standard value accepted for a meteorological element as calculated for a specific location over a specific number of years. The normal values refer to the distribution of data within the limits of the common occurrence. The parameters can include temperature (high, low, and divergences), pressure, precipitation (rain, snow, etc.), winds (velocity and direction), storms, cloud cover, percentage of relative humidity, and so on. Ocean Current The movement of water in the ocean caused by the system of planetary winds. Ocean currents transport warm or cold water over long distances around the planet. Orographic Rain Rain that results from the cooling of humid air as it crosses over a mountain range. Ozone Layer A layer of the atmosphere situated 20 to 30 miles (30 to 50 km) above the Earth's surface between the troposphere and the stratosphere. It acts as a filtering mechanism for ultraviolet radiation. Polar Front An almost permanent and very large front of the middle latitudes that separates the relatively cold polar air and the relatively warm subtropical air. Precipitation A liquid or solid, crystallized or amorphous particle that falls from a cloud or system of clouds and reaches the ground. Radiation The process by which energy propagates through a specific medium (or a vacuum) via wave phenomena or motion. Electromagnetic radiation, which emits heat and light, is one form of radiation. Other forms are sound waves. Seaquake An earthquake at the bottom of the ocean, causing a violent agitation of ocean waves, which in some cases reach coastal areas and cause flooding. Snow Precipitation in the form of white or transparent frozen ice crystals, often in the form of complex hexagons. In general, snow falls from stratiform clouds, but it can also fall from cumulus clouds, usually in the form of snowflakes. Stratosphere The layer of the atmosphere situated above the troposphere. Stratus Low clouds that form layers. They often produce drizzle. Synoptic Map A map that shows weather conditions of the Earth's surface at a certain time and place. Thermal Inversion An inversion of the normal reduction in temperature with an increase in altitude. Thermometer An instrument for measuring temperature. The different scales used in meteorology are Celsius, Fahrenheit, and Kelvin (or absolute). Tornado A column of air that rotates with great violence, stretching between a convective cloud and the surface of the Earth. It is the most destructive phenomenon in the atmosphere. Tornadoes can occur, under the right conditions, anywhere on Earth, but they appear most frequently in the central United States, between the Rocky Mountains and the Appalachian Mountains. Tropical Cyclone A cyclone without fronts, it develops over tropical waters and has a surface circulation organized and defined in a counterclockwise direction. A cyclone is classified, according to the intensity of its winds, as a tropical disturbance (light ground-level winds), tropical depression (maximum ground-level winds of 38 miles per hour [61 km/h), tropical storm (maximum winds in the range of 39 to 73 miles per hour [62 to 112 km/h)), or hurricane (maximum ground-level winds exceeding 74 miles per hour [119 km/h). Troposphere The layer of the atmosphere closest to the ground, its name means “changing sphere,” and this layer is where most changes in weather take place. This is also where most of the phenomena of interest in meteorology occur. Turbulence Disorderly motion of air composed of small whirlwinds that move within air currents. Atmospheric turbulence is produced by air ina state of continuous change. It can be caused by thermal or convective currents, by differences in terrain and in the velocity of the wind, by conditions along a frontal zone, or by a change in temperature and pressure. Weather The state of the atmosphere at a given moment, as it relates to its effects on human activity. This process involves short-term changes in the atmosphere in contrast to the great climatic changes that imply more long-term changes. The terms used to define weather include cloudiness, humidity, precipitation, temperature, visibility, and wind. Windward The direction from which the wind is blowing. 96 INDEX WEATHER AND CLIMATE 97 Index A absorption, 11 acid rain, 86-87 gas emissions, 86 gas mixtures, 86 ozone layer, weakening, 88-89 pH, 87 photochemical reaction, 87 plant consequences, 86 soil consequences, 87 vulnerable regions, 87 water consequences, 87 advection fog, 45 aerosonde pilotless weather aircraft, 71 Africa global warming, 91 potable water, 21 agriculture acid rain, 87 drought, 51 flooding, 48 gods and rituals, 76, 77 monsoons, 30 tornadoes, 53 air atmosphere, 10-11 circulation changes, 12-13 collision, 14-15 currents, 13 displacement, 12 weather forecast, 70 aircraft, weather, 71, 81 albedo, solar radiation, 8, 9 almanac, weather forecasting, 65 altocumulus cloud, 39 altostratus cloud, 39 anabatic wind, 26 Andes Mountains, 24-25 anemometer, 67 aneroid barometer, 66 animal acid rain, 86, 87 coral, 82, 83 ozone layer thinning, 89 weather folklore, 64, 65 Antarctica, 80, 81, 85 anticyclone, 12, 13, 51, 68 Arctic, 84-85 argon, 10 ash (volcanic), 9 ash tree, weather folklore, 65 Asia EI Nifio, 33, 35 global warming, 91 monsoons, 28-29, 30-31 potable water, 21 atmosphere, 8 climate change, 90 cooling, 9 disturbances, 14 dynamics, 12-13 global warming, 83 layers, 10-11 paleoclimatology, 80-81 See also ozone layer atmospheric pressure, 66 aurora, 10, 16-17 Australia drought, 50 potable water, 21 autonomous underwater vehicle, 70 B barograph, 66 barometer, 66 biosphere, 8 C calcareous soil, 87 carbon dioxide (CO,), 10 emissions, 82, 83, 86 increases, 84, 90 See also greenhouse gas CFC gas (chlorofluorocarbon gas), 88 chaparral, 25 Chinook wind, 26 cirrocumulus cloud, 39 cirrostratus cloud, 38 cirrus cloud, 38, 39 city, heat islands, 27 climate K6ppen classification, 79 temperature and rain, 78 types, 78-79 climate change, 74-75, 90-91 causes and effects, 91 human activity, 81, 82, 90 climate zone, 78-79 desert, 78 forest and lakes, 79 polar mountainous climate, 79 rainforest, 78 tundra and taiga, 79 climatic system, 6-7, 8-9 cloud, 38-39 electrical storms, 46-47 formation, 12, 14, 20, 38-39 hurricanes, 56 interior, 39 lightning inside, 46 rain formation, 40-41 types, 11, 38, 39 weather folklore, 65 cloud street, 39 coastal breeze, 26, 27 cold climatic zone, 79 cold front, 14, 68 collision (air), 14-15 condensation, 7, 14, 20, 24 nuclei, 40 precipitation, 8 continentality effect, 27 convection, 7, 38 convergence, 13, 38 cooling (atmosphere), 9 coral, 82, 83 Coriolis effect, 12, 14, 22 cosmic ray, 11 cryosphere, 8, 9 crystal, water formation, 42 snow, 42-43 types, 42, 43 cumulonimbus cloud, 38, 52 cumulus cloud, 14, 38 current air flow, 13 cyclonic, 50 formation, 22-23 geostrophic balance, 22 gulf stream, 85 jet stream, 12, 13, 14 Labrador, 85 lake, 23 ocean: See ocean current subpolar arctic circulating system, 23 wind influence, 22 cyclone, 5, 12, 13, 28, 36, 57 cyclonic current, 50 cyclonic zone, 12-13 D data recorder (weather prediction), 67 deep ocean current, 22-23 deforestation, 82, 91 depression, 13, 58, 68 desert, 50, 78 desertification, 5, 50, 82, 83 dew, 42, 44, 65 dew point, 24, 43 dike, 48, 58 divergence, 13 donkey, weather folklore, 64 droplet, formation, 20 drought, 50-51 global warming, 82 water runoff, 21 dry-bulb thermometer, 67 dry climatic zone, 78 Dust Bowl, droughts, 50 E Earth climate change, 90-91 climatic zones, 78-79 equilibrium, 8-9 global warming, 82-85 ocean currents, 22-23 paleoclimatology, 80-81 rotation, 12 satellite image, 6-7 temperature, 82, 90-91 ecosystem destruction, 82 foundations, 8 Ekman spiral, ocean currents, 22 EI Nifio, 32-33 conditions during, 32 drought, 32-33 effects, 19, 34-35 flooding, 34-35 electrical storm, 46-47 tornadoes, 52 embankment, 48 environment, components, 6 Equator, atmospheric dynamics, 12 erosion, 21 Europe global warming, 91 potable water, 21 evaporation, 7, 8, 20 evaporimeter, 66 exosphere, 10, 16 F Ferrel cell, 12-13 field capacity, soil, 50 flood control, 48 flood plain, 48 flooding, 48-49 causes, 48 dikes, 48, 58 EI Nifio, 34-35 embankment, 48 global warming, 82, 85 Hurricane Katrina, 58 land, 48-49 monsoons, 30-31 zones, 85 fog, 44-45 formation, 44 radiation, 45 types, 45 visibility, 44 folklore, weather: See weather folklore forecast: See weather forecast fossil fuel global warming, 91 greenhouse effect, 82 freshwater, 21, 74 front, 38 cold, 14, 68 occluded, 15, 68 size, 15 stationary, 15 warm, 14, 15, 68 weather map symbol, 14, 68 frontal fog, 45 frost, 43 Fujita-Pearson scale, 53, 54 98 INDEX WEATHER AND CLIMATE 99 G gas CFC, 88 density, 10 greenhouse, 8, 9, 84, 90 measurement in paleoclimatology, 80 geopotential weather map, 69 GEOS (Geostationary Operational Environmental Satellite), 72-73 geostrophic balance, 22 glacier accelerated melting, 74-75, 84-85 Alaska, 74-75 global equilibrium, 8-9 Global Positioning System (GPS), 70 global warming, 82-83 accelerated melting, 84-85 advancing vegetation, 85 Antarctica, 85 cause, 82 climate changes, 5, 82 effects, 82-83 human activity, 82, 84 predictions, 83 rising ocean levels, 5, 82-83, 85 gravity, water circulation, 9 Great Barrier Reef, 83 greenhouse effect, 9, 10, 82-83, 91 greenhouse gas, 8, 9, 81, 82, 84, 90 Greenland, 81, 84 ground-level weather map, 68 gulf stream, 84-85 H Hadley cell, atmospheric dynamics, 12, 13 hail, 14, 40, 43 Halley, Edmund, 68 heat, greenhouse gas, 8 heat island, 27 heliophanograph, 66 high pressure, 12 See also anticyclone high pressure ridge, 69 hoar frost, 43 human activity climate change, 81, 82, 90 pollution, 10, 24, 90 humidity, measuring instruments, 67 hurricane, 34-35, 56-57 damages, 5, 36, 58-59 danger zone, 57 eye and eye wall, 56 formation, 56, 57 hurricane hunter P3 airplane, 71 preparation, 37, 60-61 rotation, 56 safety measures, 60-61 Saffir-Simpson category, 57 tracking, 37 wave height, 57 wind activity, 57 Hurricane Elena, satellite image, 36-37 Hurricane Georges, 4 hurricane hunter P3 airplane, 71 Hurricane Katrina, 58-59 Hurricane Rita, satellite image, 62-63 hydroelectric plant, 49 hydrologic cycle, 20-21 hydrometeor, 42 hydrosphere, 8, 21 hygrothermograph, 67 I-K ice, 9 polar, 5, 10, 84-85, 90 ice core, paleoclimatology, 80, 81 Intertropical Convergence Zone (ITCZ), 12, 28 inversion fog, 45 isobar, 13, 68 isotherm, 69 jet-stream current, 12, 13 Rossby wave, 14 katabatic wind, 26 Képpen climate classification, 79 L La Nifia conditions during, 33 effects, 32, 35 Labrador current, 85 lake, seasonal water circulation, 23 land temperature distribution, 26-27, 29 weather data, 70 lenticular cloud, 39 lightning, 46-47 electrical potential, 47 origin, 46 types, 46 lightning rod, 47 lithosphere, 8, 9 Lorenz, Edward, 5 low pressure, 12, 13, 46, 56, 68 See also cyclone low pressure trough, 69 M magnetosphere, 16, 17 map, weather: See weather map maritime sounding probe, 71 maximum thermometer, 67 mercury barometer, 66 mesosphere, 11 meteor, 11 meteorological aircraft, 71, 81 meteorological buoy, 71 meteorological shelter, 67 meteorological station, 67, 70 meteorology, 62-73 methane, concentration, 80-81, 90 minimum thermometer, 67 mist, 44, 45 monsoon, 19, 28-29, 30-31 areas affected, 28 effects, 30-31 formation in India, 28-29, 31 intertropical influence, 28 North America, 28 Moon, weather folklore, 65 mountain, 24-25 Andes, 24-25 barrier to wind and moisture, 9 climatic effects, 24-25 climatic zones, 79 descending wind, 25 high, 11 major ranges, 25 monsoons, 29 uneven mountainside, 25 vegetation, 25 winds, 26 mythology and religion, 76-77 Aztecs, 77 Egyptians, 76 Greeks, 76 Hindus, 77 Incas, 77 Japanese, 77 Mayans, 77 Orient, 77 pre-Columbians, 77 Romans, 76-77 N nimbostratus cloud, 39 nitrogen, 10, 17 noctilucent cloud, 11 North America EI Nifio, 35 global warming, 90 monsoons, 28 potable water, 21 tornadoes, 53, 54-55 Northern Hemisphere, 22, 28, 52, 56 O oak tree, weather folklore, 64-65 occluded front, 15, 68 ocean circulation, 9 current: See ocean current El Nifio, 32-33, 34-35 hurricanes, 56 level changes, 5, 32, 83. 85 temperature distribution, 26-27, 29 water return, 20 weather data, 70 ocean current, 22-23 changes, 84 deep, 22, 23 formation, 22-23 gulf stream, 85 Labrador, 85 surface, 22 oceanographic ship, 70 oxygen, 10, 17, 88 ozone, 10, 11, 83, 88, 89 ozone layer, 88-89 atmosphere, 11 CFC gas, 88 deterioration, 88 global warming, 83 thinning, 90 weakening, 88-89 P paleoclimatology, 80-81 chronology, 80-81 gas measurement, 80 human activity, 81 methane concentration, 81 samples, 80, 81 permafrost, 9 perspiration, 20 pH, acid rain, 87 photochemical reaction, 87 photosynthesis, 9, 82 pinecone, weather folklore, 64 plant acid rain, 86 flooding, 48 hydrologic cycle, 20 ozone layer, 89 weather folklore, 64, 65 polar cell, 13 polar ice cap, 10 melting, 5, 84-85, 90 polar mountainous climate, 79 pollution, 11, 24 See also acid rain precipitation condensation, 8 droplet formation, 20 formation, 14, 21, 24, 40-43 rain: See rain sleet, 42 snow, 14, 25, 40, 42-43 snowfall record, 42 pressure high, 12, 69 low, 12, 13, 68 psychrometer, 67 ()-R radar station, 71 radiation solar, 8, 9, 11, 16 100 INDEX WEATHER AND CLIMATE 101 ultraviolet, 7,88, 89 radiation fog, 45 radiosonde, 70, 71 rain, 18, 78 acid, 87 causes, 14, 25 climatic zones, 78 flooding, 48 formation, 40-41 global warming, 82 importance, 18-19 measuring instruments, 67 monsoons, 19, 28-29 torrential, 19, 49 toxic, 86-87 typhoons, 19 rain gauge, 67 rain meter, 67 rainforest, 78 religion: See mythology and religion rocket probe, 10 Rossby wave, 14 rotation, Earth, 12 S safety, hurricanes, 60-61 Saffir-Simpson category, hurricanes, 56 salt water (sea water), 21, 90 satellite, 72-73 geostationary, 72 infrared images, 71 meteorology, 10, 37, 62-63, 70, 71 military, 10 mobile, 72-73 polar orbit, 72 season, lake circulation variations, 23 seaweed, weather folklore, 64 shooting star, 11 silicate soil, 87 skin cancer, ozone layer weakening, 89 sky, colors, 16-17 sleet, 42 snail, weather folklore, 65 snow, 14, 25, 40, 42-43 snowfall, record annual, 42 soil acid rain consequences, 87 calcareous, 87 drought, 50 field capacity, 51 flooding effects, 48 saturated, 50 silicate, 87 water, proportion of, 51 wilting, 51 solar radiation, 8, 9, 16 absorption, 11 reflection, 11 solar wind, 16, 17 sounding probe, launchable, 71 South America EI Nifio, 32-33, 35 global warming, 90 potable water, 21 Southern Hemisphere, 22, 28, 52, 56 stationary front, 15, 68 stratocumulus cloud, 39 stratosphere, 11 stratus cloud, 38, 39 subpolar arctic current, 23 Sun, 9 cosmic ray, 11 radiation, 8-9 sunlight measurement, 66 ultraviolet ray, 10-11 volcanic eruption, 9 surface ocean current, 22 swallow (bird), weather folklore, 64 T taiga, 25, 79 temperate zone, 78 temperature atmospheric dynamics, 12 climate zones, 78 differences over land and ocean, 26-27, 29 earth, over the years, 82, 90 global warming, 82-83 greenhouse effect, 10 measuring instruments, 67 variation, 7 thermal expansion, 84 thermal inversion, 11 thermometer, types, 67 thermosphere, 10 thunder, 46 tide, 22 toad, weather folklore, 64 topography, irregularities, 12 tornado, 52-53 causes, 52 damages, 5, 52, 54-55 formation, 52 Fujita-Pearson scale, 53, 54 ten most devastating, 55 United States, 54-55 where and when, 53 wind velocity, 53 toxic rain: See acid rain trade winds, 12, 32 transpiration, 20 Tri-State tornado (United States), 54-55 tropical cyclone, 36-37 See also cyclone; hurricane; typhoon tropical depression, 58 tropical zone, 78 troposphere, 11, 38 tundra, 25, 79 typhoon, 19, 36, 57 U-V ultraviolet radiation (UV radiation), 88, 89 CFC gas, 88 ozone, 7,90 types, 89 ultraviolet ray, 10-11 valley, wind, 26 velocity, wind minimum/maximum, 13 tornado, 52 visibility, fog, 44 volcanic eruption, 9 W warm front, 14, 15, 68 water, 7, 20-21 accumulation, 48-49 acid rain consequences, 87 availability, 21 circulation, 9 clouds, 39 distribution worldwide, 21 droplet formation, 20 dry zones, 50 evaporation measurement, 66 gods and rituals, 76-77 gaseous state, 20 liquid state, 21 ocean currents, 22-23 return to ocean, 20 runoff, 21 scarcity, 50-51 seasonal lake circulation, 23 soil saturation, 50 solid state, 21 types, 20, 21 underground circulation, 20-21 water cycle, 20-21 water vapor, 10, 20 weather aircraft, 71, 81 weather folklore, 64-65 almanac forecast, 65 clear sunset, 65 clouds, 65 Moon, 65 morning dew, 65 signs from plants and animals, 64, 65 weather prediction, 65 wind, 65 weather forecast, 70-71 acoustic signal, 70 aerosonde pilotless weather aircraft, 71 air, 70 almanacs, 65 artificial satellites, 71, 72-73 autonomous underwater vehicle, 70 better forecasts, 71 data collection, 70 factors affecting, 5 hurricane hunter P3 airplane, 71 land, 70 launchable sounding probe, 71 maritime sounding probe, 71 meteorological aircraft, 71, 81 meteorological buoy, 71 meteorological centers, 71 meteorological station, 70 oceanographic ship, 70 radar station, 71 radiosonde, 70, 71 sea, 70 sources, 70 weather map, 68-69 cold front, 14, 68 history of, 68 isobar, 68 nomenclature, 68 overcast sky, 69 symbols, 68 upper-air, 69 upper-level, 69 warm front, 14, 68 wind velocity, 69 winds, 69 weather prediction, 4-5 anemometer, 67 artificial satellites, 72-73 barograph, 66 barometers, 66 data recorder, 67 evaporimeter, 66 heliophanograph, 66 hygrothermograph, 67 information compilation, 66-67 meteorological shelter, 67 psychrometer, 67 rain gauge, 67 rain meter, 67 thermometers, 67 weather folklore, 64-65 weather maps, 68-69 weather stations, 67 weather vane, 67 workplace, 66-67 weather station, 67 weather systems analysis, 13 weather vane, 67 wet-bulb thermometer, 67 whirlwind, 26 wilting, water scarcity, 51 wind, 7,8 coastal breeze, 26, 27 cold fronts, 14 continentality effect, 27 direction, 13 hurricane, 57 measuring instruments, 67 monsoon: See monsoon mountains, 24-25, 26 ocean currents, 22 solar: See solar wind tides, 22 tornado: See tornado trade, 12, 32 types, 26 valleys, 26 velocity, 13, 69 weather maps, 69 whirlwind, 26 World Meteorological Organization, 70 WEATHER AND CLIMATE Britannica Mlustrated Science Library the vevore wie es Britannica } ta Bit : oA ONY hid'yy GE pues About the pagination of this eBook Due to the unique page numbering scheme of this book, the electronic pagination of the eBook does not match the pagination of the printed version. To navigate the text, please use the electronic Table of Contents that appears alongside the eBook or the Search function. For citation purposes, use the page numbers that appear in the text. EVOLUTION AND GENETICS Britannica Illustrated Science Library Britannica Illustrated Science Library © 2008 Editorial Sol 90 All rights reserved. Idea and Concept of This Work: Editorial Sol 90 Project Management: Fabian Photo Credits: Corbis, ESA, G Simpson/Getty Images, Graphi Cassan etty Images, Micheal c News, NASA, National Geographic, Science Photo Library Illustrators: Guido Arroyo, Pab Gustavo J. Caironi, Hernan Cajfiellas, Leonardo César, José Luis Corsetti, Vanina Farfas, Manrique Celina Hilbert, Inkspot, Jorge Iva Diego Martin, Jorge Martinez, Ma Fernandez Buente, Joana Garrido, ovich, Ivan Longuini, Isidro Lépez, co Menco, Marcelo Moran, Ala de Mosca, Diego Mourelos, Laura Mourelos, Pablo Palastro, Eduardo Pérez, Javier Pérez, Ariel Piroyans Marcel Socias, Néstor Taylor, Trebol Animation, Juan Venegas, Constanza Vicco, Coralia Vignau, Gustavo Yamin, 3DN, 3D0M studio Composition and Pre-press Services: Editorial Sol 90 Translation Services and Index: Publication Services, Inc. Portions © 2008 Encyclopzedia Britannica, Inc. Encyclopaedia Britannica, Britannica, and the thistle logo are registered trademarks of Encyclopeedia Britannica, Inc. Britannica Illustrated Science Library Staff Editorial Michael Levy, Executive Editor, Core Editorial John Rafferty, Associate Editor, Earth Sciences William L. Hosch, Associate Editor, Mathematics and Computers Kara Rogers, Associate Editor, Life Sciences Rob Curley, Senior Editor, Science and Technology David Hayes, Special Projects Editor Art and Composition Steven N. Kapusta, Director Carol A. Gaines, Composition Supervisor Christine McCabe, Senior I/lustrator Media Acquisition Kathy Nakamura, Manager Copy Department Sylvia Wallace, Director Julian Ronning, Supervisor Information Management and Retrieval Sheila Vasich, Information Architect Production Control Marilyn L. Barton Manufacturing Kim Gerber, Director o Aschei, Carlos Francisco Bulzomi, ky, Fernando Ramallo, Ariel Roldan, Encyclopzedia Britannica, Inc. Jacob E. Safra, Chairman of the Board Jorge Aguilar-Cauz, President Michael Ross, Senior Vice President, Corporate Development Dale H. Hoiberg, Senior Vice President and Editor Marsha Mackenzie, Director of Production International Standard Book Number (set): 978-1-59339-797-5 International Standard Book Number (volume): 978-1-59339-802-6 Britannica Illustrated Science Library: Evolution and Genetics 2008 Printed in China ENC YC OR, ZAIDI A Britannica www.britannica.com volution ENeLICS | ( ) ontents PHOTOGRAPH ON PAGE 1 In vitro fertilization. The image shows the moment at which the sperm DNA is injected into an ovule. ‘S Myths and i Scientific : Evidence ‘ = : . ‘A ee Page 6 Human Evolution Page 38 Mechanisms of Heredity | a " Page 54 ——_ ~~ The Age of Genetics Page 68 FACES OF THE PAST The skull of Australopithecus (below) shows a reduced cerebral portion and a strong jaw. To the right, Cro-Magnon, a representative of modern humans, exhibits a more evolved skull with greater cerebral capacity. Yesterday, Today, and Tomorrow hen did humans appear? What is it VV that makes us different from the rest of the animals? In what way did language develop? Why is it so important to have deciphered the sequence of the human genome? This book offers answers to these and many other questions about the mysteries and marvels of human evolution. Scientists maintain that modern humans originated in Africa because that is where they have found the oldest bones. In addition, genetics has just arrived at the same conclusion, since the DNA studies have confirmed that all humans are related to the African hunter-gatherers who lived some 150 million years ago. Studying the fossils, the experts also found that human skulls from two million years ago already show the development of two specific protuberances that in the present-day brain control speech, the capability that perhaps was as important for early humans as the ability to sharpen a rock or throw a spear. Today thanks to science it is possible to affirm that the brain has changed drastically in the evolutionary course of the species, reaching a greater complexity in humans. This has facilitated, among other things, the capacity to store information and the flexibility in behavior that makes a human an incredibly complex individual. The purpose of this book is to tell you and show you in marvelous images many of the answers that people have found throughout history, through their successes, failures, and new questions. These new questions have served to shape the world in which we live, a world whose scientific, technological, artistic, and industrial development surprises and at times frightens us. History is full of leaps. For thousands of years nothing may happen, until all of a sudden some new turn or discovery gives an impulse to humankind. For example, with the domestication of animals and the cultivation of plants, a profound societal revolution occurred. This period of prehistory, called the Neolithic, which dates to 10 million years ago, opened the way for the development of civilization. With the possibility of obtaining food without moving from place to place, the first villages were established and produced great demographic growth. hands explains all this in an accessible way. Here you will also find information about the latest discoveries related to the structure of DNA, the molecule of heredity, that Opens new areas of investigation. It contributes to the study of clinical and forensic medicine and posits new questions about the origin of life and where we are headed as humans. The possibility of untangling the sequence of the human genome is not only important in trying to explain why we are here and to explore our evolutionary past, but it also offers the possibility of altering our future. In the decades to come, the application of genetic therapy will allow, among other things, the cure of genetic disorders caused by defective genes. In addition, the alternative of knowing 7 he book that you have in your beforehand what diseases a person could develop will be extremely valuable in the field of health, because we will be able to choose examinations and treatments according to individual needs. Another very promising area of medical research involves the use of stem cells that have the unique capacity to be used at some future date to regenerate organs or damaged tissues. Do not wait any longer. Turn the page and begin to enjoy this book, which may be a point of departure in your own adventure in learning. @ BLACK SHEEP 8-9 8 MYTHS AND SCIENTIFIC EVIDENCE Various Beliefs efore the emergence of scientific theories, most people in the world had their own versions of the origin of the world and of humankind expressed primarily in the form of myths. Many of them have reached us through the teachings of different religions. In many cases, the origin of the world and of humankind relates to one or several creator gods or demigods; in other cases, there is no beginning and no end. With regard to the origin of the human race (the word “human” shares the same root as the Latin word humus, meaning “earth”), there is a Central African legend that links humans to monkeys. The Matter of Creation India is a multicultural, “ie agricultural society where much of its thousand-year-old rituals still exist. However, its sacred texts were written at very different times, from 1,000 BC (the Rigveda) to the 16th century AD (the Puranas), and they offer different versions of the origin of humankind. One of them even tells of a primal man (Purusha) from whom gods originated and from whose body parts the different castes arose. In this culture, social classes are strongly differentiated. BRAHMA, THE CREATOR Another version states that the first human emerged directly from the god Brahma, whose human image is represented by this statue. HERMAPHRODITE According to more recent texts (from the 15th century), the first person Brahma created was called Manu, and he was a hermaphrodite. The story goes that as a result of his dual sexual condition, he had a number of children, both males and females. ee hy EVOLUTION AND GENETICS 9 PROPORTION The size of the heads reveals the importance given to the symbols. YORUBA MASK represents the two sexes. Africa: How Monkeys Became Human In Africa, the continent that is today believed to be the cradle of the human species, there are several myths that account for the origin of mankind. One of these actually interweaves it with the origin of the monkey. It tells how the creator god Muluku made two holes in the Earth from where the first woman and the first man sprouted and how he taught them the art of agriculture, but they neglected it and the Earth dried up. As punishment, Muluku banished them to the rainforest and gave them monkey tails, and he removed the tails from monkeys and ordered them to be “human.” Disobedient % Judaism, Islam, and the various forms of | Christianity adhere to the book of Genesis in the Bible, according to which the world was created by God in seven days. According to this account, the first human was created on the sixth day “in the image and likeness” of the Creator. The intention was for this new creature to EDEN The biblical story locates the earthly Paradise in Mesopotamia. In Paradise, all the living species lived, and humans had only to take what they needed. HUMAN SHAPES Christianity represented the Creator and the angels in human form, but Judaism and Islam did not assign a human likeness to their God. The Divine Breath | The story explains that God gave life to inert matter through either breath, as shown in the image above, or touch, as shown in this fragment of the Final Judgment, painted on a chapel ceiling in the Vatican in 1541. In many CREATION The work of Michelangelo is found in the Sistine Chapel in the Vatican. rule over nature. The first woman, Eve, emerged from one of Adam's ribs. Because they disobeyed the Creator by eating one of the forbidden fruits, Adam and Eve were banished from Paradise. Condemned to work the soil and for woman to suffer during childbirth, they had three sons, from whom the human race descended. THE TWO SEXES Although Genesis is somewhat contradictory on this point, the dominant version states that God created Eve from one of Adam's ribs while he slept. That is what the Nuremberg Bible illustrates. FORBIDDEN FRUIT According to the biblical account, Adam and Eve ate the fruit of the Tree of Knowledge of Good and Evil. other cultures, life is also identified with the breath of the creator of the world. In Egyptian mythology, for example, the breath of the god Ra, “The Limitless God,” transforms into air (Shu), which is the indispensable element of life. 10 MYTHS AND SCIENTIFIC EVIDENCE EVOLUTION AND GENETICS 11 Evolution Is a Matter of Time oward the 18th century, scientific progress demanded a different explanation of the myth of the origin of the world and of life. Even before Darwin, the work of naturalists and the discovery of fossils pointed to the fact that time, measured not in years but in millennia, runs its course, allowing each species to become what it is. Genetic mutations occur through the generations, and interaction with the environment determines that the most suitable traits will be transmitted (natural selection) and that a population will evolve in relationship to its ancestors. The idea is not related to “improvement” but rather to change as the origin of diversity, to the ramifications of evolutionary lines tracked through paleontological or genetic studies. Animals that lived millions of years ago left behind their fossil is the typical age of remains. Sediment dinosaur fossils. Sediment from rivers and seas is deposited over the skeleton and forms into layers. Bacteria and other underground organisms can cl modify the buried skeleton. @ Burial Discovery Erosion on the Earth's surface leads to the discovery of fossil remains from millions of years ago. A Common History Animals that look very different may be and two pairs of limbs connected to it. This built according to the same basic body suggests that they all share a common design. For example, dogs, whales, and ancestor. In mammals, the bones of the human beings are mammals. All have the limbs are the same even if they are = same skeletal design with a spinal column morphologically different from one another. The evidence of past life is registered in fossils, preserved between layers of sedimentary rocks deposited one on top of another through geological eras. An analysis of fossils helps determine their age. Through studies of fossil populations, it is possible to learn about the structure of old communities, the reason given species became extinct, and how animals and plants evolved over time. KEY Humerus ©) Ulna Radius Carpal Metacarpal In mammals, the basic design of the limb is very similar—an upper bone (humerus), followed by a pair of lower ones (radius and ulna), and then the carpals and metacarpals with up to five digits. PETRIFIED FOSSILS This head of an Albertosaurus discovered as a fossil can be studied using geological or biomolecular analyses. Only one fossil is found for every ; , mi os ga With the use of advanced biomolecular a, " CAT it is possible to examine the evolutionary legacy of a species and figure out when evolutionary lines ; diverged. Many anthropologists use mitochondrial : DNA (which is inherited from the mother) to BAT ' reconstruct human evolution. This type of analysis is WHALE also used to reconstruct the family trees of animals. % sal “ ‘ P ag “ M 1 . - a. A . a 7 + . *-. Di ie iw a” - . a 5 ~~ 12 MYTHS AND SCIENTIFIC EVIDENCE “beet ‘ ‘ah. See" ay fy aa. ee. — — == = = = = x = 7297 ee = = - a ™ = = -— = es a ~ —_ =e _= + =< E5 ; = a 4 ‘a i ; i ——"* rE ‘Evolutionary Pro n addition to natural selection, the famous theory developed by i i Charles Darwin in the 19th century, there are other evolutionary - processes at work at the microevolutionary scale, such as mutations, genetic flow (i.e., migration), and genetic drift. However, DREPANA FALCATARIA > ~ was found hidden on a tree in Norfolk (U.K.) in 1994. ° aha ? : involves the modification of the sequences of genetic material found in DNA. When a cell divides, it produces a copy of its DNA; a The genes of geometric moths, which live on tree bark lichen, have different versions (alleles) for gray and black. At for evolutionary processes to take place, there must be genetic = ee fet however, this copy is sometimes imperfect. ean i co H F, F =) <5, a. P os , This change can occur spontaneously, such variation—i.e., modifications to the proportion of certain genes . a. geod a a ht Reded be (alleles) within a given population over time. These genetic . ee (meiosis) or through exposure to radiation . i . hemical subst : "ct. differences can be passed on to subsequent generations, ee a een rs Tal thereby perpetuating the evolutionary process. | : THE PROCESS, o j 1 , A mutation i 1 . , ‘discrepancy a _ the DNA copy. é Sin ee A e ows, . ie tee . F ce \ 5 Pete ) This is one of the basic mechanisms of evolution. It is the ‘im alt process of species survival and adaptation to changes in the i “d . environment, and it involves shedding some traits and —r- - strengthening others. This revolutionary transformation He takes place when individuals with certain traits have a pte | oe survival or reproduction rate higher than that of other individuals within the same population, thus passing along: these genetic traits to their descendants. oie ‘oe ky . te af | | - @ GENETIC VARIATION ss Pe IN THE GIRAFFE ee f ‘ : wg The transfer of genes from one population 1 to another occurs particularly when two COMPETITION populations share alleles (different versions In the 19th century, because -_ of genes). For example, when a population of the theories of Darw' a and ” of brown beetles mixes with a population Lamarck, among others, it of green beetles, there might be a higher was believed that the frequency of brown beetle genes in the ancestors of giraffes had , green beetles. This also occurs when new short necks. es 1 é alleles combine as a result of mixing, as ' ‘ a et lo SURVIVAL when Europeans mixed with Native . The population of moths Americans. [2] with black alleles grows and 4 surpasses the population MUTATION with gray alleles. 1D) On the basis of ~ spontaneous mutations, some individuals developed longer necks, allowing , them to survive in the f A gradual change in the genetic makeup of a competition for food. E GEOMETRIC MOTH population that is not linked to the D ITS ENVIRONMENT environment. Unlike natural selection, this is a random process that does not generate adaptations. Genetic drift is present in small populations in which each individual carries |». ADAPTATION the start of the Industrial Revolution in ” ‘ within itself a large portion of the genetic Their long necks / England, the gray moth was better able to TMESIS POLLUTION # ' pool, especially when a new colony is allowed them to camouflage itself than the black moth and The population of moths Moths with black alleles find established (the founding effect), or when a survive and pass thus better able to avoid predators. All with gray alleles grows themselves better adapted to : THE PROPORTION OF high number of individuals die and the along this trait to this changed with the emergence of larger because of its their new environment, which is © BLACK MOTHS FOUND IN population rebuilds from a smaller genetic » their descendants. pollution, which blackened tree trunks. camouflage. the result of industrial pollution. URBAN AREAS pool than before (the bottleneck effect). ‘ : it, 7 ' —_ His in “et / : ‘eget F- = 14 MYTHS AND SCIENTIFIC EVIDENCE To Live or Die oevolution is a concept used by scientists to describe the evolutionary process from a group perspective, because no single species has done it in isolation. On the contrary, different levels and types of relationships were established through time between ee ia species, exerting changing pressures on their respective evolutionary competition | within a species, whether for food / * or for mating thers. A i ‘| partners. ag , | paths. Natural selection and adaptation, both processes that every species has undergone to the present, depend on these relationships. Types of Relationships If the evolution of each species were an isolated event, neither the relationships nor the adaptations that together generate coevolution would exist. In fact, in the struggle for survival, some species react to the evolutionary changes of other species. In the case of a predator, if its prey were to become faster, the hunt would become more difficult and a demographic imbalance would develop in favor of the prey. Therefore, the speed of is a relationship between two species of organisms in which one benefits and the other is neither harmed nor helped. There are several types of commensalism: phoresy, when one species attaches itself to another for transportation; inquilinism, when one species is housed FOR EVOLUTIONARY SCIENTISTS, IT IS NOT CLEAR WHETHER THE DRIVING FORCE OF EVOLUTION IS COOPERATION OR COMPETITION. THE LATTER NOTION HAS BEEN FAVORED BY THE SCIENTIFIC COMMUNITY SINCE THE 19TH CENTURY. EVOLUTION AND GENETICS 15 takes place when two or more organisms obtain their resources from a limited source. This is a relationship that has one of the strongest impacts on natural selection and the evolutionary process. There are two types of competition. One occurs through interference, which is when an action limits another species' access to a resource—for example, when the roots of a plant prevent another plant from reaching nutrients. The other type of competition is through exploitation, typical among predators such as lions and cheetahs that prey on the same species. In this second type, the principle of competitive exclusion is also at play, since each species tends to eliminate its competition. each depends on the mutual pressure predator and prey exert on each other. In nature, different types of relationships exist that are not always clear or easily discernible given the complexity they can acquire through the process of coevolution. These range from noninteraction to predation, from cooperation to competition and even parasitism. is a type of interspecific relationship in which both species derive benefit. It might seem as if this is an agreement between parties, but it is actually the result of a long and complicated process of evolution and adaptation. There are numerous examples of mutualism, although the most famous is the cattle egrets of Africa (Bubulcus ibis), which feed on the parasites of large herbivores such as the buffalo and the gnu. To the extent that the egrets obtain their food, the herbivores are rid of parasites. inside another; and metabiosis, such as when the hermit crab lives inside the shell of a dead snail. INTERACTS WITH COEVOLUTION, SUCH AS WHEN AN ENVIRONMENTAL CHANGE FAVORS OR HARMS A GIVEN SPECIES. is defined as an asymmetric relationship in which only one of the organisms (the parasite) derives benefit. It is an extreme case of predation that entails such fundamental adaptations where the parasite, which enters by various means, might even live inside its host. Such is the case of the African buffalo, which can have a worm called Elaeophora poeli lodged in its aorta. is the interspecies relationship in which one species hunts and feeds on another. It is important to understand that each party exerts pressure on and regulates the other. There are specific instances of predation in which the hunter impacts only one type of prey or those in which it feeds on different species. The degree of adaptation depends on this distinction. The lion, the zebra, and the kudu form an example of the latter case. EVOLUTION AND GENETICS 17 In spite of their differences, dogs are so similar to each other that they can breed with each other. They are in the same species. But selective breeding is a good example of how differentiation is favored, except that in nature it takes a longer time to do this. Selection can be disruptive, when two populations separate and become differentiated; directional, when the dominant traits of a population change; or stabilizing, when variations diminish and individuals become more similar to each other. Canis lupus The ancestor of the dog is very intelligent and social. It travels in packs of 8 to 12 members. Canis familiaris Unlike the German shepherd, which evolved through 10,000 years of human-breeding, the Siberian husky preserves traits closer to those of the gray wolf, which are the ancestors all dogs. Origin of Life \ ere aiid n effort of imagination is needed to see just how new complex life-forms are on Earth. For millions of years the development of life was PA fe FA" __ * completely static. Suddenly one day this stagnant world exploded unexpectedly with new forms of life, an effect called the Cambrian explosion. The fossil record shows an impressive proliferation THROUGH TIME Re-creation of Titanis (a fierce CHEMICAL PROCESSES bird) and of the horse Hipparion, two primitive animals that lived FOSSIL RELICS during the Cretaceous Period THE CAMBRIAN EXPLOSION CONQUEST OF THE EARTH of incredibly varied life-forms. The emergence of new species in the oceans took place at the same time as the massive extinction of stromatolites, which had dominated the Proterozoic THE REIGN OF THE DINOSAURS THE END OF THE DINOSAURS LAND OF MAMMALS THE TREE OF LIFE Eon up to that point. In this chapter you will also discover how new creatures continued to appear that over time populated the face of the Earth. 20 ORIGIN OF LIFE hrough Time eologic structures and fossils have been used by scientists to reconstruct the history of life on our planet. Scientists believe that the Earth was formed about 4.6 billion years ago and that the first living beings, single-celled organisms, appeared about one billion years later. From that time, the Earth has registered the emergence, evolution, and extinction of numerous species. Thanks to the study of fossils paleontologists can provide an account of plants and animals that have disappeared from the Earth. e HOW IT STARTED FORMATION OF THE CRUST. The PROTECTED LIFE. The most common animal life-forms of the Cambrian Period already showed well-defined body structures. Many were ANAEROBIC AND AQUATIC LIFE. CONQUEST OF EARTH. MASSIVE EXTINCTIONS. The first land species appeared Great climatic changes and during the Silurian Period. Plants — other circumstances produced invaded the first sedimentary the first massive extinctions of areas, and crustaceans came species, evidenced by great out of the water. banks of fossils. oldest known rocks date to about four —‘ The first atmosphere had no oxygen; billion years ago and the oldest known __ the first organisms (bacteria) used crystals to about 4.4 billion years ago. _—_ anaerobic respiration. THE TIMELINE Most of the history of life on the planet has had simple, single-celled organisms, such as bacteria, as the lead actors. Bacteria have survived for more than three billion years. In comparison, the reign of dinosaurs during the Mesozoic Era (about 250 to 65 million years ago) is a recent event. And the presence of humans on Earth is insignificant on this time scale. Formation of The first the Earth bacteria appear. NEW TYPES OF ANIMALS. The first mammals and birds appear on Earth. There was a great A CHANGING WORLD. The end of the Mesozoic Era witnessed a great climatic change with THE ERA OF REPTILES. Large and small, they conquered terrestrial environments, but EVOLUTION AND GENETICS 21 CHANGING CLIMATE. The first 20 million Oxygen appears in the atmosphere. years of the Cenozoic Era were relatively warm, but at the end of the period climate changed, and the polar caps were formed. PRAIRIES, THE IDEAL STAGE. The spread of hominin species throughout the planet coincided with the expansion of prairies as the dominant form of vegetation. Fist fossils of pea colluler animals LAVA BECAME ROCK. The first terrestrial surface was a thin layer with scattered volcanoes that spouted very light lava that came from the Earth's interior. As the lava cooled, protected by valves or shells. METALDETES had a calcareous structure similar to that of sponges. They lived in there were also aquatic _ diversification of mollusks in the oceans, where species such as the nautilus survive to species (such as the Icthyosaurus) and others in the air (such as the Pterosaurus). this day. a major fall in average temperatures. This led | to an era of } glaciations. FINALLY ALONE. Without the threat of the large dinosaurs, birds and mammals could develop. PREDATOR. it hardened and thickened the early crust. the Cambrian sea. CRINOID FOSSIL. The fossils from these archaic marine invertebrates were typical of the Silurian Period and are widely distributed in sedimentary rocks. PRESENCE OF OXYGEN. Life on Earth was dependent on the presence of oxygen, which established itself in the atmosphere and over the surface some 2.1 billion years ago. Oxygen makes possible the formation of fundamental compounds, such as water and carbon dioxide, whose molecular model is shown here. THE CAMBRIAN EXPLOSION. Numerous multicellular species suddenly appeared. THE PRESENCE OF OXYGEN. The first fish, called agnates, had no jaws. This pteraspis, found in shallow waters, belongs to the Silurian Period. THE FIRST EVIDENCE. Stromatolites, fossils that date back some 3.5 billion years, are one of the first evidences of life on the planet. These formations correspond to single-celled algae that lived underwater. In this image you can see a fossil of Collenia, found in the United States. ON FOUR LEGS. This very ancient amphibian, called Acanthostega, lived during the Devonian Period. A CURIOUS FOSSIL. This fossil in mawsonite found in the Ediacara of Australia is one of the oldest fossils from a metazoan, or multicellular, animal. It is at least 600 million years old. Cnidarians are well-represented among Ediacaran fossils. SCALES. The image shows the scales of a Lepidotus, a type of archaic fish. These were covered by a hard and shiny Giganotosaurus Jj carolinii was one of 1 the largest carnivorous \ ' dinosaurs, with a length of 50 feet (15 m). Below, a Tyrannosaurus tooth, 3 inches (8 cm). HEAVYWEIGHT. The heaviest of all known calculated that it could have weighed up to 100 tons. VERTEBRA. This is a fossil vertebra of a Barosaurus. The neck was flexible thanks to the light FEATHERED. Titanis was a carnivorous bird. Because of its size (8.2 feet [2.5 m] tall) and its small wings, it was flightless. Australopithecus afarensis. A reconstruction of the head of this hominin is shown here. It was an ancestor of the human dinosaurs was the FETT Barosaurus. It is irst fossils of Homo neanderthalensis SABER TEETH. Thylacosmilus resembled the felines of today, but it was a marsupial. The females had a pouch for the young, like that of kangaroos. Their teeth never stopped growing. Their fossils were found in Argentina; they lived during the Miocene and Pliocene epochs, subdivisions of the Neogene Period. were found in 1856. They had a common ancestor with Homo Sapiens. 4.6 BILLION YEARS AGO. The basic materials that formed the Earth condensed. MASS EXTINCTIONS 4.6-2.5 BILLION YEARS AGO 2.5 BILLION-542 MILLION YEARS AGO 542 - 488 ARCHEAN EON PROTEROZOIC EON CAMBRIAN ORDOVICIAN PRECAMBRIAN TIME 1 BILLION YEARS AGO. Several large continental pieces come together, forming the supercontinent Rodinia. substance similar to enamel. Today most reptiles and fish have scales. 270 MILLION YEARS AGO. The mass of solid land is again concentrated in a single continent, called Pangea, that would 60% OF SPECIES . 488 - 444 | 444 - 416 become the origin of the continents we know today. Repeated glaciations took place, and the central Tethys Sea was formed. 80% OF SPECIES . 416 - 359 SILURIAN DEVONIAN |CARBONIFEROUS! PALEOZOIC ERA 200 MILLION YEARS AGO. Laurasia (North America, Europe, and Asia) and Gondwana (South Ame- rica, Africa, India, Aus- tralia, and Antarctica) separate from each other. 95% OF SPECIES . weight of these bones. 200 MILLION YEARS AGO Gondwana separates, forming Africa, Antarctica, Australia, India, and South America. 359-299 | 299-251 iw ia 251 - 200 200 - 146 146 - 65.5 — TRIASSIC JURASSIC CRETACEOUS PALEOGENE NEOGENE genus and lived from 3.7 million to 29 million years ago. With a height of 40 inches (1 m), it was smaller than modern humans. According to theory, Homo habilis descended from it.. 50 MILLION Alps and the Andes, YEARS AGO were being formed. The continental masses Simultaneously, the were in positions subcontinent of India similar to those of was colliding with today. Some of the Eurasia to form the highest mountain highest mountain ranges of today, the range, the Himalayas. 75% OF SPECIES . 65.5 - 23 SINCE 23 MILLION YEARS AGO 22 ORIGIN OF LIFE EVOLUTION AND GENETICS 23 Chemical Processes Ithough it is assumed today that all life-forms are connected to the presence of oxygen, life began on Earth more than three billion years ago in the form of microorganisms. They determined, and still determine today, the biological processes on Earth. Science seeks to explain the origin of life as a series of chemical reactions that occurred by chance over millions of years and that gave rise to the various organisms of today. Another possibility is that life on Earth originated in the form of microbes that reached the Earth from space, lodged, for instance, within a meteorite that fell to the Earth's surface. @ — =, a a Original Cells _ -. f ™ tr > IM The origin of life on Earth can be inferred from molecular evolution. The first Lf living organisms (prokaryotes) began to develop in groups, giving rise to a process of cooperation called symbiosis. In this way, more complex life-forms called } =, Ff eukaryotes emerged. Eukaryotes have a nucleus that contains genetic information a f (DNA). In large measure, the development of bacteria was a chemical evolution “y ~® that resulted in new methods to obtain energy from the Sun and extract ~~ oxygen from water (photosynthesis). HYDROGEN . ANON ay 5 : Prokaryotes } were the first life-forms, with no nucleus or " enveloping membranes. These single-celled a o organisms had their genetic code i) *y dispersed between the cell walls. a Today two groups of prokaryotes survive: bacteria & & P| and archaeobacteria. y e ® » i) - FREE DNA IN THE INTERIOR IN THE PROCESS, THE NEW SUBSTANCES COULD HAVE MADE COPIES OF THEMSELVES. RIBOSOMES The first reaction 3 yt FE Some four billion years ago, the atmosphere Lf contained very little free oxygen and carbon dioxide. However, it was rich in simple chemical substances, such as water, hydrogen, ammonia, and methane. Ultraviolet radiation and discharges of lightning could have unleashed chemical reactions that formed complex organic compounds (carbohydrates, amino acids, nucleotides), creating the building blocks of life. In 1953, Americans Harold Urey and Stanley Miller tested this theory in the laboratory. FILAMENTS PLASMA MEMBRANE CELL WALL ARCHEAN 4.2 BILLION 4 BILLION 4.6 BILLION YEARS AGO YEARS AGO YEARS AGO The Earth's atmosphere sets it aside from the other planets. Volcanic eruptions and igneous rock dominate the Earth's landscape. The Earth's surface cools and accumulates liquid water. Eukaryotes nome have a central nucleus that contains nucleic fs acid (DNA). The content of the nucleus is reticulum called nucleoplasm. The substance outside the nucleus is called cytoplasm, and it contains various organelles with different functions. Many are involved in generating energy for the organism's development. MITOCHONDRIA Organelle that produces energy for various cellular functions OUTER MEMBRANE CENTRIOLE Key structure for cell division, located in the center of the cell MICROTUBULES LYSOSOMES break down and eliminate harmful substances with powerful enzymes. A Certain aerobic bacteria with respiratory enzymes converted into mitochondria and gave rise to the ancestral cells of modern animals. AEROBIC BACTERIA BH (ANCESTOR OF nS MITOCHONDRIA) (WS (& \! PHOTOSYNTHETIC \ PROKARYOTE at t ( ay 6 i] PRECURSORS ah OF EUKARYOTIC Zo CELLS 3.8 BILLION YEARS AGO Prebiotic evolution in which inert matter is transformed into organic matter Smooth endoplasmic endoplasmic reticulum AEROBE INCORPORATED INTO CELL Certain photosynthetic bacteria invaded eukaryotic cells and became chloroplasts, originating the ancestral plant cell. NUCLEUS contains a large amount of genetic information in strands of DNA that give the cell instructions to grow, function, and reproduce. NUCLEAR PORES ENDOPLASMIC RETICULUM helps transport substances through the cell and plays a role in fat metabolism. RIBOSOMES produce the proteins that make up the cell. GOLGI BODIES Flat sacs that receive proteins from the wrinkled endoplasmic reticulum and release them through the cell wall CHLOROPLASTS Organelles specialized for obtaining energy by photosynthesis GOLGI BODY NUCLEUS MITOCHONDRIA PROKARYOTE INCORPORATED INTO THE CELL TONOPLAST VACUOLE transports and stores substances ingested through water. 3.5 BILLION YEARS AGO First fossil evidence of life in early Archean sedimentary rocks 24 ORIGIN OF LIFE — Fossil Rel | he term proterozoic comes from the Greek proteros (“first”) and zoic (“life”) and is the a name given to an interval of geologic time of about two billion years at the end of what is known as Precambrian time. The oldest fossils of complex organisms yet found, in the Ediacara fossil bed (Australia), date from the end of the Proterozoic, in the Neoproterozoic Era. It is the first evidence of multicellular organisms with differentiated tissues. It is believed that the specimens of Ediacara life were not animals but prokaryotes that were formed of various cells and did have internal cavities. Toward the end of the Proterozoic, there was a global disturbance in the carbon cycle that caused the disappearance of most complex organisms and opened the way for the great explosion of life in the Cambrian Period. @ CHARNIA is one of the largest fossils of the Ediacaran Period. Its flat, leaf-shaped body was supported by a disklike structure. Primitive Species I It has been established that the animals of the Lei Ediacara were the first invertebrates on the Earth. They appeared approximately 650 million years ago and were made up of various cells. Some had a soft flat body while others were in the form of a disk or a long strip. A relevant fact about the life of this period is that they no longer had only one cell that was in charge of feeding, breathing, and reproducing; instead, the diverse cells specialized in distinct functions. AO inches (100 cm) MAXIMUM LENGTH STROMATOLITES are the most ancient evidence of life known on Earth, and even today they have maintained their evolutionary line. They are laminated organic- sedimentary structures, principally cyanobacteria and calcium carbonate, stuck to the substrate product of metabolic activity. They grew in mass, which led to the formation of reefs. =e ~, 7‘, : ae be CALCIUM CARBONATE CYANOBACTERIA _—s« 2.3 BILLION YEARS AGO \ al Extensive glaciation 4 takes place. MAWSONITE This species of cnidarian shifted slowly through the waters, aided by the currents. It contracted its long, thin umbrella, extending its tentacles and shooting its microscopic harpoons to capture its prey. For this, it also used a kind of poison. CYCLOMEDUSA Ancient circular fossil with a bump in the middle and up to five concentric ridges. Some radial segments extend along the length of the outer disks. 7 a ‘- fons 8 inches (20 cm) IN LENGTH DICKINSONIA Usually considered an annelid worm because of its similar appearance to an extinct genus (Spinther). It also may be a version of the soft body of the banana coral fungus. EVOLUTION AND GENETICS 25 i 3.5-4 inches (9-10 cm) IN DIAMETER _ KIMBERELLA An advanced metazoan from the Ediacara fauna, it is the first known organism with a body cavity. It is believed to have been similar to a mollusk and was found in Russia in 1993. 1 inch (2.5 cm) IN LENGTH TRIBRACHIDIUM It is believed that this species, developed in the form of a disk with three symmetric parts, is a distant relative to corals and to 40 inches : | (100 cm) 2. inches IN LENGTH (5 cm) IN DIAMETER 600 MILLION YEARS AGO Multicellular marine organisms called Ediacara fauna develop. AND GENETICS 27 26 ORIGIN OF LIFE ANOMALOCARIS The Cambrian Explosi The largest plundering arthropod known of that time, it had One of the first chordates, similar to an a circular mouth, appendages that allowed it to strongly eel, with a tail in the shape of a flipper. nlike the previous development of microbial life, the great explosion grasp its prey, and fins along the length of both sides that It is the oldest known ancestor ) were used for swimming. In comparison to other organisms, to vertebrates. . of life that emerged in the Cambrian some 500 million years ago gave rise to the evolution of a diversity of multicellular organisms (including mollusks, trilobites, brachiopods, echinoderms, it was a true giant of Burgess Shale. © oun 24 inches sponges, corals, chordata) protected by exoskeletons or shells. It pea 60 é is believed that this group of organisms represents the (60 cm) A inches 4 characteristic fauna of the Cambrian. The Burgess Shale = receipe ce Oe (10 em) long |- a fossil bed in British Columbia (Canada) holds a large number . ty ee nictunne Te eae eae of fossils of soft-bodied animals of the period and is one of , pele Lis the most important fossil formations in the world. ok , ‘ MARELLA y Small swimming arthropod that was probably an easy prey for predators in Burgess Shale. Provided with a strong exoskeleton, the Anomalocaris was a true terror in the Cambrian seas. : Burgess Shale 5) Located in Yoho National Park in the Canadian province of British Columbia, Burgess Shale is a celebrated fossil bed found in 1909 by the American paleontologist Charles Walcott. Burgess Shale offers a unique look at the explosion of Cambrian life. It contains thousands of very well—preserved fossilized invertebrates, including arthropods, worms, and primitive chordata, some with their soft parts intact. 4 irichest! ._ (10 cm) in ie TO THE EXTREMITIES, he on. ~~» SPONGES They grew primarily : on the seabed in . = - Burgess Shaleand = [ HALLUCIGENIA frequently developed = : _pHad a defense™ alongside algae of ‘ * system based diverse species, , J 1 . — _—* on long spines that i *; ¥ ’ sizes, and shapes. i : | a? : ‘ = simultaneously served “Bent iors that = “= ; } ] - : . as feet for its _livesburig ied“in’s " ; ' . " ; i “= movement. “and in’ the — lode mchoome “Shallow. waterash— "well.as in deep™ aS -% (3 em) maximum Ten OF THIS ARTHROPOD ‘Water. There are » “about Senger Ys ass a , “= i Staves. as THE EVOLUTIONARY ‘BEGINS =” EXPLOSION th The increased presence of oxygen . : The Cambrian originated a are formed by the calcareous Een the facniatiog of eels. wee great variety of body designs. skeletons of innumerable soft . bodied animals. : fas ag ee ha icles J 4 me ‘ *." ae 28 ORIGIN OF LIFE Conquest of the Earth he Paleozoic Era (ancient life) was characterized by successive collisions of continental masses, and the occupation of their interior lakes made possible the appearance of primitive terrestrial plants, the first fish adapted to freshwater, and amphibians, highlighting a key evolutionary event: the conquest of the terrestrial surface some 360 million From fins to limbs The amphibian evolution facilitated the exploration of new sources of foods, such as insects and plants, and an adaptation of the respiratory system for the use of oxygen in the air. For this purpose, the aquatic vertebrates had to modify their skeleton (a greater pelvic and pectoral waist) and develop musculature. At the same time, the fins transformed into legs to permit movement on land. MAXIMUM LENGTH EVOLUTION AND GENETICS 29 FIRST FISH AND PLANTS The success of the vertebrates in the colonization of land came in part from the evolution of the amniotic egg covered in a leathery membrane. In the evolution of plants, pollen made them independent of water. AIR CHAMBER = years ago. For this process, diverse mechanisms of adaptation were necessary, | from new designs of vascular plants and changes in the bone and muscular ss, ACANTHOSTEGA | A f /f & structures to new systems of reproduction. The appearance of reptiles and conpamanite E r YOLK SAC =F >= i ete ee : human scale Pe 2 | their novel amniotic egg meant the definitive colonization of the land by the conan vertebrates, just as the pollen made plants completely independent of water. EMBRYO MEGANEURA é\ we — ae a AMNION ALLANTOIS DORSAL SPINE Its system of joints, called zygapophyses, between the vertebrae helps to maintain the rigidity of the dorsal spine. DEVELOPMENT OF Pollen VESSELS IN PLANTS guarantees ‘ reproduction. The need to transport water from the root to the stem and to transport photosynthetic products in the opposite a “ direction in plants induced P the development of a system of internal vessels. jp C“‘(®RNO#O#‘*dN ternal To move itself through the Reproduction based on pollen vessel achieved the definite / conductors water, the acanthostega moved its fin, sweeping from side to side. It conquest of the terrestrial environment. maintained this BONE STRUCTURE characteristic in Only-three bones (humerus, its move to land. cubitus, and radius) formed the bone support of the ia val legs. Unlike fish, it had a = type of mobile wrist and eight fingers that moved all at once like a paddle. CARBONIFEROUS ORDOVICIAN P SILURIAN DEVONIAN 444 TO 416 MILLION YEARS AGO ———— SSS Great coral reefs and some types of small plants 30 ORIGIN OF LIFE Jurassic Period The increase in sea levels inundated interior continental regions, generating warmer and more humid environments that favored the development of life. The reptiles adapted to diverse environments, and the dinosaurs developed greatly. During this period, there are examples of herbivore dinosaurs existing together with carnivorous dinosaurs. Freshwater environments were favorable for the evolution of invertebrates, amphibians, and reptiles such as turtles and crocodiles. The first birds emerged. The Reign of the Dinosaurs rom abundant fossil evidence, scientists have determined that dinosaurs were the dominant form of terrestrial animal life during the Mesozoic Era. There was a continual change of dinosaur species. Some of them lived during the three periods of the Mesozoic Era, others throughout two, and some in only one. Unlike the rest of the reptiles, the legs of dinosaurs were placed not toward the side but under the body, as they appear in mammals. This arrangement, together with its bone structure (a femur articulated to a hollow pelvis) significantly aided its locomotion. In their evolution, the dinosaurs also developed such defensive features as horns, claws, hornlike beaks, and armor. It was long believed that dinosaurs were cold-blooded; nevertheless, the dominant hypothesis today is that they were warm-blooded. They mysteriously became extinct toward the end of the Cretaceous Period. BIPEDALISM HORSETAIL The Al/osaurus, a giant therapod carnivore, was one of the first species to move about on two legs. CONIFER STEGOSAURUS (ROOFED LIZARD) The Plateosaurus walked on four legs but could reach elevated foliage with 4 ; PLATEOSAURUS support from its tail. (FLAT REPTILE) COMPARATIVE SIZE 1 Triassic Period Following the massive extinction and biological crisis at the end of the Permian Period, only a relatively few species of plants and animals were able to survive. In the Triassic, the regeneration of life slowly began. Mollusks dominated in marine environments, and reptiles dominated on land. As for plants, families of ferns, conifers, and bennettitales appeared during the middle and late Triassic. MAMMALS At the end of the Triassic, there are traces of mammals, which evolved from cynodont reptiles. Among the mammalian characteristics that made their appearance were elongated and differentiated teeth and a secondary palate. FERN PALM CONIFER GINGKO 251 TO 200 MILLION YEARS AGO 200 TO 146 MILLION YEARS AGO Fragmentation of Pangea and increase in sea level The equatorial supercontinent of Pangea forms. EVOLUTION AND GENETICS 31 Cretaceous Period In this period, carnivorous dinosaurs appeared with claws curved in the shape of a sickle, specially designed to gut its prey. A prime example is the claw of Baryonyx. It measures 12 inches (30 cm), a disproportionate length for an animal 30 feet (9 m) in length. During the Cretaceous Period, the evolution of insects and birds continued, and flora that made use of pollination developed. Nevertheless, this period was marked both by a revolution in the seas (the appearance of new groups of predators, such as teleost fish and sharks) and by a revolution on land (the extinction of the dinosaurs about 65 million years ago). GIGANOTOSAURUS (GREAT SOUTHERN LIZARD) EXTINCTION About 65 million years ago, all land animals larger than about 55 pounds (25 kg) disappeared. It is believed that the dinosaurs lost in the competition for food to insects and small mammals. HOLLY BEECH WALNUT OAK 146 TO 65.5 MILLION YEARS AGO Present-day oceans and continental masses are defined. ORIGIN OF LIFE The End of the Dinosaurs inosaurs reigned over the Earth until about 65 million years ago. All of a sudden they died out because of a drastic change in the conditions that made their life possible. The most reasonable hypothesis for this change attributes it to the collision of a large asteroid or comet with the Earth. The resulting fire devastated all of what today are the North and South American continents. The impact raised huge dust clouds that remained suspended in the air for months, darkening the planet. At the same time, sulfur, chlorine, and nitrogen was mixed into dense clouds, causing killing acid rains. More Theories About the “K-T Boundary” The period between the Cretaceous and Paleogene periods, known as the “I-T boundary,” marks the end of the era of the dinosaurs. Although the impact theory is widely accepted, other theories suggest that there was a great change in climate that caused dinosaurs to become extinct very slowly as the shallow seas withdrew from solid land. According to the defenders of these theories, the dinosaurs were being reduced in variety and number throughout a period that lasted millions of years. The large meteorite of Chicxulub, according to this hypothesis, would have fallen some 300 thousand years before the end of the Cretaceous Period. It has also been hypothesized that mammals proliferated before the extinction and fed on reptile ® eggs, or that the plants eaten by the large sauropods succumbed to diseases. ae = 65 MILLION YEARS AGO Sudden climatologic change, 65 million years ago as a = % =a i» ane 4 a" = 65.5 TO 23 MILLION YEARS AGO Beginning of the Cenozoic Era which extends to the present. VOLCANIC ERUPTIONS Another theory relates the massive extinction with the appearance of prolonged volcanic eruptions on Earth that emitted asphyxiating gases and darkened the skies with dust. Thousands of cubic miles of volcanic rock found on a plateau in Deccan, India, support this theory. EVOLUTION AND GENETICS SPACE CATACLYSM Every 67 million years, the Solar System crosses through the plane of the Milky Way. At those times some stars in the Milky Way can cause comets to escape from the Oort cloud and enter the inner Solar System. It is possible that one of these bodies could have impacted the Earth. 34 ORIGIN OF LIFE Land of Mammals fter the extinction of the large dinosaurs at the end of the Mesozoic Era, mammals found the opportunity to evolve until becoming sovereigns of the Earth. The Cenozoic Era, which began 65.5 million years ago, also saw the appearance and evolution of plants with flowers, and large mountain chains of today (the Himalayas, the Alps, and the Andes) formed. Within the zoological class of mammals, primates appeared, as did the Homo genus, the immediate ancestors of humans, toward the end of the era. The Class that Defines an Era Some 220 million years ago, the mammaliaformes appeared, which today are all extinct. More similar to reptiles, they already had larger skulls and were beginning to raise their stomachs from the ground with the strength of their limbs. And 100 million years ago, the two predominant surviving suborders appeared—the marsupials (which remain only in Oceania, with the exception of the American opossum) and the placentals (which colonized the entire Cenozoic world). 4 MORGANUCODON Extinct insectivorous rodent of the SHORT TAIL e Jurassic (200 million years ago) The appendage of the vertebral column, it ended in a point. This differentiates it from present-day rodents. COMPARATIVE SIZE Its total length was 6 inches (15 cm), and it weighed from 1 to 2 ounces qe W (30-50 g). LONG CLAWS With these it hunted insects and dug holes to hide from dinosaurs. 65.5 TO 23 MILLION YEARS AGO Mammals are represented by marsupials, prosimians, and ungulates. EVOLUTION AND GENETICS 35 TAIL They used it for climbing equilibrium. In American monkeys, the tail was prehensile: it allowed them to hang from branches. CONTINENTS OF THE PAST PRESENT-DAY CONTINENTS Ancestors of Humans Primates are mammals that are characterized by binocular vision, the large relative size of their brains, and the prehensile limbs that allowed them, among others things, to take to the branches of trees and make use of objects as rudimentary tools. The first primates (called Purgatorius) appeared in North America in the Paleocene Epoch. The oldest fossils of monkeys (anthropoids) date from some 53 million years ago, but the origin is still uncertain. Theropithecus oswaldi cor ie PRIMATES . i APPEAR IN THE IR CENOZOIC ERA. Size similar to a human, 3 to 6 feet (1-2 m) LONG FINGERS , are what first PREHENSILE THUMB J permitted the One finger opposite the rest, ’ anthropoids to hold predecessor to the thumb of tJ onto the branches humans, allowed this 1‘, and move through European monkey of the the trees. Pliocene to manipulate 4 objects (5 million years ago). r FROM 23 MILLION YEARS AGO FROM 1.8 MILLION TO 12,000 YEARS AGO First fossil records of Homo sapiens sapiens Hominoids disperse from Africa to all over the world. Development of the first Homo sapiens. The vegetation that appeared after the extinction of the dinosaurs was very different from previous forms. In the Paleocene and Pleistocene, a tropical climate predominated, but afterward the species of temperate climates have excelled to the present. YY L « SYCAMORE = (PALEOCENE) \ \ wa | a / mee }/ ab SY | Z SS) Vii" _ S| \/\ i N | fa Se } \¥ Ficus (EOCENE) GRASSES (PLIOCENE) SPRUCE (PLEISTOCENE) Establishment of the conifers i) RANUNCULUS “ (PLEISTOCENE) ~ One of the first plants with flowers FROM 12,000 YEARS AGO TO THE PRESENT 36 ORIGIN OF LIFE The Tree of Life ere is a visual representation to explain how all living beings are related. Unlike genealogical trees, in which information supplied by families is used, phylogenetic trees use information from fossils as well as that generated through the structural and molecular studies of organisms. The construction of phylogenetic trees takes into account the theory of evolution, which indicates that organisms are descendants of a common ancestor. @ Archaea These organisms are unicellular and microscopic. The majority are anaerobic and live in extreme environments. About one half of them give off methane in their metabolic process. There are more than 200 known species. Plants Multicellular autotrophic organisms; they have cells with a nucleus and thick F cellular walls that are grouped in ff j / specialized tissues. They carry out | photosynthesis by means of chloroplasts. NOT VASCULAR EURYARCHAEOTA No internal vessel VASCULAR Halobacteria KORARCHAEOTA system Internal vessel salinarum The most primitive system of the archaea WITH SEED Some have exposed seed and some have flower and fruit. aie’ CRENARCHAEOTA live in environments with high temperatures. SEEDLESS They are small plants with simple tissues. Relationships als With flower and fruit. More than 250,000 species form this group. I The scientific evidence supports the theory (Le that life on Earth has evolved and that all species share common ancestors. However, there are no conclusive facts about the origin of life. It is known that the first life-forms must have been prokaryotes, or unicellular beings, whose genetic Amniotes >» /Euk ' Fa survive independently. An F al Multicellular and heterotrophic. Two of their principal characteristics are their mobility and their internal organ systems. Animals reproduce sexually, and their metabolism is aerobic. bay ; CNIDARIANS BILATERAL include species Symmetrical such as the bilateral jellyfish and organisms corals. VERTEBRATES have a vertebral column, a skull that protects the brain, and a skeleton. MOLLUSKS include the octopus, snails, and oysters. TETRAPODS Animals with four limbs CARTILAGINOUS FISH include the rays and sharks. AMPHIBIANS When young they are water dwellers; later they live on land. ary 01a This group consists of species that have a true nucleus in their cellular structure. It includes unicellular and multicellular organisms, which are formed by specialized cells that do not >< information is found anywhere inside their cell walls. From this point of view, the archaea are prokaryotes, as are bacteria. For this reason, they were once considered to be in the same kingdom of living things, but certain characteristics of genetic transmission places them closer to the eukaryotes. GYMNOSPERM With naked seeds; cycadophytes were examples. The evolution of this feature allowed the tetrapods to conquer land and to adapt to its distinct environments. In amniote species the embryo is protected in a sealed structure called the amniotic egg. Among mammals, only monotremes continue to be oviparous; however, in the placental subclass, to which humans belong, the placenta is a modified egg. Its membranes have transformed, but the embryo is still surrounded by an amnion filled with amniotic fluid. Unicellular organisms that live on surfaces in colonies. Generally they have " @ one cellular wall composed of mY peptidoglycans, and many bacteria have @ cilia. It is believed that they existed as long as three billion years ago. COCCALS The pneumococcals are an example. Protista A paraphyletic group, it includes the species that cannot be classified in any other group. There are, therefore, many differences among protista species, such as algae and the amoeba. Fungi Cellular heterotrophic organisms with cell walls thickened with chitin. They carry out digestion externally and secrete enzymes to reabsorb the resulting molecules. BASIDIOMYCETES include the typical capped mushrooms. ASCOMYCETES Most species are grouped here. CHYTRIDIOMYCETES can have mobile cells. INSECTS The greatest evolutionary success ARTHROPODS have an external a skeleton (exoskeleton). Their limbs are jointed appendages. ; MYRIAPODS BONY FISH Millipedes and have spines \ centipedes and a jaw. CRUSTACEANS Spiders, Crabs and ocean scorpions, and lobsters acarids AMNIOTES Species that are born from an embryo inside an amniotic egg = MAMMALS : The offspring are fed BIRDS AND REPTILES with moftiagigilk. Oviparous species. Reptiles are ectothermic (cold-blooded). =, TURTLES LIZARDS SNAKES The oldest Also includes Scaly and with reptiles crocodiles long bodies Bacteria = 7 4, DEUTEROMYCETES reproduction peed EVOLUTION AND GENETICS 37 == Gh = BACILLUS SPIRILLUM VIBRIO Escherichia coli In the form of a Found in has this form. helicoid or spiral saltwater 10,000,000 SPECIES OF ANIMALS ARE CALCULATED TO INHABIT THE EARTH IN THEIR DISTINCT ENVIRONMENTS. ZYGOMYCETES reproduce through ABOUT zygospores. 0,000 SPECIES OF MAMMALS ARE INCLUDED IN THREE Asexlial GROUPS. Cladistics I) This classification technique is based on the iL. evolutionary relationship of species coming from similar derived characteristics and supposes a common ancestor for all living species. The results are used to forma diagram in which these characteristics are shown as branching points that have evolved; at the same time, the diagram places the species into clades, or groups. Although the diagram is based on evolution, its expression is in present-day characteristics and the possible order in which they developed. Cladistics is an important analytical system, and it is the basis for present-day biological study. It arises from a complex variety of facts: DNA sequences, morphology, and biochemical knowledge. The cladogram, commonly called the tree of life, was introduced in the 1950s by the German entomologist Willi Hennig. PLACENTAL The offspring are born completely developed. Humans Humans belong to the class Mammalia and specifically share the subclass of the placentals, or eutherians, which means that the embryo develops completely inside the mother and gets its nutrients from the placenta. After birth, it depends on the mother, who provides the maternal milk in the first phase of development. Humans form part of the order Primates, one of the 29 orders in which mammals are divided. Within this order, characteristics are shared with monkeys and apes. The closest relatives to human beings are the great apes. MARSUPIALS The embryo finishes its development outside of the mother. MONOTREMES The only oviparous mammals. They are the most primitive. Human Evolution omo sapiens, the name that scientifically designates our species, is the result of a long evolutionary process that began in Africa during the Our close cousin was strong, an able hunter, and an excellent artisan. Nobody can explain why the Neanderthals disappeared. HUMAN EVOLUTION FIRST HUMANS USE OF TOOLS ABLE HUNTERS DIRECT ANCESTORS CULTURE, THE GREAT LEAP URBAN REVOLUTION Pliocene Epoch. Very few fossils have been found, and there are no clear clues about what caused the amazing development of the culture. Some believe that a change in the brain or vocal apparatus permitted the emergence of a complex language. Other theories hypothesize that a change in the architecture of the human mind allowed Homo sapiens to use imagination. What is certain is that hunting and gathering was a way of life for 10,000 years until people formed settlements after the Ice Age and cities began to emerge. 40 HUMAN EVOLUTION EVOLUTION AND GENETICS 41 Human Evolution erhaps motivated by climatic change, some five million years ago the species of primates that inhabited the African rainforest subdivided, making room for the appearance of the hominins, our first bipedal ancestors. From that time onward, the scientific community has tried to reconstruct complex phylogenetic trees to give an account of the rise of our species. DNA studies on fossil remains allow us to determine their age and their links with different species. Each new finding can put into question old theories about the origin of humans. @ FUNCTION OF SPEECH In humans, speech has asemantic something specific. Some character. Upon speaking, a scientists believe that a change in human always addresses other the brain or vocal apparatus people with the object of allowed the development of influencing them, changing their complex language, which thoughts, enriching them mentally, _ facilitated creativity and the or directing their conduct toward —_ acquisition of knowledge. Homo habilis THE GREAT LEAP Its brain was much greater, and there were substantial anatomical changes. Australo- pithecus PRECURSOR This ape was the first true hominin but is extinct today. UPRIGHT Primates That Talk abana : i is alking on two I The rise of symbolic language, which is a legs led to a siisslahlins that ef unique ability of humans, is a mystery. weakening of : : 9 the growth of the But the evolution of the speech apparatus in the neck brain is 44 percent larger with respect to Australopithecus, an enormous development in relation to the body. humans has been decisive. The human larynx is located much lower than in the rest of the mammals. This characteristic makes it possible to emit a much greater variety of sounds. muscles anda strengthening of the hip muscles. THE PHYLOGENETIC TREE This cladogram (map of emergence of new species from previous ones) shows the relationship of the Homo genus to the other species of primates. (ime MAN CHIMPANZEE GORILLA ORANGUTAN imya Py rs i ABILITY It already was using sticks and rocks as tools. BONES 1 fr, Those of the hands TOU) LI ri and legs are very \ Pi similar to those of al Gorillas, modern human beings. 15 MYA chimpanzees, and - hominins had a _ common ancestor at least five million years ago. BIPEDALISM requires less energy to move and leaves the hands free. 20 MYA (MILLION YEARS AGO) NOT-SO-DISTANT RELATIVES There are various uncertainties P. aethiopicus and disagreements among A. ramidus A. anamensis A. afarensis paleontologists about how the aa aricunus evolutionary tree for hominins branches out. This version ARDIPITHECUS AUSTRALOPITHECUS 22? is based on one created by A F . garhi paleoanthropologist Ian Tattersall. 4 MILLION YEARS AGO PARANTHROPUS TOOLS FOR SPEAKING The larynx of humans is @ located much lower than in chimpanzees and thus allows humans to emit a greater variety of sounds. SIZE but was stronger. P. boisei P. robustus H. habilis H. rudolfensis HOMO It already had the stature of Homo sapiens CHIMPANZEE Homo erectus MIGRANT This is the species that left Africa and rapidly populated almost all the Old World. From the form of its larynx, it is deduced that Homo erectus could talk. MUSCLES Some prominent muscle markings and thick reinforced areas of the bones indicate that the body of H. erectus could support strong movement and muscle tension. THICKNESS Its bones, including the cranium, were thicker than those in previous species. 2 MILLION YEARS AGO H. ergaster AND FOR THINKING The evolution of the brain has been essential for the development of language and a LARYNX other human capacities. Greater cranial capacity and nm - VOCAL nutrition have had CORDS physiological influences. CHIMPANZEE MAN Hoino sapiens CULTURAL ANIMAL The only surviving species of the Homo genus. Its evolution took place not through genetics but through culture. Homo neander- thalensis HUNTER-GATHERER Very similar to H. Sapiens; nevertheless, it is not its ancestor, but a species that emerged from H. erectus. CHEST The rib cage opened slightly outward. STABLE MOVEMENT With the femur forming an angle toward the inside, the center of the body mass is rearranged; this permits stable bipedal movement. ADAPTATION Its short, robust physique shows good adaptation to cold climates. H. neanderthalensis H. heidelbergensis H. sapiens H. erectus 1 MILLION YEARS AGO TODAY 42 HUMAN EVOLUTION First Humans he Australopithecus were the first humanlike creatures who could walk in an upright posture with their hands free, as indicated by the fossils found in Tanzania and Ethiopia. It is believed that climatic changes, nutritional adaptations, and energy storage for movement contributed to bipedalism. In any case, their short legs and long arms are seen as indications that they were only occasional walkers. Their cranium ® was very different from ours, and their brain was the size of a chimpanzee's. There is no proof that they used stone tools. Perhaps they made simple tools with sticks, but they lacked the intelligence to make more sophisticated utensils. Adaptation to the Environment The climatic changes that occurred during the Miocene probably transformed the tropical rainforest into savannah. Various species of hominins left their habitats in the trees . GORILLA H. SAPIENS and went down to the grasslands in search of food. It is conjectured that Y row SPECTAL TEETH the first ee nee to stand up to Bm They had large incisors like spatulas See Ovet ue dias anes: =n in front, and the teeth became — = > arranged in the form of an arch. j BI ISM By walking on two feet, they were able to free their upper limbs while they moved. DOR [ NE had many curves to maintain balance. . Given that monkeys do not have lumbars, ' ‘ft the weight of the body falls forward. ADA PELVIS : di Morphological changes ie |) in the pelvis, sacrum, - | =a and femur made these 3 dese bones similar to those 1 in modern humans. Whereas in chimpanzees the big toe is used to grasp, the position of the big toe F and the foot arch in hominins supported : movement in a bipedal posture. KNEE Unlike chimpanzees, the rim of the femur had an elliptical shape like that in the human knee. AUSTRALOPITHECUS AUSTRALOPITHECUS ANAMENSIS AFRICANUS 3 to 2.5 million years ago. Globular skull with greater cerebral capacity. 4.2 to 39 million years ago. Primitive hominin with wide molars. Archaeological Findings The fossil skull of a child was found in 1924 in the Taung mine (South Africa). The remains included the face with a jaw and tooth fragments as well as skull bones. The brain cavity had been replaced with fossilized minerals. Later, in 1975, footprints of hominins were found in Laetoli (Tanzania). It is believed that more than three million years ago, after a rain that followed a volcanic eruption, various specimens left their tracks in the moist volcanic ash. Had a round head and strong jaw. Its cranial cavity could house a brain (adult) of 26 cubic inches (440 cu cm). AETOLI tracks of hominins that archaeologists found in fossilized volcanic ash provided evidence of hominins walking on two legs (bipedalism). PARANTHROPUS AETHIOPICUS Approximately 2.5 million years ago. Robust skull and solid face. In 1975 in Laetoli (Tanzania), EVOLUTION AND GENETICS 43 AUSTRALOPITHECUS PARANTHROPUS AUSTRALOPITHECUS PARANTHROPUS PARANTHROPUS ANAMENSIS AETHIOPICUS AFRICANUS ROBUSTUS BOISEI Australopithecus afarensis Considered the oldest hominin, it inhabited eastern Africa between three and four million years ago. A key aspect in human evolution was the bipedalism achieved by A. afarensis. The skeleton of “Lucy,” found in 1974, was notable for its age and completeness. COMPARATIVE oe SIZE H THE LETON OF LUCY This hominid found in Ethiopia had the size of a chimpanzee, but its pelvis allowed it to maintain an upright position. Image Fibula ————-¢d) § reconstructed O— Tarsus from the bones of Metatarsus ———Cy(©Q— Phalanx Lucy. PARANTHROPUS , Fe AE PARANTHROPUS BOISEI mfr et al ROBUSTUS 2.2 to 1.3 million years ago. Skull adapted for consumption of tough vegetables. 44 HUMAN EVOLUTION Use of Tools he emergence of Homo habilis, which had a more humanlike appearance than Australopithecus, in eastern Africa showed important anatomical modifications that allowed advancement, especially in the creation of various stone tools, such as flaked pebbles for cutting and scraping and even hand axes. The bipedal posture for locomotion was established, and the first signs of language appeared. Stone technology became possible thanks to the notable increase in brain size in Homo habilis. In turn, the anatomic development of Homo erectus facilitated its migration toward areas far from its African origins, and it appears to have populated gekes and Asia, where it traveled as far as the Pacific Ocean. Homo erectus was capable of discovering fire, a vital element that improved human nutrition and provided protection from the cold. Homo habilis The appearance of Homo habilis in eastern Africa between 2 and 15 million years ago marked a significant advancement in the evolution of the human genus. The increased brain size and other anatomical changes together with the development of stone technology were substantive developments in this species, whose name means “handy man.” Although it fed on carrion, it was still not capable of hunting on its own. The cranial cavity of Homo habilis was larger than that of Australopithecus, reaching a The first step was cerebral development of to select rocks between 40 and 50 cubic and scrape them inches (650-800 cu cm). It is until sharp. believed that this characteristic was key in developing the capacity of making tools, considering that it had half the brain size of was used to sharpen the edges of the tools. 2.5 MILLION 1.7 MILLION 7 1.6 MILLION YEARS AGO YEARS AGO . YEARS AGO Homo erectus is the first Appearance of Homo habilis - in eastern Africa. hominin to leave its habitat. Homo habilis disappears because of unknown causes. hy 1 modern humans. A “stone hammer” EVOLUTION AND GENETICS 45 HOMO HABILIS HOMO ERECTUS ~~ 7 Ee 4 Homo erectus z —- The “erect man” is native to East Africa, and its age is estimated at 1.8 million years. It was the first hominin to leave Africa. In a short time it populated a great part of Europe. In Asia it reached China to the east and the island of Java to the southeast. Much of what is known about this species was learned from a finding called Turkana Boy near Lake Turkana, Kenya, in 1984. This species was tall and had long limbs. The brain of this specimen was larger than that of Homo habilis, and it could have made the fundamental discovery of making fire. COMPARATIVE SIZES The first being known as Homo habilis was found in 1964 in the Olduvai Gorge, located in the Serengeti Plain (Tanzania). The later discovery of the Turkana Boy (Kenya) revealed many of the physical particularities of Homo erectus. One of the major discoveries in the evolution of humans. It was used not only for protection from the cold but also to treat wood and cook food. The first evidence of the use of fire is some 1,500,000 years ago. ABOUT 1.5 MILLION YEARS AGO i First use of fire by Homo r , in southern Africa 46 HUMAN EVOLUTION Able Hunters escendants of Homo heidelbergensis, the Neanderthals were the first inhabitants of Europe, western Asia, and northern Africa. Diverse genetic studies have tried to determine whether it is a subspecies of Homo sapiens or a separate species. According to fossil evidence, Neanderthals were the first humans to adapt to the extreme climate of the glacial era, to carry out funerals, and to care for sick individuals. With a brain capacity as large or larger than that of present-day humans, Neanderthals were able to develop tools in the style of the Mousterian culture. The cause of their extinction is still under debate. INDIAN OCEAN Homo neanderthalensis The Middle Paleolithic (400,000 to 30,000 years ago) is dominated by the development of Homo neanderthalensis. In the context of the Mousterian culture, researchers have found traces of the first use of caves and other shelters for refuge from the cold. Hunters by nature, H. neanderthalensis created tools and diverse utensils, such as wooden hunting weapons with sharpened stone points. MAN—HUNTER Males were dedicated to the search for food, while the women looked after children. It is believed that Neanderthals hunted large prey over short distances. They used wooden spears with stone points and probably jumped on the prey. TOOLS FOUND years a THE AGE OF SOME NEANDERTHAL DISCOVERIES fa 600,000 YEARS AGO 400,000 YEARS AGO 150,000 YEARS AGO Homo neanderthalensis lives in the Ice Age in Europe and western Asia. Homo heildebergensis is in Europe, Wooden spears found in Germany and the part of Asia, and Africa. United Kingdom date back to this time. OLUTION AND GENETICS 47 Homo Homo NEANDERTHALENSIS HEIDELBERGENSIS Humans of the Ice Age Characterized as the caveman of the Ice Age, Homo neanderthalensis was able to use fire and diverse tools that allowed it to work wood, skins, and stones, among other materials. They used the skins to cover themselves from cold and to build shelter, and the stones and the wood were key materials in the weapons used for hunting. The bone structure of their fossils reveals a skull with prominent ciliary arcs, sunken eyes, a wide nose, and large upper teeth, probably used to grasp skins and other objects during the process of rudimentary manufacture. PHY The bones in the hand made it possible to grasp objects much more strongly than modern man can. COMPARATIVE SIZE ahesetees. In comparison to modern humans, Neanderthals had a larger brain capacity. e To endure he pared bi * Slaull found in La Chapelle-aux-Saints (France) ud att Oh Ae ve 160,000 YEARS AGO 25,000 YEARS AGO _ Fel), First Homo sapiens found in Africa 48 HUMAN EVOLUTION EVOLUTION AND GENETICS 49 D lr e CL Anc e Stors Theories of Expansion KEY GENERAL ROUTE 40,000 YEARS AGO DATE OF MIGRATION There is no agreement among scientists ae F P maa . bout how th ion of H je he origin of the human species is still in debate, even though scientists have been able to othe Sena eis fleece . = YEARS AGO establish that H. sapiens is not directly related to the Neanderthals. The most accepted an a al ariel aa gL - scientific studies for dating Neanderthal fossils places the oldest specimens some 195,000 dhe peoplelol that cominent have greater years ago in Africa. New genetic studies based on mitochondrial DNA have corroborated that date pan a Lilla ets is other ae |. and have also contributed to determining the possible migration routes that permitted the slow rnigestany wales Hofad shplens would a ; | YEARS AGO expansion of H. sapiens to other continents. Meanwhile, the new discoveries raise unanswered have reached Asia, Australia, and YA | Europe. However, some scientists think that there were no such migrations but 40,000- that modern humans evolved more or Bocn0 questions about what happened in the course of the 150,000 years that preceded the * great cultural revolution that characterizes H. sapiens and that occurred some would have arrived YEARS AGO ‘ . A less simultaneously in various 40,000 years ago with the appearance of Cro-Magnon in Europe. ibs Lb rcalonsot the ana ala \ ool some 40,000 years ” 50,000 * ago in central Asia, —— | YEARS AGO | India, eastern Asia, ! Siberia, and, later, America. Homo sapiens sapiens 200,000 - It is believed that Cro-Magnon arrived in Europe some i 40,000 years ago. Evidence of prehistoric art, symbolism, and ritual ceremonies distinguish this advanced culture from other species of hominins that preceded it. The modern humans SETTOCHO MERIAL EVE One of the final It was well-adapted to its environment, lived in caves, would have left Africa destinations acon’ and developed techniques of hunting in groups. , some 60,000 years ago 12,000 Tt captured large animals with traps SIREN EE eRe and populated Asia and ae YEARS and small ones with rocks. ee ag als Australia. AGO “ha multiple tools for various uses and were usually made from stone, bone, horns, and wood. Ee daete: pies Out of Africa e majority o : ‘ EVOLUTION OF CRANIAL paleoanthropologists According to this theory, modern y THE SKULL CAPACITY and geneticists agree man is an evolution of the archaic g Cro-Magnon had Its cranial cavity that humans of today Homo sapiens that emerged UL ° Ss a small face, could hold a emerged in Africa. It is Africa. From there it would have = Ss high forehead, brain of up to 97 \ there they have found extended to the rest of the world, =) = and longer chin. cubic inches the oldest bones. overrunning the Neanderthals and 4 iy (1,590 cu cm). primitive Homo sapiens. The anatomical differences between the races would have occurred in the ua last 40,000 years. I Multiregional Evolution > The theory of regional continuity, or multiregional evolution, states that the modern human developed simultaneously in diverse regions of the world, like the evolution of local archaic Homo sapiens. The last common ancestor would be a primitive Homo erectus that lived in Africa some 1.8 million years ago. 150,000 YEARS AGO 120,000 YEARS AGO 1 90,000 YEARS AGO 60,000 YEARS AGO 40,000 YEARS AGO The “Mitochondrial Eve” ; Homo sapiens begins to extend “Nuclear Adam” was the Traces of Homo Cro-Magnon (type is the common ancestor through Africa. common ancestor of all sapiens in China of Homo sapiens) of all people. the men of the world. appears in Europe. 50 HUMAN EVOLUTION Culture, the Great Leap Ithough questions remain about how culture originated, it is almost impossible to A determine which things of the human world are natural and which are not. Scientists of many disciplines are trying to answer these questions from the evidence of prehistoric life found by paleontologists. The subspecies of mammals to which man belongs, Homo sapiens sapiens, appeared in Africa some 150,000 years ago, disseminated through the entire Old World some 30,000 years ago (date that the oldest signs of art were found), and colonized America 11,000 years ago; but the first traces of agriculture, industry, population centers, and control over nature date from barely the last 10,000 years. Some believe that the definitive leap toward culture was achieved through the acquisition of a creative language capable of expressing ideas and sentiments more advanced than the simple communication of Homo erectus. e@ The first artists Fh Cave paintings, like those of the caves of ef Altamira (Spain) and Lascaux (France), leave no doubt that those who made them truly possessed the attributes of human beings. Architecture had not arrived, but paintings had, COLORS The pigments used were of natural origin, such as vegetable charcoal, red ocher, and brown ocher. BLACK @ OCHER engraved and sculptured in stone or bone. There ' exist various theories about the function of cave _— SPEAR PREGNANT painting that consider the aesthetic, the y They represented ANIMALS instruments that they used at that time. A recurring theme in magical, the social, and the religious—not much rns cave paintings different from the questions about art today. CAVE-PAINTING TECHNIQUES GEOMETRIC DESIGNS Dotted and lineal geometric designs, = along with mythical a! chimeras, have been ty found among se European cave paintings similar to» a phy the rock art of pg ee A | Aboriginal ee 4 é Australians. 4 hk a BLOWING One technique consisted of blowing pigment LAURELS AND | 4 “HORSE” PAINTED SPIKES i | through a rod or IN LASCAUX IN THE Forms reproduced ih y') hollow bone. PALEOLITHIC even in tools WURM GLACIATION AURIGNACIAN PERIGORDIAN 35,000 YEARS 30,000 YEARS AGO 27,000 YEARS AGO Tools of mammoth tusk, flake tools The Upper Paleolithic begins. Well-cut tools, including a multiangle graver ART ON THE WALLS Cave painting is a phenomenon that was found mainly in the current regions of France and Spain. In France, there are more than 130 caves; the most famous are located in the Aquitaine region (Lascaux, Pech- Merle, Laugerie, La Madeleine) and in the Pyrenees (Niaux, Le Tucs d'Audubert, Bedeilhac). Spain has some 60 caves in the Cantabria region to the north, among them the cave of Altamira, and 180 caves farther south. Examples from other regions include caves at Addaura, Italy, and Kapova, Russia. Portable art, on the other hand, was abundant in all Europe. 14,000 years old THE PAINTINGS OF ALTAMIRA MICROCEPHALY The head is small in relation to the rest of the animal's body. F a,7 aie THEMES ‘AND MOTIVES % HUNTING SCENES IN THE CAVE OF TASSILI- N-AJJER, ALGERIA $ To! — oe. . ote on a MEDITERRANEAN SEA Builders of objects IF Homo sapiens sapiens distinguished itself from its Le ancestors, who were already making rudimentary tools, through the growing use of such new materials as bone and above all for the specialization of new tools. Mortars, knives, boring tools, and axes had forms and functions continually more sophisticated. There also appeared, in addition to utensils and tools, objects with ornamental and representative functions that attested to humans' increasing capacity for symbolism. These manifestations, through which the art could leave the caves, are known as portable art. It produced objects that were utilitarian, luxurious, or ceremonial, like the Paleolithic “Venus” figurines. PALEOLITHIC TOOLS TWO-SIDED KNIFE Its invention presaged the most important cultural revolution of the Upper Paleolithic. = , ee HANDS IMPRINTED AS A NEGATIVE APPEAR IN MULTIPLE PLACES. SOLUTREAN MAGDALENIAN 20,000-50,000 YEARS AGO 15,000 YEARS AGO Use of oxide to paint, pointed instruments The greatest flourishing of cave art in southern Europe ” EUROPE SYMBOLISM The “Venus of Willendorf” measures 4 inches (11 cm) in height and was found in |» Austria. 24,000 years old HARPOON J This complex | instrument of bone dates from some 11,000 years ago (Magdalenian Period, France). ; | Pray " EVOLUTION AND GENETICS 51 Sites in Europe where Paleolithic art has been found POLISHED AX iu Found in Wetzlar, ‘ |e Wie Germany, it shows the polishing a i i technique of 20,000 a, : Ps | J years ago. hn END OF PALEOLITHIC 9,000 BC End of the glaciations, with an improvement of the global climate 52 HUMAN EVOLUTION Urban Revolution ome 10,000 years ago, there was an interglacial period on Earth that caused a gradual increase in temperatures and an overall climatic change that brought a modification to the life of humans. Instead of roaming from place to place to hunt, people began to create societies based on sedentary life, agriculture, and the domestication of animals. Some villages grew so much that they became true cities, such as Catal Hiiyiik in southern Turkey. In the ruins of this city, considered one of the milestones of modern archaeology, were found a good number of ceramics and statues of the so-called mother goddess—a woman giving birth—that belonged to a fertility ritual. In addition, there are signs that the inhabitants practiced funeral rights and built dolmens for collective graves. CITYOF CATAL HUYUK The Neolithic City of Catal Hiiyiik Catal Hiiyiik is located in southern Anatolia (Turkey). Houses were built side by side, sharing a common wall. There were no exterior windows or openings, and the buildings had flat-terraced roofs. People entered through the roof, and there were usually one or two stories. The walls and terraces were made of plaster and then painted red. In some main residences, there were paintings on the walls and roof. The houses were made of mud bricks and had a sanctuary dedicated to the mother goddess. During the excavation, many religious articles were uncovered: the majority were ceramic figures in relief depicting the mother goddess and heads of bulls and leopards. OTHER TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION ELEVATED PLATFORM BULL'S HEAD WITH HORNS OVEN C———__ —_ artar WITH BULL HORNS ALTAR PLATFORM t OPEN HEARTH WAS THE AVERAGE SIZE OF A HOUSE The process of carrying out a megalithic construction began in a quarry, where large blocks of stone were extracted. rege Transport The stones were transported on rollers to the place chosen for the erection of the monument. 8000 BC First indications of agricultural activities Erection The blocks were dropped into a hole and placed in a vertical position. 7000 BC Expansion of agriculture. Complex funerary rites. arthworks Embankments were made for the construction of a dolmen. The horizontal block was transported over an embankment and placed on the two upright stones. 6000 BC Stable settlements in the Persian Gulf _ LOCATION OF CATAL HUYUK Country Turkey CROPS In the fields near Catal Hiiyiik, the inhabitants grew wheat, sorghum, peas, and lentils. They gathered apples, pistachios, and almonds. Year 7000 BC Type of Farming-livestock City 3500 BC Invention of writing in Mesopotamia —_——= gt ee a Bt ate ait ~ LENTILS EVOLUTION AND GENETICS 53 LS a ie CS CATAL HUYUK = WAS ONE OF THE APPLES WHEAT FIRST CITIES. ere is a direct relationship between ~ the emergence of agriculture and the cult of the feminine because of the importance of fertility. Statuettes of pregnant women were found in homes in shrines decorated with molded bull heads and other figures. AD 320 First vehicles with wheels in Asia. Mechanisms of Heredity he cells of the body are constantly dividing to replace damaged cells. Before a cell divides to create new cells, a process known as mitosis, or to form ovules or spermatozoa, a process called meiosis, the DNA included in each cell needs to copy, or replicate, itself. This process is possible because the DNA strands can open and SELF-COPYING Complex macromolecule that contains a chemical eae code for all the information THE REPLICATION OF LIFE necessary for life separate. Each of the two strands of the original DNA serves as a model for a new strand. In this chapter, we will also tell you how human beings vary in height, weight, skin color, eyes, and TRANSCRIPTION OF THE GENETIC CODE THE PATH OF THE GENE PROBLEMS OF HEREDITY other physical characteristics despite belonging to the same species. The secret is in the genes, and we will show it to you in a simple way. 56 MECHANISMS OF HEREDITY yelf-Copying II living organisms utilize cellular division as Ws a mechanism for reproduction or growth. The cellular cycle has a phase called the S phase in which the duplication of the hereditary material, or DNA, occurs. In this phase, two identical sister chromatids are united into one chromosome. Once this phase of duplication is finalized, the original and the duplicate will form the structures necessary for mitosis and, in addition, give a signal for the whole process of cellular division to start. e The Cellular Nucleus 7 The nucleus is the control center of the cell. Generally it is the most noticeable structure of the cell. Within it are found the chromosomes, which are formed by DNA. In human beings, each cellular nucleus is composed of 23 pairs of chromosomes. The nucleus is il surrounded by a porous membrane made ; e up of two layers. GROWTH AND The cellular cycle includes cell growth, in which the cell increases in mass and duplicates its organelles, and cell division, in which DNA is" replicated an nuclei divide. CYTOKINESIS to the mother. MITOSIS The two sets of the two daughter cells. CELLULAR DIVISION The cytoplasm of the mother cell divides and gives rise to two daughter cells identical PHASE Gl s ae _ The cell doubles in size. T chromosomes are distributed, one set for each nucleus of | number of organelles, enzym 2 molecules increases. & = . . & ad] eo. e | INTERPHASE S PHASE The DNA and associated proteins are copied, resulting in two copies of the genetic information. PHASE G2 The chromosomes begin to condense. The cell prepares for division. AMOUNT OF CHROMOSOMES ACCORDING TO SPECIES The number of chromosomes of a species varies independently of its size and complexity. A fern has thousands of chromosomes and a fly only a few pairs. 8 chromosomes FRUIT FLY EVOLUTION AND GENETICS 57 6.5 feet (2 m) LENGTH OF DNA IN HUMAN CELL CHROMOSOMES e HOW THEY LOOK Once they have duplicated, the chromosomes form a structure in the shape of a cross. In this structure, the centromere functions as the point of union for the chromatids. History of the Chromosome The chromosomes carry the genetic information that controls the characteristics of a human being, which are passed from the parents to the children and from generation to generation. They were discovered by Karl Wilhelm von Nageli in 1842. In 1910 Thomas Hunt Morgan discovered the primordial function of the chromosomes: he called them carriers of genes. Thanks to demonstrating this, Morgan received the Nobel Prize for Physiology or Medicine in 1933. es chromosomes chromosomes SALAMANDER _ FERNS f r 5 58 MECHANISMS OF HEREDITY EVOLUTION AND GENETICS 59 he chromosome is a structural unit that consists of a molecule of DNA Te haevpabenns 6 peda tes 2 : : A ‘ group of six | associated with proteins. Eukaryote chromosomes condense during consists of loops loops nucleosomes that mitosis and meiosis and form structures visible through a microscope. peel by the IN EACH ROSETTE forthe aa “scaffolding” of other proteins. These inside the loops They are made of DNA (deoxyribonucleic acid), RNA (ribonucleic acid), and proteins. The majority of the proteins are histones, small positively charged ° pone - ad molecules. Chromosomes carry the genes, the functional structures chromatin. responsible for the characteristics of each individual. @ : rs 0.0000012 ffcn # (0.00003 mm) a DIAMETER OF EACH SOLENOID 2 Karyotype The ordering and systematic classification of a the chromosomes by pairs, size, and position of the centromere. The chromosomes that are seen in a karyotype are found in the metaphase of mitosis. Each one of them consists of two sister chromatids united by their centromeres. SPACER DNA The nucleosomes are united by chains of base pairs of DNA 0.0000004 inch (0.00001 mm) long. CHROMATINS There are two types: euchromatin, lightly packed, and heterochromatin, more densely packed. The majority of nuclear - _ chromatin consists of euchromatin. nucleosomes — . IN EACH TURN If the DNA chain is stretched and observed under a microscope, it resembles beads on a string. Nevertheless, DNA chains are 60 ig osettes generally found pressed very IN EACH TURN OF tightly around the nucleus. base pairs THE SPIRAL THE AMOUNT OF DNA BETWEEN NUCLEOSOMES NITROGEN BASES CIRCULAR 2 *. piste NUCLEOSOME A group of eight histone dG molecules with two DNA Carrier of Genes spirals twisted around MEailon ” In the DNA, certain segments of the molecule are con one Aan called genes. These segments have the genetic PROKARYOTE CELL michithetmoleculesrtiat information that will determine the characteristics of an Prokaryote cells do not have a regulate genetic activity. j _—— individual or will permit the synthesis of a certain protein. cellular nucleus, so the DNA is found a The information necessary for generating the entire organism in the cytoplasm. The size of the DNA is found in each cell, but only the part of the information differs according to species. necessary for reproducing this specific type of cell is Prokaryotes are almost all unicellular activated. The reading and transmission of the information organisms belonging to the domains = for use outside the nucleus is performed by messenger RNA. of the archaea and bacteria. 60 MECHANISMS OF HEREDITY The Replication of Life n deoxyribonucleic acid-—DNA—all the genetic information of a complete organism is found. It has complete control of heredity. A DNA molecule consists of two strands of relatively simple compounds called nucleotides. Each nucleotide consists of a phosphate, sugar, and one of four kinds of nitrogenous bases. The nucleotides on each strand are paired in specific combinations and connected to each other by hydrogen bonds. The two strands coil around each other in the form of a” spiral, or double helix. e Complementary: Various specialized proteins called enzymes act as biological catalysts, accelerating the reactions of replication: helicase, which is in charge of opening the double helix of DNA; polymerase, which is in charge of synthesizing the new strands of DNA in one direction; and ligase, which seals and joins the fragments of DNA that were synthesized. 0 nucleotides PER SECOND IS THE SPEED OF DNA REPLICATION IN HUMANS. Biological Revolution Deciphering the molecular structure of DNA was the major triumph of biomolecular studies in biology. Based on work by Rosalind Franklin on the diffraction of X-rays by DNA, James Watson and Francis Crick demonstrated the double-helix composition of DNA in 1953 and for their work won the 1962 Nobel Prize for Physiology or Medicine. r REPLICATION The genetic information is encoded in the sequence of the bases of the DNA nucleotides aligned along the DNA molecule. The specificity of the pairing of these bases is the key to the replication of DNA. There are only two possible combinations—thymine wi adenine and guanine with cytosine—to form the complementary links of the strands that make up the DNA chain. WEAK BRIDGES Helicase separates the double helix, thus initiating the replication of bot! ins. The chains serve as a model to make a new double helix. BASIC MECHANISM The new bases join to make a DNA chain that is a daughter of the previous model. Nucleotides The nucleotides have three subunits: a phosphate group, a five-carbon sugar, and a nitrogenous base. In DNA these bases are small organic molecules. Adenine and guanine are purines, and cytosii pyrimidines, smaller than the purines. All are composed of nitrogen, hydrogen, carbon, and oxygen—except for adenine, which has no oxygen. The adenine is always paired with thymine and guanine with cytosine. The first pair is joined by two hydrogen bonds and the second by three. EVOLUTION AND GENETICS 61 i 3 4 FREED ENERGY NEW CONNECTION PERFECT REPLICATION The energy to form new links is The new chains of DNA . The result is two new molecules, each with obtained from the phosphate couple in short one strand from the original DNA and one groups. The free nitrogenous bases segments, and the ligase new complementary strand. This is called are found in the form of joins them to form the semiconservative replication. The genetic triphosphates. The separation of daughter molecules. information of the new the phosphates provides the strand is identical to energy to interlace the nucleotides * that of the original x in the new chain that is being built. DNA molecule. a @ “6° Pd ——e GUANINE ADENINE HYDROGEN BOND CYTOSINE THYMINE id thymine are 4,5 DNA TRANSCRIPTION The process of copying one simple chain of DNA is called transcription. For it to happen, the double strands separate through the action of an enzyme, permitting the enzyme RNA polymerase to connect to one of the strands. Then, using the DNA strand as a model, the enzyme begins synthesizing messenger RNA from the free nitrogenous bases that are found inside the nucleus. SEPARATION OF DNA When the DNA is to be transcribed, its double chain separates, leaving a sequence of DNA bases free to be newly matched. /w] 30 bases per second ARE COPIED DURING THE j PROCESS OF TRANSCRIPTION. y Transcription of the Genetic Code his complex process of translation allows the information stored in nuclear DNA to arrive at the organelles of the cell to conduct the synthesis of polypeptides. RNA (ribonucleic acid) is key to this process. The mRNA (messenger RNA) is in-charge of carrying information transcribed from the nucleus as a simple chain of bases to the ribosome. The ribosome, together with transfer RNA (tRNA), translates the mRNA and assembles surrounding amino acids following the genetic instructions. e = EVOLUTION AND GENETICS 63 SYNTHESIS OF POLYPEPTIDES The polypeptides form when a group of amino acids unite in a chain. For this to happen, the ribosome: translates the information that the mRNA transcribed from the nuclear DNA; POLYPEPTIDES are formations of about 10 to 50 amino acids. Each amino acid is considered a peptide. tRNA Transfer RNA is in charge of recognizing and translating the information that the mRNA codifies the amino acids and their order with contains. : the help of tRNA, through the matching of =a codons and anticodons; and places each amino —-, eer exactly where it belongs. Po Fa ms RIBOSOME — —— The cellular organelle where a] INTERRUPTION nucleus thro the synthesis of polypeptides me ~——s The synthesis is produced ~~ enzyme called occurs. It helps translate the : —_ between the start codon and the e information brought by the = stop codon. Once the chain mRNA. — reaches the stopping point, the ANTICODON ribosome stops synthesizing the pm polypeptide, and the ribosome g ENZYMES releases the polypeptide. collaborate in the formation of the polypeptide chain by making the peptide chains that join the amino acids. / j j r i z a i The result is a simp c ain of © mRNA (messenger : % * * ~ . } N LEAVING THE NUCLEUS If the DNA were to leave the nucleus, it would get corrupted, 50 it is the mRNA that cribes the DNA's ‘ormation in a simple chain, Which takes the information to le cytoplasm of the cell. ) © TRANSLATION In the ribosome the translation of the mRNA to synthesize the polypeptide is initiated with the participation of tRNA. COMPRESSION OF RNA In the formation of mRNA, % useless parts are eliminated to reduce its size. With introns Without introns DNA RNA MATURE RNA MECHANISMS OF HEREDITY The Path of the Gene The nuclear membranes The division of the new daughter reform, and the number of cells begins: the chromatids chromosomes enclosed in each condense; the nuclear membranes has been reduced by half. The chiasmata separate. The chromosomes separate from their homologues to incorporate themselves into the nucleus of the daughter cell. exual differences in the heredity of traits constitute a model known as sex-linked inheritance. The father of genetics was Gregor Mendel. He established the principle of independent segregation, which is possible only when the genes are situated on different chromosomes; if the genes are found on the same chromosome, they are linked, tending to 4" . be inherited together. Later Thomas Morgan contributed more evidence of “ bic sex-linked inheritance. Today many traits are identified in this model, such Me as hemophilia and color blindness. ~ , A : This first division has four phases, disintegrate; and the spindles form. EVOLUTION AND GENETICS In the second division, the two chromatids that form each chromosome from meiosis I are separated. As a result of this double division, four daughter cells are produced that contain half the characteristic chromosomal number—i.e., 23 chromosomes each (haploid cells). Each chromosome will be composed of a chromatid. 6 continues in the daughter cells. The chromosomes align at their middle, and the chromatids affix themselves to the fibers of the spindle. 7 The centromeres divide again, and the sister chromatids divide, going of which prophase 1 is the most characteristic of meiosis, since it encompasses its fundamental processes—pairing and crossing over, which allow the number of chromosomes by the end of this process to be reduced by half. The nuclear membrane disappears. The chiasmata, composed of two chromosomes, align, and the centromeres move to opposite poles. away. & HEREDITY A - In human beings, some genes have been 3 : identified that are found in the heterochromosomes and deal with sex r«’ ff — linkage. For example, the genes that 1 . 1 ? code for hemophilia and color blindness \, The spindle disappears PROPHASE I Ze SJ are found in the heterochromosome X. igh | ” and forms a membrane —— Pie horitiocaue ThE PEnes, ene Procece WAMLBIch ~~" ¥ around each nucleus. chromosomes pair arranged in i Linked pair of analogous up, forming linear form and genes chromosomes chiasmata, which are on the same exchange material unique to meiosis. chromosome, are while they are joined inherited as =: P 4 a \ % CHROMOSOME isolated units. ‘A CHROMOSOMES POSTULATED THE FIRST FROM THE MOTHER DIFFERENTIATED LAWS OF INHERITANCE. BY THEIR GENES 9 (1) CHROMOSOME FROM THE FATHER INFORMATION The new formations have B sus a haploid endowment of EEOSSitG OVER chromosomes. e.- ay RESULTING = PAIR OF 10 CHROMOSOMES The cytoplasm divides, separating the - mother cell into two daughter cells. ‘D| POSSIBLE CENTROMERE § THOMAS MORGAN COMBINATIONS studied the color of eyes in the fly Drosophilia melangaster. _— SS OF 66 MECHANISMS OF HEREDITY Problems of Heredity oward the end of the 19th century, the form in which the physical traits of parents were transmitted to their offspring was uncertain. This uncertainty extended to the breeding of plants and animals, which posed a problem for agriculture and livestock producers. In their fields they sowed plants and raised animals without knowing what the quality of their products would be. The work of Gregor Mendel and his contributions to molecular genetics eventually led to a solution to these problems and to an understanding of how the mechanisms of heredity work. @ The legacy of Mendel 8 The principles proposed by Mendel _— molecular genetics developed. This Le are the basis of classical, or science studies heredity on a molecular Mendelian, genetics, which reached its level and analyzes how the structure of peak at the beginning of the 20th DNA and its functional units, or genes, century. This science studies how the are responsible for heredity. Molecular variants, or alleles, for a morphological genetics links classical genetics and trait are transmitted from one generation molecular biology. Its use allows us to to the next. Later, after confirmation that — know the relationship that exists the components of the nucleus are those —_ between visible traits and the molecular in charge of controlling heredity, hereditary information. DOMINANT AND The traits of a gene in an individual are expressed according to a pair of variants, or alleles. In general, the dominant alleles are expressed RECESSIVE even though there may be another allele for the same gene. A recessive allele is expressed only if it is the only allele present in the pair. | DOMINANT HETEROZYGOUS HOMOZYGOUS With two When there is an With two dominant alleles, | allele of each recessive alleles, the individual is type, the the individual is homozygous individual is homozygous dominant for this heterozygous for recessive for this trait. this trait. trait. HOMOZYGOUS OR HETEROZYGOUS HOMOZYGOUS RECESSIVE Brown color of the eyes is present in individuals with at least one dominant allele. IN BETWEEN In certain cases, the color of the eyes does not respond to a complete dominance. It is determined by the influence of alleles of Siheasenes Blue color of the eyes is present in individuals with two recessive alleles. FROM THE GARDEN During the 19th century, the gardens of the Abbey of Saint Thomas were the laboratory that Mendel used for his experiments on heredity. During the 20th century, classical genetics and molecular genetics amplified our knowledge about the mechanism of heredity. 1869 The Austrian Augustinian monk Gregor Mendel proposes the laws that explain the mechanisms of heredity. His proposal is ignored by scientists. 1869 Johann Friedrich Miescher, a Swiss doctor, suggests that deoxyribonucleic acid, or DNA, is responsible for the transmission of hereditary traits. 1889 Wilhelm von Waldeyer gives the name “chromosomes” to the structures that form cellular DNA. 1900 The German Carl Erich Correns, the Austrian Erich Tschermak, and the Dutchman Hugo de Vries discover, independently, the works of Mendel. 1926 T.H. Morgan demonstrates that the genes are found united in different groups of linkages in the chromosomes. 1953 James Watson and Francis Crick propose a double- helix polymer model for the structure of DNA. 1973 Investigators produce the first genetically modified bacteria. 1977 North American scientists for the first time introduce genetic material from human cells into bacteria. 1982 The United States commercializes recombinant insulin produced by means of genetic engineering. 1990 An international public consortium initiates the project to decipher the human genome. 1997 Dolly the sheep is the first cloned mammal. 2000 The Human Genome Project and the company Celera publish the deciphered human genome. The man who calculated fF Gregor Johann Mendel was born in Heinzendorf, Le Austria, in 1822 and died in the city of Briinn, Austria-Hungary (now Brno, Czech Republic) in 1884. He was a monk of the Augustinian order who at the University of Vienna pursued, over three years, different studies in mathematics, physics, and natural sciences. This ample academic training and his ite” great intellectual capacity permitted him to develop a series of experiments in =, which he used pea plants (Pisum ( sativum). He analyzed various traits, among them the , appearance of flowers, fruits, stems, and leaves. In his , \ -_ i y" 4 methodology, he included an innovation: he submitted his results to mathematical calculations. His conclusions were key to i" understanding the mechanism of heredity. PEAS The pea plants of the Pisum sativum species were key for the conclusions obtained by Mendel about heredity. : — BOTANY This display is a botanical teaching tool. An altruistic naturalist, Mendel dedicated himself to conserving in herbariums the specimens of different species of plants. Uniformity Mendel's first law, or principle, about heredity proposes that by crossing two homozygous parents (P), dominant and recessive for the same trait, its descendant, or filial 1 (F,), will be uniform. That is, all those F1 individuals will be identical for the homozygous dominant trait. In this example using the trait seed color, yellow is dominant and green is recessive. Thus, the F, generation will be yellow. Mendel used pure individuals, plants that he knew were homozygous dominant and recessive for a specific trait. For his experiments, Mendel carefully covered or directly cut the stamens of the flowers to prevent them from self-fertilizing. CROSSING pa OBTAINING THE FIRST FILIAL GENERATION Yellow Yellow: 3 Green: 1 The cross, or self-fertilization, of individuals of the F, generation produces F> individuals °FFILIAL GENERATION with yellow and green seeds in constant 3:1 — ratio. In addition, it is deduced that the ; F, generation is made up of 2 heterozygous individuals. j a ~~ PURE INDIVIDUALS SELF-FERTILIZATION Green Yellow EVOLUTION AND GENETICS 67 - Traits and Alleles The first law, known as the law of segregation, comes from the results obtained with the crosses made with F, individuals. At the reappearance of the color green in the descendants, or filial 2 (F2) generation, he deduced that the trait seed color is represented through variants, or alleles, that code for yellow (dominant color) and green (recessive color). Independence The second law, called the law of independent assortment, proposes that the alleles of different traits are transmitted independently to the descendant. This can be demonstrated by analyzing the results of the experiments in which Mendel examined simultaneously the heredity of two traits. For example, he analyzed the traits “color and surface texture of seeds.” He took as dominant alleles those for yellow and a smooth surface and as recessive the alleles for green and a wrinkled surface. Later he crossed pure plants with both characteristics and obtained the F, generation that exhibited only dominant alleles. The self- fertilization of the F, generation produced F> individuals in the constant proportion 9:3:3:1, showing that combinations of alleles were transmitted in an independent manner. INSEMINATION ont Once self- * EI fertilization was «, impeded, Mendel a L inseminated the pollen of a i | homozygous dominant on P . 7 2 an ovary of a homozygous (= a, i recessive and vice versa. In i j = “ addition to color, he a» ie “yl a analyzed other traits, such (i r f * as length of stem, s appearance of seeds, and color of flowers. TALL SHORT STEM STEM FRUITFUL = WORK os When the plants . Ej produced legumes, the seeds exhibited Y determined colors. Upon carrying out his experiments fn on hundreds of individuals, he i obtained much information. 2 The monk recorded the data in tables and submitted them to probability analysis. In this way Mendel synthesized his results into the conclusions that we know today as the Mendelian laws, or principles, of inheritance. GREEN The green seeds appear in lower proportion than the yellow. DNA ANALYSIS 70-71 78-79 86-87 72-73 80-81 88-89 74-75 82-83 90-91 70 THE AGE OF GENETICS EVOLUTION AND GENETICS 71 enetic Solution © INSERTION ITO THE @ pacren exponential Th bined plasmid tic engineeri lies technologies f ipulati I ti js inserted into the Sonate enetic engineering applies technologies for manipulating nsertion oa piel eae R ducti now on, they and transferring DNA between separate organisms. It A culture of nonpathogenic receptor -_ Pi nisi i the hormone enables the improvement of animal and plant species, pereupenonaines HOURS lees ere a the correction of defective genes, and the production of many solution is then subjected to chemical are Heedesiat esses ete la these conga, . . and electrical stimuli to incorporate the : the recombined bacteria transcribe the useful compounds. For example, some microorganisms are nigel eet eslhe HG RET Gere population to information in their chromosomes to : double. produce proteins. The bacteria also read genetically modified to manufacture human proteins, which are vital for those who do not produce them efficiently. @ the information from the human DNA that was inserted using the recombined plasmid, and they produce insulin. HIGH PRESSURE Genetic Engineering @® IR“ Genetic recombination consists of LLafl integrating DNA from different n H 4 organisms. For example, a plasmid is used Union RECOMBINANT Purification to insert a known portion of human DNA The human and bacterial DNA sine coibined The culture is circulated at high into the DNA of bacteria. The bacteria join at their free ends and form plasmid is inserted NEW INSULIN pressure through tiny tubes that then incorporate new genetic information a recombined plasmid. into the receptor The transcription of destroy the bacteria. The solution into their chromosomes. When their own This plasmid contains bacteria. human DNA enables contains a large amount of insulin DNA is transcribed, the new DNA is the human the formation of TINY that must be separated from the i i insuli recombined human TUBE de SE 0 transcribed as well. Thus, the bacteria insulin gene. insulin. other proteins in the solution. formulate both their own proteins and foreign proteins, such as human insulin. RECOMBINED REMAINS: REMAINS PAN DNA The ess First Case HUMAN DNA INSULIN contain up to 250,000 a) AD ace ar Insulin was the first protein ; produced by genetic - engineering. It was approved Extraction for human use in 1982. DNA is extracted from a human cell to obtain the gene that codes for producing CHROMOSOME insulin. The DNA is cut using restriction a i enzymes that recognize the points where Centrifugal force the gene in question begins and ends. GLASS accelerates the These enzymes also cut the bacterial INSULIN GENE cop notes TUBES decantation. ‘ E plasmid. The DNA fragments thus obtained The DNA Centrifugation have irregular and complementary ends. sequences for producing insulin are inserted separately into different plasmids. Centrifuges separate the various compounds present in the solution from the bacterial remains and the human insulin. The proteins present in the solid matter are separated from the original INSULIN solution. PROTEIN - BEFORE AFTER CENTRIFUGATION CENTRIFUGATION : : f Wis At i separate: BACTERIA fnatarial Escherichia coli DECANTATION ee that contain plasmids (DNA The centrifuges reduce Insulin in | —— contains molecules that are separate the amount of time bacterial bacterial from chromosomal DNA). necessary to separate batch | remains. the solid matter. Insulin NUCLEUS 3 pellet @ recombinant Formulation antibiotics and The recombinant human insulin is Vac cine S chemically modified. This produces a stable, aseptic compound that can be ARE ALSO PRODUCED BY administered therapeutically via injection. GENETIC ENGINEERING. \ BACTERIAL PLASMID MODEL ORGANISMS Besides E. coli, eukaryote cells such as yeast are used. HUMAN CELL Each body cell has genetic information distributed among the genes in the nucleus. 72 THE AGE OF GENETICS DNA Markers n the past, individual plants in agriculture were chosen for reproduction according to visible characteristics or markers, such as the shape and color of fruit. Genetics demonstrated that these characteristics come from the expression of genes. The genes can also be accompanied by repeating groups of bases called DNA markers. These markers are useful primarily during the early phases of a plant's development to detect whether it has a certain trait. e Microsatellites §™_ DNA has different types of Li molecular markers. Some of the most useful markers are called microsatellites. These markers are groups of up to 10 DNA bases that are repeated in short sequences. Microsatellites are very useful in evaluating plant and animal populations. For example, the length of a microsatellite shows whether given plants of the same species are homozygous or heterozygous for a certain trait. DNA markers are especially useful because they are not affected by the environment. @ Extraction Molecular markers are extracted from DNA taken from a tissue sample. In the case of plants, even a tiny leaf may give enough DNA. MOLECULAR MARKER Repetitive sequence of a pair of bases (guanine [G] and adenine [A] in this example) Based on Mendel The Mendelian laws, essential to the development of the field of genetics, were discovered based on the markers of visible traits. These traits are very useful, except for a few disadvantages: they are based on an individual's phenotype (appearance), which is influenced by the environment. In addition, it is necessary to wait until a specimen is fully grown in order to find out whether it has a desired trait. Fl PARENT 1 PARENT 2 EVOLUTION AND GENETICS 73 @ Preparation Restriction enzymes are used to snip portions of DNA that have the microsatellite. After the microsatellite is isolated, it is multiplied into thousands of identical units using a process called polymerase chain reaction (PCR). This process is carried out with each of the samples obtained from different individuals to be compared. For example, comparing microsatellites from different tomato plants can show which individuals are heterozygotic or homozygotic or recessive or dominant for specific traits. 3 MICROPIPETTE This instrument is used to insert an exact amount of the DNA sample. SAMPLE 1 SAMPLE 2 SAMPLE 3 GA GAGA GA GAGA GAGAGA GAGA —— we he of of a dominant a heterozygotic CC DNA SAMPLE homozygote. individual Samples containing microsatellites and a substance that glows in UV light are scattered in a pocket of polyacrylamide gel. ©-—— NUMBER OF SAMPLES More than 50 DNA samples can be placed for comparison in the same gel. : (ee le re % f > YELLOW RED RED LARGE SMALL LARGE The dominant This new trait The allele is may be of recessive allele is expressed. interest ina new crop. Polym expressed. orphism ie Variations in the sequence of a segment of DNA among the individuals of a population. For example, the variations in the color of tomatoes are a result of polymorphism. length POLYACRYLAMIDE GEL Electrophoresis Once the microsatellite samples are placed in the polyacrylamide gel, the gel is subjected to electrophoresis. This technique is widely used to separate molecules, in this case microsatellites, with a negative electrical charge by applying a current of electrons. When an electrical field is generated, electricity moves the microsatellites @ = through the gel at different speeds. Their movement varies with the ratio of the electrical charge to the mass of each microsatellite. The lighter Bec cae microsatellites travel farther than the The positive = . longer ones. electrical charge attracts the negative charges in the gel. @ Results After electrophoresis is finished, the results can be examined by exposing the gel to ultraviolet light. The location of each microsatellite shows the relationship between the various samples analyzed. In this case, the samples show which alleles are present and which are not. ple 2 rnge 2 a A MATCH These microsatellites match. This shows that samples 2 and 3 share this allele. Kbp The unit of DNA molecular 74 THE AGE OF GENETICS enome in Sight! ne of the most far-reaching and extraordinary scientific achievements is the deciphering of the human genome. This is the complete set of hereditary information contained in the DNA of human chromosomes. In less than 20 years, with a combination of original genetic techniques and the power of computers, scientists glimpsed the location of all the genes, including those that determine eye color, hair type, blood type, and even a person's sex. @ Genetic dictionary IR The 46 human chromosomes, together with Lf mitochondrial DNA, contain all a human being's genetic information. Knowing the location and function Ol of each gene or group of genes is useful for several reasons. It enables us to know if an illness stems from a defect in a gene or group of genes and even to correct the illness through gene therapy. We can also Ic 5 ( »)| '\e 2 better understand any potential interaction among 0 genes that are near each other in a chromosome and the effects of that interaction. Studying the 6 lo ll human genome can even reveal the origin of our species among the primates. i ? y it ig ag 38 5b 16 17 18 19 y 2 aa 2 ( Pa 18 $8 48 &6 a & 2 s 3 22 20)° 21" (22 XY Aa) iS xis So o s oa rs) Ec g 5 ee 9 3 8 8 o = La -_ a8 .) a ts n = 7 2) 3 0 i) es ry pe =) *o: io Oo a P=} oO a4 ~ 2 (a) Eo sc ns n 2 oe oe £ a =o i= ov 3s a 8 a ae é = Ze a oo = a3 = & 3 3 a CO 2 = 38 3 ga é Se as a AUTOSOMES are the 22 pairs of human chromosomes, excluding the sex chromosomes. SEX CHROMOSOMES — Werner's syndrome Burkitt lymphoma CO or Mendel is rediscovered by Tschermak, De Vries, and Correns. Drosophila melanogaster, th fruit fly, is the subject of experiments by T.H. Morgan based on chromosomal theo: ie James Watson and Discovery that Francis Crick the human propose a structural species has 46 ry. model of DNA. chromosomes PLANT 25,000 genes EARTHWORM 19,000 genes Chromosome contains tightly coiled and folded DNA. It consists of sister chromatids that contain the same genes. P Arm EVOLUTION AND GENETICS dystrophy eaer Shortest portion of the chromosome Sex-determination factor Centromere x 2 Y Narrowest = § : a3 point i T£ 5 £5 QArm es Longest Ors: a ae Qn portion of the c chromosome 2 2 z, 22 1 SO WOMEN | 32 = § have a pair of es Es =-5 tin the same sex 2 ie chromosome, 83 called XX. g = a) il 5 e SE 5 oO Pur Y= 2 a at MULTIPLICATION S = Sw ge Each segment of DNA in which 3 sas: = a S a 20 the sequence of bases is MEN © = 2 ZH 2s unknown is subjected to the havea 3 +e = +2 iS, polymerase chain reaction h So Nitrogenous (PCR), which makes it possible chremosome $s a 19 » ® to make thousands of copies of pair made up of = S v2) «eo ddNTP, for example 2 = ~§ a Fo 1 fj ddGTR adATP dTTP aGiP ddGTP, will produce Pe) Ea a a . = | copies of DNA of aos 2 3 3 2 | P | different length from 52 es w S ic 2 ee 16 standard nucleotides. 33 = 2 os Cae) Ne) Tt works because the 32 8 = ee 5 = = — DNA-copying process is = y Ss if 5 Solution — interrupted if a ddNTP eo. is inserted instead of a — ta 14 a” a & a standard nucleotide. 23 prs f 28 Sanger Method a vaw A A A : Gel _____ 13 Frederick Sanger, an English biochemist, Electronhoreals / 3 | pit ee devised an extraordinary method for G ee eg = deciphering the human genome b Fs ALT c ot DNA travel es 12 Seine see 4 Accor a different distances oa 5 § identifying the location of each nitrogenous Gacggncan ‘= according to their 38 accu ‘ base in the DNA. He divided human DNA into “acaece ES ede ray portions of different sizes and used the PCR Gacgre . = movement is called 10 ns technique to make thousands of copies. He Gace = electrophoresis. . then made in vitro copies of each DNA ri = fragment using the cellular mechanism of ey = = Suite Aa r a DNA replication. He added his own twist to = i mueere : Sear F A 2 } By placing the gel in front copies travel a this process by using fluorescent Sa of UV light, the researcher greater distance in dideoxynucleotides (ddNTP). These molecules Fragments of —_ can observe how the bases __ the gel. compete with standard nucleotides during DNA seen by fit and form the exact the DNA replication process. fluorescence sequence of bases of the 4 unknown DNA segment. os The first John Gurdon first F. Sanger develops a The first Kary Mullis creates A plan is proposed The first transgenic The genome The magazines Science description of used somatic nuclei technique for transgenic rats —_ the polymerase to finish sequencing tomato is made. sequencing of the and Nature publish the a restriction to create clones of deciphering the sequence —_ and insects chain reaction DNA in the human Caenorhabditis complete sequence of enzyme an amphibian larva. of bases in DNA. are obtained. technique. genome project. elegans nematode the human genome. is completed. 76 THE AGE OF GENETICS stem Cells he reasoning is simple: if an organism with more than 200 different types of cells is formed from a group of EMBRYONIC CELLS This photograph shows the eye of a needle with embryonic cells without specialization, then manipulating mat an erieye fried ony - ae -s : stem cells before cellular the division of these original cells (called stem cells) should * differentiation begins. make it possible to generate all the human tissues and even | produce autotransplants with minimal risk. Although such work is in progress, the results are far from being a medical reality. Scientists all over the world are studying its application. c Cellular Division poate — All the cells of higher organisms divide and multiply NUCLEUS through mitosis, with the exception contains the DNA. of the reproductive gametes. Mitosis First it duplicates is the process through which a cell ieee and then divides to form two identical cells. : y For this to happen, the first cell , : copies its genetic material inside the =a nucleus, and later it slowly ; partitions until it fully divides, = producing two cells with the same genetic material. An adult cell divides on wet age AO IUIES Once isolated, stem cells are cultivated " + pee ee cell in vitro under special conditions. It is 4 y. common to resort to a substrate of I, irradiated cells, which serve as support 7) without competing for space. Later, \ every seven days, they need to be | separated to keep them from dying and q to be able to reproduce them. Because the stem cells are the first that form after fertilization occurs, they are abundant in the placenta and especially in the umbilical cord. Geneticists obtain them from the cord once the baby has been born, and it is possible to freeze the cord to harvest the stem cells later. There are many stem cells because they are not differentiated. oe The cells multiply according to their genetic program. The stem cells are pluripotent, which is to say that they have the power to create any of the more than 200 different cells of the body. This process happens as the embryo grows. If the optimal conditions could be created in vitro, it pease uw bs would be possible to form in a laboratory all laboratory. the cells of the body using the genetic program of the cells. In practice, this technique is possible only with a few types of cells, in particular blood cells. divide indefinitely without losing their properties. FIRST USE In 1998 stem cells were isolated and cultivated for the first time in the United States. Since then, numerous laboratories in the world have cultivated them. Because of ethical questions that surround work with embryonic cells, each line is monitored through official organizations. 1998 27 lines 2000 2003 2006 225 lines EVOLUTION AND GENETICS 77 —— ACTIVATORS Chemical and hormonal activators guide the specialization. Some tests have managed to produce them. Generating them in vitro has been achieved. Doctors and geneticists hope to be able to provide new pluripotent cells to damaged tissue and provoke its regeneration. To date, they have been able to introduce umbilical-cord hematopoietic stem cells into patients with dysfunctional formation of red blood cells. This is equivalent to a bone marrow transplant without surgical intervention. Reproduced in vitro, the stem cells are then injected. Stem cells are being used to repair the heart after an infarction. 78 THE AGE OF GENETICS "<5 Ce " hs - # e . bp ‘ 5 a .¥ nN ] a —— . DIVERSE USES - —. C O V \ Clo 2 * Na et ee . -¥" Cloning can be applied for obtaining ‘ ~~ . , = on new organisms and tissues and for i Sa . a = J reproducing segments of DNA. 16 cells 2 — A) . ms . . a ‘ ' : »~ Fs he term “cloning” itself provokes controversy. Strictly speaking, wt = — ne EP” A \ ~' a. to clone is to obtain an identical organism from another through a Ode. oe ” AF ia | | T * J technology. The most commonly used technique is called somatic-cell nuclear a —=_wee ee Cultivation a ae Fare . . . a eg « as transfer. It was used to create Dolly the sheep as well as other cloned animals, including these Jersey PIPETTE a ae ae The new cell is cultivated in sito ety. cows. The technique consists of replacing the nucleus of an ovule with the nucleus of a cell from a It is used to LT SF ww ee E eee See : : 3 . introduce the F a eee i y is Rais ai tea : ; donor specimen. When the ovule then undergoes division, it gives rise to an organism identical to the nucleus into gf cals se Yee AT — donor. With all such processes, there exist slight differences between the donor and the clone. In only te a emniveyo) We deyelooltal eit one case is the clone perfect, and it comes naturally: monozygous (identical) twins. @ : “5 le —_ contains hormones and 5 percent il il a oxygen to simulate the conditions of . ai o - — a cow's uterus. After a week, the eee a a —" developing mass has become large Obtainin the ® Nucleus Transfer . ll =< ail enough that it can be implanted into e Nucleus GAO cr peace aut col In th ” a Pesrpolateris A specialized cell of an adult animal, whose form, the chromosomes carried by the new NUCLEUS OF - ail x - ey 4 DNA i lete, is isolated, and it i | lete th le in th ae Z cultivated In vitro to multiply #. Variolisjayiles icciiicdieenediidbya THECELLTO CLONE of a donor cow are also isolated. The nucleus is spermatozoon. Once fused, the cell will begin The nucleus is : P then removed from both groups of cells—only its program of division as if it were a zygote transferred to the ovule. ak = , a = those of adult cells. (fertilized ovule). a a . 3) Insemination “ The blastocyst is implanted in the uterus of =| a - a donor cow on the sixth day after the cow - - has stopped being in heat so that the NUCLEUS - - 5 “ EXTRACTION YA | Fusion la A fibroblast is aif aa! By means of light electric planned, the blastocyst adheres to the | extracted from the ear a “ discharges, fusion of the uterine wall. donated nucleus with the cytoplasm of the ovule is initiated. Three hours later, calcium is added to the cell to simulate fertilization. An interchange begins between the nucleus and the cytoplasm, and the cell starts to divide. 6 of an exemplary adult. Nucleus with Complete DNA (60 chromosomes) Ovule Without Nucleus OVULE EXTRACTION An ovule is obtained from the ovary of another exemplary specimen, and the nucleus is remover si UL OVULE WITHOUT f=) NUCLEUS . Mea J Only the cytoplasm, Pt |_ wit organelles like : ‘ochondria, = oi PIPETTE supports the ovule and prevents it from shifting in the operation. C ost @ pefelonment of the The technology is still not efficient. For Once the blastocyst is implanted, its growth begins. The this Jersey, 934 ovules were normal period of gestation for a cow is from 280 to 290 . ee days. Because all the genetic information required was transferred, of which 166 fused, and provided by a donor-cell nucleus, the calf that is born is an only one developed successfully. exact copy of the donor animal. It differs only in the mitochondrial DNA, which was provided by the receptor ovule. 80 THE AGE OF GENETICS Biochip Applications evices that use a small, flat substrate (chip) that contains biological (bio) material are commonly called biochips. Biochips are used for obtaining genetic information. A biochip is a type of miniaturized equipment that integrates tens of thousands of probes made up of genetic material having a known sequence. When the probes are placed in contact with a biological sample (such as from a patient or experiment), only the nucleotide chains complementary to those of the chip hybridize. This action produces a characteristic pattern light, which is read with a scanner and interpreted by a computer. « SMALL SIZ MASK Biochips are the size of a stamp Template with and are contained in a glass microarray of cells structure. fogs PHOTODEGRADABLE FILM functions as an 23) intermediary layer. 0.2 inch (4.5 mm) = GLAss —————_) SUBSTRATE 0.3 inch is chemically treated with (64 mm) certain reactive groups to permit the implantation of the oligonucleotides. This biochip has a template, or pattern—called a genetic microarray—that makes it possible to compare the DNA of one tissue sample from a person with the genes that NORMAI cause a disease. In the case of a particular type of The cDNA cancer, for example, researchers want to know the genes (complimentary that are involved in the disease. DNA) of normal cells is colored with a green fluorescent marking. 7 The tubes of green and red F / markings are combined in al the same tube. The cDNA of cancerous cells is colored with a red fluorescent marking. The pattern is input into a i, ; he special computer where the > microinjectors will take care of filling the 96 orifices, or spots, on the biochip. A microinjector fills each one of the pores in the biochip with samples of the different sequences of genes from the organism. ION AND GENETICS 381 Once the injection of the marking mix is finished, it is necessary to detect which stuck to what spot. For this, the array is placed in a scanner with a green and a red laser, which -— excite the fluorescent targets. The =microscope and the camera work in = conjunction to create an image, and this information is stored ina Through microinjectio is filled with CDNA mark : fluorescent substances (cot from cancerous and normal tissues combined). | oe COLOR FILTER YELLOW The gene — = The gene found found in this = ' in this spot spot expresses : - expresses normal +, GREEN cancerous conditions The gene conditions. together with found in this thosevof spot expresses pa : normal - ae : r conditions. @ Results oe All the points of the marked biochip have small - — : i: sequences of DNA that are compared with a Ao i sequence of the samples. The fluorescent signals, . > . - detected by means of a computer, indicate which = - _ of the DNA sequences on the chip have + # ew ie a complementary sequences in the sample. A special x —— - program is used to calculate the proportion of red - - , to green fluorescent signals in the image. + ao w 82 THE AGE OF GENETICS Gene Therapy ne of the latest breakthroughs in medicine, gene therapy is used to introduce genetic material to correct deficiencies of one or more defective genes that are the cause of an illness. Several different techniques have been developed for use with human patients, almost all of which are at the research stage. The problem with illnesses with a genetic origin is that therapy must modify the cells of the affected organ. To reach all these cells, or a significant number of them, demands elaborate protocols or, as is the case for viruses, the use of nature's biological weapons to cause other illnesses. @ Treatable Illnesses Illnesses with a genetic origin are difficult to treat, since the organism has poorly coded genes and the fault is therefore present in all its cells. Cystic fibrosis and Duchenne muscular dystrophy are examples of monogenetic illnesses that can potentially be treated with these therapies. Gene therapy has also been attempted on cancer and HIV infection, among other pathologies. A definitive cure may be found for many genetic illnesses, but the techniques for gene therapy are still in the development stage. ADENOVIRUS Its genetic makeup is modified so it can carry the sequence that will be introduced. DNA MODIFIED holds the DNA sequence that . repairs the “ targeted gene. Identification The DNA sequence that corresponds to the gene that causes the deficiency requiring treatment is identified. Then the correct sequence is isolated and multiplied to guarantee a quantity that can modify the organism. Because a monogenetic illness generally affects the function of one organ, the cell volume that is targeted for modification is large. Then a technique is chosen to transfect the cells. Vehicle An adenovirus is an icosahedral virus that contains double-stranded DNA and lacks an outer envelope. It is primarily the cause of a number of mild respiratory illnesses. If the virus can be modified to be nonpathogenic, it has the potential for use in transporting a modified sequence of DNA in a region called a cassette. Even though its capacity is limited, its AFFECTED effectiveness rate is very high. CELL HERPESVIRUS The herpesvirus is an icosahedral virus and holds a DNA sequence that needs to be modified so that it will not cause an illness. It is widely used in gene thetap DNA TRANSCRIPTION Damaged gene to be modified # Added healthy gene ~ the viral infection. It then ars the cells and multiplies in the cytoplasm, copying its DNA, = including the modification carried _ “. in the cassette, in the nucleus of the infected cell, where it transcribes the new information. = i] EVOLUTION AND GENETICS 83 ir = it ares S, wr, Synthesis The infected culture cells, which have the new genetic information, can now synthesize the compound that caused the dysfunction. Generally these are proteins that cannot be synthesized because the gene for their = elaboration is disassociated or damaged. The process begins once the cells divide and transcribe the gene in question. The protein that was not synthesized before is now transcribed and produced. NEW HEALTHY CELL Velallonsnit It is critical that the hypothetical number of cells to be modified and the number of viruses needed for the therapy to work are in the correct relationship. The ak a protein that re a genetic e failure to syn protein can hav consequences. yz : ~ —___————_@ a 4 ~ : ¢ @___ MOobDIFIED J, DNA NUCLEAR kilobase The unit in which DNA and RNA are ifr i, measured; the capacity of a virus's Pp Mietins | cassette, which on average is approximately five kilobases. NONVIRAL GENE THERAPIES Many are based on physical means such as electrical techniques. They have the advantage of producing material in vitro, which allows for a large transfer capacity not limited by the number of bases that can be transfected by a virus. The problem is that these methods are not efficient for reaching target cells in organism. The most important therapies of this type are microinjection, calcium phosphate precipitation, and electroporation (the use of an electric field to incre the permeability of the cell membrane). 84 THE AGE OF GENETICS DNA Footprints ince Sir Alec Jeffreys developed the concept of the DNA profile for EVOLUTION AND GENETICS 85 SWAB For saliva samples. ‘oy DNA Magnification Then it is immersed in a solvent The polymerase chain reaction (PCR) is carried out by a ee machine that, using heat, synthetic short nucleotide DNA-EVIDENCE le the identification of people, this type of forensic technique has taken extracted. Se IUSTGes alle elevates Copies e260 Dagment or ONE ds GRAPH ones : - é - ‘ many times as needed. This amplification makes it on significant importance. A practically unmistakable genetic footprint possible to conduct a large number of tests while The numbers represent ~ can be established that allows for the correlation of evidence found at the scene a pe een a posthion initia DNA . ie ¥ 5 : on = fragments are separated by means of sequence. T uf r A 105 of a crime (hair, semen, blood samples) with a suspect. In addition, the use of this capillary electrophoresis. A Ce Gy ; y technique is a key element to determine the genetic link in kin relationships. © é | | Grek acre Visualization of # F A OUNRa: cate CYTOSINE] GUANINE PAP Q Crae mente. THIAMINE ADENINE yy / ii ost z aed + { - fe yy, ~ {| i/ ay = P i J @ sample Collection Uf, 3 | / | Any body fluid, such as urine, blood, semen, sweat, and ah > s ae = ie J saliva, or fragments, such as tissues, cells, or hairs, =i 1 ! f can be analyzed to obtain a person's DNA. There is B ‘S ge - J = C-—— Each sample is placed . mae J} - | 2 ee | inseate ps @ Impression and 105 ree F ags, sealed, an _- = certified to avoid Comparison Tt G Td as Only a very small . adulterations. The machine presents the results as curves, DNA —————— T Cc GoGo é ce SOunear + where each base has a specific location GRAPH FOR # evidences 7 j according to the height of the curve in the graph SUSPECT A needed for sequence. It then compares the sample obtained ff sampling. For at the crime scene with those obtained from the J example, just a small crime suspects. If one of them was at the scene ‘ fraction of a drop of blood of the crime, the curves coincide exactly in at O COINCIDENCE or sperm is sufficient. least 12 knowns postions, OF GENETIC PATTERNS r FACTORS THAT ALTER DNA - = {. « Moisture or water | Heat is one of the , P =e fo i? will denaturalize a most destructive r 11é - i sample faster. factors. | O Ca 10 | ) S G T ¢ Gc Gog ce DNA —————_~¥ : is the minimum number of coinciding points GRAPH FOR that need to be found for a suspect to be SUSPECT B ed accused of a crime in the United States. Separation ( % ‘ ae jee : DISPOSABLE 1, a) A follicle has DNA that MATERIAL . . —, is easy to obtain. : All the material Power of Exclusion (PE) 1 in 1,000,000,000 chiciiecsiaa hoa Bees FE Overall, for a DNA test to be considered as is the STATISTICAL GUARANTEE. Ree, Sty E Isp ees LL valid criminal evidence, at least in theory, it TWEEZERS The hair is divided into avoid contaminating Should kesable to guarantee a PE with aeertainty must be properly sections. These are then put the BNA. above 99.9999999 percent. The PE is measured as sterilized. into a ie and solvents a percentage but is expressed as the number of ae apple ; people who are excluded as possible bearers of the = CENTRIFUGING ade DNA at the crime scene. Thus, a sample is taken at The suspended DNA random from one person, as a type of witness, and must be centrifuged to A70 percent solution of ethanol it is then compared with the DNA from the is added, and the mixture is rinsed evidence and that of the suspect. The detail of the separate it from the t : : with water. The DNA is free of analysis must be so precise that it can, at least of the cell material. , ve lene al impurities and ready for analysis. F anes — 3 theoretically, be able to discriminate one person among one billion people. In practice, the test is valid if it statistically discriminates one person in one billion. All this is done to guarantee the results LABELING is absolutely necessary so that the samples are not mixed up. 6,500,000,000 PRECIPITATION > = is the WORLD'S POPULATION. surfites of the test and so that it can have validity in court. GUARANTEED POWER OF EXCLUSION ry at oating DNA and pellet In practice, the suspects are not chosen randomly = = , 7 } ' substance of leftover but fulfill other evidence patterns, among which Filial DNA 1:100 million . and pelle materials DNA is used to confirm these patterns. Forensic DNA 1:1 billion 86 THE AGE OF GENETICS EVOLUTION AND GENETICS 87 SSS ————SSE oS S==== — — —= —— Modified Foods The labels Plasmid with Insect apxin Transgerte DESIRED GENE I) Transgenic foods have their own label. This is a ‘ ee ‘ . . Bacteria multiply to Lf legal requirement in most countries. When the enetically modified foods have always existed. An example is wine, obtain a copy of each one dimmeicories to chon for tulle. vegetable: or cercals at modified through the fermentation of grapes. However, modern 2 ve ge Bag the supermarket, we must look closely at the labels. y ‘ rom the organism. The In th f ice, only 9 biotechnology based on DNA decoding has made these \\, desired gene is located garcent could be feregenis processes predictable and controllable. The process improves hig ah pce es This should be clearly Bee ners 3 F J are made. explained in the list of specific characteristics of the plant, makes it more resistant TRANSGENIC j ingredients, BACTERIA " ~_O— Petri Dish to pests, and improves its nutritional quality. The objective is a greater production of food with better agronomic and nutritional characteristics. @ Recombinant plasmids ~ enter the bacteria that will express the genes. & Modified Gene =| Lisnereng td - ; Design More benefits ime ' f The gene is composed of a codified IF) The development of transgenic plants has allowed the pat He hvanied ae ie of b Ll production of food with more vitamins, minerals, and proteins, cease ae oe Gas ewe J or with less fat. The development of genetic technology has also been CONJUCATIVE ELECTRICAL in adesived ee The ee digene able to delay the maturation of fruits and vegetables and, in other PLASMIDS PULSES Sotpareran a dvariaue for ingtance cases, make them more resistant to specific pests, thus reducing the : ; : 2 ae Ee need for applying insecticides to crops. The genetic modification of The plasmids are mixed Bacteria are added, resistance torarvherbicide: some crops also produces smaller and stronger plants, while with DNA bits to form and quick electrical conjugative plasmids. pulses are applied that simultaneously increasing their yield, because they invest more energy into producing their edible parts. cause the plasmids ‘Co Transf ormation Golden rice with the transgene to Hundreds of gold Test tube enter the bacteria. The modified gene is inserted into the particles are covered ae he is the a sae that oe 7 nucleus of the corn cell so that it can or plated with modified genetically for the purpose o The marine strawberry be incorporated into some of the thousands of providing an increased level of vitamin A for Research has been conducted in modifying strawberries chromosomes. For this effect, the gene copies of the / populations with a deficiency in the vitamin. with a gene from the plaice to make the fruit more RESTRICTION ENZYME pistol, or gene cannon, is used. new gene. The embryo of golden rice stores beta resistant to frost. This is a simple process from which Th P : i carotene and other carotenes, ie enzyme is added to the cloned DNA ina which are the precursors of the crop yields can he improved! by ashighipercentage: test tube to segment or divide it into pieces vitamin A. the size of the gene. The bacterial plasmids that were extracted using the same enzyme are added in another test tube. The gold particles are shot toward the cell sample. 1 The genes used are those that encode for the enzymes phytoene synthase and lycopene 1 The gene that keeps the synthase in the plant Narcissus plaice from freezing is copied and spliced into a ee rene froma Corn Cell pseudonarcissus and the enzyme bacterium. Bacteria a Culture abd acter fromm DNA j th rwinia uredovona bacteria. Cloning the a The plasmid from the 7 G f ao | bacterium that holds Desire ene If the particle peed eae enters the nucleus, the genes are dissolved and can be incorporated into the the plaice gene is then inserted onto a second bacterium. All the DNA is extracted from the Bacillus thuringiensis bacteria in order to locate and copy the gene The DNA strands from these genes are inserted into plasmids, which are later introduced into Erwinia Antifreezing gene responsible for this characteristic. reproduce as many times as it wants. attempt to feed on the foliage of the Bt corn. resistant to the western corn rootworm. La ‘ie accumulates TON UINy eve tey . 6 s chromosomes' : i ” © DNA Agrobacterium uredovona Second bacterium | : tumefaciens bacteria. b bacterium Bacillus Lad Pi aer Plasmid : | A strawberry cell culture thuringiensis all — ‘ pi ch J is infected with the al 4 v From Algae to Ferns Page 18 Seed Plants Page 34 Rare and Useful Plants Page 58 \ = Fungi Page 80 (sre en. magical. It is marvelous to understand how You may be surprised to learn why plants an organism that cannot move learned to invest so much energy and effort into e maximize the energy that it receives from producing flowers. In this book we will Revolution the Sun, as well as to discover the describe for you in detail, step by step, how mechanisms that enable it to face so many fertilization takes place. Did you know that POCORN na different environmental challenges. Some pollination is aided by the wind and insects VA a Be te: leaves have essential adaptations, such as and that some flowers can be pollinated only a ea thick skin, thorns, or fleshy stalks, which by acertain species of insect? You will find RICE CROP here are approximately (Gs Ne tice, allow them to survive in very dry all this and much more in the pages of this eae 300,000 plant species in ~— ae environments. Others, such as the tomato book, which includes spectacular images and Asia, It is also a staple the world, and they live in a plant, form certain proteins when illustrations that give an inside view of the eae variety of regions, from the frozen temperatures drop in order to protect core of a tree and even show the functions of tropical regions of Latin Arctic tundra to the lush tropical themselves from damage caused by freezing. its tissues and the veins of its leaves. ele! rainforests. Without plants we would hat were the first plants to conquer the Earth like, and how did they help convert bare rock into soil? What happened next, and which species evolved and spread worldwide during the Carboniferous Period? A complete historical overview of plants is included in ~*% this book, as is an explanation of the radical differences between plants, algae, and fungi—the latter two of which are not be able to live; they have always been intimately linked to life on Earth. Thanks to photosynthesis, plants provide us with food, medicines, wood, resins, and oxygen, among other things. Discovering plants’ processes ig for converting sunlight into ; carbohydrates such as sugars and starches is almost : now considered to be more closely » a -« related to animals than to plants. % ' , 1 _ _ Although the place of plants in 7 Jeu the human diet is nothing new, Wi the search for other beneficial uses of plants is a more modern development. Crops— such as rice, corn, wheat, rye, barley, oats, soy, lentils, and chickpeas—are grown worldwide as sources of proteins, vitamins, minerals, and other nutrients necessary for our bodies to function, and they also provide people with an important source of income. Background ccording to scientific evidence, the nearest relatives of plants are algae that lived on the shores of lagoons. Later, from these habitats, which were at times dry and at times damp, the first land plants emerged. Most had to adapt in order to prosper in a different environment. Such adaptation enabled them to achieve GIANT SEQUOIA Some trees of this species are found in central California. amazing growth, as exemplified by the giant sequoia (Sequoiadendron giganteum), which can measure 260 feet (80 m) tall and 100 feet (80 m) in circumference at its base. Did you know KINGDOMS OF THE QUIET LIFE AQUATIC PLANTS CONQUEST OF LAND ANATOMY OF A TREE FEEDING ON LIGHT that plants grow bigger as their cells multiply and expand? Many can grow 0.4 inch (1 cm) per day, and their growth can create enough pressure to open cracks in asphalt. 8 BACKGROUND CONIFERS are the most abundant plants with seeds today. Their reproductive structures are called cones. Most conifers are evergreens. epresenting a vast array of life-forms, the plant kingdom includes approxi- mately 300,000 species. Their most outstanding feature is the presen- » ce of chloroplasts with chlorophyll, a pigment that enables them to transform solar energy into chemical energy. They use this energy to pro- duce their food. Plants need to attach themselves to a substrate (usually the ground), from which they can extract water and nutrients. This attachment, however, also keeps them from moving from place to place. Gymnosperma The Greek word means “naked seed.” ‘ Gymnosperms are vascular plants with S exposed seeds and no flowers. Ginkgos (Ginkgophyta) and cycads (Cycadophyta) were the most common plant groups in ancient SITKA SPRUCE Algae and fungi were once included in the plant kingdom, but they are cYCADS CINKCOS CNETOPHYTA re a ConHae ee Anciarcee ee now considered to be separate from plants and to belong to the kingdoms are tropical plants that look Only one species Plants with naked cypresses, and firs) are the most common like palm trees. Their is left in this seeds anda type. Conifers are monoicous—that is, the Protista and Fungi, respectively. @ same plant has both male and female sexual organs—and their seeds are held between the scales of a structure called a cone. vascular system similar to that of angiosperms group, which is the oldest genus of living trees. reproduction is similar to that of pine trees, but they are dioecious (each plant has flowers of only one sex). Moss Sphagnum sp. Bryophytes include mosses and worts. Mosses have rhizoids Algae Fungi RED MARINE are commonly considered water plants, but this is not the case. Algae have neither roots nor stalks. Because they live in the water (freshwater or salt water), they need no substrate. Some are microscopic, but large algae formations can be found in the ocean. Algae are classified into families depending on their color. Together green algae and plants make up the group of organisms called the “green line,” whose members are characterized by having chloroplasts and by rather than roots. They can also absorb water through their entire body surface. Bryophytes lack a means of surviving long periods of drought. When dry periods come, bryophytes enter a latent state. Because they have no system of veins for transporting nutrients, they can barely grow beyond 0.4 inch (1 cm) long. In order to reproduce they need belong to a different kingdom from that of plants. Fungi, unlike plants, do not carry out photosynthesis, and they store energy in the form of glycogen rather than starch. Fungi are heterotrophic (they get their food from other organisms), and they take in food by absorption. Fungi can be either parasitic or feed on dead organic material. Some fungi are microscopic; ALGA Rhodomela sp. to be near liquid water. others are large and conspicuous. Their bodies are composed of a mycelium, a mass of filaments called hyphae. Some fungi also have a fruit-bearing structure. ~ storing grains of starch in the cytoplasm as a reserve. WHITE MUSHROOM Agaricus bisporus Plants EE The plant kingdom (Plantae) includes organisms .<@ whose characteristics include the presence of the pigment chlorophyll to convert solar energy into Bryophytes Horsetail 4 Cycads Rushes ‘= Ginkgo dates back to the Devonian Period. leaves, but they have a stalk with veins. clustered in the form of a spike. are small and encircle the stems. spore cases called sporangia, which grow on leaves called sporophylls. with cereal grains, monocotyledons (monocots). wheat; other crops, such as cotton, tobacco, and coffee; and trees, such as oak, cherry, and chestnut. 5 : (Mosses) chemical energy for producing food from water and ee Anthophyta carbon dioxide. This ability is called autotrophy. All y or plants, whether large or small, play an extremely Feral ee : fi ead” * Flowering SERS important role in providing food for all other living Algae Club Gnetophyta Conifers Plants Triticum sp. beings. Plants cannot move from place to place, but Mosses Ferns their gametes, spores (cells that separate from a plant and can germinate), and seeds can move about, SEEDLESS WITH SEEDS especially with the help of water and wind. WHITHOUTIVETNS WOUTRAVETNS PLANTS FERN Osmunda sp. Seedless Ferns are the most common seedless plants today. Many are thought to 4 have originated during the Devonian Angiosperms r Period and reached their greatest have seeds, flowers, and fruit. They include more 4 ; splendor in the Carboniferous Period. than 250,000 species and are adapted to nearly all Oy a 4 ae Their tissues are simpler than those environments except for Antarctica. They reproduce —— . of plants with seeds, and their green sexually by producing flowers that later form fruits stems have a large surface area, with seeds. Angiosperms have an efficient vascular CEREALS FERNS SPIKE MOSS PSILOPHYTA HORSETAIL giving them a great capacity for ORCHIDS ORCHID — system for transporting water (through the xylem) are monocotyledons. are the most diverse has scalelike are extremely simple RUSHES photosynthesis. Ferns need water so have many petals; their number Cattleya trange and food (through the phloem). Angiosperms make Their seeds have only group of seedless leaves, some of plants; they lack have roots, stems, and that they can reproduce by means of of petals is always a multiple of up a division of the plant kingdom that includes one cotyledon plants. Their origin which are roots and true true leaves. The leaves spores. The spores are produced in three. This makes them, along plants with bright flowers; grains, such as rice and (embryonic leaf), and their mature leaves have parallel veins. 10 BACKGROUND PLANTS, ALGAE, AND \ \ Aquatic Plants 2()() BEES WELL-KNOWN SPECIES H Ww OF WATER PLANTS hese plants are especially adapted for living in ponds, streams, lakes, and rivers—places where other Amphibious or Wetland Plants These species live on the edges of ponds, rivers, and swamps. land plants cannot grow. Although aquatic plants belong to many different families, they have similar Tiley are also foundiid salt marnac. which are peribaically adaptations and are therefore an example of adaptive convergence. They include submerged plants and pes ya soe ctees cris Js wie ata reitan floating plants; plants that may or may not be rooted at the bottom; amphibious plants, which have leaves HE aT Ue ou they pe aPC Celgpe en both above and below the water's surface; and heliophilic plants, which have only their roots underwater. @ CATTAILS Typha sp. grow in moist soil, around lake margins, and in marshes in both temperate and tropical climates. ARROWHEAD I 7 H LACHENALIA pestered sagittifolia A Vital Role Rooted Plants with Floating Leaves oo tact its Hower with tee wie fl FE Aquatic plants play an Such plants are often found in standing or slow-moving water. They have abe eee avis - VIGTOrG petals and purple stamens, LLefl important role in the ecosystem fixed rhizomes and petiolate leaves (leaves with a stalk that connects to a Haste Wer ca a "\ \ ‘ Wad rat Sati 2 a form during the summer. not only for crustaceans, insects, and stem) that float on the surface of the water. Some of the plants have the water. LY ] { large number of worms but also for fish, birds, and submerged leaves, some have floating leaves, and some have leaves outside eee . ? flowers. e ‘ z ‘ J e pper Epidermis Th 4 Aquatic plant mammals because they are an the water, with each type having a different shape. In the case of floating | H Parenchytt with especially important source of food and shelter leaves the properties of the upper surface are different from those of the beautiful flowers. for these categories of animals. lower surface, which is in contact with the water. J Aerenchyma Aquatic plants also play a major role in § | converting solar energy into the PARROT FEATHER TROPICAL WATER LILY Lower — Air ; 3 a Myriophyllum aquaticum Victoria cruciana Epidermis Conduction Chamber Organic, materials upon which many This plant is native to temperate, It grows in deep, calm waters. Bundle living things depend. subtropical, and tropical regions, and it Its leaves can measure up to 7 is highly effective at oxygenating water. feet (2 m) across. YELLOW FLOATING HEART Nymphoides peltata It produces small creased yellow flowers all summer long. “y ¢ a aa PRS / q =. SSS — —_ : “ ——,. _— ae = =— 2 q = - . x wo. ea —==z 6} jen ‘ = x j | f I¥ \\ \ i | } KNOTWEED ’ j ’ f j | { \ Polygonum sp. R d T d Pi } J \ This aquatic plant grows ( ot te : ts . 4 j he roots and in marshy vegetation. oote nderwater an Aquatic but Mode in / rhizomes under \ ; The entire plant is submerged. The small root system SAGO PONDWEED ' : : i ; fi the water are serves only to anchor the plant since the stem can directly Potamogeton densus WG The evolutionary history of plants began in = : well developed. _ primaries hard if absorb water, carbon dioxide, and minerals. These plants 4 dala at plane can Lal water environments. They later conquered land : Seen aaa i i VP be found in shallow by means of structures such as roots. Modern aquatic ' These carnivorous are often found in flowing water. The submerged stems . depressions of Y USS P GUE plants complement have no system of support—the water holds up the plant. taal clear-flowing streams. plants are not a primitive group, however. On the } Submerged or Free their diet with small fe contrary, they have returned to the water environment ! 2 aquatic creatures. Tt by acquiring highly specialized organs and tissues. For Some underwater plants ale free, without roots, but ~—Shet example, some tissues have air pockets that enable the with developed stalks and divided leaves. Other GE plant to float. floating plants have a rosette shape and leaves modified for floating; they have well-developed roots postin vita) si with root caps but without absorbent hairs. The roots ~ This nlGne FES i : help the plant to stay balanced on top of the water. abundance of fine leaves that form a ~ conelike structure on each stem. is always found in floating organisms. This tissue has an extensive system of intercellular spaces through which gases are diffused. Aerenchyma Se The underwater impermeable outer layer, so they can absorb minerals and gases directly from the water. Epidermis — J IF ir Chamber Submerged stems have no support system because the water holds up the plant. Their limiting factor is oxygen availability, so the aerenchyma helps make this substance available to the plant. They produce and release oxygen as a result of photosynthesis. Vallisneria sp. This oxygenating plant is found in ponds and aquariums. 12 BACKGROUND % ~~ ii, or site ar ~ : ‘ “E32 os ov he movement of plants from shallow water onto land is associated with a series of evolutionary events. Certain changes 4 in the genetic makeup of plants enabled them to face the new and extreme conditions found on the Earth's surface. Although land habitats offered plants direct exposure to sunlight, they also presented the problem of transpiration and the loss of water that it produces. This difficulty had to be overcome before plants could spread over land. e | : Giants Vital Changes : Epiphytes 9g ‘ Green Revolution Pearioh plantsorien canieethey Trees are distinguished by their woody trunks. As a EG Roots are among the most important Leaves are the main organs for photosynthesis in land eee re surface. Their anatomy tree grows from a tender shoot, it develops a tissue Lefl adaptations for plants’ success in land plants. After plants appeared on land more than 440 nliidec eve sacar aiaptatione that gives it strength, enabling it to grow over 330 habitats. Root systems anchor the plant in million years ago, the amount of photosynthesis taking MALE FERN that enableth i li P ithout feet (100 m) tall. Trees are found in the principal the substrate and serve as a pathway for place gradually increased. This increase is believed to Dryopteris filix-mas b patra ‘ ey ees be fee terrestrial ecosystems. water and mineral nutrients to enter it. be one of the reasons the concentration of carbon Eddy ae ic Pal asad acai Besides roots, the development of a cuticle dioxide in the atmosphere decreased. As a result, the Cte to Fepioduee: (skin membrane) to cover the entire plant's Earth's average temperature also decreased. surface was crucial. Cells in the epidermis produce this waterproof membrane, which Te helps the plant tolerate the heat generated 5O 000 ' ' : by sunlight and the wear and loss of water ) ( : Grasses caused by the wind. This protection is take advantage of long hours of interrupted by pores, which allow Oe ae us E summer daylight to grow and for gas exchange. LAND-DWELLING PLANTS reproduce. Their stalks do not have 3 reinforcing tissues that would ri pert enable them to remain erect. “<_ : alae STEMLESS SOW THISTLE Sonchus acaulis SWEET VIOLET These plants Viola odorata lack a stem. This plant's spring flowers have a pleasant ‘ 4 scent. &, Rr moss ~* ay Sphagnum.sp. ges te: a ae all MAPLES OAKS LINDENS =" = ee, fafideplants Acer sp. Quercus sp. Tilia sp. = : ‘ fates ae: . aN i Ser Ss =~ nal S “ rs - ye f nei . . ; a ee > ~s ,* = ; a ey % ‘ » a , ~ a Ne . = a ™” * we f — : 4 - " —~' Yas = : ] ae = 3 we | : 360 Feet ve ee THE HEIGHT REACHED BY SOME SEQUOIA SEMPERVIREN TREES 7 \\y Fe APs * 5 a 7 ~ =< ‘¢ S » Ne 3 A be 4 ——— vi ae ~ y - - + ) Pe, be ee 14 BACKGROUND PLANTS, ALGAE, AND FUNGI 15 Anatomy of a Tree he oak tree is the undisputed king of the Western world. It is known for its lobed leaves and the large cap of its acorn, a nut found on all trees of the genus Quercus. The tree's s main trunk grows upward and branches out toward the top. Oaks are a large group, containing many types of deciduous trees. Under optimal conditions oaks can grow to a height of more than 130 feet (40 m) and live an average of 600 years. @ The leaves absorb CO, and produce sugars by means of photosynthesis. Transpiration (the loss of Soewater vapor) in i molly *. the leaves pulls : =e the xylem sap upward. Flowers The tree produces hanging male flowers, whereas female flowers are hidden among the leaves. are formed by protective scales that fall off in the spring. They grow into new leaves and branches. Trees grow in any place where there is sufficient water in the soil. Trunk The trunk is strong and grows straight upward. The top of the tree widens with branches, which may be twisted, knotted, or bent. Spring Summer - The cycle begins The oak blossoms. Growth Rings as the first leaves It increases in appear. height, and its trunk grows thicker. Woodpeckers drill holes in the tree with their beaks as they look for insects. ‘ ) ; Gy Lege Autumn Winter ‘ Autumn 4 ¥ — Leaves The cells at the A 7 is Low temperatures The leaves fall away; S , end of each leaf Winter y > weaken the the tree is dormant are arranged one leaf toa ummet stem weaken. The leaf falls away, branches until spring. stem on alternating sides aac alga and the tree Spring of the twio. They have photosynthesis, and the remains dormant. New leaves g. 'y é rest of the tree uses the begin to replace The xylem rounded lobes on either sugars it produces. the old ones. transports Oak-Tree Products side of the main vein. wal and re . . minerals from I The bark is rich in tannin, which the roots to the 2 5 : rest of the tree. Leff is used in curing leather and as an astringent. The wood is strong and The phloem . A tranehorts resists rotting. sugars from the deaves to the Acorns 600 Beginnings have dark stripes along In its first year of life an their length. Their caps y ears oak tree's roots can grow have flat scales. nearly 5 feet (1.5 m). THE AVERAGE LIFE SPAN OF AN OAK Energy Source The chlorophyll traps energy from sunlight and uses it to Achene: A hard convert water and carbon seed that does dioxide into food. Remains of the not split open at Carpel (female maturity ¥ “he reproductive part) ay _ Seeds y Some species have sweet- 4 tasting seeds; others are bitter. Surface Mosses use the bark of oak trees as a source of moisture. : grow, sideways: to, for = deep; broad ‘root systen: 16 BACKGROUND Feeding on Light n important characteristic of plants is their ability to use sunlight and the carbon dioxide in the air to manufacture their own complex nutrients. This process, called photosynthesis, takes place in chloroplasts, cellular components that contain the necessary enzyme machinery to transform solar energy into chemical energy. Each plant cell can have between 20 and 100 oval-shaped chloroplasts. Chloroplasts can reproduce themselves, suggesting that they were once autonomous organisms that established a symbiosis, which produced the first plant cell. e Stages of the Process fa Photosynthesis takes place in two stages. The first, called La photosystem II, depends directly on the amount of light received, which causes the chlorophyll to release electrons. The resulting gaps are filled by electrons of water, which breaks down and releases oxygen and ionized hydrogen (2H+). Plant Tissues The relative stiffness of plant cells is provided by cellulose, the polysaccharide formed by the plant's cell walls. This substance is made of thousands of glucose units, and it is very difficult to hydrolyze (break down in water). CARBON DIOXIDE is absorbed by plant cells to form sugars by means of photosynthesis. -_ Why Green? Leaves absorb energy from visible light, which consists of different colors. The leaves reflect only the green light. OXYGEN is a by-product of photosynthesis. It exits the surface of the leaves through their stoma (two-celled pores). CHLOROPHYLL is the most abundant pigment in leaves. Leaves are made of several types of plant tissues. Some serve as a support, and some serve as filler material. WATER Photosynthesis requires a constant supply of water, which reaches the leaves through the plant's roots and stem. Vacuole provides water and pressure and gives the cell consistency. Protein perform photosynthesis underwater. Together with water plants, they provide most of the atmosphere's oxygen. Flow of ATP formation is powered by the movement of electrons into receptor molecules in a chain of oxidation and reduction reactions. PLANTS, ALGAE, AND FUNGI 17 In photosystem I light energy is absorbed, sending electrons into other receptors and making NADPH out of NADP*- The ATP and NADPH obtained are the net gain of the system, in addition to oxygen. Two water molecules are split apart in the Electrons Plant Cells have three traits that differentiate them from animal cells: cell walls (which are made up of 40 percent cellulose), a large vacuole containing water and trace mineral elements, and chloroplasts containing chlorophyll. Like an animal cell, a plant cell has a nucleus. Thylakoids Sacs that contain chlorophyll molecules. Inside them ADP is converted into ATP as a product of the light-dependent phase of photosynthesis. Stacked thylakoids Cell form a structure called a grana. Membrane ell Wall ¢ Nucleole Nucleus Chloroplast Thylakoid embrane ADP |) 4 4 = iN ] F ATP C + ADP e ATP The part of the cell where both phases of photosynthesis take place. It also contains enzymes. Stroma is the watery space inside the chloroplast. Carbon THE BUILDING BLOCK OF ORGANIC MATERIALS I This phase, so called because it does not directly Lf depend on light, takes place inside the stroma of the chloroplast. Energy in the form of ATP and NADPH, which was produced in the light-dependent phase, is used to fix carbon dioxide as organic carbon through a process called the Calvin cycle. This cycle consists of chemical reactions that produce phosphoacylglycerides, which the plant cell uses to synthesize nutrients. process, but one is regenerated when the ATP is formed. In photosystem I ATP is also generated from ADP because of the surplus flow of free electrons. =, 7 Calvin { Cycle END PRODUCTS enable the plant to generate carbohydrates, fatty acids, and amino acids. From Algae to Ferns DIATOMACEOUS ALGAE The scientific name of this type of single-celled algae is Biddulphia laevis. It is usually found close to the surface of very shallow bodies of water. COLORS OF LIFE STRANGE BEDFELLOWS HOW ALGAE REPRODUCE MOSSES TERRESTRIAL AND MARINE DISPERSION OF SPORES ALGAE THE ALGAE INDUSTRY Igae (including seaweed) do not belong to the plant kingdom, because they do not have all the characteristics and functions of plants. Algae have neither roots nor stems. Because they live in water, they do not need these structures for absorbing water. Algae grow on the sea floor or on the surface of rocks in the ocean, in rivers, and in lakes. Their shape and color are extremely varied. The annual world harvest of algae is estimated at more than 1 million tons in dry weight. Asian countries (Japan and China) produce 80 percent of the world's harvest. Algae are used in agriculture, the food industry, pharmaceuticals, preservatives, and medicine. They are an important source of income for many workers. = . PLANTS, ALGAE, AND FUNGI 21 |. 7 20 FROM ALGAE TO FERNS Colors of Life Igae are living things that manufacture their own food using photosynthesis. Their color is related to this process, and it has been used as a way of classifying them. They are also grouped according to the number of cells they have. There are many kinds of one-celled algae. Some algae form colonies, and others have multicellular bodies. Some types of brown seaweed can reach a length of more than 150 feet (45 m). @ Multicelled Organisms Fg This group of algae includes multicelled structures. Lef They form colonies with mobile, single-celled algae that group together more or less regularly in a shared mucilaginous capsule. They can also appear in threadlike shapes, which branch off, or in bulky shapes, which are made up of layers of cells with a particular degree of cellular differentiation, that together are called a thallus. Chlorophytes constitute the group of green algae. The majority of species are microscopic, single- celled organisms with flagella. Others form into filaments, and yet others form large multicellular bodies. The group Ulvophycea includes sea lettuce, which resembles a leaf lettuce and is edible. The group Charophyceae includes stoneworts, which contain calcium carbonate deposits. The chlorophytes are linked evolutionally with plants because they ; contain the same forms of chlorophyll, and Scenedesmus their cell walls contain cellulose. quadricauda - | & Chlamydomonas 8 Single-Celled Organisms fg often have flagella that enable them to move through the Micrasteria rotata (Lei water. Most have the ability to ingest solid material through phagocytosis. Single-celled algae include some distinctive groups. Diatoms are covered with a protective shell made of silicon. Some single-celled algae, namely red algae, can thrive at relatively high temperatures. Red algae is unique among eukaryote organisms in its ability to live inside thermal water vents. Micrasteria staurastrum Acetabularia crenulata Pinnularia borealis GREAT OPPORTUNISTS Single-celled algae live near the surface of bodies of water. When they find an area with light and the nutrients necessary for development, they use asexual reproduction to multiply and colonize the area. have been classified within this group of green algae, or chlorophytes. © Rhodophytes are characterized by their phycoerythrin pigments, which give the algae a reddish color by masking their chlorophyll's green color. Most rhodophytes grow below the intertidal zone near tropical and subtropical coasts. They are distributed throughout the principal oceans of the world and grow mainly in shaded areas in warm, calm water. Hypoglossum hypoglossoides AW Lr al KW Carrageen red seaweed ¢ Dictyota dichotoma implexa P hae Oo p hytes Fucus vesiculosus are the 1,500 species of brown seaweed. They inhabit | temperate regions and the : rocky coasts of the coldest seas on Earth. Their color = comes from the pigment fr 4 \ & fucoxanthin, a xanthophyll aye . % that masks the green color eS, \ \ wi of their chlorophyll. a r * f Dictyota dichotoma hudson Cystoseira amantacea Ectocarpus Nitophyllum Halymenia floresia Apoglossum lamouroux stricta siliculosus punctatum ruscifolium 22 FROM ALGAE TO FERNS Sexual Fl Sporophytes generate spores in every species Lei of microscopic algae. New individuals born from these spores are called gametophytes, and they produce gametes, which can be male, female, or hermaphrodite. During fertilization the male gametes (antheridia) and the female ones (ovum) form a cell called a zygote, which develops into a new thallus when it grows. Gametocytes and sporophytes can vary in morphology. If they are similar, they are called isomorphic, and if they are different, they are called heteromorphic. How Algae Reproduce he reproduction of algae can be sexual or asexual in alternating phases, depending on the species and on environmental conditions. Vegetative multiplication occurs through fragmentation or through the production of spores. In sexual reproduction the fertilization of the gametes (sexual cells) produces a zygote that will give rise to a new alga. During asexual reproduction there is no genetic exchange, and the algae produced are clones of the original. Sexual reproduction, in contrast, produces algae with new characteristics that may help them to better adapt to their environment. @ Asexual SUG om ia cute b teass 4 ge Asexual reproduction does not involve fertilization. ’ ® rake iti eerets cata me ign tier St as g pei hth (Leg It can take place in either of two ways. In . produce a new ny svelte » ~ fragmentation, segments of an alga become detached individual asexually Pt Bal . = fel . from its body, and, since the alga does not have any ; Benet a — Ea ae ma , aoe, specialized organs, the segments continue to grow as long ase * — —_ a Te i Sate eh ow : cust 2 xy as environmental conditions remain favorable. The other - ; all ee ar ‘ form of asexual reproduction is by means of spores, . ya a - . aA special cells that form from a normal cell. Some algae -. we ae ; Ane 5a rl —_— spores have one or more filaments, or flagella, that en ee) Tae ' ges ae spears e ‘- e ‘ allow the alga to swim freely. When the sees 3s tint iy Bes hed Tats prs ? SS : rd er ozo : use ; eir flagella appropriate environmental conditions yeh Cie did Ae 0 move In the water. are found, the spores germinate ae ial into new algae. Sate Transverse cut ¥- from a Fucus > se pats Se ze 3 : — species thallus” = x . LE 4 : Y 4 & OPENING Z wk ee 4S he 4 st oi ? see itirte ale ‘ bu PPTs: fe Neate it ais "> le \Wet » ra 3 New Thallus After fertilization the zygote divides and creates the embryo, a small cell mass that attaches to rocks, where a new thallus of Fucus species grows. The thallus looks similar to the stem of Fertilization Both fertilization and asexual reproduction are the natural means of perpetuation for this species. Algae form new individuals similar to themselves through reproduction. When an Bo = ANOTHER CYCLE The sac that contains the ovum opens. APPROACH PLANTS, ALGAE, AND FUNGI 23 MALE FUCUS The male fucus has receptacles in which antheridia form. r @ Antheridium The male gametangia (structure that produces gametes). They produce antherozoids, which have two flagellae and are smaller than the ovum, or female gamete. They swim until they reach an ovum and then surround it. Ovum In the reproductive stage female gametangia form at the tips of the thalluses. This is where the female sexual cells (ova) develop. FEMALE FUCUS The receptacles secrete a greenish gelatin made up of The youthful thallus, when mature, produces spores. plants, and it contains blades that look like leaves. antherozoid penetrates the ovum, it fertilizes the egg and forms a zygote. The journey of the antherozoids coincides with the opening of the female gametangia. female gametes. The gametes are freed when the sac that contains them breaks. 24 FROM ALGAE TO FERNS Terrestrial and Marine Algae PLANTS, ALGAE, AND FUNGI EC i! | \ | MARINE WATER FRESHWATER Beshaars Salts % Salts % The waters that cover the Earth's surface are classified into Catt 1B cat s two types: salt water, which forms the oceans and seas, : : : : 4 : Mg” ——_ Mg” s long as there is water, the survival of an alga is assured. Algae are found both in the ee es Nee? Nt 308 ———3 Na 30 oceans and in freshwater, but not all can survive in both environments. Depth, te bo anitGein: LitGontast: te salt concentatn oF = ei . oe i iSti continental water can vary from place to place, causing it SO; a SO; 82 . temperature, and salt concentrations of water are characteristics that ee ee te <0 oe \ determine whether algae can live in a given area. Algae can be green, brown, or red. Of the three, red algae are found in the deepest waters. Some species of algae can live outside of water, but they are nevertheless found in humid places, such as in mud or on stone walls or rocks. “ae = » 'e PORPHYRA Marine algae live where sunlight can reach them. Sunlight is completely absorbed at a depth of 650 to 1,300 feet (200-400 m). Green and brown algae are usually found near the shore; they also live in stagnant terrestrial bodies of water. Green, brown, and red algae can appear farther from shore in deeper waters, and red algae live in even deeper waters. Each area represents a specific type of habitat, with a characteristic composition of flora and fauna. e CODIUM As depth increases, water : absorbs sunlight and ; produces a loss in color... 7 Less - : —_— — Incidence = 33 ft) Less Incidence Depth (in meters) (Lm v er fein ure Temperature, which varies according to latitude and marine currents, plays an important role in determining where algae can live. The energy that the Sun's radiation provides to the oceans varies with its angle of incidence, but currents and tides distribute this energy. Ocean temperature is also dependent on depth—as the depth increases, the temperature decreases. exist, and they have diverse characteristics. The majority live in the ocean, and most of those remaining live in freshwater. 26 FROM ALGAE TO FERNS A World of Uses Algae extracts are used in the manufacture of food products, medicines, cosmetics, medical supplies, and even tools. They can serve as emulsifying, stabilizing, thickening, or clarifying agents. Algae extracts are used in ice cream pie fillings, puddings, and salad dressings. They are also used for making molds in dentistry, for lubrication in drawing wire, and as a medium for culturing bacteria. 150 pounds Bleaching with salt per square inch (10 kg/sq cm) Wate AmroNpS I The Algae Industry n China algae have been used for food, as well as for traditional medicine, for thousands of years. However, the algae industry began on a broad scale in the 17th century in Japan with the production of caustic soda and potassium hydroxide from the ashes of brown algae. A century later Western countries began to exploit algae in order to extract iodine and other chemical compounds of great economic value, such as phycocolloids (gelatin-like substances that can be obtained from several species of algae). The most commonly used phycocolloids are agar, carrageenan, and algin. sp a ROS PRN quality. AIR IS APPLIED TO DRY THE MASS. DRYING DRY ALGAE BELT Properly processed, gelatin can MOIST How Agar Is Obtained be obtained from these algae. Most algae collection is still done by hand, although FILTERING — ‘, commonly used large species, such as the Tl F ben HOT AIR Caribbean Sargasso, are also collected with special boats a ae GELLING 160-175° F in which processing of the algae can begin. The first eliminated stages, especially drying, are typically carried out by natural methods, but large fire-heated drying drums are used in some countries of Europe and North America. Although the use of heated drums is more expensive, it can result in a product of higher quality. Then the algae are filtered and transported to a tank. GELATIN“, » — contains 1% : ; PRECAUTION agar. . : The dried algae The amount of Gelidium algae . — must be ground — extractd by hand in Japan. e The pé6l receives the : . ‘ immediately to ‘ only 40 percent of it is harvested. ASHING =a ze Gel sheets about 0.4 inch (1 cm) wide % They are washed with - $= GELLING come out of the press between layers of water; then acid : — occurs when the nylon. They are placed on platforms, where is added. se temperature is lowered they begin to dry. The sheets are then Dulse DRYING = ’ along the length of the gaefrom 4 sk f COOKING pipe to 77° F (25° C). acer peed ees and further 2 first 4 . , The mass is ried by a stream of hot air. a cooked with a pH of 6.5 or 7. EF BASINS An initial filtering step uses only water and (4 kg) can withstand high a filtering soil. The mixture must be kept in temperatures. In the last continuous motion and injected with steam oe Gunny rae basin the mass is cooked to prevent it from separating. The mixture ADOBE Reon oe cata at 212° F (100° C). Le Pere es set ABOUT 2 POUNDS (1 KG) OF then passes through stainless steel pipes in DRY ALGAE which it is cooled to obtain a gelatin that contains 1 percent agar. After the alkaline treatment algae pass through a process in which they are washed with cold water. To ensure an even processing, compressed air is bubbled through the water. Later sodium hypochlorite is added to bleach the algae. Some sulfuric acid can be added to After the dry bundles are gathered, the algae this mixture to regulate acidity. are transported to an alkaline treatment IN MEDICINE pond. There sodium hydroxide (NaOH) is Agar has laxative added, and the mixture is heated to a 2 hour S properties. Agar is also temperature of 176° F (80° C). The mixture is THE APPROXIMATE LENGTH OF used as a medium for then washed and hydrated with cold water. TIME THE ALGAE IS COOKED culturing microorganisms. » © mixture free from prevent it from REGENERATION : tock or shel matter, = becoming moist. : - = a mechanism in In order for the The algae are given theMank slowly stirs algae to grow back, an alkaline pH. ~ a Mure. MILLING The dry ground agar is milled to reduce particle size. GRINDING QUALITY CONTROL Samples are taken during successive stages of sifting. Ground into a powder, the product must go through successive milling and sifting steps to eliminate any lumps and impurities. Samples are taken as the algae product is refined. Once it has passed inspection, the final product is packaged. COLLOID Algae extract is soluble only in hot water. It is used to add consistency to dairy products such as cheese, as well as to other food products. 28 FROM ALGAE TO FERNS trange Bedfellows Crustaceans With an appearance of scales, tightly affixed to the substratum, they can be continuous or PLANTS, ALGAE, AND FUNGI 29 Where They Live Lichens grow in cold regions, as well as in the Amazon Rainforest and the desert. They are very sensitive to environmental pollution. ichens are the result of a close relationship between fungi and algae (usually green algae). fragmented in plates or areolas. Although they are most common in cold areas, they adapt easily to diverse climatic conditions. en Corticolas Terricolas Saxicola . . . . . . . . Int Intl i Lichens can grow in the Arctic glacial regions, as well as in deserts and volcanic regions. They + ahd beanohes arrests aia wall live on rocks, from which they obtain all the necessary minerals to live, and they contribute to the formation of soils. Lichens are excellent indicators of the level of environmental pollution, since elevated levels of pollution cause them to die. @ | Fructicose A Symbiotic Relationship — sow rT Is createp or ana and can resemble 5 Lichens are the result of symbiosis between a The spore of the The spore grows They form a new fungus and an alga, a relationship from which fungus encounters around the alga, and organism (thallus trees ore d bu both benefit. In a lichen the fungus offers the alga the alga. the alga reproduces. of the lichen). Pecudae support and moisture and protects it from heat and Hyatia en dehydration. Likewise, the alga produces food for at ZN itself and for the fungus through photosynthesis. i - ; Germinating i} on the os h - Spore .) (A mounta ; A \\( ~ : ; N : thallus WHS = APOTHECIA Foliaceous ale intervenes in the 5 reproduction of the A showy lichen that has the fungus because it SOREDIA appearance of widely spread 0.1 to contains its spores. Unit of lichen leaves. It is the most common 0.2 inch stalin ite by macrolichen (3-6 mm) oes o surrounded by hyphae HAIRS Formed by the Lobaria pulmonaria ends of the ‘ on * hyphae of the ey j 3” Ro cortex or medulla color may be the darker than 1 LAYER OF ALGAE The layer contains green algae, which carry out photosynthesis to feed the fungus. GONIDIA Name given to algae when they form part of a lichen LAYER OF FUNGI The fungi are generally ascomycetes. They provide the alga with the moisture it needs to live. HYPHAE Fungal filaments, which are interwoven and colorless 4.000 Vears oa Z MEDULLA Fixation organs that CORTEX -LASSES OF LICHENS EXIST. ) Made up of arise from the cortex External layer A THE LIFE SPAN A LICHEN CAN ACHIEVE fungus hyphae or from the medulla of the lichen 30 FROM ALGAE TO FERNS PLANTS, ALGAE, AND FUNGI 31 ! Capsule Mosses i osses were among the earliest plants to emerge. They evolved from green algae more than 250 million years ago and belong to the group of simple plants called bryophytes. Mosses reproduce only in environments where liquid water is present. Because they grow in groups, they take on the coe Ata appearance of a green carpet. These Calyptra when the spores exit primitive plants can serve as eae [ indicators of air pollution, and they help reduce environmental 10,000 SPECIES OF MOSSES have been classified within the bryophite group of nonvascular plants. Operculum IAniulis Sporophyte Perichaeti Operculum A type of cap that covers the opening of Capsule contains the spores and is DEVELOPMENT OF A THE SPOROPHYTE Meiosis A “Pa : The zygote divides Rhizoid Meiosis is a type of cellular division in be A degradation. 2) through mitosis and pes, aes which each daughter cell receives only i Wat aaa forms the ' one complete set of chromosomes. : sporophyte, which ADULT Therefore, the resulting cells have half ZYGOTE remains united to SPOROPHYTE as many chromosomes as the parent the gametophyte. cells had. In general, this mechanism ; It forms from The adult fe ae ice HAE =g= = Pri Sea ea sporophyte consists generates the gametes, but mosses Fertilization ape of a capsule (within generate haploid spores in the capsule ; : Reproductive organs that produce gametes in a watery which the spores of the sporophyte. ~ environment. form), a stalk (which holds the capsule), and a foot. develop in the green gametophytes, which live all year long. When there is sufficient moisture, the male gamete reaches a female gamete and fertilizes it. The zygote that Small Plants arises from this union grows and forms DIPLOID Mosses are bryophytes. They are the sporophyte. The sporophyte Diploid cells have two sets of Mature relatively small plants that affix possesses fertile tissue that undergoes chromosomes. Consequently, they Sporophyte themselves to a substratum via rhizoids and meiosis to generate spores that, after have duplicate genetic information. consists of a carry out photosynthesis in small “leaves” that falling to the ground and germinating, capsule in lack the specialized tissues of the real leaves of will form a new gametophyte. ral BERS which vascular plants. They fulfill a very important oo ees . spores are ecological role: they participate in the ye ; - Spermatozoids formed. formation of soils by decomposing the rocks on mH which they grow, and they contribute to the ey Plein ge HAPLOID photosynthesis of epiphytes in rainforests. je Tremale Their asexual reproduction occurs through sexual organ fragmentation or the production of propagula. sexual organ A haploid cell is one that contains only one complete set of genetic information. Reproductive cells, such as the ova and sperm in mammals, are haploid, but the rest of the cells in i) the body of higher organisms are usually Ovule SPOROPHYTE diploid—that is, they have two complete sets of pruiieii In ae two fabio @ 9 The sporophyte does not have an independent existence but lives at ADULT gametes unite to form a diploid cell. In the case i) Go the expense of the gametophyte. The sporophyte lives a short time CGAMETOPHYTE of mosses all the cells of the gametophyte, the 9 9 i) and only during a certain time of the year. This is what a gametes, and the spores are haploid. grown gametophyte @ looks like. GERMINATION SPORES GAMETOPHYTE OF THE SPORE The life cycle of a DEVELOPMENT The spore moss begins with the . The gametophyte HORIZONTAL germinates and freeing of the spores The Cycle of Life grows. FILAMENTS gives rise to a that form in the Mosses do not have flowers, seeds, The filamentous ¢ capsule, which opens or fruits. As with other plants, gametophyte protonema when a cap called the mosses have a life cycle formed by develops from (cellular mass). operculum is expulsed. alternating generations; however, in contrast the horizontal with vascular plants, the haploid gametophyte filaments. is larger than the diploid sporophyte. Their biological cycle begins with the release of spores, \ which form in a capsule that opens when a small cap FUNARIA a’ called the operculum is ejected. The spores germinate HIGROMETRICA \ and give rise to a filamentous protonema (cellular ae, belongs to the group mass) from which the gametophyte develops. The Rhizoids of plants called zygote that forms from the union of the two sexual bryophytes. cells develops into the sporophyte. 32 FROM ALGAE TO FERNS PINNULES Smaller lobes that contain sori on their inner side Dispersion of Spores he fern is one of the oldest plants. Ferns have inhabited the surface of the Earth for 400 million years. Their leaves have structures called sori that contain the sporangium, which houses the spores. When the sori dry up, they release the spores into the air. Once on the ground, the spores germinate as gametophytes. In times of rain and abundant moisture the male cells of the gametophyte are able to swim to reach female gametes, which they fertilize to form a zygote that will grow as a sporophyte. Contains the sporangia Frond When the sporophyte is mature, it produces a large number of Petioles into sporangia that group which the leaf together, forming sori is divided on the back of the The zygote develops into a sporophyte's leaves. structure called a sporophyte; it is the part visible to the naked eye. In some cases it has the appearance of a serrated leaf. bud by unfurling from the tip Primary Leaf of a Growing Sporophyte The spore is the most effective unit of dispersion because of its aerodynamic form and microscopic dimensions. GAMETOPHYTE Adventitious Root The male and female organs are differentiated in the prothallus. In the presence of liquid water the antheridia swim to fertilize the ovule. When the spore encounters the right environment, it develops into a multicellular structure that forms the haploid gametophyte, called the prothallus. Atheridium Male Sex Organ Archegonium Female Sex Organ Ovule Female Gamete Antherozoid Male Cellular sheet Gamete that forms the prothallus 12,000 SPECIES OF FERNS CAN BE FOUND IN THE WORLD. GAMETOPHYTE Rhizoid Rhizoid INDUSIUM —_() _ © Small cap that protects “ and covers the sori while the spores mature inside each sporangium When the sporangia dry and wither, they liberate spores through a catapult mechanism. 300 million THE NUMBER OF SPORES ONE FERN LEAF CAN CIRCINATE ee : VERNATION ia ey é sR The manner in Lad be brat beet J which fronds ee ete ae. vey expand from a SPOROPHYTE Sudo. pnd RTA PRODUCE. THEIR TOTAL to oii WEIGHT IS 0.04 OUNCE (1 G). Microscopic capsule that contains the spores ANNULUS Row of cells located on the back wall. When it dries, the number of sporangia doubles. HOW A LEPTOSPORANGIUM IS FORMED ~£2 It starts as The lower The stalk divides a single initial cell gives into four initial epidermal cell. rise toa cells and small thin stalk. sporocytes. PLACENTA FILAMENT unites with the pinnule in the placenta. * ' ~ THIN WALL Formed by a single layer of cells The wall of the It forms a fixed mature sporangium — number of is formed by asingle spores through layer of cells. meiosis. Seed Plants nlike animals, plants are limited in their ability to seek favorable conditions for life and growth. Consequently, they have evolved in different ways to reproduce and increase their population through seeds. A seed must arrive at an appropriate location at the best time for germination. Each species achieves its objective in a THE POLLEN REACHES THE STIGMA This is the first step toward forming a seed. In this magnified image the grains of pollen can be seen on the stigma of wolfsbane (Arnica montana). different way. Some produce a great number of seeds; others wrap their seeds in a layer of hard material that softens with rain and winter's cold to germinate in spring. In this chapter you SEEDS, TO AND FRO ENERGY MANUFACTURERS UNDER THE EARTH FUNCTIONAL BEAUTY STEMS: MORE THAN A POLLINATION SUPPORT BEARING FRUIT WOODEN HEART CONIFERS GROWTH SPRINGS ETERNAL will find how this process takes place, step by step, from pollination to the formation of a new plant. SEED PLANTS PLANTS, ALGAE, AND FUNGI 37 Seeds 9 To and Fro Growth Vegetative Growth The seedling grows and breaks through the The first true leaves unfold above the cotyledons, Internal and external changes stimulate eprod uction from seeds is the most prominent evolutionary advantage in plants’ surface. This causes the plant to be exposed and the stem elongates from formative tissue called shoanral tide to light so it can begin to carry out the meristem, located at the apex of the plant. develop a flower. conquest of the terrestrial environment. The seed shelters the embryo of the future photosynthesis. It thus begins to manufacture Continued growth will lead to the formation of an plant with protective walls. The embryo iS accompanied by tissues that provide its own nutrients to replace those provided by adult plant, which will develop its own reproductive . : : : - t tyledons. structures. enough nutrients for it to begin to develop. Optimal temperature and an appropriate see aa coma a quantity of water and air are the factors that stimulate the seed to awaken to a marvelous : rOTIPOTENCY copa hag cycle of development and growth that will culminate in the generation of new seeds. @ ; see cae , Ravan petiole a \PICAL \WTH apex cells Light stimulates the multiplication of cells in the apex of the stem. Awakening of the Seed Tropism Production of the Seeds, such as those of the field, or corn, poppy Because of gravity, amyloplasts are ' (Papaver rhoeas), leave their latent stage when they always located in the lower part of Flower S Parts hydrate and receive enough light and air. Their cells. They produce a stimulus that The cotyledon is The apical bud begins to produce protective coverings open and the embryo grows thanks encourages the root to grow toward Cell multiplication allows carried by the TRUE fertile flower structures to the energy provided by its cotyledons, or seed leaves. the earth, a process called geotropism. the stem to grow. vertical growth of (gynoecium and androecium) and the stem. sterile structures (petals and sepals). The flower bud forms. CONDUCTION The stem carries water Cotyledons can and minerals from the remain under the root to the leaves, while soil or, as in this taking manufactured PLUMULE The bud of a 4 plant embryo ‘ case, grow above substances in the 7 f ~*~ that will produce é ‘ a ao the ground. opposite direction. Fa = the first shoot COTYLEDON ’ Mt ‘ { ; sf 2 “ “ ~ The first embryo leaf. : ‘ii ; viel HYPOCOTYL : , | 4 Tt provides the energy \ dX : " The first part of the ‘ / ’ . needed for growth. ' : tt stem that emerges i % bh ' 3 and develops in the Fete young plant wt x f _ = i ee " a, a O ABSORBENT HAIRS These organs begin to develop ‘in the radicle. They help the seed\absorb water from the soil. e ’ The root has many \ fine-hairs that create ote a large-surface area > for water’absorption. HARD COVER Called the testa, it can’appear in very different forms. e@—— RADICLE , | The testa The embryo root UTS weit protects the ) that will produce embryo and the # the)main root of @ibberaliin cotyledons ‘ the plant [- Embryo during the seed!s Seed Cover” latent stage. VD) APE: ar = ee PRIMARY ROOT THE FIRST 20.DAYS OF A FIELD POPPY . } It anchors itself to the . @ » 2. is responsible for breaking s ‘ ground and branches open seed covers because é Gibberellins ~ out to support the : : a $ : ? @) inches aM the hydrated tissues exert t ake, ; plant-inthe substrate. : ae onthe interior of > are plant hormones that, during the first stages of . : Autu | } ] Bo i 3in 5 6 iti Bin (50 cm) NOPENTS germination following water absorption, are distributed y 8 «: 1 cm) (xen) (12 cm) (15 cm) (20. cm) : The'radicle is ia through the endosperm. Their presence promotes the THE TIME OF THE $ : THE TYPICAL HEIGHT OF AN senna DLRGMectIe production of enzymes that hydrolyze starches, lipids, and YEAR IN WHICH THE ‘ ADULT FIELD POPPY PLANT water and nutrients proteins to turn them into sugars, fatty acids, and amino acids, SEED OF PAPAVER r ¥ present inthe soil. * respectively. These substances provide nutrition to the embryo RHOEAS GERMINATES r . and later to the seedling. 38 SEED PLANTS PLANTS, ALGAE, AND FUNGI 39 FRU Seo rs After fertilization ara 4 It produces the ovary and Once the bud opens, the parts of the flower begin to unfold. male gametes. Bees approach flowers in adjacent tissues Thececledeaclo They are arranged in whorls, or cycles. The whorl called the . \ search of nectar and carry become the fruit. eee p corolla contains the petals, and two inner whorls contain the away grains of pollen that ola a rul fertile parts of the flower—the androecium and gynoecium. cling to their hairs. /j. ach seed can develop ’ a new seedling. j i ANT IS , i is the name given to the ~ q ih opening of the flower bud. y iy - 4 ¥ aD. b'|. . i» The mechanism by which flowering plants reproduce involves the dispersal of pollen. The fruits scatter the seeds. Field poppies have dry fruits 4 that open when they mature. This facilitates the dispersion of the seed by air. Wind is an ideal means for transporting pollen over long distances. The fruit of a field poppy is a capsule with small openings at the top that help scatter the seeds. COMPOSITES The leaves are very ; divided and participate y, en in photosynthesis. | Each seed distributed by air, water, or an animal can, under the right environmental conditions, germinate and develop into a new seedling. LU CM) THE AVERAGE SIZE OF THE FLOWER a Stigma Antera Animals, especially insects, help the plant disseminate its pollen after Nectarium Ovary they enter the flower in search of y food. This is one of the main The absorbent hairs rf mechanisms of pollination. are destroyed by “abrasion from the’soil 2 2 « but are constantly NM " ” renewed. An? es » eae lt” : , 3 areye) Something in Common x Soe . When a seed encounters the right r SEEDS CAN BE _conditions, it.can begin its life cycle: Even » CONTAINED IN ONE RIPE ; though every species of plant with flowers has\its FIELD POPPY. FRUIT. J . _ own. particular-life cycle, the’ various stages of the cycle represented here are typical of angiosperms, a . in general...» z : Aare PLANTS, SEED PLANTS AE, AND FUNGI Under the Eart The root is a plant organ that is usually found under the soil. It has positive geotropism;!ts NECK main functions are absorbing water and inorganie vi \ etd ‘ UE ee nutrients and attaching the plant to the ground: ii i | ' chaz, 3 eae Co wee The root is essential for identifying the particular j ae vy EEA lb characteristics of a plant The anatomical / ' AREA cae: ROOT STRUCTURE ee A porous’region The root cap is found. at one i end. While the root grows, the root cap.protects it from soil abrasion: The interior. of the root is formed by the cortex, > which has a compact layer of EPIDER! cells that ‘affect the flow of water through the rootsThis is due to the presence-of a waxy substance that forms the Casparian strip. whose function é is to anchor and ’ absorb structure of a root canary, but,\because it does A Ye NEA PERICYCLE not have leaves or nodes, it will always be simpler than that.of,a stem: . CORTEXA » : + a , ‘ . . ‘ Types. of Roots ; * Roots differ, depending on their origin. The primary -root originates in thé radicle of the embryo. Anvadventitious-root is one that originates insany other organ of the)plant, Roots are also subdivided accérding toftheir morphology. / — PIDERMIS WATER enters through the root hairs and travels.to the epidermal 5 ; PILIFEROUS AREA The part of thé root covered with cells. slender elongations called roots hairs. CASPARIAN The root\hairs STRIP , , increase the/surface. x area through which watefand/miherals cah be'alsorbe CELL WALL py 2 GEOTROPISM Geotropism, or/gravitotropisim; NUTRIENTS BRANCHED TAPROOT . A‘taproot grows The main root is the growth of a plant or . aspen ie panty of a downward and has is divided, ’ parts ofja plant ina particular nutrients in the soil and on the Phethi ei crdary chathigktier wae Paitin Ae! . roots’ ability:to transport them. pe sar Ee roots that are,not vi stimulus of gravity. The forge "9 of gravity orients the stems and their leaves'to grow upward (negative geotropism), Whereas the roots grow well developed. EVAPORATION/TRANSPIRATION PRESSURE \ OSMOSIS OSMOTIC OSMOTIC ownwatd (positive ‘The process through which , \ geotropism). | plants absorb water from the PRESSURE PRESSURE 44 } ji . soil. Water penetrates |into Greater Osmotic Less Osmotic i \ y eae H the roots when it has a Pressure . Pressure FIBROUS TUBEROUS . P greater concentrationjin the i Te rog Srebeinls oe in ds ed gi bet Sot ed Ba eet Hee SUBSTRATE SUBSTRATE WITH structure, Some i Poe 4 2 ps On ake eg sonst Nae ar ae Aerio diameter. see Pes . ~ : CONCENTRATION OF SALTS ood for the plant: 2 a . / — Theseplants fave Ambryos With*only qne ay cotyledon: Thelr embryonic rodt génerally.has * a relatively sHorttifetand’is replacedjb GROWTH AND PROTODERMIS A plant that has seeds with two adventitiousjroots tat grow. from the stem. / CELLULAR DIVISION PERICLINAL Metitntiecn ae d LATERAL embryonic leaves (cotyledons). It has a NAPIFORM TABULAR 1 ; . : : Through theyprocess of cell ela structure that ocaaital tap root, and the leaves are usually The taproot Tabular roots form » division a cell'divides into two beroantichls? protects the petiolated with a reticulated vein thickens with stored .* ° at the base of a q-- : cells, each with its own to thesur ice) meristem of the tip distribution. Their internal organization Sg hes He Sep tas We Saat UE idler The eta remteamwan pena tsa apt oat wine ee . . ~~ elongate, allowing the root to Fe MERISTEM circular arrangement. grow in thickness and length. (cell division parallel to the surface) 42. SEED PLANTS tems, which occur in a variety of shapes and colors, support a plant's leaves and flowers. They keep it from breaking apart in the wind, and they determine its height. In addition, stems are also responsible for distributing the water and minerals absorbed by a plant's roots. Stems contain conducting vessels through which water and nutrients circulate. In trees and bushes, stems are woody for better support. e stems: More Than a Support CROSS-SECTION OF A NEW STEM Section of Stem ioe? |G HFSS IN THE AIR IN THE GROUND Stems are usually Certain types of branched, as seen in trees stems have unusual and bushes. characteristics. Pty | Section | of Stem IN THE WATER The stem of an aquatic plant can lie underwater. Development of Stems in Different Mediums Fh Stems have widely varying sizes and shapes because they must compete with many other Lf that reflect different adaptations to the plants for sunlight. In contrast, wheat is typical of environment. Palm trees and wheat are two good areas with a cold climate and a short growing examples that show how different mediums can season. It develops a relatively short stem. This modify the stem through evolution. Palm trees are enables it to survive the physical assault of the dry the tallest non-woody plants. They grow tall wind and the loss of leaves. ‘ é TUBER An underground stem composed mainly of parenchymatic cells filled with starch. The potato's small depressions are actually axillary eyes. In an onion, another example of a plant with an underground stem, starch accumulates not in tubers but in thick leaves that grow around the stem. C-— SPROUTS grow from : the eyes. AXILLARY EYES are grouped in a spiral pattern along the potato. COMMON POT! Solanum tuberosu Cuticle Epidermis Parenchyma LEAF ARTICHOKE THISTLE Cynara cardunculus PLANTS, ALGAE, AND FUNGI 43 ———w—= Circulation FR“ Because the stem is the link between the roots, eff which absorb water and minerals, and the leaves, which produce food, the stem's veined tissues are connected to the roots and leaves. It functions as a transport system for interchanging substances. The stem and its branches hold the leaves up to receive light and support the plant's flowers and fruit. Some stems have cells with chlorophyll that carry out photosynthesis; others have specialized cells for storing starch and other nutrients. MOVEMENT THROUGH THE STEM : WATER AND In plants, sugar and other organic SALTS molecules are transported through the phloem, which moves are absorbed by the roots and then the sap. The molecules are @ transported and transported through sieve tubes. distributed by the xylem in the stem. GLUCOSE Sugar reduces the osmotic pressure in the sieve tubes. og naam SE CORE XYLEM AXILLA The joint re between the NODE main stem and A place where PHLOEM a leaf stem shoots grow from the stem INTERNODE —— The part of a” the stem Aa between two - nodes al CROSS-SECTION ol = oF STEM gr. XYLEM . en VESSEL HEARTWOOD ’% SAPWOOD + COMPANION CELL SIEVE TUBE SIEVE PLATE SIEVE-TUBE Sipe ELEMENT SECONDARY PHLOEM INNER BARK 44 SEED PLANTS PLANTS, ALGAE, AND FUNGI 45 SPECIES J Most of the 70,000 known tree j species are dicotyledons. However, | J , the oldest trees (4,900-year-old bristlecone pines [Pinus longaeva]) J and the tallest trees (360 foot [110 { m] sequoias [Sequoia 100 Monocotyledons | EM LSA y Ce pi ODN GR AOR TR | a? ' J mn Hf t EA e ype : ‘¢ Wooden Heart USL NES FE eae) very year a tree thickens its trunk through the production of growth rings, by ' \ a process called secondary growth. Each new ring is different from the ring that grew the year before. This happens because the wood produced over the course of a year varies in its composition and in the time it takes to form a ring. Trees are the largest producers of wood, which can be processed as hand-cut wood, logs, or sawed lumber—the most common form in the industry. To calculate a tree's age scientists study its growth rings. 1,000 Gymnosperms 4 sempervirens]) are gymnosperms. ; i { The earliest trees known to paleobotany appeared during the j Devonian Period. 70,000 Dicotyledons PHLOEM The phloem transports the products of photosynthesis, mostly INNER BARK is the youngest ring, because a new ring is created in each year's Initiation The layer of meristematic cells formed between the xylem and the phloem develops inside the base tissue until it grows all the way around, forming a cylinder. Epidermis Cortex Primary Phloem Primary Xylem A Tree's Age Dendrochronology is the study of the age of trees. The number of growth rings formed since a tree's birth establishes its age. Secondary Growth Secondary growth takes place in the secondary meristems: the vascular cambium and the cork cambium. The vascular cambium is found between the xylem and the phloem at the end of the plant's primary growth zone. It produces secondary xylem toward the inside of the trunk and secondary phloem toward the outside. Lengthening @ The primary xylem and phloem form when the vascular cambium divides. Inner Bark Primary Phloem Primary Xylem Cork Cambium LABURNUM Laburmun sp. Primary Xylem Cortical Parenchyma Secondary Phloem Secondary Xylem Vascular Cambium roups of trees: The wood of conifers (gymnosperms) tends to be simpler and more uniform than that of angiosperms. The woody tissue consists mainly of tracheids. a Termination The veined cambium forms the primary and secondary vein tissues. Secondary Xylem Primary Phloem Secondary Phloem Outer Cortical Parenchyma Bark Vascular Cambium Cork Cambium Slow Growth Rapid Growth in the form of sucrose. This is its main function. XYLEM SAPWOOD is the woody part of the trunk and consists of xylem tissue. It is pale in color and of variable thickness. the leaves. Rolled Logs Hand-Hewn Wood Not processed _ is chopped by hand before use, with an ax. It is used they are often in rural construction used in rural for rafters and posts, and traditional construction. but it involves a considerable loss of wood. Its main function is to carry water and mineral salts from the roots to growth. Sawed Lumber It is cut to specified dimensions, either manually or mechanically, in a sawmill. It is the type of wood most often used in construction. Growth Springs ome vascular (veined) plants, also called tracheophytes, ar. 9 continue growing year after year. This is made possible by types of meristems: apical, which carry on the plant's primary growth, and lateral, which give rise to the tissues that increase the plant's girth. As the meristematic cells form new cells, the plant grows and renews its organs. Thanks to their growth buds, the plants maintain their vitality and strengthen their organs or replace them often. Because of this process, the renewed plants are able to increase their number of branches, flowers, and leaves. _ Branching _—— Growth buds can be found at the end of the main is the name of the order of plants - . axis (apical bud) or at the joint where the leaves whose leaves are arranged along the te meet the stem (lateral bud). Growth can take nodesonthelbranches: Each node can different forms, depending on the type of bud that fave fromfonentoteeteral leaves. predominates. If apical buds are more common, the branch growth is called monopodial. If lateral buds predominate, the branch growth is called sympodial. Conifers are an example of monopodial growth. Sympodial growth is widespread among dicotyledon herbs and is found in practically all monocotyledons. SYCAMORE MAPLE Acer pseudoplatanus a “ie a . Fr i | sisal eis i ed Sl ll wy Lateral Buds Several leaves per ™ ) Two leaves per node. x node. Whorls are ——_ They are arranged formed ina spiral © ~~" ~ perpendicularly to arrangement around ALTERNATING One leaf per node, arranged alternately in successive nodes. Found in monocots earlier and later and dicots. successive nodes. “ ¢ nodes. > Arrangement Arrangement » \ Arrangement of Leaves 4 7 of Leaves NN /| al of Leaves GIANT SEA HOLLY GUMROCKROSE =~ \| /@ CLARY SAGE Eryngium giganteum Citus ladanifer Salvia sclarea 48 SEED PLANTS PLANTS, ALGAE, AND FUNGI 49 Energy Manufacturers he main function of leaves is to carry out photosynthesis. Their shape is specialized to capture light energy and transform it into chemical energy. Their thinness minimizes their volume and maximizes their surface area that is exposed to the Sun. However, there are a great many variations on this basic theme, which have evolved in association with different types of weather conditions. CROSS-SECTION Th general, upon sectioning a leaf, one can observe that it possesses the same tissues as the rest of the body of the plant. The distribution of tissues varies with each species. 1 The stomatic apparatus is closed. No air can enter or leave the leaf. This prevents excessive transpiration, which could damage the plant. Thickened cell walls in the area of the pore Cellulose Microfibers CONDUCTING TISSUE is made of live cells (phloem) and dead cells (xylem). 2 The stomatic apparatus is open. The stomatic cells are swollen. As tension increases, the cellular form is modified and is able to exchange gases. EDGES (MARGINS) Species are distinguished by a wide variety of edges: smooth, jagged, and wavy. VEINS Flowering plants (division - 4 Angiosperma) are often ‘ ¢ distinguished by the type Sak : ¥ | v oarikaymern of veins they have: parallel The flow of carbon dioxide a water Wels :— veins in monocots and between the plant and the environment is | : The products of : branching veins in dicots. essential for the photosynthetic process. This 4 “ photosynthesis circulate A through the veins from exchange can be affected by internal or : ; the leaves to the rest of external factors, such as changes in light, t } : the body. BASIC TISSUE temperature, or humidity. In response to . : S formed by live cells that these stimuli the stomas can open or close. give structure to the leaf , and usually contain some EPIDERMAL TISSUE chloroplasts. is composed of live cells. It surrounds all the parts of the leaf and the plant. It produces a substance that forms the cuticle. — 7 * : J Conifers possess an interesting modification in their leaves. In these + 4 gymnosperms evolution directed the abrupt reduction of surface foliage = : area. This gave them an adaptive advantage over plants whose leaves have a large surface area: less resistance to wind and less transpiration 4 in arid climates. In addition, they are able to avoid the excessive weight = that would result from the accumulation of snow on large leaves. P The leaves of climbing plants, such as the a grapevine, have these RACHIS ¢ VASCULAR BUNDLE RESIN adaptive modifications. Formed by phloem functions to £ and xylem prevent freezing. It ' ACER SP. SGenmD circulates through £ This genus includes _— Pheiresin dicts: a trees and bushes ~ easily distinguishable e “es by their opposite and hesbeas lobed leaves. EPIDERMIS = We Cells with thick walls and a thick cuticle Needle-shaped leaves are characteristic of conifers. They are usually oval or ] triangular. A b| hypodermis, which is enclosed by the In most monocotyledon plants the When the leaf is divided from the primary vein, it leaf is undivided. In some cases it may forms separate leaflets. A compound leaf is called : = \ A epidermis, is broken have lobes or notches in its side, but palmate when the leaflets are arranged like the =] ay , only in the stomas. these divisions do not reach all the fingers on a hand and pinnate when they grow from » | way to the primary vein of the leaf. the sides of the leaf stem like the barbs of a feather. 50 SEED PLANTS Functional Beauty arranged in circular or spiral patterns. @ Classification IF) Plants with flowers are classified as dicotyledons or Le monocotyledons. The first group has seeds with two cotyledons, and the second has seeds with only one. Each represents a different evolutionary line. They are differentiated by the structure of their organs. The cotyledon contains nutrients that the embryo utilizes during its growth until its true leaves appear. When a seed germinates, the first thing that appears is the root. In monocotyledons the stem and the radicle are protected by a membrane; the dicotyledons lack this protection, and the stem pushes itself through the soil. Dicotyledons In this class of plants each whorl of the flower is arranged in groups of four or five parts. In dicotyledons the sepal is small and green, the petals are large and colorful, and the leaves are wide. The vascular ducts are cylindrical. OVARY The ovary is found in the receptacle at the base of the gynoecium, inside the carpels. The pollen tube extends into the ovary and penetrates the ovule. LEAVES In dicotyledons, leaves have various forms, and they contain a network of veins that connect with a primary vein. ROOT In dicotyledons the main root penetrates the ground vertically as a prolongation of the stem, and secondary roots extend from it horizontally. It can be very deep and long-lived. lowers are not simply beautiful objects; they are also the place where the reproductive organs of angiosperms are located. Many are hermaphroditic, meaning that they contain both the male reproductive apparatus (the androecium) and the female (the gynoecium). The process of pollination is carried out through external agents, such as insects, birds, wind, and water. Following fertilization, flowers produce seeds in their ovaries. The floral parts are Each whorl of these flowers contains three parts, and their sepals and petalsare =~ enerally not differentiated from one another. The majority are herbaceous plants ascular conduits. They are with scatte the most evolved species o CARPEL The carpel consists of modified leaves that together form the gynoecium. It contains a stigma, a style, and an ovary. Ovules are produced in the ovary. LEAVES Plants with only one cotyledon have large and narrow leaves, with parallel veins and no petiole. Fe) Androecium of which consists of an anther Gynoecium The female reproductive ystem. It is formed by carpels and includes the ovary, ovules, style, and | stigma. ANTHER A sac where ~ (the male gametes) are produced FILAMENT STIGMA te Its function is It canbe simple or to sustain the divided. It secretes a i anther. sticky liquid that captures the pollen. Some are also \ covered with hair. grains of pollen The male reproductive system. It is formed by a group of stamens, each supported by a filament. The base may contain glands that produce nectar. al at “7 rf 4 al Sef ns... angiosperms. ROOT In monocotyledons all the roots branch from the same point, forming a kind of dense hair. They are generally superficial and short-lived. oe - ws STYLE Some styles are solid, others hollow. Their number depends on The pollen tube grows through the style. In corn the tube can ha length of 15 inches (40 cm). OVARY The ovary is found in the receptacle in the base of the gynoecium, inside the carpels. The pollen tube, which conducts the pollen to the ovule, extends to the ovary. the number of carpels. PLANTS, ALGAE, AND FUNGI 51 Whorls Fh Most flowers have four whorls. In a typical flower the L<@ outermost whorl is the calyx, followed by the corolla, the androecium (which can have two parts), and the gynoecium. When a flower has all four whorls, it is considered complete; it is incomplete when it lacks at least one of them. Plants that have an androecium and a gynoecium, but in separate flowers, are called monoecious. If the flower lacks a sepal and petals, it is said to be naked. 250,000 THE NUMBER OF KNOWN SPECIES OF ANGIOSPERM PLANTS, THOUGH ONLY 1,000 SPECIES HAVE ECONOMIC IMPORTANCE. ABOUT TWO THIRDS OF THESE SPECIES ARE NATIVE TO THE TROPICS. = COROLLA A grouping of petals. If its parts are separated, they are simply called petals; if they are united, the plant is described as gamopetalous. PETAL It typically has a showy color to attract pollinating insects or other animals. CALYX The grouping of sepals that protects the other parts of the flower. Together with the corolla it forms the perianth. The sepals may be separate or united; in the latter case the plant is called gamosepalous. SEPAL Each of the modified leaves that protect the flower in its first stage of development. They also prevent insects from gaining access to the nectar without completing their pollinating function. Sepals are usually green. O————— _ TEPAL In monocotyledonous plants the petals and sepals are usually the same. In this case they are called tepals, and the group of tepals is called a perianth. ) 52 SEED PLANTS t Pollination he orchid, whose scientific name Ophrys apifera means “bee orchid,” is so called because of the similarity between the texture of its flowers and the body of a bee. Orchids’ flowers are large and very colorful, and they secrete a sugary nectar that is eaten by many insects. The orchid is an example of a zoomophilous species; this means that its survival is based on attracting birds or insects that will transport its pollen to distant flowers and fertilize them. oy a CAUDICLE At times it closes, covering ODOR the pollinia. The odor is similar to bee pheromones. POLLINIUM ——— } > A small clump ~ of closely packed pollen grains 3 POLLINATING ~™, INSECT ; ; Male Bee > While passing through Gorytes sp. 4 \ the narrow tunnel, the bee brushes the pollinarium, and pollen sticks to the bee. Excited by the perfume and the texture, the bee enters NECTAR the flower, and in this A sugary pseudo-copulation it liquid that is usually falls into the z somewhat pool and becomes sticky trapped. It cannot fly and can only escape by climbing the flower's stamens. LABELLUM Its form imitates the abdomen of the bee. Bee Orchid re / 0.008 to . : wy , 0.08 inch ir , (0.2-2 mm) , = " POLLINIA a pm ad | “ Small clumps of ip pollen grains housed py in a compartment . = a a ALN of the anther zo ae | POLLINARIUM r “= a Grouping of two, four, —_ six, or eight pollinia CORBICULUM Organ for the COLORATION transport of pollen is one of the factors of attraction. 4 The bee takes off toward other flowers, with pollen from the orchid stuck to its back. LOBULES They have fine, silky hairs that attract the bees. CAMOUFLAGE Some plants that rely on insects for \ pollination acquire the appearance of the animal species on which they depend for survival. Each orchid has its own pollinating insect. ‘is PLANTS, ALGAE, AND FUNGI 53 Pollen Each grain contains a male gamete. THE NUMBER OF SEEDS THAT A SINGLE FERTILIZED ORCHID PRODUCES Toward a Destination When it arrives at another flower of the same species, the bee repeats the incursion and bumps the flower's stigmas (female organs), depositing pollen that is capable of fertilizing it. Sai 7 4 i * 7 54 SEED PLANTS Bearing Fruit nce the flower is fertilized, its ovary matures and develops, first to protect the seed forming within it and then to disperse the seed. The stigmas and anthers wither, and the ovary transforms into fruit. Its wall forms the cover, or pericarp. Fruits and seeds are of great economic importance because of their key role in human nutrition. The endosperms of some seeds are rich in starch, proteins, fats, and oils. come from a single flower. They may contain one or Seeds —_———o more seeds and be dry or fleshy. Among them are Like other citrus fruits, drupes, berries, and pomes. oranges are similar to J berries. Their seeds may propagate when the , Ovary ae fruit rots and exposes Walls > them or when an animal | eats the fruit and then é defecates the seeds. Pulp +s Seed C= Central Aborted are fleshy fruits that come from epigynous flowers, Locu los Axis —— Seeds or flowers whose enclosed ovaries lie below the place where the other parts of the flower are attached. The floral receptacle thickens and forms an edible mesicarp. Apples are one example. ° Septos Vesicles The part of the pericarp DRUPES are fleshy fruits, leathery or fibrous, which are surrounded by a woody endocarp with a seed in its interior. They are generally derived from hypogynous flowers—flowers whose ovaries lie above the point where the other flower parts are attached. An example is the peach. sections. F @ , Pulp (a VA AY Skin —S : rs | x } Seed BERRIES THE PROPORTION OF AN When they mature, berries generally have a bright IMMATURE CITRUS color and a fleshy or juicy mesocarp. They come FRUIT THAT IS MADE UP from either epigynous or hypogynous flowers. The OF THE FLAVONOID grape is an example. GLYCOSIDE (HESPERIDIN) that contains the seeds. It is formed in parts, or MESOCARP A fleshy structure that is relatively solid PEANTS, ALGAE, AND FUNGI 55 . Peel Section It consists of the mesocarp and exocarp A sac that fills with juices of the fruit. It is soft and secretes oils (reserves of water and sugar) and acids. However, in the case of a nut, produced by the ovary walls its hard “peel” is its endocarp. are those that develop from the carpels of more than one flower, in a condensed FIG inflorescence. When they mature, they are Condensed fruit fleshy. An example is the fig. BLACKBERRY In this aggregate fruit, each berry is a fruit. AGGREGATE FRUIT SYCONIUM The fruit is made of The fruit axis dilates and numerous drupelets that forms a concave grow together. receptacle with the shape of a cup or bottle. Dry Fruits are simple fruits whose pericarps dry as they mature. They include follicles (magnolias), legumes (peanuts, fava beans, peas), pods (radishes), and the fruits of many other species, including the majority of cereals and the fruits of trees such as maple and ash. Most dehiscent fruits (fruits that break open to expose their seeds) are dry fruits. EXOCARP MESOCARP | 56 SEED PLANTS PLANTS, ALGAE, AND FUNGI 57 The ovuliferous scales generate a greenish gelatin containing the O-—— Cuticle female gametes. The gametes are freed when the sac that contains them 4 — Gametophyte opens. A forest fire can promote reproduction by causing the sac to open. : LEAFLET SCALE re effectively the most representative of the gymnosperms, a group of plants with seeds but not flowers. Through the fossil record it is known that conifers have existed for more than 390 million years. Their leaves are usually needle-shaped and perennial. They are woody plants that reproduce by means of seeds that contain tissues and an embryo that grows until it becomes an adult plant. Pine Cones The female cone contains ovules that are situated among its ovuliferous scales. The cones are woody and are usually found in the upper branches of the tree. The male cones are not woody and are usually found in the lower branches. When the ovules of a female cone are pollinated, the resulting seeds need about three years to mature inside the cone. Mature ovules are popularly called pine nuts. YOUNG LEAVES are covered by a protective capsule. re « = FEMALE CONE Small and light, it is likely to be pollinated as soon as it appears. LEAVES Scales Grouped in sets of two, they have elongated shapes. They carry out photosynthesis. Ovuliferous Scales The name “conifer” is sometimes erroneously believed to derive from pine trees' conical shape. In reality, there are other forms of coniferous plants. : AN oe — ae as Phe CONES ARAUC A PINE CEDAR CONES Araucariaceae ‘Pinaceae Taxodiaceae The male and female cones are generally not located on the same branch. Pine Nuts MATURE CONE Three years after the cone appears, its seeds are ready to disseminate. Pine nuts have long been used with honey and sugar to make pastries. When summer arrives, harvested pine cones are placed in the sun, which causes Good Wood The great majority of conifers are evergreens, although some, such as larches (tamarac), are deciduous. Conifers are the tallest and most long-lived trees, and they provide most of the wood used in industry. Most conifers form new shoots during the summer. They produce a resinous substance that protects them from freezing during winter. This adaptation permits vital nutrients to continue to circulate through their vascular systems, even in very cold weather. OR L TYPICAL AVERAGE January temperature across the extensive coniferous forests of the Northern Hemisphere. them to open. The pine nuts are then shaken loose from their cones and gathered. In traditional processing the pine nuts are soaked in water to remove their outer covering, which floats to the surface. The pine nuts are then run between two closely spaced mechanical rollers to crack their inner shells. Finally, the pine-nut meat is separated from the shell by hand. Rare and Useful Plants ow does a carnivorous plant hunt an insect, and what type of traps does it use? Why do many plants have thorns or secrete venomous juices, while others grow on the trunks of trees or on the side of rocks? The truth is that in order to survive in harsh environments, such as places that are extremely dry or cold or places with nutrient-poor soil or VENUS FLYTRAP The most common carnivorous plant. It is considered to be an active trap. herbivorous animals, plants have had to become very strong and develop a number of strategies for survival, which we will tell you about in this chapter. You will also find detailed information TRAPPERS HEALING OR HARMFUL? HANGING FROM OTHER PLANTS TOMATO FACTORIES DANGEROUS RELATIONSHIPS OLIVE OIL INFLORESCENCES FROM TREE TO PAPER BETWEEN WIND AND S. a HEALING PLANTS about where the paper that we use daily comes from, as well as learn about the production of tomatoes and olive oil, essential elements in the human diet. 60 RARE AND USEFUL PLANTS Main Menu: Insects CARNIVOROUS PLANTS peg There are distinct orders of dicotyledons ui that include carnivorous plants, such as Nepenthales, Sarraceniales, and Scrophulariales. These plants include the pitcher plant, sundews, and bladderworts. Trappers hese carnivorous plants are the most exotic in the entire plant kingdom. Their name is associated with their ability to capture insects and digest them. What do they get from these tiny animals? They get substances rich in nitrogen, which is usually absent from the soil where they grow. By eating insects, they are able to compensate for this nitrogen deficiency because the bodies of the arthropods they catch have amino acids and other nutrients that contain nitrogen. @ DIONEA MUSCIPULA UTRICULA VULGARIS Se CO | ) Flytraps are cultivated all over These aquatic carnivores are DROSERA CAPENSIS the world. They are grown in of the family Lentibulariaceae. Their ribbonlike leaves are slightly acidic soils, such as Their leaves are oval vesicles covered in sticky hairs. When bs te ae tsi ine oie peat. They flourish if they have that open and close to trap the leaves receive a stimulus, i many insects to consume. microscopic animals. they roll up and enclose the prey. Fh Trappers belong to the group of L.@ autotrophic organisms—that is, they can produce organic material to use as food from simple inorganic substances. Carnivorous plants live in environments poor in nutrients. The insects that they trap I) The exotically named Venus flytrap is a famous LLefl carnivorous plant. It produces a nectar that attracts flies. Reaching the leaf is usually fatal for the visiting insect because it sets off a series of physiological reactions in the plant that transform it into a deadly trap. Even larger The Terror of the Flies A Varied Diet A insects, such as the dragonfly, can be trapped by these carnivorous plants. Upon contact by its prey, a very specific eam eeu) tomas up toreslas a: ficientey. DARLINGTONIA SP. SARRACENIA SP. NEPENTHES MIRABILIS reaction takes place. Hairs detect the presence of the insect Unlike other carnivorous These plants are passive traps The cover of its leaf-pitcher and stimulate the closure of the leaves. However, a Venus pitcher plants in which the that use nectar to attract prevents water from entering. flytrap's leaves do not react to other types of contact, such pitcher (trap) is attached to a insects. Full of hairs, the These plants tend to have very as the impact of raindrops. stalk, this plant's pitcher pitchers retain the prey and showy colors that are a fatal grows directly from the soil. keep it from escaping. visual attraction to an insect. Dionaea muscipula Scientific name of the Venus flytrap. It is native to the eastern United States. The fold of the leaf stimulates the lateral thorns on its opposite sides to interlace like the fingers of two hands and create a type of cage. This process occurs in two tenths of a second, so the fly has little chance of avoiding being trapped. LATERAL THORNS are the hardened borders of the leaves, which have a thick cuticle. DETECTOR HAIRS *~., are sensitive to - = A, contact with insects. Falling into the Trap The fly positions itself above the trap and brushes the lateral thorns. This stimulus provokes the swollen cells of the hinge to lose water rapidly, which in turn causes the upper part of the leaf to close. If the insect is slow to LOWER PART react or move as the trap begins to close, it will OF THE LEAF be unable to escape. The cells have a great number of chloroplasts. Digestion In less than three minutes the trap has completely closed, and the digestion of the prey's tissue begins. Special glands located in the interior part of the upper leaf secrete acids and enzymes that chemically degrade the soft parts of the insect's body. When the leaf-trap reopens after a few weeks, the wind blows away the parts of the exoskeleton that were not digested. UPPER PART OF THE LEAF Reniform, or kidney- shaped, it has special cells arranged along a central hinge. ¥ Hm PARE AND USEFUL PLANTS, ALGAE, AND FUNGI 63 =~ \ : -- > feom, Other Plants —_ 2 i ie 4 Se ae : covered by hail ‘ their petals isials "grovel a very, interesting group of plants. They grow on living or dead tree. ~ trtinks, surfaces of roc ooks, and even utility poles and wires. Mosses, s \ es orchids, and br S are among the best-known epiphytes. Bromeliads are native to the ical and humid regions of the Western Hemisphere. BL ok : . Ae ll pp Theyeare of special interest because they exhibit evolutionary adaptations that \ Batsperse withthe wind! pico their ability to live without contact with soil. They therefore have novel ; ‘ strategies for obtain ing the water, minerals, carbon dioxide, and light that 1.5 inches (4 cm) in length and barely 0.15 inch (4 mm) in | Inflorescence the Form offa VA ca ok eee Ty ail , : y Leaves ‘ ; 35 to » y | they need to survive. © | 5 inches + (CAE) : = LEAVES \ | : Few and leathery. 7” hes . MEDUSA'S HEAD They are covered in wea ban) v4 Tillandsia caput meditsge a absorbent hairs. 2 m or caval to absorb Ss arbon dioxide and water loss g of he Special Leaves The best-known function of these water. In addition, at night they ind __ fix it into organic acids. This strategy dimin spiration during the day through gas exchange. When sunlight is availalaigup s. The plants are able to manufacture cai ™ ening their stomas, because they can use the Bakbon are took in during the night. © ARBON oroxife esis GUARD CELL A Di e opens only at enters during the night. A - Fad night. , Brofnel roo They are in charge aa Iki . \ = wv 4 hard leaves can capture water and nutrients of attaching the e See . eg ' . . . > i- from the ait Using asticky substance, they usually plant to the short or nonexistent. ~ nee le , - aa | me _ ~% ee : DAYLIGHT 3 # attach themselves to the branches of tree e ‘ a substrate, but they 3 They are herbs that - . ; . — : — they can have dccess to sunlight. These ti make’ do not absorb ' _ form rosette-shaped ae ie fe it possible for the them to subsistiin their natural i water or minerals. bulbs with their 2 s eal i environment. . - o / Fi ; ft MESOPHYLL ! [ CELLS aa ~ )(@) a a re Sy i - " ‘ <~ S nal J —— —>—— FLOWER ES aoe a PF, F aN b : ‘ It has the form of a tube, and its color ranges from red to iolet. There may be lp to 14 flowers in & Xe: Re) RH a sine . » FRO | THE NEW WORLD — YSAGOxS PRODUCTS ; Phosphoglycerid ; ~~ -The.common origin of the . eee torn. 7 , ; bromeliads is Mexico andthe 4 . ; ; glucose 1X. +. countries of Central and South’ © Mexico America. Today bromeliads are i . cultivated all over the world. - a? , -. = El Salvador eee es Guatemala 64 RARE AND USEFUL PLANTS uring their life cycle some plants become a true danger to other plants. There are groups of epiphytes that, in their quest to reach the soil and turn into trees, are capable of strangling and killing the tree on which they begin to grow. Additionally, some plants behave like parasites or semi-parasites. When the seeds of these plants germinate and their embryos have used up their energy reserves, they continue to grow because they obtain food from their hosts. Deadly Embrace PLANTS, ALGAE, AND FUNGI 65 It forms a genus, Cuscuta, of between 100 and 170 species of parasitic plants that are yellow, orange, or red. Like a Vampire Dodder, a plant of the Cuscuta genus, parasitizes its host by inserting itself into the host's vascular system and sucking out its nutrients. These parasites do not contain chlorophyll, and their leaves appear as small scales. Dodder germinates on the ground. It then grows around the stalk of a host plant and inserts small rootlike projections, called haustoria, into the stalk. As dodder grows, its many filamentous stems can look like spaghetti. Dodder kills herbaceous plants and debilitates woody ones. It is usually } considered a pest because of the economic losses it produces in fodder plants such as alfalfa. The genus Ficus has some lethal plants among its members. The epiphyte species of permits it to grow to a tree of great size that the genus, during its young stage, can strangulate and kill the tree on which it supports itself. In this branches. Its roots descend to the ground along the way it can reach the sunlight, which is typically scarce on the forest floor. For example, the strang fig (Ficus nymphaeifolia), which reaches 23 to 115 germinate on the branches of another tree. This feet (7-35 m) in height, produces seeds that can This type of infructescence is a pyriform receptacle, hollow and with an apical opening. In its internal walls small berries, commonly called seeds, are found. Mistletoe It has chlorophyll but no roots. It parasitizes the branches of a tree, zones and mountainous areas. The parasite t debilitates the host and makes it more disguising itself as just another branch. vulnerable to insect attacks. The host trees Mistletoe appears in places like semi- may be killed by the mistletoe or by diseases abandoned olive groves. It is native to humid —_ that attack the tree in its weakened state. ea/ The birds that eat mistletoe 9 ood fruits disperse the seeds, which are sticky and attach to . other trees. The evolution of plants, like that of living beings in general, has favored the rise of the secondary adaptations shown here. These adaptations have benefited certain species with notable characteristics, such as parasitism. The distinctive trait in these plants is the absence of conductive vessels. . » ’ unt develops an extended crown of long, strong > ie trunk of the host tree and fuse together, forming a . , ~ ler thick lattice. The distinct varieties of trees of the Ce et / 7 Ficus genus are characteristic of the rainforests of the intertropical zone. Many are of American origin. - Ay 4 Pa , ™ = x 7 = The stalk and the leaves of these plants do not have chlorophyll; in addition, their leaves are very small. Upon coming into contact with its host, the vine begins to develop haustoria. They will 2 grow and penetrate the stalk of the host to reach its vascular After germinating, dodder's stems climb and coil around the stalk of the host until the haustoria develop. tissues (xylem and phloem). The products of photosynthesis circulate through the phloem, where they are accessed by the haustoria. 66 RARE AND USEFUL PLANTS Inflorescences nflorescences consist of clusters of flowers on a branch or system of branches. They can be simple or complex. They are simple when a flower forms on the main axis in the axil of each bract. They are complex when a partial inflorescence is born in the axil of the bract that also carries bracteoles or prophylls. Simple inflorescences include racemes, spikes, panicles, catkins, corymbs, and heads. Complex inflorescences include double racemes, double spikes, and double umbels. @ FLOWERS can be fertilized only by insects. Types of Inflorescences Fl Most inflorescences correspond to branching in which (ef the axis grows in an indeterminate manner, and the flowers open in order from the base of the axis toward the apical meristem. There are also determinate inflorescences, in which the end of the axis bears the first flower, and flowers farthest from it open last. The flowers develop on DISK FLORETS Tubular and hermaphroditic —+— Modified j Leaf Sunflower Its inflorescence is a head made of two types of flowers: ae ap Pollen The daisy is a composite flower. As with the sunflower, what appears to be a single flower is, in fact, an inflorescence called a head. The head contains a large number of individual flowers, which are attached to a base called a receptacle. Bilobed Flowers with Internal and Stigma Anthers Ready to Immature Flower peripheral florets, which are \iJ Style rayed and unisexual, and disk | | M ty’ r Pollen 4 anor florets, which are tubular and \ f | W \ ¥ \ Tubular hermaphroditic. ‘ x ¥ { Corolla | Tubular i \ Ovary Corolla Ovary STIGMA The flowers form The flowers sit The pedicels All flowers are modified leaves with bright colors STYLE and attractive forms that carry out a very specific function: attracting pollinators. short stalks, called directly from the on a broad, are of varying pedicels, along an stem instead of shortened axis. lengths. y, unbranched axis. from pedicels. POLLEN ) \ > THE NUMBER OF V4 df | ip COMPLEX PLANT yo ON ly AD SPECIES THAT EXIST d\, ay PERIPHERAL FLORETS ANTHER IN THE WORLD aA Rayed and unisexual 3 Similar to a hanging A group of pedicels spike, its flowers are spread from the end entirely male or female. of the flower stalk. NECTAR *@ SS oO s PERIPHERAL o” CO FLorETS Ma - . a s , DOME FLAT LEAVES pIskK Broad, oval, opposed, EPIDERMIS FLORETS The flower stalks are It features a spike branched. with a fleshy axis and ou dioecious flowers. ae | Se PERIPHERAL a 19feet “™ (6m) ws serrated, and rough to the touch; asperous MEDULLA PEDUNCLE This form is more IS THE MAXIMUM HEIGHT OF common than the SUNFLOWERS. THEIR AVERAGE simple umbel. HEIGHT IS 10 FEET (3 M). - 68 RARE AND USEFUL PLANTS - PLANTS, ALGAE, AND FUNGI 69 Between n Wind ar and Sand | perro — = ENVIRONMENT EPIDERMIS One of the main characteristics of Almost poreless; he family Cactaceae has 300 genera and thousands of plant species that inhabit « pO a cactaceae is their ability to res Woids transpiration predominantly hot and dry places. Cacti are the best known of these species. - | See sort distenca They have spines that developed to minimize water loss and to provide ee vi * eneral id, which al protection against herbivores. Although cacti ppginatedt in the Western is rtd ihe 9 - iter, Hemisphere, they have spread to other parts of roduce waa ; . Een the lt sry. - surface in order to ebllect 7 | ttracting - ’ - dew. Their skin is covered nectar, which plays an important role in pollin insects and birds to their flowers. a wax, whi ACID ' a ety 1E} SM (CAM) ‘species : ‘ : . ; arbon dioxide i SM (C in ra) Distribu ia I) |. ‘ | OF PLANTS MAKE UP THE . ‘ : . P ‘ ; and stored as organic acids. The /ASCULAR " j Tr av I Cacti are found in deserts or ee FAMILVICACTACEAE. ey e “f avoid ‘CYLINDER very dry climates. They have also: gt : , ' oa a, 7 a Transport adapted to the dry and warm ti aa ‘ . Si : tissue climates of Australia, the . i v ' | . e is Bh Mediterranean, and East Africa. c . “SAND SOIL ws 2 eP- f , ; i" : f issue wrapping. ae. 4 é FLESHY ROOT Water storage. - GOLDEN B EL CACTUS ‘ Echinocactus | grusonil THEY RANGE FROM CANADA ALL THE WAY TO SOUTH AMERICA. « » ; a C} ‘Se + LEAVES taceae A P| . In place of simple and alter . . ‘én : ‘ % \ leaves, they have thorns, whic . Green| uised ‘Accordi \ event water loss through In the absence ofigreen + Wilum caclhe do nol They are curvy and — nspiration and are a cee ’ leaves, photosynthesis _have leaves, so the stems expand When they * against attacks from animal os“ takes place in erent perform their "agion. take in water. - 4 . _ ea t thee STEM ar e Iti i) culent and stores a large y quart of w _ chlorophyll and is’ photosynthes' stale >. —» —~ “~ = LW o.. ai ae 70 RARE AND USEFUL PLANTS oisonous plants are the type that no one wants in the garden. Although some plants have healing properties, others have substances that, when they enter the body, provoke noxious reactions that cause injury or even death. The most infamous of these plants is hemlock, which can also be used medicinally. The primary active components of poisonous plants are alkaloids. One of the most potent poisons from plants is ricin: 0.35 ounce (1 mg) is enough to kill a person. @ A Matter of Quantity Poison is a substance that produces illness or tissue lesions or that interrupts natural vital processes when it comes into contact with the human organism. Dosage is a key factor for a substance to act as a poison. The same substance that can produce death in an organism can, in smaller concentrations, act as a medicine and provide relief from certain types of suffering. Hemlock Water Dropwort Oenanthe crocata A plant belonging to the Umbelliferae family that is considered toxic because of its narcotic effects. However, it can also be medically prescribed to treat disorders such as epilepsy. Poison Hemlock Also known as Conium maculatum, this herbaceous plant belongs to the Umbelliferae family. It has a hollow, striated stem, with purple spots at its base. Poison Hemlock Conium maculatum enue Though poisonous, it has been used to calm strong to a height of pains and headaches. Poison hemlock has a 6.5 feet (2 m). characteristic offensive, urinelike odor. The active component in hemlock is coniine, an alkaloid that has neurotoxic effects. SOCRATES This philosopher died by drinking hemlock, a sentence imposed by the Greek court. BURNING Intoxication produces a dry mouth, dilated pupils (mydriasis), and nausea. Healing or Harmful? PARALYSIS The legs weaken, the muscles become paralyzed, and respiratory failure and asphyxia take place. DEATH The subject remains conscious until the moment of death. OF VEGETABLE SPECIES have alkaloids, compounds formed with nitrogen. Belladonna (Deadly Najjecshade) has ~ poisoi intestinal —"* Ikaloids that are considered is: hyoscine, scopolamine, and atropine. These substances affect the autonomous nervous system, which regulates breathing and cardiac rhythm. In medicine atropine in low dosages decreases the intensity of PLANTS, ALGAE, AND FUNGI 71 Other Poisonous Plants Several cultivated and wild plants have active ingredients that have various levels of toxicity for people and animals. The castor bean (Ricinus communis) contains ricin, and chewing two of its seeds can be fatal for a child. Digitalis contains substances that can cause a heart attack. Other common poisonous plants, such as oleanders, provoke diarrhea, nausea, and other symptoms if their flowers or fruits are eaten. Poison Ivy is a low vine that Poison Ivy Toxicodendron radicans reactions. The symptoms can » appear between one and three ~ days after having ~ touched —" HEIGHT Tt can grow to a height of 10 feet (3 m). IDENTIFICATION In winter the plant has no leaves but greenish white berries. In the summer the berries are green; they are red in the spring and can be yellow in early autumn. . > Belladonna Atropa belladonna WAR FLOWER aC It is said that ra ee a belladonna was used eight 0} ei feet (L5 m). to poison Mark Antony's troops during the Parthian wars. 72 RARE AND USEFUL PLANTS Tomato Factories he colonization of America brought about the discovery of an extraordinary variety of plants that have been used as food for a long time. An important example is the tomato, which is consumed globally. The cultivation of the tomato has reached marked levels of technological complexity that help address problems of infestation and adverse environmental conditions, as well as make it possible to grow tomatoes without using soil. In gardens, tomato plants are grown in accordance with their annual growth cycle, using adequate soil and pest control. Planting End of Winter Harvesting Beginning of Summer =) 5 FERTILIZER e provides the soil pounds with nutrients. (2.5 kg) IRRIGATION THE AVERAGE Every plant requires WEIGHT OF more than 0.5 TOMATOES A gallon (2 1) of PLANT CAN water every PRODUCE IN week as it ONE YEAR grows. GOOD NEIGHBORS Raising carrot and cabbage crops in the same garden aids the development of tomatoes. NETTLES discourage insects that destroy tomatoes. 2 feet okie 1p tee Water (0.7 m) as nutrients Absorption that are essential Are. P to the plant. Ree 3 feet (1m) -LOAM SOIL allows for the best development of tomatoes. STAKES help the plants to grow and remain upright. Tomato GREENHOUSE Seedlings grow protected from frosts. TRANSPLANT The seedling can *” be transplanted when it-has three or four real leaves. | © 2. LATE CROP. % -Transgenic tomatoes 3 > “mature more: slowly than heen modified, tomatoes that, have not Biotechnology is used to create plants that can be cultivated in soils which, under normal conditions, would not be adequate (for instance, soils with high salinity). Z (| \< > LD, Gj} i — a —] ~ C— 74 GENES - . The genes that J — have the desired : + characteristic are - J isolated. < { — SS" } DNA A a Genetic material — ‘N is chosen. \~——) \ —_— } ’ DRY CLIMATES These climates are not appropriate for planting tomatoes that are not modified, but they can be used to grow modified crops. » HIGH YIELD Ss The cultivated ‘ “fields are designed to make’maximum »juse ofithe available J . ——~ | = PLANTS, ALGAE, AND FUNGI 73 Planting Winter ORIGIN OF THE TOMATO Indigenous to Peru, it was domesticated in Mexico and Central America. Area of Origin Main Producers Harvesting Summer/Autumn a ~ )' BACTERIAL DNA y.. 4A ) The genes are inserted —- 2 into a bacterial plasmid. =) MULTIPLICATION » ? Bacteria are cultivated — agit to replicate the altered / & rs | ij plasmids. ~ 7 2 _ Ff TRANSFER LG, mn The genes are — » inserted into the \ . we J DNA of the plant. Ss y Water and nutrients are sufficient to grow tomatoes. For this reason, it is possible to grow crops in inert substrates without any soil. This technique is very useful for obtaining tomatoes in desert areas and for making them available for harvest at any time of the year. NEW FRUITS Plants are obtained that produce tomatoes with the desired characteristic. a 7 WATER HYDROPONIC TANK GREENHOUSES contains allow growers to control water with the light, water, nutrients, / an optimal and temperature of ® amount of cultivation. nutrients. space. " < \ Drip- Control Flow Valve The waterflows under the force Of Oravity: TIrrigating Pipes AS é y. ceca fs acre are desired. f PUMP SALINE SOILS LEVEL A Propels the Due to a shortage in High : water toward rain, the minerals concentration the irrigation remain in Level A and of salts y tank increase its salinity. , Troughs : y 25% 10% Lime Clay LEVEL B 40% 30% Clay Sand eo LEVEL B The clays retain water that soaks 64-77° F Green peach aphid ; Water has MOST COMMON INFESTATIONS S=: into the soil. (18-25° C) long been a. \ IS THE OPTIMAL : npOwte ‘ Red Spider Mite ty TEMPERATURE. . ~A SUBSTRATE a to Inert materials, such as gravel or sand, work as substrates. | — Sweet Potato Whitefly PA baal 74 RARE AND USEFUL PLANTS live Oil live oil has been a part of people's diet since antiquity, and even today it is one of the most popular oils because of its flavor and nutritious properties. Obtaining high-quality olive oil involves a chain of processes that begins at the tree and ends with the packaging of the end product. The quality begins in the fields and depends on a combination of soil, climate, oil variety, and cultivation and harvesting techniques. The remaining operations in the extraction process (transportation, storage, manufacturing, and extraction of the oil) are responsible for maintaining that quality. ~ j , J IS THE QUANTITY OF OLIVES NEEDED | 4@)" EXTRACT 0.5 GALLON (2L) OF OIL. 9 = COMPOSITION OF AN OLIVE 1.6% 5.8% Cellulose Protein 1.6% Ashes 50% Water 19% Sugars COLLECTION Harvesting is done by hitting the tree branches, either by 80 to 120 plants The fruits are carefully washed Plowed land, a moderate climate, IS THE OPTIMUM hand or mechanically, with water and then classified an altitude of up to 2,300 feet DENSITY PER so that the fruits fall according to their variety. ACRE (0.4 HA). to the ground. (700 m) above sea level, and up to 15 inches (40 cm) of rain per year sum up the conditions needed for the development of olive plants. Machines break open the fruit and mix it to create a homogenous paste. This must be done on the day the fruit is harvested. Traditionally, the paste that includes the entire olive is placed on a system of stacked discs and then compressed by a hydraulic press. bm NEW PLANTINGS are propagated through STONE WHEEL centrifugal machines. staking, layering, or Hammer systems FILTER RESIDUE the taking of are also used. Centrifugal can be used to cuttings. machines are obtain other oils. now used. STAINLESS STEEL HOPPER The residues are decanted at a temperature that is low, but not too low: oil crystallizes between OLIVE GROWTH STAGES (in the Southern Hemisphere) Flowers 4 t', ’ are distributed al ! f z ni hn in clusters of ce i, _ r 10 to 40. Growth The pit or drupe (endocardium) has hardened; the fruit grows. Green Olive The appearance of this color , tells us the 'D | Maturing fruit is edible. Purple spots begin to show. After a good crop, olive trees usually do not produce well the following year. long, and with a pointed apical meristem November Years August Epicardium lil September ah f =~ e 0 Pune Alternatin Opposed and lengthened, October 0.8 to 3 inches (2-8 cm) December ee oe turing process and on the properties of the product. The shorter the processing, the higher the quality. The oil obtained is separated from the other solid residues, impurities, and water. Since antiquity, this process has been carried out by decantation, which requires letting the oil sit undisturbed after it comes out of the press. Today it can also be carried out with vertical 32° and 36° F (0°-2° C). TYPES OF OIL Virgin Olive Oil The classification of oil is obtained by depends on the manufac- pressing, without any refining. It has less than 2 percent acidity. THE QUALITY OF THE OIL The oil that comes out of the first pressing from good quality fruits and with an acid level lower than 0.8 percent is called extra virgin. After this pressing the other levels of oil quality are obtained. Refined Olive Oil When this oil is refined, filtering soils are first added to purify it and then decanted. Its acid content is lower than that of virgin olive oil. PLANTS, ALGAE, AND FUNGI 75 Olive Oil can also be obtained by treating the residues with solvents. PRESS The press has a hydraulic mechanism that compresses the disks. DISKS The olive paste is placed between them to be pressed. Virgin olive oil has nonfat components that have to be preserved during storage and HOMOGENIZING The oil from several hoppers is mixed in the final stage to obtain a uniform product. THINGS TO AVOID Contact with Air Heat Exposure to Light packaging. It must be kept in a dark place at a stable temperature. BOTTLE This is how the oil is sent to the market. carried out in a plant, although sometimes it is done manually to ensure product quality. Glass, alu- minum, and plastic containers are used. It cannot be stored where it will be exposed to light, odors, or heat for extended periods. 76 RARE AND USEFUL PLANTS From Tree to Paper he basic process of manufacturing paper has not changed for 2,000 years, although technology today allows us to manufacture paper in quantities that are immeasurably greater than those of the papyrus produced in antiquity. Paper is manufactured from a slurry that contains cellulose from tree trunks. Today the paper industry consumes 4 billion tons of wood each year. Worldwide, one of the most commonly used trees for paper manufacture is the eucalyptus because of its quick growth, its capacity to resprout trees from the stumps of young trees, its wood's quality, its consistency, and its yield. A disadvantage of eucalyptus is that it requires more water for its growth than most other trees do. 21,000 gallons GROWTH RATE After approximately 10 years the growth (80 000 1) rate slows. The seedlings are obtained OF WATER ARE NEEDED in greenhouses and are DAILY TO IRRIGATE 1 WEEDING AND transplanted outdoors in ACRE (0.4 HA). FUMIGATION furrows in the soil. eliminate weeds and other plants. TRACTOR Opens the furrows in the STAKE Helps keep the plant upright SOIL Claylike and siliceous, with a pH between GREENHOUSE 5 and 7 Keeps seedlings between 69° and 80° F (21-27° C) SEEDLINGS are transplanted without using a hoe in order not to bend USES OF EUCALYPTUS GLOBULUS the plant. " eV . TONS OF WOOD IS Sy 7s , => CONSUMED EVERY YEAR. In Australia the flower is bi LEAVES most important As ' Their resin is for honey used in making production. perfumes. Wood Production by Hectare (1 ha = 2.5 ac) TRANSPLANT The plant is placed in the center of the hole by hand. Phloem Rings MEDULLA Large cells with soft- tissue walls FERTILIZED In furrows perpendicular to the incline of terrain to prevent soil erosion by the water Cambium BARK Disposed of during the manufacturing process ~~ Eucalyptus The timing of the clear-cutting will determine the financial success of the forestry venture. Replanting takes place right away. 10-13 years IS THE OPTIMAL AGE FOR CUTTING. TRANSPORTATION By trunks 8 feet (2.5 m) long CLEAR-CUTTING MACHINE Cuts cleanly without damaging the bark 50 cubic feet (15 cu m) IS THE AMOUNT OF WOOD PRODUCED PER HECTARE. The mixture of pulp, suspended in water, passes into a machine with screens that hold the fibers and allow the water to drain off. Sheets of paper are the result. Atons IS THE AMOUNT OF WOOD NEEDED TO PRODUCE ONE TON Heated rotating cylinders OF CELLULOSE. are used to press some of the remaining water from the paper. The final moisture content depends on About the type of paper being made. 80,000 gallons (300,000 1) OF WATER PER TON OF WOOD IS REQUIRED FOR THE PRODUCTION OF CARDBOARD, AND ABOUT 50,000 GALLONS OF WATER PER TON (200,000 L PER MT) OF WOOD ARE USED IN THE PRODUCTION OF PRINTING PAPER. The bark is separated from the trunk and eliminated from the industrial process. The debarked trunk is washed and cut into chips to facilitate handling. CHIPPING MACHINE The wood is cut into chips. WASHER Eliminates sand and impurities DEBARKER Machine with toothed cylinders PLANTS, ALGAE, AND FUNGI 77 The fibers are separated and suspended in water so they can be purified and bleached. Sa Bleaching is done with hydrogen = peroxide, oxygen, sodium hypochlorite, and other chemicals; glues, kaolin, talcum, plaster, and colorants can be added. DRYING ROLLERS leave the water content of the paper between 6 and 9 percent. The dried paper is rolled onto reels, and the rolls are cut. The paper can later be cut into various sizes for distribution and sale. 78 RARE AND USEFUL PLANTS ealing Plants mong nature's many gifts are herbs, plants, and flowers that, since antiquity, have been used from generation to generation for therapeutic purposes. Since humans began to care for their health, these plants have been a key source of nutrition and healing. Likewise, modern medicine uses compounds derived from or obtained from herbs, roots, stems, leaves, flowers, and seeds. @ Contributions from the New World FF“ Various plants were found to possess an impressive number of (Lefi substances that could be used for therapeutic purposes, as antibiotics, contraceptives, anesthetics, and antipyretics (fever reducers), among others. One example is quinine, used in the treatment of malaria, which was originally obtained from the bark of the quinine tree (Chinchona species), a tree native to South America. SHAMANS fulfill a central role in ancient communities as repositories of wisdom. Shamans seek to cure illnesses naturally, by means of herbs, roots, and other vegetable substances. Ayurvedic Medicine in India Fh The knowledge of life is the central principle of (Le ayurvedic medicine. The representation of the elements that form the Universe (fire, air, water, earth, and ether) in three humors (vata, pitta, and kapha) indicate a person's health and temperament. The energy centers, or chakras, of the body are stimulated through the intake of herbs. ECHINACEA SP. The medicinal plant most used by native North Americans. This plant stimulates the immune system. VATA (Wind) In excess, it influences the intestines, the colon, the ears, the bones, the hips, and the skin. DESCRIPTION It is associated with a melancholic personality, characteristic of dreamy and erratic people. THE THREE TYPES OF HUMORS Vata (wind) is associated with air and ether, pitta (anger) is associated with fire and water, and kapha (phlegm) is associated with earth and water. A holistic PITTA (Anger) It affects the liver, gallbladder, stomach, eyes, skin, and pancreas. DESCRIPTION It represents a choleric personality— people who are decisive, with a tendency to embrace new ideas. j INDUSTRY Echinacea is consumed around the world as a natural medicine. approach, Ayurvedic medicine provides integrated treatments that link physical care and meditation with nutrition. KAPHA (Phlegm) In excess, it can affect the throat, airways (upper and lower), and joints. DESCRIPTION It is associated with tranquility and serenity, typical characteristics of persons with a naturally sensitive attitude. Chinese Medicine fe The philosophy behind (Lag traditional Chinese medicine involves a qualitatively different approach from that of Western medicine. It is based on respect for the interaction between the mind, the body, energy, and the environment. Its basic principles include the five elements and the yin and yang. It is based on the concept of chi, the vital energy in equilibrium in people's bodies. Chi regulates lost equilibrium. / It is under the influence of the opposing forces of yin (negative energy) and yang (positive energy). Traditional Chinese medicine includes herbal therapies, nutrition, physical exercise, meditation, acupuncture, and healing massages. Bitter Herbs Their action is focused on the heart and the small intestine. They lower fevers and sensations of heat, and they redirect vital energy, or chi. TAI CHI OR TAI JI is the generating principle of all things, according to Chinese philosophy. It is represented with the yin and the yang, which together make up the Taoist symbol known as the “Taijitu diagram.” In order to maintain good health, it is necessary to balance yin and yang. YIN Motherwort (Leonurus cardiaca), Elecampane (Inula helenium), English lavender (Lavandula angustifolia) YANG Hawthorn (Crataegus oxyacantha), sour orange (Citrus aurantium), meadowsweet (Filipendula ulmaria) YIN Garden angelica (Angelica archangelica), Italian cyprus (Cupressus sempervirens), common hop (Humulus /upulus), rosemary (Rosmarinus officinalis) YANG Greater plantain (Plantago major), dandelion (Taraxacum officinale), marjoram (Origanum majorana) Salty Herbs are refreshing; they soften hard spots, lubricate the intestines, and promote their emptying. They reduce constipation, kidney stones, gout, etc. Sour Herbs basically act on the liver a/ and the gallbladder. They activate bilious secretions. YIN Heather (Ca/luna vulgaris), blessed milk thistle (Silybum marianum), ginseng (Panax ginseng) Ginger YANG Shepherd's purse (Capsella bursa-pastoris), red sandwort (Arenaria rubra), rough bindweed (Smilax aspera) Corn poppy (Papaver bluegum (Eucalyptus PLANTS, ALGAE, AND FUNGI 79 YANG is considered male, bright, and hot. is considered female, dark, and cold. Chinese tradition adds metal to the elements of the Greek model (water, fire, air, and earth). The interaction among all these elements must be kept in equilibrium, with no single element predominating over the others. Should an imbalance occur, an illness might appear. THE THEORY OF THE FIVE ELEMENTS Sweet Herbs are tonic and nutritious. They harmonize with other herbs, relieve pain, and stop the progression of severe illnesses. YIN Chamomile (Matricaria chamomilla), cinnamon (Cinnamomum zeylanicum), yellow gentian (Gentiana /utea), Minor centaury (Centaurium umbellatum) YANG Lemon (Citrus limonum), common juniper (Juniperus communis), lemon balm (Melissa officinalis), cranberry (Vaccinium myrtillus), olive (Olea europaea) Spicy Herbs induce sweating, blood circulation, and chi, or vital energy. They are generally used for superficial disorders. iy YIN¢ ~% Ginger (Zingiber officinale), peppermint (Mentha piperita), thyme (Thymus vulgaris) ~' YANG rhoeas), Tasmanian globulus), common borage (Borago officinalis) Fungi or nearly a billion years the ability of fungi to break down substances has been important to life on Earth. These life- forms break down carbon compounds and return carbon and other elements to the environment to be used by other organisms. They interact with roots, enabling them to better absorb water and mineral AMANITA MUSCARIA The quintessential toadstool has unpleasant psychoactive effects. Depending on the dose, they range from dizziness, muscle cramps, and vomiting to amnesia. ANOTHER WORLD THE DIET OF FUNGI POISON IN THE KINGDOM PATHOGENS DESTROYING TO BUILD nutrients. For many years fungi were they can cause sickness in humans, classified within the plant kingdom. animals, or plants. However, unlike plants, they cannot produce their own food. Many are parasites. Some fungi are pathogens— 82 FUNGI or many years fungi were classified within the plant kingdom. However, unlike plants, they are heterotrophic—unable to produce their own food. Some fungi live independently, whereas others are parasitic. Like animals, they use glycogen for storing reserves of energy, and their cell walls are made of chitin, the substance from which insects’ outer shells are made. Black An h r \ \ I ] St ey Bread Mold ot e O d at 4 S\\ WE This phylum, which includes mushrooms, is the most RiEEps . : { SS ) | Se familiar of the fungi. The mushroom's reproductive nigricans mE = = —— ae ” ™ S ———— organ is its cap. Its branches grow underground or Fungi: A Peculiar Kingdom Fungi can develop in all sorts of environments, especially damp and poorly lit places, up to elevations of 13,000 feet (4,000 m). They are divided into four large phyla, in addition to a group of fungi called “imperfect” because they generally do not reproduce sexually. At present, 15,000 species of fungi fall into this category. DNA analysis has recently reclassified them as Deuteromycetes. —_ into some other organic substrate. Basidia CAPPED MUSHROOMS With its 4.5 inches 120 ¢ mm) protects the recognizable shape, the mushroom's cap basidia, which Mycelium ae Chanterelle Mushroom Cantharellus cibarius produce spores. MANY LITTLE POUCHES Its spores are formed when two gametes of Sporangiophore opposite sexes fuse. It can also reproduce — asexually, when the sporangium is a phylum of land-growing Sporangium fungi that reproduce sexually with zygosporangia, diploid cells that do not break their cell walls 0.01 inch until conditions are right for (0.3 mm) germinating. They also reproduce asexually. Most zygomycetes live in the soil and feed on plants or dead animal matter. Some live as Spores VARIETY There are great anatomical differences are the only fungi that, at some point in their lives, have mobile cells—male and | HAVE BEEN IDENTIFIED IN THE female gametes, which they release into 9.) inch among the FUNGI KINGDOM. THERE ARE parasites on plants, insects, or Mycelu breaks and water in order to reproduce. They livein (3 sins) Chytridiomycetes. In BELIEVED TO BE APPROXIMATELY small land animals. releases spores. water or on land, feeding on dead the same reproductive 1,500,000 SPECIES. material or living as parasites on other | phase they can - \ living organisms. Their cell walls are | produce haploid and THE TEMPERATURE RANGE IN ; made of chitin. Thallus diploid spores. WHICH MOST FUNGI CAN LIVE IN HUMID CLIMATES abe Mycelium Ascus with , ee 2 Ascospores . At maturity the asci ‘ i z burst. The explosion is the phylum with the most species releases theli sexual in the Fungi kingdom. It includes spores (ascospores) on ms V yeasts and powdery mildews, many into thetair: are also called “imperfect fungi” because they are \ common black and yellow-green not known to have a form of sexual reproduction. ’ molds, morels, and truffles. Its Many live as parasites on plants, animals, or ~ hyphae are partitioned into sections. humans, causing ringworm or mycosis on the skin. Others—such as Penicillium, which produces penicillin, and Cycfospora—have great medicinal and commercial value. Their asexual spores (conidia) are » very small and are formed at the Ascus ends of special hyphae. | 0.6 inch ehypha (15 mm) — ) | _ Conidiophores Ascocarp B Hyphae Ergot Slime Mold 0.01 inch Claviceps Physarum (0.3 mm) Pathogenic Mold purpurea polycephalum Aspergillus niger —— Mycelium OF UNKNOWN SEX In Deuteromycetes, conidia are tiny spores that function asexually. They are contained in structures called conidiophores. 84 FUNGI The Diet of Fungi ungi do not ingest their food like animals. On the contrary, they absorb it after breaking it down into small molecules. Most of them feed on dead organic material. Other fungi are parasites, which feed on living hosts, or predators, which live off the — prey they trap. Many others establish relationships of ; mutual benefit with algae, bacteria, or plants and * receive organic compounds from them. @ CAP Besides being easy to spot, the cap is the fertile part of basidiomycetes; it contains spores. Chemical Transformation We The organic or inorganic substances that fungi (Lagi feed on are absorbed directly from the environment. Fungi first secrete digestive enzymes onto the food source. This causes a chemical transformation that results in simpler, more easily assimilated compounds. Basidiomycetes are classified according to their diet. For example, they colonize different parts of a tree depending on the nutrients they require. Fungi of the genus Amanita, including the poisonous A. muscaria shown here, have the well- PLANTS, ALGAE, AND FUNGI 85 CUTICLE GILLS ' ~ ’ ‘, = ’ i. The skin, or membrane, that covers the cap, are the structures that " a or pileus, is called the cuticle. It can have a variety of colors and textures, such as velvety, hairy, scaly, threadlike, fibrous, fuzzy, smooth, dry, or slimy. produce spores. Their shape varies according to the species. HYMENIUM » tl It is located on the J ~ underside of the cap. It ell contains very fine tissues ~~ that produce spores. Its structure can consist of tubes, wrinkles, hairlike projections, or even needles. >» PARASITES Fungi such as Ceratocystis ulmi and Agrocybe aegerita (shaded areas on the leaf) live at the expense of other plants, which they can even kill. Others live parasitically off animals. known mushroom shape with a mushroom cap. MYCELIUM When a mushroom spore finds the right medium, it begins to generate a network of hyphae, branching filaments that extend into the surrounding medium. This mass of hyphae is called a mycelium. A mushroom forms when threads of the mycelium are compacted and grow upward to create a fruiting body. SAPROBES \ There is no organic FRUITING BODY \y material that cannot be Spore-_ Heer broken down by this type stipe ni generates new : of fungus. They actually spores. live on the dead parts of other plants, so they cause no harm to the host. Hyphae VEGETATIVE SYMBIOTIC x die nel While feeding off the plant, branches of they help it to obtain water eee hyphae | ; and mineral salts more underground. > ’ easily from the soil. Each ; | | b species has its own i characteristics. } RING Also known as Growth Hyphae the veil, it At birth the fruiting body of the formation protects part of species Amanita muscaria looks like a the hymenium In white egg. It grows and opens slowly young fungi. as the mushroom's body unfolds. As it grows the cap first appears completely closed. During the next several days it opens like an umbrella and acquires its color. STEM Cylindrical in shape, it holds up the cap and reveals important information for identifying the species. Did You Know? other chemical disasters. VOLVA The volva is made of the remains of the early rings that have fallen off. It differs from species to species. Strobilurus esculentus lives on the cones of various pine trees. BASIDIA are fine structures that contain groups of four cells, which are able to reproduce. Development of the fruit-bearing body Spore formation by fertilization "4 Release of spores Fungi can break down an impressive variety of Lei substances. For example, a number of species can digest petroleum, and others can digest plastic. Fungi also provided the first known antibiotic, penicillin. They are now a basic source of many useful medical compounds. Scientists are studying the possibility of using petroleum-digesting fungi to clean up oil spills and Basidium LIFE CYCLE OF A FUNGUS Fungi produce spores during sexual or asexual reproduction. Spores serve to transport the fungus to new places, and some help the fungus to survive adverse conditions. HALLUCINOGENIC MUSHROOM Psilocybin aztecorum 86 FUNGI Poison in the Kingdom poisonous fungus is one that, when ingested, causes toxic effects. In terms of its effects on the eater, the toxicity can vary according to the species and to the amount ingested. At times poisoning is not caused by eating fungi but by eating foods, such as cereal products, that have been contaminated by a fungus. Rye, and to a lesser extent oats, barley, and wheat, can host toxic fungi that produce dangerous mycotoxins. These mycotoxins can cause hallucinations, convulsions, and very severe damage in the tissues of human organs. @ ERGOTISM (ST. ANTHONY'S FIRE) & ae Attack on Rye Ergot (Claviceps purpurea) is a parasite of rye and produces alkaloid mycotoxins—ergocristine, ergometrine, ergotamine, and ergocryptine. When barley with ergot is e processed for use in food, the mycotoxins can be absorbed when . eaten. All these toxic substances can act Fruit directly on nerve receptors and cause The perithecium is a type of the constriction of blood vessels. fruiting, or reproductive, body in ascomycetes. It is a type of closed ascocarp with a pore at the top. The asci are inside the perithecium. Spores The asci are sac-shaped cells that contain spores called ascospores. In general, they grow in groups of eight and are light enough to be scattered into the air. Release Within the enclosing structures a stroma, or compact somatic body, is formed. Inside it reproductive growths develop, which contain a large number of perithecia. Ergotism Ergotism, or St. Anthony's Fire, is a condition caused by eating products such as rye bread that have been contaminated with alkaloids produced by Claviceps purpurea fungi, or ergot. The alkaloids typically affect the nervous system and reduce blood circulation in the extremities, which produces the burning sensation in the limbs that is one of the condition's notable symptoms. INGESTION The main means of intake of the mycotoxins is through products manufactured with flour. NERVOUS SYSTEM Lethargy, drowsiness, and more severe conditions, such as convulsions, hallucinations, and blindness, are symptoms caused by the effects of ergot on the nervous system. EXTREMITIES Ergotamine alkaloids cause the constriction of blood vessels, ERGOT leading to gangrene. Claviceps purpurea Parasites Ascospores of sexual origin or asexual conidia develop as parasites in the ovary of the rye flower. They cause the death of its tissues and form sclerotia. In some languages ergot's name is — related to the word for “horn” because of sclero’ hornlike shape. es wheat bread t part of the common diet. and drank beer prepared from ade them susceptible to ingesting oxins from Claviceps purpurea. Thus, the largest number of cases of ergotism occurred during this time. Today preventative controls in the production of bread and related products from rye and other cereals have greatly reduced instances of ergotism. PLANTS, ALGAE, AND FUNGI 87 Poisonous Mushrooms Eating the fruiting bodies of some species can be very dangerous if it is not clearly known which are edible and which are poisonous. There is no sure method for determining the difference. However, it is known for certain that some species—such as certain DESTROYING species of the genera Amanita, Macrolepiota, and ANGEL ; Boletus—are poisonous. Amanita virosa Pret Deadly This mushroom is toxic to the liver. It grows from spring to fall, often in sandy, acidic soil in woodlands and mountainous regions. Its cap is white and 2 to 5 inches (5-12 cm) in diameter. Its stem and gills are also white, and the gills may appear detached from the stem. The base of the stem has a cuplike volva, but it may be buried or otherwise not visible. But Insecticide The fly agaric's name is thought to come from its natural fly-killing properties. Its cap is typically red and 6 to 8 inches (15-20 cm) in diameter. It may be covered with white or yellow warts, but they are absent in some varieties. The stem is thicker at the base, which looks cottony. It also has a large white ring that looks like a skirt. It grows in summer and fall in coniferous and deciduous forests. If eaten, it causes gastrointestinal and psychotropic symptoms. FLY AGARIC Amanita muscaria 88 FUNGI PLANTS, ALGAE, AND FUNGI 89 Pathogens Aspergillum Aspergillus are “imperfect” fungi, or deuteromycetes, that are characterized by having reproductive structures called conidial heads. The head is composed of a vesicle that is surrounded by a crown of phialides shaped like a bottle, at the end of which spore chains form. ungi that are able to cause illnesses in people, animals, or plants are called pathogens. The nocive, or toxic, substances that these organisms produce have negative effects on people and cause significant damage to agriculture. One reason these pathogens are so dangerous is their high tolerance to great variations in temperature, humidity, and pH. Aspergillus is a genus of fungi whose members create substances that can be highly toxic. e CONIDIAL HEAD Has a greenish mycellium and short and abundant conidiophores. CONIDIA CHAIN Conidia are asexual spores that form at the ends of the hyphae. In this case they group together in chains. CONIDIA are so small that they spread through the air without any 990 = THE NUMBER OF ASPERGILLUS SPECIES. THEY PHIALIDES are cells from which conidia are HAVE BEEN CLASSIFIED INTO litte 18 GROUPS. MOST OF THESE SPECIES ARE ASSOCIATED WITH HUMAN ILLNESSES, SUCH AS ASPERGILLOSIS. =e ee “3 BREAD MOLD Aspergillus niger mycellium of the The fruiting body is yellowish fruiting, or white, but it will turn black when reproductive, body in which asexual spores, or conidia, are formed the conidia mature. Its conidiophores are large and have phialides that cover all its conidial head vesicle. They can be found in mold-covered food. ALLERGENICS Aspergillus flavus OPPORTUNISTIC Aspergillus fumigatus This species is associated with allergic reactions in people with a genetic predisposition to this allergy. They also cause the contamination of seeds, such as peanuts. They produce secondary metabolites, called micotoxins, that are very toxic. This pathogen can affect people whose immune systems are weakened. It can cause serious invasive diseases. SAPROBIA Aspergillus sp. In addition to the SPECIES ARE ASSOCIATED pathogen species, there are WITH HUMAN ILLNESSES. some species of Aspergillus ASPERGILLUS FUMIGATUS, that decompose the organic matter of dead insects, thus incorporating nutrients into the soil. A. FLAVUS, A. NIGER, AND A. TERREUS ARE EXAMPLES. 90 FUNGI Destroying to Build easts, like other fungi, decompose organic material. This capacity can be beneficial, and, in fact, human beings have developed yeast products for home and industrial use, such as bread, baked goods, and alcoholic beverages, that attest to its usefulness. Beer manufacturing can be understood by analyzing how yeasts feed and reproduce and learning what they require in order to be productive. Precious Gems Yeast from the genus Sacchromyces cerevisiae can reproduce both > asexually and sexually. If the concentration of oxygen is adequate, the yeasts will reproduce sexually, but if oxygen levels are drastically reduced, then gemation will take place instead. Gemation is a type of asexual proliferation that produces child cells that split off from the mother cell. 2 SPORES ' Starting with barley grain, this process produces water, ethyl alcohol, and a A sac called an ascueis large quantity of CO,, the gas that forms the bubbles typically found in beer. formed that contains ascospores of yeast. MEIOSIS A diploid cell forms four haploid cells. Under anaerobic conditions yeasts can obtain energy and produce alcohol. By means of the alcoholic fermentation process they obtain energy from pyruvic acid, a product of the breakdown of glucose by glucolysis. In this process CO, is also produced and accumulated, as is ethyl alcohol. The carbon dioxide will be present in the final product: the beer. GROW AND MULTIPLY As long as they have adequate nutrients, yeasts will continuously repeat their reproductive life cycle. WINE YEAST Yeast is also used to produce wine. In wine production, however, the CO, that is produced is eliminated. (4 MULTIPLICATION A large number of cells are produced in this stage. Homemade Bread Yeast Saccharomyces ellipsoideus expand, causing the bread to rise. ®. Yeast Saccharomyces cerevisiae mitosis. 4 UNION OF THE ASCOSPORES The haploid cells fuse and forma new diploid cell. 5 GEMATION Under the right conditions the diploid cells begin to reproduce asexually. oer Many products are made with yeasts, and one of the most important is bread. In the case of bread, yeasts feed off the carbohydrates present in flour. Bread products, unlike alcoholic beverages, need to have oxygen available for the yeast to grow. The fungi release carbon dioxide as they quickly consume the nutrients. The bubbles of carbon dioxide make the dough GEMATION Buds, or gems, which will become independent in a new cell, are formed in different parts of a yeast. RELEASE OF THE ASCOSPORES The opening of the ascus releases the spores, which then reproduce by THE MAXIMUM PERCENTAGE OF ALCOHOL THAT YEAST WILL TOLERATE -— NUCLEUS Tt coordinates all the cell's activities. Its duplication is vital in making each child cell the same as its progenitor cell: ENZYME PRODUCTION Internal membrane systems produce the enzymes that regulate the production of alcohol and carbon dioxide in the cells. PLANTS, ALGAE, AND FUNGI 91 -—— MITOCHONDRIA These subcellular structures become very active when the cell is in an environment rich in oxygen. -— CELL MEMBRANE The cell membrane controls what enters or exits the Cell. It acts as a selective filter. VACUOLE This organelle contains water and minerals that are used in the cell's metabolism. The concentration of these nutrients helps regulate the activity of the cell. 92 GLOSSARY Adventitious Root Root that appears in unusual places, such as on the stem Algae Organisms of the Protist kingdom, at one time considered plants, but without roots, stems, or leaves. They live in water or in humid areas. They can be pluricellular or unicellular. Allele Gene variant that encodes a trait. One diploid cell contains one allele from each parent for each characteristic. Anaerobic Reaction, or series of reactions, that does not require oxygen Analogy Similarity produced in similar environments through the adaptation of species that do not have a common ancestor Angiosperms From the Greek angion (recipient) and sperm (seed). Plants with flowers whose seeds are contained in structures that develop into fruits. Anther Structure of the stamen composed of two locules and four pollen sacs Asexual Reproduction Process through which a single progenitor generates descendants identical to itself ATP Adenosine triphosphate. Molecule produced by the mitochondria, which functions as the main source of energy for cells. Berry Simple fleshy fruit formed by one or more carpels Biome Ecosystem that occupies a large area and is characterized by specific types of vegetation Bryophytes Group of small flowerless plants that comprise the hepaticae, anthocerotae, and mosses Bulb Modified structure of the stem in which starch accumulates in thickened leaves Cambium Interior part of the root and the stem of a plant that forms xylem on one side and phloem on the other. It makes stems grow thicker. Carpel Female part that bears the ovules of a flower. The grouping of carpels forms the gynoecium. Cell Smallest vital unit of an organism. Plant cells have a wall that is more or less rigid. Cellular Membrane Flexible cover of all living cells. It contains cytoplasm and regulates the exchange of water and gases with the exterior. Cellular Respiration Aerobic processes that extract energy from food, including glycolysis, oxidative phosphorylation, and the Krebs cycle. Eukaryote cells carry out these processes in the cytoplasm and the mitochondria. Cellulose Fibrous carbohydrate that a plant produces as part of its structural material. Main component of the cell wall. Chitin Polysaccharide that contains nitrogen. It is present in the cell walls of mushrooms. Chlorophyll Pigment contained in the chloroplasts of plant cells. It captures the energy of light during photosynthesis. Chloroplast Microscopic sac, located on the inside of green- plant cells, where the chemical processes of photosynthesis take place Cilium Short external appendage that propels a cell and is composed of microtubules Class Taxonomic group superior to order and inferior to phylum. For example, the Charophyceae class includes green algae related to higher plants. Cotyledon First leaf of flowering plants, found on the inside of the seed. Some store food and remain buried while the plant germinates. Cytoplasm Compartment of the cells of eukaryotes, marked by the cellular membrane and the membranes of the organelles of the cell Deciduous Describes a plant that loses all its leaves in specific seasons of the year Dicotyledon Flowering plant whose seed has two cotyledons Diploid Cell with two complete sets of chromosomes DNA Deoxyribonucleic acid. Double helix molecule with codified genetic information. Drupe Simple fleshy fruit that develops from hypogynous flowers—flowers in which the ovary lies above the point where the other flower parts are attached. It has one seed in its interior. Examples include the olive, peach, and almond. Ecosystem Grouping of the organisms of a community and the nonbiological components associated with their environment Embryo Product of an egg cell fertilized by a sperm cell; it can develop until it constitutes an adult organism. Endodermis Layer of specialized cells, composed of thicker cells; in young roots it is found between the bark and the vascular tissues. Endoplasmic Reticulum Network of membranes connected through the cytoplasm that serves as a site of synthesis and assembly for the cell to form its proteins Enzyme Protein that helps to regulate the chemical processes in a cell Epidermis The most external cellular layers of stems and leaves Epiphyte Plant that grows and supports itself on the surface of another plant but does not take water or nutrients from it Family Taxonomic category, inferior to order, that groups the genera Fertilization Fusion of the special reproductive cells (contained in the pollen and in the ovules) in order to give rise to a new plant Filament Structure, in the form of a thread, that forms the support of a flower's stamen Fruit Ovary or group of ovaries of a flower, transformed and mature. It contains the seeds. Gametangium Unicellular or multicellular structure from which the gametes, or reproductive sexual cells, originate Gene Unit of information of a chromosome. Sequence of nucleotides in the DNA molecule that carries out a specific function. Genetic Drift Phenomenon produced in small populations that demonstrates that the frequency of alleles can vary by chance or throughout generations PLANTS, ALGAE, AND FUNGI 93 Germination Process in which a plant begins to grow from a seed or a spore Gymnosperm Plants with seeds that are not sealed in an ovary. Examples are conifers (pine, fir, larch, cypress). Gynoecium Grouping of carpels of a flower that make up the female sexual organ of angiosperms Haploid From the Greek hap/ous, singular: cell with one set of chromosomes, unlike diploids. It is characteristic of the gametes, the gametophytes, and some mushrooms. Haustoria Vessels with which some parasitic plants penetrate other species in order to feed themselves from substances photosynthesized by the host Host Plant from which another organism (parasite) obtains food or shelter Hyphae Interwoven filaments that form the mycelium of fungi Inflorescence Groupings of flowers in a specific form on a peduncle Kingdom Taxonomic group superior to a phylum and inferior to a domain, such as the kingdom Plantae 94 GLOSSARY PLANTS, ALGAE, AND FUNGI 95 Legume Simple fruit of some species that come from one carpel divided in two. Examples are garbanzos and peas. Lichen The symbiotic union of a fungus and an alga; the food is synthesized by the algae and used by the fungus, which offers the alga a moist and protected habitat in which to live. Lignin A substance related to cellulose that helps form the woody parts of plants Ligula Petal developed on the border of the head of certain composite flowers. Its color may be blue or yellow, or more commonly, white, as in the case of daisies. Macronutrient Essential chemical element that a plant needs in relatively large quantities and that is involved in its vital processes. Examples are nitrogen and phosphorus. Medulla Basic tissue formed inside the vascular tissue Meiosis Type of cellular division in which two successive divisions of the diploid nucleus of a cell give rise to four haploid nuclei. As a result, gametes or spores are produced. Meristem Region of tissue consisting of cells that produce other cells through cellular division Mitochondria Organelle delimited by a double membrane. In it, the final stage of aerobic respiration is carried out, in which ATP is obtained from the decomposition of sugars. Mitosis Nuclear division that forms two descendant nuclei identical to the progenitor Molecular Clock Marker used to calculate the evolutionary distance between two species. It is evaluated by comparing the gradual accumulation of differences in amino acids among the proteins of each species. Monocotyledons Flowering plants with only one cotyledon. Examples are the onion, orchid, and palm. Mycelium Interwoven mass of hyphae of a fungus Nectar Sweet liquid, produced by flowers and some leaves, that attracts insects and birds, which serve as pollinating agents Node Axillary bud, the part of the stem of a plant where one or more leaves appear Nucellus Structure located inside plants with seeds, where the embryonic sac is developed Nucleic Acid A molecule that carries genetic information about the cell Nucleus The part of the cell that contains the DNA, which carries the genetic material Osmosis The movement of a liquid through a selectively permeable membrane Ovary The part of a flower consisting of one or more carpels and containing the ovules. Fertilized, it will form all or part of the fruit. Ovule The part of the ovary in flowering plants that contains the female sexual cells. After fertilization it transforms into seed. Parasite An organism that lives at the expense of another, from which it obtains its nutrients Petal Modified leaves that form the corolla Phloem Vessels that conduct the sap throughout the entire plant Photorespiration Process through which some plants close their stomas in order to avoid dehydration Photosynthesis Process through which the energy of light is used to produce carbohydrates from carbon dioxide and water Phytoplankton Group of free-living microscopic aquatic organisms with the capacity to carry out photosynthesis Pollen Fine powder of plants with seeds whose grains contain the male sexual cells Pollination Passage of pollen from the male organ of a flower to the female organ of the same flower or another Polymer Macromolecule formed from repeated structural units called monomers Polypeptide Polymer of amino acids; examples are proteins. Protein Macromolecule composed of one or more chains of amino acids. They define the physical characteristics of an organism and regulate its chemical reactions when they act as enzymes. Protoplast Plant cell without a cell wall Rhizoids Cellular formation or filament in the form of a thin and branching tube that attaches mosses to the soil Rhizome Horizontal subterranean stem Ribosome Organelle located in the cytoplasm that directs the formation of proteins on the basis of information given by the nucleic acids Root Organ that fixes a plant to the soil and absorbs water and minerals from it Sap Watery liquid that contains the products of photosynthesis and is transported by the phloem Seed Structure consisting of the embryo of a plant, a reserve of food called the endosperm, and a protective cover called the testa Seedling First sprouting of the embryo of a seed, formed by a short stem and a pair of young leaves Sepal Modified leaf that forms the outer covering of a flower that protects the bud before it opens Sexual Reproduction Reproduction based on the fertilization of a female cell by a male cell; it produces descendants different from both progenitors. Sori Set of sporangia found on the underside of fern leaves Spore Reproductive structure formed by one cell, capable of originating a new organism without fusing with another cell Sporangia Structure in which spores are formed Stamen Element of the male reproductive apparatus of a flower that carries pollen. It is formed by a filament that supports two pollen sacs on its upper part. Stem Part of a plant that holds up the leaves or the reproductive structures Stigma Upper part of the female reproductive apparatus of a flower. The receptor of pollen, it connects with the ovary. Storage organ Part of a plant that consumes sugars or functions to store sugars. Examples are stems, roots, and fruit. Thallus Plantlike body of brown seaweed. Also the long, rigid part that holds up the reproductive structures of some fungi. Thylakoid Small, flat sac that makes up part of the internal membrane of a chloroplast. Site where solar energy is transformed into chemical energy as part of the process of photosynthesis. Tissue Group of identical cells with the same function Tuber Modified, thickened underground stem where the plant accumulates reserves of food substances Vascular Describes plants with a complex structure and highly organized cells for transporting water and nutrients to all parts of the plant Xerophyte Plant that grows in deserts and other dry environments Xylem Part of a plant's vascular system. It transports water and minerals from the roots to the rest of the plant. 96 INDEX PLANTS, ALGAE, AND FUNGI 97 Index A Acer pseudoplatanus L.: See sycamore maple Acer sp.: See maple acorn, 15 aerenchyma, 10 agar, 26 Agaricus bisporus: See white mushroom aggregate fruit, 55 air pollution, moss, 30 alcohol, 90-91 algae, 18-27 classification, 8 colors, 8 lichens, 28-29 photosynthesis, 16 algin, 26 allergenic fungus, 88 amphibious plant, 11 angiosperm classification, 9 known species, 51 wood, 45 See also flower; inflorescence anthesis, 38 aphid, green peach (Myzus persicae), tomatoes, 72 apple, 54 apical bud, 47 aquatic plant, 10-11 carnivorous plants, 61 stems, 42 Araucaria, 56 arrowhead (Sagittaria sagittifolia), 11 artichoke thistle (Cynara cardunculus), 42-43 Ascomycota (Ascomycetes), 83 Aspergillus flavus, 88 Aspergillus Niger: See bread mold Atropa belladonna: See belladonna ayurvedic medicine, 78 B bark tree anatomy, 15 wood, 44-45 Basidiomycota (Basidiomycetes), 83 bee orchid, 52-53 pollination, 38, 52-53 beech (Fagus sp.), 13 beer manufacturing, yeast, 90, 91 belladonna (deadly nightshade, Atropa belladonna), 71 Bemisia tabaco: See sweet potato whitefly berry, 54 biotechnology, tomatoes, 73 black bread mold (Rhizopus nigricans), 83 blackberry, 55 bladderwort (Utricularia vulgaris), 11, 61 bract, buds, 47 branching buds, 46 inflorescences, 66 root systems, 40 bread, 90 bread mold (Aspergillus niger), 88 bristlecone pine (Pinus longaeva), 45 Bromeliad, 62 brown seaweed, 20 bryophyte, 8, 31 bud, 46-47 tree, 14 yeast, 91 C cabbage: See red cabbage cactus, 68-69 species number, 6 Calvin cycle, 17 carbon, 17 carbon dioxide, 16 Carboniferous Period, 5 carnivorous plant, 60-61 bladderwort, 11 venus flytrap, 58-59 carrageenan, 26 Castanea sp.: See chestnut castor bean (Ricinus communis), 71 catkin, 66 cattail (Typha sp.), 11 Cattleya trianae, 9 cedar (Taxodiaceae), 56 cell epiphyte leaves, 63 photosynthesis, 16-17 root systems, 40 yeasts, 90-91 cellulose, 16 cereal grain, 9 rice, 4 wheat, 9 chanterelle mushroom (Cantharellus cibarius), 83 chestnut (Castanea sp.), 13 China algae industry, 26-27 medicine, 79 chlorophyll, 8 leaf pigment, 16 plants lacking, 65 tree, 15 chlorophyte, 21 chloroplast, 16, 17 Chytridiomycota (Chytridiomycetes), 82 Citus ladanifer: See gum rockrose clary sage (Salvia sclarea), 46 classification, 8-9 flowering plants, 50 Fungi, 82-83 Claviceps purpurea: See ergot climate lichens, 28 trees, 14 compound leaf, 48 compound raceme, 66 compound umbel, 66 concaulescence, 46 cone, 9, 56, 57 conifer, 56-57 classification, 9 needles (leaves), 49 wood, 45 Conium maculatum: See poison hemlock corymb, 66 cultivation olives, 74-75 tomatoes, 72-73 tress, 76 cycad, 9 Cynara cardunculus: See artichoke thistle D daisy, 67 deadly nightshade (belladonna, Atropa belladonna), 71 dehiscent fruit, 55 dendrochronology, 44 destroying angel mushroom, 87 Deuteromycota (Deuteromycetes), 82 Devonian Period, 45 diatomaceous algae, 18-19 dicotyledon plant root systems, 40 flowers, 50 wood, 45 dioecious plant, 9 Dionaea muscipula: See Venus flytrap dodder, 65 Drosera capensis, 61 drupe, 54 dry fruit, 55 E echinacea, 78 Echinocactus grusonii: See golden barrel cactus ecosystem, aquatic plants, 10 eelgrass, 11 energy conversion, 43 environment Fungi, 80-81 leaves, 49 epiphyte, 62-63 adaptions, 13 parasitic, 64-65 ergot (Claviceps purpurea), 83, 86 ergotism (St. Anthony's fire), 86 Eryngium giganteum: See giant sea holly Eucalyptus globulus (Tasmanian bluegum) uses, 76 yin and yang, 79 European mistletoe, 64 evergreen, 56 evolution, 12-13 F Fagus sp.: See Beech fermentation, 90 fern, 32-33 classification, 8 Dryopteris filix-mas, 12 epiphytes, 62 Ficus nymphaeifolia: See strangler fig field poppy (Papaver rhoeas) first twenty days, 37 reproduction, 38-39 fig, 55 flower, 50-51 anthesis, 38 clustered (inflorescences), 66-67 development, 37 Eucalyptus globulus, 76 green revolution, 5 modified leaves, 67 multiple fruit, 55 orchids, 9 pollination, 38, 52-53 reproduction, 38-39 trees, 14 whorls, 38 fly, 60 fly agaric mushroom, 87 flytrap, 61 venus flytrap, 58-59 food, 5 fruit, 54-55 acorn, 15 cactus, 69 epiphytes, 63 field-poppy seeds, 39 Funaria higrometrica, 31 fungus (Fungi), 80-91 classification, 8, 9 lichens, 28-29 species number, 12 G gamete algae, 22-23 ferns, 32-33 flowers, 38-39 mosses, 30-31 geotropism root development, 40 seed and root, 36 germination seeds, 36-37 spores, 30 giant sea holly (Eryngium giganteum), 46 giant sequoia (Sequoiadendron giganteum) height 13 trunk, 6-7 wood, 45 ginkgo, 8, 9 gnetophyta, 9 golden barrel cactus (Echinocactus grusonii), 69 grass, 13 gravitotropism: See geotropism green algae, 8 98 INDEX PLANTS, ALGAE, AND FUNGI 99 greenhouse hydroponic cultivation, 73 tomato cultivation, 72 tree cultivation, 76 green peach aphid (Myzus persicae), tomatoes, 72 growth ring, trees, 15, 44 gum rockrose (Citus ladanifer), 46 gymnosperm classification, 9, conifers, 56 wood, 45 See also conifer H head (flower type), 66 heartwood, 45 heliophilic plant, 10 hemlock, 70 hormone (plant), 36 hornwort, 10 horsetail rush, 8 hydroponic cultivation, tomatoes, 73 I-K India, ayurvedic medicine, 78 inflorescence (clustered flowers), 66-67 insect carnivorous plants, 58-61 clustered flower fertilization, 67 Japan, algae industry, 26 Juglans sp.: See walnut kingdom, 8-9, 82 knotweed (Polygonum sp.), 11 L laburnum, wood, 44 Lachenalia, 11 lateral bud, 47 leaf, 48-49 cactus, 69 conifer, 56 epiphytes, 62, 63 Eucalyptus globulus, 76 first true, 37 floating leaves, 10 green color, 16 growth of new, 46-47 inflorescences, 66-67 oaks, 15 olives, 74 photosynthesis, 16-17 Leonurus cardiaca: See motherwort lichen, 28-29 environment, 49 light, 16, 24, 48 linden (Tilia sp.), 13 M-N maple (Acer sp.) leaves, 48-49 plant adaptations, 13 sycamores, 46-47 marine algae, 24-25 medicinal algae, 27 medicinal plant New World, 78 shamans, 78 traditional Chinese use, 79 Medusa's head (Tillandsia caput medusae), 62 meiosis, 31, 90 metabolism, cactus, 69 mistletoe, 64 mitochondria, yeast cell, 91 mold, bread molds, 83, 88 monocotyledon (monocot) root systems, 40 flowers, 50 orchids, 9 wood, 45 moss, 30-31 epiphytes, 62 oak, 15 rhizoids, 8 sphagnum, 8, 12 motherwort (Leonurus cardiaca), yin, 79 multiple fruit, 55 mushroom, 80-87 white, 9 Myriophyllum aquaticum: See parrot feather Myzus persicae: See green peach aphid Native American, medicinal plant use, 78 Nepenthes mirabilis, 61 nettle, tomatoes, 72 nightshade: See deadly nightshade nucleus, yeast cell, 91 nut acorn, 15 dry fruit, 55 O oak (Quercus sp.) anatomy, 14-15 plant adaptations, 13 Oenanthe crocata: See water dropwort oil press, olive oil production, 75 olive (Olea europaea), 74 olive oil, 74-75 Ophrys apifera, 52-53 orange, 54-55 orchid, classification, 9 epiphytes, 62 pollination, 52-53 orchid bee, 52-53 osmosis, 41 oxygen, 16 P Papaver rhoeas: See field poppy paper production, 76-77 parasitism fungus, 84 plant, 64-65 parrot feather (Myriophyllum aquaticum), 10 pathogenic fungus, 88-89 peach, 54 phaeophyte, 20 phloem angiosperms, 9 leaves, 49 root systems, 41 stems, 43 wood, 44-45 photosynthesis, 16-17 algae, 20 cactus, 68 green revolution, 4-5 leaves, 12, 48 start, 37 tree, 15 water plants, 10 phycocolloide, 26 phyllotaxis, 46 pine, 56, 57 pine cone: See cone pine nut, 57 Pinus longaeva: See bristlecone pine pitcher plant, 61 plant angiosperms, 9 aquatic plants, 10-11 Bromeliads, 62 bud: See bud cactus, 68-69 carnivorous: See carnivorous plant cells, 16-17 cellulose, 16 classification, 8-9, 50 common characteristics, 8 conifers: See conifer dioecious, 9 energy source, 16 environmental dangers, 5 epiphytes, 62-63, 64-65 evolutionary adaptations, 12-13, 65 first true leaf, 37 first twenty days, 37 flower development, 37 flowerless, 56 giant, 13 green revolution, 4-5 growth rate, 7 gymnosperms, 9 history, 5 hormones, 36 lack of chlorophyll, 65 lack of movement, 8 land conquest, 12 leaves: See leaf life cycle, 38-39 medicinal, 78-79 monocotyledons (monocots), 9 naked seed (gnetophyta; gymnosperma), 9 nearest relatives, 6 number of species, 4, 8 parasitic, 64-65 photosynthesis: See photosynthesis pines: See pine poisonous: See poisonous plant pollination: See pollination root system, 12, 32-33 seedless, 8 seeds: See seed skin membrane, 12 stemless, 13 stems, 42-43 tissues, 16-17 tomato, 72-73 toxic: See poisonous plant trees: See tree veined, 46 water, 10-11 wetland, 11 plant stem, 42-43 cactus, 68 See also tree trunk pneumatophore, 11 poison hemlock (Conium maculatum), 70 poison ivy (Toxicodendron radicans), 71 poisonous fungus, 86-87 poisonous mushroom, 84-85, 87 poisonous plant, 70-71 pollination, 52-53 plants with seeds, 38 Polygonum sp.: See knotweed pome, 54 poppy, field: See field poppy potato, common, 42 pressing, olive oil production, 75 psilophyta, 8 pulp, paper, 76 ()-R Quercus sp.: See oak recaulescence, 46 raceme, 66 red cabbage, 46 red marine algae (Rhodomela sp.), 8 red spider mite (Tetranychus turkestani), tomatoes, 72 reproduction algae, 22-23 ferns, 32-33 flowers, 38-39 mosses, 31 mushrooms, 85 pollination, 52-53 seedless, 8 seeds, 36-37 sexual, 9 yeast, 91 Rhizopus nigricans: See black bread mold Rhodomela sp.: See red marine algae rhodophyte, 21 rice, 4 Ricinus communis: See castor bean root system, 40-41 100 INDEX PLANTS, ALGAE, AND FUNGI 101 cactus, 69 shaman, 78 T U VV wood, 44-45 dicotyledon, 50 simple fruit, 54 a yeast, 90-91 epiphyte, 62 simple leaf, 48 yellow floating heart, 10 ferns, 32-33 Sitka spruce, 9 Tasmanian bluegum: See Eucalyptus globulus umbel, 66 yellow seaweed, 20 floating, 11 skin membrane, 12 Taxodiaceae: See cedar Utricularia vulgaris: See bladderwort geotropism, 36 Socrates, 70 tendril, 49 vacuole, yeast cell, 91 growth, 15 soil terrestrial algae, 24-25 Venus flytrap (Dionaea muscipula), 58-59 7, land adaptation, 12 mosses, 31 Tetranychus turkestani: See red spider mite Victoria cruciana: See tropical water lily monocotyledon, 51 oak, 15 parasitic plants, 65 primary root, 37 secondary, 37 rush, horsetail, 8 rye, ergot, 86 5 sage: See clary sage Sagittaria sagittifolia: See arrowhead sago pondweed, 10 Saint Anthony's fire (ergotism), 86 salt, 25 Salvia sclarea: See clary sage saprobe fungus, 84 Sargasso, 26 Sarracenia sp., 61 season, trees, 15 seaweed harvest, 18-19 not plants, 18 phaeophytes, 20 thallus, 20 types, 20-21 seed, 36-37 distribution, 39 fruit, 39, 54-55 orchid production, 53 pollination, 34-35 seedless plants, 8 See also spore sequoia: See giant sequoia Sequoiadendron giganteum: See giant sequoia tomato cultivation, 72 tree cultivation, 76 Solanum lycopersicum: See tomato solar energy, conversion to chemical energy, 16 Sonchus acaulis: See stemless sow-thistle sow-thistle, stemless, 13 spadix, 66 sphagnum moss, 8, 12 spike (flower type), 66 spikemoss, 8 spore algae, 22-23 ferns, 32-33 Fungi, 82-83 lichen symbiosis, 29 mosses, 30-32 mushrooms, 84-85 pathogenic molds, 88-89 seedless plants, 8 See also seed sporophyte algae, 23 mosses, 30-32 stem: See plant stem stemless sow-thistle (Sonchus acaulis), 13 strangler fig (Ficus nymphaeifolia), 64 submerged plant, 11 sundew, 61 sunflower, 66-67 sweet potato white fly (Bemisia tabaco), tomatoes, 72 sweet violet (Viola odorata), 13 sycamore maple (Acer pseudoplatanus L.), 46-47 symbiosis lichens, 29 Fungi, 84 thallus, 20 thistle: See artichoke thistle; stemless sow- thistle thylakoid, 17 Tilia sp.: See linden Tillandsia caput medusae: See Medusa's head toadstool, 80-81 tomato (Solanum lycopersicum), cultivation, 72-73 Toxicodendron radicans: See poison ivy tracheophyte, 46 tractor, tree cultivation, 76 transgenic crop, tomatoes, 72-73 transplanting tomatoes, 72 trees, 76 tree, 14-15 classification, 9 conifer, 56-57 dendrochronology, 44 distinguishing characteristics, 13 earliest known, 45 giant sequoia, 6-7, 13 growth rings, 15 know species, 45 nuts, 55 oldest, 45 olive, 74 tallest, 13, 45 trunk: See tree trunk wood, 44-45 tree trunk anatomy, 14-15 wood, 44-45 Triticum sp.: See wheat tropical water lily (Victoria cruciana), 10 tuber, 42 Typha sp.: See cattail Viola odorata: See sweet violet violet, sweet, 13 virgin olive oil, 75 W walnut (Juglans sp.), 13 war flower, 71 water aquatic plants, 10-11 hydroponic cultivation, 73 paper production, 76, 77 photosynthesis, 16 water dropwort (Oenanthe crocata), 70 water lily, tropical, 10 water plant: See aquatic plant wetland plant, 11 wheat (Triticum sp.), 9 white mushroom (Agaricus bisporus), 9 wine, 90 wood, 44-45 conifer, 56 paper pulp, 76-77 tree anatomy, 14-15 wort, 3 X-Y xylem angiosperms, 9 leaves, 49 root systems, 41 stems, 43 zoospore, 22 Zygomycota (Zygomycetes), 83 AND FUNGI Britannica Mlustrated Science Library About the pagination of this eBook Due to the unique page numbering scheme of this book, the electronic pagination of the eBook does not match the pagination of the printed version. To navigate the text, please use the electronic Table of Contents that appears alongside the eBook or the Search function. For citation purposes, use the page numbers that appear in the text. INVERTEBRATES Nw wre rat ne rt voi ’ Britannica Illustrated Science Li Britannica Illustrated Science Library © 2008 Editorial Sol 90 All rights reserved. Idea and Concept of This Work: Editorial Sol 90 Project Management: Fabian Cassan Photo Credits: Corbis, ESA, Getty Images, Graphic News, NASA, National Geographic, Science Photo Library Illustrators: Guido Arroyo, Pablo Aschei, Gustavo J. Caironi, Hernan Cafiellas, Leonardo César, José Luis Corsetti, Vanina Farias, Manrique Fernandez Buente, Joana Garrido, Celina Hilbert, Jorge Ivanovich, Isidro Lopez, Diego Martin, Jorge Martinez, Marco Menco, Marcelo Moran, Ala de Mosca, Diego Mourelos, Eduardo Pérez, Javier Pérez, Ariel Piroyansky, Fernando Ramallo, Ariel Roldan, Marcel Socias, Néstor Taylor, Trebol Animation, Juan Venegas, Constanza Vicco, Coralia Vignau, Gustavo Yamin, 3DN, 3DOM studio Composition and Pre-press Services: Editorial Sol 90 Translation Services and Index: Publication Services, Inc. Portions © 2008 Encyclopzedia Britannica, Inc. Encyclopaedia Britannica, Britannica, and the thistle logo are registered trademarks of Encyclopeedia Britannica, Inc. Britannica Illustrated Science Library Staff Editorial Michael Levy, Executive Editor, Core Editorial John Rafferty, Associate Editor, Earth Sciences William L. Hosch, Associate Editor, Mathematics and Computers Kara Rogers, Associate Editor, Life Sciences Rob Curley, Senior Editor, Science and Technology David Hayes, Special Projects Editor Art and Composition Steven N. Kapusta, Director Carol A. Gaines, Composition Supervisor Christine McCabe, Senior I/lustrator Media Acquisition Kathy Nakamura, Manager Copy Department Sylvia Wallace, Director Julian Ronning, Supervisor Information Management and Retrieval Sheila Vasich, Information Architect Production Control Marilyn L. Barton Manufacturing Kim Gerber, Director Encyclopzedia Britannica, Inc. Jacob E. Safra, Chairman of the Board Jorge Aguilar-Cauz, President Michael Ross, Senior Vice President, Corporate Development Dale H. Hoiberg, Senior Vice President and Editor Marsha Mackenzie, Director of Production International Standard Book Number (set): 978-1-59339-797-5 International Standard Book Number (volume): 978-1-59339-804-0 Britannica Illustrated Science Library: Invertebrates 2008 Printed in China ENC YCLOPADIA Britannica www.britannica.com nvertebrates Contents Origin and habitats The simplest life-forms Page 18 Crustaceans and arachnids Page 34 Insects Page 52 Relationship with humans Page 80 ARTIFICIAL BEEHIVE Movable frames allow the T beekeeper to remove honey =i and wax from each comb. *\- Creatures animal life on Earth. They are the most ancient and most numerous of known life-forms. Some, such as worms, sea anemones, and jellyfish, are soft- bodied. Others, such as insects and crustaceans, are hard-bodied. Some, including jellyfish, live in the water and swim freely. However, others, such as corals and anemones, are fixed in one place. This fascinating world of tiny creatures has over 1.5 million known species, with a wide variety of shapes and habits. i nvertebrates were the first forms of a insects. They process the nectar of flowers to produce honey, a sugary liquid that humans use as a sweetener and nutrient. The nutritive component of honey is pure carbohydrate in the form of simple sugars, which are directly absorbed by the body. This characteristic gives honey its punch as a quick energy source. Edible in its natural state, it can also be used as an ingredient of desserts or to sweeten drinks. Not only bees, however, but also wasps play a fundamental role in the lives of all living beings. Many plants depend on them for pollination of their flowers. Without these insects there would be fewer fruits and vegetables to eat. B ees are among the most important of a beehive. Did you know that one difference between bees and other insects is the organized communities that bees form? Keeping in mind that each artificial honeycomb has about 30,000 inhabitants, there must be a way to keep order, and the bees know by instinct how to do this. The queen, the drones, and the workers know their roles and duties well. They may even die defending the colony, just like ants, who are also true masters of order and productivity. Noteworthy in the world of insects is their high degree of evolutionary development. They are the highest achievers of the animal world. They live all over the planet, need little food to survive, and escape from predators with highly developed means of locomotion. All - ere we show you the inside workings insects have jointed legs and an external skeleton for protection. In this book you will also be able to admire the beauty of butterflies and the changes they experience throughout their lives, and you will discover the world through the eyes of a fly. Have you heard that, among the 35,000 known species of spiders, only 30 are truly poisonous, and that without these poisonous creatures we would be swimming in a sea of insects? Also interesting are the many kinds of spiderwebs that spiders use for making traps, mating, moving about, and covering their burrows. e invite you to explore the pages VV of this fact-filled book, with fascinating photos and intriguing facts about the inner and external lives of the invertebrates that share our world. Mosquitoes, for example, can pierce the skin of mammals and feed on their blood, and flies can eat solid food because their digestive process begins outside their bodies. No athlete can jump like the flea, a tiny, wingless insect that lives on the blood of birds and mammals. We will also tell you about beneficial insects that can be useful to have in your house, and about others that it would be better to control and keep away, because they can transmit sicknesses such as Chagas disease. Just turn the page to find detailed accounts along with carefully selected images that will show you in full detail how some of the smallest creatures on Earth live, change, grow, and communicate. It is well worth it! e e e e Ori nN an. d H ab It ats ANOMALOCARIS TRACES OF ANCIENT LIFE LIFE BEGAN IN THE SEA The largest predator:ot tnlonites in FROZEN IN TIME TEEMING FRESHWATER the Cambrian Period, it measured up to 20 inches (0.5 m) long. THE FIRST CONQUEST ENVIRONMENTS an ae ' le, , i @ is 2s * a aug gd - i te = - = | BRS Sa dESS bla: he first life-forms appeared nearly found in Australia and Canada show that from the bottom of the ocean to the highest —_ shellfish (phylum Mollusca); sea worms and 4 billion years ago. The main those invertebrates had soft bodies, quite mountain peaks. We will show you the earthworms (phylum Annelida); insects, groups of organisms with complex _ different from those that exist today. oldest species and many of the main groups __ spiders, millipedes, and crustaceans cells (eukaryotes) evolved during Members of the kingdom Animalia became of today: sponges (phylum Porifera); corals, | (phylum Arthropoda); and starfish and sea the Precambrian Period. Fossils adapted to many environments, extending anemones, and jellyfish (phylum Cnidaria); urchins (phylum Echinodermata). 8 ORIGIN AND HABITATS INVERTEBRATES 9 Traces of Ancient Life Burgess Shale EVOLUTION Trilobites are the best-known fossilized animals to appear Located in Canada, Burgess Shale is during the Cambrian explosion. The fossil record shows an a: ts - Lf well known for its fossil bed of soft- extraordinary proliferation of life-forms during this stage illions of years ago, our planet was not as we know it today. bodied animals from the Cambrian Period. of life on Earth. From this time on, no new structures of The continents were arranged differently, and the climate, flora, MIs Ded gles 2 allfipse-of what ocean morphological organization appeared. Rather, existing : 9 was like during the Cambrian Period, with forms evolved and diversified. and fauna were different. How do we know this? We have specimens of the four main types of te learned these things by finding and studying fossils, remains of past life- tbe balan, esses oti nae [Pan ao ee) oy SS ee forms that are preserved in both geography and time. The Ediacara, in group that includes insects). AYSHEAIA OPABINIA From 0.5 to From 1.5 to 2.5 inches 3 inches (1-6 cm) long. (4-7 cm) long. southern Australia, and the Burgess Shale, in Canada, are two regions with extensive fossil beds of soft-bodied invertebrates. Both areas have 5 AQ million years shed light on what is known as the Cambrian explosion. @ AGE OF THE FOSSILS FOUND IN THIS BED CANADA Ediacara DICKINSONIA SPECIES Pace aL eau Ne ualoet vont . IR This group, called Ediacara fauna, is the oldest known Believed to belong to the Cnidarian Longitude 16°30" 0G" W ; = This cylindrical form e 4 Lf group of multicelled organisms. Found in Precambrian (coral, jellyfish, anemones) or This fossil bed is : is th = RP io have ! rock, it predates the great Cambrian explosion. Its age is around Annelid (worms) phyla. The largest outstanding for a = te Beene 600 million years; it contains impressions, or molds, of diverse was 17 inches (43 cm) long. the variety of ; P y animal forms conserved in sedimentary rock, without a trace of creatures found. hard parts. The first such bed was found in southern Australia, in the Ediacara Hills. a 600 million years AGE OF THE FIRST SPECIMENS FOUND AUSTRALIA Latitude 35° 15'S Longitude 149° 28’ E The first specimens were found in the Ediacara Hills. OTTOIA This priapulid worm could MARRELLA SPLENDENS measnee ups f 3 inches JELLYFISH “ --s Less than one inch long, (8 cm) long, Ediacaran . : ae | this creature is thought to live on the seafloor. wa SIZES The Burgess Shale invertebrates had a wide range of sizes, from microscopic to FOSSILS Fossils yield clues about life in the past. By comparing fossilized organisms from different periods nearly 7 feet (2 m) long. (Dogs, a on the other hand, have a 20 inches of the Earth's history with narrower size range; the most (50 cm) organisms of today, we can common breeds range from 20 =) deduce how various life-forms to 40 inches [50-100 cm] tall.). Anomalocaris Dog have changed over time. Mouth = ee 1 samy —S = e i" m- hye eat ees “ * ‘| ll L i. 4). hy, * a. ‘ Properties Bie Characteristics > A intent is a material derived from the fossilized resin of al - a certain trees that lived, between 144 and 65 million years : ] i ago. Over time they: were fossilized, forming large, irregular _ z 4 7 , , ah Me masses withi rs of s sandstone and slate mixed with clay. Va ue — . Masses of Era 2 from very’small, only a fraction of an e inch, to many times longer, up to 20 inches (50 cm) in length, Amber containing putt Ist that a a7 io with a hardness of 2 to 3 on the Mohs scale. Amber is composed lived millions of years ago is @ + : pigarboagnyocn.ale pygtagen. used to make jewelry. Its price - depends on the type of = Wa Ey organism it contains. sz ; q ; eat ‘i . During the Cretaceous ~ and Tertiary Periods, forests covered a wide — area. The trees secreted a resinous substance FOSSIL IN AMBER Photograph of amber that fa Spi fect! % contains fossil remains from 38 a - t a i 8 aw "million years ago. This piece is - aie, _ valued at nearly $35,000. ut amber, enables s Ke i" - i , : genera » 2 "This substance accumulated on tree te *~, » * “branches and bark and at the” foot of the trunk, trapping all _ sorts of plants and animals’ (even toads) that got Stick © in thg thick resin. = | Diverse Akigh a > The color of fossilized i depends on the type of tree it ¥ \ came from, when it was formed, and the environment where it was fossilized. Amber is usually yellow, although it may 7 come in many shades ranging from orange, red, brown, blue, and ' oe =. Okeen to transparent varieties. Although color is important, - ~amber is classified according to its origin. \ : a, ‘ 4, a i ss " : % 5 ont ; : 7 f i ® _ Mineral deposit Origin Shades it Li og x hal ' a Baltic . Eocene conifers @ Ss ‘ fe) "Aficien Life-F orms. F Burma | - Eocene Burseraceans ya | 00° C). “a Finding these fogged creatures enables us to learn f j Dominican Republic Miocene legumes _ Bs @ > ik 4 e about life-forms and environments of the past. The = "protected its mains fro! re. Sicily Mi fh 7 ¢ ) Fe) rs rae melting, point of snber x . presence of certain fossils can help us to determine ee - j ater and air..As the resin = ae pe eS = , ‘ ar @ i | Climate was like millions of years ago and to date rock lay: . feat” 7 ardened, it onl ‘ Romania Miocene legumes a 4 eo 1 i “ff — a a ~ We know that certain plants and animals lived in specific oa ; tive, pressure re SAT el iP. Mexico ~_. Miocene legumes @ (2 ol . %) om ; 4 - & periods. Their presence oI bsence can help us determine the 2 jer ‘ime this layer was” Canada Cretaceous conifers ey ow . i‘ — 3 _» age of the rock layer where they are found. Not only did amber . z ito what 7 * preserve plants and animals, but it also trapped air bubbles. = = = 12 ORIGIN AND HABITATS INVERTEBRATES 13 The First Conquest 0 be able to live on land, invertebrates aa developed ways of breathing and anil moving that were adapted to a Danaus land environment. Thus insects, which plexippus can walk and fly, have populated land ! and air environments. Other invertebrates # have also become accustomed to life in this element, and they play an important role in land ecosystems. Who Eats Whom? ASIAN TIGER The relationships of eating MOSQUITO and being eaten that are Aedes albopictus established among the organisms of an ecosystem are called the food chain. In contrast to plants, whose capacity for photosynthesis gives them the role 4 of food producers, invertebrates occupy various levels in the food % chain as food consumers. THE ORDER OF THE FOOD CHAIN Fleas Ladybugs : - ' , OF THE SPECIES THAT CeOnene -_ € Sd & } spiders LIVE IN TREES ARE rnemapeiailiced i INSECTS. | Morpho rhetenor PRAYING MANTIS FIRST LEVEL SECOND LEVEL THIRD LEVEL Family Mantidae Invertebrates Carnivores that Larger invertebrates that j that eat plants eat herbivorous eat other carnivorous invertebrates invertebrates f | WAsP Polistes sp. The Most Successful Beetles (order Coleoptera) are the most prolific and diverse group of the animal kingdom. This is mostly because of their chitinous exoskeletons and highly compact elytras (wing covers), which give each species the hardness, flexibility, texture, or color it needs to adapt to its environment. OVER COMMON Tunnels bored FURNITURE BEETLE =~ by beetles SPECIES OF BEETLE@, J . ' Anobium punctatum ARE KNOWN. - FEEDING ON ~~" A a aa i Th : [EUROPEAN HORNET DEAD MATTER ..- es Z i z ha, ! Vespa crabro . ’ ; - ' _-= GARDEN SNAIL ' ma " : Helix aspersa * . |, BURYING a Re oe © BEETLE | ; , .. Nicrophorus k investigator af, E oq BLACK VINE WEEVIL Otiorhynchus sulcatus SPIDER 7 - Drassodes sp. ale a, DESERT MILLIPEDE BLOOD-RED ANT ; I \ : is Orthoporus ornatus 3 (WORKER) SILVERFISH 4 i, CENTIPEDE. ! ' Formica sanguinea , to Lithobius sp. ™ Lepisma saccharina Naturally Bhi ‘ Programmed ri ur PILLBUGS SILKWORM : . : 7 The world of air- and land-dwelling Small Arthropods a Ar eet Pp: et invertebrates includes societies, such as those Most land- and air-dwelling arthropods have a of bees, wasps, and ants (order Hymenoptera). tracheal respiratory system consisting of highly The bees' dances to inform other bees about efficient air tubes that supply oxygen directly to * #h the location of new food sources, their strict the cells and tissues. The tracheal system makes it vier “ division of labor, or the structure of a possible for these arthropods to maintain a high : @ EARTHWORM spiderweb correspond to patterns of behavior metabolic rate, but it also tends to limit body size. CLICK Lumbricus sp. specific to each species. Each individual carries That is why land-dwelling arthropods are relatively BEETLE these patterns inscribed within, like a small compared to the rest of the animal kingdom. Agriotes lineatus computer program that executes perfectly. ORIGIN AND HABITATS INVERTEBRATES Life Began in the Sea nvertebrates are not defined by any single common characteristic, but simply by not being vertebrates. Their heterogeneity is most notable in the ocean. Some 3.8 billion years ago, life arose in our planet's oceans. The species that inhabit the ocean waters show greater diversity than A. World Without Insects Arthropods are the most prolific animals on the planet. But just as insects (hexapods) reign on land, crustaceans have been successful in the water. They breathe through gills, and some, such as Krill, are microscopic. Most, however, are larger than insects-mostly because they have no need of complex and costly metamorphosis. 4 50°000 KNOWN CRUSTACEAN SPECIES those found in other environments. Some forms of animal life, such as corals and sponges, are so simple that they are not able to move about on their own. Others, such as some cephalopods, show great intelligence and skill. CORAL Acropora sp. Coral reefs are environments inhabited THE VAST MAJORITY LIVE by thousands of ocean IN THE SEA creatures. They make up their own ecosystem. —_ * ... - = The Largest The reduced effects of gravity in the water CARAMOTE ANTARCTIC ~~ iF Le ee = enable the largest invertebrates to live in PRAWN KRILL nes the sea. Out of the water, octopus and Penaeus Euphausia : squid-cephalopod mollusks with no rigid kerathurus superba GF / §- BROADCLUB structure or joints in their bodies-would not ‘3 ~=—s« CUTTLEFISH be able to move or hold themselves up, let amecccan oo versal of ti se ae fund on ad - LOBSTER Nie ss Homarus americanus Unique Shapes Some sea organisms, such as jellyfish, some sponges, and anemones, are very simple. Others, such as sea urchins and starfish (phylum Echinodermata), are more complex. However, all of these life-forms have a body plan called radial symmetry, which, in contrast to bilateral symmetry, is found only in the sea. RADIAL SYMMETRY : | : 7” JELLYFISH WHITE Thysanostoma JELLYFISH loriferum Rhizostoma pulmo RADIANT SEA URCHIN Astropyga radiata Defends the crab against predators URCHIN CRAB Dorippe frascone Transports the sea urchin in a form of symbiosis + RED STARFISH » 1, Echinaster sepositus a SEA SLUG , COMMON STARFISH - Chromodoris Asterias rubens willani OYSTERS ‘C-Crassostrea Sp. TIGER COWRY Cypraea tigris TREE WORM Spirobranchus giganteus 4 COMMON OCTOPUS Octopus vulgaris Found up to 30 feet (10 m) deep 66 feet (20 m) length of the giant squid Architeuthis dux an “a \. ~U@ BIGFIN REEF SQUID Sepioteuthis lessoniana Male and female Medium and Substance Gills enable oxygen from the water to enter directly into an animal's circulatory system. Through tiny chambers, they exchange gases with the surrounding water. But the simplest organisms, without digestive tracts, feed by absorbing other substances and trace elements from the water. SPONGE Spongia officinalis Absorbs nutrients from the water a = _ Ba * ai iy 7 r . * : aor, pairs. Pr : ah ar ' SEA CUCUMBER ae Ls je Thelenota sp. 16 ORIGIN AND HABITATS INVERTEB _Teeming Freshwater Environments n rivers, ponds, lakes, lagoons, and swamps, many means they must obtain a reserve of air or come to the surface to 1 invertebrate species are adapted to life in the water but breathe. Crustaceans have mechanisms that protect them from come from other habitats. Thus, water beetles breathe, losing salt in fresh water. With these adaptations, invertebrates make not with gills, but with spiracles, the way land insects do. This seemingly calm waters the scene of an intense struggle to survive. ai i The areas in and around water and close to the water's surface are the —_ Many species of land- and air-dwelling scenes of a battle for survival. Most Molting | | _ insects lay their eggs in water. After freshwater insects live in this zone. 2 dragonfly hatching, the larvae undergo 4 metamorphosis in the water. This fact = has enabled certain species to prosper 1 | by colonizing more than one os | i environment at once. Not only does na pipiens sesh! iy So fice A ae nax imperator BY, | ovens ae atierert tanec His afuts toad of sifallgg its life, but it also has distinct feeding LIFE CYCLE OF THE | Fs flying per es INS | habits and means of breathing during ADULT COMMON MOSQUITO J f i R a . if . ¢ those stages. That fact keeps adults After a few day: s the f / gy i eae of the species from competing with pupa’s skin splits ere the young for food. and the adult mosquito emerges. The adult will live for only a few —_— ne ¥ MAYFLY weeks. ; . ~~, Hexagenia sp. ' ; ie. EGGS COMMON POND SKATER : 3 PUPAE Attar fecdingen Gerris lacustris =. The larva molts blood, adult females Lives in water. It has just the i i if right weight and structure to Seyetnale " é Nplate lay 40 to 400 eggs take ee of surface ad Ty LASTS ABOUT on the surface of F : a reaching the ONE MONTH she water. ; tension when the water is calm. WATER MEASURER pupa stage. : Hydrometra stagnorum : —_— WATER BOATMAN (BACK SWIMMER) Notonecta glauca LARVAE After one week, the eggs hatch and the larvae are born. ZOOPLANKTON Some water species breathe through air tubes or tracheae. All such organisms had to develop a mechanism or device for providing themselves with air, because GREAT POND tracheae and tracheoles are useless SNAIL for breathing underwater. Lymnaea stagnalis DRAGONFL . Y NYMPH ¥ DIVING BELL SPIDER Argyroneta aquatica GREAT DIVING BEETLE Dytiscus marginalis s + : . 7 = | boo s i + i » L J ell a . ” |). * ") CADDISFLY LARVA. ‘ j ; Limnephilus sp. a L } teh BT X WHITE-CLAWED CRAYFISH Austropotamobius'pallipes Glands on its antennae excrete water and maintain the balance of salts.in its body. Some organisms are parasites. They do notiobtain theiggown food; rather, they live at the expense of ® another species. Although'they, depend on another animal for stistenance, they avoid doing the other species too much harm. Otherwise, the parasite would have to finda new host. In Fresh Water Ocean invertebrates live in an osmotic balance between water and the salts the water contains. Invertebrates that live in estuaries or other places where salt water receives currents of fresh water (euryhaline organisms) must keep the concentration of salts in their bodies constant, even when the salinity of the water changes. In fresh water, with its low Most parasitic concentration of salts, crustaceans developed worms are mechanisms to eliminate water and capture WATER BEETLE microscopic in BLOOD-FLUKES TRICHODINA MEDICINAL LEECH COPEPOD salts actively-that is, their bodies expend LARVA size. The ones (BILHARZIA) Trichodina fultoni Hirudo medicinalis Cyclops sp. energy on these functions. For this reason river shown here are Schistosoma sp. crustaceans, unlike sea crustaceans, urinate. highly magnified. 20-21 28-29 22-23 30-31 24-25 32-33 26-27 20 THE SIMPLEST LIFE-FORMS INVERTEBRATES 21 e Radial S metr V crane nt ae la VIth Cnidarians are a group of aquatic animals that HYDROZOA: ANTHOZOA: Sea SCYPHOZOA: Jellyfish includes jellyfish, hydras, sea anemones, and Asexual polyp anemones and corals Mesoglea any of the numerous invertebrates on Earth live in the corals. Their’ cells are organized in true tissues. Pash! ial et f . . . They have specialized cells called cnidoblasts for - = ag EI bach Gastrovascular ocean. Some, such as polyps and jellyfish, have radial stewie and tr Heese WORE HEE OE Ai cay symmetry-—that is, their bodies are structured around an cnidarians are polyps and jellyfish. sae Mouth oe ii axis. A typical echinoderm such as the starfish has tiny, flexible, ees 4 ' er tube-shaped legs arranged like the spokes of a wheel. The animal Pelagia noctiluca -— uses them to hold onto surfaces and to move. Sponges, on the ea cl other hand, are very simple, multiple-celled animals, with Used for defense many small pores that they use to feed. @ REPRODUCTION By ntact Cnidocyst i.” GAMETES Nucleus ——=—— JELLYFISH = -_ Adult jellyfish operculum ieee The ean body j 7 mite produce sperm Sind ia a .~ begins to form Young Jaya cea ach RADIAL pieh hich jellyfish release them. 2 ced ae - SYMMETRY Pnagiuery ony parca sites tube : a The body parts are . organized around a ig Most common b Barb 3 ’ central axis like the Center ; = . FERTILIZATION spokes on the wheel er habitat . 2 | Fertilization takes 3 | DISCHARGED of a bicycle. Any plane POLYP COASTS OF place in the Unfolded passing through the The planula larva THE UNITED STATES waters near the stinging body will divide it into < ae eat the jellyfish, resulting tube f ; J sal _ bottom, where it : ; ~ in a zygote. if F attaches to a surface. | a There it develops a mouth ¥ and tentacles, and ! f i ' eo EI BLASTULA ’ The zygote, after transforms into a polyp. THERE ARE - a series of cell two halves, each mirroring the other. SEA URCHIN Strongylocentrotus franciscanus APPROXIMATELY \ i divisions, becomes a " blastula, or hollow = sphere, of cells. Echinoderms PLANULA F q a 9 The blastula lengthens This phylum includes sea lilies, sea SPECIES OF CNIDARIANS and becomes a ciliated cucumbers, urchins, and starfish. The (COELENTERATES). larva called a planula. echinoderms have an internal skeleton made of calcified plates and a locomotion Water f system made up of ambulacral grooves coming out with rows of tube feet. In most ECHINODERM — Porifera Epithelial echinoderm species, the means that this . ee if 7 ‘ ant ’ THERE ARE Osea cell endoskeleton is made of tiny animal's body is ey ee = rn, Are sessile aquatic animals. Most live at the bottom of APPROXIMATELY calcareous plates held covered by a eo | —— = the ocean, although there are some freshwater species. together by skin and spiny skin. =} fds os : : 1 t= They are the simplest animals, lacking organs or true 5 000 muscle tissue. ‘i rad ry A’ J *; 53 Li tissues, and their cells are independent to a certain 9 a®™ | | | extent. They are basically water-filtering bodies formed SPECIES (150 ARE .—_ ECHINGIDEA =; : i by one or more cavities. Most porifera have no definite FRESHWATER, AND THE The water with — Sea a 1 shape, but some have radial symmetry. REST ARE MARINE). food particles j 2 ASTEROIDEA OPHIUROIDEA oe wl f I J fe Starfish Brittle stars TYPES OF PORIFERA ACCORDING _» Direction of f el al TO ORGANIZATION water flow . aa | “ THERE ARE t Be 0] ~—- APPROXIMATELY y( Naa OF ait: 1 i Une |) tee 7,000 hi An } ) i, | pat 3 a fag | ri i LIVING SPECIES j : | ‘ AND 13,000 EXTINCT Seal / CRINOIDEA HOLOTHUROIDEA SPECIES OF " Sea lilies Sea cucumbers ECHINODERMS. ASCON SYCON LEUCON <_ , . se 22 THE SIMPLEST LIFE-FORMS ee a j 5, a : ' INVERTEBRATES 23 ADAPTATION OF SHAPE To avoid being swept away in the current, the Beautiful but Deadly Sea Carnival ZA . : . Bedutihil for thelr shapesiand colors that sea anemone retracts on sensing a water flow. ~— Tentacles orals and anemones, together with jellyfish, make up the twee gorettind | Si eon at cae baa eal y * phylum Cnidaria. Some characteristics they share are their —— victims and predators, sea anemones live in Water bright colors, tentacles that secrete stinging substances, and a ' ales ach Baek polio ee ee colin digestive system with a common opening for ingestion and excretion—the } : - up to 3 feet (1m). They have a basal disc, which in : simplest digestive system in the animal kingdom. All of these organisms , 4 eters one came coke ee ; are quite simple. Corals generally form colonies, large groups of small the seafloor. They trap live prey, ave Ren ath main — = polyps that stay practically immobile and feed on microorganisms ea Ea ak Uh RARE TTT SET brought to them by water currents. Sea anemones, on the other hand, The sea anemone By means of the When the water are solitary and can trap prey despite their limited locomotion. Redunes Its size Febactor muscle com 4 THE NUMBER OF CNIDARIAN aaa Se . | © ene ceaanemenes Coral Reefs ¥ SPECIES IN THE WORLD With stinging cells, = | ‘a pool does not affect this species. to hunt and move Corals are small polyps with : tentacles that grow at their base throughout their life, generating a calcareous exoskeleton. This skeleton forms masses, or branches. Most corals grow in colonies; the skeletons form huge calcareous masses called reefs. Corals live mostly in warm, shallow ocean waters. Their reproduction can be both sexual and asexual, by division or by gemmation. They feed on plankton. branch out; their skeleton is not lime-based but horn-like grow over the surface of the lime-bearing substrate. and flexible. CORAL WALLS Even though some coral walls live alone, most form colonies that can grow upward at up to 3 feet (1 m) every year. Tentacles THE MOST COMMON DEPTH AT with stinging cells WHICH CORALS GROW | \ i ‘ _ A ; all 5 1) a ‘ ek y = — = a ae ~ ie {— det 7, de Mouth Hard skeleton r PE Through here the A mass that grows > i ier \ animal ingests by the accumulation PLU: its food and of dead polyps _ j owl, hig excretes wastes. | ail fo * ? r as. == - i ie Live = SEA ANEMONE as | tissue rn | . Any vertical plane passing r through its center divides ‘ is f ee it into two equal parts. Gastric cavity ® a a Connecting tissue Divided into several Pls Connects one polyp cavities in Calcium . with another hydropolyps carbonate ta BASAL DISC . 7 24 THE SIMPLEST LIFE-FORMS INVERTEBRATES 25 SEA URCHIN Defense System Astropyga radiata Characterized by complete five-sided symmetry, sea urchins' bodies are covered by several mobile spines that give them a dangerous appearance. The spines are spread evenly throughout the skeleton's surface and 2 are used as a defense system. Aquatic chinoderms (phylum Echinodermata) are one of the best-known groups of marine invertebrates. Sea urchins and starfish, despite their apparent differences, are part of the same group and share characteristics such as five-radial symmetry. This phylum has an aquatic vascular system with SPINES There are two varieties of spines: larger primary spines and shorter secondary spines. They are usually cylindrical with a narrowed tip. many ambulacral grooves with tube feet, which it uses for locomotion, = capturing prey, and breathing. In addition, it has an internal skeleton . Used for made of calcareous plates. These creatures lack a brain or eyes, ; pete so they use photoreceptors to sense movement. Lh ct Ps ad 7 aie," oly \ ' | “i i fa ial Moves the water that ends at the pyloric cecum, which functions as a digestive gland Ambulacral Grooves These structures are hollow objects, enabling it to move at cylinders with thick walls surprising speed. These sensitive that straighten and move when a feet shrink if touched abruptly, starfish injects water into certain hiding behind a rim of rigid vesicles in its body. The ambulacral —_ spines that protect grooves end in suckers that the them from harm. animal uses to attach itself to STOMACH ESOPHAGUS fF 3 oy STARFISH ! , , Archaster typicus The muscles can make the tube feet move to either side, and the coordinated movement of all the feet in one direction causes the starfish to advance. Surrounds the food and breaks it down with stomach juices The area near the sucker secretes an adhesive substance that helps keep it attached to the surface. The lateral muscles in the groove contract, and the liquid returns to the sac for locomotion. Fills with water, The water passes and expands, and clings circulates to the sacs. to the surface The underside is covered by spines. Stages of _ Movement The sac contracts and puts = — - > 4 pressure on the ambulacral =, — ) a ih When the sac muscles The ambulacral groove and tube feet allow the groove. The muscles tense and == \ Closed = contract, they force the liquid starfish to perform the movements it needs for | force the water back into the r | valve to pass to the ambulacral locomotion. The feet are arranged in two sac, causing suction between ! | — al groove, which lengthens and parallel lines along the arm, and the feet at the the groove and the surface with a makes contact with an other end have a sensory function, monitoring which it makes contact. Sucker Substrate adjacent surface, or substrate. the substrate over which the creature moves. 26 THE SIMPLEST LIFE-FORMS INVERTEBRATES 27 * ‘ ! . , ' c = ‘i . = _% te, Tissues c 2 me ® 7 ree . . Legless W orms are invertebrates with long, soft bodies and no legs. They are + : ie) are formed in layers and are based on the oe oie presence of internal cavities. This annelid has ’ ae ie : three layers and one cavity, the coelom, which carries fluids through the body like a ‘ana iar’ ‘FOOD F heoht A hydraulic skeleton. Bacteria and or pal alt classified into three phyla. Flatworms are the simplest type; most are _ parasites, although some are free-living. Nematodes have a cylindrical body with a hard outer surface. Segmented worms are more plex; they include leeches, earthworms, and sea worms. ian species e ani ts, animals, and ‘humans. @ e . organic wastes ECTODERM COELOM ‘ —— Round body aia AT LEAST Flat body —— Segmented body PLATYHELMINTHES NEMATODA ANNELIDA own WORM SPECIES @— NECK Retracts and remains hidden ) f - i] . eke pe : E F = eae » © > so. —_—_____ Tissue Reproduction ‘ F ‘je ie me 4 ae oa : Flatworms and annelids are Lae ae eee eee . mh 2 , : ¢ a? qlastic " usually hermaphrodites; Digestive Y: em Ti Vite rs - i i = LEMNISCI . r nematodes usually have separate HOOKS» = - ~~. Food i sexes. In some cases the worm In annelid worms, the digestive system extends in a straight Hold the worm storage ,% splits into two, resulting in two line from the oral opening to the anus. It includes the mouth, in place = J new worms. muscular pharynx, esophagus, crop, gizzard, and intestine. : 3 -. v a Me ¢ - e ae Clitellum . * £ ¢ i a ae — : S 7 y 1 2 3 : yi: Dads hs ee taal ; 7 - oye te: kei ee, ' -_ | " i} Pa : i . " i" Us ® "y ip F li dulations along the ! PPS sie - re = <- 4 i dorsal-ventral plane i an - IOF ay. . -_ ‘ i. , @——— SPINES — : a” : Z ; : J ' Pierce the wall of f a. i i the host Segments -# i - = ha, i * Setae Setae are bristle-like structures. 28 THE SIMPLEST LIFE-FORMS INVERTEBRATES ointless Mollusks with a shell divided into two halves. The two parts of the shell are joined by an he body of most mollusks is soft, extremely flexible, and without joints, elastic ligament that opens the shell, adductor yet has a large and very hard shell. Most mollusks live in the ocean, ee een tee ae za Cockle but they are also found in lakes and land environments. eae ned Aunnccv all nivalves teach em All modern mollusks have bilateral symmetry, e pA ala elle ae hae ee Ea vee one cephalopod foot with sensory organs ; water and food. The tunnels can be from a and locomotion, a visceral mass, and a : : . Sickcruir Helix aspersa fraction of an inch long to over a yard long. Otter covering, called the mantel, that . GLAND me secretes the shell. Mollusks also have a very peculiar mouth structure called a radula. LAMELLIBRANCHIATA include most bivalves. They use gills to breathe and to feed. They have no differentiated head, eyes, or extremities. They can grow up to 5 inches (13 cm) long, and they rest on the ocean floor. Many mollusks live buried under the sand in order to hide from predators and the effects of waves, wind, and sudden changes in temperature. These mollusks are characterized by their large ventral foot, whose wave- like motions are used to move from place to place. The group comprises snails and slugs, and they can live on land, in the ocean, and in fresh water. When these animals have a shell, it is a single spiral-shaped piece, and the extreme flexibility of the rest of the body allows the gastropod to draw itself up completely within the shell. Gastropods have eyes and one or two pairs of tentacles on their head. Perna viridis PROTOBRANCHIA This class includes bivalves with a split lower foot, called a sole. Bivalves use their gills only to breathe. This subclass includes small bivalves 0.5 inch (13 mm) wide, called nutclams (Nucula nitidosa). PROSOBRANCHIA . h . ’ Cuttlefish, octopus, squid, and nautilus are called This mollusk subclass mainly includes 7 : \ cephalopods because their extremities, or marine animals. Some have mother-of-pearl! KIDNEY ; — a . a? tentacles, are attached directly to their heads. on the inside of their shell, whereas others HEART — 7 “ These predators are adapted to life in the have a substance similar to porcelain. . “hi : j ’ i oceans, and they have quite complex nervous, ~~ v , : a . =. # <2 | sensory, and motion systems. Their tentacles a : surround their mouths, which have a radula and a powerful beak. Cephalopods can be 0.4 inch (1 cm) long to several yards long. NAUTILOIDEA This subclass populated the oceans of the Paleozoic and Mesozoic periods, but today only one genus— Nautilus—survives. A nautilus has an outer shell, four gills, and ten tentacles. Its shell is made from calcium, is spiral in shape, and is divided into chambers. COLEOIDEA Cephalopods of this class have a very small internal shell, or none at all, and only two gills. Except for the nautilus, this class includes all cephalopods alive today-octopus, cuttlefish, and squid. — Gills Nervous system Nautilus sp. Digestive tract 30 THE SIMPLEST LIFE-FORMS —_—= — a = = = = = = Generating Added Value ivalves are sought after and cultivated for their pearls. Pearls are said to be the queen of gems, because they were discovered over 4,000 years ago and were used as important symbols in many ancient cultures. In spite of their high price, pearls start out as a nuisance for the animal that creates them, which could be an oyster, a clam, or a mussel. Oysters produce the most valuable pearls, which are noted for their luster. © MANTLE FOLD _ surrounds the mantle and controls the. of water. ~ ~ ly a Pearl Formation Occasionally grains of sand or parasites accidentally become lodged in an oyster's body and cannot escape. To relieve the annoyance, the oyster begins a defensive action and secretes a smooth, hard, crystalline substance called nacre around the object. Cultured pearls are formed from particles that are intentionally inserted into an oyster. SHELL Composed of two pieces or valves INNER SURFACE OF THE SHELL Sensory tentacles enable the oyster to Introduction of detect light and foreign body darkness. INCUBATION al Pearl cultivation began in Grain 7 Japan. It consists of inserting of sand *> into the body of a live oyster a small, round particle made from the shell of a freshwater bivalve. The oyster secretes mother-of-pearl substances from a gland in its liver to cover the object, and the pearl begins to grow. IGESTIVE GLAND ells absorb and st food particles. The oyster secretes nacre to cover it. HINGE LIGAMENT joins the two valves at their upper part. GROWTH OF THE PEARL New, uniform layers are constantly 3to8 added to the pearl, and the cultivator years leaves the pearl in place until it reaches the required diameter and quality. TIME IT TAKES During the process, humans intervene FOR A PEARL only to provide the oysters in farms TO GROW with the right temperature, water currents, and cleanliness to favor the LAYERS OF NACRE LAYERS OF NACRE growth of pearls. ON THE PEARL ON THE SHELL Ss ll oo Oysters Tied HANGING al A sal with OYSTERS 1 fee = ropes These oysters are Y 4 é AK a] D ite = suspended from lf ii I , Fe oh, i = bamboo _ in Types . (TENTACLES : Fae P — areas have sensory AGA See a Ks ty 44th td ee q ce —_ abundant plankton. of pearls organs. ao | 7 oy = 7 They can be round #s) if | F io or elongated like a NATURAL CULTURED ¢) | a ie = grain of rice. PEARL PEARLS t) "| = | | Bema ee pF A i, “2 = “= kf " ae, ote ; r. > <= a, clare i. = ‘We 1 oa eee = “4 a Fe 5 » ee - INVERTEBRATES 31 OYSTERS MUSSELS CLAMS as Rough Smooth Prickly i by Pearl The number of pearl cultivators is estimated at nearly 5,000. Japan is the main producer. Producers COMMON EUROPEAN fou y nacre dilear GILLS : absorb oxygen from the water. select the food. e a MUSCLE A fiber keeps the shellclosed. J HARVEST 0 Cultured pearls make up 9 lh % ‘ pearls currently sold. About } pearls are produced every year. However, OF THE HARVEST WILL " i pearl farming is a demanding and difficult YIELD PERFECT PEARLS. om ~. business because of the nature of pearl _~ oysters: out of 100 oysters cultivated, only ~ 30 will be harvested. " 4 32 THE SIMPLEST LIFE-FORMS Powertul Tentacles he eight-tentacled octopus is one of the few large ocean cephalopods to live in deep water. It is usually found on the rocky or sandy bottoms of shallow waters near the mouths of rivers. It generally moves slowly, sometimes moving in brief spurts, but it can reach great speeds when hunting or fleeing. Some are quite intelligent, having highly evolved brains. — Masters of Color For the octopus, taking on the color of the ocean floor is a camouflage strategy to hide from its prey. In deeper waters, another tactic is to become luminescent to attract the prey. But when the octopus changes colors while doing a certain dance, it is trying to attract the opposite sex. SKIN The skin is a highly elastic membrane that completely covers the octopus. - —, af ay Attack To attack, the octopus points its funnel in the direction opposite to its motion. The common octopus (Octopus vulgaris), a species that can grow up to 40 inches (1 m) long and inhabits the Mediterranean Sea and North Atlantic Ocean, moves among the rocks on the seafloor, preferably at night. It surprises its prey and makes skillful use of its tentacles and jaws, which can rotate. The tentacles stretch forward and outward as the octopus advances. MOUTH The mouth of an octopus has hard, chitin-like jaws for breaking shells. Using the wide area at the base of its tentacles, it envelops the prey. 4miles — per hour (6 km/h) Maximum speed of a fleeing octopus. Its speed is comparable to that of a fast-walking human. HEAD The head compresses and expands, depending on the octopus's breathing and movements. The head contains the brain but without a rigid ati ran ‘y The funnel muscles can act js} asa mechanism for fleeing. "Rather than directing the funnel forward, though, the octopus directs it to advance toward its prey. Large Predators Depending on its size, an octopus (like other large cephalopods such as the nautilus, cuttlefish, and squid) is carnivorous and eats both fish and other invertebrates: mollusks and crustaceans, especially crabs. It secretes a venom with its saliva to finish killing the prey before swallowing it. EYES Are located on the head. The octopus's fq & ~~ sense of sight is * ¥ |) exceptionally well r ' ; developed. # Grasping Ability An octopus often crawls among the rocks. Using the system of suckers, or adhesive discs, on its tentacles, an octopus clings to the seafloor or supports itself by attaching the suckers to the surfaces it encounters. By grasping with its forward tentacles, it can drag the rest of its body in that direction. relaxed muscle chitinous ring SUCTION contracted muscle Speedy Escape te The flow of water into and out of the funnel is regulated by alternately contracting and relaxing ring-shaped muscles and long muscles. By regulating the force at which the water is expelled, the octopus can flee at high speed through a kind of jet propulsion. The octopus moves in the direction its head is pointing, with its tentacles outstretched. The ring-shaped muscles relax, and the long muscles contract. Water enters. TENTACLES All eight tentacles have the same length. In the male, one tentacle functions as a genital organ. INVERTEBRATES 33 When the ring-shaped muscles contract, they a jet of water that propel: the octopus backward. SELF-DEFENSE WITH INK A gland located near the anus contracts when the octopus senses danger, expelling a fluid that creates a dark cloud in the water. The Funnel The funnel is the exit from the octopus's respiratory cavity. It is also extremely important for the creature's movement. The gills, inside the mantle, absorb oxygen from the water. When the cavity fills, the gills exchange oxygen for carbon dioxide to be emptied from the cavity. Funnel MUSCLES Powerful and versatile, with self-controlled movements, an octopus can move the entire weight of its body. SUCKERS Arranged in two rows on the lower surfaces for clinging to rocks and for grasping prey. Crustaceans and Arachnids COLORFUL ARACHNID Some species of the family Trombidiidae catch our attention because of their intense red color and the velvet-like COLORFUL ARMOR A SPECIAL FAMILY CHANGING OUTFITS QUALITY SILK SHARP FRONT LEGS SIXTH SENSE IN THE MIDDLE OF THE CHAIN POISONOUS STING piders, snakes, ticks, and mites all belong to the same class, Arachnida. They are covered with sensory hairs so tiny that they cannot be seen by the naked eye. In Greek mythology, Arachne was a woman who challenged the goddess Athena to weave faster than she herself could. This angered the goddess, who turned Arachne into a spider, forcing her ; (na oo appearance of their hair. : ? : if 2 ae & aoe — a - # ea ie i = - se —, fee eye ai. — on f to weave forever. That is where these creatures get their name. Within the world of crustaceans, well-known animals such as the shrimp, lobster, and crab are also discussed in this chapter. You will find details about their anatomy, their differences and similarities, and the way in which they live that will surprise you. Some species breathe through gills and also breathe through their skin. 36 CRUSTACEANS AND ARACHNIDS Colorful Armor ven though they inhabit all known environments, crustaceans are most closely identified with the aquatic environment. That environment is where they were transformed into arthropods with the most evolutionary success. Their bodies are divided into three parts: the cephalothorax, with antennae and strong mandibles; the abdomen, or pleon; and the back (telson). Some crustaceans are very small: sea lice, for instance, are no larger than one hundredth of an inch (a quarter of a millimeter). The Japanese spider crab, on the other hand, is more than 9 feet (3 m) long with outstretched legs, as it has legs in both the abdomen and the thorax in addition to two pairs of antennae. e INVERTEBRATES 37 PINCERS MULTIPLE FUNCTIONS SHELL are the front pair of All crustaceans have a MOVABLE The shell is hard and legs. They are used to number of appendages FINGER measures about 2.5 catch food. that are modified for inches (6.0 cm) across. different and varied 9 functions, depending on the species.. FIXED FINGER CEPHALOTHORAX FRONT LATERAL MANDIBLE MOUTH () EUROPEAN GREEN CRAB Carcinus maenas is a littoral crab that lives on most continents and that has become a plague. It comes in a variety of colors. THREE-LAYERED SKELETON Its interior part can contain up to 80 percent chitin. Wood Louse (Armadillidium vulgare) This invertebrate, belonging to the order Isopoda, is one of the few terrestrial crustaceans, and it is probably the one best adapted to life outside the water. When it feels threatened, it rolls itself up, leaving only its exoskeleton exposed. Even though it can reproduce and develop away from the water, it breathes through gills. The gills are found in its abdominal appendages and for this reason must be kept at specific humidity levels. That is also why the wood louse seeks dark and humid environments, such as under rocks, on dead or fallen leaves, and in fallen tree trunks. EXOSKELETON Extended animal Malacostraca is the name given to the class of crustaceans that groups crabs together with sea lobsters, shrimp, wood lice, and sea lice. The term comes from Greek, and it means “soft-shelled.” Sea and river crabs have 10 legs, and one pair of these legs is modified in a pincer form. Malacostraca are omnivorous and have adapted to a great variety of environments; the number of segments of their exoskeleton can vary from a minimum of 16 to more than 60. iy pi BRANCHIAL %. 4 CHAMBER=s BRANCHIALe. “ty is. —— ' SHRIMP AND CRABS Macrobrachium sp. The prawn is a 10-legged crustacean that lives in deep as APPENDAGES consist of a lower region The back segments Rolled-up are smaller, and - animal LEGS when they bend, i. wo — _ Fs A 2 ; they help enclose ni Fain ; : ees pris at THE PACIFIC SPIDER GARHACIEE Ps = 7 ( fa Mage The : ; : completely. CRAB CAN WEIGH UP TO WITHOUT i. j = | AS ke gid t pairs of legs. b _ fate et . | 45 pounds a : ; ss ~~ Anus i ” "= Egg needs /—" Zoea / |) Megalops /= Young crab “a 20 k ss = asaline va. At first, [ A In the sea or river bed, -i develops pincers © environment for the crab isa the larva grows seven to eight and migrates to less BARNACLE , its development. swimming larva. times its original size.. saline waters. COLONY Together Forever At birth, barnacles (Pollicipes cornucopia) are microscopic larvae that travel through the sea until they reach a rocky coast. Then they attach themselves to the shore by means of a stalk, which they develop Divided into from which two segmented ee meaner ABDOMEN water andi alt (PLEON) : withstand great external (exopod). Evolution variations in the THE FEWER THE SEGMENTS FORMED salinity of its living BY ITS BODY, THE MORE HIGHLY environment. EVOLVED THE CRUSTACEAN. THE CRAB'S LIFE CYCLE SEGMENTS Even though it is well adapted to variations in the salinity of the water, the BARNACLE TRANSVERSAL CUT Segmented legs Mouth female crab, after mating, always moves to saltier waters and lays her eggs there. The larvae will go through different stages before becoming crabs. Legs _# . extended to ~ Spawning catch food | The female lays her eggs in deep-water beds. Copepoda are tiny crustaceans that form part of plankton. Copepoda play a very important ecological role because they are a source of food for many marine animals. There are more than 10,000 species of copepoda. Most are marine ye sed Ti eatOg OLE atte mlae and EXOSKELETON species, though there are also some freshwater species. The majority then sgKm a. seit Dace theyiare attaches nore The greater its number of segments, the less measure between 0.02 and 0.1 inch (0.5-2 mm) long; the smallest ones Brey femme in ofle Spee ter Wi ese of bas highly evolved the species. (Sphaeronellopsis monothrix) reach only 0.004 inch (0.11 mm) in length, their lives, absorbing food from the water. Barnacles are edible. SEA LICE and the largest (Pennella balaenopterae) are 13 inches (32 cm) long. 38 CRUSTACEANS AND ARACHNIDS Changing Outfits CEPHALOTHORAX he lobster belongs to the crustaceans, which are characterized by, among other oe Mines 1 age things, an exoskeleton that supports and protects the body of the animal. The the héad and the thorax, exoskeleton has both advantages and disadvantages. The stiffness of the - on a tes eet z structure prevents growth, which is why the animal grows only when the shell is nate renewed. This process is called molting. During molting the layers of the new cuticle harden, and minerals and materials from the old exoskeleton are reabsorbed to create a new exoskeleton. @ SEGMENTED ABDOMEN The lobster is made of segments with appendages LOBSTER EXOSKELETON Palinuridae argus is made of a substance called chitin, which is strengthened by calcium salts. In the exoskeleton molting process, the new layers are formed in the cuticle; they then detach from the epidermis and form a new shell. This process uses a large amount of metabolic energy. hardness. Epicuticle Endocuticle A LOBSTER CAN LIVE 100 years AND NOT STOP GROWING 74 WALKING LEGS Five pairs of legs, of which one or more pairs are modified into pincers. © NEW ARTICULATED | SEGMENT e s, x, THE LOBSTER MoLts once a > ' S . 7 shitinous Exoskeleton The hard pincers help the lobster get food, and the segmented body allows for movement. However, the exoskeleton is a disadvantage in small places, because it ~ Cannot change shape. Even though the “i “ oskeleton protects the lobster from “abrasive contact, it can harm it ~ once it breaks, because the’ fissure Nill not mend until the next molting. i _ \ COLOR Its color varies from gray F — reen and yellow, [ Sack ot cluding even shadings of | as lack. HERMIT CRAB Dardanus arrosor : 2 ee : ae ~~ FROM THE BURSTING OF that give its body its : € Bist. {ae er ; | - ; ™ a, a * of hydration. INVE RATES 39 ing of the Exoskeleton The presence of the stiff exoskeleton means that crustacean growth takes place during the molting cycle. This phenomenon occurs cyclically and frequently in the young of the species, with longer periods between molts as the crab matures. During ecdysis (when the crab molts), the old shell breaks and detaches, and the animal is helpless. Many functions, such as reproduction, behavior, and metabolic processes are directly affected by the physiology of the molt. RST SKELETON =| * a Once the crab reaches adulthood, its exoskeleton covers its body without any change for about 300 days. Between 30 and 40 days before ecdysis, new bristles form, and the epidermis detaches itself. Hours before the break, the lobster takes in large quantities of water until it fills up and breaks the old exoskeleton. VULNERABLE While it waits for the new exoskeleton to grow, the lobster hides so it does not end up a victim of its predators. During ecdysis itself, the lobster remains immobile for approximately 12 hours, while it grows in size because a In a Stranger's Home Hermit crabs belong to the Paguridae and Coenobitidae families. Unlike other crustaceans, a hermit crab does not have a hard exoskeleton on its abdomen to protect it. This is why it uses shells from sea snails as protection for part of its body. 40 CRUSTACEANS AND ARACHNIDS Sharp Front Legs rustaceans have appendages that generally branch in two directions and are adapted to aquatic life. A characteristic shared by all crustaceans is their articulated shell, which leaves two pairs of antennae uncovered. They also have a pair of mandibles, two pairs of maxillae, and a pair of appendages in each segment of the body. Their pincers have enough strength so they can trap their prey and feed themselves. The class Malacostraca includes lobsters, crabs, shrimp, and prawns, among other animals. LOBSTER Homarus vulgaris is the name for about 2,000 species of crustaceans of the suborder DUBLIN BAY ANTENNAE Natantia. Shrimp are characterized by their semitransparent and flat PRAWN The brain receives the information bodies, with appendages modified for swimming, and by their long Nephrops Se of the antennae. Their length varies between 0.1 inch and about 8 inches (from norvegicus body through the ventral nerve. a few mm to 20 cm), depending on the species. They live in salt water, brackish water, and fresh water. They survive by burying themselves for almost the entire day and coming out at dusk to catch their food. TELSON Fin-like structures used for swimming. The telson ef makes up the caudal fan together with the last abdominal segment and the uropods. There are no appendages. Two small, movable pairs of claws bring food to the lobster's mouth. i PINCERS are mobile appendages that it uses for defense and are situated in the cephalothorax, and even though they are rather small attack. With its pincers, the CUTTING EDGE : 4 shrimp can trap its prey with Thinner and with sharp - . y z Besnet ka Ree they a great deal of pressure so mere li ba cut _ 2 # TENDON maven : : / = aa that it cannot escape. prey. ; | [ JOINTS AND LEVERS Crustaceans, with slim limbs and little space for large muscles, are able to move with great strength because the majority of their joints function as simple levers, with the lever arm corresponding to the limb itself, and the fulcrum corresponding to the joint. PEREIOPODS Five pairs of appendages UROPODS PLEOPODS are shaped like a spade. First five pairs of The telson is like a barb. abdominal appendages Both are used by the A lobster is characterized by two enormous pincers formed by the first pair of legs. It lives on rocky FIRST THREE PAIRS FIRST TWO PAIRS have been adapted for shrimp for its characteristic escape are used to feed itself. The pincers catch bottoms in shallow water, and it migrates seasonally toward the coast in summer and to greater depths TEETH The lobster has thick, strong teeth and a muscle capable of backwards. sexual functions. and hold prey. in winter. The lobster is typically a nocturnal animal : i Sn z crushing snail shells, clams, and seeking its food when the Sun sets. Its food consists even a human finger. A LAST THREE PAIRS LAST TWO PAIRS mainly of mollusks, bivalves, worms, and fish. Resistance power work as walking legs that are aided by the pleopods. are similar to each other and are used to swim. REBOUND EFFECT FAST WALK Suspended from its joints, the body jumps by means of them and on them and multiplies the energy of its movement. PENDULUM AT REST SLOW WALK The body remains close to the ground, The body operates like the weight the center of gravity is lowered, and of a pendulum. Close to the ground, movements are slow and rhythmic. it saves energy by moving ina swinging motion. The body, elevated higher than its joints, tends to fall like an inverted pendulum, which helps with movement. Of all crustaceans, the crab has surprising mobility and agility. It has five pairs of legs, four of which are walking legs, despite the fact that it moves laterally instead of forward. The crab-like movement is due to the placement of its legs and the general design of its body. A crab's walk is funny, but its technique is effective for both swimming and walking, even over such varied surfaces as beach sand, rock, and —for some species— tree branches. Muscle 42 CRUSTACEANS AND ARACHNIDS : In the Middle of the ¢ oni ooplankton include thousands of distinct species belonging to very different groups: es these species are protists, coelenterates, worms, crustaceans, and other small, we organisms. Unicellular, eukaryotic protists constitute a large group of species of z 200} Neti photosynthesis, provide food for the zooplankton. Phytoplankton also serve as food for pA hice. crustaceans, and larval-stage fish. Once they grow up, the larvae serve as food for schools of small fish, which ae are in turn food for larger fish, including plankton-feeding whales that sometimes eat ieee small fish. ‘| a ec > IA [ t CYCLOPOID COPEPOD Are typically oceanic, though some have Euphausia superba Sab Se EYE: 7 15 inches Krill have only one adapted to fresh water, and others are even Is one of the most abundant and (3.8 cm) large, compound," adapted to life on land. All have a body successful species on the Earth. black eye. divided into a 13-segment cephalothorax pee Rai eo. ' 7 H * with B pairs of appendages, a stomach Feaclingit hermes iminn ene with six segments, and, at the extreme Ktill typically emit a greenish posterior, an unsegmented telson. light that can be seen at night. al a = . =| RE re, { | LEGS ' With their feathery * — — Cyclops sp. f legs krill filter out the 5 This little crustacean small algae on which mS #7 7 swims by jumping with pail tchia nc ob ett they feed. . - its legs. It feeds on animal and plant OF KRILL MAY GATHER FEET 7 remains. attract the water i * current toward the HOW IT FLEES TROPHIC CHAIN Fe raiaeeanare a The krill makes use of its telson, backward. These crustaceans group in The food cycle is initiated with a vegetable producer, comprising five paddles, to drive itself giant schools, with thousands of which begins the chain for consumers. Those that feed on ‘ through the water. It reaches great individuals concentrated in each cubic producers are primary consumers, those that feed on * | : ts speed and moves jumping forward and _syard of water. primary consumers are secondary consumers, and so on. 4 oN * Brachiopods —_ 0.5 second have a body of variable segmentation, usually a ; « iy i eon ; == bivalve shell, supplied with leaflike appendages for . « sm, F locomotive and brachial functions (hence the Ir Tertiary Fr name brachiopod). They are abundant in lakes and ry oo, eS pat ag still water, feeding on debris and microscopic ; ' SA aa plants. Because there are few males, eggs from a a 30 indhte ~~ 4 female can develop without fertilization in new “=a individuals, a process known as parthenogenesis. i *, (50 cm) Secondary consumers 10 inches (25 cm) Octopuses, penguins, fish _ ai% Pf ¥ me WR Daphnia sp. has two pairs of antennae and feet adapted to swimming and grasping. The second antenna pair serves as a locomotive organ. The water flea feeds on microscopic seaweed Each specimen of krill has a photophore in its and the remains of dead animals. abdomen, a structure that allows it to emit light because of a chemical reaction that involves IS THE AVERAGE LIFESPAN OF A WATER FLEA. oxygen and various other chemical compounds a‘ called luciferin, luciferase, and adenosine Producers Phytoplankton asleelis P . : v., é Pa triphosphate (ATP). One order of crustaceans _ — . 2. - is generically known as krill. 0.1 inch (3 mm) = aa) | ~ sai i , om \ = i, = j aul 44 CRUSTACEANS AND ARACHNIDS INVERTEBRATES 45 e e EXOSKELETON p ¢ Cla a | | | ] y Growth happens through molting, a process by which the spider gets rid of its old exoskeleton. 9 In its youth the spider grows through successive Vv rachnids make up the largest and most important class of IS THE NUMBER OF ee it ent ua beers ait il eee. = 4 A Fi A a The front tl chelicerata. Among them are spiders, scorpions, fleas, ticks, gol wari deiscae shell comes off, and and mites. Arachnids were the first arthropods to colonize Pere THE WORLD. 3 HU tents The spider raises j terrestrial environments. The fossil remains of scorpions are found SPIDER eo eee beginning in the Silurian Period, and they show that these Tegenarla duellica It removes the old exoskeleton, and the new one hardens on contact with the air. animals have not undergone major changes in their Pe ie morphology and behavior. The most well-known Laanel tlio arachnids are the scorpions and spiders. @ to its body. CEPHALOTHORAX (PROSOMA) ABDOMEN (OPISTHOSOMA) CHELICERAE SIMPLE EYE re The female can transport up to 30 offspring on its back. CLOACA INTESTINE ~ SOVARIES PEDIPALPS The terminal pedipalp forms a copulating organ through which the male inseminates the female. STOMACH PEDIPALPS act as sensory organs and manipulate food. Males also use them for copulation. SILK GLAND GENITAL EMPEROR SCORPION ORIFICE Scorpions Feared by people for ages, the Pandinus imperator The claws hold scorpion is characterized by the Like other scorpions, it has a the ar om fact that its chelicerae (mouth stinger crisscrossed by Late CHELICERAE parts that in scorpions are large) venomous glands. It move up and down. S i d ers and pedipalps form a pincer. The measures between 5 and 7 In the more primitive p body is covered with a chitinous inches (12 and 18 cm) long, spiders (such as are the most common arthropods. They have exoskeleton that includes the though some have reached a the surprising property of secreting a tarantulas), the "4 cephalothorax and abdomen. length of 8 inches (20 cm). chelicorse cue eide PATELLA substance that, on contact with the air, creates very fine threads that spiders skillfully manage for diverse purposes. Once a female spider mates, she deposits her eggs inside a cocoon of special silk, called an egg sack. The appearance of spiders is unmistakable: the two main sections of the body, the thorax (also called a prosoma) and the abdomen (also called an opisthosoma), are united by a narrow stalk (the pedicel). Spiders have four pairs of eyes, whose distinctive size and placement help characterize different families.of spiders. Their chelicerae end ih.fangs that cakry conduits from venom glands. Spiders Kail their prey by using their chelicerde.to apply venom. to side like a pincer. TIBIA WALKING LEGS The spider has four pairs of legs for walking. The hairs help it to recognize terrain. Tick Visible dorsal Mites and Ticks ae var Both are members of the Acari order. They are differentiated by their size. Mites are vata . ue i coon smaller; ticks may measure up to an inch in length (several centimeters). Mites have many diverse forms and are parasites of animals and plants. Ticks have a common life cycle of removed easily from the tick. three stages: larva, nymph, and adult, during which they live off the blood of their hosts. METATARSUS Amblypygi Small arachnids measure between 0.2 WITH ITS LEGS SPREAD and 2 inches (0.4 and 4.5 cm). The OUT, A SPIDER CAN MEASURE chelicerae are not as large, though the pedipalps are strong and are used to — @ e 4 l Dy inche S capture prey. The first pair of legs are modified touch-and-sensing appendages, whereas the last three PEDIPALP (30 cm) take care of movement. Because of a ARACHNID Phryna spider's flattened body, its walk is IN LENGTH. similar to that of the crab. grossetaitai Hele TARSUS Adhesion material INVERTEBRATES 47 46 CRUSTACEANS AND ARACHNIDS (Quality silk with whi h 6) The amount that a @) thread of silk can stretch p from its original length 0 spiderwebs and traps, and shelter lining, spider silk Pl Other uses. The spider can use it as a thread for tracking its position or as a safety thread when it eithi it is suddenly dislodged and falling. A spider can also us nd 1 mida Cr | owe ‘spiders structures, such as the hammock web b by the tiny Linyphia triangularis. Other webs, such as i those of the families Linyphiidae and Agelenidae, are not F made of sticky silk but only a dry variety. The silk of : f 5 ) Dry web material breaks from the spider is almost as strong as steel, and it — the action of the chelicerae and from food trapped in the web. The spider replaces this broken has double the elasticity of nylon. Some giant tropical spiders build spiderwebs _ material with stickier and tata as strong as fishing nets, a thickener with which they can trap af** ADLU: even birds. - 2 With the silk glands (glandulae ‘ - = ampullaceae), the spider — a constructs the spokes of the web. Dry strands that run * Ps , from one spoke to the next 2) 4 r form a spiral. ill All| SPINNERETS SILK GLAND ' ; F ANGLE The silk emerges through Moves the silk to the spinnerets. ; The spider adds a loose thread a a } spinnerets; the thin threads are The secretion is a liquid substance F j 4 = fastened to each side of the SOMPOSITION J joined to each other before they that is insoluble in water. j ii bridge, moves to the middle of ~ The silk is made of complex ; dry to form a thicker strand. F P the bridge, and lowers itself to form a triangle with the silk.. = proteins. Males as well as females generally have five to seven different types of special silk glands 5 BEGINNI for producing these proteins. il : f The threads set up a bridge. P , The spider lets itself sway in the wind until it falls and finds its footing. THE NUMBER OF RECORDED SPECIES OF + WEB-SPINNING SPIDERS e a a - 2 mea + 48 CRUSTACEANS AND ARACHNIDS INVERTEBRATES 49 sixth Sen € piders do not have good vision and c Chelicerae and Eyes re Chelicerae are formed by two segments: a basal segment that contains the venom gland and the rest of the appendage that forms a fang at the end of only a short di stance. For this reason t = EYELET which the venom channel opens. Normally spiders * ._ oe Allows for have eight simple eyes, each one supplied with a single carry out many of their activities at ni gi i 360-degree vision. lens, optical rods, and a retina. The eyes are basically However, some spiders do have sharp vision. To b used for the perception of moving objects, but some i “_ : EYE can form images. aware of the world around them, spiders use the ~ The retina inside the eye an move in three fimensions, which permits the spider to 160k in all directio: focus on an object. sensory hairs that are located at the ends of their limbs. Each body hair is sensitive to differences in pressure. Some hairs are also capable of transmitting vibrations to the exoskeleton. DYSDERA CROCOTA Dysdera Hairs Dinopis sp. Six ay eyes S , — Two powerful eyes Are used to conduct stimuli to the cells. Some are - short and stiff, others long and flexible. According — i e hair, the mechanoreceptors provide — forn ation out the world that -~ Z ; , * enemies, ob ' il @ t ) @@ A O 4 | rr 5 a -_— . i" ; rl j i i " Dia ‘ “ aa ~~ a : | j 7 } iy a Exocuticle = : oe 4 F “ b .- bo a ‘ z= ‘ - JUMPING SPIDER CRAB SPIDER — : Ss audax Xysticus cristatus Endocr ‘Four large eyes on the Eight spread-out eyes front of its head and four ‘ Maller eyes on the upper part of the head. — Epidermis [© egumentary > pincers; they are le length, and in the males the e1 i receptacle that transfers the sperm during copulation. 1 lower parts of the pedipalps are used for chewing. TRICHOBOTHRIA TACTILE HAIR is a long, tactile hair. perceives the sensory flow of the environment. he | : -— ’ -e + PEDIPALP . i _ | Appendage used to get to know _ the environment a J s ; ] Eg’ | THORN = Action Contact with the air Action Contact with an object Hairs that feel 1 vibrations and sense the presence of f strangers be Appendage with Ke Trichobothria " a fang that e@ perceives secretes venom HAIR (TARSAL = : movements. i ORGAN) Reaction Reaction Senses The hair does not bend, The hair curves, and TUFT OF HAIR humidit and the angle decreases. the angle is greater. OF A CLAW y -. i. vA ~ 50 CRUSTACEANS AND ARACHNIDS 4 = = iz Te PM: | ‘a Poisonous Sting enomous arachnids are the group of arthropods most feared by people. Even if a bite may be fatal to another animal, it is unlikely that it will be fatal to a human being, who would be attacked only as a means of defense in cases of fear or danger. The scorpion stands out among the most dangerous species. It uses its stinger when it wants to be certain of catching a difficult prey. Another notable example is the black widow, whose tiny body produces one third as much venom as a rattlesnake. The Most Dangerous Of the 38,000 known species of spiders, only about 30 have venom that is harmful to humans. Some 30 are hunters or trappers, but others are small, peaceful weavers. The black widow (Latrodectus mactans) is one <. of the shyest. The venom that it injects (toxalbumin) is a Sp e C1esS neurotoxin that acts principally on the nerve endings. Still, the black widow bites only when provoked. The of spiders have truly wandering spider (Phoneutria fera) is one of the most dangerous venom. aggressive arachnids. It is large, and its venom is fast- acting, capable of killing most prey in 15 minutes. PALP OR PEDI er a — Ong r ER Heteropoda venatoria Because the hunting spider 4 does not have a jaw, it has to use its chelicerae to take its food apart when it feeds. The chelicerae are also used during copulation. DSITION “RICA a %, jon isa cocktail of substances, tassiuim salts, digestive enzymes, peptides, The potassium alters the al nerves and paralyzes e able the cardiac — and can also rVvous OF Cause pulmo’ edema. | wy : : TELSON STINGER Is located in the last ? segment. _ VENOM GLANDS The secretion comes 4.” £ - SCORPIONS es Scorpions are grouped in six families, the most important being the Buthidae because 4 . * : it contains the most dancers for the “ 2 potency of their venom. The form of their bodies helps them hide under rocks, tree bark, and various kinds of debris. Scorpi ez bs ore te is common among scorpions, especially after copulation. The only . Po places in the world where x + te CEPHALOTHORAX are An ica and Greenlat ae The scorpion does not go out in search of food; rather, it waits until food passes by it. The scorpion can also find food by accident. y) The scorpion directs the front of its body toward the animal, approaching to a distance of 2 to 4 inches (5 to 10 cm), when it lowers its pedipalps in preparation for attack. Scorpions have long, fine hairs called, trichobothria, located in the pedipalps/7 J i ip: i ‘J Me, > PEDIPALP prey, it,walks around the vi trapping, it..Then it uses its ~ pedipalps to contain the - attacked animal. : a. “yg 2? tr 3 Once the scorpion is clo: = Oe CLAW — PECTEN INVERTEBRATES 51 HOW THE _ STINGER WORKS Two conduits run from the venom glands to openings at the end of the telson. When the scorpion stings, muscles press the walls of the telson against the venom glands to — 5 force venom through the hole of the stinger into a wound. This pre is controlled by the scorpion, whic adininisters the proper dose 0 = . om, since it cannot quick al Beencrate —" if it fa - DESERT scorn ya arizon This structure is made up of numerous sensory structures, mechanoreceptors, and chemoreceptors. r gh, rats er ‘ a at i” * ry rs ae < i =_— =e . i q 1 A. i . oly a4 oo | md r s sill aa = = : S ae he “ ' Gi a 4 "If the prey r : the scorpion uses its * stinger tovinj le Venom. Venom is F administered,by the scorpion until it a , kills the animal. _ = Insects a, ar~ \" nsects make up the largest and most varied group of arthropods. Most reproduce easily, and there are insects adapted to any environment. Their bodies are protected by a form of armor. Arthropods are currently believed to be the only living things capable of surviving a nuclear winter. They have highly developed sensory organs that A PECULIAR SENSE OF SIGHT THE SECRET OF SUCCESS This tropical insect has a pair THE BETTER TO SEE of eyes on each side of its body, giving it a very wide field YOU WITH of vision. TYPES OF MOUTHS SUCKING AND PIERCING os enable them to see long distances. The diversity and sheer number of insect species, estimated at 1.5 million, are a testimony to their evolutionary success. They have been successful, in part, GREAT WALKERS METAMORPHOSIS HIGH-QUALITY JUMPERS ORDER AND PROGRESS THE ART OF FLYING GOAL: SURVIVAL DIVING, SWIMMING, ONE FOR YOU, AND SKATING ONE FOR ME... > because they are small, need less food than larger organisms, and have extraordinarily developed means of movement that keep them from being easy victims for predators. 54 INSECTS , INVERTEBRATES 55 ’ \ * \ The Secret of Success Leven depen tev ‘ ri The class Chilopoda (centipedes, including r many carnivores and predators) and the class Diplopoda (millipedes) are known as myriapods. Their patterns of movement are both complex and efficient. ensory antennae, appendages on the head that can be used to chew, crush, or grab, highly i developed eyes on the sides of the head, and pairs of jointed legs with functions that depend on the species—all are outstanding common features of insects and millipedes (subphylum Myriapoda). Insects, also called hexapods, have six legs attached to the thorax. Myriapods are multi-segmented arthropods that have developed only on land. @ Antennae ‘] i 4 j / y jf / F / | | | ri £ } Alf i 3 | iy CENTIPEDE BILATERAL Two Pairs of Wings , i Scolopendra sp. SYMMETRY = 2 : — _| HEAD Some ancient species had three pairs of e) 5 14 The entire body of wings. Today, however, insects have one or ee J h¥ \ insects and THORAX two pairs. Butterflies, dragonflies, bees, and WINGS | y | f Leas myvriapods is — _ wasps use two pairs to fly, but other 1 Tan pairs per composed of pairs, insects fly with only one pair. , i segment coor arg arranged along an Imaginary ABDOMEN | it \ metameres. IMmaginiaty: an ? Fy suits. 7 ‘- A ] : [ i, _ natural beehive. i =f r f Fiitel | 1h | i | | r= — —= The honey i is stored in steel tanks \ i | } ——— From 25 to 50 pounds | | for a week and up to a month to r | i (11 to 23 kg) of honey | allow any impurities to separate. , ie ** | | are obtained trom , | Bottling and storage require an | 1 Li ‘| each super. | : A : | ik =— | i } Centrifuge environment that is dry to prevent — | r = ci the honey from absorbing moisture Boots Smoker T ! The frames have | | and that is free of any odors, which 1. , i; i Zz yawire , | might contaminate fl | : ‘ . a | | ie . ie construction. 4 1 7 , ' I the honey. — —* Applied by means of a smoke-producing The movable frame system allows for frame removal is a machine that rotates. The honey 7 mechanism, it scares the bees and causes without affecting the young brood, and the frames can i is heated to a temperature that them to eat honey, reducing their tendency to be used again. Before Langstroth's invention, these liquefies it. It is drained from the a F eel fly and sting. frames were fixed in place. frames and separated from the wax. 8&8 RELATIONSHIP WITH PEOPLE Hungry Together nder specific environmental conditions, locusts reproduce very rapidly and form a swarm. In Africa, the Middle East, and India locust plagues destroy vegetation and produce great crop losses. Consequently, this type of plague represents a great danger to agriculture and causes great economic loss, hunger, and illnesses in affected populations. Chemical, physical, and biological methods are used to repel the locusts, reducing the harmful effects of the invasion. @ 100 tons OF VEGETABLES ARE WHAT A MEDIUM SWARM OF LOCUSTS, FORMED BY 50 MILLION 4 INSECTS, EATS IN ONE DAY. ~ 1931 IS THE YEAR WHEN A LOCUST PLAGUE ATE ALL OF THE CROPS AND LEFT CLOSE TO 100,000 PEOPLE DEAD IN NORTH AFRICA. Locust Plague The species that causes plagues of locusts on the African continent is the desert locust, Schistocerca gregaria. This insect belongs to the Acrididae family and to the order Orthoptera. The locust has an elongated body, about 2 to 3 inches (6-8 cm). The locust modifies its behavior and appearance in response to environmental ‘onditions. It also feeds on most crops, on wild ants, and on some trees, such as sapwoods. INVERTEBRATES ©9 How Does the Plague Start? EF) When rainfall creates the appropriate Lefl conditions for their reproduction, locusts that live in desert or semiarid regions multiply at a dizzying rate. If the species is in the solitary phase, it is harmless, but when rains come and bring about abundant plant life, the locusts gather together, increasing their reproductive capacity. At ay \i —_— ‘s j= SUMMER BREEDING AND CONSECUTIVE MIGRATION ZONE Locusts reproduce at a rate of millions at a time, and they devour all of the food that lies along their path. The map shows the two main summer breeding zones. Pest Control = The countries victimized by locusts defend _ ae ' themselves by chemical or biological means on the land — | or from the air. Pesticide use is restricted, and pesticides can pe be used against a swarm only when it has begun to form, because misapplication of a pesticide can affect other insects that point the locusts mutate into their gregarious phase and change not only their movements but also their morphology. Each female is capable of laying 120 eggs, so that an area of 2.5 acres (1 ha) can breed up to 600 million locusts, which will gather into mile-long swarms that travel large distances in search of food. «= WINTER AND SPRING BREEDING AND CONSECUTIVE MIGRATION ZONE The swarm of locusts moves to other zones in order to reproduce and feed itself. Afterward, during winter and spring, the locusts retrace their path, and the cycle starts over again. and crops. The locusts are controlled by the application of poisonous bait and by plowing up the ground to bury the eggs. LOCUSTS IN ANTIQUITY The devastating effects of locusts can be traced back thousands of years. Locusts were as one of the | RELATIONSHIP WITH PEOPLE INVERTEBRATES Lifesaving Saliva ee lle feeding on blood, the With 300 teeth in its triple jaw, Every time these worms bite a host, leech secretes its own tech cis he vt fn stances re med oth ati pv at he powerful pharynx and the saliva from glands in their mouth. body Sule gating aie . , sucker on its mouth. Between Anticlotting components, vasodilators, digested. Its salivary glands Te. the rea it vas grands eet and anesthetics have been identified produce hirudin, a specific ches, stomach complaints, eye diseases, mental illness, and other ihe Tee Bleed irom cletting. ee aban condi NS. As the use of drugs increased, the medicinal use of leeches was = Researchers are also trying to fabricate gradually forgotten. In the 1980s, however, leeches once again began to be ee eee sava through theluse ot bioengineering techniques. used in microsurgery and reconstructive surgery. A LEECH CAN ABSORB AN AMOUNT OF BLOOD EQUAL TO 10 times THE MASS OF ITS BODY. THE DECAMERON Illustration of a chapter of the Decameron by Boccaccio, which shows the use of leeches to treat illnesses. The patient is the Roman emperor Galerius, who has a disease that ! causes the putrefaction “= of the body. The three doctors, aghast at his condition, have put leeches on his body to cure him. Once the leech's mouth is placed on the body, it begins to suck blood at the rate of one cubic inch every 2 hours and ~~ eo aanies: The sections of the = , : : : leech's body allow it C2 y to flex and assume . HOW A LEECH TRAVELS al ‘ . y ‘ a. different postures. At either end of the leech is a cavity that the 1 z =r " leech can use to attach itself to a surface. To ry - ’ move forward, it attaches one end on the ground and, with an 1 undulating movement, —_ draws the other end ‘ : French doctor who believed ' eeyard hd a a y) Ancient Uses The use of leeches in cure anything from local pains to th - ee 3 s ‘ at most diseases were medicine goes back over inflammation and mental disease. In caused by the inflammation of 3,000 years. In Greece, Rome, and the 18th and 19th centuries, leeches j the intestines and who ; BREEDING FARM Syria these worms were used to were sold in European pharmacies, ; preferred bleeding we leeches . THE ONLY FARM IN THE WORLD THAT remove blood from many areas of and they became very popular in a ocr ane caine ea i The leech advances its front When its rear end reaches SUPPLIES LEECHES IS LOCATED IN the body. It was believed that the therapies of the day, especially Focaiien arate aa tis] ail) th alive Wie ite ile cthistelva| eon Ge gan WALES, IN THE UNITED KINGDOM. IT bloodletting, or phlebotomy, could in France. fenorccdinraence’ underlying surface. It then leech attaches the rear end HAS MORE THAN 50,000 LEECHES *Sdkaws its rear end forward. to the underlying surface, and the sequence of THAT ARE SHIPPED TO motions is repeated. LABORATORIES AND HOSPITALS IN 30 COUNTRIES. Aa F LEI Leeches are classified according to how they feed. One group of leeches includes animals whose pharynx has no teeth and cannot be turned outward. A second group includes leeches whose pharynx is toothless but can be turned outward like an ] ” This leech is used in medicine to treat the elephant's trunk, projecting out of the There are 600 species of leeches. in freshwater environments, but a few congestion of veins leech's mouth, and can be inserted into the Leeches usually have 34 segments, but live in saltwater, and some have adapted in reconstructive and ELASTIC BODY host's soft tissues. The third group includes they can have 17 or 31. They live mainly to life on land in warm, damp places. pee surgeries. The The scorned body ef ig leech aes H, to , A F F ite causes a move with undulating movements when highly specialized leeches in which the “ hemorrhage where the necessary, for example, to Walk The leech can SUCKER pharynx cannot be turned outward but is tissue graft is placed, also put on a show when it is on alert in the The leech has two suckers, one at its armed with three chitinous jaws with J imitating the circulation presence of a host. At such times it manages front end, where the mouth and jaw are serrated edges. of the blood. to stand itself up on one of its ends. located, and another at the rear. 92 GLOSSARY Abdomen Posterior portion of the body of arthropods consisting of similarly formed segments, containing the reproductive organs and a part of the alimentary canal. In insects and arachnids, it is the posterior section of the body. Adaptation A structural, physiological, or behavioral trait that allows an organism to live in its environment. Ambulacral Groove In echinoderms, any of the radial grooves through which the hydraulic system's tube feet protrude. Anaerobe An organism that can live without free oxygen. Annelids Animals with a long cylindrical body consisting of ring-formed segments. Antennae A pair of long sensory appendages on the head of many arthropods. Arachnid An eight-legged arthropod. Arachnologist A scientist who studies arachnids-spiders and related groups. Arthropod An animal with articulated appendages and a segmented body, covered by an exoskeleton. Asexual Reproduction Any reproductive process, such as the production of gemmae or the division of a cell or organism into two or more approximately equal parts, that does not involve gametes joining together. Bilateral Symmetry Corporal form whereby the right and left halves of an organism are approximate mirror images of each other. Biology The science that studies living organisms-their constitution, structure, function, and relations. Brachyopods A group of marine invertebrates whose soft body is protected by a shell consisting of two parts called valves. Calcite A form of the chemical compound calcium carbonate. Carrion Eaters An animal that feeds on dead animals it finds. Given the occasion, some large carnivores such as lions and hyenas can behave like carrion eaters. Caste A social group that carries out specific tasks, characteristic of ants and bees, among other insects. Celoma A cavity formed between layers of mesoderm in which the alimentary tract and other internal organs are suspended. Cephalopod A class of exclusively marine mollusks with tentacles or legs attached to the head. These appendages have rows of suckers that are used for capturing prey and copulation. Cephalothorax The head and thorax combined in one single body segment. Chelicera First pair of appendages in crabs, sea spiders, and arachnids, usually in the form of pincers or fangs. Chitin Tough, durable polysaccharide that contains nitrogen and is found in the exoskeleton of arthropods or other surface structures of many invertebrates, and also in the cell walls of fungi. Class One of the many divisions into which scientists classify animals. The invertebrates form a separate class of their own. Classification The process of establishing, defining, and ordering taxa within a hierarchical series of groups. Cocoon A protective sheath usually made of silk. Many insects make cocoons to protect themselves during the pupa stage, until they become adults. Colony A group of animals of the same species that live and work together to survive. Community The entire population of organisms that inhabit an environment in common and who interact with one another. Compound Eye In arthropods, a complex eye made of many separate units, each of which has light-sensitive cells and a lens that can form an image. Crustacean An animal of the arthropod group, with antennae and articulated appendages, that uses gills to breathe and has a body protected by a thick covering. Cuticle An organic, noncellular protective covering secreted by the epidermis. Defecation The part of an organism's digestive process that consists of eliminating undigested matter. Dermis The internal layer of the skin below the epidermis. Deuterostoma An animal in which the anus is formed in or near the developing embryo's blastophore zone, and whose mouth is formed afterward in another location; the echinoderms and the chordates are deuterostoma. Dimorphism One species that exists in two distinct forms. Echinoderms Invertebrate marine animals. The bodies of the adults have a pentagonal symmetry. Underneath the skin they have a calcareous skeleton with spines and protuberances. They have an internal hydraulic system, connected with ambulacral feet, that makes locomotion possible. Endemic Native to a particular geographical region and restricted to it. Endoderm One of the three layers of the embryonic tissue of animals; it originates in the epithelium that covers certain internal structures. Epicuticle The thin, outermost layer of the arthropod exoskeleton, consisting primarily of wax. Epidermis The outermost layer of cells. Epithelial Tissue Type of tissue that surrounds a body or structure or covers a cavity. Epithelial cells form one or more regular layers with little intercellular material. Etology The comparative study of animal behavior in its natural habitat, and the evolutionary, genetic, ecological, and physiological factors that influence its manifestation. Evolution The changes in the genetic reservoir from one generation to the next, as a consequence of processes such as mutation or natural selection, among other things. Exoskeleton The external covering supporting the body, co- mmonly found in arthropods. It is like an arti- culated shell made of chitin; it serves as a su- pport for muscles and the soft internal organs. Eyelet Simple light receptor, common among invertebrates. Family A category in taxonomy that groups genus together; lower than order and higher than genus. Fossil The preserved remains of an organism that disappeared a long time ago. Gamete The mature reproductive cell that combines with a gamete of the opposite sex to forma zygote that is usually diploid; male gametes are INVERTEBRATES 93 called spermatozoids and female gametes are called ovules. Gastrovascular Cavity A digestive cavity with an opening, characteristic of the phyla Cnidaria and Ctenophora. It has digestive and circulatory functions. Genus A category in taxonomy that groups species together. Geotropism A directional response to gravity. Gonopore A pore in the reproductive apparatus through which gametes pass. Hemocell A blood-filled cavity inside the tissues; characteristic of animals with an incomplete circulatory system, such as mollusks and arthropods. Hermaphrodite An organism that has both reproductive systems, male and female; hermaphrodites may or may not self-fertilize. Hormone An organic molecule, secreted in small amounts by one part of an organism, that regulates the function of other tissue or organs. Host An organism in which a parasite lives. Hydrostatic Skeleton A skeleton in which fluid is contained by muscular walls that transfer the force from one part of the body to another when subjected to pressure. 94 GLOSSARY Invasive Relating to a species or organism that was brought into an environment and harms biodiversity, agricultural or fishing productivity, or human health. Invertebrate Animal without a spinal column. Some, such as worms, have soft bodies. Others, such as arthropods, are protected by a hard exoskeleton. Kingdom Taxonomic category that includes phyla or divisions. Until the appearance of the category of domain, the kingdom was the highest-level category in biological classification. Larva Animal in a developmental stage, after leaving the egg. It can feed itself but has not yet acquired the shape and structure of the adults of its species. Mandible Appendage immediately below the antennae, used to trap, hold, bite, or chew food. Mantle In mollusks, the outer layer of the body wall or a soft extension of it. It usually secretes a shell. Medium Element or substrate where organisms live. Mesoderm The middle layer of the three layers of embryonic tissue. Metamorphosis Abrupt transition from the larval form to the adult form. Metazoa Main group in the animal kingdom (including mollusks, annelids, and arthropods) in which the mouth is formed at or near the blastula in the developing embryo. Microorganism Organism that can be seen only with a microscope. Migration Seasonal travel of animals from one region to another to reproduce or to seek food, better climate, or better living conditions in general. Mimetism Property of certain animals and plants to resemble living things or inanimate objects that live nearby, mostly by means of color. Mollusk Invertebrates of the phylum Mollusca, with a soft body divided into a head, foot, and visceral mass. They have a fold called a mantle that envelops all or part of the body. Molting Removal of all or part of the outer covering of an organism; in arthropods, a periodic changing of the exoskeleton that enables them to grow in size. Nutrients Chemical elements essential for life. Examples are carbon, oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorus, magnesium, and potassium. Ommatidium The simple visual unit of a compound eye in arthropods; it contains light-sensitive cells and a lens that can form an image. Omnivore Living being that feeds on plants and animals. Order Taxonomic category that includes families; category lower than a class and higher than a family. Organ Body part made of various tissues grouped into a structural and functional unit. Organic Material Animal or plant material in any stage of decomposition, found on or within the soil. Organism Any living creature, whether single-celled or multicellular. Parasite Organism that lives at the expense of another. Phylum Taxonomic category that includes classes; category lower than a kingdom and higher than a class. Plankton Group of small living beings, whether plants (phytoplankton) or animals (zooplankton), that live suspended in freshwater or ocean water. Planula Type of unattached, ciliated larva of many organisms of the phylum Cnidaria (jellyfish, sea anemones, and coral). Polyp The immobile stage in the life cycle of animals of the phylum Cnidaria. Population Group of individuals of the same species that live in a certain area during a specific time. Predator Organism that feeds on other living beings. Pseudocoelom Body cavity consisting of a fluid-filled space between the endoderm and the mesoderm, characteristic of nematode worms. Pseudopod Temporary cytoplasmic projection of an amoeboid cell whose movement and feeding occur through phagocytosis. Radial Symmetry The regular disposition of body parts around a central axis in such a way that any plane that cuts through the axis divides the organism in halves that constitute mirror images of each other. It is seen in adult echinoderms. Safety Thread A silk thread that a spider leaves behind when it is moving, attaching it from time to time to various surfaces. Salinity Measurement of the amount of common salt in water or soil. Common salt is a sodium salt, sodium chloride, common in nature, that gives a salty flavor to ocean water and salt lakes. Segmentation Successive cell divisions in the egg of an animal to form a multicellular blastula. Sexual Dimorphism An assembly of external morphological characteristics that make it possible to distinguish the males from the females of the same species. Sexual Reproduction Reproduction involving meiosis and fertilization. Social Insects Insects that live with others of the same species, looking after the young and gathering food for the community. Species A group of individuals that recognize one another as belonging to the same reproductive unit. Spiracle One of the external openings of the respiratory system in terrestrial arthropods. Statocyst A balance organ consisting of a sac-like structure that contains grains of sand (statoliths) or some other material that stimulates the sensory cells when the organism is in motion. Substrate The surface that constitutes an organism's habitat or life support. Swarm Insects that act in a group for eating, mating, or finding a new location for a nest. Tagmosis The process of segment formation (metameres) into corporal regions (tagmata) with differentiated functions. Taxism Also known as taxia, it is the orientation of movement in those organisms that, being able to move freely from one place to another, track their course in the direction of an external stimulus. INVERTEBRATES 95 Taxonomy Study of the principles of scientific classification. The organization, grouping, and denomination of living things. Tentacles Long and flexible organs located around the mouth of many invertebrates, often prehensile and tactile. Thorax In crustaceans and insects, the fused segments located between the head and the abdomen to which the legs are attached. Tissue Group of similar cells organized in a structural and functional unit. Trachea In insects and some other terrestrial arthropods, the system of air conduits covered with chitin. Venom Chemical agent injected into other animals in order to kill or paralyze them, or to ward off an attack. Zoology Discipline or science dedicated to the study of animals. 96 INDEX INVERTEBRATES 97 Index A amber air bubbles, 11 ancient life-forms, 11 color, 10 fossils in, 10-11 properties and characteristics, 11 resin, 11 Amblypygi, 45 American farmer ant, 75 anemone, beadlet, 15 annelid, 26 Anomalocaris (fossil), 6, 7, 9 ant American farmer, 75 anthill, 74-75 aphids, 78-79 black garden, 74, 79, 82 blood-red, 13 castes, 75 communication, 74 defense, 75 diet, 75 metamorphosis, 74 mutualism, 78-79 social organization, 74 southern wood, 75 species, 74 trap-jaw, 75 velvety tree, 75 Antarctic krill, 14 antenna, 55, 74 anthill, 74-75 aphid, and ants, 78-79 apiculture, 86-87 aposematism (defense mechanism), 66, 76 arachnid color, 34 dust mites, 84-85 most dangerous, 50 name source, 34 species, 44, 45 venomous, 50-51 arthropod small, 13 success, 14 Asian tiger mosquito, 12 auger beetle, 83 Australia, Ediacara Hills fossils, 6, 8-9 Australian centipede, 63 Australian stick insect, 77 Aysheaia (fossil), 9 B barnacle, 36 beadlet anemone, 15 bee apiculture, 80-81 dances, 13 history of beekeeping, 80-81 hive, artificial, 4, 80-81, 86-87 honey collection and processing, 87 mouth, 58 nectar, 86 organized communities, 5 queen, 87 vision, 56 worker, 86, 87 beekeeping, 4, 5, 86-87 beetle antennae, 55 aquatic, 68-69 auger, 83 burying, 13, 82 click, 13 common furniture, 13 diving, 68 flying, 66-67 great diving, 17 jaws, 55 species, 13 wings, 67 bigfin reef squid, 15 bilateral symmetry, 54 bivalve, 29 pearls, 30 black bean aphid, 79 black garden ant (black ant), 74, 79 black vine weevil, 13 black widow spider, 50 blood-fluke (bilharzia), 17 blood-red ant, 13 bloodletting (medicine), 90 bloodsucking bug (triatomine), 82, 83 body plan bilateral symmetry, 54 radial symmetry, 15, 20-21, 24 brachiopod, 43 brimstone butterfly, 76-77 brittle star, 20 broadclub cuttlefish, 14 Broussais, Francois J. V., 90 brown garden snail, 13, 28-29 Burgess Shale fossils, 6, 8, 9 Burgessia (fossil), 9 burying beetle, 13, 82 butterfly antennae, 55 brimstone, 76-77 Cramer's blue morpho, 12 metamorphosis, 70-73 monarch, 12, 70-73 mouth, 58, 60 owl, 76 peacock, 76 shape, 72-73 C caddisfly, larva, 17 Cambrian Period Burgess Shale, 8-9 trilobite predator, 6-7 trilobites, 9 camouflage (crypsis), 76-77 octopus, 32 pupa, 72 Canada, Burgess Shale fossils, 6 Canadia (fossil), 9 caramote prawn, 14 caterpillar, 70-71 cedar beetle, antennae, 55 centipede, 13, 55, 83 Australian, 63 characteristics, 63 Geophilomorpha, 63 legs, 62 life, 62 megarian banded, 63 walking, 62 cephalopod, 19, 29, 32 Chagas disease, 82 Chancelloria (fossil), 9 Charnia (fossil), 8 chelicerae, 44, 49 hunting spider, 50 chitin, 38 Christmas tree worm, 15 chrysalis: See pupa cicada, 67 clam, 31 click beetle, 13 clown fish, 23 Cnidaria common characteristics, 22 number of species, 21, 23 types, 20-21 cockle shell, 29 cockroach, 54, 70, 83 cocoon: See pupa common cuttlefish, 29 common European oyster, 31 common furniture beetle, 13 common octopus, 15 common pond skater, 16 common starfish, 15 copepod (Copepoda), 17, 37, 43 coral, 22 cnidarians, 21 reefs, 14, 22 cowry, tiger, 15 crab European green, 37 hermit, 39 life cycle, 37 movement, 40-41 urchin, 15 crab spider, 49 Cramer's blue morpho (butterfly), 12 crayfish, white-clawed, 17 cricket, mole, 54 crustacean, 35 anatomy, 40 body forms, 36-37 environments, 34 freshwater adaptations, 16 marine, 14 species, 14, 40 cuttlefish broadclub, 14 common, 29 D desert locust, 88 desert millipede, 13 desert scorpion, 51 Dickinsonia (fossil), 8 disease, and invertebrates, 82, 85 diving beetle, 68 diving bell spider, 17 dog flea, 64-65 dragonfly, 54, 70 emperor, 16, 70-73 hawker, 54-55 nymph, 17 drone, ants, 75 Dublin Bay prawn, 40 dust mite, 82 allergies, 85 anatomy, 84-85 humidity, 85 size, 85 Dysdera crocota (spider), 49 E earthworm, 13, 82 anatomy, 26 echinoderm classes, 20 five-radial symmetry, 22 history, 24 number, 25 species, 20, 22 spiny skin, 20 Ediacara Hills fossils, 6, 8 elytron wing (elytra), 66, 67 Emeraldella (fossil), 9 emperor dragonfly, 16, 70 emperor scorpion, 44 European green crab, 37 European hornet, 13 European medicinal leech, 17, 91 exoskeleton, moulting, 39 eye flatworms, 26 insects, 56-57 spiders, 49-50 F flatworm, 26 flea, 64, 83 bites, 65 dog, 65 food chain, 12 human, 65 jumping ability, 64 life cycle, 65 water, 43 fly diseases, 82 metamorphosis, 72-73 mouth, 60 vision, 56-57 wings, 67 98 INDEX INVERTEBRATES 99 flying, insects, 66-67 food chain described, 42 levels, 12 fossil amber, 10-11 ancient life-forms, 10 Burgess Shale, 6, 8-9 Cambrian explosion, 8 Ediacara Hills, 6 evidence of ancient life, 10 trilobites, 9 fruit fly, 72-73 furniture beetle, common, 13 G garden, 82 garden snail, brown, 13 gastropod, 28 Geophilomorpha centipede, 63 giant household spider, 44 giant squid, 15 gills, 15 grasshopper, 54 great diving beetle, 17 great pond snail, 17 green mussel, 29 H hair, 48, 49, 68 hawker dragonfly, 54-55 hermit crab, 39 hive, artificial, 86-87 home, human black ants, 82 burying beetles, 82 dust mites, 85 earthworms, 82 invertebrates, 82-83 ladybugs, 82 pillbugs, 82 Snails, 82 spiny-headed worm, 82 honey bees, 5 collection and processing, 80, 86, 87 honeydew (aphid excretion), 79 house dust mite, 82 human flea, 65 hunting spider, 50 insect anatomy, 54 ants, 74-75 aquatic beetles, 68 antennae forms, 55, 58 beetles, 67 body symmetry, 54 camouflage, 76-77 carnivores, 58-59 cicadas, 67 common characteristics, 54 diving, swimming, and skating, 68-69 environments and life stages, 16 evolutionary development, 5 eyesight, 56-57 flying, 66 hardiness, 52-53 human environment, 82-83 jumping, 65 known species, 54 ladybugs, 66-67 leaf eaters, 58 living in trees, 12 living near water, 16 locusts, 59 metamorphosis, 70-73 mimetism, 76 mouths, 55, 58 plagues and illness, 82 skating, 68 sucking and piercing, 60-61 water strider, 68 wings, 54 invertebrate body plans, 15 camouflage, 18 freshwater, 16-17 honey, 5 human environment, 82-83 known species, 4 land, 12 largest, 14 marine, 14-15 J Japan, pearls, 30 Japanese rhinoceros beetle, 55 Japanese spider crab, 36 jellyfish, 15, 18-19 cnidarian characteristics, 21 Ediacaran fossils, 8 habitat, 21 life cycle, 21 white, 15 jumping spider, 49 K krill (crustacean) Antarctic, 14 description, 42 luminescence, 42 L ladybug (ladybird), 82 flying, 66-67 food chain, 12 identifying, 67 seven-spotted, 58, 67 species, 66 leech ancient uses, 90 body, 91 European medicinal, 90-91 medicinal, 17, 90 mouth, 90 movement, 91 Saliva, 91 types, 90 life-form, first, 6 lobster American, 14 anatomy, 41 color, 38 environment, 41 exoskeleton, 38-39 movement, 41 pincers, 41 shape change, 38 locust, 70 antennae, 55 best control, 89 breeding zones, 89 desert, 88 history, 89 mouth, 58-59 plagues, 88-89 rainfall, 89 luminescence, 42 M Malacostraca (crustacean), 36, 42 mantis, thistle, 77 Marrella splendens (fossil), 9 mayfly, 16 megarian banded centipede, 62-63 metamorphosis, 70-73 ants, 74 changes, 70 emperor dragonfly, 70 fruit fly, 72-73 hormones, 72 monarch butterfly, 70-73 simple, 70 millipede, 55 anatomy, 62 characteristics, 54 desert, 13 walking, 62 mimetism (defense mechanism), 76 mite, 44 anatomy of dust, 84-85 dust, 82 sarcoptes, 84 mole cricket, 54 mollusk body, 28 buried in sand, 29 common characteristics, 28 gastropods, 28 types of, 28 molting (ecdysis), 39, 45, 72 monarch butterfly, 12, 70-73 mosquito Asian tiger, 12 diseases, 82 face and mouth, 61 female head and mouth, 61 life cycle, 16 mouth, 58 mussel, 29, 31 mutualism, 78 N nautilus (mollusk), 29 nymph, 17, 70, 74 O octopus characteristics, 29 color, 32 common, 15 diet, 32 environment, 14, 32 head, 32 ink, 33 movement, 32 speed, 33 suckers, 33 ogrefaced spider, 49 Olenoides (fossil), 9 Opabinia (fossil), 9 oriental cockroach, 83 otter shell, 29 Ottoia (fossil), 9 owl butterfly, 76 oxygen, gills, 15 oyster, 15 anatomy, 31 common European, 31 pearls, 30-31 P palp (pedipalp), arachnids, 49 parasite, 17, 44, 65 parthenogenesis, 43 peacock butterfly, 76 pearl cultivation, 30 formation, 30 oysters, 31 producers, 31 types, 30 pecten, scorpions, 51 pedipalp (palp), arachnids, 49 phytoplankton, 42 pillbug, 13, 82 100 INDEX INVERTEBRATES 101 plague of locusts, 88-89 plankton, 37 poison: See venom pond skater, common, 16 Porifera (sponge), 21 prawn anatomy, 40 caramote, 14 description, 37 Dublin Bay, 40 praying mantis, 12 Precambian period, Ediacara fauna, 8 Prosobranchia (mollusk), 28 pupa, 71, 72 Q queen ants, 75 bees, 87 R radial symmetry, 15, 20-21 radiant sea urchin, 15 razor clam, 29 red starfish, 15 reef, coral, 14, 22 resilin (protein), fleas, 64 S salt, adaptation to freshwater environments, 17 sarcoptes mite, 84 scallop, 29 scorpion anatomy, 51 description, 44 desert, 51 emperor, 44 families, 51 habitat, 51 hunting, 50 sea anemone anatomy, 23 cnidarian characteristics, 21 dangerous, 23 preferred environment, 23 shape adaptation, 23 sea angel, 28 sea cucumber, 15, 20 sea lice, 36, 37 sea lily, 20 sea slug (Opisthobranchia), 15, 28 sea urchin, 20 photoreceptors, 24 radiant, 15 varieties and characteristics, 25 seven-spotted ladybug, 58, 66 shrimp, 40 Sidneyia (fossil), 9 silk, spiders, 45, 46-47 silkworm, 13 silverfish, 13 slug characteristics, 28 sea, 15 snail, 82 brown garden, 13, 28-29 great pond, 17 southern wood ant, 75 spider, 13, 83 anatomy, 45 black widow, 50 crab, 49 diving bell, 17 Dysdera crocota, 49 food chain, 12 fossilized in amber, 10-11 giant household, 44 hunting, 50 jumping, 49 ogrefaced, 49 reproduction, 45 senses, 48-49 sensory hairs, 48 silk, 45, 46 uses of silk thread, 47 venom composition, 50 web use, 5 See also arachnid spiderweb architecture, 47 silk, 46 use, 5 spinneret, 46 spiny-headed worm, 82 sponge, 15, 20 squid bigfin reef, 15 characteristics, 29 starfish anatomy, 24-25 common, 15 movement, 25 photoreceptors, 24 red, 15 suckers, 22 stick insect, Australian, 77 stinger, scorpions, 51 suction, 24, 33 T tellin shell, 29 telson (anatomy), 40, 42, 51 termite, 33 thistle mantis, 77 tick, 13, 44, 84 tiger cowry, 15 toxin: See venom trap-jaw ant, 75 trichobothria hair, 48 trichodina, 17 trilobite (fossil), 9 trophic chain, 42 U urchin crab, 15 uropod (anatomy), 40 Vv velvety tree ant, 75 venom ants, 75 arachnids, 50-51 centipedes, 62, 63 octopus, 32 sea anemones, 23 scorpions, 44 spiders, 45, 49 W wandering spider, 50 wasp, 13, 83 pollination, 5 water beetle, 17 water boatman (back swimmer), 16 water flea, 43 water measurer, 16 water scorpion, 54 water strider, 68, 69 weevil, black vine, 13 white-clawed crayfish, 17 white jellyfish, 15 Wiwaxia (fossil), 9 wood louse, 36 worker ants, 75 bees, 86, 87 worm, 82 Christmas tree, 15 classes, 26 digestive system, 26 earthworm, 13 known species, 27 leeches, 90-91 longest, 26 reproduction, 27 X Xandarella (fossil), 9 Y Yohaia (fossil), 9 Li zooplankton, 17 krill, 42 Malacostraca, 42 phytoplankton, 42 species, 42-43 ~~ INVERTEBRATES Britannica Hustrated Science Library thereLOrawrA . i « ‘a About the pagination of this eBook Due to the unique page numbering scheme of this book, the electronic pagination of the eBook does not match the pagination of the printed version. To navigate the text, please use the electronic Table of Contents that appears alongside the eBook or the Search function. For citation purposes, use the page numbers that appear in the text. FISH AND AMPHIBIANS Britannica Illustrated Science Library Encyclopaedia Britannica, Inc j = is a Britannica Illustrated Science Library © 2008 Editorial Sol 90 All rights reserved. Idea and Concept of This Work: Editorial Sol 90 Project Management: Fabian Cassan Photo Credits: Corbis, ESA, Getty Images, Graphic News, NASA, National Geographic, Science Photo Library Illustrators: Guido Arroyo, Pablo Aschei, Gustavo J. Caironi, Hernan Cafiellas, Leonardo César, José Luis Corsetti, Vanina Farias, Manrique Fernandez Buente, Joana Garrido, Celina Hilbert, Jorge Ivanovich, Isidro Lopez, Diego Martin, Jorge Martinez, Marco Menco, Marcelo Moran, Ala de Mosca, Diego Mourelos, Pablo Palastro, Eduardo Pérez, Javier Pérez, Ariel Piroyansky, Fernando Ramallo, Ariel Roldan, Marcel Socias, Néstor Taylor, Trebol Animation, Juan Venegas, Constanza Vicco, Coralia Vignau, Gustavo Yamin, 3DN, 3DOM studio Composition and Pre-press Services: Editorial Sol 90 Translation Services and Index: Publication Services, Inc. Portions © 2008 Encyclopzedia Britannica, Inc. Encyclopaedia Britannica, Britannica, and the thistle logo are registered trademarks of Encyclopeedia Britannica, Inc. Britannica Illustrated Science Library Staff Editorial Michael Levy, Executive Editor, Core Editorial John Rafferty, Associate Editor, Earth Sciences William L. Hosch, Associate Editor, Mathematics and Computers Kara Rogers, Associate Editor, Life Sciences Rob Curley, Senior Editor, Science and Technology David Hayes, Special Projects Editor Art and Composition Steven N. Kapusta, Director Carol A. Gaines, Composition Supervisor Christine McCabe, Senior I/lustrator Media Acquisition Kathy Nakamura, Manager Copy Department Sylvia Wallace, Director Julian Ronning, Supervisor Information Management and Retrieval Sheila Vasich, Information Architect Production Control Marilyn L. Barton Manufacturing Kim Gerber, Director Encyclopzedia Britannica, Inc. Jacob E. Safra, Chairman of the Board Jorge Aguilar-Cauz, President Michael Ross, Senior Vice President, Corporate Development Dale H. Hoiberg, Senior Vice President and Editor Marsha Mackenzie, Director of Production International Standard Book Number (set): 978-1-59339-797-5 International Standard Book Number (volume): 978-1-59339-805-7 Britannica Illustrated Science Library: Fish and Amphibians 2008 Printed in China ENC YCLOPADIA Britannica www.britannica.com Fish and Amphibians Contents General Characteristics Page 6 a ee » Life in A, the Water in Page 18 Diversity Page 38 Amphibians Page 60 4: Pag age x F ne age . "all People, Fish, and Amphibians . Page 80 VIETNAM aoe ke iy W a ter the been in a state of crisis. In Nha Trang Bay this reason, they have developed various coastline live great ) the growth of outside investment in survival techniques to live in such a wide number of peopl eswit aquaculture has limited the economic variety of places. depend on fishing and e coral reefs for their opportunities of the local population, livelihood. Source of Lite including fishing for squid and other species in the reefs with hook and line. : j ; In other cases, commercial fishing espite the fact that lunglike sacs he life of marine creatures is endangers the future of those who rely on | ) evolved because of the difficulty of a fascinating and has always been ~ traditional fishing methods to make a breathing with gills in water with low _ closely linked to human life. This is so living. This is only one of the topics oxygen content, the development of these particularly because fishing has been the explored in this book, which also relates in sacs was also the first step toward moving livelihood of islanders through the years. detail many secrets of these vertebrates, onto land. Some descendants of the first fish Yet for some time, in many areas of the which were among the first creatures with with fleshy, jointed fins, known as lobe-fin world—such as Nha Trang Bay, on the skeletons to appear on the Earth. Perhaps fishes, began to find terrestrial food sources south coast of Vietnam—this activity has knowing more about their habits and and, with time, adapted more completely to modes of life may move us to care for life on the planet's surface. This evolutionary them and protect them. They are at the change—passing from an aquatic to a mercy of variations in water conditions to terrestrial medium—constituted a true a greater extent than humans. revolution for the life-forms that existed up until then. The amphibians we will show you in this book that are living today are a tiny representation of all those that appeared umans have marveled for centuries at during the Devonian Period, most of which LH the fact that, after journeying across became extinct during the Triassic Period. the ocean, salmon can find the river where they were born. Is this navigational ability related to the Earth's magnetic field, sense of smell, instinct, or something else mphibians, especially some frog that humans cannot even imagine? For those A species, have become true specialists interested in statistics, in the Yukon River in in the art of mimicry. One of the most Alaska and in Canada, certain tagged fascinating examples is the European tree Chinook salmon covered nearly 2,000 miles frog, which changes color to regulate its (3,200 km) in 60 days. Upon entering the body temperature. On warm, dry evenings river, the salmon stop eating and utilize the the frog rests in sunny places, and its skin is “ th fat they accumulated while in the ocean. pale. As its surroundings become cooler, the te tifa tp) / After laying their eggs, many of the frog darkens to absorb heat. Although ie bt hada —— females die. Most ocean fish seek shallow, amphibians are masters of camouflage, rene Gasp de nutrient-rich waters in which to lay their which protects them from predators, at —< ; eggs. That is why coastal waters and present they are the object of worldwide ' estuaries are so important to the life cycle of concern because of the dramatic decline in many species. Another oddity of these their populations. Turn the page, and you will animals is that they have adapted to living in discover much more about the abilities of a variety of aquatic habitats: rivers, lakes, fish and amphibians, extraordinary creatures estuaries, coral reefs, and the open sea. For that live right next to us. © Gener al Char acteristics This fish, which lives in sive het! CARTILAGINOUS FISH magne wifln slag eut Gaal DISTINGUISHING FEATURES ANATOMY reefs, can grow up to 21 BONY FISH inches (54 cm) long. ¥ = eee ks 7 ea ish were the first vertebrates fish, the earliest fish had no scales, fins, water and salt water. Their bodies are these complex creatures normally with bony skeletons to appear or jawbone, but they did have a type of generally streamlined, being covered breathe through gills that capture on the Earth. They doubtless dorsal fin. Over time they have been with smooth scales and having fins that oxygen dissolved in the water, and they form the most numerous group changing in form and size to adapt to enable them to move with energy, are cold-blooded. of vertebrates. Unlike today's different environments, in both fresh direction, and stability. In place of lungs, 8 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS FISH AND AMPHIBIANS 9 Earliest Forms F phleostOUS ey The Arthrodira—with a jointed protected by fin The tail was not bout 470 million years ago, the first fish appeared. Unlike today's _ cenriahHat ae strong armor. pet cele fish, they did not have a jawbone, fins, or scales. Hard plates The shane of Bteracpis Period. The Devonian predator H i i hows that it Dunkleosteus was an arthrodiran covered the front part of the fish and formed a protective shield. ane ee fico 1 acco talon This area of the body had neither armor years ago. Its head was encased in They also had a solid, flexible dorsal spine that allowed them to propel ; H H H ; an impressive set of plates 1.2 inches themselves. Later, in the Silurian Period, fish appeared that had a Genser ee jawbone. Known as the gnathostomata, they were large predators. « plates that served as teeth. FIERCE JAW It had a lobed tail, similar to a shark's tail, which indicates that it was a Dunkleosteus was a fierce predator that CONICAL NOSE EYES F owerful swimmer. : —_ Its streamlined shape Very small, ams ‘sates P = |= ’ — helped the fish move. located on both DORSAL SPIKE eae 2 i The fish without a jawbone, 4 . sides of the head. Located on the fish's 4 =, — back, it worked like a dorsal fin. Pteraspis, was about 6.5 inches (16 cm) long and lived in the seas of Europe, Asia, and North America. These fish were most abundant during the Devonian Period. They had bodies with armor that : covered their heads, and they had a iL streamlined shape. The shell had a co- nical nose that helped the fish to move. It also had strong jaws with bony teeth. DORSAL SPINES These helped the fish _ to stay balanced while “— swimming. | 6 Binches (16 cm) LENGTH OF THE FISH Scientific Pteraspis pelle MOUTH ’ Diet Small organisms Having no jawbone, TAIL ; : : they fed on small , The shape of the tail Habitat Sea, then rivers and lakes pigavilemé » , and grow 3 re a Heat- new ones. HETEROCERCAL TAIL ats ‘ r generating The shark's caudal fin is ff “i muscles GILL SLITS . small, and the upper Po These life-forms lobe is larger than the , ‘ ra may have five or lower lobe. a a” oe Gelatinous tract six gill slits. - % “ ; ; : Co a SHARK ACUTE SENSES AMPULLAE OF ut = Superorder Chondrichthyes have LORENZINI _— |: # ; = = He Selachimorpha ampullae of Lorenzini, detect electric a . , ey This X-ray shows the acutely sensitive lateral signals transmitted = spine and nerves. lines, and a highly by potential prey. Prue 4 aa developed sense of smell. fe Primitive The ancient origin of > Chondrichthyes contrasts sharply with their highly evolved senses. This is a fossilized cartilage vertebra of a shark from the Paleozoic Era, between 245 and 540 million years ago. It was found in a fossil deposit in Deepwater fish. Like the prehistoric animals, they have large heads and pectoral fins. They have a spine in front of the first dorsal fin. The back end of the body * narrows into a tail followed by a thin filament. ee 2 These fish have two pectoral fins joined on the front of the body. They use them to swim, giving the impression that they fly in the water. The rest of the body moves similarly to a whip. Their eyes are located on the upper side of the body; the mouth CHIMAERAS Bene Buell Boma and gills are on the lower side. Rhinochimaera sharks has a high es concentration of urea, which is 7" pacifica am presumed to be an adaptation to RAY This fish lives in salt water and constitutes a : g the dark at depths ; 3 Raja clavata (Thornback Ray) Rays may have five or 7 of up to 4,900 feet fundamental difference between sharks : Sopa ie 7 i i ~ (1500 m): it is 4 and their freshwater ancestors This species lives in cold oceans in six rows of gills; — F m); it is : depths up to 660 feet (200 m). chimaeras have only one. — feet (1.2 m) long. 16 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS FISH AND AMPHIBIANS 17 DORSAL DORSAL MUSCULATURE FIN AORTA is concentrated around the spinal column and the tail. there is no binocular vision. and coordinates all the fish's actions SIMPLE EYE BRAIN SPINAL CORD y Each eye focuses to one side; receives information —_ Retina 7 . ‘hi uspensory Sa d functions. ost fish have the same internal organs as amphibians, art be ee ae LATERALLINE CAUDALFIN reptiles, birds, and mammals. The skeleton acts as a Lens © nerve has sensitive is divided into . Fi F A Tris receptors that symmetrical support, and the brain receives information through Meare inhies the eyes and the lateral line to coordinate the motions of the muscles in propelling the fish through the water. Fish breathe with gills, they have a digestive system designed to transform food into nutrients, and they have a heart that pumps blood through a network of blood vessels. ' to the brain. THE CURRENT NUMBER OF SPECIES GILLS OF CYCLOSTOMATA Structures Its digestive tract is little more than a straight tube extending from its Salmo fario round, jawless mouth to the anus. with multiple HEART STOMACH SWIMBLADDER ANUS ANAL Boe es ie rane ee ragtiie d A gland fills it with gas An opening for the FIN Mee eee Seen provi den eee LIVER INTESTINE and empties it to regulate expulsion of feces, urine, ss ae es Pl eie f CAUDAL EYE tothe blood oe towar swimming altitude. and reproductive fluid fish and have thin FIN BREATHING pharyngeal SACS sacs instead REGULATION OF SALINITY of gills. Typically, their organs are FRESHWATER FISH Salt _ SALTWATER FISH Water Water outlet compressed in the lower front Freshwater fish run = absorption These fish intake | quarter of the body. The rest of the risk of losing salt a" 3 E's F constantly absorb | ‘ woe 7 their internal structure consists to their environment. : piel salt water to , y mainly of the muscles that the They drink only a | a — replenish the water =" fish uses to swim. Some bony small quantity of : in their bodies, but Rj i fish, such as carp, have no water, and they Water intake Elimination of they must eliminate : . stomach but rather a tightly obtain additional salt water in urine excess salt from the Excretion of salts Excretion of salts coiled intestine. from their food. marine environment, through the gills through urine SUPPORT FOR NOTOCHORD PHARYNGEAL SACS INTESTINE SPERM CONDUITS SEMINAL VESICLE MUSCLE SEGMENTS TESTICLES DORSAL AORTA RECTAL GLAND SECOND DORSAL FIN UPPER CAUDAL LOBE VERTEBRAE —_ = Se ——— ee ee ie a kann ic at ie BF sien 455 —— - . 7 ig A shark has the same organic structures as a bony fish, except for the swim bladder. A shark also has a NASAL PIT corkscrew-like structure called a spiral valve at the end of its intestine to KNOWN SPECIES OF CHONDRICHTHYES PECTORAL increase the surface area for Carcharodon sp. MOUTH SLITS HEART LIVER STOMACH FIN VALVE CLOACA KIDNEY FIN LOBE absorption of nutrients. Life in the Water he idea that fish are blind is wrong. Most fish have the best possible eyesight for their habitat. Further, they can see in color and use colors to Ey camouflage themselves or defend their territory. Most fish can vary their coloring when something changes in their environment. Silverfish, common in all freshwater habitats, have dark backs PROTECTIVE LAYER YOU ARE WHAT YOU EAT When threatened, this strange EXTREMITIES LIFE CYCLE animal reacts by swallowing water until it blows up like a THE ART OF SWIMMING MATTERS OF LIFE AND DEATH balloon. WONDERS OF COLOR THE BEST DISGUISE ASSORTMENT OF SHAPES >» a . A J a , iH > (ranging from greenish brown to dark the crystalline blue of lakes. Seen from blue), but the sides of their bellies are below, the lower part becomes confused silvery white. When viewed from above, with bright reflections in the water. their backs become confused with the deep hues of the river water or even with 20 LIFE IN THE WATER FISH AND AMPHIBIANS 21 zr Prote ctive Layer \/ ost fish are covered with scales, an external layer Focus EPIDERMIS With protective mucus of transparent plates. All fish of a given species have the same number of scales. Depending on the family and genus of a fish, its scales can have a variety of characteristics. FOSSILIZED SCALES Scales on the lateral line of the body have small orifices that link Rant Baal iad calaite ee een ee the surface with a series of sensory cells and nerve endings. It is a/fishthat livedduring the Mesozoic Era: covers most of the also possible to determine a fish's age by studying its scales. e Rhomboid shield TOOTHED EDGES rovide roughness. SCALE REGENERATION : s Scales grow back after Original y a lesion, but the new scales Internal ff ones are different from filament the original scales. . ; if Ctenoid scales These scales overlap like tiles on a roof, the same as cycloid scales. Another very common type of scale among bony fish, they are rough, having small SHIELDS extensions that look like combs. The sturgeon has PERCH five rows of these. Perca sp. External focus Internal radius Ganoid scales Rhomboid in shape, these scales are interwoven and connected with fibers. The name comes from their outer covering, which is a layer of ganoin, a type of shiny enamel. Sturgeon and pipefish have AGE BY SCALES scales of this type. A fish does not add new scales as it grows, but the scales it has increase in size. In this way growth rings are formed, and the rings reveal the age of the specimen. EDGES Protuberance are overlapping, with a smooth texture. Base CUTICLE has a mucous consistency. TOOTHED SCALE With enamel . STURGEON interes : ‘ growth line Cycl oi d Ss cal es Acipenser sturio One of the most common types of scales DISTRIBUTION OF SCALES Summer among bony fish, the cycloid scales are Most scales occur in rows that slant diagonally growth line organized so that the exposed surfaces downward and back. Species can be accurately overlap, forming a smooth and flexible cover. identified by the number of rows (as counted They are round with a soft, exposed surface, along the lateral line), among other Exposed such as those of carps and silversides. characteristics. area BASAL PLATE A smooth, enameled surface Transverse line BLUE SHARK Prionace glauca Placoid Scales on Typical of cartilaginous fish and other ancient Family Salmonidae species, these scales are made of pulp, dentine, and enamel, similar to the composition of teeth, and they have small extensions. The scales are usually very small and extend outward. RED SNAPPER Lutjanus campechanus 22 LIFE IN THE WATER Extremities fish can control its motion, direction, and stability by means of its fins and tail. Anatomically these are extensions of the skin beyond the body and, in most bony fish, are supported by rays. The fins reveal much about the life of each fish. Thin fins with a split tail indicate that the animal moves very quickly, or it may need them to cover great distances. On the other hand, fish that live among rocks and reefs near the ocean floor have broad lateral fins and large tails. @ FIN RAYS Bony filaments that are joined by a membrane SIAMESE FIGHTING FISH Betta splendens spreads its fins like a fan when it jumps. Homocercal Tail © The highest and longest lobe turns upward. The caudal fin is divided into two equal lobes, an upper and a lower lobe, which extend from the end of the spinal column. : 7 \\\\ \\\ yy WS WZ Y tH The spinal column ends in a broadened structure. GREY REEF SHARK Carcharhinus amblyrhynchos The heterocercal tail is typical of these cartilaginous fish, as well as of sturgeons. l / The proportion of the length of a salmon's homocercal tail with respect to its body. The Typical Tail The vast majority of bony fish have homocercal tails. Heterocercal Tail Its two lobes are uneven. The dorsal spine turns upward in the highest lobe, and the rays that form the two lobes of the caudal fin extend from the lower end of the spinal column. The shark's spine extends into the upper lobe of the caudal fin. The lower lobe is smaller and is merely a projection to the side of the spine. 1/ The proportion of the lower lobe of the tail to the upper lobe of the tail FISH AND AMPHIBIANS 23 Dorsal fin-stabilizing An Integrated Team function IF In general, fish have seven fins: three single Lal fins (dorsal, caudal, and anal) and two sets of paired fins (pelvic and pectoral). Each fin has specific functions related to the fish's movement. In all bony fish, the fins are made of bony rays and not of flesh. Tuna and a few other fish have one extra fin between the dorsal and caudal fins. Their thin lateral fins indicate that they can swim at high speeds. Others, such as the roosterfish (Nematistius pectoralis), have huge dorsal and ; entral fins, and their main function is different: Hes ventral fins a unction like used to scare off potential predators. hydroplanes. Tuna's adipose Caudal fin-no known fin- Hli function AiRetiOn a Anal fin-together with the dorsal fin, works as a steering device. Pectoral fins joined to the skull-used for swimming GOLDFISH =. Carassius auratus = - Bright and colorful, highly prized by aquariums GOLDFISH Carassius auratus A species bred for its beauty. Its tail can have eight different shapes. HALF-MOON SHAPE To provide speed SALMON Salmo genus Large dorsal and anal fins with pointed ends | AFRICAN LUNGFISH Protopterus annectens There are four extant species of this fish and few specimens, but they proliferated during the Devonian Period. FILAMENTS ————CO Short and symmetrical above and below Diphycercal Tail This kind of tail ends in a point; the spinal column reaches to the end, and the tail is surrounded above and below by a soft caudal fin. This very rare form is found on some sharks and hakes and in archaic bony fish. The dorsal spine extends to the tip of the fin. 1/ The length of the tail in relation to the rest of the body 24 LIFE IN THE WATER j The Art of Swimming o swim, fish move in three dimensions: forward and back, left and right, and up and down. The main control surfaces that fish use for maneuvering are the fins, including the tail, or caudal fin. To change direction, the fish tilts the control surfaces at an angle to the water current. The fish must also keep its balance in the water; it accomplishes this by moving its paired and unpaired fins. @ MUSCLES GREAT WHITE SHARK The tail has powerful muscles that Carcharodon carcharias enable it to move like an oar. i v = # a (ec) Starting Out The movement of a fish through the water is like that of a slithering snake. Its body goes through a series of wavelike movements similar to an S curve. This process begins when the fish moves its head slightly from side to side. )ii — = al The crest of the body's wave moves from back to front. STREAMLINED SHAPE j Like the keel of a ship, the rounded contours of a fish * At first the are instrumental. In addition, most of a fish's volume , UPSIDE-DOWN ~ CATFISH Synodontis nigriventris This fish swims upside down, seeking food sources that are less accessible to other species. Red muscles are for slow or regular movements. Larger white muscles are for moving with speed, but they tire easily. ad In its side-to-side movement, the tail displaces the water. Forward Motion . results from the i synchronized S- curve movement of the muscles surrounding the spinal column. These muscles usually make alternating lateral motions. Fish with large pectoral fins use them like oars for propulsion. The oarlike movement of the tail is the main force used for forward motion. Forceful Stroke Muscles on both sides of the spinal column, especially the tail muscles, contract in an alternating pattern. These contractions power the wavelike movement that propels the fish forward. The crest of the wave reaches the pelvic and dorsal fins. The crest of the wave passes to the first dorsal fins. FISH AND AMPHIBIANS 25 Th dorsal fn ; % Upward and k th ane Downward upright. The angle of the fins relative to the body allows the fish to move up or down. The paired fins, located in front of the center of gravity, are used The pectoral for this upward or downward movement. fins maintain balance and can act as brakes. The ventral fins stabilize the fish for proper balance. Balance When the fish is moving slowly or is still in the water, the fins can be seen making small movements to keep the body in balance. reaches the area between the two Complete dorsal fins, the tail fin begins its push Cycle to the right. When the tail moves back toward the other side and reaches the far right, the head will once again turn to the right to begin a new cycle. When the crest 1 second The amount of time it takes for this shark to complete one swimming cycle CAT SHARK Scyliorhinus sp. The resulting impulse moves the fish forward. tail is even is in the front part of its body. As the fish swims . with the head. forward, its shape causes the density of the water 7 ahead to be reduced relative to the density of the water behind. This reduces the water's resistance. 1 THE FISH'S KEEL A ship has a heavy keel in the lower part to keep it from THE FASTEST The powerful caudal } capsizing. Fish, on the other hand, fin displaces large il have the keel on top. If the paired amounts of water. i fins stop functioning to keep the SAILFISH I fish balanced, the fish turns over Istiophorus i because its heaviest part tends to platypterus sink, which happens when fish die. fe Bay KEEL mee LIVE DEAD eis Ae The maximum swimming speed it attains The head moves from side to side. The unfurled dorsal fin can be up to 150 percent of the width of the fish's body. Its long upper jaw enables it to slice 70 miles per hour (109 kan) eset aiding this fish's hydrodynamics. Swimming in Groups Fh Only bony fish can swim in highly Le coordinated groups. Schools of fish include thousands of individuals that move harmoniously as if they were a single fish. To coordinate their motion they use their sight, hearing, and lateral line senses. Swimming in groups has its advantages: it is harder to be caught by a predator, and it is easier to find companions or food. h mi ** ————— The fish on the outside, ea : guided by those in the middle, are in charge of . r ‘ keeping the group safe. School : , a, Fe A group of fish, usually of the same ~ species, that swim together ina ‘ ‘ coordinated manner and with : “a specific individual roles The fish in the middle control the school. A 1 cubic mile => _ Via (4cukm) Le ae oe mm The area that can be taken up by ie ae i ; he é re) A Af s Ie, b a school of herring ail a / tps T J ] Hy by fF al i a as = eae Seis. ees ey % Pic ke 26 LIFE IN THE WATER Wonders of Color ish use color to communicate with others of their species. They also use color in mating rituals and even to hide from their prey. A young emperor angelfish has blue and white Spirals, but it develops its own appearance when it reaches maturity. This helps it to find a mate and define its territory. Today science is discovering how fish perceive differences of color and what sort of messages the colors convey. Balistoides conspicillum Half of its body is black with large white spots, and the other half is nearly all black, with a group of strange black shapes with a yellow border. Its bright orange lips look like those of a clown. Carassius auratus This adaptable fish is the most popular for aquariums. Its highly developed sense of smell is important in its search for mates and food. Pomacanthus imperator This fish comes in various sizes and colors. It also changes shades as it matures. Its white stripes on a blue background form concentric rings, and they grow just enough to give the adult fish magnificent horizontal yellow stripes. Dascyllus aruanus With its white body and three thick black stripes, this fish swims among rocks and coral, blending in with its environment. Betta splendens One of the most popular freshwater species. Only the males exhibit a wide variety of colors—red, green, blue, and purple—which they obviously use as a form of seduction. & Choerodon fasciatus One of the most brightly colored species of fish in the tropical seas, this fish is endangered by its popularity with aquarium aficionados. Amphiprion percula The clownfish is known for its intense red, orange, and white colors. It lives among anemones, a predator species that affords it protection from possible attackers. Amphiprion ocellaris Chaetodon auriga A dark band covers each eye, and a black eye-shaped spot on its tail fools predators by making them believe the fish is bigger than it really is. This fish has an orange body with two white bands. It lives in coral reefs from Sri Lanka to the Philippines and north of Australia. Cromileptes altivelis This fish is found in southeast Asia, and its meat is considered a delicacy by gourmets. It lives in caves as a means of Bodianus sp. defense from predators. This fish's showy colors repel potential predators, with the contrasting tones serving asa warning. Synchiropus splendidus Covered with psychedelic swirls in green, blue, and yellow, this is one of the most beautiful fish on the planet. This small species lives hidden among the rocks of coral reefs. 28 LIFE IN THE WATER FISH AND AMPHIBIANS 29 Assortment of Shapes ost fish have a typical streamlined shape, as exemplified by salmon or trout. Other species have developed widely varying characteristics as adaptations to their environment or diet. The longnose hawkfish has a pronounced proboscis for eating invertebrates on the seabed. The stiff, slender body of the longhorn cowfish causes it to swim slowly and clumsily. And the clown knifefish has a flattened, knifelike body that enables it to move more easily through the water. Chitala chitala The name knifefish comes from its flattened shape. It inhabits the waters of southern Asia and swims mainly with its anal fin. Coris aygula This tropical fish of the Indo-Pacific region is white in front with black spots, which are more densely scattered near the head and disappear completely before the tail is reached. Nemateleotris magnifica In the Indian and Pacific oceans this fish swims among coral reefs in search of food. Its other name, fire dartfish, comes from its pronounced upright dorsal fin. This small fish is barely the * size of a finger. Pterophyllum scalare Inhabiting South American rivers in the central Amazon — system and its tributaries as far as eastern Peru and Ecuador, this fish has faint stripes across its body. Chaetodermis penicilligerus Pi. ~ — Inhabiting coral reefs in the _—— oa al * i Mi i tropical waters of the Indian and i — aiiie Tian Pacific oceans, Australia, and -é. yy a i, northern Japan, this fish can be oy J up to 12 inches (30 cm) long. Oxycirrhites typus es — Inhabiting coral reef zones in the * : : . Lactoria cornuta Indian and Pacific oceans, this fish is marked by brown stripes that form a grid. It uses its long nose to trap prey. inhabits the Pacific Ocean and the Red Sea. Its rigid skeleton makes it a clumsy swimmer in spite of its beautiful silhouette. It has two horns on the upper part of its head. Scorpaena plumieri The most poisonous of all sea creatures, this fish eats small fish and mollusks. Its body is specially designed to mimic the seafloor. Brachionichthys politus Limited to coastal habitats of Australia, this inoffensive fish has an average size of 6 inches (15 cm). 30 LIFE IN THE WATER You Are What You Ea ost fish feed in their natural environment, the larger fish eating the smaller ones, and the smallest sea creatures feeding on marine plants. A fish's mouth gives many clues about its feeding habits. Large, strong teeth indicate a diet of shellfish or coral; pointed teeth belong to a hunting fish; and a large mouth that is open while the fish swims is that of a filterer. Some species can also trap food that lives outside the water: trout, for example, hunt flies. e Predators These are fish that feed on other species. They have teeth or fangs that help them to wound and kill their prey or to hold it fast after the ¥- attack. Predators use their sight to hunt, although some nocturnal species such as /: moray eels use their senses of smell and touch and those of their lateral line. All predators have highly evolved a stomachs that secrete acid to digest meat, bones, and scales. Such fish have a shorter intestinal tract than herbivorous species, so digestion takes less time. PIRANHA Pygocentrus sp. RAZOR-SHARP TEETH Large, sharp teeth go along witha predator's diet. Symbiosis " is the interaction between two organisms that live in close cooperatio of symbiosis is parasitism, in which one organism benefits and the 0 harmed. An example of a parasite is the sea lamprey (Petromyzon l sticks to other fish and sucks their body fluids to feed itself. Another typ symbiosis is commensalism, in which one organism benefits and the other is not harmed. An example is the remora (Remora remora), or suckerfish, which sticks to other fish using suction disks on the end of its head. They close their eyes, turn them, and push them downward to increase the pressure of the mouth. * 7", REMORA Remora remgra CORAL Parrotfish feed on corals. MOUTH acts as a filter. As it swims along with its mouth open, zooplankton and small fish are trapped. WHALE SHARK Rhincodon typus Filterers Some species have evolved to the point of being able to take from the water only those nutrients they need for feeding. They filter the nutrients out using their mouths and gills. These species include whale sharks (Rhincodon typus), herring (Clupea sp.), and Atlantic menhaden (Brevoortia tyrannus). | Plants Life in the water is based on phytoplankton, which is eaten by zooplankton. These are in turn eaten by fish, all the way up to the large marine species. P=. = Grazers FUSED TEETH This group of fish eats vegetation or coral in small bites. Parrotfish (Scaridae) have a horny beak made of fused teeth. They scrape the fine layer of algae and coral that covers rocks and then crush it into powder using strong plates in the back of the throat. enables them to bite the bony that grows on them. The beak is actually made of individual teeth, arranged in a beaklike structure. After biting a covered al grinding structu Suckers Species that live in the depths, such as sturgeons (Acipenseridae) and suckerfish (Catostomidae), spend their days sucking the mud , on the seafloor. When they are cut open, large amounts of mud or THE sand are found in the stomach and VACUUM 4 d : A 5 4 Sucking fish use their intestines. Digestive mechanisms mouths like allarde process all this material and vacuum cleaner to hunt absorb only what is needed. their prey.” Parrotfish have a strong beak that skeleton of corals and eat the algae PHARYNGEAL PLATES : ? pharyngeal plates, strong in the throat, crush the hard, stony pieces. BARBELS The sturgeon has a prominent snout. In its mouth it has four sensitive barbels. * ; 4 | & 5 FISH AND AMPHIBIANS 31 DIFFERENCES Carnivorous fish eat all sorts of species, even though their basic diet consists of meat. They have terminal-type mouths, muscular stomachs, and short intestinal tracts. Herbivores feed on aquatic vegetation. They have a long intestinal tract compared with other fish. 7 4 PARROTFISH Scarus sp. Types of Mouths co > ‘Si = ¥ - b, r- Terminal | a ——S> 7 ve Inferior Protusible STURGEON Acipenser sp. : it , = i. Ld ie = : ‘ * 2 a e ; ; . ; ' .. , 32 LIFE IN THE WATER P ' : 2 : : a (a = ; +. we: + = z . _— “ i 7 —_——; = . = = = 5 =—=s = i = ae 5 - nel ‘ = . a : ry rh £ a - 1 a a a a e a a . . Life C cle ee aeRG Bars ~ sy or : ‘y : ' ‘ “a THE FRY , “ . a] = YOUNG FISH (FRY) 121 DAYS . « The'small fry feed from the yolk sac. .% nan icrusted environment, animals éan simply secrete theit sex Cells into the water. But for fertilization to be effe dive the male and the female must synchronize their activities. Many species, such as the salmon, travel great distances to meet with potential mates. Upon meeting . a mate they release their sex cells. The time and:place are important because the Survival of the eggs depends on the water temperature, Parent-child relations’are extremely varied, from complete neglect of the eggs once laid. to constant watchfulness and protection of the young. .@ . “, = « i - — . 1 s : a . i a oil = 4 a a a + - : = = 2 ° - - HATCHING in = Z ‘| External Fertilization : Q0ANDIZ0DAYS °F ‘ rad In most fish, fertilization is external to the female's i‘ a a wi i ahs F FRY'S = body. The male secretes sperm onto the eggs as Male sal Fs eT we ea orate ey YOLK SAC . soon as they leave the female's body. Typically, the Page te bee! i . young hatch from the eggs as larvae. Salmon is one r “ be species that reproduces this way. 4 ' i a Me - Female salmon The-ovule ind The small Then the ‘ 3 6) Y t A the sperm living being, a embryo forms. : e@ar k join to form begins to a is the egg. Py grow. : ( ycle - This is the life “Egg Layi ng span of a salmon. DAY1 , After traveling from the sea to the river, the female lays her eggs ina nest she digStin the gravel. The strongest available male then depbsits his sperm over them. All salmon begin life in fresh water and then migrate to the sea. To lay eggs, they return to the river. Juyeniles ; c 2 years Salmon fry, grow until they a é become small juvenile salmon. 1 * They migrate to the sea, where Adults °. : they live for four years. 6 years The adult salmon have fully Le ; mature reproductive organs, and , r i they return to the river where they were born to lay their eggs. Young female 7 - Urogenital opening ‘Parents ° _ agai FISH AND AMPHIBIANS 33 = = The yellow-headed jawfish, Opisthognathus aurifrons, incubates its eggs inside ~ its mouth. Mouth Incubation . a. — The gestation of some*fish species takes place inside the parents' mgouths. They incubate the eggs inside their mouths and then spit 1 them out into the burrow. Once the eggs hatch, the = nit protect their \ young by sheltering them inside their mouths. = Internal Fertilization Viviparous fish give birth to their young in the form of developed juveniles. Fertilization is internal, carried out by a male grgan called the gonopod, which is a modified fin. a . = 0 Paraplacental vary F uterine space * = | . = att ¢ A ae, 5 = Dade Umbilical cord’ = Placenta __ = Young male 34 LIFE IN THE WATER FISH AND AMPHIBIANS 35 Exocoetidae, or flying fish, are a family of ESCAPE TAKEOFF Matters of Life and Deat O survive, most fish need adaptations to enable them to flee from their ocean fish that includes 52 species grouped appears, the flying fish surface and elevates 3 é > : in eight genera. They are found in all the i i A F predators or to find food. The European plaice can lie on the ocean floor Md ti pean eohecallyiniarn eropiel ieee | Mi accu GLIDING: +h | ; ; invici F ; and subtropical waters. Their most pepe ee eS ea es with its flat body. Its ivory color makes it almost invisible. The , Mi, Sein dee eeu 160 fet 0 mt they can flying fish, on the other hand, developed pectoral fins to lift itself up over the surface of the water and flee its enemies. 4 ‘ unusually large pectoral fins, as which give them the ability ‘ to fly and glide for iY, short distances. The European plaice (Pleuronectes platessa) is a flat Ya VENTRAL SIDE fish with a shape especially designed to allow it to colortdavatdiote “Ny This fish slides over the remain motionless on the seafloor. It also provides an ~ pigmentation. This . water with its hardened example of mimesis. Its two sides are very different. par roel the i /] fins, and it can reach The top side is pigmented with small red spots 4), speeds up to 40 miles that camouflage the fish on the seafloor, ‘ i] | per hour (65 km/h) for where it uses its fins to cover itself with diol r . } as long as 30 seconds. sand to hide from predators. This fish has ————_———(_) highly developed The European plaice's entire body EUROPEAN pectoral and undergoes metamorphosis from its larval PLAICE = = = pelvic fins. state to adulthood. The mouth, however, Pleuronectes remains the same. platessa FLYING FISH Exocoetus volitans EYES Both are located on the right side. SPOTS are useful for camouflage in the sand and for hiding from its predators. —_ — Found in the reefs of the Gulf of Mexico, Scorpaena = plumieri, known commonly as the scorpion fish, has a — brown, spotted body with many appendages that look a like moss between its mouth and its eyes. This fish is = hard to see because its texture and color help it blend easily into the seafloor. Its dorsal fins have a powerful venom, which causes intense pain. At birth, the European plaice does not have a flat form but looks like a normal fish. It eats near the cILLs surface and swims using its swim bladder. As time The European goes by, its body becomes flat. The swim bladder plaice breathes dries up, and the fish sinks to the bottom of the sea. through its gills. _ i OPERCULUM FIN is the bone that The dorsal, anal, and CAUDAL FIN supports the gill caudal fins form a an, barely used SCORPION FISH structure. continuous line or swimming. AT Thewertebrae aroundithe Gady. Scorpaena plumieri begin to form. The pigment cells join The fold of the fin to form dark spots. One eye on each side is forming, and : te the mouth is =" already open. >} The left eye It no longer moves to the top | looks to the The cleft of of the head. right, but the tail upward. develops. 36 LIFE IN THE WATER FISH AND AMPHIBIANS 37 The Best Disguise o face their enemies, fish have developed a number of strategies to enable them to survive. Some of these are escaping, hiding in the ocean bed, or stirring up sand to avoid being seen. Other species have poison, and some can inflate and raise barbs or spines to discourage predators. In the oceans' depths are fish that have luminous organs that blind the enemy. @ Sharp Enough to Cut The sharp blades of the yellow tang's caudal appendage look like scalpels. This fish can retract and extend its blades at will to hurt potential attackers. The fish eats only algae; it measures some 20 inches (50 cm) long. Spot-Fin Porcupine Fish Like its relative the globefish, this fish predator. This fish has another swallows water when it feels defense mechanism: its modified threatened, swelling up to three times scales act as barbs. When the fish's YELLOW TANG This fish frequently its normal size. This makes it very size increases, the scales extend Febencome swims in schools difficult to fit inside the mouth of a perpendicularly from the skin. with fish of other flavescens species. The spine Ly Water Stomach QW at = HOW IT INFLATES The water enters through the fish's mouth. The stomach stores water and begins to increase in size. The spinal column and the skeleton are YA flexible and adapt. If the fish is taken out of the water, it can inflate in a similar way by swallowing air. Strange Garden : Garden eels can bury much of their body in the sandy seafloor and become stiff. A group of buried garden eels looks like a colony of algae or coral, even though their tiny eyes are on the lookout for the small species they eat. At the slightest sign of danger, they go into their burrows. The stomach fills with water. The eel hardens its muscled body and Felsina buries its tail, leaving its head in the open. group P ‘ Walls covered with E mucus secreted by the skin of the animal's tail GARDEN EEL Taenioconger hassi At Rest Self-Defense , oe The scales of the porcupine fish lie flat against Inflated porcupine fish can reach a diameter of up to 35 esl eae ea aloe its body, and its appearance is no different from inches (90 cm). This makes swallowing them impossible SPOT-FIN ie ee tomes ios that of any other bony fish. When it deflates for medium-size predators, which are frightened simply PORCUPINE FISH extended, it is almost impossible for a after an attack, it returns to its original state. by the porcupine fish's appearance. Diodon hystrix predator to bite or swallow this fish. SHARK 40-41 42-43 44-45 46-47 48-49 50-51 52-53 54-55 56-57 58-59 40 DIVERSITY Long and Flexible he seahorse is a small ocean fish that belongs to the same family as pipefish and sea dragons (Syngnathidae). Its name comes from its horselike head. In fact, no other fish genus has its head at a right angle to the rest of its body. Because it cannot use speed to escape from its predators, the seahorse has the ability to change color to blend in with its environment. The reproduction process of these fish is also very unique. The male has an incubating pouch in which the female deposits the fertilized eggs. @ GILLS Seahorses breathe 3 5 through gills. i. species of seahorses live in the Caribbean, the Pacific Ocean, and the Indian Ocean. BLACK-STRIPED PIPEFISH PECTORAL FIN Syngnathus abaster ss ae EYES ae on au side, One of the slowest fish in the sea, the ——- pe for movement black-striped pipefish moves by means 2 one Mion of slight undulations of its pectoral fins, which can vibrate up to 3 Movement times per second. P The body of a seahorse is crammed into an NOSE armor of large, rectangular bony plates. They swim very differently than other fish. Fiestas) Adopting an upright position, they use their ae tite dorsal fin for propulsion. They do not have ie fc an anal fin, but rather a long tail that rolls se Ke into a spiral. They use it to hold onto Snape A underwater plants. Classification Thirty-two species of seahorse have been identified i pel inch (1 cm) worldwide. Classifying them is at times complicated 2 because individuals of the same species can change color The size of a and develop long filaments of skin. The size of adult seahorse at birth seahorses varies enormously, from the tiny Hippocampus minotaur—a species discovered in Australia that never a TRUNK grows beyond 0.7 inch (1.8 cm) long—to the enormous = The body is Hippocampus ingens, a species in the Pacific that reaches = supported over 12 inches (30 cm) long. It has no pelvic or caudal fins, = a ee BONY PLATES but it does have a tiny anal fin. UNROLLED : d Its body is covered ROLLED UP The tail Li with concentric rings F straightens out r of bone. The tail rolls up by unrolling dk WEEDY SEA DRAGON into a curl. : a a Phyllopteryx taeniolatus . = Its shape is typical of this family, . although its tail is not suitable for ner Gea bse: like no ate emus sib tails, sealioreesGa DORSAL FIN and i as amore e longa profile. cling to plants on TAIL Seahorses swim Its body is covered with seaweed. the seafloor. Can be upright, propelled by f extended to a their dorsal fin. — fully vertical position Camouflage LINED SEAHORSE , Hippocampus "Since they cannot use speed to escape 1 erectus from predators, seahorses and dragon h use camouflage as a defense itegy. They change palot to leh in 1eir environment, grow skin >. shaped like seamed, and use Habitat Caribbean, Indo-Pacific Ocean to climb along the seaweed Numberofspecies 35.0 2«°02+02+402O~* live, swinging from one Sale ea 3 Size 7-12 inches (18-30 cm) FISH AND AMPHIBIANS 41 Reproduction The male has an incubating pouch in which the female deposits her eggs. The sac closes, and the embryos develop, nourished by the male. He later expels the young, now mature and independent, through a series of contractions. During the mating season the female lays some 200 eggs in the male's pouch using her egg-depositing organ. There the eggs are fertilized. When the time for birth arrives, the male clings to seaweed with his tail. The male bends his body backward and forward, as if having contractions. The sac's opening widens, and the birthing process begins. Soon the young begin to appear. 42 DIVERSITY Pectoral fin Elegant Contours he Rajiformes are an order of cartilaginous fish related to sharks; Alp they have the same skeletal structure, the same number and type of fins, and similarly shaped gill slits. Rajiformes are distinct in that their gill slits are on the underside of the body, which is flat with pectoral fins joined to the trunk in the shape of a disk. The body is usually covered with denticles, and many have a row of dorsal spikes. They have a variety of colors, with spots and blotches. They often burrow into the mud of warm seas. @ . RAYS Head . 36 Flying Through = the Water POISONOUS TAIL BLUE LINES has a dangerous run along the whole Unlike most fish, rays have weak, slender tails stinger. length of the tail. that do little to power their swimming. They move with their enormous pectoral fins, which are joined to the head and have a characteristic rhomboid shape. Their movement rises and falls in an S curve, as if they were flying underwater. PECTORAL FINS ROUGH RAY are joined to the Raja radula body just behind the head near the gills. TAIL is slender and lacks the strength for swimming. 12.4 miles rms pay’ : Its body is covered with blue spots. It p er hour Yee inhabits reefs, caves, and crevices. Its (20 km/h) cae : tail has a powerful stinger that injects venom into predators when it feels threatened. Smiling Face The ray's face is unique. It is protected by a flap on the underside of its body. Its hornlike mouth is adapted for grasping crustaceans, and the five gill slits on each side are for breathing underwater. Nasal orifices Hornlike mouth FINS HEAD move up and down remains upright, Gill arch during swimming. looking forward. LITTLE SKATE Raja erinacea THERE ARE BLUE-SPOTTED ABOUT RIBBONTAIL RAY Taeniura lymma BS SS SS SS SPECIES OF Habitat Indian and Pacific oceans RAJIFORMES Diet Crustaceans Length Up to 6.6 feet (2 m) Poisonous Yes PELVIC FINS Small in size COMPARED FORSIZE The manta ray is the largest in the world. In FISH AND AMPHIBIANS 43 Electric organ Spiracle Gill arch Muscle Electric Ray . ‘ Electric rays (Torpedo sp.) are highly — wt active fish with electric organs on each side of the head. Each electric organ is made of numerous disk-shaped cells, connected in parallel. When all the cells fire ’ at once, an electric current is discharged into the water at 220 volts, enough to stun the prey. EYES TAIL WITH Turnediodtivard ELECTRIC CHARGE PECTORAL FINS Joined to the head Se 0 Seta have long irs han strength of their jaws. Great white sharks are implicated in most f attacks on humans, especially on surfers and divers. — ‘ Senses Sharks have senses that most animals lack. The ampullae of Lorenzini are small clefts in the shark's head that detect electricity. This sense helps them find prey hidden in the sand. The lateral line is used to detect movement 84 or sound underwater. Smell is their most War advanced sense, and it occupies two thirds OF US. of their brain. They also have a highly developed sense of hearing, which allows them to detect very low-frequency sounds. SHARK ATTACKS 1876-2004 MEXICO Hearing ———+ Ampulla of Detects sounds of very low frequency Lorenzini Detects nerve impulses The most highly Lateral line developed sense detects is smell; it takes movements or up two thirds of sounds the brain. underwater. Electric —* CAUDAL FIN ——@ The great white shark has a large heterocercal caudal fin. GREAT WHITE SHARK Carcharodon carcharias Habitat Oceans Weight 4,400 pounds (2,000 kg) Length 23 feet (7 m) Life span 30-40 years EYES JAW SNOUT Detects the odor of nearby prey “™ They have poor vision and use their sense of smell to hunt. So! AMERICA NEW ZEALAND SOUTH AFRICA AUSTRALIA 22() ATTACKS IN eg 128 YEARS A ANAL ——® FIN “al PECTORAL FIN —————————_@® PELVIC FIN Highly developed and very important for swimming During an attack, it stretches forward. Serrate edge COMPARISON WITH OTHER SPECIES 112 feet (3.4 m) - “ 98 feet (3 m) - BULL SHARK TEETH Tf a tooth is lost in front, it is replaced by another tooth that moves forward from a row that grows behind. The great white shark, at 23 feet (7 m) long, is one of the largest of its genus. LEMON SHARK 23 feet (7 m) GREAT WHITE SHARK ee » a ne FREQ JAW ‘PARTS MOST 24% UENTLY Head ATTACKED FISH AND AMPHIBIANS 45 40% Legs and knees RAISED SNOUT The head is raised and the jaws open. THE JAWS ADVANCE The shark grabs the prey with its teeth and holds it until it is dead. REPLACEMENT TEETH Sharks lose thousands of teeth throughout their lives, but each one is replaced with a new tooth. Throat New teeth Jaw The shark's jaws are made of cartilage instead of bone, and they are located underneath the skull. When the animal closes in on its prey, it raises its snout. The jaws slide forward, away from the skull, for a better grip. Most shark teeth have serrated edges for cutting flesh. The sharp points are for perforating, and the wide, flat surfaces are for crushing. 46 DIVERSITY Time to Eat ost fish feed within their aquatic environment. Some species, however, seek their food outside the water. The best-known example is the archerfish, which shoots streams of water from its mouth to knock spiders and flies off nearby plants and into the water. The African butterfly fish eats flying insects, which it traps after a brief flight. The river hatchetfish has a similar strategy: its long pectoral Ina vertical f , : ition, it fins and flattened body enable it to make great leaps. e@ saa ae well enough [ to attack it. él | = i ' nN F isi tag * Archerfish Technique Angle of vision | 5 feet ; bran The tongue presses upward against Archerfish have large (L:5 Seven species of archerfish live in the a groove in the roof of the mouth, eyes and excellent vision : m) tropical waters of India and southeast Asia. forming a tube for emitting the for hunting. At an angle close to Range of the They hunt using an unusual technique of stream of water. 90° to the surface water stream for spitting streams of water. O of the water, it antadult fish Groove in roof Movement focuses on the prey. of mouth of tongue EXACT ANGLE OF | 4 inches 31 a VISION (10 cm) inches f ‘ H 4 Range of the cm) j water stream for 7 The tongue acts a young fish L oe as a valve to ; 9.4 inches (24 cm) | @ keep the water under pressure. Strategy The carnivorous archerfish has developed a special strategy for hunting live insects, which is highly effective for hunting prey outside the It looks at water at distances of up to 5 feet (1.5 m). the prey and shoots a / stream of Fal water. - = ar : 4 vt = b, : — = F, _ j ff = en oS ae | woh oF When the [= E — _— \, i Po “/ © | insect falls a ' = , Pl ee “wi is into the water, t f a ee 4 | | ! h it f ~~ the fish Se i - al 7A 2 | devours it. — i — = Pil ~ - —— it j j b a “hy - P \: 7 %, ha my, { SEARCH SHOT AIM The archerfish When it finds its prey, Tf the first looks upward in the archerfish positions stream misses, search of its prey. its body upright and the fish tries shoots a stream of again and again. water at the target. Its prey includes spiders as well as flies and other insects. Leap Not only can archerfish shoot their prey, but they can also leap out of the water and make the prey fall in order to eat it. African Butterfly Fish It inhabits pools and slow rivers in Africa, from Nigeria to the Republic of the Congo. The butterfly fish hunts in small groups near the shore, hiding 12 inches (30 cm) The jaws of the archerfish play ital role in the hunt. HEIGHT IT CAN st aia cae among roots and floating plants. It uses its pectoral REACH IN ONE fins to “fly” out of the water to capture food or to JUMP Warm escape from predators. It eats flying insects, which it Temperature of traps on its short flights, and small fish. the waters the archerfish inhabits 6.6 feet 2m) The pectoral fins power its leap. MAXIMUM LENGTH OF A LEAP the tail powers its ascent to the surface. = - 4 - SS Me, fr] * oh be fe : ~ In the water : +i "2 . The pectoral fins = ty ; 2 A serve as wings. Fd Lo 14 ia ms Archerfish African butterfly fish Toxotes jaculatrix Pantodon buchholzi Found in southeast Asia, India, and northern Large, well-focused eyes for effective hunting Australia, it lives in brackish waters with temperatures of 77-86° F (25-30° C). Hatchetfish This carnivorous, freshwater fish comes e . from South and Central America. It y e 15 inches swims in schools and can reach lengths of up to 2.75 inches (7 cm). It always swims (7 cm) very close to the surface. Its long pectoral fins and flattened body enable it LENGTH OF THE HATCHETFISH to leap high out of the water. Hatchetfish Gasteropelecus sternicla 48 DIVERSITY FISH AND AMPHIBIANS 49 Survival Of the more than 7,500 eggs that two females can lay, only two hatched fish will remain at the end of the life cycle of two years. The Journey Home fter living in the ocean for five or six years, the Pacific red salmon (Oncorhynchus WAC EL SSSI ee Jen CCI Sis WEIL SE SSIME CS : 4 a easy prey for other fish. A nerka) returns to the river where it was born to reproduce. The journey lasts from two to three months, and it demands a great deal of energy. The salmon must swim Eggs Red River a ee ie ee The salmon returns to its birthplace to spawn. Males have intense coloration Fry iM te a ae a tet ate ates atest ate 200 with a green head. Salmo. tj. — a if 4 ed _ i, : |! Weight oe, —————_ : 143 pounds ro ¥ a | (65 kg) ise... ¥ SNOWFLAKE MORAY Sea A Weight Se Echidna nebulosa Tis dar beenend : 53 pounds : It grows rather slowly and yellow body is covered (24 kg) f can take up to two years to with a protective 31 inches ——————— reach adult size. mucous layer. (80 cm) 58 DIVERSITY ut of the Water ome species of fish can breathe and live out of the water. They include the mudskippers in southeast Asia, which can stay on muddy flats and even climb trees. To breathe, they need only their skin to stay moist, thanks to the function of certain cells in their skin. A few other species still have rudimentary lungs like those of the first aquatic animals that colonized dry land. Fish with Lungs Lungfish have rudimentary lungs that originate from a connection between the swim bladder and the esophagus. This allows the swim bladder to function using air when the fish leaves the water. Depending on the species, the fish can breathe air occasionally or even SOUTH AMERICAN LUNGFISH Lepidosiren paradoxa has a small gill apparatus and two lungs with which it breathes during the dry season.. indefinitely. Many varieties of these fish have WEST AFRICAN LUNGFISH been found in fossil form all over the world, Protopterus annectens annectens which indicates that they were very widespread has fleshy fins that look like limbs during the Mesozoic Era. They were probably and three external gills. In the dry the first vertebrates to develop lungs. However, season it secretes a substance for lungfish species are found in only three areas covering itself. It can remain in this today, all in freshwater environments. state for up to a year. QUEENSLAND LUNGFISH Neoceratodus forsteri = . When forced to breathe air for long Length of time certain periods, this fish will die. It can lungfish can live buried in reach up to 50 inches (1.25 m) long, the mud weigh 22 pounds (10 kg), and live more than 65 years.. WATER LEVELS DROP HEAD FIRST TURNING AROUND HIBERNATION The fish looks for an area On entering the burrow head The lungfish curls in on itself The fish breathes through with soft mud under the first, the fish secretes thick with its head up. Before the two or three small holes in water, where it can easily mucus, which enables it to slide water level drops, it seals the the plug. Its bodily functions dig itself a burrow. in easily and also protects it entry with a plug of clay. are reduced to a minimum. from dehydration. Some water is still left in the pond. The water has receded completely. Mud When the dry season arrives, and rivers and ponds dry up, both the African and South American species of lungfish dig holes in the mud along the shore and bury themselves. They then reduce their metabolic functions to a minimum and burn as little energy as possible until the waters rise again. FISH AND AMPHIBIANS 59 Atlantic Mudskippers Cavities for storing Located in a type of (Periophthalmus barbarus) reserves of seawater. cavity that contains Large and prominent to provide a panoramic : These are the only water-dwelling fish view, they are This way the gills never both water and air. protected by a delicate dry out when the fish is They can absorb air as that Call adapt to a completely r layer of skin. The fish out of water. long as they are kept amphibious lifestyle. What S their secret ? rotates its eyes to keep moist. They accumulate water in their skin and in several special chambers near their gills, which enables them to use their gills outside the water. They live on the coasts of the Indian and Pacific oceans, in southeast Asia, and on the western coasts of Madagascar. They usually swim in shallow waters, holding onto roots and seaweed and raising their heads out of the water. They move about easily on mud and dry land, and they can even climb trees. They can breathe air or water equally well. them moist. also contain respiratory organs. The skin is a respiratory organ and needs to be kept moist. The skin cells are able to accumulate water. Used for walking and jumping when outside the water, they even enable the fish to climb trees. In water, the fish crawls along the — " i," . 5 is adapted to its . 4 sculpted body to enable it to jump in the mud. This gives the fish its common name. bottom. Kr, « Z i 5 ? / J 4 he » LFOSSHS ©-.*, $1 Te wediin. Sli Pi Lungfish have not evo ved in MUDSKIPPER ¥ 250 million years. ~ | 7 . Periophtalmus sp. | ~ Habitat Indian Ocean andthe ; Pacific coasts of Asia wade “ Family Gobidae_— ‘aa : ra Length 6 inches (15 cm) . Amphibians ew groups of amphibians have generated as much scientific interest as frogs of the genus Dendrobates, which produce toxic secretions through their skin. All frogs of this genus have spectacular coloring to warn their predators of the danger. One of the most important traits of amphibians (newts, salamanders, frogs, toads, and Frogs of the genus Dendrobates secrete a special type of poison that attacks ——— the nervous system. gt caecilians) has been their conquest of land. This completely transformed the extremities of these animals, allowing them to move on land instead of swimming. They also had to adapt to DISTANT KIN POISON IN COLOR BETWEEN LAND AND WATER AXOLOTL JUMPING ATHLETES A VERY PECULIAR TAIL DEEP EMBRACE NEWTS METAMORPHOSIS take in oxygen through their skin and lungs. Here you will also discover how frogs and toads reproduce and how newts feed, among other curious facts. 62 AMPHIBIANS FISH AND AMPHIBIANS 63 Distant Kin he first amphibians evolved from fish with fleshy, lobed fins that resembled legs. Still has the They may have been attracted to land as a source for food, but the most important SOG Or SST reason for their leaving the water was the instability of the Devonian Period, which drastically affected freshwater environments. During long droughts, the fish used their fleshy fins to move from one pond to another. Oxygen availability was also affected, and this led to more organisms being able to breathe oxygen from the air. SCALES Wes he eee lived some 360 million years ago. It is just like fish. considered one of the first amphibians, even though it was not well adapted to land and lived mainly in water. It had gills, like fish, even though it probably also had lungs. Its legs were well developed, but they were not yet fit for moving on land. Cranial postorbital bone Mobile vertebrae 6 7 strengthened its Legs: Evolution py In 2004, American paleontologist Neil —— Shubin of the University of Chicago offered the scientific community a complete description of a humerus bone that was 365 / Eight toes million years old. The first tetrapods adapted r, bone to land exhibited a great variety of leg ; shapes, sizes, and strengths. After GLYPTOTEPIS 7 comparing this fossil with that of other : tetrapods, scientists concluded that the Rays of skin evolution of the legs and of the muscles | Pelvic Pectoral necessary for walking began in the girdle girdle water. ——— Ulna aS Ie eRe beeen TPES Tse The Skeleton exestnggeee tte = | EUSTHENOPTERON In the steps from their first aquatic habitat ; == —" A lobe-finned fish from the late Radius Humerus to land, the first amphibians had many ACANTHOSTEGA - Spinal Column + A + characteristics in common with fish, such as a becomes a solid Jaws Oona ne adr eT stally aeroeoe typically wide tail. They looked clumsy, with short structure with characteristics. It lived 375 million ; onc ies f ys articulated vertebrae. year's ago. Some paleontologists suggest Rays of skin limbs. The first four-legged animals had no that it was nother intermediate forni competition on land. Everything that is needed to bet fish and hibi | live on land has its evolutionary roots in fish. becomes an axis etween Usthang alnpnipians: Ulna . that supports the entire weight of 1 | PANDERICHTHYS ily ares ‘ rl Humerus / ae | ’ HEAD cone Its structure retains = nl Radius 4 the opercular bones. Humerus , J ¥ ICHTHYOSTEGA ee i * Pelvic Girdle Ribs Pectoral Ulna % The pelvic and pectoral girdle girdles are strengthened | ACANTHOSTEGA Danipanad wth tose of its predecessor. | Radius A relatively large fish, about 29 inches (75 cm) long. Many features of its skeleton were similar to those of the first amphibians; it had a cranial pattern similar to Acanthostega and Ichtyostega. The skeleton of its ¥ fins included a humerus, ulna, and radius in the front " Humerus fin and a femur, tibia, and fibula in the pelvic fin. 4 39 inches * (100 cm) 7 eT Sr 7 Ulna Radius “ . i ‘ J =— 7 e a Tee ee i, cm , i Scientific og ty NY cai name Ichthyostegopsis ad - = as Lived 360 million years ago Ss ade ¥ Lee =a Location Greenland Three-lobed tail Muscled pectoral fin cevan toes pi Length Up to 33 feet (1m) each hind leg. 64 AMPHIBIANS Between Land and Water s indicated by their name (amphi, “both,” and bios, “life”), these animals lead a double life. When young, they live in the water, and when they become adults they live outside it. In any case, many must remain near water or in very humid places to keep from drying out. This is because amphibians also breathe through their skin, and only moist skin can absorb oxygen. Some typical characteristics of adult frogs and toads include a tailless body, long hind limbs, and large eyes that often bulge. Amphibian Anatomy VOCAL SACS Amphibian anatomy has several peculiarities. Larvae, such as tadpoles, have a Both toads and frogs sing. Even though respiratory system with gills. Most species develop lungs when they reach the sound is produced by their vocal adulthood. They also have a trachea, pharynx, and saclike lungs, even though skin cords, in males the sound is breathing is at times more important than lung breathing. The heart has two auricles and amplified by means of inflatable one ventricle, and the digestive and excretory systems are similar to those of mammals. sacs on each side of the larynx. Carbon dioxide Oxygen Blood vessel \ that carries deoxygenated Amphibians breathe blood through their skin, which is clean and smooth, without hair or scales. They must always keep it moist, Blood vessel that carries oxygenated blood because it has a strong a. " Poison tendency to dry out. Even _ gland though they have mucous oa P glands that help maintain H moisture, amphibians must live in damp places. The skin of most amphibians protects them from possible predators and has poisonous glands that secrete unpleasant and even toxic substances. HIND LIMBS The muscular leg and foot ‘have five long'fingers joined by. a webbed membrane that aids ‘swimming. ADAPTATIONS eh Fn ee e legs. are Amphibian.feet vary rmusculareed according to habitat. _ well developed : : for jumping. helps in swimming. them grip and climb. SWIMMING DISKS SHOVELS The membrane Round adhesive The bulges that extends to the pad on their are useful tip of the fingers fingertips help for digging. — FISH AND AMPHIBIANS 65 SKIN EYES EYES SKIN Soft and smooth, Frogs have The pupil is usually The skin of a toad is with strong, horizontal horizontal, though wrinkled, hard, bright colors pupils. some toads have rough, and dry. It is vertical pupils. also used as leather. COMMON TOAD Bufo bufo It is very common to use “frog” and “toad” as synonyms or to think that the frog is a female toad. However, frogs and toads are quite different. Toads have wrinkled skin and short legs, and they are land animals. Frogs are smaller, have webbed feet, and live in the water and in trees. REED FROG Hyperolius tuberilinguis POSTURE Toads are terrestrial species, slow-moving and wider than LEGS frogs. Frogs live mainly in are long and are LEGS * are shorter and wider than those of frogs and are adapted for walking. water, which is why they have webbed toes adapted adapted for jumping. Frogs have webbed toes for swimming. to help with swimming. Nutrition CATCHING is based on plants during the larval tas aul stage, whereas in the adult stage the prey, main food sources are arthropods (such as soalioalng insects of the order Coleoptera and hae arachnids) and other invertebrates, such as butterfly caterpillars and earthworms. SWALLOWING Eye retraction, where the toad closes and turns its r eyes inward, increases the pressure in the mouth, pushing food down the esophagus. tha EUROPEAN TREE FROG RINGED CAECILIAN Types of Amphibians is docile and lives near . looks like a large, buildings. = : thick worm. Amphibians are divided into three = wm groups that are differentiated on the ANURA ——_—— APODA basis of tail and legs. Newts and Tailless : — Without legs salamanders have tails. They belong to the 5 order Urodela. Frogs and toads, which have no tail except as tadpoles, belong to the Anura group. Caecilians, which have no tail or legs, are similar to worms and belong to the Apoda group. Frogs and toads have four fingers on each front leg and five on each hind leg. Water frogs have webbed feet; tree frogs have adhesive disks on the tips of their fingers to hold on to vertical surfaces; and burrowing frogs have callous protuberances called tubercules on their _ jregpnerigiaas hind legs, which they use for digging. colorful in America URODELA With a tail 66 AMPHIBIANS FISH AND AMPHIBIANS 67 AT THE TOP The white-lipped tree frog Jumping Athletes @ uow iz Adhesion (Litoria infrafrenata) has a en fs an . : . i i length of 39 inch mphibians of the order Anura are known for their ability to jump high Feeding EYES ase tae fo cao cri ie aaapteator and far. This group includes frogs and toads, and their anatomy helps Amphibians from the order Seta sea as of the tongue, mountain climbing, jumping, them to jump. Frogs use their jumping ability to escape from their man Se ee ey hut. sa SERRA sivor Cannon e J p. 0 : J : ping y p : y feed on insects and small Suu: pads on the tip of each finger predators; they can jump a distance equivalent to 10 to 44 times their body invertebrates such as and toe aly it to adhere to . . j many surfaces. length. When they feel threatened, they can choose to jump into the nearest ene lae al Seem ~ i body of water, where they hide, or they can jump erratically on land to confuse Tadpoles are herbivores. a their attacker. © VISIBLE ° The toe has a sticky HUMP 5 mucous coating. WHITE-LIPPED TREE FROG Litoria infrafrenata Insects found on plants are the favorite meal of frogs. The Frog @ STRETCHED-OUT BODY preg [ts large eyes help it to locate [Lg prey easily. The eyes have lids that protect them from particles in Jumping Spinal column the air or help them see underwater. ' ; Before the jump begins, the frog No escape ——" Tet rola Wor iat Secrets tenses the muscles ofits hind legs The tongue folds Dring, | vei csity and presses its feet against back into the mouth, ' | in the act of jumping, or irritating substances. The frog carrying the the ground. As the frog breathes through its lungs and skin. insect with it. It has a large tympanum, or vee ae as eardrum, visible on each side of the “i Care enody, head and a wide mouth that may or chwares may not have teeth. FOREFEET have four fingers and are not as strong as the hind feet. EDIBLE FROG 9 VERTEBRAE Rana esculenta Aside from these, it has LEG MUSCLES is found in Europe and a urostyle—a cylindrical Leg tense to carry out the jump. also in the United States, Fall bone that results from Adapted for Canada, and Asia. the fusion of vertebrae. jumping and f At this moment, when the frog swimming extends its hind legs, it not only reduces air resistance but also helps with the entry into the water. if HIND FEET The Toad Fall lh have five ‘ +o ks Each hind leg l fi 5 f t DIVE webbed toes. peg Having characteristics similar to those extends like an ° e e 4 The body curves Leg of frogs, toads can be distinguished by arrow. My upward ‘A, it only a few features. Generally, toads are F, (5 3 5 m) \ os the water. larger, less stylized, and better adapted to i ; \, a , living on land. Toads' skin is thicker than that * a! i of frogs to prevent drying, and toads are THE JUMP TRE BIS TANCE JUMPED a, - ‘ BY AN AFRICAN FROG . J The toad's jump covers less distance because of its greater weight and because its legs are not as flexible as those of the frog. normally covered with warts. The hind It closes its Tt lands legs boost eyes for with its ' , i — the jump. ; protection. forelimbs. — | te _— , a ty f :. i E —_ It rises in the air a few inches. ASIAN TREE FROG Pedostibes tuberculosus AT REST 68 AMPHIBIANS FISH AND AMPHIBIANS 69 Four cylindric fingers ——— = —— — — ——— = — a — = ——— oe — — —— = —=—— = — — —— —. De eC Embrace Peer eae er Responsible Parents EUROPEAN MIDWIFE TOAD 2 5 60 The call that a male makes Some males of frog and toad species play a Fae the string of eggs that the ae tomate witha female al] Umporsats foe VTE Rrokeatinn yf Hic female has laid over his hind legs. He catries THE NUMBER OF EGGS THE ' rae Aes : : eggs laid by the female. They pick up the eqas the eggs for a month Srvluee nian witha ' TOAD CAN CARRY ON HIS BACK ) eproduction by amphibians IS usually carried out In "| - a and help the mothers, and ame even carry the moist environment, aad leaves them in the | / the water, where the female deposits the lee ale eh eal water so the young can swim away. | eggs, despite the fact that some species = ae are able to deposit eggs on land. The most eg favorable time for this activity is during the spring, when the male sings to make his presence known. During mating, also called amplexus, the male positions himself on top and fertilizes the eggs as they come out. Then E gelatinous layers absorb water and increase their bole ie tated 7 eookGs i deposits the sperm. volume, binding the eggs together in large masses. i The tadpoles are born in the water. Amplexus Fertilization for the majority of amphibians is external. In this hazardous process, the male, embracing the female in amplexus, discharges NUPTIAL PAD spermatozoa while the ovocytes are » Used by the male to I aa: released. Both are released in great hold onto the female SURINAM TOAD 1 The young are identical numbers in order to ensure the success Pipa pipa } to their parents. ae ue ike de ae embrace can The female goes around in circles, i* ; ast trom oO minutes. <= i — a ! laa ; Females are £ larger than F males. Weight 17-5 ounces (50-100 g) : MALE BI i tc FOREFOOT Rana perezi FEMALE ————_C™" Diet Carnivorous FOREFOOT Reproduction Oviparous } Season Spring f # ié Pi SOME ANURANS CAN LAY UP TO EGGS INSIDE THE FEMALE Sperm — Oocyte Pl ——— Sperm \e es = — — Ey Blastocele rr = Morula Bcstal = gamete Zygote sos LIFE CYCLE Fs ‘\ Plasma The three stages of the life cycle are egg, wal ‘ germ cell larva, and adult. The embryos begin to . Oocyte develop within the eggs; then, after six or ~ Female — Blastopore nine days, the eggs hatch, and tiny tadpoles gamete V V ¢ ¢ S i with spherical heads, large tails, and gills ane Sexicall emerge. Once the gills pass their function = ea RO THE DURATION OF THE CYCLE Eétod Mesoderm over to the lungs and the tail of the a oy male ar amphibian has shrunk and disappeared, the a ‘ @—_ Ectoderm young frog enters the adult stage. 4 -MAL' lays the eggs in a string. releasing one egg each time. The male places the egg on the female's back, and she covers them with her swollen skin to protect them until they hatch. Release of the tadpoles Hatching 6 The tadpoles absorb oxygen. HINDFEET 70 AMPHIBIANS Metamorphosis etamorphosis is the process of transformation experienced by anurans (it can also be observed in amphibians from the order Urodela and caecilians) starting with the egg and ending at the adult stage. When they leave the egg, amphibians have a larval form. They then undergo very important changes in their anatomy, diet, and lifestyle, slowly mutating from their first stage, which is completely aquatic, until they transform into animals adapted to life on land. @ Strategies FR Given that there often are not enough bodies of Le@ water available (or not enough that are adequate for reproduction), many frogs and toads such as the ones from this species form large proliferation groups. The collective mass of eggs can retain heat better, and that allows the tadpoles to be hatched in less time. Many times frogs and toads use lakes and streambeds that dry out at certain times of the year, because that practice prevents other Larvae 3 DAYS The larvae have large heads and are elongated; they have lee eae ae arg ae sects animals from arriving and eating the eggs and tadpoles. leaving the egg, the tadpole xs acquires gills. e at ] | ) OUS Capsule Each egg is wrapped in a gelatinous or jellylike capsule that expands the moment it touches the water and thus increases in volume to protect the embryo. HIND LIMBS acy The hind limbs “atin appear as P al LONG small buds. INTERNAL GILLS Change 4 WEEKS The external gills are covered by the skin of the body, and they are replaced by internal gills. They feed on algae. Change 2 6 WEEKS The tadpoles begin to look like small frogs with long tails, and they swim close to the bank in groups. FORELIMBS THE TAIL IS ABSORBED. (Fused clavicle) Shaped like a boomerang - — == -7 5 e* © . a? —_* *_ @8,* = EDIBLE FROG 4 » @*« s'« et a git’ By ®..0" s.* * Rana esculenta . ee» .~e6 » &” 6 *- so,,* & ‘. «® * _* » es a! a°). 0 ot & “= = , wz «= ° i) a," *. ri. » «£ = @ -» «© ‘S. - e ® =<, ba an i ee Fe ea” a” a ’ i 7. ee" ° = & fee a | @ en * a ‘te? Mea VE% GL on Pe eb. 'o . ; ai : , # hi ~~» i So pe © ere ¢a° cee * “se . ee a ee oe ee Ore * §G' e oe a ee e 7,8 ao, 9.9 Be f= Sa soln eee “. a ss » es 20%” “. a . "« & o*s - oe * ° “es oe» om a" one aro see » ©. @ ~s v—e® %, , - « e *% ee * Pe Le ee i _*® »® e*_r* o %” = es = . eee" «8 vf ‘ . @arere* 8 & Ls ° #2 : ».** e,2"* “se @ ee, 8 ° * ,_* oe *.5 a* "«. | i #6 = + . s s « fe ss 7 vee +s . ° e READY Adult frogs meet at the pond's CHANGED bank before abandoning the HEART water for the first time, which they do as a group. BULGING EYES FISH AND AMPHIBIANS 71 Mother Frog and Her Eggs Fl Despite the fact that the survival instinct of anurans is not fully LL developed, frogs and toads somehow take care of their future young. Laying eggs in great quantities ensures that many tadpoles will be able to escape predators who feed on the eggs. The gelatinous layer also protects the eggs from other predators. Some frogs even care for their tadpoles by nestling them on their backs. An example of such a frog is the Surinam toad. Cycle METAMORPHOSIS The development of the common European frog from egg to adult takes approximately 16 weeks. Change 2 16 WEEKS The tadpole has well-developed hind limbs and protruding eyes. Very little of its tail remains to be absorbed. FINGERS Frogs have four toes on their forefeet Change 2 9 WEEKS A tissue has divided the atrium (one of the parts of the heart), resulting in a three-chamber heart, which and five on helps with the movement of blood REMAINDER their hind between the heart and the lungs. OF THE TAIL feet. 72 AMPHIBIANS Poison in Color POISON BULGE OF WARNING GLAND THE EYE ot all that glitters is gold, nor is it healthy. The skin of some amphibians has — BAND: glands that secrete poison. Color is a warning sign, a way of keeping possible attackers away, and also a way to defend territory during mating season. The most dangerous frogs are the poison dart frogs from Central and South America and the mantella frogs of Madagascar. They are a small, very sociable species that live in small groups, are diurnal, and, in some cases, live in trees. @ POISONED DARTS The Choco Indians of Colombia poison the tips of the darts of their blowpipes to hunt. They obtain the toxin by heating a live frog over a fire. In the case of Phyllobates terribilis, this yellow frog is so poisonous that rubbing the dart against the back of the 4, frog is enough to make the dart poisonous. NO TAIL BULGING EYE About 3,600 4 species of amphibians recorded in the world are poisonous. Tadpole. Has not i . ‘ yet developed i SKIN Colorful and moist, the skin sweats poison when the frog feels threatened. the poison at this stage. Tadpole with legs. When the color { is visible, the poison is deadly. FINGERS WITH SUCKER PADS » GLANDS function the same as in frogs; they S LJ 2) have glands that => = = secrete poison on the skin and cover it. STRONG HIND LEGS — GLANDS — ®° a On both sides of al the head and behind the eyes MOIST ia ah aetN MARBLED SALAMANDER color is bright ly i * Ambystoma opacum and distinct. This type of salamander can measure between 2.7 and 4.7 inches (7-12 cm) in length. Its base color is black with silver stripes, which gives the salamander its marbled look and its name. RETICULATED ARROW-POISON r FROG i: = TOXIC TADPOLES Salamanders Dendrobates ae | Poison dart frogs, or poison arrow frogs, peg At the end of their development, these salamanders reticulatus | carry their tadpoles, sometimes one by one, iL lead lives that are completely terrestrial. They defend their territory, including the space around their burrows, against intrusion. Their colors act as a warning to would-be predators. Two rows of poisonous glands run SOFT FEET the length of their bodies. . fa, to small isolated ponds (sometimes in tree hollows), where they raise them. There they develop both their color and the poisonous toxins that they secrete from their backs when they feel threatened. LONG ——© TAIL Frogs and Mantellas Fl The secretions of all dendrobate frogs are (Le poisonous, but only a very small number are sufficiently toxic to kill a person. The most important toxins are batracotoxins, pumiliotoxins, histrionicotoxins, and gephyrotoxins. The batracotoxins affect the nervous equilibrium of the body and cause arrhythmia, fibrillation, and cardiac arrest. On the other hand, pumiliotoxins cause motor difficulties, partial paralysis of extremities, salivation, convulsions, and, finally, death. These amphibians obtain their poison from their diet: certain millipedes and coleopterans, as well as ants. Any insect that feeds on plants that synthesize alkaloids and is then ingested by a poisonous frog provides the frog with poison. YELLOW-BANDED POISON DART FROG Dendrobates leucomelas Habitat South America Number of species 5,000 Size 0.4-19 inches (1-5 cm) TADPOLES are transported stuck to the back. Lethal More than 100 toxins lethal to humans have been identified in these frogs. TINY PERIL The golden poison dart frog is one of the most poisonous animals on the planet. It can kill 10 human beings with the quantity of poison it stores. oy ) ) —~ SS PA y 2 fs FISH AND AMPHIBIANS 73 GREEN AND BLACK POISON DART FROG Dendrobates auratus Spotted body and variety of colors COSTA RICAN VARIABLE HARLEQUIN TOAD Atelopus varius Regular red spots BLUE POISON DART FROG Dendrobates azureus The color is bright blue. THE COLOR OF POISON In nature, bright, flashy colors usually serve as a warning sign to predators. Thus, a frog can use color to defend its territory from other males during mating season. 74 AMPHIBIANS FISH AND AMPHIBIANS 75 — Axolotl Regs erat = Another trait of the axolotl is its outstanding . F > ability to regenerate its extremities and other emt ‘ail e me ee rar diate # ihe his plump amphibian is a classic example of neoteny—the ability to reproduce without Fe mibicdtnane fle ion ae which it is named, Xélot! feared death, refused to accept it, and developing completely into an adult. The axolotl has a flat tail and.large external gills, CoRR NetstRCIE afengttitice colle multiply anil Bagot to scone his powreragagearotorstlng Ti 1 1 , r 4 i i iccii Hl legend recounts that, to Tlee Death, he ran to the water, where which most salamanders lose when they reach maturity and begin to live on land. The Tnteestingly the aby tote aa fare he became tgg[/Wgalles Sy gms aoe augorrerabis final axolotl is mostly nocturnal and feeds chiefly on invertebrates. It, in turn, can wind up as the other ai@ibians of fHelartemulimticl metagrornhost begga best Taras and Kills him. prey of a water bird. The axolotl was once considered a delicacy, but it is now legally protected. “a e i. Neoteny 4 Zamtiio Fatrilide One of this animal's notable traits AXOLOTL — ie is neoteny—that is, reaching sexual re Amby: stoma LAKE maturity while in a larval stage, never i Hie Cy XOCHIMILCO experiencing metamorphosis. Neoteny is is the only place on Lake caused by low levels or the complete the planet where tocan absence of thyroxine as the result of a Habitat Mexico (Lake Xochimilco) _ the axolotl is found low-functioning thyroid gland. In axolotls, inthe wild. Longitude yroxine can be generated under v 19° 30 erimental conditions by Habits Mainly aquatic 5 _ istering iodine. Length 10-12 inches (25-30 cm) = Lifespan 25 years Tenochtitl (J q Lake Texcoco yy Lake Weight \ Xochimilco 1.5 pounds (0.7 kg) 12 inches i © (30 cm) Life Cycle The female lays a large number of eggs. The > time of incubation depends largely on the temperature. At 60° F (16° C), incubation averages 19 days. At the age of six months, the animals are very active swimmers. They reach sexual maturity ' . Q at one year of age and adult size at between two . , brown\with wii and three years, never losing certain anatomical and ! | , J In captivity or in th physiological traits of the larval stage. natural environment, some are albinos with red or gray gills. C——_ === SKIN Unlike salamanders and other metamorphosed amphibians, axolotls do not shed their skin. ADULT At two or three years of age EXTREMITIES The extremities are fragile and delicate. In albinos, the bones can be seen through the thin, transparent skin. Axolotls have four toes on each front foot and five on each hind foot. FULL-GROWN we i, 76 AMPHIBIANS FISH AND AMPHIBIANS 77 Tongue pad A Very Peculiar Tail ee ee. | | he salamander is an animal of the order Urodela that needs damp places to survive. It lives in a very limited range of areas, and it is highly sensitive to modifications in its natural ——, ot : i : : a a The tongue habitat. Unlike frogs and toads, the salamander keeps its tail when it reaches , , 4a muscles retract. adulthood. The tail makes up nearly half the length of its body. Salamanders, 1 oo m especially adults, are completely nocturnal. Their movements are slow iP .. rd Sos ot >, when they walk or crawl along the ground. During the day they stay aot iit te hidden under rocks, in underground burrows, and on tree trunks. e f ine Ae sy Outer section Re a of the tongue TaCREY HUMIDITY Cl a @ SALAMANDER treatin cae —_ tebe tor Salamandra through the skin. = MUSCIES ' salamandra NS” = - = Feeding Habits al alas CWith its long tongue, the salamander can trap Oe es 2 See its prey in a flash and cuamldy gulp it down. These x Family Salamandridae y ail carnivorous animals use mainly sight and smell to : hunt. Because they are not very active, heh . : salamanders need relatively small amounts of ae cai i a food. If they obtain more food than necessary, i é they store it as fat for lean times. il Re ducti F occur in spring, — _ depending on the a habitat and the species. = Life Cycle There are three stages to the life cycle: egg, larva, ITALIAN and adult. The eggs vary in size depending on the SALAMANDER species. Larvae have feathery external gills. Metamorphosis lasts until adulthood, when the salamander loses its gills and The head is narrow, with the mouth and eyes smaller than those of frogs and toads. However, in comparison with frogs HEAD On the back and sides, the F : - and toads, the ee body is ; Its head is smaller than ; skin is smooth and shiny. ees to breathing with 1 EGG ; Defense longer, but its feet are similar in size and those of frogs and toads eee abe | ungs- Q Hatches into The Italian spectacled salamander has two ways length. The salamander walks slowly, because of the loss of die ang es eRe, a larva of avoiding its enemies. It plays dead, or it curls never reaching great speeds, and its bony structures and the its tail forward. Other species defend themselves limbs are at a right angle to the body. _», presence of cartilage. | by using a toxic substance produced by glands or i f : by breaking off the tail, which continues to move TAIL if on its own and confuses the predator. The salamander has a tail, unlike frogs and toads, which lose their tails on reaching adulthood. BIRTH The larva is born = with feathery , | ADULT ve ars external gills. r F Metamorphosis is completed; the salamander — F reaches sexual LIFE SPAN OF SOME SPECIES nee ' maturit — 3 —_ i fib Long, with 16 to 22 ' y- = : : iA thoracic vertebrae, ae i a a ; each one with a : ee ( : a Pe ; Th ‘SALAMANDER pair of ribs. 7 Ap j _-"-Saldmiandra Janzai Sa “yh, F - . FEET LARVA it cy) Pees ’ Salamanders have four toes CHANGE “iodo i One T rm phe ¢ ead ; on each foot. The salamander F The body grows longer; P gins; a J : peg Bast gesrauone 7 pushes its body forward by the salamander begins the salamander loses 4 we fperiod of all-animals, pressing against the ground. even longer than that of elephants. to breathe through the its gills and switches ts aed -. 5 fe ; skin and lungs. to breathing air. oe 7 * © GESTATIONAL PERIOD {” ay 78 AMPHIBIANS 1 Newts long with salamanders, newts are the most primitive of terrestrial vertebrates. Of the three main surviving groups of primitive amphibians, newts most closely resemble the animals from which all amphibians are descended. Some of their habits are also more complex and varied. Most of the time they live on land, but during the mating season they return to the water. Unlike frogs and toads, newts and salamanders keep their tails as adults. They are found in temperate regions of the Northern Hemisphere. @ Courtship and Reproduction IF Courtship and mating involve a showy exhibition by both male and [La@i female. The male must find a female of the same species and bring her a packet of sperm, which he deposits on the ground or in a pool. Fertilization is internal, and the female gathers the packet into her cloaca. DANCE Males are attracted by the female's belly, swollen with eggs. The males draw her attention with their showy pigmentation and the flexible crest along their back and tail. EXHIBITION The male swims in front of the female, displaying his nuptial attire. He raises the toothed crest on his back and slaps his tail while producing secretions from his cloacal glands. CONNECTION The male deposits his packet of sperm and then gently guides the female toward it, pushing her with his side. The female gathers the packet into her cloaca. EGG LAYING After the eggs are fertilized, the female finds a place to deposit them, attaching them to underwater vegetation or rocks. NEWTS Habitat Northern Hemisphere Number of species 360 Order Urodela Newt Species IR Amphibians are divided into three Lali groups, distinguished by their tails and legs. Newts and salamanders have tails and belong to the order Urodela. Some produce toxic substances for defense from predators. They are very small; the largest newt may reach 6 inches (15 cm) in length. EASTERN NEWT Notophthalmus viridescens The larvae go through a special juvenile stage called the “red phase.” FISH AND AMPHIBIANS 79 Anatomy of a Newt FR Newts, unlike salamanders, have no grooves along their sides. Adults [Leff have elongated bodies 3-4 inches (8-10 cm) long, with well-developed tails. They have four limbs, with four toes on each front foot and four or five on each hind foot. Another peculiarity is that they have teeth in both upper and lower jaws. Their heads and eyes are relatively small. Smell is their most important sense for finding food and for social interaction. FRONT FEET Newts have four toes on each of their front feet. TAIL Newts keep their tails as adults. PALMATE NEWT TRITURUS HELVETICUS 3.5 inches (9 cm) long, with a pale belly Feeding Like salamanders, these tiny animals are usually active at night. The smallest newts feed on small invertebrates, whereas larger newts can eat fish, amphibians, and eggs. HIND FEET The hind feet are webbed in males but not in females. BELLY A white or pale belly is one of the distinctive traits of this species. NEWTS AND WATER As semiaquatic creatures, newts i return to the water during mating y season. They are found in North an America, Europe, all of continental Asia, and Japan. Adapted to various habitats, they climb trees and dig in the ground in addition to living in the water. GREAT CRESTED NEWT Triturus cristatus spends from three to five months of the year in the water. Male's crest Males have a crest, and females have only a yellow stripe along their backs. DEFENSE Some newts are highly dangerous because they release a toxic substance when attacked. One such species is the California newt. It can be recognized by its bright coloring, which serves as a warning to predators. MARBLED NEWT Triturus marmoratus spends its whole life in the water, both as a juvenile and as an adult. SMOOTH NEWT Triturus vulgaris One of the most colorful A sy e MYTH AND LEGEND ENDANGERED SPECIES The salmon industry has 9 9 LARGE-SCALE CATCH DRAMATIC DECLINE become a true economic and and Amphibians a mr e he future of many fish and cultivated by humans. In other areas acid amphibians (more than 5,000 species of culprit, it is possible that a little-known amphibians is uncertain rain is affecting the wildlife of lakes, frogs, toads, salamanders, and aggressor—a recently identified illness because some species face rivers, and oceans. Fish in particular are caecilians), one third of all species are caused by a chytrid fungus—could be fishing nets, loss of habitat, and very sensitive to chemical substances in endangered. Even though experts the quickest killer of all. Many similar the invasion of species the water. As for the world population of identify loss of habitat as the main facts and figures are quite surprising. 82 PEOPLE, FISH, AND AMPHIBIANS Myth and Legend ods, demigods, princes in disguise, and religious symbols. In the field of myth, fish and amphibians embody powerful, mysterious forces of nature. Because they are aquatic, these smooth-skinned creatures are associated with “primordial waters.” Thus, they symbolize the origin of life and resurrection. Through ancient texts, artifacts, and murals, we know that throughout history, many of these creatures have been regarded as supernatural and auspicious. FISH IN RELIEF A mural featuring fish in bas-relief, a sample of symbolism from the early Christians The Americas > Challwa is the Quechua name for fish == in Andean traditions. In the beginning there was not a single fish in the sea, because fish belonged exclusively to the goddess Hurpayhuachac, who raised them in a small well in her house. Once the god Cuniraya Viracocha, who was courting one of Hurpayhuachac's daughters, became angry with the goddess and threw her fish into the ocean. In that instant the oceans were populated, and humankind was now able to rely on this new source of food. A few fish keep sacred characteristics. An example is the golden croaker, which some peasants claim to have spotted at Lake Orovilca in Ica. In Central America, the Maya included the toad in the Popol Vuh, or Book of Creation. The axolotl takes its name from the god X6lotl (“monster” in Nahuatl), whose feet were backward. Christianity The fish is one of the most Greek I The Greek gods of the sea represent the “= most elementary forces of nature. The Greeks are known for originating many myths, such as that of Poseidon (Neptune in Roman mythology), a brother of Zeus and son of Cronus and Rhea. Not only did Poseidon have power over the waves, but he could also unleash storms, smash cliffs, and cause springs to burst forth from the ground. The sovereign of the seas, he was portrayed holding a trident, a tool used by tuna fishers, and riding a chariot, surrounded by various fish and sea animals. His son, fish- tailed Triton, could control the waves by blowing a conch shell. Other sea-dwelling creatures included the Nereids (with bodies covered in scales) and the seductive mermaids, who captivated mortals. Trident The symbol of sea gods. Poseidon could crumble cliffs or calm the ocean's water with one blow from his trident, as with a magic wand. FISH AND AMPHIBIANS 83 Egyptians > Egyptian life revolved = around the Nile River, which was considered the source of life and the sole basis for the existence of this ancient civilization. The river ensured harvests and provided a habitat for many types of small animals, including frogs and snakes. In mythology, this pair of gods (Khnum and Naunet) represent the primordial waters. China | According to Chinese mythology, the half- human and half-amphibian couple Fu Hsi and Nii Kua founded the Chinese civilization after a great flood in the year 3222 BC. Fu Hsi is also considered important symbols used by early Christians. It may have been inspired by the miraculous multiplying of the loaves and fishes or by the meal shared by the seven disciples on the shores of the Sea of Galilee after the resurrection. But its popularity would seem to stem from the well-known acronym of five Greek letters that spell the Greek word for fish: ichthys. These words briefly and concisely describe Christ's character, as well as the Christians’ beliefs about Him: Iesous Christos Theou Yios Soter-that is, Jesus Christ, Son of God, Savior. It is believed that the early Christians traced two concave lines in the sand, which crossed to form a fish. The anchor, closer to a cross, was also used as a symbol. EARLY floors XOLOTL Nahuatl name for the brother of Quetzalcéatl The axolotl, Ambystoma mexicanum, is an amphibian native to Mexico that has divine origins, according to the ancient Maya. CHRISTIANITY Basilica of Aquileia Detail of a fish in one of its mosaic "i * GREECE Poseidon (Neptune) calming the waves as represented by a marble statue in the Louvre Museum in Paris the originator of the I Ching. CHINA —— Lacquer ae tray from the he Pee i, Qin dynasty, ee with fish motif . The Frog Prince Throughout history, the “== toad has been regarded as a symbol of the unsightly. A folktale tells the story of a frog prince who finally regains his human identity. One day a princess is moved by a sacrifice from the toad and kisses it. This act returns the animal , to its original state, that of a handsome Prince Charming, who had been the victim of a spell. f a 84 PEOPLE, FISH, AND AMPHIBIANS FISH AND AMPHIBIANS 85 = aaeaeen ze letsen Lar e-Scale Catch — al Bestel Trawl nets ee pe Commercial fishing fleets use advanced technology to detect consist of a cone-shaped body Ove rfishi ng schools of fish, and they use enormous nets of three types: mesh closed by a sack in which the fish The fishing industry is an important source of food . 4 ; nets, dragnets, and sweep nets. Fish species that are not used for are gathered. These nets are and employment around the world, and it provides Ue eee Te) pommel ial fish and shellfish has encouraged the nS of human consumption are also targeted commercially. maneuvered from one or two ships. the world's population with 16 percent of all animal highly efficient fishing vessels and techniques. The use of these vessels and techniques, however, has brought about increasing destruction of these resources and of the environment. Every year, fishing nets kill more than 300,000 protein consumed. However, environmental pollution, climate change, and irresponsible fishing practices are taking their toll on the planet's marine resources. teh Purse seines, or surrounding nets hang from floats and are dragged in a circle around a school of fish. Then they are closed whales, dolphins, and porpoises worldwide. The greatest threat facing many species is to at the bottom. These nets are ideal for 1 () / OF ALL oo b h d in the nets catching surface species such as tuna and 1 \J°/O SPECIES ARE aa ecome enmesne : sardines. ~ “ ™~" EXTINCT OR | RECOVERING. nl d Local vessels 7 billion Algae supply fish in surface waters. { aol aeons Collected as food or fertilizer, algae also provide the 3 Traditional fishing is a widespread, The fish they catch 6 #AeWX OO | oO ] vegetable gelatin used to make ice Fishing boat with small-scale activity practiced directly by are usually sold in the THE RECORD AMOUNT OF MONEY cream and toothpaste. a purse seine fishermen using selective fishing surrounding area. EARNED BY THE FISHING INDUSTRY Trawl net Tawi? techniques. Such harvesting of fish and = . shellfish is carried out with equipment \ such as harpoons, hand nets, fishing rods, and fish traps. The vessels may include anything from pirogues to small motorboats. , Sar , Long-line fishing : . . Many short lines with hooks j : 7 Whaling : : hang from one main line. _ Stone traps ee = . sity — Sols They are used to catch both strand schools of small fish i ta (50 m) surface and deepwater fish. when the tide goes out. Raking cockles Sonar waves are sent to : Gill net _ Net traps my =. ae ager : f the bettors The waves bounce back when they 2 encounter Commercial oe H 1,640 feet Species . (500 m) i ite. ‘ : % : 100 feet y = a ’ Of the 20,000 known species of fish, ; ty ella ' | : : (30 m) re L- Sonar only 300 are targeted for catching. Six of these represent half of the total catch. is used to detect large schools of fish. Sonar waves are sent from the ship and bounce off the ocean floor. When they meet with a school of fish, they bounce back sooner. 33 feet (10 m) Great Producers Fishing is an important source of food and employment all over the world. These figures are in millions of dollars. HERRING S . 7,000 SARDINE 6,000 ; Gill nets 5,000 41 4 39 3.6 35 = Bag net hang below the sea surface like 2000) MACKEREL This net is used to catch curtains, moving to the rhythm 3,000-| lobsters, shellfish, and fish. The of the tides. Besides capturing Pan oe, opening is designed so that the fish, though, they attract and 20005 : animal can enter the net easily catch many sea mammals and ANCHOVY but cannot get out. aquatic birds, which then die. China = Norway Thailand United Denmark Canada States 86 PEOPLE, FISH, AND AMPHIBIANS FISH AND AMPHIBIANS 87 & == - Lures, Flies, and Bait 0 spot, watch, cast the bait, and catch the fish. Humans and fish, face to face in hand-to-hand combat. Every fisherman or fisherwoman is a hunter, and knowledge of the prey is the basis of success. To catch fish, it is necessary to know their habits and preferences. Fishing methods, from fly-fishing to the use of cutting-edge technology, such as that used to catch tuna, depend on the area, the fish species, and available resources. Choosing the right morsel to tempt the fish (whether real or artificial bait) is another important decision. The key is to know which bait to use among the wide variety available and how to present it. © Wings that imitate those ture Fishing Strategies Fishing with a fly, with a hook, with bait, and with lures. Every sportfishing species has its own challenges and thus demands distinct strategies. Rainbow trout can be recognized by the red spot on the operculum bone. The artificial fly is set on top ofa hook. Fly-fishing is the most popular method among those fishing for rainbow trout. As the trout feed on surface insects, they are attracted by artificial flies that the fishermen cast. Adipose fin, Knowing how fish breathe can be very present only in useful for finding them. Arctic char, salmon, the Salmonidae ii and most trout require well-oxygenated family . waters. They generally live in cold rivers at specific elevations, where the water is clear and clean. Fishing with bait —_— These are natural baits placed on the hook for pee :. . s j the fish to bite. The favorite baits for trout are es . } it ‘ ‘te fish eggs and worms, which are used with a small sinkers tied to the fishing line. ‘i Ps fot we Wild specimens rs The tail has many spots, and they = are thinner than clearly differentiate the rainbow : those in trout from the common trout. eo we | breeding farms. 2.7 inches (7 cm) 9.8 inches (25 cm) Fishing with lures Lures are objects used as bait to attract fish. They basically consist of a hook and some element that deceives the fish. They are used to capture Arctic char, anchovies, tiger shovelnose catfish, and trahiras. Raint The most popular species for sportfishing, this trout looks athletic and elegant, and it will attack anything that looks like food. Fishing with a hook This hook holds a piece of food that is tempting to the fish, so that when the fish bites, it will be hooked. Hooks are tied to a line connected to the fishing rod. B ACTION The fish has seen the fly. The fish turns toward the fly, and when it takes the lure, the fishing line must be reeled in quickly. é Underwater, this fish can be identified by its white throat. Its tail is Fins with white : | vi Le < square-shaped borders are r Pa as and clearly characteristic E | pee CA forked. of this species. zs repaes a} avoid SZ frightening - Fishing with floats theimish ounds Saal Fishing with floats and Weise ee p - ; - Brook Trout bottom fishing fall in the CASTING the Ache 3 | COMBAT ( 18 kg) duets Hontiaul category of lure casting. = Once the fish is targeted, orfisherwoman Once it has taken the 2 Riis ie oe This is a static type of \ j it only takes one or two to approach Ty lure, the trout begins to | IN DIFFERE These fish are also known as speckled trout. When fishing—that is, once the ey tries for the animal to and make the 3 & fight by diving and ZES : } :S spawning season begins, they tend to form schools lure is cast, one waits for become suspicious. crucial cast. YQ ee “sprinting” at high speed. J 39 NDS (18 KG that travel as a group. the fish to bite. A 88 PEOPLE, bw Endan XEN “ ndiscriminate hunting, overfishing,’ the oceans have pushed many species 1 extinction. Sharks and rays are among the forms to be systematically studied, and 20 perc species are in danger of disappearing. Slow-growing species are especially susceptible to excessive fishing. — Fish in Danger The situation is especially critical for angel sharks (Squatina squatina) and for the common, or blue, skate (Dipturus batis). The angel shark has now been declared extinct in the North Sea (af- ter having been moved from “vulnerable” to “critically endangered” status), as has the common skate (which has been moved from “en- dangered” to “critically endangered”). The common skate is very scarce in the Irish Sea and in the southern part of the North Sea. As fishing operations have moved to deeper waters, the gulper shark (Centrophorus granulosus) has also suffered a substantial decline, and it is now in the “vulnerable” category. HUMPHEAD WRASSE Cheilinus undulatus Status Endangered Cause Pollution Range Pacific and Indian oceans This fish lives in Indian Ocean coral reefs. A giant among reef fish, it can reach up to 7.5 feet (2.3 m) in length and can weigh as much as 420 pounds (190 kg). Its meat is prized for its flavor and texture. In many Eastern cultures, the humphead wrasse is considered highly valuable, and only the most privileged HUMPHEAD WRASSE members of society can afford it. Cheilinus undulatus i, * % PERSIAN ANGEL YELLOW-CROWNED STURGEON SHARK BUTTERFLY FISH Acipenser Squatina Chaetodon persicus squatina flavocoronatus Status Endangered Status Critically endangered Status Vulnerable Cause Overfishing Cause Overfishing Cause pomuon Range Caspian Sea Range Mediterranean Sea and Black Sea Range ‘Guan’ a These fish swim upriver to spawn. Their This shark was once a common predator in the It lives in Guam, in the wi ee = eggs are highly desirable as caviar. This is North Atlantic, the Mediterranean, and the Black and only in coral ree y.bl. oral. ' one of five species of sturgeon caught wild Sea. In the Black Sea, overfishing is especiall From time i ic At at pon a in the Caspian Sea. It can reach a length of excessive. In the last 50 years, the angel il tain reality, little is 26 feet (8 m) and can weigh as much as population has declined dramatically; i land PRiclogye nn, 1,760 pounds (800 kg). declared extinct in the North Sea + a = = disappeared from many areas ie. Mediterranean 3 - a . = hn —~ i +. = : hy, i a ‘ » & al? = Pa - i = i am, . a + © = Fi = ” = — = _—_. Status - Cause Indiscriminate fishing S 4 Range Warm seas _ Range Eastern Atlantic ba 7 |’ Although it is recogr ized as the largest This fish can reach a length of 8 feet (2.5 : fish in the world, little is known about m). It has disappeared from many areas | 2 the whale shark. It can grow to a of Europe, where it was once common. It ‘i length of hearly 60 feet (18 m), and it is still fished commercially, however. The ae * _____ lives in warm seas all over the world. common skate's large size makes iteasy = °% ie i his fish takes some time to reproduce to catch in nets. It lives in the eastern a because females do not reach sexual Atlantic, the western Mediterranean, and 7 ot maturity until they are 20 years of age. the western Baltic Sea. J ; * fi y = Sd A a? . = a in : . ” 7 * pa eT a a = rh ie ’ ‘ a ; “—7 fs wa’ Me a Pad F r ] 2 a ; ae ie ‘ ereeyF * ® _ = mee DWARF SEAHORSE Seaho: eat mainly * sitiall ee ccans . SEAHORSE Hippocampus bargibanti COMMON SKATE Dipturus batis fe -_= (copepods, amphipods, & isopods, and ostracods), which it sucks into its tubular mouth. = Cause... Pollution Range Caribbean Sea Most seahorses are quite small, from the dwarf seahorse in the Gulf of Mexico, at 1 inch (2.5 cm), to the giant seahorse in the Pacific, at 137 inches (35 cm). In European waters, seahorses have an average length of 6 inches (15 cm). They use color as protection from the fish and fauna that share their habitat. -_ 90 PEOPLE, FISH, AND AMPHIBIANS \ FISH AND AMPHIBIANS 91 D tic Decl ‘ \ 3 | - . PERU Yalna 1C CC ~ . | ff > \ STUBFOOT mphibians are considered by scientists to be tl t natural indicators of an *e | Ai ecosystem's health. They are in a catastrophic decline: of all amphibian species, peruensis 7 percent are in critical condition, compared with 4 percent of mammals and 2 Status ~=*«w Cee percent of birds. Of the 5,700 known species of amphibians, 168 have disappeared, Cause Infectious disease Range Peru and 1 species in 3 is in danger of suffering the same fate. Most of this dlecline—a phenomenon comparable in proportion to the disappearance é In the pas population of COSTA RICAN VARIABLE of the dinosaurs—has taken place during the past 20 years. e . f ti radlWroaD this amphi fined by 80 | = j Atelopus varius percent. The now critically endangered. It seems that this animal is Causes of Danger r disappearing because of a fatal infectious disease that affects amphibians and that is caused by a The most important cause of the loss of species is the e fungus of the Chytridiomycota order. destruction of habitat through water and air pollution. ’ Because most amphibians depend on fresh water to live, they suffer the effects of pollution before other forms of life. This | makes them indicators of the condition of the environment. In F F ~- . America and Australia, scientists have identified a fungus | ] oor ford & ‘ 4. — that causes a disease called chytridiomycosis. This disease among frogs and toads has caused the amphibian popula- ~ © " tion to decline by over 50 percent. This fungus advances 174 miles (28 km) per year and is lethal. - ~ COSTA RICAN ZI : VARIABLE KAISER'S HARLEQUIN TOAD j SPOTTED NEWT Atelopus varius j Neurergus kaiseri Status Critically endangered F ._ oo Cause Pollution ; —_ “ “ Ste Critically endangered = e , _ = = 7 Range Costa Rica, Panama, 2 ~~. , ll ie amt e and Colombia ™ OF SPECIES ARE Range a Tran Pe { a ager * ENDANGERED. \e. -# This critically endangered species is highly This newt is endangered because the sought after for its bright colors, which have ie range of its habitat is less than 60 miles led to its illegal hunting. At the same time, 2 ’ (100 km). The entire population of the the toad's habitat is being destroyed by . : species lives within an area of 4 square deforestation. ' = miles (10 sq km). Both the length and the %y as quality of its life are declining, in addition an to a decrease in the number of mature d . = ee. specimens because of the illegal pet trade. _ a é = : MEXICAN \\, DUNN ROCKET SPOTTED CRAUGASTOR,.. hf AXOLOTL ((m ns 11 FROG . . Laue!) } SALAMANDER TABASARAE Ambystoma Ky a) Colostethus Ambystoma Craugastor mexicanum am, AA maculatum tabasarae periglenes —s - Status Endangered Status Endangered Status Endangered Status Critically endangered Status Extinct . = a ! Cause Predation Gause Chytridiomycosis Cause Deforestation and pollution Cause Disease Cause Pollution . a ss _ Range Mexico Range Venezuela Range Eastern United States Range Panama Range Costa Rica a a . = The only natural habitat of the axolotl is This frog is considered critically Because of its forest habitat, urban growth This fish is critically endangered because The cause of the disappearance of this . I Lake Xochimilco in the state of Puebla, endangered because of a drastic, 80 and deforestation directly affect this its population has declined approximately species is not yet known. There is Mexico, where it is very scarce. Foreign percent decline in its population in the salamander species, and so does 80 percent over the past three generations. speculation that the toad's extinction species such as koi and carassius, which _ past 10 years. The devastation ofthe environmental pollution. These are the This reduction is attributed to the fungus could have been caused by acid rain or were introduced by humans, prey on species is attributed to factors that have brought about its Batrachochytrium dendrobatidis, and it by small variations in the environment. * axolotl eggs. chytridiomycosis. endangered status. appears to be irreversible. 92 GLOSSARY Abyssal Fish Rare species that inhabit depths of 8,200 feet (2,500 m) and below, where no light reaches. They have peculiar shapes, with large heads and strong teeth for eating other fish, because no vegetation grows at those depths. They attract prey with lure organs consisting of photophores that shine in the darkness. Actinopterygii (Ray-Finned Fish) Class of fish distinguished mainly by having a skeleton with bony spines in the fins. They have a cartilaginous skull and only one pair of gill openings covered by an operculum. Adipose Fin Small, fleshy lobe located behind the dorsal fin in certain groups of bony fish (for example, in Salmoniformes). Amphibians Animals with a double life. The young live in the water, and the adults live on land. Many need to stay near water or in damp places to avoid drying out. This is because some species breathe mainly through their skin, which can absorb air only when damp. Ampullae of Lorenzini Organs in sharks for detecting signals emitted by potential prey. Anadromous Fish Fish that reproduce in fresh water and live in the ocean as adults. Salmon are one example. Anaerobic Breathing process that does not require oxygen. Anal Fin Unpaired fin located in the middle ventral part of the fish above the anus. Anguilliformes Fish with a long, slender body without appendages, including eels and morays. Aquaculture The raising of aquatic organisms, including fish, shellfish, crustaceans, plants, and seaweed. These organisms are usually used as food for humans or animals. Barbel Fleshy filament that grows from the lower jaw of certain fish, such as sturgeon, catfish, and cod. Bathypelagic Fish that live at ocean depths below the mesopelagic zone, where light cannot penetrate. Batrachians Another name for amphibians. It comes from Batrachia, an old name for the class Amphibia. This nomenclature is considered out of date. Benthic Relating to the environment or habitat consisting of the ocean floor or of the organisms (benthos) that live buried in (endobenthic), on (epibenthic), or near the bottom. Benthopelagic Relating to organisms that are found either on the ocean floor or in open water. Usually refers to fish and crustaceans of deepwater environments. Bioluminescence Property of living beings that can produce light. Bony Fish Fish with bony skeletons and jaws. Their skeletons are relatively small but firm. They have flexible fins that allow precise control of their movements. Bony Plates Formations that grow from the skin and have a protective function for certain species. They usually cover the most sensitive parts of the fish, especially the head, although they can be found along the entire body, as in the case of the Placoderms. Cartilaginous Fish Fish with skeletons made of cartilage, such as the Elasmobranchii, a group that includes sharks and rays. Caudal Fin Unpaired fin at the lower end of the body, forming the tail fin in most fish. Complete Metamorphosis Phenomenon where the adult form of an animal looks nothing like the immature form; examples are frogs and toads. Continental Shelf Zone of the seafloor of variable dimensions, characterized by a slight slope and extending from the low tide mark to a depth of approximately 660 feet (200 m). Ctenoid Type of scale in which the free edge has spines. Cycloid Type of scale in which the free edge is rounded. Diphycercal Type of tail in which the spinal column extends to the ends of the tail, and the fin is symmetrical above and below. Diversity Degree to which the total number of individual organisms in an ecosystem is distributed among different species. Minimum diversity is reached when all the organisms belong to one species. Maximum diversity is reached in stable natural environments with a maximum variation in the substrate and environmental conditions. Dorsal Fin Unpaired fin located on the back, which keeps the fish in a stable position. Eclosion The moment when the embryo hatches from the egg. Electric Organs Organs of some species, such as electric rays and electric eels, specially adapted to discharge electric current. Epipelagic Relating to organisms that live in open water away from the ocean floor, from the surface to depths of approximately 660 feet (200 m). Estuary A coastal body of water, partly closed but open to the ocean, where fresh water and salt water mix. Exothermic An organism that cannot regulate or maintain its own body temperature is said to be exothermic. The organism's internal temperature depends on the temperature of its environment. External Fertilization Fertilization of eggs that takes place outside the female's body. The male releases sperm over the eggs after the female deposits them. The eggs are exposed to the outer environment. Filterers Fish that have evolved to take in water and use filters in their mouth or gills to extract from it only the nutrients they need. Fishhook Fishing implement, usually made of steel, consisting of a small bar bent in the form of a hook and tied to a fishing line. Fishhooks have different shapes depending on the type of fish they are designed to catch. The hook also carries bait to attract the prey. Flatfish Fish that have adopted a flat shape and live on the seafloor. They have both eyes on the same side of the head, a twisted mouth, and pectoral fins on top of the body. The “blind” side of the fish is in contact with the seafloor. Sole is one type of flatfish. Flying Fish Exocoetids, or flying fish, are a family of 70 species of ocean fish in nine genera. They are found in all the oceans, especially in warm subtropical and tropical waters. Their most notable characteristic is their unusually large pectoral fins, which enable them to glide through the air for short distances. Fossil Remains or impressions of former living beings that are preserved from past geological ages. Fry Newly hatched fish whose shape resembles that of adults of the same species. Ganoid Type of scale made of shiny, enamel-like material (ganoin) formed in successive layers over compact bone. The extinct fish Palaeospondylus had this type of scale. The only modern fish with ganoid scales are gar, bowfin, and reedfish. Gill Arch Bone that anchors the gill filaments or spines. FISH AND AMPHIBIANS 93 Gills Organs that enable fish to breathe. They consist of filaments connected to the gill arches. The fish's blood is oxygenated in the gills and circulates to the rest of the body. Gonophore Anal fin transformed into a reproductive organ. Grazers Group of fish that nibble on undersea vegetation or coral. Habitat Living space in which a species finds the ecological conditions necessary for it to reside and reproduce. Harpoon Tron bar with an arrowhead at one end, often used to hunt sharks, whales, seabream, brown meagre, and other species. Herbivore Animal that feeds exclusively on plants. Heterocercal Type of tail fin in which the spine curves upward, forming an upper lobe of larger size. Homocercal Apparently symmetrical tail fin typical of teleost fish. It is not an extension of the spine. Ichthyology Branch of zoology concerned with the study of fish, including their anatomy, physiology, behavior, etc. Industrial Fishing Process for catching large quantities of fish from the sea for sale on the international or local market. 94 GLOSSARY FISH AND AMPHIBIANS 95 Internal Fertilization Fertilization of cartilaginous fish, aided by the male's copulating organ. These organs, called claspers, developed from modifications of the pelvic fins. Keel Ridge or fleshy border along the sides of the caudal peduncle. Larva Immature but separate life-form, quite different from the adult. Lateral Line Line along the sides of the fish's body consisting of a series of pores. Luminous Organs Most fish in the ocean depths have biolumi- nescent organs that shine in the darkness and are used to attract prey or to communicate. Lungfish Fish that appeared in the Mesozoic Era, 250 million years ago. Like amphibians, these species breathe with lungs and are considered living fossils. Only three species have survived to the present. Lure Fixed or articulate lures are used in fishing to imitate small fish that are the prey of larger predatory fish. Mesopelagic Relating to organisms that live in the ocean depths, where light is dim. The mesopelagic zone is intermediate between the upper or euphotic (well-lit) zone and the lower or aphotic (lightless) zone. Metamorphosis Drastic change in the shape and behavior of an animal, usually during growth from an immature phase to maturity. Migration Travel (vertically in depth, horizontally toward the coast or along the coast) by schools of fish at more or less regular intervals (daily or seasonally), prompted by factors such as temperature, light, feeding, reproduction, etc. Mimicry Ability of certain organisms to modify their appearance to resemble elements of their habitat or other, better protected species, using camouflage to hide from their predators or prey. Mouth Incubation Mode of gestation for certain fish species that incubate the eggs inside their mouth and spit them into a burrow to feed. When the eggs hatch, the parent protects the young inside its mouth. Multispecific Fishing The harvesting of many species of fish and shellfish, with no particular species considered more important than the rest. This type of fishing is done in tropical and subtropical waters. Oceanic Region of open water beyond the edge of the continental shelf or island coasts. Operculum Gill cover of bony fish. Osteichthyes Class of fish that includes all bony fish, characterized by a highly ossified skeleton. This is contrasted with the class Chondrichthyes, including fish with cartilaginous skeletons (rays, skates, chimaeras, and sharks). Ovoviviparous Describing prenatal development of the young within the egg capsule, which is stored inside the female's body. Parasite Organism that feeds on organic substances of another living being or host, with which it lives in temporary or permanent contact, either within the host's body (endoparasite) or outside of the host's body (ectoparasite). Such an organism can cause sickness in the host. Pectoral Fin Paired fins located in the thoracic region, behind the gill openings. Peduncle Structure that acts as a support. In fish, it is a part of the fish's body located between the tail fin and the anal fin. Pelagic Relating to organisms that live at or near the ocean's surface. Photophore Mucous glands modified for the production of light. The light can come from symbiotic phosphorescent bacteria or from oxidation processes within the tissues. Phytoplankton Microscopic plants, of great importance as the basic link in most underwater food chains. Placoid Scales typical of cartilaginous fish and other ancient species. These scales are made of pulp, dentine, and enamel like that found in teeth, and they have a small protrusion. They are usually very small and point outward. Plankton Group of floating aquatic microorganisms, passively moved by winds, currents, and waves. Port Area along the coast, sheltered by natural or artificial means, where ships dock and carry on their operations. Predator Species that captures other species to feed on them. Ray In fish, bony structures that support the fins. Reef Hard bank that barely reaches above the ocean surface or that lies in very shallow waters. It can pose a danger for navigation. It can be inorganic in nature or result from the growth of coral. Sarcopterygii Another name for the Choanichthyes, a subclass of bony fish. Their fins are joined to the body by fleshy lobes, and those of the lungfish resemble filaments. Scales Small bony plates that grow from the skin and overlap each other. School Transient grouping of fish of the same population or species, brought together by similar behavior. Shipyard Place where small and large watercraft are built and repaired. Simple Metamorphosis Process in which the general appearance of an animal remains similar, although some organs atrophy and others develop. Spawning Action of producing or laying eggs. Spines Bony rays that support certain fins. Spiracle Gill openings between the jaw and hyoid arch. These are highly developed in fish of the class Chondryichthes and in a few groups of primitive fish. Their main function is to eliminate excess water optimizing water flow into the gill slits. Spiracles are especially important to rays when on the seafloor because the spiracle is where the water enters their gills. Spoon In fishing, a metallic lure trimmed with hooks. As the fisher reels in the line, the sinker bobs in the water like a dying fish to attract a larger fish and tempt it to bite the bait. Sportfishing Sport of catching fish by hand. In most cases the fish, once caught, is returned to the sea or river. Stinger Sharp point that grows from the skin. The order Rajiformes includes two families that have poisonous stingers on the final one third of their tail. The stinger is extremely sharp and has serrated edges. Sucker Structure formed from the pectoral and pelvic fins to generate pressure and stick to a surface. It can also be a modification of the anterior dorsal fin, the pelvic fin, or the buccal (mouth) disk of the cyclostomes. Swim Bladder A sac located in the anterior dorsal region of the intestine that contains gas. Its function is to enable the animal to maintain buoyancy. This structure evolved as a lung, and, in some fish, it retains its breathing function. Symbiosis Biological partnership established between two or more individuals (plants or animals) to obtain mutual benefits. Tetrapod Animal with two pairs of limbs, each of which ends in five fingers or toes. Ventral Fin Paired fins located on the abdomen. Zooplankton Microscopic larvae of crustaceans, fish, and other sea animals. 96 INDEX abyssal fish, 54-55 abyssopelagic zone, 51 Acanthostega (fossil), 63 actinopterygian fish, 12 African butterfly fish, 47 African lungfish, 23 amphibian, 60-79 anatomy, 64 camouflage, 5 classification, 65 evolution, 62-63 feeding technique, 65 jumping, 66-67 metamorphosis, 70-71 mimicry, 5 mythology, 82-83 poisonous, 60-61, 72-73 reproduction, 68-69 species decline, 90-91 temperature regulation, 5 vocal sacs, 64 See also individual types amplexus, 68 ampullae of Lorenzini, 14, 44 Andean mythology, 82 angelfish, 29 Emperor angelfish, 26 angelshark species decline, 88 anglerfish humpback anglerfish, 55 Anguilliformes: See eel Anura (amphibian), 65, 66-67, 70-71 Apoda (amphibian), 65 archerfish, 46 Arthrodira (fossil), 9 Asian tree toad, 66 Atlantic footballfish, 55 Atlantic mackerel, 10-11 Atlantic mudskipper, 59 axolotl, 74-75 Mayan mythology, 82 species decline, 91 Aztec mythology, 75 bait fishing, 86-87 barbel, 31 bathypelagic zone, 51 black-striped pipefish, 40 blue poison dart frog, 73 blue ribbon eel, 57 bluespotted ribbontail ray, 42-43 bony fish, 10, 12-13 anatomy, 16-17 bottom feeder, 51 Boulter net, 85 brook trout, 87 brown trout, 16-17 bull shark, 45 butterfly fish African butterfly fish, 47 threadfin butterfly fish, 27 yellow-crowned butterfly fish, 88 butterfly ray, 43 caecilian ringed caecilian, 65 camouflage, 18-19, 34-35, 40 cartilaginous fish, 14-15 catfish, 31 upside-down catfish, 24 catshark, 25 Chimaerae (fish), 15 Chinese mythology, 83 Chinook salmon, 4-5 Choanichthyes (fish), 11, 13 Choco Indians, 72 Chondrichthyes (fish), 14, 16 Christian symbolism, 82 chytridiomycosis, 90 clown coris, 29 clown knifefish, 29 clown triggerfish, 27 clownfish, 26 coelacanth, 11, 13 coloration amphibians, 72-73, 79 fish, 26-27 commensalism, 30 commercial fishing, 84-85 common salamander, 76-77 common skate overfishing, 89 common toad, 65 conger, 56 coral, 30, 50 Costa Rican variable harlequin toad, 73, 91 cowfish longhorn cowfish, 28 Craugastor tabasarae (fish), 90 crocodile fish fins, 6-7 ctenoid scale, 21 cycloid scale, 21 Cyclostomata (jawless fish), 16 damselfish whitetail damselfish, 27 deepwater fish, 15 defense mechanism, 36-37 seahorses, 40 Dendrobates, 61 Devonian Period Dunkleosteus, 9 evolution, 8-9 Pteraspis, 8 diphyceral tail, 23 diving equipment, 50-51 dragnet, 85 dragonet Mandarin dragonet, 27 dragonfish, 55 Dunkleosteus (fossil), 9 Dunn rocket frog species decline, 91 dwarf seahorse, 89 Eastern newt, 78 ecosystem, ocean, 50-51 edible frog, 66-67, 71 eel, 56 blue ribbon eel, 57 garden eel, 37 Egyptian mythology, 83 electric ray, 43 Emperor angelfish, 26 endangered species, 88-89 See also species decline epipelagic zone, 50 European midwife toad, 69 European plaice, 34 European tree frog, 5 Eusthenopteron (fossil), 62 evolution amphibians, 62-63 fish, 5, 8-9 fish jawbone, 8 Exocoetidae: See flying fish eye abyssal fish, 55 fish, 16 fanfin seadevil, 54 fangtooth, 54 feeding strategy amphibians, 65, 66-67 conger, 57 fish, 46-47, 57 moray, 56 fertilization fish, 32-33 filter feeder, 30 fin, 22-23 fin ray, 22-23 fire goby, 28 fish, 6-59 abyssal, 51, 54-55 age determination, 21 air breathing, 58-59 amphibious, 58-59 anatomy, 10-11, 16-17 Andean mythology, 82 Arthrodira, 9 body shape, 16-17, 28-29 bottom feeders, 51 camouflage, 18-19, 34-35 color, 26-27 deep-water, 51, 54-55 defense mechanisms, 36-37 diversity, 38-59 Dunkleosteus, 9 endangered species, 88-89 evolution, 5, 8-9 feeding strategies, 46-47, 57 fins, 22-23 food sources, 30-31 general characteristics, 6-7 gills, 10-11, 17 ife cycle, 32-33 obe-finned, 62 movement, 24-25 mythology, 82-83 poisonous, 52-53 predators, 30 eproduction, 32-33, 41, 48-49 salinity regulation, 17 scales, 20-21 schools, 25 self-defense, 36-37 skeleton, 12-13 species by ocean depth, 50-51 swimming, 24-25 FISH AND AMPHIBIANS 97 tails, 22-23 vision, 18-19, 46 See also individual types fishing industry species decline, 85 sports fishing, 86-87 Vietnam, 4-5 fly fishing, 86 flying fish, 35 fossil amphibians, 62-63 fish, 8-9 living: See lungfish freshwater fish salinity regulation, 17 frog, 64-65 edible, 66-67, 71 European tree frog, 5 Iberian water frog, 68 movement, 66-67 poisonous, 60-61, 72-73 reed frog, 65 See also toad frog prince (folk tale), 83 fugu (pufferfish), 53 fumarole, 55 ganoid scale, 21 garden eel, 37 gestational period, 77 gill breathing, 10-11 gliding, 35 globefish, 18-19 gnathostomad fish, 9 goby fire goby, 28 golden poison dart frog, 73 golden toad species decline, 90 goldfish, 22-23, 27 grazing, 31 98 INDEX FISH AND AMPHIBIANS 99 great crested newt, 78-79 great white shark, 24, 44-45 Greek mythology, 83 green and black poison dart frog, 73 green moray, 56 grouper humpback grouper, 26 H handfish, red, 28 harlequin toad Costa Rican variable harlequin toad, 73, 91 harlequin tuskfish, 27 hatchetfish, 47 hawkfish longnose hawkfish, 29 heterocercal tail, 22 hibernation, 58 homocercal tail, 22 human impact, 80-81 fishing industry, 84-85 species decline, 90-91 sport fishing, 86-87 humpback anglerfish, 55 humpback grouper, 26 humphead wrasse, 88 hydrostatic pressure, 55 I Iberian water frog, 68 Ichtyostega (fossil), 62-63 illuminated netdevil, 55 incubation axolotl, 74 fish, 33, 41 Italian spectacled salamander, 77 J-K jawbone evolution, 8 jawfish yellow-headed jawfish, 33 jawless fish, 8 jumping, 64, 66-67 Kaiser's spotted newt species decline, 91 knifefish clown knifefish, 29 L lamprey, 8, 11 anatomy, 16-17 sea lamprey, 11 large Alpine salamander, 77 leg evolution, 62 legend, 82-83 lemon shark, 45 life cycle amphibians, 68-69 axolotl, 74 fish, 32-33 salamanders, 77 lined seahorse, 40 lionfish, red, 52 little skate, 42 lobster bag net, 85 longhorn cowfish, 28 longnose hawkfish, 29 lung lung-like sacs, 5 lungfish, 8, 58-59 African, 23 Queensland lungfish, 58 South American lungfish, 58 West African lungfish, 58 lure-casting, 87 M mackerel Atlantic mackerel, 10-11 Mandarin dragonet, 27 manta ray, 14-15, 42-43 mantella frog, 72, 73 marbled newt, 78-79 marbled salamander, 72 Mariana Trench, 55 marine lamprey, 8 Mayan mythology, 82 mesh net, 85 mesopelagic zone, 51 metamorphosis, 70-71 midwife toad European midwife toad, 69 mimesis, 34 mimicry amphibian, 5 moray green moray, 56 snowflake moray, 57 mudskipper, 59 Atlantic mudskipper, 59 mythology, 75, 82-83 N neoteny, 74 newt, 78-79 Eastern newt, 78 great crested newt, 78-79 habitat destruction, 90 marbled newt, 78-79 palmate newt, 79 smooth newt, 79 O ocean, 50-51 ocean sunfish, 13 Ocellaris clownfish, 26 ogrefish: See fangtooth operculum, 34 Osteichthyes: See bony fish P-Q Pacific red salmon, 48 palmate newt, 79 parasitism, 30 parrotfish, 31 Percula clownfish, 26 Persian sturgeon, 88 Peru stubfoot toad species decline, 91 pharyngeal plate, 31 phytoplankton, 30 pipefish black-striped pipefish, 40 seaweed pipefish, 28 piranha, 30 placoderm (fossil), 9 placoid scale, 20 plaice, European, 34 poison (toxin) amphibians, 60, 72-73, 78-79 fish, 42, 52-53 poison dart frog, 72 blue poison dart frog, 73 golden poison dart frog, 73 green and black poison dart frog, 73 yellow-banded poison dart frog, 73 pollution species decline, 90 porcupinefish spot-fin porcupinefish, 36-37 predator fish, 30 prickly leatherjacket, 28 Pteraspis (fossil), 8 pufferfish: See fugu pygmy seahorse, 89 Queensland lungfish, 58 R rainbow trout, 86-87 Rajiformes, 42: See also ray ray, 11, 14-15 anatomy, 42-43 bluespotted ribbontail ray, 42-43 butterfly ray, 43 electric ray, 43 excessive fishing, 88, 89 manta ray, 14-15, 42-43 movement, 42 rough ray, 42 thornback ray, 14, 43 red handfish, 28 red lionfish, 52 red salmon, 48 reed frog, 65 regeneration axolotl, 75 remora, 30 reproduction amphibians, 68-69 axolotl, 74 fish, 32-33 newts, 78 salamanders, 77 salmon, 32, 48-49 seahorses, 41 respiratory system amphibians, 64 fish, 10-11 reticulated arrow-poison frog, 72 ringed caecilian, 65 rough ray, 42 S sailfish, 24 salamander, 65, 76-77 common salamander, 76-77 habitat destruction, 90-91 Italian spectacled salamander, 77 large Alpine salamander, 77 marbled salamander, 72 poisonous glands, 72-73 spotted salamander, 90 tiger salamander, 65 See also axolotl salmon Chinook salmon, 4-5 fins, 23 fishing, 81 navigational ability, 5 Pacific red salmon, 48 reproduction, 32, 48-49 Yukon River, 5 saltwater fish salinity regulation, 17 Sarcopterygii: See Choanichthyes sawfish, 43 scale (anatomy), 20-21 defense mechanism, 36-37 school (of fish), 25 scorpionfish, 53 spotted scorpionfish, 29, 35, 52 sea dragon weedy sea dragon, 40 sea lamprey, 11 seadevil, fanfin, 54 seahorse, 40-41 dwarf seahorse, 89 lined seahorse, 40 pygmy seahorse, 89 species decline, 89 seaweed pipefish, 28 self-defense amphibians, 77 fish, 36-37 shark, 14, 38-39 100 INDEX anatomy, 16-17 attacks, 44-45 bull shark, 45 catshark, 24-25 excessive fishing, 88 great white shark, 44-45 lemon shark, 45 sense of smell, 14, 44 swimming, 24, 25 tail, 22 teeth, 45 whale shark, 30, 89 Shubin, Neil, 62 Siamese fighting fish, 22, 26 Silurian Period, 8 skate fish, 42 common skate, 89 Sloane's viperfish, 54 smooth newt, 79 snowflake moray, 57 sonar technology, 85 South American lungfish, 58 species decline, 88-91 sports fishing, 86-87 spot-fin porcupinefish, 36-37 spotted salamander, 90 spotted scorpionfish, 29, 35, 52 sturgeon feeding, 31 Persian, 88 sucker (anatomy), 30 suckerfish: See remora sunfish ocean sunfish, 13 Surinam toad, 69 swim bladder, 13 swimming most fish, 13, 24-25 rays, 42 seahorse, 40 symbiosis, 30 T tadpole: See frog tail fin, 22-23 tetrapod, 62-63 thornback ray, 14, 43 threadfin butterfly fish, 27 tiger salamander, 65 Tiktaalik (fossil), 62 toad, 64-65 common toad, 65 Costa Rican variable harlequin toad, 73, 91 golden toad, 90 habitat destruction, 90-91 Mayan mythology, 82 movement, 66-67 Peru stubfoot toad, 91 poisonous, 72-73 reproduction, 68-69 Surinam toad, 69 See also frog toxin: See poison tree frog European tree frog, 5 white-lipped tree frog, 67 trident, 82 Trieste bathyscape, 51 triggerfish clown triggerfish, 27 trout brook trout, 87 brown trout, 16-17 rainbow trout, 86-87 tube-worm, tentacles, 55 tuskfish, harlequin, 27 U upside-down catfish, 24 Urodela (amphibian), 65 Vv venom: See poison Vietnam, 4-5 viperfish Sloane's viperfish, 54 vocal sac, 64 volcano, 51 W weedy sea dragon, 40 West African lungfish, 58 whale shark, 30, 89 white-lipped tree frog, 67 whitetail damselfish, 27 wrasse, 26 humphead wrasse, 88 X-Z Xochimilco, Lake (Mexico), 74 X6lotl, 75, 82 yellow-banded poison dart frog, 73 yellow-crowned butterflyfish, 88 yellow-headed jawfish, 33 yellow tang, 37 Yukon River (North America) salmon, 5 zooplankton, 30 FISH AND AMPHIBIANS Britannica Husrrated Science Library ERC YELORamTA Britannica esl REPTILES S AND DINOSAURS s About the pagination of this eBook Due to the unique page numbering scheme of this book, the electronic pagination of the eBook does not match the pagination of the printed version. To navigate the text, please use the electronic Table of Contents that appears alongside the eBook or the Search function. For citation purposes, use the page numbers that appear in the text. REPTILES AND DINOSAURS Britannica Illustrated Science Library Britannica Illustrated Science Library © 2008 Editorial Sol 90 All rights reserved. Idea and Concept of This Work: Editorial Sol 90 Project Management: Fabian Cassan Photo Credits: Corbis, ESA, Getty Images, Graphic News, NASA, National Geographic, Science Photo Library Illustrators: Guido Arroyo, Pablo Aschei, Gustavo J. Caironi, Hernan Cafiellas, Leonardo César, José Luis Corsetti, Vanina Farias, Joana Garrido, Celina Hilbert, Isidro Lopez, Diego Martin, Jorge Martinez, Marco Menco, Ala de Mosca, Diego Mourelos, Pablo Palastro, Eduardo Pérez, Javier Pérez, Ariel Piroyansky, Ariel Roldan, Marcel Socias, Néstor Taylor, Trebol Animation, Juan Venegas, Coralia Vignau, 3DN, 3D0M studio, Jorge Ivanovich, Fernando Ramallo, Constanza Vicco Composition and Pre-press Services: Editorial Sol 90 Translation Services and Index: Publication Services, Inc. Portions © 2008 Encyclopzedia Britannica, Inc. Encyclopaedia Britannica, Britannica, and the thistle logo are registered trademarks of Encyclopeedia Britannica, Inc. Britannica Illustrated Science Library Staff Editorial Michael Levy, Executive Editor, Core Editorial John Rafferty, Associate Editor, Earth Sciences William L. Hosch, Associate Editor, Mathematics and Computers Kara Rogers, Associate Editor, Life Sciences Rob Curley, Senior Editor, Science and Technology David Hayes, Special Projects Editor Art and Composition Steven N. Kapusta, Director Carol A. Gaines, Composition Supervisor Christine McCabe, Senior I/lustrator Media Acquisition Kathy Nakamura, Manager Copy Department Sylvia Wallace, Director Julian Ronning, Supervisor Information Management and Retrieval Sheila Vasich, Information Architect Production Control Marilyn L. Barton Manufacturing Kim Gerber, Director Encyclopzedia Britannica, Inc. Jacob E. Safra, Chairman of the Board Jorge Aguilar-Cauz, President Michael Ross, Senior Vice President, Corporate Development Dale H. Hoiberg, Senior Vice President and Editor Marsha Mackenzie, Director of Production International Standard Book Number (set): 978-1-59339-797-5 International Standard Book Number (volume): 978-1-59339-806-4 Britannica Illustrated Science Library: Reptiles and Dinosaurs 2008 Printed in China ENC YCLOPADIA Britannica www.britannica.com les and Dinosaurs Rept PHOTOGRAPH ON PAGE 1 The caiman, an inhabitant of South and Central America, is a reptile that lives mostly on crustaceans, insects, and invertebrates. “» © Dinosaurs Page 6 Reptiles: Background Page 30 Lizards and Crocodiles Page 44 iy y y ad ~ . % 1. 7 ‘ Turtles and . ‘@ Snakes a Page 62 4S aE . Se ‘ ‘ : Ae Humans — ) and Reptiles = Page 80 NAGA RASSA MASK This mask is used during popular festivals in Sri Lanka to frighten evil e spirits. In Asian cultures, nagas represent sacred O | S ] e serpents. appearances, snakes, dragons, and crocodiles are found in the legends and myths of peoples throughout the world. In sculptures, paintings, and masks used for various ceremonies, many of these animals are represented as good or bad gods or are associated with magical powers. The snake is usually linked to the primordial waters from which life was created. In Asia, it is said that nagas (sacred serpents) are descended from Kasyapa, the 4 ia father of all life. Consequently, it is = common during popular festivals for both men and women to dance disguised with masks that represent these animals in order to frighten away evil spirits and seek protection. Certain Papuan peoples believe that crocodiles have special powers, and in Europe, mythical winged dragons that breathe fire are viewed as the guardians of treasures. Throughout history, these animals have been both feared N and respected, objects of i fascination and “passion. The purpose of this book RB ecause of their frightening ~~ ~~ —_ <— S is to reveal, in detail, what reptiles are really like. Here you will find clear, precise information about the appearance and behavior of reptiles, including dinosaurs—a group of reptiles that dominated the globe for millions of years. This fascinating book, which features specially prepared illustrations and images, will reveal details about these creatures as if they were alive on these pages. first vertebrates to become totally independent of aquatic environments? This was made possible by the emergence of the amniotic egg. Its shell and membranes enabled reptilian young to develop on land without the need to return to water. Today there are about 8,200 classified species of reptiles in a wide variety of shapes and sizes. These species include turtles, lizards, snakes, crocodiles, and tuataras. Clues about the lives of many of these animals can be found by examining their feet. Different species use their feet to scale walls, climb slender stalks, or run across loose, hot sand dunes. Some reptiles live underground, while others prefer the surface. Since their body temperature is variable, reptiles tend to spend many hours in the sun exposed to direct solar rays and infrared radiation released from heated surfaces. ith their long, narrow bodies, VV snakes are different from all other reptiles because they have long spines with many vertebrae. Although they cannot hear in the way mammals do, they can detect low-frequency vibrations in the soil that reveal the presence of predators or prey. Most snakes are carnivorous and can eat objects larger l) id you know that reptiles were the than their own bodies. Stealthy, undulating crawling, sudden color changes, and oversized jaws are other identifying characteristics of reptiles— amazing animals with extraordinary traits that have enabled them to survive for millions of years. to become familiar with these creatures that are so different from humans. Some of them give birth to completely developed young. They are not born fragile and immature, dependent on their parents to feed and take care of them, as most mammals are. Reptile species also vary widely in the types of scales they have. Their scales may have defensive knobs and spines, as is the case with the tails of some lizards, or they may form crests along their necks, backs, or tails. 5 ach page of this book will help you most commonly feared animals, only one out of ten is dangerous. Few people know that snakes are timid creatures that prefer to stay hidden. Most snakes will never attack unless they feel threatened and use warning mechanisms and behaviors before attacking. Unfortunately, others are poisonous—so most snakes are hated and persecuted. The process of learning more about them and learning to identify the really dangerous ones may help us to keep them from disappearing. Many reptile species today are in danger of extinction because of indiscriminate hunting and habitat destruction. Not only ecologists but all people must be concerned about their welfare, helping to ensure that they continue to be part of life on Earth. © : Ithough snakes are some of the Dinosaurs »* oy - uring the 170 million years from the late Triassic Period to the late Cretaceous Period, an extraordinary group of animals, called the dinosaurs, dominated Fossils of this flying dinosaur are found in rocks from the late Jurassic and Cretaceous periods. the Earth. Some were small, but others were gigantic. Some ate only plants and had long necks, and others had sharp teeth. Currently we are increasingly well- informed about dinosaurs because of the TERRIBLE LIZARDS THE JURASSIC PERIOD THE TRIASSIC PERIOD DIFFERENT SPECIES THE AGE OF REPTILES A DOCILE VEGETARIAN THE FIRST GIANT HERBIVORE THE CRETACEOUS PERIOD findings of paleontologists, who study the fossilized teeth and bones of these animals. Sometime during the late Cretaceous Period, dinosaurs disappeared from the face of the planet in an event known as the A FIERCE ERA THE GREAT PREDATOR OF THE SOUTH LIVING LIFE TO THE LIMIT K-T extinction event. Some attribute the dinosaurs' disappearance to the impact of a large meteorite with the Earth. In this chapter, you will find very detailed illustrations of these prehistoric creatures. 8 DINOSAURS SSeS = = = ——__— —— —=—— = ——= ——— ———<——=— REPTILES AND DINOSAURS 9 Terrible Lizards inosaurs dominated the Earth for 170 million years, from the late Triassic to the late Cretaceous periods, when the supercontinents of Laurasia and Gondwana were splitting into the landmasses of today. The mass extinction of the dinosaurs about 65 million years ago left fossil remains, including footprints, eggs, and bones. Finding these fossils has enabled scientists to study and classify dinosaurs and to learn about their posture, size, diet, and many other aspects of their lives. These studies revealed that this prehistoric group of lizards included herbivores and carnivores of extraordinary size and striking shapes. @ Flexible Neck Moved more easily because the vertebrae were light in weight Legs Fh Depending on their lifestyle, (Lei some dinosaurs walked on two legs, and some walked on four. However, they all had a similar posture. Due to the structure of their legs, they bear little resemblance to their relatives today: lizards, tuataras, turtles, snakes, and crocodiles. DEINOS SAURO Terrible Lizard IDENTITY The term Dinosauria was BAROSAURUS proposed for these extinct or “heavy reptile” cag ia et _—_ = reptiles by paleontologist ans d : ee a ror Se Richard Owen in 1842. The elbows and knees, the t 2) hatte feat) species I> ocean e ht Jess ee Jf | based on characteristics of He les, This 9 \e 4 SS=e-- oi / its shape and physiology, ee eieealled b> wo as..¢.) the name of its discoverer, Se 5 bA? or the location where it extended posture. was found. CROCODILES These animals have semi-extended posture. The limbs project out and down. The elbows and knees are bent at a 45° angle. These species crawl slowly and straighten up to run. @ DINOSAURS These animals had erect posture. The limbs project below the body. Both the elbows and the knees are beneath the body. GOLDEN YEARS From the primitive dinosaurs of the Triassic Period, evolutionary lines of carnivores and herbivores diverged. Later in the Jurassic and Cretaceous periods large herbivores and fierce carnivores dominated the landscape, living under environmental conditions that favored enormous diversity in body forms and feeding behaviors— until their extinction. Dryosaurus Megalosaurus Brachiosaurus Length: 13 feet (4m) — Length: 29.5 feet (9 m) Herrerasaurus Coelophysis Mussaurus Plateosaurus Length: 13 feet (4m) Length: 9.2 feet (2.8 m) Length: 3 feet (1m) Length: 6.6 feet (2m) Length: 26 feet (8 m) TRIASSIC PERIOD 25 JURASSIC PERIOD Ct — YT Length: 82 feet (25 m) Marsh vs. Cope fF The American paleontologists LL Othniel C. Marsh and Edward D. Cope faced off in a very peculiar struggle. They competed to determine who could find more dinosaur bones and species. The competition was plagued with corruption, mutual accusations of espionage, fraud, theft, and even personal violence. Marsh considered himself the winner of “Bone Wars,” but the field of paleontology was the real winner as roughly 130 species were identified between the two rivals. Saurischians These dinosaurs had hip bones similar to those of today's reptiles, such as crocodiles and lizards. Many species of saurischian dinosaurs have been found, including Velociraptor and Argentinosaurus. They had long, flexible necks and large claws on the initial digits. f Lizard Hip Pelvic structure of saurischian dinosaurs ~~ ra rf = hal | = fa | a Ornithischians = Herbivores with hip bones iJ q i backward, parallel to the ischium. Some of the most famous ornithischians were Triceratops and Parasaurolophus. Some ornithischians were protected from head to tail by bony plates. hos structured like those of birds. ne The pubis slants roa y They Only Look Alike In spite of their name, these animals are not ancestors of today's birds. iG) LONS ESTIMATED WEIGHT OF AN ARGENTINOSAURUS We Stegosaurus Length: 30 feet (9 m) Camarasaurus Length: 66 feet (20 m) Therizinosaurus Length: 39 feet (12 m) Length: 3 feet (1m) Length: 43 feet (13m) Length: 49 feet (15 m) SIR DINOSAUR Sir Richard Owen, a British paleontologist, was the first to identify fossil remains of “terrible lizards,” or “monstrous lizards.” He proposed the term Dinosauria, based on his studies and discoveries, and made the first reconstruction of a fossil for the great London Exhibition of 1851. FIERCE LIZARDS SUBORDER INFRAORDER Carnivores of the Cretaceous Period. Ceratosauria They grew up to 46 feet (14 m) long Coelophysis and weighed up to 77 tons (7 metric bauri tons). Their teeth were like knives. Tetanurae Allosaurus fragilis Prosauropoda Plateosaurus engelhardti |Sauropodomorpha__ Sauropoda Argentinosaurus Auinculensis Tyrannosaurus rex eae | ORNITHISCHIANS Named for the curvature in their thighbones. They could walk on two legs. SUBORDER INFRAORDER Scelidosauria Trimucrodon cuneatus Stegosauria Stegosaurus armatus Thyreophora aa Ankylosauria Centrosaurus sp. Panera eer Marginocephalia Triceratops prorsus [Cerapoda aa Euornithopoda Pisanosaurus mertii Camptosaurus sp. | rere ay Over 2,000 SPECIES OF DINOSAURS HAVE BEEN CATALOGED AT PRESENT. ( Corythosaurus Length: 33 feet (10 m) Caudipteryx Suchomimus Giganotosaurus CRETACEOUS PERIOD 14 10 DINOSAURS e e e The Triassic Period Deve a ia din 1834 by G After the extinction of nearly 95 percent of plants to grow. There was only one continent, Miata ue rie see mace all life at the end of the Permian Period, the — called Pangea, which was surrounded by a single he biological crisis of the late Permian Period was followed by a slow yee Me aheitcdelig aS Earth was a dry place with hot deserts and rocky —_— ocean, Panthalassa. This supercontinent was the areas. Only the coasts had enough moisture for home of dinosaurs and other animals. resurgence of life in the Triassic Period. The Mesozoic Era has commonly been called the “Age of Reptiles,” and its most famous members are the dinosaurs. In the earliest part of the period, the first representatives of today's amphibians appeared, and toward the end of the period the first mammals emerged. In the middle to late Triassic Period, the many families of ferns and conifers appeared that continue to exist today, as well as other groups of plants that are now extinct. 7 VEGETATION Giant coni Flora Pangea was mostly a dry, hot desert with palm trees, ginkgoes, and other gymnosperms. Some small species of horsetail rushes (genus Equisetum), ferns, and marine algae also survived there. grouped the three rock formations that defined this period. GREENHOUSE EFFECT A rapid, extreme global warming event is one of several possible causes of the great extinction of the late Permian Period. It could have created the hot, dry climate that prevailed during the Triassic Period. NUMEROUS SPECIES Reptiles and mammals flourished alongside the dinosaurs. Me EXTINCTION Toward the end of this period, a new extinction event removed several groups of species while In addition to land reptiles, such as the opening up new horizons for those crocodile, and the most primitive that survived—especially the dinosaurs, such as Eoraptor, the first dinosaurs, which spread rapidly. mammals appeared during this period. REPTILES AND DINOSAURS 11 The Earth had only one continental mass, called Pangea. This continent had an upper region called Laurasia and a lower region called Gondwana. The two areas were partly separated by the Tethys Sea, which later almost completely disappeared. FIRST COUSINS In addition to the dinosaurs, the pterosaurs—winged dinosaurs—and Lagosuchus lived during the Triassic Period. Together these three types of animals make up the Ornithodira group, though this is often debated today. 12 DINOSAURS REPTILES AND DINOSAURS 15 The “Age of Reptiles” HERRERASAURUS DIFFERENT SIZES Herrerasaurus ischigualastensis he first period of the Mesozoic Era gave rise to the “Age of Reptiles.” On land, the synapsids, which ~ wen later developed into mammals, began to decline, and the archosaurs, or “dominant reptiles,” lived ieee a naere in various habitats. The earliest crocodiles began to develop, along with turtles and frogs, among Epoch Late Triassic others. The pterosaurs ruled the air and the ichthyosaurs the water. The dinosaurs—another order of Range South America Miscou —Eovisitee Cischaihypéts Hevrersaiirlis archosaurs—appeared in the Middle Triassic, approximately 250 million years ago. Toward the end of the Triassic Period, many other reptiles declined dramatically, and the dinosaurs began their reign.@ Herrerasaurus A TRUE CARNIVORE The First Dinosaurs FE The most primitive dinosaurs were (Le very small in comparison to their relatives of later epochs. Most of them have been found in South America. They were carnivores. Some were scavengers, and others were highly agile hunters. They shared very primitive morphological structures with other reptiles of their group, the archosaurs. Mixed with these primitive structures, however, were advanced bone forms similar to those of the predators that would dominate the Cretaceous Period. These predators were known as the theropods. Throughout the Triassic Period, the early dinosaurs were an uncommon subgroup of reptiles. Toward the end of the Triassic Period, the first large herbivores appeared. HOLLOW SHAPE is what Coelophysis means. Coelophysis This skilled carnivore could grow up to 9.2 feet (2.8 m) long. Two types of fossils have been found. They are believed to be males and females, respectively. Fossils of this biped hunter have been found in the United States in several southwestern states. One of the traits that defined this animal as a dinosaur was its typical theropodian head. Its narrow skull had nasal cavities in the front part of its snout, and its eye sockets were part of a hollow bony structure, making its skull both lightweight and strong. is one of the most ancient dinosaurs. It is considered a key to understanding the path dinosaurs took to dominate the following 160 million years. The first fossils were found in the early 1960s in the Ischigualasto valley in northern Argentina by an official paleontological commission headed by Osvaldo Reig. He named the dinosaur in honor of the local guide who found it. Since then several complete skeletons have been found. Eoraptor Eoraptor fossils were discovered in 1991 in northwestern Argentina. This small carnivore lived 228 million years ago and measured up to 40 inches (1 m) long. It had sharp teeth and agile hind legs for running and chasing its prey. It may also have eaten carrion. MOUTH Its tubelike teeth were more curved than those of other carnivores that followed, but they were sharp and serrated like those of its theropod relatives. EORAPTOR Tiny predator whose name means “thief of dawn” LIMBS FOR HUNTING Like its head, this dinosaur's limbs had the same proportions as the later giant predators of the Cretaceous Period. Its small front limbs were designed for capturing prey. TAIL Most predators used their tails to keep their balance while chasing their prey. SPINAL COLUMN PELVIS The central vertebrae are high and short, and the neural arches have square-shaped projections that are thicker toward the back. There are only two sacral vertebrae. Herrerasaurus was a very early saurischian with a primitive sacrum, ilium, and hind legs but a highly developed pubic bone and vertebrae. These traits show that this dinosaur had unique characteristics in its spinal column. FRONT LIMBS The relative size of its front limbs suggests that this animal mainly walked on two feet. Each hand had three long claws and two short ones. Its hands were able to grasp with the help of “thumbs” slightly opposed to \. \__ the other claws. Its hand was a \ formidable weapon for attacking and ) holding prey, an earlier form of the ) // — hands of other theropods. Mussaurus The only known fossils of this species were found alongside eggshells. They were no more than 8 inches (20 cm) long. Their adult size is unknown, but it is estimated to have been as much as 6.5 to 8 feet (2-2.5 m). They are known to have been herbivores. HIND LEGS On its lower limbs, this lightweight compared to the dinosaur's toe bones show a second, third, and fourth high degree of superposition. toes. These long, strong feet The toe bones of the first enabled Herrerasaurus to digit, although well run while bearing the great developed, are very short and —_ weight of its body. 220 ROS An adult Herrerasaurus weighed between 220 and 880 pounds (100-400 kg). MUSSAURUS means “rat reptile.” REPTILES AND DINOSAURS 15 : ev a > = 0 eee Oe The First Giant Herbivore a i proportion to the weight his primitive saurischian was among the first to usher in the age of the dinosaurs in the late —_ fits body, soit isnot Triassic Period, about 210 million years ago. Dinosaurs had already been in existence for rc ey nea oe some time, but they were smaller predators thus far. The saurischian was clearly one of the first that fed exclusively on plants and that reached the immense sizes typical of herbivores. Many fossils have been found in over 50 separate locations. The secret of this dinosaur's survival is believed to have been the lack of competition for food, since no other herbivore of the time grew as large. Its name, which means “lizard-hipped,” was given to it in 1837 by the In the | ; 5 German naturalist Hermann von Meyer. Treetops — el J Semiaria Regions . Its long neck helped it to > | : eo? Late Triassic reach the tops of trees. - Its mouth had pouches , | ye for storing food while it al ; chewed. i i ; | ' « WHERE IT LIVED ts fossils were found in ; semiarid areas of what ‘ Plateosaurus . | S a ‘ ep oO toe s ip site 5 engelhardti : . ae att : pee ait oe A i (Lei Sauropodomorpha, were among the primitive ad it aie / ; ’ ii A : tes * i Sige ao , . F a herbivorous dinosaurs that were forerunners of the giant sauropods of the Jurassic Period. However, they were not actually ancestors of these animals. It is known that they associated with others of their own species because, in many areas, several = =©SEXUAL DIMORPHISM™ 5 specimens have been found together. Because of It is thought that © ; | the hot, dry conditions that prevailed where they Plateosaurus varied in , lived, it seems that they migrated constantly in size according to its i ’ search of food, which consisted of conifers and P environment. There is 4 palm trees. Ly also evidence that .f males and females had different shapes. hat the 1 hree to five male er attention during S/eggs) Of Various sizes, were h respective male. 4 Tt moved about on its 4 ae ; - four muscular legs, but ae . Sia a aa it could probably stand : 2 ¥ a _ up on its hind legs and ——" g run quickly. EVENTUAL “Y¢ BIPEDS j Tts powerful hips Supported the entire weight of its body when it stood up on its hind legs to reach food in the ) I high branches of trees. Uppertimb Defensive Claw This animal had few defensive yy o We | Claw ( resources. However, one of the toes of WEIGHT- its front feet had a powerful claw that BEARING ifused to cut branches and for self- ; v TOES + defense. In reality, however, its best rg ‘ a defense was to run. e ) Sees. (AN abe | Ya’. 16 DINOSAURS REPTILES AND DINOSAURS 17 The Jurassic Period cccsu The name “Jurassic” comes from the Jura The Green Planet . . . . . +o mountain range in the northern Swiss Alps. As Pangea split apart, the sea level rose, and large areas of land were flooded. uring this period, dinosaurs diversified greatly and spread out This is where the formal mapping of the This process increased humidity levels, which led to intense rainfall and created a The Earth began to divide. During the Jurassic to occupy land, Sea, and air. Along with large herbivores, there rocks of this period took place. milder climate. These climate conditions helped create rich forest ecosystems. Afforded Period, North America drifted north and were salamand ers, lizard C and the Archaeo pte ryX, the most . 7 abundant food, animal populations skyrocketed. The splitting of the continent also separated from what is now South America. : ‘ : . ‘ : e; 5 g orth America formed part of Laurasia wi bird k Th Fth p d d é ™ caused volcanic eruptions. Despite the dramatic movements of tectonic plates North A f d part of L ith ancient bird known. The climate of the Jurassic Period was mild, , be Bin the climate was warm and temperate on most areas of the planet. what would become Europe. Antarctica, South with moisture-laden winds from the ocean. They brought great i ogg ell a ‘ 0 the south. downpours, enabling forests to cover wide areas of land. The Tethys Sea expanded from east to west, separating Laurasia and Gondwana. The Gulf of Mexico and the Atlantic Ocean began to form. ;————— PLANT LIFE GROWS Trees began to cover regions that had once been deserts. ite | were numerous on | | _ the continents. During this period, the first marsupials appeared. Today highly developed versions of these mammals exist in Australia, which split apart from the rest of Gondwana in the late Jurassic. The Jurassic was also the age of Archaeopteryx, the most ancient of the primitive birds. Because of increasing rains, plant life became lush and exuberant. Mosses grew in the seas and on land. Many species of conifers, horsetail rushes, and ferns formed dense forests. COAL Abundant coal beds dating back to this period proved good Dinosaurs greatly diversified and increased their geographic indications of the high distribution during this period. Herbivorous saurischians, such as humidity and abundant Brachiosaurus, and carnivores, such as Allosaurus, predominated. vegetation of the time. Ornithischians, such as Stegosaurus, also multiplied during this time. 18 DINOSAURS REPTILES AND DINOSAURS 19 Different Species uring the middle of the Jurassic Period, the planet was lush and green. The gradual splitting of Pangea created new ecological environments, which were more humid and more diverse. The increased humidity enabled the growth of large trees and dense vegetation. This flourishing environment powered the continued diversification of different dinosaur species. In contrast, these conditions forced a decline in the majority of synapsids, and the archosaurs —the group that includes crocodiles— largely disappeared. Other species also found their ecological niches and multiplied. These species included sea creatures, such as sharks and rays, that resemble their modern relatives, as well as ray- finned fish with sharp teeth, such as the fierce predator Aspidorhynchus. e Giants of the Mesozoic Fh Giant herbivores dominated the Earth. However, (Lf increasing diversity also brought increasing competition. The large sauropods, such as Diplodocus, and ornithischians, such as the stegosaurids, had to watch out for larger theropods, such as Megalosaurus, as well as for hordes of small, swift predators, such as Compsognathus. The first bird to descend from small dinosaurs appeared. MEGALOSAURUS means “large lizard.” DRYOSAURUS means “oak reptile.” Megalosaurus In 1676, the bones of one of the first dinosaurs were found in southern England, although they were not identified as such until 1819. This theropod predator was highly intelligent in comparison to its peers. It lived 181 million years ago, grew up to 29.5 feet (9 m) long, and weighed 1.1 tons (1 metric ton). It walked on its two hind legs and had two powerful front claws. Dryosaurus The fossils of this ornithopod, of the suborder Ornithischia, were found in Tanzania and the United States at the same time during the 19th century, in the middle of the so- called “Bone Wars.” This lightweight herbivore could reach up to 14.8 feet (4.5 m) long and weigh nearly 200 pounds (90 kg). CAMARASAURUS means “chambered lizard.” Camarasaurus This large, herbivorous sauropod lived on the plains of North America 159 million years ago. Its fossils were first found in 1877. It grew up to 65.5 feet (20 m) long; even so, it was easy prey for large predators such as Allosaurus. It could weigh up to 22 tons (20 metric tons), and it walked on four feet, which prevented it from running quickly enough to easily escape. owe Dryosaurus Megalosaurus Camarasaurus Brachiosaurus BRACHIOSAURUS NECK Brochiosairis The length of its neck, in proportion to the rest of its Size 82 feet (25 m) body, sets it apart from other Diet Herbivarous sauropods of its time. By - : means of its neck, which Habitat Tree-lined Savannas could be up to 42.5 feet Epoch Late Jurassic (13 m) long, it could Range North America reach the tops of trees. sockets. Brachiosaurus For a long time, this sauropod was the largest dinosaur for which we had a complete skeleton. It was a four-footed herbivore with a small brain and a long neck. Specimens have been found in the United States, on the Iberian Peninsula, and in northern and southern Africa. The African species were from the Cretaceous Period and had slight anatomical differences. TAIL Its tail was small in comparison to its body and was an extension of its spinal column. VERTEBRAE and complex cavities covered membranes. It had 11 or 12 Vertebral Joint The vertebrae were fused to strengthen the neck. Hollow Bones made the neck lighter. LEGS Its front legs were Ease of Movement longer than was made possible by a its hind ball-and-socket joint. legs. was located behind the upper jaw and under the eye. Brachiosaurus's extremely long neck had 13 vertebrae, with deep f HEAD Its head was small and had a crest between the eyes. This crest had large nasal cavities at the top. Its teeth were like pegs and had spaces between them. 42.6 iss Height of Brachiosaurus, because of its long front legs and long neck Eye Sockets Its eyes sat in large Nasal Cavities They are believed to have been resonance chambers. Jugal (Yoke) Bone Teeth were used for tearing off tree branches when the head was pulled backward. vertebrae in its back. Its short tail had about 50 bones, which by helped it move easily. Support This area anchored the supporting muscles. 34.8 inches (88.5 cm) St a TL ot 20 DINOSAURS > REPTILES AND-DINOSAURS "7 ee i eo cS wit oo tine e e . . A D l tS ocile Vegetarian Ps! Stegosaurus 3s a 4 : — "i js I) was an ornithischian dinosaur that Stegosaurus was an easy victim for the great wk : > ite, his striking dinosaur Is one of the most widely : ; Lefl belonged to the family Stegosauridae. predators of its time, such as A/losaurus, but a ~ H A A r ses ‘ Its distinctive features included wide plates on _ it is also believed that it may have been out P studied in the history of paleontology. The fi rst : ‘ , its back and four spines, up to 24 inches (60 hunted by packs of small predators, such as L fossils were discovered by Othniel C. : ’ cm) long, on its tail. The function of these Ornitholestes. It is doubtful that Stegosaurus 2 ‘ ‘ . 4 features is still under debate, but it is believed could raise itself up on its hind legs, so it Pas ‘ «* Marsh in 1877 in the American West, during | 7 : that they served mainly for self-defense. probably fed mostly on low bushes. mn A ee - the “Bone Wars.” This quadruped herbivore fp «= STEGOSAURUS c could measure up to 29.5 feet (9 m) long é . Stegosaurus armatus » wees and weigh up to 2.2 tons (2 metric tons). > ORE Wy a ee Me a i oo Because of its small head, it has been used Diet Herbivorous ' since the 19th century as a symbol of Habitat Subtropical Forests stupidity. It was later shown that Epoch Late Jurassic most dinosaurs had small brains and : ty ae i eee ese that Stegosaurus's brain was larger than average.e WHERE IT-LIVED The first. fossils were found ‘in’ Colorado. Other specimens:have since been found ’in F z PB India,.western Europe, southern 4 Africa, and China. Tail Stegosaurus's only real defense was likely the four spines,omiits tail, which it swung back and forth. Head Its lightweight head had small teeth that were of little use for chewing, so it swallowed plants whole. * ST e.: PLATES . 4 Of . m These triangular bony structures were not very solid, but they hada od ‘ complex network of veins. = jhe f Sh The plates were likely used tee of to regulate the animal's ~ = ao i, > : ; ~ body temperature or even _ : Dorsal Plate Caudal Plate Cervical Plate a ; 4 $ , » “~ for courtship. © on rg Fs, half as long as its. . N : ai ——. oe, . -hind legs. Each was ro oof ms : aa foot had five Wide, “S700 es 4 ” ‘ = ice short toes. wer Ne at ' ; a o; 4s > ‘= x ja 22 DINOSAURS REPTILES AND DINOSAURS 23 The Cr etaceous P eriod eee An Evolving Planet The name is based on the Latin word creta, which means stone. The name During this period of 80 million years, levels rose, currents increased ocean as an age of expansion. The dinosaurs continued to dive rsify, saben ened sara : - Sia climate aes Its alone! eae eels The Earth began to adopt an appearance is : ound in the rock formations tha a. emperate climate, accompanied by snow in n land, the first flowering plants similar to that of today. Africa and South and the fi rst snakes appeared. The Earth began to look like the define this geological system. a the polar regions during the winter, was (gymnosperms) appeared, and forests of America separated from one another, as did planet we know today. The movement of tectonic pl ates transformed into a warm, mild climate with willow, maple, and oak harbored the last North America and Europe. The North and created folds that came to form some of the mountain ranges of ae ee SAD aie Eee Ceol and collided with the Pacific plate, raising today, such as the Appalachians in North America and the both the Rocky Mountains in North f fi : ALPINE MOUNTAIN-BUILDING i i i Alps in Europe. At the end of this period, another mass y ree eee ellen Ca IEA Lees extinction event occurred, - Eurasia drifted closer together. The Tethys Sea narrowed, and the collision of plates formed the Alpine mountain range. probably caused by the impact of a meteorite. SOUTH AMERICA FORESTS Oaks and maples predominated in the most humid regions. developed very toward the end of this Flora During the early Cretaceous Period, ferns and conifers predominated. Important groups became extinct at the boundary between the Early and Late Cretaceous. These species were replaced in tropical forest environments by flowering plants, which spread to colder and drier areas. MARINE REPTILES The expanding seas caused an abundance of marine reptiles and other aquatic species, such as mollusks. FLOWERS During this period, the auna main advancement in the evolution of plants was The Cretaceous Period held the greatest the appearance of diversity of dinosaurs. This epoch is also angiosperms, or plants known for small mammals, insects, and the with flowers and fruit. largest flying reptiles. 24 DINOSAURS REPTILES AND DINOSAURS 25 Fierce Era he Cretaceous Period saw both the splendor and the end of the “Age of Reptiles.” It was the longest period of the Mesozoic Era, and for 80 million years, specific types of animal life developed in each region. South America was home to the largest herbivore known, Argentinosaurus huinculensis, which lived at the same time as the fearsome theropods. Some species of this period later survived the mass extinction—especially marine invertebrates, such as crustaceans, gastropod mollusks, and advanced ray-finned fish. Small mammals such as Zalambdalestes also survived.e Therizinosaurus Some scientists believe that this mysterious dinosaur was herbivorous. However, it has been classified as a theropod that lived during the Late Cretaceous in the region of the Gobi Desert in Mongolia. It was first identified in 1954, and its name means “scythe lizard.” It was between 26 and 39.5 feet (8-12 m) long and weighed about 5 tons (4.5 metric tons). It was believed to have possessed a lifestyle similar to modern gorillas or the extinct giant ground sloths. The Struggle to Survive fF Dinosaurs remained dominant during the [Lal Cretaceous Period. Although the large sauropods still existed, new groups emerged, intensifying the as the duck-billed hadrosaurs and the armored competition for resources. Enormous carnivores of the Triceratops, also appeared. tyrannosaur family in North America and the “sS _—a giganotosaurs in South America were the largest threats to the peaceful herbivores. New, distinctive species, such SUCHOMIMUS means “crocodile imitator.” Caudipteryx was a feathered dinosaur that lived in China in the early Cretaceous. It could grow up to 40 inches (1 m) in length and 27.5 inches (70 cm) in height. It was an advanced theropod, THERIZINOSAURUS Therizinosaurus cheloniformis Size 39.5 feet (12 m) Diet Herbivorous (?) Habitat Subtropical Forests Late Cretaceous Central Asia Epoch Range AN ENIGMATIC DINOSAUR This dinosaur, one of the most perplexing of all, has been identified by fossils of its claws and a few other fragments that have been found. It is believed to share a common ancestor with the oviraptors. According to one theory, it was an easy prey for predators such as Tarbosaurus despite the size of its claws, which it probably did not use for defense. HEAD The head, atop a long neck, was small, and it had a beak-shaped mouth. AQ G5? The size of one of the claws on its front limbs but it looked like a large bird, because its arms were covered with feathers and it had an elaborate, fanlike tail. It had claws and a beak with sharp upper teeth. It could reach great speeds when fleeing large predators. ARMS Its arms could measure up to 79 feet (2.4 m) long and were tipped with three digits that ended in powerful claws. CAUDIPTERYX means “tail feather.” Third Digit Second Digit Suchomimus Main Claw TN ei CORYTHOSAURUS Similar to a crocodile, this dinosaur was a means “helmet lizard.” dangerous theropod that lived in northern Africa during the middle of the Cretaceous Period. It could measure up COMPARISON OF SIZES to 42.5 feet (13 m) long and 16.5 feet (5 m) tall. It had a long snout with almost 100 teeth. Corythosaurus was an ornithischian dinosaur of the hadrosaur family with a showy crest. It could reach up to 33 feet (10 m) long. It ate bushes and fruit in forests, and it lived Sere in herds. The color of its crest may have been a distinctive feature if herds of different species intermingled. Its upper jaw had hundreds of small CLAWS Its most notable characteristic was the large claws on its front limbs, each of which could measure up to 40 inches (1 m) long. The claw on its first digit was the longest of the three. It is believed that it used its claws to pull large branches to its mouth. LEGS Its lower limbs had four small claws. teeth that were replaced often. Suchomimus Caudipteryx Corythosaurus Therizinosaurus The Great Predator of the South — TN che largest carnivorous dinosaur that hase ever exist. on Earth lived 95 million years | 4. ' | by some.to ha -,ago during the Late Cretaceous Period. Fossils of be tie mb eatrolinii were g first! iit 191997, larger and more fearsome! } . » was made known to the scientifi found by Rubén Carolini, a mechanic and amateurs yt Giganotosaurus is considered by son ¢ ay Spaleontologh 1993. The name means "giant ~f ee sage tte Wha of the diosa “southern lizard. "Althougtronly 70 percent of its; > See . LP s: “skeleton'was foulid, it is known that it could kee a =fength of up to 49’feet (15m) and the ke eg _ large sauropods. < rar | FZ Giganotosaurus carolinii ; 7 Lee VES E Las Be | | poets order Sautischia, the ee if hth IEEE LeU NS a ve SONS eS Ny u *"Subord opoda, and the Superfamily ae ~ Allosauridae.dt: measure up to 16.5 feet (5 m) g. 29 ; “if-height. and weigh 8.8 tons (8 metric tons). The gee Fs Pfosiied bones that have been found for this ; “dinosaur include the skull, pelvis, femur, Spinal _ - Ee “column, and upper limbs. It was: thought to hunt in? wen | © packs, because several fossils have been found cgiegemenprts made it a deadly threat to the large, “herbivorous sauropods of the time. ~ Powerful fe Jaws vg. aS All predators in the superfamily ed Pomel : powerful jaws and rounded teeth with serrated edges we < to tear the flesh of their victi 4 Each tooth could be - = ¢ up to 8 inches (20 cm) long. ~—¥ Tay, 7 j TT. \\ large inyrelation to its ome LW A a)\\\\) ea body, measuring upsto ; - : aan L}7- - © 59 feet(1:8 m) long. MA : : Sy A Ce Its head was-very Mi sui Hunter - oe _ Giganotosaurus's well- ish its lower : . , : . ; ; SF Lad “developed hind legs enabled hat-its. inifelike e 4ob Ss . Si - 3 : ed , : . - : , be ~ it to run at highspeed while J teat could cut. ip | ti i ze - ~ 4 s : a - ¥ hunting, its prey. ” ‘ 28 DINOSAURS Living Life to the Limit & xtinctions of living beings on Earth have occurred in a series of drastic episodes throughout history, from the Cambrian Period to the Cretaceous. The most famous chapter is associated with the total disappearance of the dinosaurs about 65.5 million years ago. This mass extinction of these large reptiles is so important that it was used by scientists to indicate the end of the Cretaceous Period and the beginning of the Tertiary, a designation known as the K-T boundary ("K" is the abbreviation for Cretaceous). Natural phenomena of terrestrial or extraterrestrial origin are possible causes of the disappearance of these gigantic animals of the Mesozoic Era. @ Other Proposed Theories Fh Not all scientists agree with the idea that a 9 Lali large meteorite caused the mass extinction of the dinosaurs. Rather, they suggest that the Chicxulub crater was formed 300,000 years before the end of the Cretaceous Period. These scientists claim that terrestrial events, such as volcanic eruptions, were more likely to have bi caused the Cretaceous extinction. According to 6 miles 0 km) intermediate positions, the eruptions may have DIAMETER OF THE ASTEROID 3 been caused by a large meteorite impact. that caused the Chicxulub crater in Mexico Fatal Meteorites In its long geological history, the Earth has witnessed —_ following periods: Cambrian-Ordovician, Ordovician-Silurian, several mass extinctions. Some scientists argue that Devonian-Carboniferous, and Permian-Cretaceous. However, the cause could be the same in all cases, and they scientists have yet to determine a convincing factor that could point to extraterrestrial phenomena as the most likely cause. be the cause in all cases. The Devonian extinction exterminated However, this hypothesis has been widely criticized. From the 50 percent of all species, much like the one occurring at the K- Paleozoic Era 570 million years ago to the Cretaceous Period, it | T boundary. However, the largest extinction of all occurred in has been determined that there were five or six mass the Permian Period, in which 95 percent of all species were extinctions on Earth, which mark the boundaries between the eliminated. CLUES IN CHICXULUB In the town of Chicxulub, on the Yucatan Peninsula in Mexico, a depression was found that measured 112 miles (180 km) across. This enormous imprint was evidence of the violent impact of an extremely large meteorite that crashed into the Earth. ~ MIXED ROCKS Samples taken from the ' J - | Chicxulub crater show a mixture OF ALLSPECIES — < of terrestrial minerals (dark ¥ became extinct at ~ areas) and meteorite minerals (light areas). POST-EXTINCTION LAYER the K-T boundary. Sediments of microfossils from eras later than that of the dinosaurs — FIREBALL LAYER : Pe re ute x A - Yucatan _| Dust and ash from the pe we Z ~ ’ Channel hea “ \) ve aie > Ss => ‘ meteorite's impact i = od , : - real Ry th Canad aN hip ~ Campeche Mérida ““4" - / Bay \. g EJECTION LAYER SNES ae Continiel Materials from the “4 i= crater that settled during several months — | | (0) 100 200 miles (0 160 320 km) 1 12 mites (180 km) DIAMETER OF THE CHICXULUB CRATER on the Yucatan Peninsula PRE-EXTINCTION s 3] ty ° GUATEMALA LAYER 4 e Sediments with Foe’ : P im, microfossils from the era of the il dinosaurs REPTILES AND DINOSAURS 29 FROM HERE... During the Cretaceous Period, intense volcanic activity on Earth caused frequent, copious eruptions of lava and ash that exterminated the dinosaurs. Over 386 square miles (1,000 sq km) of volcanic rock deposited on the Deccan Plateau in India lend credence to this scientific hypothesis of the Cretaceous extinction. ..OR FROM THERE As the Solar System crosses the galactic plane of the Milky Way, every 67 million years it changes the paths of meteoroids and comets in the Oort cloud. These bodies could enter the inner Solar System as meteors and possibly strike the Earth as meteorites. e ll e ATOMIC BOMBS like the one dropped on Hiroshima equal the force of the impact of one meteorite measuring 6 miles (10 km) in diameter. e il e A SKIN WITH SCALES INTERNAL ORGANS . Iguanas have very good vision. They see colors, and THE FAMILY TREE A MENU AT GROUND LEVEL they have transparent eyelids ALIVING FOSSIL REPRODUCTION that close easily. LOT ee SOR ee ~~“ olor plays a very important role the iguana family communicate by reptiles, they are not capable of generating When it comes to their diet, most reptiles in the life of iguanas and lizards. showing bright colors, tufts of feathers, internal heat, so they depend on external are carnivores, with the exception of some It helps to differentiate males and and folds of skin. Another particularity factors to maintain their body temperature. turtles, which are herbivores. Reptiles are females, and when it is time to that distinguishes iguanas is their covering For this reason, you will frequently see also characterized by their total attract a mate, the members of of epidermal scales. In addition, like all iguanas lying stretched out in the sun. independence from aquatic environments. 32 REPTILES: BACKGROUND A Skin with Scales eptiles are vertebrates, meaning that they are animals with a spinal column. Their skin is hard, dry, and flaky. Like birds, most reptiles are born from eggs deposited on land. The Cole tl offspring hatch fully formed without passing through a larval stage. Garcia cera The first reptiles appeared during the height of the Carboniferous Period in the Paleozoic Era. During the Mesozoic Era, they Wrcdinikay evolved and flourished, which is why this period is also MEMBRANES They develop two: a protective amnion and a respiratory allantoid (or fetal vascular) membrane. known as the age of reptiles. Only 5 of the 23 orders that existed then have living representatives today. @ EYES — 4, 16 5 are almost always small. MEMBRANE In diurnal animals, the extends forward from SPECIES OF LIZARDS pupil is rounded. the internal angle of EXIST. the eye and covers it. Habitat Fl Reptiles have a great capacity to adapt, since lef they can occupy an incredible variety of environments. They live on every continent except Antarctica, and most countries have at least one species of terrestrial reptile. They can be found in the driest and hottest deserts, as well as the steamiest, most humid rainforests. They are especially common in the tropical and subtropical regions of Africa, Asia, Australia, and the Americas, where high temperatures and a great diversity of prey allow them to thrive. BLACK CAIMAN Melanosuchus niger Crocodiles are distinguished by their usually large size. From neck to tail, their backs are covered in rows of bony plates, which can give the impression of thorns or teeth. Crocodiles appeared toward the end of the Triassic Period, and they are the closest living relatives to both dinosaurs and birds. Their hearts are divided into four chambers, their brains show a high degree of development, and the musculature of their abdomens is so developed that it resembles the gizzards of birds. The larger species are very dangerous. OVIPAROUS Most reptiles are oviparous (they lay eggs); however, many species of snakes and lizards are ovoviviparous (they give birth to live offspring). AMERICAN ALLIGATOR Alligator mississippiensis APPROXIMATELY This order constitutes the largest group of living 9 reptiles and includes more than 6,000 species of lizards and snakes. The majority of animals in this SPECIES OF order have bodies that are covered with corneous SNAKES EXIST. 4 scales. The squamata include three forms of reptiles ; that are somewhat different from each other: the > amphisbaenians, the lizards, and the snakes. It also contains certain extinct forms of reptiles, including pythonomorpha, which had snakelike bodies and lizard-like feet. NY ECTOTHERMIC SKIN BOA CONSTRICTOR The ody baal vapaths of Dry, nae p reptiles depends on the impermeable, it Boa'constrictor environment—they cannot protects the body from regulate it internally. This is dehydrating even in why higher temperatures very hot, dry climates. They regulate their increase their vitality. temperature by taking advantage of different sources of external heat, such as direct sunlight and p stones, tree trunks, and . patches of ground that have 4 been heated by the sun. ROSY BOA Charina trivirgata Chelonians The order of the testudines differentiated itself from the rest of the reptile world during the Triassic Period. Today it comprises marine turtles THE TONGUE and terrestrial turtles. The species of this rd Large, protractile, order are unique. They are covered with and bifid, a reptile's shells that consist of a dorsal carapace tongue is very and a ventral plastron. These shells are short and thick, so much a part of these animals that and it contains the their thoracic vertebrae and ribs are taste organs. included in them. Since these rigid shells do not allow turtles to expand their chests to breathe, these animals use their abdominal and pectoral muscles like diaphragms. HERMANN'S TORTOISE Testudo hermanni SPECIES OF TURTLES EXIST. LUNGS Since the ribs are fused with the shell, turtles cannot move their ribs to inhale. They use the muscles in the upper part of their legs to produce a pumping motion and inhale air. SKELETON is almost entirely ossified (not cartilaginous). CENTRAL AMERICAN “ RIVER TURTLE Dermatemys mawii wrt ~*~ 34 REPTILES: BACKGROUND REPTILES AND DINOSAURS 35 The Family Tree Tough Skin Skull Types ARMOR Scutosaurs were quadrupeds with massive = Lines of the Hats ater a e gee ia ign a H legs, similar to sti I ith wid i i he first reptiles descended from ancestral amphibians. They distinguished themselves from their sae bases, which sustained the weight oftheir Carboniferoiis Period. Thess ieptllesiwers ancestors through mutations that allowed them to free themselves from their dependence against predators. Se aoe Pee terrestrial animals, somewhat similar to herbivores that lumbered through the pines : the Mesozoic reptiles. The diapsid lineage and firs of Permian forests in search of food, ! Weight 1,100 ; originated with them. such as herbs and soft buds. : pounds (500 kg) H on water for reproduction. Among these adaptations, the amniotic egg stands out, but equally important were the development of sex organs that favored internal copulation, an impermeable skin, and the formation of a low volume of urine that eliminates uric acid instead of urea. These adaptations to its environment were necessary to the reptilian dominance of the greater part of the Mesozoic Era. @ 8 feet (2.5 m) SHIELD LIZARD Scientific Name Scutosaurus sp. Diet Herbivore ” , Habitat Land a Location Europe (Russia) & ; ANAPSID Era End of Permian A group of reptiles without openings in the REPTILE Ichthyosaurs Metriorhynchus skull near the temples. This is the condition EVOLUTION = NX seen in fish, amphibians, and earlier reptiles. Marine Lizards Today's turtles belong to this lineage. Reptiles CROCODILIANS Saneneniaie SAUROPTERYGIANS TAIL Cranial Hylonomus was short in Openi — pacer and relation to the Py, phenodonts , animal's body size. CAPTORHINIDS AND HYLONOMUS ‘ = TEETH t a re Small and irregular, — as Diapsid they allowed the ORDERS OF - skull animal to cut buds REPTILES for food. —_ EXIST TODAY. DIAPSID ANAPSIDS — Canine teeth in the werccappropslate During the Permian Period, another Ls mandible SHELL for the animal's group of reptiles emerged that had was a structure formed by bony body weight. It FLIPPERS temporal openings in the skull behind ___ ribs that developed from the moved slowly. each eye socket. maintained the body's vertebrae of the spine. balance while it moved. Great Turtle The Archelon ischyros was a giant marine reptile that measured 15 feet (4.6 m) in length. It inhabited North America during the Upper Cretaceous (between 75 and 65 million years ago). An omnivorous feeder, it passed slowly through shallow waters by means of the propulsion provided by its flippers. The females laid eggs in holes just like the sea turtles of today. was very flexible, and it provided great agility for swimming. Weight 4,900 pounds (2,200 kg) MILLION YEARS SKIN IS THE AGE OF THE was smooth MOST PRIMITIVE SEA | and slippery. CROCODILE FOSSIL. | Weight 660 pounds (300 kg) 10 feet (3 m) i 15 feet (4.6 m) —__ ARCHELON METRYORHYNCHUS GIANT FLIPPERS were used to move Sea Crocodiles Scientific Name Metriorhynchus sp. Scientific Name Archelon ischyros This genus of reptiles owes its name to its : ‘i through the water. Diet Oimiivorous members' long snouts. The sea crocodile was a Diet Squid and Pterosaurs MOUTH > dangerous hunter, capable and opportunistic. It . : had a beak like a Habitat Marine JAW preyed on squid and pterosaurs, and it chased fish Habitat Mahine hook. It did not pounds was thin and up to 20 feet (6 m) long—twice its own size. Its Location South America ‘ b tits bit (2, 200 k Location North America 4 with tail got thinner toward its end, which had a flipper. (Chile) and Europe cut, but Its bite 4 pronounced, wi There was a small bump between its eyes. Sea (France and England) was deadly. Era Upper Cretaceous small and sharp crocodiles lived near the end of the Jurassic Period. Is wear THESE SEA TURTLES COULD HAVE WEIGHED. teeth. Era Jurassic 36 REPTILES: BACKGROUND REPTILES AND DINOSAURS 37 TAIL Tuataras can shed their tails to avoid being captured. The lost IS THE MEANING OF “TUATARA" IN THE portion grows back, but it differs MAORI LANGUAGE both in color and in design from the original tail. A Living Fossil espite looking like lizards and sharing some common traits with crocodiles, tuataras are a unique type of reptile. The tuatara is the last living sphenodont, and, because it has changed very little from its original form, it is called a living fossil. Two known species of tuatara have been identified, both of which inhabit the islands that lie off the coast of New Zealand. They live in burrows, and their great tolerance for cold allows them to survive at very low temperatures. Tuataras grow slowly and can live up to 80 years. mm < SPINES reel have four toes PINEAL EYE These smooth and apiece. conspicuous spines are can be distinguished in Sphenodon younger specimens. In more prominent in males. punctatus adults, it is covered by the scales that grow over it. Habitat Stephens Island Reproduction Oviparous Lifestyle Burrower REPRODUCTION The males are much Weight Females are ready to mate once every larger than the females. 25 ounces four years. The male—the only modern (700 g) living reptile without a penis—uses its = : = cloaca to transfer its sperm directly into ‘Average Gee ae inches the female cloaca. THE EGGS take a year to form inside the body of the mother and another year to incubate. (Ook (2 F Clo wen) (20°C) HEAD : : is large compared to the body, There is an 80 There is a 50 There is an 80 and it lacks auditory structures. percent chance percent chance percent chance that the eggs will that they will that they will hatch female. hatch female. hatch male. * - SKULL we Ga, has two openings vd ’ % (temporal fenestra) Behavior ial _ on either side of EYE ee Tuataras are nocturnal. During the a the skull. is large. The pupil is day, they rest on rocks basking in Lao eae tical slit, and the sun, and at night, they go out hunting ree ~ dig it: i Openings HORE aa near their burrows. Tuataras, unlike other gh leach Sab ¢ we : behind each : reptiles, thrive in cold weather. i Patcor another eye (temporal Temperatures above 77° F (25° C) are ; fenestra) lethal to tuataras, but they can survive COLORATION temperatures as cool as 40° F (5° C) Tuataras' tones vary on its back are by hibernating. Tuataras are ~ from grayish to olive to small and solitary, skittish animals. brick red. Tuataras granular, undergo significant while the ones variations in color on its throughout their lives. stomach are NUTRITION arranged in Tuataras are carnivores. transverse rows. TEETH Their diet consists of | are not separated insects, earthworms, snails, ' 6 structures but rather a and crickets. Occasionally sharpened extension of they eat shearwater eggs THE LENGTH OF TIME TUATARAS HAVE EXISTED LENGTH OF the edges of both jaws. and nestlings. WITHOUT UNDERGOING EVOLUTIONARY CHANGES. months HIBERNATION 38 REPTILES: BACKGROUND Internal Organs he anatomy of reptiles enables them to live on land. Thanks to their dry, scaly skin and their excretion of uric acid instead of urea, they minimize water loss. The heart distributes blood in a double circuit. Crocodiles were the first vertebrates to have a four-chambered heart; the separation of the ventricles is incomplete in all other reptiles. The lungs, developed beyond those of amphibians, contribute to cardiac efficiency by allowing for greater exchange of gases. @ (>a Weight: more than 1 ton NILE CROCODILE Crocodylus niloticus Diet Carnivorous Longevity 45 years in the wild and 80 years in captivity EYES have telescopic vision, ideal for locating prey. MOUTH is closed by strong muscles. The rear portion contains a membrane that prevents water from entering while the animal is diving. TEETH 64 to 68 rer Circulatory System IRb_ Nile crocodiles have double L@ circulation. A minor circuit brings deoxygenated blood to the lungs and transports oxygenated blood from them, and a major circuit transports the oxygenated blood to the rest of the body and returns deoxygenated blood to the heart. Reptile hearts have two auricles (atria) and a single ventricle, which is partially divided by an incomplete ventricle partition. retain prey. They do not chew but cut prey into pieces, which are swallowed whole. Neck PLACEMENT OF THE SCALES SKIN Reptiles have chromatophores that modify their color to a small degree. Two unique traits of crocodiles are that the skin on the head has glands that regulate the body's ionic balance, and the cloaca has glands that secrete substances crucial for mating and defense. Jugular Region Transverse Lines Longitudinal Lines Anus The flanks and the stomach are lighter and shinier than the dorsal surface. OLFACTORY MESENCEPHALON LUNGS STOMACH DORSAL AORTA BULB MEDULLA contain air sacs _ contains rocks transports BRAIN | CEREBELLUM OBLONGATA called alveoli. that help break oxygenated blood down food. throughout the body. ——— | =e - # PITUITARY GLAND ESOPHAGUS TRACHEA LIVER THE HEART The flow patterns inside the heart prevent the mixing of pulmonary and systemic blood. MAMMAL REPTILE AMPHIBIAN 4 Chambers 3Chambers 3 wa BLOOD CIRCULATION G = {Wy f An ample and efficient network of blood VF vessels extends throughout the bodies of reptiles. A Question of Skin [Rh The absence of extremities LLe@ and the friction produced during movement give snakes the ability to slide and to shed their skin in one motion. Other reptiles must shed their skin by tearing it off in pieces. Reptiles shed their skin regularly and i continue to do so even in the last years of their lives. NEW SKIN REPTILES AND DINOSAURS 39 GROWTH OF THE SCALES Epidermis Dermis THE NUMBER OF TIMES The dermal layer is found A VIPER SHEDS ITS SKIN below the epidermis. OVER ITS LIFETIME. Alun Differentiation takes place during dermal cell growth. Au is smooth and bright. OLD SKIN is fragile. It rips easily. CORAL SNAKE Micrurus altirostris It is characterized by its smooth and brightly colored scales. ere atoa ere KIDNEYS Metanephric. The ureters empty in the cloaca. SPLEEN TESTICLES Lobuled. Their ducts empty in the cloaca. DOUBLE CAUDAL CREST — cuuueeOUeLearn’: Pr my CLOACA and digestive ducts SMALL INTESTINE BREATHING EXHALING Internal organs are compressed. This, in turn, compresses the lungs and causes them to expel air. Respiratory System IM is completely pulmonary. Most reptiles LLefll possess a pair of functional lungs, with the exception of snakes, which have only one functional lung. Body-wall muscles generate the pressure differences necessary to circulate air through the airways from the nasal cavities to the pulmonary alveoli. 2 | INHALING The pelvic bones rotate downward, the abdomen stretches, and the muscles cause the lungs to expand. Flexible Joint Shared opening of the excretory, reproductive, The epidermis secretes large amounts of keratin. —— ae 4 The new scales overlap each other and cover Osteoderms the skin. SIMPLE CAUDAL CREST Abdominal Muscles The liver compresses the lungs. expelled. The pressure difference causes the lungs to expand and take in air. 40 REPTILES: BACKGROUND REPTILES AND DINOSAURS 41 A Menu at Ground Level eptiles are basically carnivorous, even though some follow other food regimens. Lizards usually feed on insects. Snakes usually feed on small vertebrates like birds, rodents, fish, amphibians, or even other reptiles. For many, the eggs of birds and other reptiles make a very succulent meal. The painted turtle is omnivorous: it eats meat and plants. Reptiles and other species are part of a larger food chain—animals eat other animals, preserving the equilibrium of the environment. The tools in a predator reptile's kit include an opportunistic instinct, well-developed reflexes, mucous glands in the mouth that lubricate its prey, a potent immune system, and a tongue with olfactory nerve endings. SNAKES can expand both their mouths and parts of their digestive tracts to swallow 4 their prey whole. Their teeth ’ : and fangs are not for chewing but for hunting, poisoning, and retaining their prey. _ oo ~. . X-RAY IMAGE This snake swallowed a frog whole. CROCODILES feast on invertebrates and other vertebrates. Crocodile young mainly consume terrestrial and aquatic invertebrates, whereas the adults feed primarily on fish. This diet is generally typical of other groups of animals; however, there are reptiles that feed only on green leaves and plants. The marine iguana eats only the algae that it finds under rocks on the sea floor. GREEN IGUANA Also called the common iguana, it is one of the few herbivorous reptiles. It feeds on green leaves as well as on some fruits. a mn CROCODILES * THIRD LEVEL SECOND LEVEL WOOD TURTLE Clemmys insculpta Turtles may be slow, but many include mollusks, worms, and slow-moving insect larvae among the items on their otherwise vegetarian menu. The loggerhead sea turtle, which measures over 6.5 feet (2 m) long, eats sponges, mollusks, crustaceans, fish, and algae. FIRST LEVEL PRODUCERS The Food Chain GREEN IGUANA Iguana iguana (is Because they use photosynthesis, which > permits inorganic carbon to be transformed into organic material, plants are the only true “producers” in the food chain. Herbivores feed on them and are thus first-level consumers. The animals that feed on the herbivores are second- level consumers, and the animals that eat other carnivores—a category that includes some reptiles—form the third level of consumers in the food chain. In the case of snakes that swallow their prey whole, digestion takes weeks and sometimes — ) see Wey even months. Their gastric juices digest even 7 P > ~~ 5 — the bones of their prey. EYELASH VIPER , a ho Sr Bothriechis schlegeli \ f eo “), q ; ry : 42 REPTILES: BACKGROUND REPTILES AND DINOSAURS 435 — Reproduction ost reptiles are oviparous. Some species lay large numbers of eggs and then allow them to develop on their own, generally in well-protected nests or hidden under dirt or sand. Marine turtles, especially green turtles, travel to the coast to lay their eggs in the sand, where they are left at the mercy of all who pass by. The females of other species, however, fiercely protect their offspring, staying near their nests for long periods of time to scare away potential predators. e GREEN ANACONDA Eunectes murinus An anaconda can have more than 50 offspring, which measure nearly 3 feet (1 m) long at birth. Ovoviviparous The eggs remain in the mother's body, and hatching occurs there. The hatched young are diminutive versions of adult animals. Already independent, they do not receive any care from their parents. 145 to 160 days IS THE INCUBATION PERIOD Exit It can take the baby animal an entire day to exit, and it will have a small sac hanging from its navel. This is the sac of yolk that provided it with is the first art to OF THE LEOPARD TORTOISE. food while it was pe Eggshells incubating. I Reptile offspring develop within a : OOT (SHELL) Le liquid-filled sac called the amnion, eearecen eee ; CARAPACE already has is already which lies inside the egg. Most reptile . ve ee eee Its growth mobility, thus completely sous have suf lembletnellacuut samme e ovules, leading into two makes the allowing the baby formed at have much harder shells. Through the prelate ae anaes epg break, ede ta uct: shell, the hatchlin absorbs ees en pyle orioeeurs Mu [ and te it aie far growth ara forward part of the oviduct. Fracture Hatching F Brae ‘ The pressure exerted on The turtle is ready to PoP Ls Me SAL the shell from the come out and starts to movements of the animal break the egg with its I within such a cramped body. Hatching occurs. IRTOISE space causes the shell to Geochelone break from the inside. pardalis Oviparous Growth Reproduction that involves laying eggs in The egg is buried by the mother, del AOE which the offspring complete their and the ehipeyo Bealls ie Diet Herbivorous development before hatching. Some species develop. The egg ote Size 23-26 inches (60-65 cm) lay large numbers of eggs and then allow Bee Sat Dy Sem ane 7 ple: Weight 77 pounds (35 kg) them to develop on their own, generally in Me Z, well-protected nests or hidden in dirt or sand. In other species, such as crocodiles, - the females fiercely protect their offspring. FER-DE-LANCE 9 Bothrops atrox fs A In one litter, it can produce up to 80 offspring, each with a LEOPARD TORTOISE length of 13 inches (34 cm). . \. allows oxygen to , — enter, so the embryo can breathe. a Protected from drying CONSISTENCY OF THE EGGS out, it can survive nwa without water. The eggshell can be soft or hard. Viviparous Soft eggshells are usually found As is the case with most 0 : in lizards and snakes, whereas mammals, the whole surrounds the hard eggshells are common in embryonic developmental embryo and stores turtles and crocodiles. cycle occurs inside the food for its birth. mother's body, and the embryo obtains food from close ECG TOOTH contact with maternal tissues. Prolongation of the embryonic intestines A corneous, or horny, spine on the beak for breaking the shell during hatching = a Hard Soft Lizards and Crocodiles ecause of their long, powerful bodies and sharp teeth, crocodiles are among the most dangerous predators. When they are small, they eat small This Australian lizard gets its name from the sharp spines that cover its body. It can consume up to 2,500 insects in one meal. fish, frogs, and insects. When fully grown, however, they can devour large animals and even humans. We invite you to learn more about the life and habits of these animals. Did you know that lizards are the most numerous reptiles in the world today? This group includes a wide variety of species of all shapes and sizes. They all belong to the taxonomic group LIZARDS CHANGING COLORS KOMODO DRAGON VENERATED AND FEARED MARINE IGUANA THE LARGEST ON THE NILE GECKOS THE AMERICAN EXAMPLE Sauria, and most are carnivores. The Komodo dragon of Indonesia eats wild hogs, deer, and monkeys and can weigh nearly 300 pounds (135 kg). 46 LIZARDS AND CROCODILES DAY GECKOS Phelsuma sp. Lizards izards are the largest group of reptiles. They live in most environments except for extremely cold regions, since they cannot regulate their own body temperatures. There are land-dwelling, underground, tree-dwelling, and even semi-aquatic lizards. They can walk, climb, dig, run, and even glide. Lizards often have differentiated heads, movable eyelids, a rigid lower jaw, four five-toed feet, a long body covered with scales, and a long tail. Some can poner even shed their tails when threatened. TOES LIFESAVING RECOURSE Between each vertebra, there are rupture planes enabling the tail to separate from the body. AUTOTOMIC TAIL © Certain lizards can shed their tails many times during their lives. In dangerous situations, they may even shed it voluntarily in order to flee their confused predators. Later the tail grows back. live in Africa, especially in southeastern regions and on Madagascar. They live in forests, where they use their prehensile tails and toes to climb trees. Their well-known ability to change color is important when they face danger or when they begin to court. is an adaptive advantage. By blending in with the vegetation surrounding them, lizards can escape the notice of both their predators and their prey. TELESCOPIC are lizard-like animals of the family Gekkonidae that live in warm r regions. Their limbs are very < small. (In fact, some : species have none at all!) Their bodies are covered with smooth, shiny scales. MELLER'S CHAMELEON Chamaeleo melleri SKIN has cells with many pigments. TAIL PREHENSILE TOES curls up can surround a branch aa when and hold on tight. > Ps hecessary. LIZARD SPECIES EXIST IN THE WORLD. NOSTRIL % oe. ma ye - > _ _—.,. - CREST 7 “a '/ a - ~. - is e comprise only two species, which live in the United States and Mexico. They feed on invertebrates and small vertebrates. Their bodies are massive, and their skin is covered with small knobs. They are the only poisonous lizards, and their bite can be dangerous to humans. . climb, and dig burrows. enable it to walk, FAT TAIL stores fat reserves for later COLORS warn of poison. GILA MONSTER Heloderma suspectum 4@ consumption. runs from head to tail. has scales covered witha tough, corneous (or hornlike) layer. is fleshy and large in males. | COMMON IGUANA Iguana sp. Body Heat Lizards survive in environments where they can maintain their body temperature, such as forests or deserts. Iguanas belong to the largest New World group of reptiles and have the most complex design. They inhabit tropical regions of the Americas, including the forests of Mexico. They can change color during mating season. The species of this group are vegetarians. REPTILES AND DINOSAURS 47 SUNBATHING The lizard places its body in the sun's rays to take advantage of their heat. IN ACTION It begins its daily activities and movements. HIDDEN When the sun is at its highest, they hide from the excessive heat. CATCHING A FEW MORE RAYS They return to the sunlight but elevate their bodies to take advantage of the heat radiating from the rocks. 48 LIZARDS AND CROCODILES Komodo Dragon ~ “~~ hg Ae his animal is the largest lizard in the world. It is related to monitor lizards and can grow up to 9.8 feet (3 m) long and weigh up to approximately 330 pounds (150 kg). These endangered lizards live only on a group of islands in Indonesia. They are carnivorous and are known for their ferocity in attacking their pr eir saliva is full of bacteria that can kill their prey with only one bite. They can Komodo dragons from several miles away. — , - PIEPER 2 he <2 Nponesta KOMODO 4. a NA y i *Padar Banta > tin —— Habitat (approx) 900 square miles (2,300 sq ki) Number of Dragons Less than 5,000 5,000 __ of the family Varanidae live in the wild on six small Indonesian islands, & rat ding Komodo Island. The dragon searches for food with its forked tongue. When chasing its prey, it can reach speeds of up to 11 miles (18 = km) per hour. ee rl - eo ek fh - By A ef a@ Weight ie tn ns grow more than.10 feet long. Males are somewhat smaller. © 330 pounds (150 kg) 1 al ’ 98 feet(3m)_— Ss wi _Komodo Pigin ges j Like, most reptiles, Komodo,drago! see 4 ge es ; ~~ enormously. This enables i gulp down. upto cent of their own — — t in a single meal. - ——— M + a: ee ) 7 ' rf F ‘ © <*> 2 i "ae ains bacteria that- — are harmful to. its prey. Antibacterial substances P in the Komodo dragon's | blood protect it from their harmful effects. = Deadly = The saliva of Komodo dragons is full of =v bacteria that canquickly kill its prey © ~~ ~~ ___ by-causing septicemia. To, Kill its*prey; - the Komodo'dragon only needs to bite “ ; nce. An-analysis of its saliva = revealed 60.types oftbacteria; 54 of — = ‘iS “which cause infection. These bacteria. are known to cause Ritetactiola dead animals, including the bacteria Pasteurella multocida (one of the ~~ deadliest), Streptococcus, = ~~ "_ Staphyl Pseudomonas, and Klebsiella. en combined, they © <2 aa as ait — are a deadly weapon. wR ee »s Goa . : =, ' ff. < — iva = - a 1. arr ~ . - - et - et ‘ - 4 = eee we _ = e 3 2 ») ‘7 , a oe -~ se - ~ oe - x4 TONGUE is forked and is used for tasting, smelling, and feeling. It can perceive “various airborne ~~ ~~ particles, helping it: detect prey. 4-5" iy How It At acks Its Pre ene | oe * cee. y . Following the scent, the — dragon captures its prey, which dies after being bitten. Its favorite prey is deer ~~~ and wild boars. * — i FEEDING . ’ —s REPTILES AND ———— i ~ A Long Hunt Komodo dragons have an acute sense of smell that can detect the presence of other animals up to 2 miles (3 km) away. They track their prey using their forked tongues to detect scents from molecules in the air. Jacobson's organ, located inside the mouth, helps the lizard to locate its prey more rapidly and consume less energy while tracking it. ~The dragon feeds rapidly, its jaws and skull. It digests not only chunks of meat but also the skin and bones of its prey. : STRUGGLE Smelling a meal, more dragons approach. The largest get the best portions. The younger ones keep their distanceysince the adults may act as cannibals. PASTEURELLA >= MULTOCIDA Bacteria that affects the gastrointestinal and respiratory tracts of mammals and birds _ using the flexible joints of 50 LIZARDS AND CROCODILES REPTILES AND DINOSAURS 51 Marine Iguana a English naturalist Charles Darwin described the marine iguana's style of swimming as “agile and rapid,” but later studies and observations revealed the opposite. This animal, found only on the Galapagos Islands, swims very slowly and with he Galapagos Islands, besides serving as a home for many species of the Central Pacific and South America, also have an amazing number of indigenous species. One of these is the marine iguana, the only species of iguana in the world that very little energy,iThe, Fastest Sir Oca e ‘ f ers SPINES marine iguana was 2.8 feet (0.85 m) per second, and it only spends most of its time in the water. This reptile lives on the rocky coasts and feeds on The crest is usually larger in maintained this pace for two minutes. The average speed for a seaweed and algae. It can stay underwater for 45 minutes and dive approximately males. When fighting for a marine iguana is a mere 1.5 feet (0.45 m) per second, and only c b female, they strike their crests the largest iguanas are strong enough to swim 50 feet (15 m) deep. This unique, slow-swimming creature gathers seaweed is Uainapeteae. . above the waves. to eat at low tide or dives for food. Its tail is thick and flat. Life in Colonies Wavelike v , movements of its The marine iguana is native to the Galapagos Islands and SCALY i body propel it is the only lizard that finds its food in the sea. It lives in BACK ae MORE TReTegS are colonies, which is a curiosity given the solitary behavior of other o : Beant a dio iguanas. When they are not feeding, marine iguanas stretch out side. on rocks to warm in the sun. Thousands may be seen on one vc area of the beach. However, their peaceful coexistence e * A disappears during mating season when males fight aggressively x ~~ —_ over females. The females reestablish harmony at nesting time. Since there is little space for the nests, thousands of females lay their eggs together. Each one can lay from one to six eggs, which are placed in a sandy burrow. Feeding Habits The largest marine iguanas eat seaweed in the water, but the smaller and younger ones do not. Although adult iguanas can dive to a depth of about 50 feet (15 m), in normal conditions they feed at low tide in dives that last less than 10 minutes. Young iguanas, however, 4% LEcs J we are kept to the side of stay out of the water because their body temperature could ~ Soe the bod while fall rapidly. They can only feed on seaweed that grows on ciety exposed rocks and is deposited at high tide. L- * SALT Between its eyes and its nostrils, the marine iguana has glands to expel salt from its body. By ae . } ; . exhaling strongly, it emits a jet of air that Me - canbe used go. whip f SEAWEED a y scatters the salt, which falls onits head and > en self-defense. , ; The di , y forms a white crest. } >; : _ he different kinds of ; ; r seaweed that grow on... : , the islands may cause _ mn these reptiles to vary in ' ; q color.from-one’island to another. ’ eof land y : a ees NC ee $ dwelling iguanas, : ~ major islands, six small.islands, , and islets, all. of which are volcanic in ~ origin. cated’ dole Equator, some’620 es 1,000 km) west of the South American : - indmass, they, are part of th ‘oryof, © , Diving Zone 4 Cape Th climate varies elt becauseof . © . Seaweed is abundant oF 2 ' but can only be reached the different ocean currents Inverge by diving, : s around the archipelago. Because of their oe 4 isolation, they are home to ly indigenous species, most of which are birds and reptiles. gg e vg ft i ‘ °°. . : > Bi Z ~ 52 LIZARDS AND CROCODILES - ‘ ° “i : : . oe ne " ' == é : ‘ | 4 ~— ) awe Geckos ft hs Kh n = 4 ft Unlike most lizards, geckos do not have movable eyelids. Their eyes are covered with a transparent membrane that they shed periodically, along with the rest of their skin. eckos are a group of small, slender lizard species that live mostly in tropical and subtropical regions and on many islands in the oceans. Some species live in deserts, and many have burrows or make their homes in rock crevices. They are nocturnal and can flee from their predators by voluntarily shedding their tails. Geckos are ; the only lizards whose males produce sounds to attract females and . to defend their territory. These agile climbers can walk on smooth vertical surfaces or even upside down by using tiny hairs on their feet that let them stick to anything they touch. <* is covered with. tiny scales. ™ Using its long, sticky tongue, the gecko cleans the membrane over its eyes and ‘ e keeps it free of dust. = . Geckos cannot blink. ~~. They have only a fixed 2 lens, with an iris that enlarges in darkness. Leaf-Tailed Gecko 1 0 50 ‘ When hanging by its tail, it looks exactly like a leaf, which gave rise to its common SPECIES ARE IN name. Male geckos can produce sounds THE GECKO FAMILY similar to vocalized calls. In this species, they are especially loud and high-pitched. A gecko's feet end in toes surrounded by smooth membranes. They have 20 to 23 adhesive pads on the underside of the fourth toe. Geckos can climb directly upward and cling to smooth surfaces, because each toe has a disc with tightly packed concave areas that act as suckers. 10 inches (25 cm) The texture of S Scientific name —- Uroplatus henkeli ; = Its tail is ie a4 4 fees Ny ~ = | es f /4 Family Gekkonidae : ‘ autotomic, ~ environment. ul Habitat Trees ; “Nag meaning that the ‘ : : gecko can shed bs > Range Madagascar, Africa ‘ it, allowing the ; : Geckos have tiny Each seta ends in up Diet Carnivorous (insects) reptile to double filaments on the ends of to 1,000 microscopic : its speed. their toes called setae. hairs called spatulae. ° The Kuhl's flying gecko lives in trees in a eae ! Southeast Asia. Unlike flying lizards, it great climber hn : glides with its webbed feet. When it is r xs ’ not “flying,” it spends most of its time i — & hanging head down in the trees, ready “ad million Rows of for a rapid takeoff. Setae Scientists have explained the gecko's m7 capacity to cling (which even enables them _ THE NUMBER OF HAIRS * to climb glass and never get it dirty) (SETAE) ON A GECKO'S a i. through electrostatic principles and even FEET ty = microphysics. . 5 < +) f, % ° a Y = . - ( | | mid: J i A The membranes between B The membranes along its ° When walking, it - generate the same at a 30° angle its toes are used as wings sides and flat tail help it to > moves them this way The spatulae arevery force that draws breaks this for gliding. regulate its fall. ‘° up to 15 times per close to each other molecules together. attractive force. second. and to the surface. e e te: " ; g ~ - x e ie he a” aie - ee J 54 LIZARDS AND CROCODILES Changing Colors hameleons are well known for their ability to change color. Another interesting fact is that their tongue can stretch great distances in seconds. They live mostly in Africa. Their Feeding Habits These diurnal hunters wait for victims to pass by. Their diet includes arthropods and small invertebrates. Among insects, they prehensile tails and toes make them excellent climbers. Another helpful Range Madagascar Be Gece ecco . . . . . A . motns. er S| les on the menu a characteristic is that their eyes can move independently of one another, prenchcierrnie = — include songbirds and mice. a irestyle urnal providing them a 360° field of vision. Their flat bodies help them to balance They use their long — curved tails to hold on to branches without and to hide among the leaves. | using their feet. = x |— 14-20 inches (35-50 cm) —_-| BONE 3 acts as a support for discharging the tongue. TIP > vas The tip of the o™ tongue spreads Rs © TONGUE out and captures wn we dé ~~ Covered with the prey with its ae . collagen tissue. sticky surface. *; i = Retraction When the elastic tissues contract again, they roll up the tongue and return it to its initial position with the prey sticking to it. Contraction Several sheets of collagen between the tongue and the accelerating muscle are compressed in the form of a spiral, which stores the energy hecessary to propel the tongue outward. Up to 600% A of the tongue's length is ae C curled up in reserve. Unfolding The accelerating muscle compresses the energy-storing collagen tissues, launching the tongue toward its target. FEET The toes are divided into two parts, with two toes on the outside and three on the inside. Reflected Incident Light Light Reflected Incident Light Light nging ability of chameleon well. Kao | in popular When the PIGMENT songs, is not an adaptation to the environment as is upper layer CELLS The melanophores contain a dark pigment lieved. Rather it is related tochanges in light and (chromatophores) called melanin, which ify ature, courtship behaviors, or the presence of a predator. detects a yellow color, Chromatophores regulates the ir Changes a¥e.caused by the action of hormones on pigment the blue light of the Guanoohores brightness and the , in the ta Th pecialized cells, located in each layer of the guanophores (white P amount of light ees dermis, react and change color, camouflaging the chameleon from chromatophores) reflected, varying its its, predators. “ becomes greenish. Melanophores color. ’ y= 56 LIZARDS AND CROCODILES Venerated and Feared rocodiles—along with their relatives, the alligators, caimans, and gavials—are very ancient animals. They belong to the same group that included the dinosaurs and have changed very little in the last 65 million years. They can go for long periods without moving; during these times, they sun themselves or rest in the water. However, they can also swim, jump, and even run at high speed to attack with force and precision. In spite of their ferocity, female crocodiles provide more care for their young than any other living group of reptiles. Gavil see ti A gage ree snout, with long front teeth. Habitat Freshwater Number of Types One CROCODILE Degree of Danger Harmless has a V-shaped snout, narrower than the alligator's. ‘__ 13-23 feet (4-7 m) ALLIGATOR has a wide, short, U-shaped nose. is the strangest of all crocodiles. Its long, narrow snout with small, sharp teeth sweeps through the water. Its interlocked, outward-curving teeth are perfect for catching slippery fish. Adult males drive away their rivals with loud buzzing sounds that they make by exhaling air through a bump on their noses. Long, narrow nose Its legs are suspended. —— S— Then the hind EI | The cycle pi come into “at starts over. Gh Ce eo The tail is raised to avoid ee acting as a brake. REPTILES AND DINOSAURS 57 Alligatoridae The lower z teeth are Habitat Freshwater invisible when Number of Types Eight the mouth is closed. Diet Insects, Mammals, Birds 10 to 20 feet (3-6 m) are flat on the tail. Alligators and caimans are almost completely limited to freshwater. They make their nests by piling up grass, dirt, and leaves to lay their hard-shelled eggs. The female often remains near the nest to keep would-be thieves from invading. Although they look clumsy, alligators can use their jaws with precision. The female often helps her eggs to hatch by putting them in her mouth, where she rolls them against her palate with her tongue until they crack. Crocodylos niloticus How They Move Although their preferred form of movement is swimming or crawling, crocodiles can run for short distances if they feel threatened. They can reach speeds of up to 9 miles per hour (15 km/h) when running, with their abdomens supported above their knees and their elbows slightly bent. They can go even faster when sliding on mud. Habitat Freshwater and Saltwater are longest in front. number from 64 to 68. The fourth tooth on the lower jaw is visible when the mouth is closed. Number of Types One Life Span 70 years 16 to 20 feet (5-6 m) It moves forward with its four limbs. The front legs begin the movement. POSTURE Semi-crouched. The knees and elbows are slightly bent. have four feet. In this way, they are very similar to lizards. They are distinguished by their great size and ferocity. Several rows of bony plates that look like spines or teeth run down the length of their back. They can stay in the water for long periods of time, and they are able to swallow underwater without drowning. They make their nests in holes on the beach. The Johnston's, or freshwater, crocodile, of tropical northern Australia, can gallop to the water by raising all four feet off the ground. SWIMMING Using its tail for locomotion, it moves with agility through the water. IS THE SPEED THEY CAN REACH AT A FULL RUN. a WARTHOG - Phacochoerus africanus eo » THE AMOUNT OF TIME THEY CAN REMAIN UNDERWATER tempera’ ture. 1 the water and use their tails OF S\ a = SCALES ALONG THE BACK Body scales serve as armor. Webbed feet help them to swim. " V-SHAPED ’ SNOUT 60 LIZARDS AND CROCODILES REPTILES AND DINOSAURS 61 ————— —————— The American Example Large Mouthfuls - Caimans' teeth are not used for chewing or cutting but to trap, hold, and puncture the bodies of their prey. When a caiman's victim is large, such as a capybara or a wild? boar it twists its body in the water to tear off a chunk and swallow it. Caimans also hide their prey underwater to soften their body tissues. This makes it easier to rip off mouthfuls of flesh, which they swallow whole. aimans also belong to the order of crocodilians. These fierce reptiles live exclusively in the tropical regions of the Americas, mainly in lakes and swampy regions. Occasionally, when a looking for food, they enter areas populated by humans. The fi caiman family includes the genera Caiman, Melanosuchus, and x Paleosuchus. The largest species is the black < caiman, 0) named because of the color of its hide. He; = EYES SKIN SENSORS Ud (2-to 76 ‘ & sae # Black Predator Ae ie ‘ y teeth The black caiman is distinguished from other — ff \\ BLACK ' 7 caimans by dark stripes on the lower part of its > | i CAIMAN Mi d ARRANGEMENT OF TEETH mouth and yellow lines along the sides of its body. ai Melanosuchus on x Caimans have five teeth in their However, it is similar to other caimans in its feeding io habits, which depend on its age. Young caimans feedon d0ds and amphibians, while adults eat fish, ae . he mals, or snails if other foods are scarce. upper front jaw, 13 to 14 in the rest of their upper jaw, and 18 to 19 in their lower jaw. REGENERATION TOOTH NEW LOWER captivity they consume only 14 ounces (400 g) ( Lost teeth can be IN USE TOOTH JAW twice a week. 4 replaced. a TT TT ‘oe Pek a iis ig ve "I A Hard Life In the state of Louisiana, a white alligator with no skin pigmentation lives in captivity. This trait would EYES OUT make it vulnerable in the wild, because it would be NY OF THE unable to absorb energy from the sun, a process WATER that is crucial for many reasons, especially for the maintenance of its body temperature, allowing it to have enough energy to attack its prey. Wesinians mate in the water. been fertilized, the females be ild thei . : nest, formin ja mound out of dry vegetation and earth. ; 4 * ’ + NOSTRILS With their hind legs, they dig a hole in the center where i 7 , s ABOVE THE they lay their eggs—from 30 to 75 at a time. When j \ WATER = finished, they cover the nest with earth. In some cases, “~ the females return to the water and have nothing more to do with the eggs. * : * ; ~~ s SUBMERGED : ; BODY > *. ’ ' 4 ; ‘ ADULT SPECIMEN ~— Sa “ y, Adults spend most of the day in the water. At night they come on shore to hunt. ce NEST FUTURE MOTHER WITH The eggs that are exposed FEMALES YOUNG to the air, which are not Some females kept as warm, will hatch FUTURE fiercely defend their as females. offspring. Melanosuchus niger BLACK CAIMAN Turtles and Snakes n this chapter, you will discover the amazing world of turtles and snakes. You will learn what they are like inside, where they live, and how they hunt their prey, as well as why some eat only eggs and others, such as constrictors (the most primitive snakes), have to suffocate their prey by coiling around it. This chapter will also reveal interesting This tree-dwelling green python usually coils around a branch and waits with its head hanging down, ready to attack. It eats small mammals and birds. PS be facts about turtles' skeletons and shells (for example, turtles that swim have streamlined shells that enable them to glide easily through the water). Although people may think that turtles SLOW BUT STEADY DEADLY EMBRACE LONG-LIVED GIANTS A SPECIALIZED MOUTH TURTLES IN THE WATER COBRAS INTERNAL STRUCTURE EGG EATERS are peaceful creatures, many are actually carnivorous hunters that eat small invertebrates, fish, and even some larger animals. 64 TURTLES AND SNAKES REPTILES AND DINOSAURS 65 1 - 8h oe SHELL W U if Fi Small, flat, and joined i ior to the skeleton J “4 ee f ’ ’ are the rarest. They live in warm waters and are excellent swimmers. ince their appearance on Earth about 230 million years | They have flippers instead of feet. The front flippers move them 5 if, forward, and the back flippers act as a rudder for steering. Their shells ago, turtles have changed very little. Tu rtles can live on fist = ‘HEAD of oceanic turtles are flattened into a streamlined shape. These turtles Fi . ad have developed a dual respiratory system that allows them to remain land, in freshwater, or in saltwater. However, they all a pant Gaitimieried torlunito bwe holes need light and heat to survive, and they all lay their eggs on iy nose. land. Although aquatic turtles are nearly all carnivorous, wy some land-dwelling species are herbivorous. Turtles' most ry. id p Hawksbill Turtle . og . . “ sat. I > vii E, noticeable trait is their hard shell, which encloses and be Wein: Eretmochelys imbricata : 5 a Sea turtles are usually heavy and protects the soft part of their bodies. It also camouflages Li ih 4 large. This Caribbean species can , them for protection from predator species. \ ¥ welgh up to 141 pounds (64 kg). aa - } ' (o——___ NECK Much longer than that of APPROXIMATELY other species Most turtle species live in freshwater. They are distinguished by their feet, which are partially or totally webbed and are used for swimming, an activity at which Concealed from Danger eens STRAIGHT-NECKED TURTLE they are highly skilled. They can also be identified by their Many scientists believe that turtles’ shells bends to Head shells, which are flatter than those of land-dwelling turtles. TYPES OF SHELLS enabled them to survive long ago, during a one side. 2 as A egieeeet Some freshwater turtles are quite well adapted to living on Turtle shells differ according time when so many other reptile species, by a vertical pendulum land. In general, they prefer warm climates with abundant | to each species’ habitat. including dinosaurs, perished. The shell consists of mechanism. vegetation, so they commonly live near swamps and , Ay a domed back and a flat belly, joined by a bridge rivers located in subtropical areas around the E==_ between the front and hind legs. The outer layer world. Their shells may have particular & & . is made of skin and hornlike plates, and the inner Legs characteristics depending on the species. SHELL =< layer is made of bone. Turtles draw their heads and Tail The American box turtle, for example, This species S inside their shells in different ways depending on cli : Ges can completely close its shell.. has a very = whether their necks are straight or side-bending. eae ove soft, thin STREAMLINED Land-dwelling turtles have shells that enable : shell. Leatherback Turtle them to hide their legs, as well as their heads, fold upward inside, protecting their entire bodies from threats. and are \ The skeletons of ocean turtles, however, are brought inside. A completely integrated with their shells. Chinese Soft- Shelled Turtle Pelodiscus sinensis They live in swamps and streams. Their diet consists of fish and mollusks. FLAT SHELL fi ‘ Red-Eared Slider Made of shieldlike Counting the successive hornlike plates that grow on the shell each year allows us to determine a turtle's age. Pi —EEZN,_:) ia b cat CRESTED Alligator Snapping Turtle Land-dwelling species have the best- protected legs because they are covered by large scales. They also have the most dome-shaped shells. Many species have front legs that are adapted for digging deep burrows, which serve as a shelter in Hermann's inclement weather and protect them from Tortoise threats from other species. The Florida Testudo hermanni gopher tortoise (Gopherus polyphemus) can dig tunnels up to 33 feet (10 m) deep. Some land-dwelling species can inflict very painful scratches. PLASTRON Underside of the shell ¢ > @ ¢ 4 , . me = 2 | ~ ; REPTILES AND DINOSAURS 67 66 TURTLES AND SNAKES L Li 4 5 ong-Lived Giants. pt De - There are no\ of Galapi jagos tortoises, including ’ ti oe & dd ties . All d. if jant tortoises once lived on all the he contents except Auspralia At Reyne * water ae They differ id vn Sl bled cu before and during the Pleistocene Era. They are now extinct ‘on the continents an aS lengths. an 6 feet are only found on the Aldabra atoll in the Seychelles islands in the Tae : aes se >. and on the Galapagos Islands off the coast. of Ecuador. In the Galapagos the ~ ‘~\ a * distinct populations living in different parts of its small area. The Galapagos giant = a a) We) (eee fe roan tortoise, Geochelone.nigra, is the largest tortoise in the world, weighing up De > eh Ss ' eros 08, pounds (400 kg). The ogee one,still living is over 175 years old: » ; i stretch its S bs \ —_ ofM mo oJ > 4 y » upward. i. ~ 7 . om ~~ y= % ~s A .* : « . ~ : < —_ ~ se s~ . = ‘ A, Ms >. ws } es 4 » ad iat ; PP een: ir RETRACTABLE NECK z SHELL cy = eee > é | © isthe nickname of the ‘ enables it to hide its oe weig Rage Redan : “Lonesome ceo pw only survivo Par pte My ~~ ~ - head inside its shell. ™ “© poun ds 50 a . George”) : " 7 extinct subspecies 1. —- ’ “ ’ Perches » Equator 0° (G. nigra abindoni). a : ee Ta i> ia ~ rho | On Oe aa antiago r ae eee “a. Cn an a” f - 4 ‘ 7. ee ee hu aT, ae 7 é artolomé i . * : ee oe GALAPAGOS GIANT TORTOISE én Seymour | * a z ed ’ nths Geochelone elephantopus ry -y % | *. a Ey A TORTOISE CAN eee Rabid: ae a “TIME. Habitat Galapagos Islands Fernandina ee “et sari a San Cristébal O ee wes ie LIVEWITHOUT EATING OR DRINKING Diet Herbivorous Pinz6én . . leaves of . . Height — Up to 47 inches (120 cm) Santa Fe i" bushes. . ~~ : * O-——~$ PLATES ieMiar®. Upw59 mches 50cm). se =é ° ‘ o_O are pointed, in ‘ 9 Isabela | “GALAPAGOS: ISLANDS ‘ ww the case of . fh pe 4 " ~ om, | ‘ Asian tortois _— - , . . ye @& Fspajiola . - < + ae 7 vr? : ce v 7 @® : 2. “a ; va ~~ s Repgoduction ‘ ie * p! eo . y. Mating ; —m O-——BRIDGES < ~Bset is rather aggressive; the ~ ~*~ : va upper — male immobilizes the : — shd ! female in order to mount yo Bes 2% es pide ad , and fertilize her. v fo <3) >. le = FRONT LEGS ss “are “1s . . Pchiiab incl 5 © Ee? gee Main Predators = = nett ' an rae it hatches ; 740 ais “ Ae 4 In addition to suffering from poaching humans in the ae > altho ae ia a al ° nN ~ past, Galapagos tortoises are in danger of extinction ~ : carrie + 40 ont Bee AY Most Stable + i“ & because of the low survival rate of their hatchlings, which | Finn 4 ide Pe | "Size 3) edt) are hunted by two types of species that have been “| 5 * ortoises aethe m lazy; they spe of FL “3 froth low its rate 4 =. 3 i % introduced to their habitat: black rats and cats. Furthermore, their time sunning Phefiselvesirr small-grOups, oh 4 a g . . a. ; the diet of adult female tortoises causes them to compete 1 Warde Serve canic ie near io nat ona eh x ay > Ons fe typical of for food with goats and other livestock, more species not - swamp. oP eaticarrion, — ta ; ea ¢ a 3 . . “this order of native to the tortoises' ecosystem. ‘thie ST ro = Ce 2 Ba a, Nesting ‘reptiles. ANIMALS INTRODUCED re = 0 / wf ( a+ For nearly five hours, the female ' BY HUMANS atone male | :) N { I " Pt’ digs a funnel-shaped hole with her ks and makes from three ‘ o > henry : £ xh u . j . claws, softening the ground with . cei p 7 - ; rs SS ae je —~ | \ Za pew * > her urine. She settles the eggs in “— > : j ' Sat OS i_, . Pp 2 layers, covers them with earth, and oe smoothes it down. {| 2.5 inches (6 em Ts: — : cLAWS ; are used ome : - _ Giant Egg “ Its'shell i is hard ae 5 and spherical. f 4 7 ‘ : ee pe eg £5 -- _ ee - "; ® a ° S ee 68 TURTLES AND SNAKES REPTILES AND DINOSAURS 69 = —— = i —— — } ——— SEE = \ \ ] . Turtle S It the ater | So eacnon of sea turtles from their feeding areas, which can be several Breathing Sea turtles have wedge-shaped lungs repeats every year, every two years, or hundred or even several thousand miles from t f i eC every three years. Nesting is done during the their nesting sites. Apparently the turtles are F ea turtles have had to adapt parts of their bodies to an aquatic environment. Their front summer on sandy beaches in tropical and able to memorize the exact location where ieee legs propel them through the water, and their hind legs serve as rudders for steering. subtropical areas where the average water _they were born. They seem to navigate by ; Bre chedito their backs Their shells are highly streamlined. They can spend up to several hours submerged in the ee ess along the spine. Sea A 2 a a : Dent / turtl Iso breath water, since they have a dual respiratory system. They lay eggs but make their nests on solid three years, the turtles return SM eiiherskn ground, and they have an interesting system for choosing the spot where their young will be born—they return to the same spot where they, themselves, were born. © MIGRATION TO BREEDING ounds ae MATING | oy miles Habitat 1,500 (680i) ‘i ¥ per hour é ‘ The leatherback turtle can measure ies aie rcle es, — up to 9 feet (2.7 m) long and weigh (35 km/h) sea turtles migrate : to 1.500 ds (680 kg) in warm ocean currents, | mee ea BES LAYING ~~ THE SWIMMING SPEED OF such as the Gulf Stream, to % HATCHLINGS 7 SEA TURTLES places with higher GREEN SEA TURTLE temperatures. However, Chelonia mydas they sometimes stay too long in these currents, which then vanish, leaving Diet Herbivorous the turtles in frigid water. Length Up to 39 inches (100 cm) Life Span 50 years (estimated) 100 feet (30 m) Kemp's Ridley = F R & ¢ ‘ J ‘ Ps Swimming Habitat Tropical and Subtropical Waters bins is relatively large and See ~ ale To be able to swim, turtles needed ~~~ “SHELL cannot be retracted . ~ te to adapt their front limbs and 230 feet (70 m) into the shell. ad is aerodynamical in transform them into large flippers. Their Green Sea Turtle shape—convex on the hind limbs took the form of oars. They have upper side and neatly a membrane around the bones of their flat on the underside. phalanges (where their digits would be) \ DEPTHS EYE)” Using their flippers to has a double and a shell that lies flat along their backs, make powerful strokes, ppt pair of eyelids. giving them a streamlined shape. sea turtles move through feenerieery the water in a manner Turtle MODIFIED FEET ——M\W\_— resembling flying. have become relatively large flippers. —— ee LEATHERBACK : ~~ TURTLE i : Dermochelys — et ‘ coriacea ; FLIPPERS O _—< J ' 4 Extension of the bones that ‘ : ’* i ,, make up the main part of "4 ) Tf 8 Seo A, the limb wf PS AS eee " ee, »* a - ; ~~ a + jh ~ wa ‘ = . — ——< system makes them enormously flexible. Body of the vertebra Hemal keel THE NUMBER A SNAKE CAN HAVE LIVER is long and located along the esophagus. BLADDER STOMACH SPLEEN REPRODUCTION is sexual, and most species lay eggs. Some species give birth to live young. SCALES are generally found in the dorsal region. POISONOUS HEAD Typically wide and triangular REPTILES AND DINOSAURS 71 IDENTIFICATION OF SOME POISONOUS = TalL AND NONPOISONOUS VIPERS Suddenly narrows (like a Some subtropical and tropical rattle) but does snake species live underground not end in a point : and only come out in droughts or BODY floods. These are the smallest Relatively long snakes; some are no longer than 4 and rough inches (10 cm). They have large heads, few teeth, and bodies covered in very soft, slippery NONPOISONOUS scales, which enable them to slide HEAD Typically narrow; hard into anthills and termite hills, to distinguish from the neck BODY TAIL their only sources of food. Their Narrow, with Narrows eyes, which are covered with smooth scales gradually and scales, barely work. ends in a point SMALL slats TYPES OF MOVEMENT DEPENDING ON HABITAT is divided into a small tract and a large tract, which ends well before 3 5 the tip of the tail. RECTILINEAR SIDEWINDING Rainbow Boa Desert Snakes SKIN Many species of snake have no scales i. : on the underside. SERPENTINE CONCERTINA King Cobra Rattlesnake OVARIES The female reproductive organs Snakes of the family Viperidae, as well as other poisonous snakes that appeared later, have highly acute senses and a mouth apparatus with a system of retractable fangs for injecting venom. INFRARED PITS Snakes of the family Viperidae are distinguished by two thermoreceptive pits on either side of their heads, which enable them to sense differences in temperature. Some pits are extremely sensitive, helping the snake to gauge the size of its prey when it hunts at night. BOON VIPER Bitis gabonica 72 TURTLES AND SNAKES REPTILES AND DINOSAURS 73 Deadly Embrace nakes have developed a wide range of techniques to kill their prey. For example, both boas and pythons are powerful constrictors, meaning that they kill by asphyxiating their prey rather than poisoning them with venom. Although boas and pythons belong to the same category of snakes (a category that includes the largest species in the world—the famous anaconda and reticulated python of Africa and Asia), their reproductive systems differ from one another. Their large size makes them heavy and slow moving, so they are easy prey for hunters, who kill them for their hides and meat. JAWS Snakes of the boa family (Boidae) have supraorbital and . ~ Corallus hortulanus premaxillary bones. Curved Teeth TEETH interlock. Smaller to Range South America Larger Habitat Trees Length 7 feet (2 m) Flexible Ligament The snake seeks out the head of its victim so that its prey will not be able to fight back. It takes the prey with its curving front teeth, keeping its victim from escaping. This enables it to suffocate its prey by coiling itself around the prey's body and squeezing (constricting). 7 feet (2 m) Tree Boa « can measure up to 7 feet (2 m) long and ex lives in trees. Its color blends in with the surrounding foliage, concealing it an J from predatory birds. Its prehensile “ - tail holds firmly onto branches, while er a . ‘ ¢ its head hangs down so that it can ee a~ 9 a ie wii pounce on passing birds or 6 ew ae SCALES ————@ mammals. | We » ee a * ; Heat-sensitive ee - — a in - ” aa + age a ae if A wT ~ 7 _ em < ‘ 4 . il, . = uw a s += ” - . ve -— ons - *. - —- - - Z >»-- - “4 .". —— by ® 7 “= c - q a * st a? € Pe ? i. | all a a - 23 Ro test \ 4 = 5 . ~ e F *% es . ~~ . ft a = = a> \ . * 7S : —. ‘ . Ag Ce - * A rk . 4 ey v Sat < 4 * i e —_. Sa . . mL rs ~ g az . : b = a ~~ car > Sa ?, ” , 7 Boe € . ; a Fok bs tau? The snake seeks the head of the prey to keep it “ s > a nn ia J from attacking. Its entire body surrounds its prey i ae - : a in a deadly embrace. Every time the victim rs , os - ae Weel the squeeze tightens. The prey dies of + —_ ss ; suffocation. r Tks ; as EPAXIAL MUSCLES EPAXIAL MUSCLES oes CONTRACTED RELAXED Spinal =, :. Column } \ Contracted Epaxial | Muscles \ ‘ Relaxed Epaxial Muscles The dead prey is ingested using the trunk muscles, which move the prey through the snake's body. THIS IS HOW OVOVIViparous CONSTRICTORS REPRODUCE. Constricting Ring Formation 3 When the prey is dead, the snake releases its grip and begins to feed. It swallows the head first and gradually releases the rest of the body from its coils. The time it takes to eat the prey depends on the animal's size and ranges from a few minutes to one or two hours. 33 fe et The skin stretches, (10 m) and the scales THE LENGTH TO aaa WHICH A GREEN ANACONDA > (Eunectes murinus) CAN GROW 74 TURTLES AND SNAKES A Specialized Mouth Primitive Snakes Boas and pythons are called primitive, since they have neither fangs nor venom. These snakes have several rows of small, he most primitive snakes have heavy skulls and few teeth. Most snakes, inward-curving teeth used for holding prey and swallowing quickly however, have lighter skulls and jointed jawbones. These joints are loose and without letting the prey worm out. This feature is necessary for r ‘ the snakes to be able to hold onto their prey, since they lack can easily become dislocated so that the snake can swallow prey larger than ‘renomrs, Venorhous snakes. on the-other hand, have-little the natural shape of its own head. The teeth are fixed in the upper jaw or the need to worry about their prey escaping, since they ae i f know that, after it is injected with the toxic palate, and the fangs for injecting venom may be located either at the front substance He willinit be dile toxiet-very4ar or at the back of the mouth. Some species, as well as being large and powerful, have retractable fangs, allowing them to close their mouths when their fangs are not in use. Injecting Fangs Cobra species expel their venom in different ways depending on their fangs. The angle and direction of the opening determine how forcefully the liquid is injected. Cranial Anatomy NAC OeearOnea is directly related to each species' diet and—in gives the snake an excellent sense the case of venomous snakes—to its system for of smell. It consists of two injecting poison. Most snakes have small skulls with cavities in the palate, into jawbones that can be separated voluntarily by sliding which the snake brings its them along a kind of perpendicular rail, which tongue after “tasting” the consists of a bone called the quadrate. This greatly outside air. That is why BLACK AND WHITE COBRA BLACK-NECKED COBRA increases the size of the snake's mouth. snakes continually ] ACK-NEC stick out their Naja melanoleuca ; Naja nigricolis tongues. It must bite its prey in order to Tt has a jaw with a spur, but eis inject venom. it does not actually spit. DUVERNOY'S RETRACTOR MUSCLE UPPER JAW “, ~» , ASIAN COBRA RINKHALS SPITTING Fae i Naja naja COBRA This type of skull has smal = - It is the typical cobra, which Hemachatus haemachatus teeth fie large, retractable Colubrid ) Elapid bites to inject its venom. It can spit great distances. fangs that are thick or This type of skull lacks front fangs. In this type of skull, the fangs are hooked. Some species are nonvenomous, located in front, but they are smaller but others have fangs with a and have only a groove, rather than groove for delivering venom. a canal, for injecting venom. Spitting Venom ea = consists of the two Duvernoy's glands, one on a\ eT i) 17) Forty cobra species can spray their venom WA UE) 04 sa L) Venom System Rf 3 6.6 f each side of the skull, which produce venom and ' from a distance. They spray in self-defense are connected to the fangs. When biting, muscle THE DISTANCE FROM WHICH THE SPITTING when they feel threatened. They can direct contractions exert pressure on the gland and COBRA CAN KILL BY SPRAYING ITS VENOM the stream into an enemy's eyes, causing activate the injection mechanism. grave damage or even death. The shape of FUSED BONES their fangs is essential to this defense. The Deadliest Weapon Rattlesnakes have long, thick fangs that are very sharp and kept folded inside their mouths. A movable joint at the base of the fang enables it to stand upright when the snake's mouth opens to bite. NON-SPITTING The long canal points downward and has a beveled edge at the end. The stream loses momentum. LENGTHWISE CROSS SECTION SPITTING The venom The tooth has a flows through Entrance cavity that SOLENOGLYPHS PROTEROGLYPHS OPISTHOGLYPHS bichesabel alate dg the tube and serves as the A The hollow fangs are the Small fangs in the front of Fangs in the back, with no reds ane ete oo directly into canal for the only teeth in the jaw. They the jaw, fixed in position canal or groove. The prey that oa ie the venom the prey. olson. are long and retractable and with a rear groove for must be held in place. Dee eee ee: and inject venom into the conducting venom Poison Canal prey's tissues. 76 TURTLES AND SNAKES Cobras REPTILES AND DINOSAURS 77 : : 4 This Asian species has soft 115-16 3 feet re an important group of snakes in scales. Its color varies widely es ay fet the family Elapidae. Easily recognized SMOOTH Oni of 40 species of Spitting depending on the region. when by their outspread hoods, they are well ean a cobras, it inhabits the Horn he ‘“ if p i y ‘ alte month of Africa, where it is widely J eae ae aes known worldwide, mostly because of their use feared This distinguished by " Lapa by snake charmers. Many cobra species carry a black band below its neck. , KING COBRA » Ophiophagus hannah deadly venom. Some can even spit from several yards away. Cobras of the Naja genus are the most widely recognized. They are widespread in Asia and This is the largest cobra, measuring between 11.5 and 16 feet (3.5-5 m). It can attack backward and raise its head more than 3 feet (1 m) above the ground. were only recently recognized as 11 separate species. All e MONOCLE ; Q J Made of two concentric are predatory; many eat only snakes. 4 1 nl rings, it is easily Parietal Dorsal t a | recognizable because of Scales Scales its white color. | i f DISTRIBUTION OF NAJA HOW TO DISTINGUISH AMONG THEM y . & SPECIES IN ASIA N. atra Although the Asian species look similar to one pe ere ta f 7 gr another, they often have distinguishing colors species apart. } 7 and scale patterns. The simplest way to identify N. kaouthia them is by the pattern on their hoods—if you f Sublablal Ventral have time to look! ; i Scales Scales = 1A Arrangement > Nv. philippinensis gilt SCALES ghy t are soft to Fl J of Scales aad the touch. | The appearance of the scales is a simple and easy way to classify species. The large parietal scales follow a line that usually differs among species. The sublabial scales are also widely used in identification. Usually there are five, ax A N. samarensis St BOTTOM VIEW N. naja Ocular Lateral N. sagittifera ; BAND but the number varies between species. Scales Scales N. N. sputatrix isalso The ventral scales are perhaps most sumatrana tet in As } easily used for identification, because is species. ’ F Indian Cobra Chinese Cobra Andaman Cobra Golden Spitting Cobra ey? they differ notably from one group to Naja naja Naja atra Noja sagittifera Naja sumatrana wy another. They are always wide, cover the entire body, and are divided into sections: neck, belly, and tail. PROFILE The Hood The scales l j ij BS RU ELEE, It is believed that when cobras mechanism involves the ribs, which are a aes j ; feel threatened or are about to widened by the muscles that lie between — attack, they spread their hoods by them. When cobras put on this display, widening their necks in order to look they are ready to strike. Some species VENOM larger than they actually are. The also hiss while in this position. is quite powerful. It paralyzes the muscles in minutes; the victim cannot flee and dies of cardiac arrest or asphyxiation. Widened Neck Open Hood Stretched Ribs in Regular Scales It is the most widespread Position BANDS species on the Indian are usually - subcontinent and one of the found on best known. Its distinctive the belly. trait is the mark on its hood, similar to a pair of glasses, which gives this snake its other name: spectacled cobra. 78 TURTLES AND SNAKES Egg Eaters he egg-eating snake is both harmless and common. Its body is about as thick as an adult's fourth finger. The egg-eating snake eats bird eggs and hen eggs that are larger than its body. Although it might be confused with a true viper because of its size and coloring, it is classified as an oophagous (egg-eating) snake in the family Dasypeltis. Snakes in this family are distinguished by special vertebrae that help break the shell of an egg as it is swallowed. It selects eggs very carefully, using its highly refined sense of smell to make sure that they are not rotten. Unique Diet These snakes do not find eggs every day, so they regurgitate the shells to create more space in their stomachs for the eggs they will find in the future. The folds in the snake's mouth hold the egg, moving it toward the throat. The egg slowly enters the | 2 inches 1} (6cm, mouth until it i : J is completely inside. SIZE COMPARISON The egg is two to four times wider than the snake's body. separate when the skin The interlocking scales ; A | is stretched. l The snake starts to swallow the egg in successive motions. The jaw opens wider and wider, and the skin on the The egg is tough throat becomes distended. and does not break * until it reaches the |= 4 bony spines. 3 2 y The throat oe he S returns to its ee = . normal position. ——— nl — ——eP ; * ee ee , et a ae ae : ts p Vs FS OVS VS 41 se eee é + 7 J oa -# = Z ™"? “ THE TIME IT TAKES TO SWALLOW AN EGG - 2D } The egg reaches the esophageal teeth, which puncture the eggshell; the head and neck muscles then A valve blocks the passage of eggshell fragments. 4 OE en uy te seteceterrst > * mer et Le hi i ae ’ ,- + & : «+ a et 2 to 4 times THE EGG CAN BE THIS MUCH WIDER THAN THE SNAKE'S MOUTH. The snake drags its throat along the ground and arches its spine. Then it raises its head and expels the eggshell by a series of muscle /, contractions. Dasypeltis scabra Habitat Southern Africa Lifestyle Nocturnal Reproduction Egg-laying It opens its mouth wide x and expels the shell, which - is rolled into a thin cylinder. x 1 hour Muetact ae. Dasypeltis i Z 3 The name of the genus of egg-eating snakes. Dasypeltis scabra is The food is processed in the digestive usually gray or brown with darker marks below its back. It has . tract until the large bulge below the teeth in its upper jaw, and only three to seven small, rudimentary head disappears and the animal returns teeth in the back of its jaw. Its teeth are no obstacle to ingesting to its normal shape. It forces the enormous eggs. eggshell back into its mouth. MUSIC IN MARRAKESH 82-83 88-89 di 84-85 90-91 REPTILES AND DINOSAURS 83 82 HUMANS AND REPTILES nh Heroes and Villains ince time immemorial, reptiles have been the subjects of SIVA Known in India as the god of destruction, Siva is depicted holding a snake around his neck. The engraving of a snake biting its tail to form a circle was the emblem of the so-called seal of Solomon that was used by theosophical societies. In Buddhism, the DRAGON snake represents natural tendencies toward aggression. i In classical mythology, However, in medicine, it has long been associated with myths and legends. They have also earned their own the dragon is an ancient Greek symbol, the “rod of Asclepius,” which space in religious texts, where they are depicted as gods associated with the _—_=hada snake coiled around it. Asclepius was the Greco- ideas of guardianship Roman god of healing. and protection. or lesser beings. They may symbolize the incarnation of evil in some cases or divinity in others. The snake and the crocodile, RAINBOW among others, have taken on lives of their own; they play an » E SNAKE active role in the stories of many peoples and have been BiB Snakes hold a special Teaco wine y p p + eg meaning for the Australian body fe snakeis assigned unique, culturally specific meanings. Aborigines and have been depicted in myth both as the wind god and as the protector of people. invoked in China and Japan to drive away bad spirits. SNAKES are what Medusa had on her DRAGON head instead of hair. Image found in the Thian Hock Keng Temple in Singapore. In Eastern cultures, the dragon is a mythical animal and can symbolize good as well as evil. MEDUSA | a , Legend says that those The toad, as a symbol in Christianity, appears to be : * Po NES >, ; , 5 —— who looked into the directly related to deadly sins such as greed, lust, aE | ww, . ‘ : _” eyes of Medusa would and gluttony. In Egypt, crocodiles were venerated, _ and valuable jewels were given in their honor. The , vw 4 : batleg to stone for snake is also mentioned in sacred Hebrew texts. eternity. \ FIERCE cal Aztec serpent from the 15th century, housed in the British Museum S Batt a 7 » 4 , : ‘ g . : (= IS TIED TO A SNAKE IN EVE —_ Bi : a a » CHRISTIAN THEOLOGY. The snake is . 2 associated with trickery and treason in QUETZALCOATL SEBEK CROCODILE the Old Testament. It is the Nahuatl name for the was a god worshipped by the There is evidence that, in the 5th is the snake that Feathered Serpent. In the ancient Egyptians. He had the century BC, the Egyptians raised incited Eve to Aztec pantheon, Quetzalcéatl body of a human being and the crocodiles as pets. A crocodile - enter into sin in was the god of day, the creator head of a crocodile, and he was lived in a tank in the temple of the Garden of of maize, the god of religious considered to be the creator of Sebek and was pampered with ) Eden by ceremonies, and the defender the Nile. It is said that he the finest of foods. convincing her to of priests. emerged from the waters of / 4 \ ‘ ty . wih ” eat forbidden fruit. chaos during the creation of / ie ; — ] J ; the world. j i] , q MUMMIFIED i] { When this crocodile | died, it was embalmed _ \ and placed in a ‘. sarcophagus surrounded 4 : 4 by its own hoard of . Because they can be found virtually everywhere, treasures. : reptiles have managed to infiltrate myths all over ; the world. They were venerated by the Inca and Aztec cultures in the Americas and were the object of legends in every corner of Asia. In China and Japan, the dragon with a snake's body represented earthly power, knowledge, and strength and was the bestower of health and good luck. 84 HUMANS AND REPTILES — = — a = — -_ —— = c Enchanted snakes | obras, as well as vipers and boas (to a lesser degree), are the object of the fascinating performances of snake charmers. In Asia—especially India—snake charmers carry out a very dramatic performance that has been repeated since ancient times. Snake charming has since spread all the way to the Mediterranean coast of Africa. The technique of enchanting snakes requires a knowledge of their weaknesses. For example, it is the movement of the flute, not its actual sound, to which they respond. . A FAMILY TRADITION The practice of snake charming is passed from fathers to sons. In Bangladesh, charmers even form their own A Historical Practice Z + S Revered since antiquity, the / _ Sar a oe i i se ~ pare fat Loss * aS > aie = —r D BY HUMAN ACTIVITIES a! ee : a . al l TINCTION. és a eee. us of this species \ Bre since 1994) it:remains at se Hn 33 extinction. ee ie, ah 2 92 GLOSSARY Adaptation Trait of an organism's structure, physiology, or behavior that enables it to live in its environment. Alkaline Substances that increase the number of hydroxide ions (OH’) in a solution; having a pH greater than 7; basic; opposite of acidic. Amino Acid Organic molecule containing nitrogen in the form of ammonia (NH2°) and a carboxyl group (COOH’) joined to the same carbon atom. They form the building blocks of protein molecules. Amphibian Group of animals that today includes frogs, toads, salamanders, and limbless caecilians. Ancestor Parent, grandparent, or more remote forebear that transmits certain genetic characteristics to its descendants. Antidote Substance that neutralizes the action of a specific poison. Antipoisonous Serum Specially prepared substance used to neutralize toxins from the bite of a specific snake in persons who show signs of poisoning. Aorta Main artery in blood circulation systems. It sends blood to other tissues of the body. Biped Animal that stands upright, walks, or runs using only the two hind limbs. Carbon-14 Radioactive carbon isotope whose concentration can help determine the age of fossils. Carboniferous Geological period during the Paleozoic Era, which took place between 360 and 251 million years ago. Carnivore Animal that obtains its nutrients and energy by eating flesh. Carrion Eater Animal that eats the flesh of a dead animal. Cellular Membrane Flexible lipid envelope covering all living cells. It contains cytoplasm and regulates the interchange of water and gases with the environment. Cerebellum A section of the brain in vertebrates located above the brain stem and behind and below the cerebrum. It coordinates muscular activity and maintains balance. Chelonia Collective term for land and sea turtles. Chordate Animal that belongs to the phylum Chordata; any animal having a spinal cord, whether throughout its development or only in certain stages. Animals that are not chordates are called invertebrates. Chromosome Structure that carries the genes and, in eukaryotic cells, is composed of filaments of chromatin that contract during mitosis and meiosis. Class Taxonomic group above order and below phylum. For example, the class Reptilia, within the phylum Chordata, contains orders such as Squamata and suborders such as Sauria. Cloaca Exit chamber of the digestive tract of reptiles and birds. In some species, it also functions as the site of the reproductive and excretory systems. Cold-blooded Organism whose body temperature is mainly controlled by an external heat source because it has little capacity to generate its own heat through its metabolism. Connective Tissue Tissue that joins, supports, and protects the other three types of tissues: epithelial, muscular, and nervous. It contains a network composed of many fibers surrounding the cells. Coprolite Fossilized animal excrement. Cytoplasm Fluid within the cell membrane. Dental Battery Set of teeth joined together to form a cutting and grinding surface. Dermis Internal layer of skin, located under the epidermis. Dewlap Fold of skin hanging below the chin and extending to the chest in some lizards and other tetrapods. It can be unfolded in territorial battles to intimidate or to display certain moods. DNA Deoxyribonucleic acid. Double-helix shaped molecule that contains encoded genetic information. Duvernoy's Glands System possessed by some snakes for injecting venom. They are a pair of modified salivary glands, one on either side of the head. Efferent Nerve or blood vessel that flows from a central point toward peripheral tissues or organs. Egg Fertilized ovule that develops into a new individual. It usually also refers to the entire structure that covers and protects the fertilized ovule. Embryo The first stage of development of a multicellular animal or plant. Estivation State of extreme lethargy or inactivity caused by prolonged periods of drought or excessive heat. Evolution Changes in the gene pool of a population caused by processes such as mutation, natural selection, and genetic drift. Family Taxonomic category lower than order and higher than genus. The family Viperidae, for example, groups together the vipers. Fertilization The joining of a female sex cell with a male sex cell to form a diploid zygote. Fossil Remains of various types of ancient life-forms, both plants and animals, in a rocky substrate. They are found in the geological strata of the Earth's surface. Fossilization Process by which a deceased organism becomes a fossil over thousands of years. Gastrolith Stone found in the stomachs of certain herbivorous dinosaurs that helped them crush and digest food. Gene Unit of information in a chromosome; sequence of nucleotides in the DNA molecule that carries out a specific function. Genetic Drift Change in the frequency of alleles, the result of random processes. Genus Taxonomic category that includes species. Gills Respiratory organs of aquatic animals. Often an extension of fine tissues from the outer surface of the body or, in vertebrates, from part of the digestive tract. Gland Group of epithelial cells that produce secretions, organized inside a covering membrane to form an organ whose function is to synthesize and excrete molecules that the organ itself does not use. Gonads Glands that produce reproductive sex cells. REPTILES AND DINOSAURS 93 Gondwana Ancient southern supercontinent that broke up 180 million years ago to form Africa, South America, Australia, Antarctica, and India. Gregarious Animal whose typical behavior, as a species, is conducive to living in groups. Herbivore Animal that feeds on grass or other plants. Inflammation Nonspecific defensive reaction of the body to the invasion of a foreign substance or organism, frequently accompanied by the accumulation of pus and an increase in the temperature of the affected area. Jacobson's Organ Organ on the upper part of the palate that takes in substances captured by a reptile's tongue and analyzes them to determine various characteristics of the object they come from. Also called the vomeronasal organ. Lability Fragility of an organ; sensitivity to potentially destructive agents. Lamarck, Jean-Baptiste French naturalist (1744-1829). He was the first to propose a theory to explain the changes in living beings. Laurasia Ancient northern supercontinent formed of North America, Europe, and Asia, excluding India. Lipids Group of water-insoluble substances, including fats, oils, waxes, steroids, glycolipids, phospholipids, and carotenes. 94 GLOSSARY REPTILES AND DINOSAURS 95 Mammals Vertebrate animals whose females have mammary glands, which secrete substances that serve as food for their young. Mass Extinction Brief geological interval in which the extinction rate is greatly increased, affecting a large number of species and causing a considerable reduction of biodiversity. Metabolism The sum of all the physical and chemical transformations that occur within a cell or organism. Mimicry A superficial similarity in shape, color, or behavior on the part of certain organisms (mimetics) to others (models) or to objects in the environment for the purpose of hiding, seeking protection, or some other benefit. Mitosis Nuclear cell division, in which two daughter nuclei are formed that are identical to the parent nucleus. Molars Group of teeth that crush food within the mouth. Molecular Clock Marker used to estimate the evolutionary distance between two species. It is evaluated by comparing the gradual accumulation of amino acids between the proteins of those species. Nucleic Acid Molecule carrying the genetic information of a cell. Omnivore Animal that feeds on animal and plant species Opisthoglyph Group of snakes with fangs located in the back of the upper jaw and smaller teeth in front. The fangs can be smooth or have a groove on the surface that enables secretions to flow into the wound they produced. Order Taxonomic category below class and above suborder and family. For example, snakes and saurian reptiles belong to the order Squamata. Ovary Organ that produces eggs (female sex cells). Oviparous Animal that reproduces by laying eggs. Ovoviviparous Animal that reproduces by forming eggs that are carried, with soft shells, inside the female until they hatch. They may hatch inside the mother and come out as if they had been born live or be expelled from the egg pouch, breaking its membrane in order to hatch. Ovum A female haploid reproductive cell. It contains half as many chromosomes as the parent cell. Parasite Organism that lives at the expense of another and typically obtains nutrients that have already been processed by the host. Parthenogenesis Form of asexual reproduction in certain species, such as the gecko, in which the females produce young (all or mostly females) without the intervention of a male. Pheromones Chemical substances secreted by the reproductive glands of certain animals in order to attract individuals of the opposite sex. Photoperiod Relative length of night and day that enables organisms to measure the change of seasons and that influences their behavior and physiology. Phylogeny Evolutionary history of any taxonomic group. Usually represented as a branching tree. Piscivore Animal that eats only fish. Plastron Lower part of the shell of a turtle or tortoise. Predator Animal that captures and eats other animals as prey. Protein Macromolecule composed of one or more chains of amino acids. They define the physical characteristics of an organism and, when acting as enzymes, regulate chemical reactions. Proteroglyph System of fangs in cobras, mambas, coral snakes, and sea snakes; or the name referring to the group that contains these types of snakes. The fangs are located in the front of the upper jaw and are hollow or have a surface groove for carrying venom. They are relatively short and are fixed in an extended position. Protractile Describes a type of reptilian tongue that can be voluntarily hurled outward in an extremely rapid, precise movement. Reabsorption Process in which substances that are filtered or secreted by the kidneys and which are necessary for maintaining the organism's internal equilibrium are reincorporated into the plasma. Reflex Simple action of the nervous system that involves a sensory neuron, often one or more interneurons, and one or more motor neurons. Sensory Receptors Cells, tissues, or organs that detect internal or external stimuli. Sexual Reproduction Reproduction based on the fertilization of a female sex cell by a male sex cell, resulting in the production of descendants different from either parent. Shedding Sloughing off or change of skin, a process that happens naturally in many reptiles. Smooth Muscle Non-striated muscle that covers the walls of the hollow organs and arteries and is controlled involuntarily. Solenoglyph System of long, hollow fangs in some snakes or the name of the group that refers to snakes possessing this characteristic. The fangs are the only teeth in the upper jaw, and they pivot so that they lie flat along the roof of the mouth when the mouth is closed. They inject venom deep into the tissues of prey. Species Biological concept of a group of organisms that can or do interbreed in the wild and are reproductively isolated from other similar groups. This biological concept should be distinguished from the concept of a species as a category and as a taxon. Sperm Cell Mature male sex cell, which is typically mobile and smaller than the female sex cell. Spinal Cord Part of the central nervous system of vertebrates, surrounded by the spinal column. Striated Muscle Muscle tissue with a striped appearance that shows the arrangement of the contracting elements. Includes the voluntary skeletal muscle and the cardiac muscle. Thalamus Part of the prosencephalon of vertebrates located behind and below the cerebrum. It is the main connection center between the brain stem and the upper cerebral regions. Thermoregulation Ability of reptiles to change their body temperature by moving from a warm place to a cooler one or vice versa. Tissue Group of identical cells that carry out a common function. Trophic Level The position of a species in the food web or food chain. Uric Acid Water-insoluble nitrogenated waste product; the main component of the excrement of reptiles and insects. Vertebrates Animals with a spinal column that provides a structural axis and develops around the notochord, completely replacing it in most species. Viviparous Animal species whose females do not lay eggs and whose young are born live. Warm-blooded Organism whose main heat source is internal and is produced largely through oxidative metabolism. Zoonosis Illness transmitted by animals to humans. 96 INDEX Africa chameleons, 46, 54-55 Nile crocodile: See Nile crocodile red spitting cobra, 76 snake charming, 84 South America separation, 23 Stegosaurus fossils, 21 Suchomimus, 24 Age of Reptiles: See Mesozoic Era Alberti, Friedrich August von, 10 alligator, 56, 57 American alligator, 32 Chinese alligator, 91 white alligator, 61 See also black caiman; crocodile Allosauridae, 26 Alps: See Swiss Alps Amazon tree boa, 72 American alligator, 32 amniotic egg, 5, 42 anaconda, reproduction, 42 anapsid, skull, 35 Andaman cobra, 76 Andes mountain range, formation, 23 Appalachian mountain range, formation, 22 Archaeopteryx (bird), 17 Archelon, 34 Archosaur, 12 Argentina Eoraptor fossils, 12 Gigantosaurus fossils, 26, 27 Herrerasaurus fossils, 13 Argentinosaurus, 9 Argentinosaurus huinculensis, 24 Aruba, conservation program, 90 Aruba Island rattlesnake, 90 Asclepius, 83 Asia cobras, 75, 76, 77 Kuhl's flying gecko, 52 serpent mask, 4 snake charming, 84-85 Asian cobra, 75, 76 asteroid, mass extinction hypotheses, 29 Atlantic Ocean formation, 17 turtle capture rates, 88 Australia aborigine beliefs, 82 marsupials, 17 rainbow snake, 82 spotted python, 70 thorny devil, 44-45 Australian Aborigine, mythology, 82 autotomic tail, 46, 52 Aztec mythology, 82 bacteria, Komodo dragon saliva, 49 Bahamas, habitat loss, 91 bait fishing, 88, 89 Bangladesh, snake charming, 85 Barosaurus, 8 bipedalism, 14 black and white cobra, 75 black caiman, 32, 60-61 black-necked cobra, 75 blind snake, 71 blood circulation: See circulatory system boa constrictor, 33, 70, 72-73, 75 body temperature regulation, 33 See also anaconda body temperature regulation: See ectothermic regulation box turtle, yellow-margined, 87 Brachiosaurus, 8, 19 Brazil, habitat loss, 90 Buddhism, snake representation, 83 Bulgardagh viper, extinction risk, 90 caiman, 57, 60 black caimans, 32, 60-61 nictitating membrane, 32 See also crocodile Camarasaurus, 9, 18, 19 camouflage, 46 Canary Islands, lizard protection program, 91 Cape Dwarf chameleon, 91 carapace (shell), turtles, 43, 64, 65 Carboniferous period, first reptiles, 32 carnivore Komodo dragons, 49 largest carnivorous dinosaur, 26 reptiles, 41 Carolini, Rubén, 26 Caudipteryx, 9, 24, 25 Central American river turtle, 33 Ceratosauria, 9 Chaco tortoise, 67 chameleon, 46, 54-55 extinction risk, 91 chelonian (turtle), 33 Chicxulub crater (Mexico), 28, 29 China alligator reintroduction, 91 Caudipteryx, 24 dragon representation, 82, 83 Chinese alligator, extinction risk, 91 Chinese cobra, 76 Chinese soft-shelled turtle, 64 Christianity, symbolism, 82, 83 circulatory system, reptiles, 38 coal, formation, 16 cobra, 76-77 movement pattern, 71 snake charmers, 84-85 venom system, 75 Coleophysis, 8, 12 coloration, 30, 36, 54-55 colubrid (snake), skull, 75 common iguana, 46-47 conifer, Triassic Period, 10 conservation, 90-91 turtles, 88 See also endangered species Cope, Edward D., 9 coral snake, 39 Corythosaurus, 9, 24, 25 Costa Rica, conservation practices, 88 Cretaceous Period dinosaur dominance, 24 dinosaur species, 9, 24-25 extinction: See K-T extinction fauna, 23 flora, 22 forests, 22 mass extinction: See K-T extinction mountain formations, 22 turtles, 34 crocodile, 32, 56-57 Egyptian mythology, 82, 83 food sources, 41, 44 internal organs, 38-39 Mesozoic Era development, 12 movement, 57 Nile crocodile, 38-39, 57, 58-59 posture, 8 sea crocodile, 35 See also alligator Dasypeltis (snake family), 78, 79 day gecko, 46 defensive claw, Plateosaurus, 14 desert snake, movement pattern, 71 Devonian Period, extinction, 28 diapsid, skull, 35 dinosaur, 6-29 extinction: See K-T extinction fossil records, 8 posture, 8 primitive species, 12 winged dinosaurs, 11, 12 See also specific types, for example Brachiosaurus dragon Asian representation, 82, 83 European mythology, 4 Dryosaurus, 8, 18 Duvernoy's gland, 75 ectothermic regulation (body temperature), 31, 33 lizards, 47 snakes, 70 Ecuador, Galapagos Islands: See Galapagos Islands egg, amniotic, 5, 42 egg-eating snake: See oophagous (egg-eating) snake egg tooth, 42 Egypt, crocodile worship, 82, 83 elapid (snake), skull, 75 embryonic membrane, Solomon Island skink, 32 emerald tree boa, 70-71 endangered species black caiman: See black caiman fishing, 88-89 giant tortoises, 67 habitat loss, 90-91 Komodo dragons, 48-49 marine turtles, 86-87 See also extinction England, Megalosaurus fossils, 18 Eoraptor, 8 fossils, 12 Europe dragon myths, 4 Stegosaurus fossils, 21 Swiss Alps: See Swiss Alps extended posture, 8 extinction REPTILES AND DINOSAURS 97 giant tortoise subspecies, 66 See also dinosaur; endangered species; mass extinction eye geckos, 53 nictitating membrane, 32 pineal eye, 36 eyelash viper, 41 fauna Cretaceous Period, 23 Jurassic Period, 17 Triassic Period, 10 feeding habit caimans, 60 chameleons, 55 Komodo dragons, 49 marine iguanas, 51 Nile crocodiles, 59 snakes, 72-73, 78-79 fer-de-lance, 43, 90 fern, Triassic Period, 10 Fiji crested iguana, 90-91 fishing, species endangerment, 88-89 flight geckos, 52 reptiles, 23 flora Cretaceous Period, 22 Jurassic Period, 16 Triassic Period, 10 flute, snake charming, 84-85 food chain, reptile role, 40 forest, Cretaceous Period, 22 fossil Camarasaurus, 18, 19 Dryosaurus, 18 early dinosaur, 9 Gigantosaurus carolinii, 26-27 herbivorous dinosaurs, 12 98 INDEX REPTILES AND DINOSAURS 99 Herrerasaurus, 13 living fossil, 36 mass extinction evidence, 8 Megalosaurus, 18, 19 primitive reptile, 35 pterodactyl, 6-7 Stegosaurus, 20-21 G Gaboon viper, 71 Galapagos Islands, 50 giant tortoise, 66-67, 87 marine iguana, 50-51 Garden of Eden, 82 gavial (crocodile), 56 See also crocodile gecko, 46, 52-53 giant tortoise, 66-67, 87 Gigantosaurus, 9 Gigantosaurus carolinii, 26-27 Gila monster, 47 Gobi Desert, 25 golden fer-de-lance, 90 golden spitting cobra, 76 Gondwana, 8, 11 Laurasia separation, 17 Greco-Roman god, medicine, 83 green anaconda, 42 green iguana, 40 green sea turtle, 68, 87 green tree python, 62-63 greenhouse effect, Permian Period, 11 Gulf of Mexico, formation, 17 gymnosperm, Triassic Period, 10 H habitat loss, 90-91 hawksbill turtle, 65, 68, 87 Heloderma (lizard), 47 herbivore, 40 Argentinosaurus, 24 Brachiosaurus, 18 saurischians, 9, 14 Stegosaurus, 20 Hermann's tortoise, 33, 65 Herrerasaurus, 8, 13 Hierro giant lizard, 91 hook, fishing, 89 human interaction, 80-91 fishing, 88-89 habitat loss, 90-91 snake charmers, 81, 84-85 it Ichthyosaur, 12 iguana body temperature regulation, 31, 47 characteristics, 30-31 common iguana, 46-47 extinction risk, 91 Fiji crested iguana, 90-91 green iguana, 40 marine iguana, 50-51 Turks and Caicos rock iguana, 91 Inca, reptile mythology, 82 India Siva, 83 snake charming, 84-85 Stegosaurus fossils, 21 Indonesia, Komodo dragons, 45, 48-49 J Jacobson's organ, 49, 74 Jamaica racer, 91 Japan, dragon representation, 82 Jura mountain range (Swiss Alps), 16 Jurassic Period, 16-17 Camarasaurus fossils, 18, 19 dinosaur fossils, 18, 19 dinosaur species, 8-9, 18 earth division, 17 fauna, 17 Megalosaurus, 8, 18, 19 Metryorhynchus, 35 sea crocodile, 35 species diversification, 18 Stegosaurus, 9, 20-21 K K-T extinction, 7, 28 volcanic eruption hypothesis, 29 Kasyapa (mythical figure), 4 Kemp's ridley (marine turtle), 68 king cobra, 77 movement pattern, 71 Komodo dragon, 45, 48-49 Kuhl's flying gecko, 52 L Laurasia, 8, 11 Gondwana separation, 17 leaf-tailed gecko, 52-53 leatherback sea turtle, 68-69, 87 leopard tortoise, 42-43 living fossil, tuataras, 36-37 lizard, 46-47 dispersion, 45 extinction risk, 91 Komodo dragon, 45, 48-49 number of species, 32 posture, 8 protection program, 91 loggerhead sea turtle, 41, 86 Lonesome George (giant tortoise), 66-67 long-line fishing, 89 M Madagascar, chameleon, 46 marine iguana, 40, 50-51 marine turtle (sea turtle), 33, 65, 68-69 endangered species, 86-87, 88-89 loggerhead sea turtle, 41, 86 reproduction, 42 Marrakesh, snake charmer, 81 Marsh, Othniel C., 9, 20 marsupial, first, 17 mask, serpent, 4 mass extinction Cretaceous Period, 22 K-T extinction, 7, 22, 28-29 meteorite impact hypothesis, 28 Permian Period, 11, 28 Triassic Period, 10 medicine, staff of Asclepius, 83 Medusa, 82 Megalosaurus, 8, 18, 19 Meller's chameleon, 46 Mesoamerican river turtle, 87 Mesozoic Era, 10, 18 reptile development, 12, 32 meteoritic impact hypothesis, mass extinctions, 28 Metryorhynchus (sea crocodile), 35 Mexico Chicxulub crater, 28, 29 Heloderma lizards, 47 Meyer, Hermann von, 14 Mongolia, Gobi Desert, 25 monocled cobra, 77 mountain Andes mountain range, 23 Appalachian mountain range, 22 Cretaceous Period, 22, 23 Rocky Mountain range, 23 Swiss Alps, 16, 22, 23 movement pattern, snakes, 71 Mussaurus, 8, 12 N naga rassa mask, 4 New Zealand, tuataras, 36-37 nictitating membrane (eye), 32 Nile crocodile, 38-39, 57, 58-59 See also crocodile North America Camarasaurus fossils, 18, 19 See also Mexico; United States of America O Old Testament, snake symbolism, 82 olive ridley (turtle): See Pacific ridley omnivore, 41 Archelon, 34 scutosaurs, 34-35 oophagous (egg-eating) snake, 78-79 opisthoglyph (fang), 75 Ornithischian, 9, 17 Ornithodira, 11 oviparous reproduction, 32, 42-43 ovoviviparous reproduction, 32, 43 Owen, Sir Richard, 8, 9 P Pacific ridley (olive ridley turtle), 87 pancake tortoise, 87 Pangea, 10, 11 Plateosaurus engelhardti, 14-15 splitting, 17 Triassic Period, 10 Panthalassa (ancient ocean), 11 panther chameleon, 55 Papua, beliefs, 4 Parasaurolophus, 9 pelvis, saurischians, 9 Permian Period extinction, 11, 28 shield lizard, 34-35 pineal eye, tuataras, 36 Plateosaurus, 8 Plateosaurus engelhardti, 14-15 polyandry, 15 posture, types, 8 predatory behavior Komodo dragons, 49 Nile crocodiles, 59 snakes, 72-73 prehensile tail, 54, 72 Prosauropoda, 9 proteroglyph (fang), 75 pterodactyl, fossil, 6-7 pterosaur, 11, 12 python, 62-63, 70, 72, 75 ()-R Quetzalcéatl, 82 rainbow boa, movement pattern, 71 rainbow snake, 82 rattlesnake, 74 Aruba Island rattlesnake, 90 movement pattern, 71 red spitting cobra, 76 regurgitation, egg-eating snakes, 79 Reig, Osvaldo, 13 reproduction caiman, 60 100 INDEX female system, 42 giant tortoise, 66 marine turtle, 69, 86, 87 Nile crocodile, 59 oviparous reproduction, 32, 42-43 ovoviviparous reproduction, 32, 43 snake, 71 tuatara, 37 viviparous reproduction, 43 reptile, 30-43 adaptability, 32, 34 Age of Reptiles: See Mesozoic Era color, 30 endangered species, 88-89, 90-91 evolution, 32, 34 flying species, 23 food sources, 40 herbivores, 40 internal organs, 38-39 number of species, 39 reproduction, 34, 42-43 respiratory system, 39 skin, 38, 39 species diversity, 5 tongue, 33 See also specific types, for example iguana respiratory system reptile, 39 sea turtle, 69 rhombic egg-eating snake, 78-79 Rinkhal's spitting cobra, 75 Rocky Mountain range, formation, 23 rosy boa, 33 S saliva, Komodo dragons, 49 salt gland, marine iguanas, 51 Sauria, 45 Saurischia (order), 9, 14 Gigantosaurus carolinii, 26-27 Sauropoda, 9, 19 Sauropodomorpha, 9, 14 scale growth, 39 snake identification, 77 Squamata reptiles, 33 tuataras, 37 types, 5 scutosaur, 34-35 sea crocodile, 35 sea turtle: See marine turtle seaweed, food source, 51 Sebek (Egyptian mythology), 82 semi-extended posture, 8 septicemia, Komodo dragon saliva, 49 serpent mask (Asia), 4 serpent sculpture (Aztec), 82 setae, geckos, 53 sexual dimorphism, Plateosaurus, 14 Seychelles, 66 shell (carapace), turtles, 43, 64, 65 shield lizard, 34-35 Singapore, Hock Keng temple, 83 Siva (Indian god), 83 skin, reptiles, 38, 39 skink, 46 Solomon Island skink, 32 skull Brachiosaurus, 19 Giganotosaurus, 26 primitive reptiles, 35 snakes, 72, 74-75 tuataras, 36 snake, 5 blind snake, 71 body temperature regulation, 70 Duvernoy's gland, 75 egg eaters, 78-79 fangs, 75 internal organs, 70-71 Jacobson's organ, 49, 74 metabolism, 40 mouth, 74 number of species, 33 predatory behavior, 72-73 primitive species, 70, 75 religious representation, 82-83 skull anatomy, 74-75 swallowing of prey, 41 thermo-receptive pits, 71 venom system, 75 See also individual types, for example boa constrictor snake charmer, 80-81, 84-85 solenoglyph (fang), 75 Solomon Island skink, 32 South America Amazon tree boa, 72 Andes formation, 23 formation, 23 habitat loss, 91 primitive dinosaurs, 12 spatulae, gecko toes, 53 spinal column, 12, 70 spitting cobra, 76 spotted python, 70 Squamata (order), 33 Sri Lanka, serpent mask, 4 staff of Asclepius, 83 Stegosauridae, 20-21 Stegosaurus, 9, 20-21 Suchomimus, 9, 24, 25 sucker, gecko toes, 53 Suriname, conservation practices, 88 swimming crocodiles, 56 marine iguanas, 51 marine turtles, 69 Swiss Alps, 22, 23 Jura mountain range, 16 synapsid, 12 T tail, 12 autotomic tail, 46, 52 fat storage, 47 lizards, 46 prehensile tail, 54 tuataras, 37 Tanzania, dinosaur fossils, 18 tectonic plate, movement, 22 Tertiary Period, 28 See also K-T extinction Tetanura, 9 Tethys Sea, 11, 17 Therizinosaurus, 9, 25 Theropoda, 9 thorny devil, 44-45 toad, Christian symbol, 82 tortoise Chaco tortoise, 67 endangered species, 87 giant tortoise, 66-67 Hermann's tortoise, 33, 65 leopard tortoise, 42-43 tree boa, 72-73 Trias, rock formation, 10 Triassic Period, 10-11 dinosaur types, 8 Plateosaurus engelhardti, 14-15 Triceratops, 9 tuatara, 36-37 Turkey, viper extinction, 90 Turks and Caicos rock iguana, 91 turtle, 64-65 anatomy, 33 commercial use, 89 endangered species, 87 fresh-water species, 64 great turtle, 34 marine: See marine turtle number of species, 33 shell characteristics, 64, 65 wood turtle, 41 turtle exclusion device (TED), fishing, 88 Tyrannosaurus rex, 9 largest predator status, 27 U United States of America Appalachian mountain range formation, 22 dinosaur fossils, 18 Heloderma lizards, 47 Rocky Mountain range formation, 23 Stegosaurus fossils, 20 uric acid, 34 Vv Velociraptor, 9 viper eyelash viper, 41 habitat loss, 90 identification, 71 skin shedding, 49 viperid (Viperidae), 71, 74 viviparous reproduction, 43 volcanic eruption, mass extinction hypotheses, 29 W-Y winged dinosaur: See pterosaur wood turtle, 41 yellow-margined box turtle, 87 Yucatan Peninsula (Mexico), Chicxulub crater, 29 REPTILES AND DINOSAURS 101 opie! ey REPTILES AND DINOSAURS Britannica Hlustrated Science Library thererorena Britannica About the pagination of this eBook Due to the unique page numbering scheme of this book, the electronic pagination of the eBook does not match the pagination of the printed version. To navigate the text, please use the electronic Table of Contents that appears alongside the eBook or the Search function. For citation purposes, use the page numbers that appear in the text. BIRDS Wy, \ Teter, | \ te - ~ %, ?, i] vert v, 0,9 i > YS = Britannica Illustrated Science Library Britannica [llustrated Science Library © 2008 Editorial Sol 90 All rights reserved. Idea and Concept of This Work: Editorial Sol 90 Project Management: Fabian Cassan Photo Credits: Corbis, ESA, Getty Images, Daisy Gilardini— The Image Bank/Getty Images, Graphic News, NASA, National Geographic, Science Photo Library Illustrators: Guido Arroyo, Pablo Aschei, Gustavo J. Caironi, Hernan Cajfiellas, Leonardo César, José Luis Corsetti, Vanina Farias, Joana Garrido, Celina Hilbert, Isidro Lopez, Diego Martin, Jorge Martinez, Marco Menco, Ala de Mosca, Diego Mourelos, Eduardo Pérez, Javier Pérez, Ariel Piroyansky, Ariel Roldan, Marcel Socias, Néstor Taylor, Trebol Animation, Juan Venegas, Coralia Vignau, 3DN, 3DOM studio Composition and Pre-press Services: Editorial Sol 90 Translation Services and Index: Publication Services, Inc. Portions © 2008 Encyclopzedia Britannica, Inc. Encyclopaedia Britannica, Britannica, and the thistle logo are registered trademarks of Encyclopeedia Britannica, Inc. Britannica Illustrated Science Library Staff Editorial Michael Levy, Executive Editor, Core Editorial John Rafferty, Associate Editor, Earth Sciences William L. Hosch, Associate Editor, Mathematics and Computers Kara Rogers, Associate Editor, Life Sciences Rob Curley, Senior Editor, Science and Technology David Hayes, Special Projects Editor Art and Composition Steven N. Kapusta, Director Carol A. Gaines, Composition Supervisor Christine McCabe, Senior I/lustrator Media Acquisition Kathy Nakamura, Manager Copy Department Sylvia Wallace, Director Julian Ronning, Supervisor Information Management and Retrieval Sheila Vasich, Information Architect Production Control Marilyn L. Barton Manufacturing Kim Gerber, Director Encyclopzedia Britannica, Inc. Jacob E. Safra, Chairman of the Board Jorge Aguilar-Cauz, President Michael Ross, Senior Vice President, Corporate Development Dale H. Hoiberg, Senior Vice President and Editor Marsha Mackenzie, Director of Production International Standard Book Number (set): 978-1-59339-797-5 International Standard Book Number (volume): 978-1-59339-807-1 Britannica Illustrated Science Library: Birds 2008 Printed in China ENC YCL OR AIDIA Britannica www.britannica.com Birds Contents The Lives of Birds Page 40 = =. Sa . rd . : e - ee e ¢ a . . . e ° ‘ ° . i : * , 738 . »* a4? 8 hd ** . “ee? os" 3° “ °*. we . . - “YS : 2” F od Has ’ . 2 ° a 7 * « : *e a Pee. . - * . . ae % e ; a d .° . e by 2’ ° oe Py a * “ee > 7 : 2 : $ . P ° e . ~. e . . bd st Diversity an. ° rg es % *. Py = ‘% a . aa So, -a< Tye? 3 ye ‘ . ° : i . . . ; td . . ° e e « Pe 4 Ne FY . * 2 “ Bs . : ** . . . ° % . 5 : ae Distribution 5 ° 3 ee Bes, 960 2 G6" 2% 5, as ° . es ; : oS ‘ 2 eo * ° te 4 * © .e ° . er te °° mn 3s . e . Z ” ° . . « sm *. ¥ a a * e *3 een e@e : Bes oe’ as ec ae a . o . : oi: *., * ‘ . ! *. “ eo? * , s6% % *& Ne ee A . $e. + 5 Oe % e: : a Z oe : if ew Pe sie . . 78 ry anvite . Pe > . — = s¢ . Page 62 Ricceg & es i 0° » ere e tite *. i _" Seige’ ae : Ps % * . “4% - , 2 : - ” wis : . ee be °> eee ot a oO » ‘f> 0 &: ., ar @ a ae : ae ; re 4 = ¢ ; el SO reve, C0. ° Pe. : “. ots ° %. v8 Pe . ‘ 3 . ar ote 0. &.% "2 n3%- “et ae iS ae . Pa aes _ “ .¢ ¢.¢ 3008 ete es %. Bes . = Gen , ; a ‘+ . % Pas oiler ; é< Se 7 oo: > . a : Ff oo _.¢ - » ‘ *.* @ . oy . . > . oe > Se : " . % ~ ~ %. A Universe of Birds elcome to the world of birds. No VV matter how you approach it, this is a wonderful book not only for its pictures, splendid illustrations, size, and format but also because, as you read it, you will discover secrets about these inhabitants of the Earth, which, according to the history of evolution, came into being before humans. The text is written in a direct, easy-to-understand style. Most birds have a much-envied ability that has inspired poems and all types of experiments: they can fly. This enables them to see the Earth from afar, with its seas, mountains, rivers, cities, and other features. It has been estimated that more than 200 million birds migrate each year, all over the planet. Many of WHITE HERON (Fgretta alba) A species easy to distinguish in the proximity of rivers, lakes, and lagoons them fly thousands of miles, crossing desolate deserts and windy seas to arrive in Africa or Antarctica. Some find their way using the sun, the moon, and the stars; others follow their parents or use the course of rivers or mountain chains as references. In general, smaller birds migrating across continents stop several times to get food. It is surprising how fast they travel, in spite of these stops: it has been calculated that some small species cover almost 2,500 miles (4,000 km) in five or six days. Several studies have shown that carrier pigeons and white- headed sparrows, for example, can travel more than 600 miles (1,000 km) per day. Some ducks, such as the blue-winged teal, complete their trip from Canada to central Mexico in about 35 days, making several stops to feed along the way. whether hiding in trees, flying over high mountaintops, or nesting in Antarctica or on tall buildings. Perhaps the reason for such amazement is their behavior, which continues to be a mystery to human beings, as well as the differences among them. It is believed that there are approximately 9,700 living bird species in the world—more species than in any other vertebrate group except for fish. Once they reach adulthood, birds' weight varies from a RB irds never cease to amaze us, mere 0.06 ounce (1.6 g), in the case of hummingbirds, to as much as 330 pounds (150 kg) for African ostriches. Even though most birds fly, there are some—such as kiwis, rheas, and ostriches—that run quickly on the ground. Some birds, being perfectly adapted to aquatic life, live in oceans, rivers, and lakes. The shape of their feet and bills varies according to the environment in which they live. Some aquatic species have bills modified to filter small water particles, whereas birds of prey have strong bent bills to hold down and tear apart their prey. What is the diet of birds based on? Because of their great diversity and wide distribution, their diets differ greatly. In general, birds eat a bit of everything, although insects are the most important element of their diet. They eat fruit, seeds, nectar, pollen, leaves, carrion, and other vertebrates. Most birds lay their eggs in nests. Worthy of mention is the protective attitude that both males and females have toward their young. Adult birds care for their chicks, warn and protect them against the danger of predators, and guide them to safe places where they can live and feed. We invite you to investigate up close the world of these fascinating beings that are able to run, climb, swim, dive, and cross the skies. @ The Nature of Birds oS i any scientists maintain that birds descended from dinosaurs because fossils of dinosaur specimens with feathers have been found. As a group, birds have exceptional eyesight—they have the largest eyes in relation to the size of their bodies. In addition, they have very light bones, which are suitable for flight. Just like their bills, birds' feet have also changed in accordance with the functions and particular needs of each species. For instance, walking birds—like other vertebrate groups—display a marked BEYOND FEATHERS THE SENSES ORIGIN DIFFERENT TYPES OF BILLS SKELETON AND MUSCULATURE EXPOSED LEGS INTERNAL ORGANS tendency toward having a reduced number of toes; ostriches, for example, have only two. Some birds of prey, such as eagles, have feet that are veritable hooks. 8 THE NAT URE OF BIRDS BIRDS 9 Beyond Feathers efining what a bird is brings to mind an animal covered with feathers that has a toothless bill and anterior extremities morphed into wings. Other distinguishing characteristics are that they are warm-blooded and have pneumatic bones—bones filled with air chambers instead of marrow. Birds have very efficient circulatory and respiratory systems and great neuromuscular and sensory coordination. SENSES CREST Great visual acuteness and well-developed hearing NOSTRILS BILL Originates in the epidermis. It is hard and resistant, with a consistency similar to that of horns. Tt grows continuously, like nails and feathers. Variety and Uniformity We can find birds in every type of environment: aquatic, and in tropical aerial, and terrestrial, in polar regions zones. Their adaptation to the environment has been very successful. Nevertheless, birds are one of the groups that display the fewest differences among their members. WINE-THROATED HUMMINGBIRD , WEIGHT OF THE SMALLEST BIRD AFRICAN OSTRICH WEIGHT OF THE LARGEST BIRD A small bird that lives in North. America and on the Iberian Peninsula PENGUIN THE TEMPERATURE IN ANTARCTICA TAIL in this area. PENGUINS CAN ENDURE The last vertebrae merge into the pygostyle. The tail feathers develop C <7 iy , GI, Uy Lill eT; / INT Uy) hie: SY) 4 ZZ WY} Lit | CHEST Adaptation to Flying Some crucial anatomic and physiological 7 characteristics explain birds’ ability to fly. Their bodies and feathers reduce friction with the COVERTS air and improve lift. Their strong muscles, light bones, air sacs, and closed double circulatory system also play a role in their ability to fly. FEATHERS WINGS O Unique. No other living propel, maintain, and animal has them. They guide birds during are appealing for their flight. They have structure, variety, and modified bones and constant renewal. characteristic plumage. IS THEIR BODY TEMPERATURE. THORAX FLIGHT FEATHERS ABDOMEN The high demands of flying are compensated by a high metabolic rate. Birds extract as many nutrients from food as they can. UNDERTAIL COVERTS TARSUS FEET Birds walk on their toes. In general, they have three toes pointing forward and one pointing backward. Balance in movement. A bird's internal architecture contributes to its stability. The location of its feet and wings helps to —J concentrate its weight close to its center of gravity. IDENTIFICATION There are differences in plumage and skin that make it possible to identify birds. The bill, because of its variations, also helps to establish bird groups. eS Eye Ring —=—_$$—S Postocular Patch | Eye Line S> Crown Face with Contrasting Colors SONGBIRDS Passeriformes, or passerines, form the most numerous group among birds; they are characterized by a well-developed syrinx that enables them to emit harmonious songs and trills and by a soft plumage of varied colors. Because of their brain development, it is believed that passerines were the most recent birds to come into existence. AF 10 THE NATURE OF BIRDS THREE TOES WITH TALONS The hand has three extended fingers, each of which is equipped with a strong curved talon. Talons for climbing trees () cy g e he evolution of birds is a debated theme in science. The most widespread theory states that birds descend from theropods, dinosaurs that walked on two legs. Fossils of dinosaur specimens with feathers have been found, but Archaeopteryx, a primitive bird that lived 150 million years ago, is the oldest relative known. Completely covered with feathers, it had a pair of wings that enabled it to fly. However, it retained many dinosaur traits. Its wrist joint was more flexible than that of modern birds, a trait it shared with dinosaurs. Archaeopteryx ——— litho bette of JAWBONES WITH SPINE ee Order Sa rischi TEETH Unlike modern Movable. The cervical lived in the Jurassic Period, eee birds, it did not have a vertebrae have a concave 150 million years ago. Suborder Theropods horn bill. There was a joint like that of the theropods, Diet Carnivore tight row of sharp teeth nota saddle-shaped one like : on each jawbone. that of birds. ¥ Comparison Length 10 inches (25 cm) : to a Human Height 8 to 12 inches (20-30 cm) Weight 18 ounces (500 g) From Reptile to Bird FURCULA SKULL (Merged Similar to that of Collarbone) present-day reptiles Shaped like a and early theropods. boomerang, The arrangement of as in many SAURIAN PELVIS the brain and ears theropods Hip and femur of the VERTEBRATE TAIL reveals that it had a archosaurian, not Composed of 21 or 22 pieces. great sense of avian, type Modern birds have tail vertebrae THEROPODAN REPTILE PIGEON orientation and that that are fused together into a From the Triassic Period From the Jurassic Period Alive Today it was able to UNMERGED single bone called the pygostyle. perform complicated RIBS 23 METATARSUS maneuvers. ee Presence of ribs in In modern birds, the abdomen the tarsus and (gastralia), typical of metatarsus are i reptiles and fused into the Fossils dinosaurs tarsometatarsus. Several fossil samples were found between 1861 and 1993. The first one, found in Bavaria, During flight, it functioned as a rudder. On the : ground, it Germany, was very provided balance important because its for walking discovery coincided with the publication of On the Origin of Species by Charles Darwin, at a time when the search TOES The foot is functionally tridactyl. Its first toe (hallux), which usually points FROM ARMS for evolutionary “missing TO WINGS Tts movements backward and typically does not touch links” fascinated It had a greater range of were limited by its Birds have the ground, is opposable, like that of scientists. The original is motion in the upper limbs shoulder joint, which greater mobility modern birds (it can move in a direction located in the British than primitive dinosaurs. was placed forward. than Archaeopteryx perpendicular to toes II, III, and IV). Museum. Another fossil, which includes the head, is in ARCHAEOPTERYX . VELOCIRAPTOR PIGEON ARCHAEOPTERYX LITHOGRAPHICA the Berlin Museum. 150 million years ago 99 to 65 million years ago modern Graphic Reconstruction BIRDS 13 12 THE NATURE OF BIRDS CARPOMETACARPUS It is formed by the fusion of the hand bones. CERVICAL VERTEBRAE Their number varies according to the type of bird. They make the neck flexible. Skeleton and Musculature oth lightweight and resistant, the skeleton of birds underwent important changes in order to adapt to flight. Some bones, like those of the skull and wings, fused to become lighter. Birds have fewer bones than other vertebrates. Because their bones are hollow, containing internal air chambers, the total weight of their bones is less than that of their feathers. Birds' spines tend to be very flexible in the cervical region and rigid near the rib cage, where a large, curved frontal bone called the sternum attaches. The sternum features a large keel, to which the pectoral muscles attach. These large, strong muscles are used for flapping the wings. In contrast, running birds, such as ostriches, have more developed muscles in their legs. CORACOIDS MERUS RADIUS CARPAL BONES ULNA 4A jy Ve a Flapping Wings dj SKULL a KULL Pp 9g 9g —_—- i Light because of the Flying demands an enormous amount of energy and fusing of bones, the skull strength. Consequently, the muscles responsible for does not have teeth, a bony flapping the wings become very large, easily comprising jaw, or grinding muscles. 15 percent of the weight of a flying bird. Two pairs of pectorals, in which one muscle of the pair is bigger than UPPER LOWER the other, work to raise and lower the wings. They HUMMINGBIRD MANDIBLE OF BILL MANDIBLE OF BILL function symmetrically and in opposition to each other: Because of its adaptation to In some species, it is It is flexible, allowing when one contracts, the other relaxes. Their placement stationary flight, its pectoral flexible s bidcte open their within the thoracic cavity corresponds roughly to the muscles can account for 40 i mouths: wide bird's center of gravity. The motion of the wings also percent of its total weight. requires strong tendons. DOWNWARD FLAP Right Wing Tendon Left Wing Humerus 7 LZ Z ES 2 i. GZ Sa | / SS S e The larger = oS The descending pectorals flapping of the contract. wings takes The place. Keel Pm : smaller pectorals relax. IF The pectoral muscles relax. The smaller pectorals contract and draw the wings inward. FURCULA (COLLARBONE) Known as the wishbone, it is unique to birds and results from the fusion of the collarbones. KNEE STERNUM Hyperdeveloped in flying birds, the sternum's long keel facilitates the attachment of the pectorals. FEMUR Wings Without a doubt, wings are the greatest adaptation of birds. Strong tendons travel through the wings and merge into the hand bones, where the feathers are attached. PELVIS Biceps Extensor oo PYGOSTYLE The tail vertebrae = @ are merged; the ~~ = tail feathers are . anchored to the Pneumatic tail. Bones Many of a bird's bones are TARSOMETATARSUS pneumatic—that is, they are aoe aah full of air instead of bone marrow. Some bones even Pe See have prolongations of air meee = pe Wane bacteaea ~_ sacs. The bones may look TOES : — c_ ' ZA >» fragile at first glance, but Tendons iE WY ZN it assumes a crouching é fae incre’ Tae strength that tie the y/ : = position with its legs —— A\ 9 muscles to Iliotibialis —Y~— 7 ed bent. This causes the comes from a network Triceps Flexor Digitorum the wing FEET Lateralis -_Le fede IRE foak to of internal Superficialis Birds have four toes, tighten, which pulls its trabeculae SYMN EG at AR, Manat LIES just like their ancestors, toes closed and locks its (spongy bone . THE COLOR OF THE FLESH» the reptiles. feroneus \ ____ feet in place. This J structures), depends on the blood circulation Longus —A\ Gastrocnemius tendon-locking (( \ which resemble in the muscles: the more circulation, }\ mechanism keeps birds | the trusses of a the redder the flesh. Flying birds J y from falling off branches | gcKeg metal bridge. have red flesh, whereas nonflying birds, SUPPORT while they sleep. Toes Tendons such as chickens, have white flesh. POSITION 14 THE NATURE OF BIRDS BIRDS 15 Internal Organs TONGUE Respiratory System Usually short, narrow, triangular, and not very I) Birds have the most efficient respiratory system of any vertebrate (Lf because of the great effort that flying demands. It has two small, almost muscular. ; ; H ie H rigid lungs that are assisted by nine air sacs distributed throughout the body. irds In flight can consume oxygen at a rate that a well trained athlete ESOPHAGUS The air sacs work as bellows, but they do not carry out gas exchange. Oxygen would not be able to withstand for even a few minutes. Because of enters the bloodstream through the parabronchi, which are much like the alveoli this oxygen consumption, all their organs have had to adapt. The oe Sie tbalaed e ae pest ana ae air lungs of birds, though smaller than those of mammals of similar size, are LUNG flows in one direction through the lungs, and blood in the lung capillaries flows Ai H H H SYRINX Almost rigid in the opposite direction, birds can make use of all the air they inhale, much like much more efficient. Their lungs have several air sacs that both increase biden oe Pere ae EEE TRE Eh carat. the efficiency of their respiratory systems and make them lighter. A possible for its structure special feature of the digestive system is a crop in the esophagus, binds tp sang) THE AIR SACS CROP where food is stored for digestion or for feeding the young. A bird's heart can be four times larger in relation to its body size than a human's in relation to its body size. e Lung Abdominal Air Sac.« = 6 @ Cervical Air Sac Interclavicular Air Sac SECTION OF Posterior Digestive System STOMACH bb sau Thoracic Air Sac e reticulum FF) Birds have no teeth. They therefore ingest food without chewing, LIVER formed by the Anterior Le and their stomachs break it down. The stomach is divided into two parabronchi Thoracic Air Sac GIZZARD = facilitates the exchange of gases with the blood. parts: the glandular (or proventriculus) part, which secretes acids, and the muscular (or gizzard) part, whose muscular walls grind up what is eaten. In general, the process is very fast because flying requires a lot of energy, and the bird has to replenish that energy quickly. The digestive PANCREAS system ends at the cloaca, which is an excretory orifice shared with the 20%, SMALL urinary system. Birds absorb almost all the water they drink. INTESTINE FOOD ITINERARY Esophagus STERNUM € Ai »> Ai ir ir STORAGE HEART Some birds have a crop, which Anterior air Empty enables them to store food ( Crop sacs with anterior air and digest it later. This way 1 inhaled air 2 sacs they decrease their exposure : Posterior air . Em pty to predators. ; A HUMMINGBIRD'S HEART BEATS INHALATION sacs with EXHALATION posterior Proventriculus The eos fill new air biel fill up ail’sacs by up with air. with air. PRODUCTION times The proventriculus secretes Gizzard ‘ the gastric juices that initiate a minute. digestion. CLOACA Rufous Hummingbird Right Jugular | { Left Superior A Highly Complex Heart BREAKDOWN ‘Selasphorus rufus, Vena Cava ne ‘ P : In the gizzard, a strong and ( Lf fus) Right Carotid | IR Similar to that of reptiles, but having a heart with four muscular pouch, food is ; , a chambers instead of three, the circulatory system distributes broken down with the help a wri — (_, nutrients and oxygen throughout the body according to the body's of siNeriaaei eel F Pancreas : y needs. The heart's size and rate vary, depending on the bird's sand. The stones and san ow A = ight and activities. I |, bigger birds h ller and play the role of teeth. : < weight and activities. In general, bigger birds have smaller an WATER ABSORPTION occurs in the small intestine. Birds normally get water from the food they ingest. EXCRETION The cloaca expels feces mixed with urine coming from the excretory system. TYPES OF GIZZARD Granivorous Birds 3 he S ‘4 have thick muscle QW ee Carnivorous Birds =I walls and strong fe — have thin muscle = mucous membranes Pama (or internal skin) to — break down seeds. \ Small Intestine Intestinal Ceca Oviduct = walls because digestion takes place in the proventriculus. Right \ Atrium Right Ventricle Left Atrium Left Ventricle Aorta slower hearts. For example, the heart of a seagull on the ground beats 130 times a minute; in flight, it beats 625 times a minute. A hummingbird's heart can beat 700 times a minute. THE HEART'S ASYMMETRY The left side of the heart is more developed, because it pumps blood to the whole body. The right side pumps blood only to the lungs. The Blood » Relaxed _ Contracted enters through Ventricles Ventricles the right and left They open the The blood enters the arteries. atrioventricular valves. bloodstream. 16 THE NATURE OF BIRDS BIRDS 17 The muscles around the eye change its shape, alter the lens, and create greater visual acuity: birds typically have a 20-fold magnification (and sometimes, as in the case of some diving birds, a 60-fold magnification), in comparison with humans. Their sensitivity to light is also remarkable, with some species being able to recognize light spectra invisible to the human eye. Vision [Fis the most developed sense in birds e e | I S e S [Lei because some flight maneuvers, as well as the recognition of food from afar, depend on it. Birds have relatively large eyes. n birds, the sense organs are concentrated Eee gee. they a= el ean they are deep because the lens and the cornea— on the head, except for the sense of witty $ supported bye i el slope i i ony plates—project beyond the eye socket. Bir ee A tah ai en Seats Tn hunting birds, the eyes are almost tubular. l Vi i yes WI . — the size of their bodies. This enables them to ee ; see distant objects with considerable precision. : SSA, SS a SCLERA Their field of vision is very broad, over 300 7 : —-— OF aamnocutan.-~ CHOROID degrees, but in general they have little binocular ¥ — » MUSCLES vision. The ear—a simple orifice, but very refined in < SS ee ris nocturnal hunters—helps them notice sounds a FOVEA inaudible to humans, which facilitates the detection = ss CORNEA of prey while flying. The senses of touch and smell, a Ror — PUPIL on the other hand, are important only to some birds, \ PN - IRIS and the sense of taste is almost nonexistent. @ ¢ PECTEN E — SCLEROTIC RING TheEar eee eS ee is ae 2 visual Field of he) **e, Fi Birds’ ears are simpler than those of y =. FIELD OF VISION se = THE HUMAN FIELD Le mammals: a bird's ear has no outer A Z ] a OF VISION portion, and in some cases it is covered y / / \ " The eyes—when located on the with rigid feathers. A notable part of 4 \ me Pi Sidgamegee ond, ais the-case 3 The eyes, located at the front, ¢ the ear is the columella—a bone that 7 =< with most birds—create a broad sooth move together, covering the (* birds share with reptiles. The ear is field of vision: more than 300 ae Te 0 ne RR | nonetheless well developed, and birds degrees. Each eye covers different aoe beings cannot move their eyes have very acute hearing; whereas areas, focusing on the same object o independently from each other, human beings can detect just one , € only when looking ahead through : they have only binocular vision. note, birds can detect many. The ear is <® a narrow binocular field of vision. essential to a bird's balance, a key s “ ~ factor in flying. It is also believed that ™~ in certain species the ear works as a barometer, indicating altitude. COMPARISON OF BINOCULAR FIELDS OF VISION UPPER TWER ~~ Binocular vision is essential for measuring allow the brain to create a third one in depth, AUDITORY —— AUDITORY ~ distances without making mistakes. The brain or in three dimensions. Hunting birds, for which Located at different heights on the head, the ears cause the sense of hearing to occur witha slight delay. In nocturnal hunters, such as owls, this asymmetry allows for the triangulation of sounds and the tracking of prey with a minimal margin of error. CAVITY, << caVITY > \ Touch, Taste, and Smell 4 The sense of touch is well developed in the bill and (Le _tongue of many birds, especially in those birds that use them to find food, such as shore birds and woodpeckers. Usually the tongue is narrow, with few taste buds, but they are sufficient to distinguish among salty, sweet, bitter, and acidic tastes. The sense of smell is not very developed: although the cavity is broad, the olfactory epithelium is reduced. In some birds, such as kiwis and scavengers (condors, for example), the olfactory epithelium is more developed. » processes the images that each eye generates “separately as if they were a single small differences between the two images BINOCULAR ‘FIELD OF OF VISION image. The HUNTING BIRDS' FIELD OF VISION Frontal eyes reduce the total field of vision but allow for a wide field of binocular vision. MONOCULAR FIELD the correct perception of distance is a life-and- death matter, tend to have eyes located toward the front, with a wide field of binocular vision. BINOCULAR FIELD OF VISION MONOCULAR FIELD OF VISION EXTRAOCULAR MUSCLES In contrast, birds with lateral eyes calculate distance by moving their heads, but they record a larger total field of visionto avoid becoming prey. Owls are thé,birds greatest binocular vision—up\to 70 \ ith thes. reo NONHUNTING BIRDS' FIELD OF VISION The lateral eyes open the field of vision to as much as 360 degrees but reduce the binocular field. \ . 18 THE NATURE OF BIRDS Different Types of Bills nails—that grows down. In the ce UPPER JAW LOWER JAW PREMAXILLA LOWER MAXILLARY BONE Heterogeneous Shapes > Bills have a wide array of names and shapes, but they are usually classified according to their length in relation to the head (short or long); to the curvature of its axis (pointing upward or downward); to its width; to its general shape (conical, stiletto-shaped, or spatula-shaped); and to the presence or absence of accessory pieces, such as grooves, horny plates, or false serrated teeth. The heron fishes in shallow COMPOSITION AND STRUCTURE The jaws are covered with a hard horn layer called the ramphotheca, which is the external, visible portion. This determines the ‘Vey bill's color. ~ BIRDS 19 Parts of the Bill | Each jaw has characteristic elements. In the of upper one, from the back to the front, are the nostrils (or nasal cavities), the culmen (or maxillary cover), and the tip, which, in carnivorous birds, contains the tomial, or killing, tooth. In the lower jaw is the gonys, or cover. The variations found in each part of the bill are conditioned by the bill's function. DENTARY With their long, thick bills, they can reach fruit located on branches that are too thin for the bird to sit on. Their bills are also used to break the peels and seeds of fruits. Like granivores in general, CULMEN Hardness Its long, stout bill is extraordinarily hard. Despite its appearance, the bill is very light, and birds can use it adeptly to seize and to open the fruits they eat. TIP Flamingos have thin, threadlike structures inside their bills whose function is similar to that of the baleen of whales. They feed on microorganisms through filtration. Tt uses the false (tomial) waters and has a long, solid, it has a strong, conical bill, tooth at the tip to detach —

that forms a web and increases the surface of the foot that is in contact with the water. 4 THE FOOT I Claws, Scales, and Spurs These striking foot structures play a role in finding food, movement, protection, and defense, among other things. The claws can be long and sharp, in the case of birds of prey, or short and round, in the case of rd walking birds. Owls have a comblike claw that they use to groom their plumage. Their scales, inherited from reptiles, help protect their feet. In some cases, they help the birds to move through water. Many birds, such as chickens, pheasants, and crested screamers (a South American waterbird), 4 Y f have a spur, which they use as a defensive or offensive : A weapon. BALD EAGLE (Talons) Very long, curved, pointed claws. They envelop the body of the prey and pierce it. FEET DESIGNED \ \ FOR CLIMBING Found on parrots, “ woodpeckers, and cuckoos. The hallux and the fourth toe are pointed backward. This arrangement TIBIA provides the The tibia merges birds with more strength into tarsal bones and for climbing tree trunks. forms the tibiotarsus. Tt has a slightly FEET DESIGNED developed fibula FOR PERCHING on its lateral face. Found on hummingbirds, kingfishers, ovenbirds, and nightjars. They have small feet, with GREAT CRESTED GREBE (Lobed Toes) In some swimming the second, birds, the toes look third, and like oars. They have fourth toes BIRD LEG HUMAN LEG agora wide joined together. This border. makes it possible for them to stand still. Thigh THE FOOT II The distal tarsal bones merge into the metatarsal bone and create tarsometatarsal bones. FEET DESIGNED FOR RUNNING Found on bustards, curlews, and rheas. They have long legs with short toes. The hallux and the fourth toe are very small, which decreases Tibia Tarsus and Metatarsus contact with the ground ANKLE Metatarsus while running. Also known asa — false knee because it looks Internal/External Structure Toes 1 (hallux) and 2 have three phalanges, toe 3 ~ has four, and toe 4 has five. " Adaptation to Treeso— The common waxbill perches and sleeps on trec = branches without expending much energy. The weight of the body alone causes its toes to close tightly around the branch. like a knee that flexes backward. Birds walk on their toes, ours, is higher up and works like a SCOTS DUMPY. Inreality, it is which form the first portion hip. It is located close to the body, |. ---— AOOSTER (Spurs TRICOLORED HERON the ankle. of their feet. The second portion is and-ithelps'tomairitain balance... @ Its feet have long, thin toes that FE SE formed by the-tarsometatarsus. Its The thigh bon@'also stabilizes the an top part is connected to the tibia, bod ddin the on e it hrough a joint similar to that of our _ skeleton. All the movements « “ ad ankle. That is why the leg flexes these bones are controlled by Oquimbo in Chile. backward. The knee, equivalent to tendons and muscles. The Art of Flying irds move in the air the same way a glider does, that is, by making the most of air currents to gain height and speed while moving. The SS = ~~ ~ SSs SST > SSE : shape of the wings varies according to the needs of each bird group. Some cover considerable distances and thus have long, narrow wings, whereas others have short, rounded ADAPTATIONS TO RENEW IS TO LIVE FEATHERS GLIDING WINGS TO FLY FLAPPING FLIGHT TAIL TYPES SPEED RECORDS ————> = OO = ~ : ~ = . ~~ —— = ——— =, ee, . -_ Feathers are usually renewed once a year, and this process is as vital to birds as feeding. wings that allow them to make short flights from branch to branch. Birds also have shiny, colorful feathers that males frequently use both to attract females and to hide from enemies. THE ART OF FLYING daptations here are three main theories to explain why birds developed the ability to fly. The evidence that supports each of them tells a story of adaptations to an aerial world in which the fight for food and survival is key. One reasonable theory argues that birds descended from an extinct line of biped reptiles that fed on plants and used to jump from branch to branch to flee. From Reptile to Bird It is known that several evolutionary lineages from both reptiles and birds did not survive the evolutionary process, and that the lineage that truly links these two animal groups has not yet been found. However, some theories state that the change from reptile to bird took place through a long process of adaptation. There are two arguments and a variant: the arboreal theory, which posits an air-ground flight model; the cursory (or running) theory, which focuses on the need for stability when running; and a variant, related to parental care, which posits that dinosaurs started to fly as a way of keeping their eggs safe. This theory, the most accepted for a long time, states that flight was an adaptation to the environment in which certain herbivorous climbing reptiles lived. At first, dinosaurs developed a kind of parachute to protect them if they missed a branch when jumping, and later it became a way to move from tree to tree. Finally, flight evolved to involve the flapping of wings, which allowed the animal to cover greater distances. CLIMBING The evolution of dinosaurs yielded climbing species. This variant proposes that reptiles started to climb trees to prevent their young from becoming prey. Gliding removed the need to climb out of the trees. JUMPING GLIDING Flight made it possible to move from tree to tree without using the ground. Adapted to aérial life, they jumped from branch to branch. FLAPPING Gliding was improved to cover distances and increase agility. Supported by good fossil evidence, the running theory argues that birds descended from certain bipedal dinosaurs that were fast runners. Their arms opened, evolving into wings, to stabilize them as they jumped. Progression from this development to flying was simply a matter of time. RUNNING Their two legs enabled them to run at high speeds. JUMPING As they jumped high, their wings stabilized them, allowing them ji to catch prey. : Iq 5. FLAPPING. After developing the ability to jump and glide, these reptiles started flapping to cover greater distances. he.tipsof the wi 1 propel flight; the arms support the bird;‘and:the shoulders enable the flapping movements. The bones are extended and reinforced; then they merge. Highly Mobile Shoulder Emergence of the Tarsometatarsus The shoulders can perform a wider range of movements. The fingers merge. Rotary Shoulder Three Fingers Dinosaur arm with Z pincer claw and limited movement Limited Shoulder ~ Five Fingers Short Arm It evolved from an arm with a talon into a limb, without a talon, that was adapted for flight. The causes of this change are not yet clear to scientists. However, fossil records show how bones merged until they reached their present forms. BIRDS Flying Squirrel Flying In flying animals, from primitive pterodactyls to bats, Gecko wings have always been a flap of skin. A tear creates serious problems because it takes time to heal, and the wing may be misshapen afterward. Feathers are a unique evolutionary advantage. Their versatility, strength, individual nature, and ease of replacement make them an ideal adaptation to flight for vertebrates. FEATHERS Today found only on birds, feathers are scales partitioned into three smaller sections. They form a light, uniform, resistant network that covers the whole body. MODIFIED SCALES They became divided into smaller sections. LARGE SCALES Several dinosaur species had them. The development of feathers brought great advantages to birds because feathers enabled them to fly. Feathers evolved from scales, and they are made of the same material. Feathers keep the body's temperature constant and are lighter than scales. SCALES Resistant, they covered the body of dinosaurs. In its maneuvers, this great hunter displays the entire evolution of flight. 26 THE ART OF FLYING Feathers eathers are the feature that distinguishes birds from all other animals. They make birds strikingly colorful, protect them against cold and intense heat, enable them to move easily through the air and water, and hide them from enemies. Feathers are also one of the reasons why human beings have domesticated, caught, and hunted birds. A bird's set of feathers is called its plumage, and its color is essential for reproductive success. @ Structure Ih The structure of feathers has two (Leff parts: a shaft and a blade. The shaft is called the rachis, and the part connected to the bird's skin is called the calamus. The movement of a feather is generated in the rachis. The blade is composed of barbs that branch into barbules. The feather's blade, in which the barbules have a series of barbicels, or hooklets, at the tip, is called a vane. The interlocking hooklets in the vane create a network that adds rigidity and resistance to the feather. It also defines the characteristic aerodynamic shape of feathers and helps make the feather waterproof. When feathers wear out, birds have the ability to replace them with new ones. INFERIOR UMBILICUS The orifice at the base of the calamus, into which the dermic papilla penetrates. New feathers receive nourishment through it. Types of Feathers © There are three main types of Lal feathers, classified according to placement: those closest to the body are down, or underlying feathers; those at the top are contour feathers; and those on the wings and tail are flight feathers, which are often referred to as remiges (on the wings) and rectrices (on the tail). A swelling, or papilla, 1 develops in the bird's skin. In the papilla, special (4 ‘ yy skin cells form a follicle. ¢ A tube that will 3 extend from its base and become a feather grows in the follicle. HOLLOW INTERIOR INNER PULP OF THE SHAFT CALAMUS It provides the necessary nutrients for feathers to grow. Nerve endings that stimulate the feather's movement are found at its base. This allows the bird a secondary rachis, the to detect changes in its surroundings. hyporachis. It contains some loose DOWN y These light and silky feathers» “AU protect the bird against the ~~ sat = cold. They have a short rachis, or none at all. Their barbs are long, and their 2 barbules lack hooklets. In ak Kas general, down is the first type > ts of feather that birds develop =“ ALK 3 when they hatch. a \ SUPERIOR UMBILICUS barbs. Some feathers have RACHIS A feather's main shaft, similar to a hollow rod BARBS are slim, straight ramifications that grow perpendicular to the rachis. CONTOUR Also called covert feathers, they are short and rounded. They are more rigid than down feathers. Because they cover the body, wings, and tail, they give birds their shape as they fly. EDGE The edge presents an excellent aerodynamic profile for flying. WHAT IS KERATIN? Keratin is a protein that forms part of the outermost layer of a bird's skin, just as it does in other vertebrate animal groups. Keratin is the main component of feathers, hair, and scales. Its distinct resistance helps keep the hooklets woven together in the vane. This allows birds' feathers to maintain their shape in spite of the pressure exerted by the air during flight. VANE, OR BLADE Its outer portion contains a great number of barbicels. »® PREENING THE PLUMAGE Birds need to preen their feathers with their bills not only to keep them clean and free of parasites but also to keep them lubricated, which helps birds resist inclement weather. Birds touch their uropygial, or preen, glands with their bills. Then they distribute the oil and wax this gland produces all over their plumage. This task is a matter of survival. SELF-CLEANING WITH ANTS Some birds, such as certain tanagers, catch ants with their bills and grind them. They then oil their feathers with the ground-up ants. It is believed that the acid juices from the squashed ants work as a repellent against lice and other external parasites. SPECIAL FEATHERS Vibrissae are special feathers formed by only one filament. Sometimes they have loose barbs at the base that perform a tactile function. They are located at the Vibrissae base of bills or nostrils or around the eyes. They are very thin and are usually blended with contour feathers. PTERYLAE AND APTERIA At first glance, a bird's body is covered with feathers. However, feathers do not grow all over the body but rather in particular areas called pterylae. This is where the papillae, which create new feathers, are found. The shape and placement of pterylae vary according to species. Pterylae are surrounded by naked areas, called apteria, in which feathers do not grow. Penguins are the only birds whose bodies are completely covered with feathers. This characteristic makes it possible for them to live in cold regions. POWDER DOWN Filoplumes birds. They grow constantly and break off at the tip into small waxy scales. This “powder” is preened into the plumage to provide protection. IMPERIAL HERON Powder down keeps its plumage waterproof. This special type of feather can be found on some aquatic BIRDS 27 TRAILING EDGE NOTCH The turbulence during flight is reduced by this notch, found near the tip of the wing. DUST BATH Birds such as pheasants, partridges, ostriches, pigeons, and sparrows perform dust baths to control the amount of grease on their feathers. 28 THE ART OF FLYING BIRDS 29 re Wing Size and Gsm Loading The wingspan is the distance between the tips of the wings. Together with width, it determines the surface area, which is an essential WANDERING measurement for bird flight. Not ALBATROSS Just any wing can support any bird. There is a close SSH relationship between the (15m) animal's size (measured by weight) and the surface area of its wings. This relationship is called wing loading, and it is crucial in understanding the flight of certain species. Albatrosses, with large wings, ARGENTAVIS have low wing loading, which MAGNIFICENS makes them great gliders, (extinct) whereas hummingbirds have to flap their small wings intensely to support their own weight. The smaller the wing loading, the more a bird can glide; the bigger, the faster a bird can fly. Wings to Fly ings are highly modified arms that, through their unique structure and shape, enable most birds to fly. There are many types of wings; they vary by species. For instance, penguins, which are flightless, use their wings for the specialized task of swimming. Among all wings that have existed in the animal kingdom, those of birds are the best for flying. Their wings are light and durable, and in some cases their shape and effectiveness can be modified during flight. To understand the relationship between wings and a bird's weight, the concept of wing loading, which helps explain the type of flight for each species, is useful. — Wings in the Animal Kingdom Wings have always been modified arms, from the first models on pterosaurs to those on modern birds. Wings have evolved, beginning with the adaptation of bones. Non-avian wings have a membranous surface composed of flexible skin. They extend from the bones of the hand and body usually down to the legs, depending on the species. Avian wings, on the other hand, are based on a very different principle: PTERODACTYLS still had talons, and only one finger extended their wings. BATS Four fingers extend the membrane, and the thumb remained as a talon. SECONDARIES Thei b the arm and hand form a complex of BIRDS ‘ Pareegesatly skin, bone, and muscle, with a wing pie tusecmingets depending on the form the tip of the surface consisting of feathers. Furthermore, the avian wing allows for important changes in form, depending on the bird's adaptation to the environment. species. They complete the surface. wing where the rectrices, or primary feathers, are attached. TERTIARIES Together with the secondaries, they create the wing's surface. Types of Wings According to the environment in which they live and the type of flight they perform, birds have different wing shapes that allow them to save energy and to perform efficiently during flight. The wing shape also depends on the bird's size. Consequently, the number of primary and secondary feathers changes depending on the needs of a given species. LOOSE FEATHERS Sometimes barbicels are missing, and feathers on the wing come apart, creating a loose and ruffled appearance. STERNUM There are many Short feathers are OR KEEL secondary feathers. located all over the wing. The external primary feathers are longer. The outermost primary feathers are shorter than the central ones. They are wide at the base, with separate feather tips. PRIMARY FEATHERS Flying birds have from nine to 12 primary feathers. Running birds may have up to 16. Flightless Wings Among these, penguins' wings are an extreme case of adaptation: designed for rowing underwater, they work as fins. On running birds, wings' FUNCTION first and foremost function is to provide balance as the The wings of bird runs. These wings are also related to courtship, as ostriches carry FAST WING ELLIPTICAL WINGS WINGS FOR SOARING WINGS FOR SOARING WINGS FOR SWIMMING birds show off their ornamental feathers during mating GUL LAS Remiges are large and tight to Functional for mixed flights, ABOVE LAND ABOVE THE OCEAN In adapting to swimming, the season by opening their wings or flapping them. Wings i ear allow for flapping; the surface is they are very maneuverable. Wide, they are used to fly atlow — Their great length and small width —_ feathers of penguins became are also very efficient at controlling temperature, as Pun aten eer reduced to prevent excessive Many birds have them. speeds. The separate remiges make them ideal for gliding short, and they serve primarily Rirdsucethontactonetonenilatatheirbedies GaietilD. Fichon! prevent turbulence when gliding. against the wind, as flying requires. _as insulation. Courtship Display > The tail feathers of the female black grouse are straight, whereas those of the male have a half-moon shape. They usually keep the feathers closed and near the ground, but during the courtship displays they spread them out and show them off completely. To finish the show, the male runs back and forth in front of the female. ver the course of evolution, birds' tail vertebrae fused into a pygostyle, and in their place feathers of different sizes and colors emerged. These feathers have multiple uses: they can control aerial maneuvers during flight, work as brakes during landing, and make noise. Males also use them during courtship to dazzle and win over females. Usually the tail is formed by rectrices that vary in number, length, and rigidity depending on the species. OPEN CLOSED RECTRICES Tail feathers can wear out and fray becatise of friction during flight or by brushing against vegetation. hy - | UNDERTAIL COVERTS Feathers that cover the lower part of * Black Grouse rectrices, protecting them against the wear Lyrurus tetrix and tear caused by air friction The male is recognized by its bluish black plumage and the red caruncle over its eyes. The Key to 7 How It Works J ~ ~~, yp The tail can perform a variety of functions because of the movement and shape of the Fan of Rectrices y = feathers. The powerful muscles in the pygostyle 4 , a : prepare the plumage for courtship displays and for flight, i... ae “ f . Feil ei Bess . On flying birds, it is light and FORKED TAIL N y ROUNDED , ‘ & \ ie e a 4 Been aging On trees, arr * aerodynamic. On tree-climbing Found on swallows i ( TAIL - Workcas rudders ia aaanniitic: birds, such as woodpeckers, the and frigate birds. Found on some — plumage is rigid, which allows them to The external songbirds. The ye OPEN CLOSED OPEN use it as a support (pointed tail). The feathers are very } \ central feathers : Soe coverts of male peacocks are more long and look like are only slightly so = developed than their rectrices so that Scissors. | longer than the orn, the peacock can show them off. rN external ones. | . Y . GRADUATED TAIL ( | } MARGINATED SQUARE TAIL TAIL ee I rie: I Se — ~ Found on trogons \ ) Found on blue jays. N Found on The plumage ie body leans le spread-out tail ~ i Y ils. The tail spreads out, and backward, and the feathers, together with an © + va i ae tail Lge -_ \ { y i, a ae, : the main axis of tail closes. The intense flapping of the : Mee eS Se UNS UST y Silgiitly ( Re the body is legs prepare to wings, make it possible for has a layered shape. shorter than the even-sized positioned parallel grab the branch. the bird to slow down and a x external ones. feathers. to the ground. prepare its body to land. e BIRDS 33 32 THE ART OF FLYING Order of Massive replacement of chest, back, and To Renew Is to Live \ SON X head coverts occurs from the center Replacement a . % outward. This change coincides with the EF“ Many species start substitution of the seventh remex ge é fe ; (singular of remiges). he periodic renewal of plumage is called molting. It is the Ll molting, a process ALULAE ), “SS aps er ee a Rectrices are replaced from the center outward. This happens simultaneously with the loss of tertiary remiges. triggered by hormones, in a ‘ specific order. Molting starts : with remiges and wing ~ ty coverts, continues with i in replacement of worn-out, older feathers with new ones that are in better condition. In a bird's life cycle, molting is as important an event as migrating or caring for young. The beginning of this phenomenon is determined by environmental factors that trigger a series of hormonal stimuli in birds: they start to eat more and to decrease their other activities. This, in turn, causes them to gain weight through an accumulation of fat that will serve as the source of energy for developing new plumage. e rectrices, and finishes with body coverts. This gradual process keeps the body temperature stable. NEW FEATHER e) The wing coverts are _ replaced. Renewal starts in the first primary remiges and spreads outward. In the olan OLD FEATHER secondary remiges, it Renewing the plumage 6 l % spreads in two directions. is important because it Replacement occurs when Plumage Molting IR The main function of molting is to replace worn-out [Ll plumage. It also helps the bird adapt its appearance to the seasons and to different stages in life. The renewal can be partial or total. Some feathers are replaced before helps keep the bird's ; the new remiges are three the spring, when the task is to attract a partner for oa ees Li elt raced pct fourths developed. reproductive purposes. In the fall, before birds have to stable. It also keeps the HERE WURICIC IG 1s eeniC start caring for their young, the renewal is complete. On most birds, molting takes place in each pteryla, following a determined order. Penguins, however, renew all their feathers at the same time, within two to six weeks. feathers in place while the bird moves about, and it helps the bird to go Pkg by DEVELOPING predators. PLUMAGE BLOOD VESSELS nourish the feathers during their development. DERMAL PAPILLAE A feather develops in each of them. SEASONAL CHANGE In the high mountains, snow transforms the landscape during winter. During this time, nonmigratory birds exchange their summer plumage for a winter one. This change helps them to protect themselves from predators. DEVELOPING BARBS FOLLICLE EPIDERMIS m,, NEW FEATHER BEING FORMED PTARMIGAN The feather, now lifeless, assumes its characteristic blade shape. A residue of dermal and epidermal cells ' . \ EPIDERMAL at the base of the follicle " @ COLLAR forms an area that will SUMMER WIN ~S The rapid growth of the Malpighian allow for replacement when PLUMAGE PLUMAGE a layer starts to develop the new the feather wears out. The feathers The new, @ The papilla grows and becomes layered. The feather. The rachis, barbs, and barbules have deep unpigmented outermost layer is covered with keratin, which become keratinized. The vessels that pigmentation. feathers make it A papilla develops from skin cells. The protects the underlying Malpighian layer (nucleus bring nutrients are reabsorbed, and the da S This helps birds possible for In the epidermal papilla, the epidermal cells multiply faster than the of the papilla). A group of dermal cells brings connection with the dermic layer is blend in with the ptarmigans to blend formation of the new feather causes dermal ones and form a collar-shaped nutrients through the blood vessels that travel closed. Finally the protective vane IS THE AVERAGE AMOUNT OF TIME THAT vegetation. with the white snow. the detachment of the worn-out one. depression called the follicle. along the new feather. breaks, and the feather unfurls. IT TAKES FOR A NEW FEATHER TO FORM. 34 THE ART OF FLYING Gliding nvolves using air currents to fly and save energy when traveling long distances. There are two types of gliders, terrestrial birds and marine birds, each of which is adapted to different atmospheric phenomena. Terrestrial birds rise on thermals (rising air currents). Marine birds make use of oceanic surface winds. Once the birds gain altitude, they glide off in straight paths. They slowly lose altitude until encountering another thermal that will lift them. Both terrestrial and marine gliders have wings of considerable size. e TYPES OF GLIDING FEATHERS Terrestrial Glider A large wing surface allows it to make the most of rising air currents at moderate speed. Marine Glider Thin and long wings allow it to make the most of the constant surface winds and offer less resistance to forward movement. Takeoff I Usually, a powerful jump followed by the vertical flapping of the wings [Le is enough to make a bird take flight. As it descends, the tip feathers are stacked on top of each other, forming an airtight surface that helps drive the bird upward. As the bird raises its wings to repeat the movement, the feathers curve and open until the wing reaches its highest point. With a couple of flaps of the wings, the bird is in flight. Bigger birds need a running start on the ground or water in order to take off. Fast and Strong Flapping During the upward movement in ~ wing flapping, the primary _feathers open up, offering less x resistance t tot the air. 10% THE ENERGY SECONDARY SAVED BY A FEATHERS SEAGULL WHILE GLIDING There are many of these because of the wing's length. The wing length of some pelicans may reach 8 feet (240 cm) from tip to tip. MOVING FORWARD PRIMARY FEATHERS There are fewer of these, as they only form the tip. CONTINUOUS AIR WINGLETS Terrestrial gliders usually have separate primary feathers (toward the tip of the wing) that serve to decrease the noise and tension generated there by the passing of air. Modern airplanes copy their design. ws The tip feathers work as airplane winglets. Airplane Winglets are made of one or several pieces. BIRDS 35 Marine Birds FLIGHT PATTERNS Fl Dynamic soaring is performed by birds with long and thin wings, such as Flying in formation is a way for birds in wake. There are two basic patterns: “L” Ll the albatross. These wings are designed to take advantage of horizontal flapping flight to save energy. The leader and “V." The first is used by pelicans, and air currents, which are responsible for the formation of waves in the ocean. The encounters more resistance as it flies, the second is used by geese. result is a flight consisting of a series of loops as the bird is lifted upward when while the others take advantage of its it faces the wind and moved forward when it faces away from the wind. This “L"” FORMATION kind of flight can be performed at any time. a aay awa Leader maa ~ The leader makes the most % effort, as it “parts” the air. - WEAKER Rel > WIND eray, = The Rest of the Formation When the leader gets The other birds make use tired, another bird takes < the turbul Air its position. 10) je turbulence Pro uce by the leader's flapping to ae <== gain height, following along behind. Dynamic soaring o> Bd / allows birds to cover l A of a “v" FORMATION 4 eiae oi long distances in the 0) or ~~ The principle is the same, but lirection they desire. i i direction they desire THE PERCENTACE OF the birds form two lines that STRONGER -~ converge at a point. This is WING FLAPPING THAT th lf ti db WIND 3 to 33 feet (1-10 m) é usual Tormation user Ny is the range in altitude for dynamic soaring. GEESE SPARE THEMSELVES geese, ducks, and herons. Sw a BYE esanibermen nor, SPEED OF DISPLACEMENT depends on the strength of the headwind. THE WING Its particular shape causes lift, with its convex side and less pronounced concave side. ©— PATAGIUM r Elastic and resistant skin covering with feathers. It is the wing's cutting edge, responsible for dividing the airstream. FASTER AIRSTREAM UPPER SIDE Convex. The air covers more distance and accelerates, causing a lower pressure that “sucks” the wing upward. CONSTANT AIRSTREAM LOWER SIDE Concave. The air covers less distance, it does not accelerate, and its pressure does not change. TERRESTRIAL BIRDS Ascent Straight Gliding Descent Ascent ee » When birds find a warm Once the maximum The birds They rise again when They use warm, rising air currents air current, they gain possible height is slowly glide they encounter another generated through convection in height without having to gained, the birds glide downward. warm air current. flap their wings. in straight paths. Thermal: Pie —e ~4 Hot Air 7 a = = ai * Cold Air Seo? g 7 Warm Air Current the atmosphere or through the deflection of air currents against crags or mountains. Then they glide in a straight flight path. This type of flight _is possible only during the day. 36 THE ART OF FLYING Flapping Flight ost flying birds use flapping flight all the time. It consists of moving through the air as if rowing with the wings. With each flap (raising and lowering), the wing both sustains the bird in the air and pushes its body forward. There are different types of flapping flight and different rates of flapping. In general, the larger the bird, the more powerful and less frequent its flapping will be. Because flapping is an activity that consumes much energy, birds have adapted a variety of flight patterns: some, like hummingbirds, always flap their wings, > whereas others alternate flapping with short-term gliding. The wing &b shape also varies according to the bird's needs. Birds that cover long distances have long, narrow wings; those that fly among trees have short, rounded wings. @ THE HEAD Tilted backward to bring it closer to the center of gravity (between the wings) and attain balance ANGLE OF THE WIN the wing's position. It WAVELIKE FLIGHT PATH Ideal for high speeds, it consists of flapping the wings to gain height and then folding them in order to descend along the flight's trajectory. Afterward the bird flaps its Propulsion The bird flaps its wings to ascend. Variable, depending on closes on the downstroke. G wings again, making use of the inertia of its descent to regain height. A variation of this type of flight involves gliding between flaps of the wings. » Ascent Flapping Wings THE TAIL Slightly curved, it works as a rudder during flight and as a brake during landing. THE LEGS remain at rest until landing. They stay very close to the body. THE BILL Projected = forward, its miles aerodynamic per hour shape decreases the bird's air resistance. (50 km/h) THE AVERAGE SPEED OF AN ADULT PELICAN DURING FLIGHT ON A WINDLESS DAY A Specialized Design IR Flapping flight is an activity that requires much [La effort. Therefore, birds must eat large amounts of food. A migrating swallow uses 4 kilocalories (4,000 calories) per 1.6 miles (2.5 km) of flight, whereas a small mammal needs only about 0.025 kilocalorie (25 calories) to travel the same distance. Rest The bird keeps the wings near its body to save energy for short intervals. Folded-up Wings Descent oD Upstroke the remiges separate and form grooves to reduce friction. Support for the bird comes from the patagium, a layer of skin that anchors the feathers and covers the bones. THE CROP Made of elastic skin. It can hold food during flight. WINDMILL FLIGHT: HUMMINGBIRDS Hummingbirds are able to hover in order to suck the nectar out of flowers. In contrast to other birds, hummingbirds' wings are attached only at the shoulders, which provides greater freedom of wing movement, allowing the hummingbird to hold itself in the air during both the upstroke and the downstroke. The hummingbird has to flap its wings up to 4,800 times per minute during directional flight and for hovering. 2 Pe pe tr _— aed 5 le - --2 Ysa er x -’ e Diagram describing the ‘ bf m Lif movements of the tip of the wing during flight The wings flap 80 times per second during normal flying. Courtship Display Certain hummingbird species can flap their wings up to 200 times per second during courtship. STRENGTH To gain height above the ground, the wings flap in big arches in a manner that generally produces a lot of noise. As the wings move upward, WING STROKE The wing acts like an oar as it traps air and pushes the bird forward. The wing has short, sturdy bones; the muscles are very powerful. - ft? Great ' Maneuverability: Hummingbirds are the WY only birds capable of moving backward. BIRDS 37 @ Downstroke As the wings move downward, the remiges are forced together, and the wing moves forward a little for extra support. The wing also bends at the tips to push the bird forward, as if it were rowing. Muscular strength is distributed to the entire wing, but it increases near the tip. The downstroke of the wing provides propulsion. Landing IR requires reducing speed until the bird becomes motionless and [Laff settles. The bird faces the wind and spreads out its tail, wings, and alulae (bastard wings, characterized by their stiffness and growth from the first digit), while lifting up its body and extending its legs forward to increase the surface area in contact with the air. In addition, the bird flaps its wings intensely in the direction opposite to its flight. Everything works like an aerodynamic brake. Some birds—such as the albatross, with its long, narrow wings—tend to have problems slowing down. As a result, they are ungainly when landing on the ground, but on the water they are able to ski on their feet until coming to a stop. Flapping Against the Wind Sliding The feet spread open before landing to provide more resistance and help the bird to slow down. 38 THE ART OF FLYING BIRDS 39 Speed Records RUPPELL'S he world of birds is amazing when expressed in numbers. Most birds oe ae a travel at speeds between 25 and 45 miles per hour (40-70 km/h), but 36,870 feet when diving, peregrine falcons can reach more than 200 miles per hour (11,237 m) . (320 km/h). Many species can reach an altitude of 6,600 feet (2,000 m), In 1973 a Ruppells griffon 15-20 pounds 136 although climbers have seen geese flying over the Himalayas at more than ura a oe 26,000 feet (8,000 m). The fastest swimmer is the Gentoo penguin, which Ivory Coast at this altitude. ich a reaches 20,000 feet (6,000 m). can swim 22.4 miles per hour (36 km/h). Considering its small size, it is surprising that the Selasphorus rufus, or Rufous hummingbird, which is only 4 inches (10 cm) long, carries out an extensive round-trip migration each year 34,5 from northern Alaska to Mexico. Here are some more incredible facts. @ ——79-#t (2.4. m) — 33 Air ALTITUDE > apni tease rn BAR-HEADED GOOSE CHOUGH Flying at high altitudes OF ALTITUDE : 28,000 FEET (8,500 M) 29,030 FEET requires a strengthened according to a pilot who onne climbers reported + scitehe : SPEED P cireulatary-systemi to itnesced asaociciee having seen specimens of A group of climbers make up for the scarcity ie Hebrides Islands geese flying at 28,000 feet on Mt. Everest found 31,5 Most birds fly of oxygen in the air. (8,500 m) over the choughs standing on between 25 and 45 ena Himalayas. the summit. miles per hour (40 miles per and 70 km/h), but hour) _ | the fastest birds can 0 beat the cheetah, the most famous of the pie x fast animals. Qe KM/H) = DRAGONFLY SN od “at The fastest flying os oe >. insect. It reaches we ; >: x ‘i 28,5 3 ] mph STARLING eres 50 km/h). _38 MPH ( ) /~ (60 KM/H) 75 MPH (20 KM/H) "] yl? a * = A PHEASANT STORK - 31 MPH 47 MPH a (50 KM/H) (75 KM/H) ROYAL SWIFT 99 MPH 7 (60 KM/H) am ROYAL EAGLE 81 MPH d Scale Lan cn per hour) Land-Water (130 KM/H) santana nian SPINE TAILED SWIFT ¢ /H) 106 MPH (171 KM/H) P Fastest in muscular flight. a i a ye PEREGRINE FALCON ee é BY Weight of Males Z we 200 mph 1.1-2.4 pounds (0.5-1.1 kg) (3820 knv h) Weight of Females HARE FASTEST BIRD 1.5-3.5 pounds (0.7-1.6 kg) 20 MPH WHILE DIVING : (32 KM/H) a5 its) 28 — 32-451 GIRAFFE (80-115 cm) 30 MPH (50 KM/H) P| OSTRICH fi 45 MPH (72 KM/H) ater ibe nerd Fastest running bird CHEETAH = 100 DOLPHIN PRONGHORN 65 mp h 22 MPH (5 KM/H) 55 MPH (88 KM/H) (105 km/h) Fastest mammal over FASTEST MAMMAL long distances OVER SHORT DISTANCES oO oe { z TUNA SEL WHALE PR 62 mph 30 MPH (48 KM/H) Sane 29 Fastest swimming ar ; (100 knv/h) mammal D FASTEST SWIMMING FISH GENTOO PENGUIN Pa ° OVER SHORT DISTANCES 22.4 MPH (36 KM/H) 38 y Fastest swimming bird SAILFISH DISTANCE I 50 MPH (80 KM/H) The arctic tern travels : ENDURANCE 24,850 miles The endurance record (40,000 km). goes to the golden It migrates from Canada and plover, which is able to Labrador to Antarctica and Fa DISTANCE IT fly a distance of the Austral Sea. On each trip, The Rufous hummingbird ; it travels 9,000 to 12,000 flies from northern Alaska RUFOUS HUMMINGBIRD 1 p) 900 miles miles (15,000-20,000 km). to Mexico and back—a (Selasphorus rufus) (3,000 km) : ¢ : é ARCTIC TERN Ura dee : without stopping. (Sterna paradisea) 6 000 mile Ss Weight ) 0.1-0.2 ounce GOLDEN PLOVER (10,000 km/h). (4-6 g) (Pluvialis apricaria) The Lives of Birds ——— he behavior of birds is closely connected to the seasons. To survive, birds must prepare for the arrival of fall and winter and adjust their behavior N \ \ . ae i ass V8 7 ms ~ ’ * “ns ~ pte ee ~ eee. S accordingly. Gliding over the oceans, a wandering albatross, for example, can travel anywhere from 1,800 to 9,300 miles (2,900 to 15,000 km) in a single day in search of food. When the time comes we, to choose a partner, the behavior of males is different from that of females: males employ a variety of tactics to win over females and convince them of their fitness. Some bird couples stay together THE ANNUAL CYCLE BIRTH IN DETAIL HOW THEY COMMUNICATE POSTNATAL DEVELOPMENT NUPTIAL PARADE A DIET FOR FLYING HOME SWEET HOME MIGRATION ROUTES FIRST, THE EGG DEFENSE STRATEGIES forever, whereas other birds change partners every year. As for caring for chicks and building nests, in most species both parents participate. THE LIVES OF BIRDS BIRDS The Annual C cle 7 Survival Manual (Sula nebouxii) The males—and, on occasion, the i H i i females—perform a graceful courtship dance Birds' most striking behaviors are associated with the reproductive season. During courtship parades, birds engage in after veins be poe for ae They Raised Head is |j i i i i elaborate choreographies; there are also extraordinary fights between SING ANG SOW. Oui Clele PUMages With It flaps it: he annual cycle of SEASONS is like the daily cycle of night and day. Fluctuations mn the “ males. The blue-footed booby, the male frigate bird, and the ruff are just a careful synchronization. neon intensity of light over time create a series of physiological and behavioral changes in birds, few exaniples of binds that engage in these behaviors: Others such asthe marches i ] i i snowy egret (Egretta thula), prefer to offer twigs for the construction of looking at BI at geet areca ner ace ener aire Slt ea = ° leaves, flowers, or any other object that may help him to win over the the secretion of melatonin by the pineal gland. The blood level of this hormone acts on the Temale. Diels perlormaicesae not conncsied only wo courtsip. Te . - eyes killdeer (Charadrius vociferus) fakes being wounded to defend the eggs or hypothalamus-hypophysis axis, which regulates internal processes. This is one reason why birds chicks in the nest from predators. It offers itself as easy prey by dragging a start to change their plumage and feel the need to fly to other areas. wing as if it were broken. This trick shifts the danger away from the young. The magnificent frigate bird (Fregata _ bill. During the reproductive season, How the Hypophysis Works magnificens) is a large bird that lives _it is responsible for building the nest. se x as ae in coastal areas. It has large wings, With its impressive appearance, it Reproduction is the main activity under the control stimuli and produces hormones. These hormones , powerful talons, and a strong hooked — endeavors to attract a female. of the hypophysis, which determines behaviors such regulate the metabolic activities that cause birds’ as finding a place to court females and mate, building a internal and external sexual organs to develop. For nest, incubating the eggs, and stimulating unborn chicks to example, the gonads become enlarged, and secondary break their shells. The hypophysis is a gland in the brain sexual characteristics, such as ornamental crests or that has several functions. It receives nervous and chemical _ plumes, appear. New House Red Chest ; While it prepares The throat pouch DORSAL VIEW VENTRAL VIEW the nest, its chest remains inflated ENCARGED OREM rests, with its skin | for several hours Olfactory Pak SPN \ . lawl pink and relaxed. or until the female Pa Cerebral Hemisphere \ . \ r chooses the most ‘ ppm al seductive male. AX Optical Chiasm ——\—_y : f Parade SY GELS é Optical Lobe \ ) Sle ; ‘ It lowers its head and ~ y Hypothalamus an, ae The pineal gland, or epiphysis, produces cater a a Wis Cerebellum VYIY melatonin. The level of this hormone ce tia it shakes its whole body. determines the phases of sleep and wakefulness. pelican reclines its head and é ve places its bill under a wing. Medulla Oblongata Infundibulum and Hypophysis In the summer, male ruffs develop a huge “ruff” and auricular feathers around their necks. Their courtships are violent and striking. When competing for mating territory, they struggle fiercely. Afterward they docilely s sprawl their = = bodies on the ground until the Litt ; ; : female chooses the id Wi lucky one. Mh WH Incubation, migration, and [ iif | I { The hypophysis is located in the ventral area of the brain, below the hypothalamus. Its secretions control vital functions, from blood pressure and the balance of water and salts in the body to the activity of the gonads and the thyroid. j r Lhe j | , , : J \ Ww. ™ . ; f ' ; APT 4 oN » Male Ruff j Se — Philomachus pugnax | The arrival of the first days a : ™ - = — \ of fall coincides with a — , \ \ decrease in the amount of , : ’ ‘ ; In early summer, light. The migration season The amount of light increases incubation takes place. The begins. with the beginning of spring; increase in the amount of males use their htge throat courtship activities vary \ according to the amount of lig | available during each season. daylight coincides with this pouches to court females. phase of the annual cycle. 44 THE LIVES OF BIRDS How They Communicate ound is an important form of expression in the lives of birds. Birds' sounds can be of two types: calls and songs. The former have a simple acoustic structure, with few notes. They are associated with coordinating the activities of a group, establishing communication between parents and their young, and maintaining contact between birds during migration. Songs, on the other hand, are more complex in rhythm and modulation. They are controlled by the sex hormones, primarily the male hormones. For this reason, males produce the most varied melodies. Songs are linked to sexual behavior and territorial defense. In general, birds either inherit or learn them. — THE SONG AND THE BRAIN Birds have a brain that is well developed for this function. Testosterone acts on the upper vocal center of the brain, which is in charge of memorizing, identifying, and transmitting the orders for the execution of the song. HIGH VOCAL CENTER It is controlled by the central nervous system and orders the bird to sing. ROBUST NUCLEUS OF THE ARCHISTRIATUM Tt sends the information to the muscles of the syrinx. NUCLEUS OF THE HYPOGLOSSAL NERVE It controls the motor functions of the syrinx. THE PRODUCTION OF SOUND IN THE SYRINX The participation of both the sternotracheal muscles and five to seven pairs of small internal muscles is needed for producing sounds. These muscles control the elongation and contraction of the syrinx, which varies the pitch of the sound. The air sac is also important because it adds external pressure, which causes the tympaniform membranes to tighten. The esophagus works like a resonating box, amplifying the sound. The articulation of the sounds occurs in the buccopharyngeal cavity. There are two types of articulation: guttural and lingual. SONG-PRODUCING SYRINX AIR AND TRACHEA CLOSED BRONCHI MEMBRANE During breathing, The membranes close the songbird on both sides, under maintains pressure from the airflow without G S) external muscles. The affecting the bronchi rise resting syrinx. slightly and 9 ° also adjust the membranes. BRONCHI “a 4 EXPULSION OF AIR TO THE BRONCHI The air stored in the air sacs and lungs is expelled. As it passes through the syrinx (located between the bronchi and the trachea), it vibrates the tympaniform membranes. These membranes are the equivalent of vocal cords in humans. TRACHEA SYRINX BRONCHI DIVERTICULA TO THE PNEUMATIC BONES LUNGS AIR SACS SIMPLE SYRINX The tympaniform membranes are located above the place where the bronchi divide. They | , = VIBRATION Ly are moved by a pair of OFTHEWALL =— external muscles. y ‘ ] 7 MUSCULAR ACTION ind ¥ p ’ TYMPANIFORM MEMBRANE a BRONCHIAL RINGS Strengthening Ties BRONCHIAL RINGS r . os and female may participate. , THE SOUND ys Some songbirds develop very complex singing rituals. The PESSULUS He ace duet is perhaps the most striking because it requires both a ee o—_ shared repertoire and good coordination between both birds. In air current and — . d P 2 pecans propagate the ee cantor general, the male initiates the song witha repeated introduction, sound through 1 | Membrane the female then alternates with different phrasing phrasing ma the trachea allows for more or less cyclical variations that make it unique. It is C Pied gg <— believed that this strengthens ties between the pair (as » demarcation of territory does) and serves as a stimulus for ‘cooperative behaviors, such as nest building, in which both the Territoriality and Range > One of the most studied functions of birds’ songs is territorial demarcation. When a bird occupies a territory, it sings to announce its claim to competitors, as the pipit shown to the left is doing. When birds must share territory, as in a colony, they develop dialects (variations of sounds produced by the species). When a bird 4,00 _{ HUMMINGBIRDS, : “7 w FREQUENCY IN KHZ +o ° SHARE WITH HUMAN BEINGS AND WHALES THE NEED FOR “SOMEBODY” TO TEACH THEM SOUND INTENSITY . TO VOCALIZE (SONGBIRDS, PARROTS ARE EXAMPLES). . \ ' Ww, ~ DISTANCE 131.2 BIRDS 45 * born and raised in one location moves, it must learn the dialect of the new location in order to be accepted and participate in the community. There are also mechanical sounds produced by wing strokes, legs, and bills. In a display of territorial defense, the eared nightjar combines singing with beating its wings. vi [ w bird . species DECIBELS AND 54,050 COVERED SURFACE SQUARE FEET y INTENSITY can vary widely from bird to bird. The larger the territory, the greater its reach. Its frequencies can change * as well: the lower the frequency, the “Se . greater the coverage. q 2 . 3 TIME (IN SECONDS) 46 THELIVES OF BIRDS BIRDS 47 Nuptial Parade frat a nd 5.9 feet place before copulation, although it can continue to occur thereafter. (1.8 m) IS THE SIZE OF THE TAIL OF THE Postnuptial With this display, the great crested Prenuptial Prenuptial courtship starts with territorial inding a mate is not easy for any species. For birds, the exhibition of plumage with a bright colors, the presentation of —— Be fora ries Sncinnienertie. PEACOGK WHEN IT UNFURLS | offerings and gifts, and the performance of a i elias the eee FEATHERS AND FORMS A FAN TO dances and highly elaborate flight patterns are ATTRACT THE FEMALE. some of the particular behaviors seen during this period. They are known as nuptial or courtship displays. The male resorts to all these a strategic gestures to attract the female's attention and prevent her from paying attention to other males. Some of these rituals are extremely = complicated; others are very tender and delicate. © a tit ‘i a _-77 MUTUAL DANCES vA \ e . ee AND COURTSHIPS oe a i Great crested grebes (Podiceps A ‘ ; cristatus) perform incredible i of scape ae When ited i \ f aquatic dances. They bow to each eralerenesinerione arousal peaks, Re X of other, dive, and run through the courtship dance the male northern we water side by side. consisting of a series harrier (Circus of impressive leaps. cyaneus) flies in a wavelike 2. “4 pale. otra a. a Be Special Courtship ; ie os Le Avian courtship is a phenomenon that, depending on the a ae va species, can take the form of various rituals. Lek rituals are / SK hy one of the most intriguing forms of courtship. The males gather a : in a small area, called an arena, where they perform their i Emperor Penguin - + courtship displays for the females. The females form a circle Aptenodytes forsteri AERIAL EXHIBITIONS around the arena and end up mating with the male that has the A monogamous species. B Certain birds, such as goshawks most striking secondary sexual characteristics. Lek is a system er Miitioice ond Buring ~*~ or male northern harriers, court controlled by the dominant male, who ends up mating with most couples a spend their courtship, the female in flight. They ascend of the females (polygyny). The less experienced males will mate entire lives together. with only a few, or even none, of the females. For some species, lek rituals can be very intricate. At least 85 species perform this special type of courtship ritual, among them manakins, pheasants, cotingas, and hummingbirds. Manaldigior example, stand in line and wait their turn to pe the male in the air in broad circles, only hai a tae to let themselves fall in daring, the female. sharp dives. Monogamy or Polygamy be Monogamy is the most common mating system, in which & es two birds, one of each sex, participate, leading to the ; . formation of a couple. This couple can endure for a single 4 ¥ reproductive season or for life. Polygamy is an alternative 4 - " pattern, butit is not very common. Polygamy is divided into two { ' x classes: polygyny, in which the male mates with several ; DISPLAYING BUILDING . awit i PHYSICAL ATTRIBUTES BOWERS Another courtship strategy is So As : pa i ita Pe gt A ie, * To find a partner, birds such as the snowy Australian bowerbirds build a the presentation of gifts. Male . Ma ; . : - harem). In eae partner has the sole responsibility of egret resort to a series of very elaborate structure called a bower, which eagles give females prey, and » 4 - ; ’ caring for the eggs and chicks. There is also an exceptional case — signals, such as songs, poses, dances, they decorate with pieces of European bee-eaters offer _ within polygamy: promiscuity. In this arrangement, a couple is not flight patterns, noisemaking, and displays paper and fabric that inevitably insects. These offerings are . P ’ __ formed, and the relationship is limited to copulation. of their ornamental feathers. attract the female. called courtship food. ; ‘ 48 THE LIVES OF BIRDS How the Nest Is Built A cup-shaped nest is built at a fork between two or three branches. The bird arranges twigs, grass blades, and small sticks, as if building a platform. The bird then interlaces some of these materials with the tree to give the nest solidity. It then interweaves the materials in a circular pattern. As the nest takes shape, lighter, more adhesive materials—such as mud, spiderwebs, caterpillar silk, and certain plant fibers—are used. Although the outside is rough, the inside is lined with feathers for softness and warmth. In general, if both the male and female participate in the construction, a few hundred trips are enough to complete the nest. In some species, such as weavers, males have to display a nest during courtship; in others (African black eagles, for instance), the same nest is used every year. ome Sweet Hom ost birds lay their eggs in a nest, where they are incubated by the body heat of an adult sitting on them. To build a nest, the couple normally uses mud mixed with saliva, small stones, branches, and feathers. When the nest is in a visible location, the bird covers it with lichens or loose twigs to hide it from predators. Nest shapes vary according to the bird wala group: they can take the form BY, of a bowl, a hole in a tree (woodpeckers), or an excavated burrow on a slope of sand or soil. There are even birds that use nests built by other species. Des builds solid nests, weaving together leaves and grass blades. Sometimes the male builds several nests before the female chooses him. BASE The bird gathers branches and small sticks on a fork to lay the foundations of the nest, setting up a platformlike structure. The bird then ties it to the tree, making it sturdy. SHAPE The bird intertwines grass blades, small sticks, and hairs; fastens them; and gives them a circular shape. As construction advances, the bird uses adhesive materials, such as spiderwebs. SOME VARIATIONS = : a snest's-. dation, and-it 52) END v if WOVEN NESTS Weaver birds intertwine grass blades until they form a structure. The entrances are underneath. see ge BURROWS Parrots and kingfishers dig their nests in sandy river banks. RY | | | PLATFORM NESTS The sparrow hawk gathers a large number of branches and assembles a high, solid base for its eggs. SEWN NESTS The tailorbird sews two large leaves together with grass blades. The nest is inside the leaves. Types and Locations Nests are classified according to their shape, material, and location. They vary depending on the amount of warmth the species needs, as well as in terms of the level of protection they offer. The greater the pressure from predators, the higher or better hidden a nest must be. Good examples are isolated nests resembling high platforms; nests in deep depressions in the soil or hidden in tree trunks, which are very safe and provide good insulation; and nests made of clay, which are very hard. The most typical nests resemble a cup and are found at various locations, most often between two or three high, remote branches. NG « Composed:*on the habitat. of bers; hairs’ et feathers, ands }<27% down,\Itinsulates 5) the eggs-from the?) cold-and helps 1 i inesbation “A Structure The cup shape is important for preventing eggs from rolling out and falling. Besides making the construction of the nest easier, the use of different materials helps make the nest sturdier, as the smaller and more flexible pieces firm up, the base, walls, and lining of the structure. Different materials also provide more efficient insulation, keeping warmth in and cold out during the incubation and raising of chicks. As an added reinforcement, birds usually make the side facing the prevailing winds thicker and the side facing the sun thinner. Thus, the whole nest is an incubator that conserves energy. Finally, an exterior finish camouflages the nest among branches, hiding it from predators. The finish includes moss and feathers to smooth out the interior and provide insulation against the wind and cold, which makes the nest more suitable for incubation. 50 THE LIVES OF BIRDS First, the Egg Most birds’ organs are formed in the first hours of irds may have inherited their reproductive method from their ——— ass predecessors, the theropod reptiles. In general, they lay as many , a Fa eggs as they can care for until the chicks become independent. Highly adapted to the environment, the eggs of the same species have varying shapes and colors. These variations help keep them safe from predators. They also vary greatly in size: the egg of an ostrich is 2,000 times bigger than that of a hummingbird. e I Birds have only one functional ovary, the left one, which grows dramatically fLe@ during the mating season. The ovule can descend and form what are known How It Forms @ as unfertilized eggs (the type used in cooking). If the egg is fertilized, embryonic As it feeds to grow, the development begins. The ovule, fertilized or not, descends to the cloaca in a few embryo produces wastes that hours or days. The eggshell begins to be formed at the isthmus, through the are kept in a special sac. secretion of calcium. At first soft, the shell hardens when it comes in contact with the air. OVULES They lie in follicles arranged like a bunch of grapes. CHORION protects and contains the embryo and its food. DESCENT Once fertilized, the ovule travels down the oviduct until it reaches the isthmus. yout YOLK SAC ALBUMIN SHELL In the isthmus, the shell SHAPE membranes form. The egg contains an embryo in one It depends on the pressure exerted by the side of the yolk. The yolk is held in oviduct walls. The large end emerges first. CLOACA the middle of the white (albumin) by It expels the egg 24 a protein cord that isolates it from hours later on average the outside world. i UTERUS (chicken hens). \ } The egg becomes pigmented, and the EMBRYO shell hardens. PROTEIN Oval: The Conical: Spherical: ae CORD most Prevents — Reduces the frequent falling surface area * = (CHALAZA) —s COLOR AND TEXTURE Both texture and color help parents locate the egg. ry: Dark Speckled Egg Egg LAYING A group of eggs laid at one time is called a laying. During the mating season, a sparrow can have several layings. If some eggs are removed, the sparrow can replace them without difficulty. BIRDS 51 AIR SAC SIZE There is no exact proportion between the size of a bird and its egg. The bill and scales of the legs harden toward the end, when the chick is formed and reaches a size similar to that of the egg. At that point, rotation begins so that the chick will be positioned to reak Its snell. 1 lb y) OZ (500 g) (60 g) 8 Kiwi Egg Chicken Hen's Egg When the chick is ready to break the shell, it is taking up all the space inside the egg. The chick is cramped with its legs against its chest. This enables it to open the shell with small movements and with the help of a hard point at the tip of its bill (called an egg tooth). YOLK AND WHITE They decrease in size. wip i $, , t pte THE SHELL Pore Membrane Outer and Inner Membranes Formed by a solid layer of calcium carbonate (calcite), it has pores that make it possible for the chick to breathe. Bacteria are kept out by two membranes that cover the egg, one on the inside and the other on the outside. thet 0) ALBUMIN O was consumed. THE PROPORTION YOLK OF AN EGG disappears into the bod! TAKEN UP BY es i THE EGGSHELL 52 THE LIVES OF BIRDS Birth in Detail hen a chick is about to hatch, it starts to make itself heard from inside the egg. This allows it to communicate with its parents. It then starts to peck at the shell with its tiny egg tooth, which is lost after birth. Next, it turns inside the egg and opens a crack with Adaptations for Hatching Getting out of the egg is an intricate operation because the space is tight, and a chick's muscles have little vigor. Birds count on a few adaptations, such as the egg tooth and the hatching muscle, to accomplish the task. The tooth is used for making the first perforation, which allows air into the egg. The muscle exerts the necessary strength, while stimulating the chicken's motor functions to intensify the effort. Both the egg tooth and the BIRDS 53 A GREAT EFFORT Getting out of the shell requires much energy from the chick. THE CHICK IS BORN Once outside the chick, almost featherless, looks for warmth and food from its parents. In the case of some birds that hatch without feathers, new perforations, at the same time pushing with its neck and legs until it manages to stick out its head. This job demands a lot of effort and can take 30 to 40 minutes or, in the case of kiwis and albatrosses, even three to four days. In most species, newborn chicks are blind and naked, and they can open their bills only to receive food. hatching muscle disappear shortly after the eggshell is broken. not all eggs hatch simultaneously; this benefits the firstborn E if food is scarce. It exerts pressure against the shell and helps to break it. INCUBATION For the embryo to develop, it needs constant temperatures between 99° and 100° F (37-38° C). The parents ensure these temperatures by sitting on the eggs and warming them with their brood patches. DURATION BY SPECIES The incubation period varies considerably: between 10 and 80 days, depending on the species. During incubation, some species lose their chest feathers and increase their number of blood vessels in this area. Others pluck out their feathers. E TOOTH A protuberance on the bill that punctures the egg. Its presence depends on the species. ALBATROSS PENGUIN Both males and females PIGEON Females and males Lacking brood patches, the Direct contact with incubate. They both incubate. The emperor male has parents hold the egg between the eggs helps keep develop a brood patch. a special pouch for incubation. their feet and abdomen. © them warm. ; : re ; = BROOD PATCH SHELL MEMBRANE Breaking the Shell Oe EGGSHELL This process may take from a few minutes to three or four days, depending on the species. In general, the parents do not intervene or help their young. When the shell is empty, they throw it out of the nest, apparently to avoid attracting the attention of predators. In species whose young CRACK IN THE EGG The chick turns inside until its bill targets the egg's midline. It then punctures the air sac. With a few more tries, it pierces the shell. The chick then breathes for the first time. ASKING FOR HELP The chick calls for its parents from inside. The reply encourages it to continue the effort. hatch with the feathers already developed, hatching is extremely important. It has been observed that the singing of the chicks stimulates the stragglers and delays those that have gotten ahead; it is important that they all be ready to leave the OF THE EGG. nest together. SEQUENCE OF PECKING Between each sequence of pecking, the chick must take long breaks. IS THE APPROXIMATE TIME IT TAKES A SPARROW TO COME OUT THE CRACK EXPANDS After making a hole in the shell, the chick opens a crack with successive pecks at other points. Air gets in and dries up the membrane, which makes the task easier. GETTING OUT OF THE EGG Once the shell is open, the chick pushes itself out with its legs and by crawling on its abdomen. For birds that _ hatch without feathers, this is more difficult, because - ‘ they are less developed. WHAT COMES OUT FIRST? The head usually comes out first, because the sharp bill helps break the shell. Most birds then get out of the egg by pushing themselves out with their legs. For wading birds and other terrestrial birds, however, the wings usually unfold first. 54 THE LIVES OF BIRDS BIRDS 55 Postnatal Development hicks develop at highly variable rates after hatching. Some birds are born with their eyes open and with a thick layer of down feathers. These birds can also feed themselves. That is why they are called precocious, or nidifugous. Ducks, rheas, ostriches, and certain beach birds can walk and swim as soon as they are born. Other species are born naked and develop their feathers later. They need to stay in the nest until they have sufficiently developed, so adult birds must care for them. These birds are called nidicolous. The most helpless chicks are the young of songbirds and hummingbirds, because they need warmth from their parents to grow strong. @ Nidifugous Young Fh Nidifugous young are fully developed at the LL moment of birth. They can move and even leave the nest, hence their name (which means “fleeing the nest"). This adaptation demands more incubation time because the chick is almost fully developed at birth. This is the case with incubator birds (Vegapodius freycinet), which begin their independent lives in the outside world as soon as they leave the shell. Ducks follow their parents but find food on their own, whereas chickens follow their It is already considered an adult. Its flights are longer. Its diet is composed of 97 percent vegetables; the rest is made up of lichens and insects. EYE They are born with open eyes. parents, and the parents show them FEATHERS where to find food. The body emerges from the egg covered with damp down. Within three hours, it will become dry and fluffy. Red-Legged MOVEMENT Partridge Within a few hours of Alectoris rufa hatching, nidifugous birds can run around. 1 5 d ays It starts to perform GROWTH short flights. It reverses STAGES its diet, eating: 66% seeds and flowers. The rest consists of invertebrates. 30 hours The chick keeps warm with the down that covers its body. SIZE COMPARISON NIDIFUGOUS NIDICOLOUS Tt can walk and begins to be The egg is larger, the | They lay small fed by its parents. chick is born more eggs, with a brief developed, and the incubation incubation period is period, and the longer than that of young are nidicolous birds. helpless at birth. 66% invertebrates. Ours The rest consists gener Se of seeds and s 7 to 8 days Growth quickens, and the first covert feathers appear at the tip of the wing. The bird leaves the nest. Its diet consists of: IS THE MINIMUM AMOUNT OF flowers. TIME THE BLACK-HEADED DUCK NEEDS TO BE READY TO FLY. . e “see e® Nidicolous Broods Fl Most of these chicks are born naked, with FOOD [Lefl closed eyes and with only enough strength They need much food to An adult bird can feed its young up to to get out of their shells. They stay in the nest. For develop. The parents must . the first few days, they cannot even regulate their feed them 24 hours a day. AOO times a day. own body temperature; they need their parents in order to stay warm. Within one week, they have a few feathers, but they require constant care and food. They form a numerically important group that includes Passeriformes (songbirds). House Sparrow Passer domesticus INTERIOR OF THE BILL Its color is bright to stimulate the parents to regurgitate the food. Some species have shiny areas that can be seen even in the dark. 12-15 days Development is complete, and the covert feathers are ready for flight. All that remains is for the EYES bird to reach adult size. Nidicolous chicks are born blind. They open their eyes a few days after birth. FEATHERS The chicks are born either naked or with down feathers in sot 10 days Feathers cover everything, but they are not yet developed. The chick can stay warm on its own, and it is voracious. Growth is very fast. 8 days Feathers cover the chick almost completely, except around its eyes. Its legs are well developed, and the sparrow moves around in the nest. STAGES OF GROWTH 25 hours It performs a few instinctive movements. It can barely raise its head to ask for food. 12-15 days IS THE ESTIMATED TIME THAT IT TAKES THIS NIDICOLOUS CHICK TO LEAVE THE NEST. 6 days Some feathers begin to unfold, the nails are formed, and the wings continue to grow with the body. It can stand up. 4 days The eyes open. The tips of the first feathers appear. It performs a few movements. 56 THE LIVES OF BIRDS A Diet for Flying : as ost birds eat assorted foods that are rich in energy renee and proteins. Their high level of activity requires that they eat almost constantly. Their sources of food are varied and include seeds, fruits, nectar, leaves, insects and other invertebrates, and meat of all kinds (including carrion). Many species eat more than one type of food; some even alternate according to the seasons and to the migration cycle. This guarantees their survival. However, there are others birds—a minority—that consume only one type of food, for which they have no competition. Because their dependence on this single source of food is greater, 133 though, the risk is higher. Feeding behavior also ae varies among different species. For example, some i eat alone, and others eat in groups. © TONGUE From Parents to Children Flamingos and pigeons feed their young a special “milk” that is produced in the crop and has a nutritional value similar to the milk of mammals. Both males and females produce it as soon as food is ingested so that the chick is not fed regurgitated food. It is given to the young through the * bill. Easy to digest and nutritious, it is an excellent food. \ \ A Complex System >; Feeding on microorganisms that live in salty water demands a complex filtration system. The flamingo's bill is specially suited to this task. Its tongue and throat pump the water inside the bill as they ascend and descend, bringing water through the hornlike lamellae, which resemble whale baleen, to retain the food passing through them. Their tongues also have a depressed area, where the stones and sediments that come in with the water collect. The whole operation requires that the flamingo submerge its bill upside down. Because of the number of microorganisms they need to consume and the time it takes to filter them, flamingos usually spend many hours in the water. The risks involved in this activity are mitigated by the fact that flamingos do not eat alone, but rather in groups. Occasionally, there are instances of aggression, possibly because of territorial conflicts. A second filtration occurs inside the bill, as the water is expelled. The lamellae (small plates) catch the microorganisms Filtration of Food as wage fie but let water and other submerges its bill in the briny water to feed VAS ES, on the microorganisms living there. Cross-Section of the Bill The flamingo fills its bill with water by raising its tongue. By doing this, the flamingo performs an initial filtration that keeps out undesired substances. LOWER MANDIBLE Tongue Lamellae UPPER i, MANDIBLE i nid Hooks to Hold the Bill WATER IN MOTION BIRDS 57 Types of Diet Birds expend a great deal of energy, and their diet must be suited to their high metabolic rates. They eat practically anything, although the diet of some birds is very specific. The same foods are not always available, which causes most birds to adjust their diets throughout the year. 1. The flamingo produces milk in its crop only when it is not eating. A protein called prolactin participates in its preparation, just as with mammals. NECTAR is a solution of sugar and water that flowers produce. It is very high in energy and easy to digest. In order to get it, a bird must have a long, sharp bill. In temperate regions, nectar is plentiful in the spring and summer, whereas in the tropical regions, it is available year / round. Hummingbirds and honeycreepers are very fond of this juice. 3. This milk has high concentrations of the pigment that colors the feathers; that is why the bird's color changes to the characteristic pink while molting in adolescence. SEEDS AND GRAINS The high energy and protein content of seeds make them an ideal food for birds. The problem is that they are seasonal. FISH The abundance of fish throughout the year makes them one of the favorite foods of marine birds. They have a high nutritional value. FRUIT In the tropics, this diet is very common because fruits are available throughout the year. In temperate and cold regions, fruit can be found only in the summer. Fruit has a high energy value, and many birds eat it. Strategies Depending on the abundance of resources, the needs of the species, and the strategies for getting food, birds may eat alone or in groups. If food is scarce or widely scattered throughout a region, birds eat alone and defend their territory. On the other hand, if food is abundant, they prefer to eat within the safe confines of the group. SOLITARY Usually birds of prey, such as eagles and owls, hunt alone because food is scarce and is randomly distributed. Hunting alone has a drawback in that birds must also watch out for predators, which takes time away from hunting. THE HUMMINGBIRD'S TONGUE Long channeled or tubular tongues suck the nectar and catch insects at the bottom of the corolla of a flower. Pointed tips, in the shape of brushes MEAT Hunting and scavenging birds feed on meat. They rarely specialize in one type of prey, but the prey's size determines its selection. LEAVES AND PLANTS Few birds feed on leaves because they have low energy value. Birds that do have undergone adaptations that permit them to digest cellulose. INSECTIVORES Insects are rich in energy and proteins, and they are highly abundant. Thus, many bird species eat them. In cold regions, they can be found only in the summer. TOGETHER This behavior is typical of ocean birds, such as pelicans and seagulls, and of aquatic birds, such as flamingos. When birds eat in groups, each group member can warn the others about possible dangers, which is beneficial. 58 THE LIVES OF BIRDS BIRDS 59 I | i | Migration Routes...) ss" ven sr — = — aa, Oenanthe oenanthe : Sex De al = 24 a ti Cape Gannet Morus capensis Snow Bunting Plectrophenax nivalis RUBY-THROATED HUMMINGBIRD Archilochus colubris : 7 Peregrine > 5OO miles ie? gor A Barn Swallow Falcon 4° > (800 k » Lesser S| a Hirundo rustica Falco - m) \ ff jay 1 ’ Aquila p peregrinus Gulf Of om «> : THE DISTANCE THEY FLY ig } ; rm PA ae Mexico” eens NONSTOP ACROSS THE wa" . j % Pacific —" “th GULF OF MEXICO. THEY DO : ie % Ocean % IT IN JUST 20 HOURS. . — J : f 7 %, = a se . are : MEETING POINT “% i) ‘ ~ of , 4 ° ‘* Pacific Atlantic we y a ‘ . 7 ri ty a ia 1 billion 4 BIRDS MEET IN THE DEAD Behavior SEA VALLEY EVERY YEAR Bar-Headed Goose FL In order to survive, millions of birds 2 WHERE THE ASIAN, Anser indicus Lf from all over the world start a journey EUROPEAN, AND AFRICAN every fall in search of better climates. The MIGRATION ROUTES instinct of migrating, which other animals share CONVERGE. with birds, was acquired after a long evolutionary process. Some birds fly thousands of miles through mountain ranges; others follow the course of a river without stopping until they reach their destination; others land after a short trip. In general, birds undergo physiological changes that are related to the length of their journey; some even lose almost half their weight during the migration. Routes tend to be fixed, although some migratory birds do not always follow them exactly. The colors on the map indicate the most important routes. There are collective and individual migrations, and birds may travel during the day or at night. It is surprising how fast birds travel. Many studies have recorded that carrier pigeons and white-headed sparrows can cover more than 600 miles (1,000 km) in a day. Shorebirds, such as godwits and curlews, are among the birds that cover the most distance. They are also among the birds most faithful to routes. Barn Swallow Hirundo rustica ~ American Golden Plover White Stork N ASIA FLYWi Pluvialis dominica Ciconia ciconia \ H Ow Th ey Fi n d Th ej r Way Around Azimuthal Angle: Sun/Trajectory =. Indian - Ocean Curlew Sandpiper Calidris ferruginea we Birds use a compass-and-triangulation caspian Tern (La system that lets them know where they are xt 5 é Ste ie Types of Migration ree according to the position of the sun or stars. This The north-south path traveled by ARCTIC TERN system is similar to the one used by seafarers. It many species is called latitudinal Sterna paradisaea 7 consists of measuring the sun's angle of inclination , \4 migration. A second pattern, which occurs in an east-west direction, is called longitudinal migration. The last pattern is called altitudinal migration; it is performed by birds that move up and down mountains seasonally. in relation to the horizon (azimuthal angle) and South ef : 4 s 20, OOO ] | | l il es comparing it to the angle the bird knows through Southwest ot — a) its biological clock. Birds also orient themselves | : Lori ttc ae (40, 000 km)~ by using the Earth's magnetic field. Furthermore, > IS THE ae IT CAN COVER ON those migrating during the day register landmarks ; : Antarctic Ocean ITS ROUND-TRIP MIGRATION P on their routes, such as mountains, lakes, or BETWEEN THE POLES. IT IS THE Wandering Albatross deserts. Still others follow older birds or are Northeast ANTARCTIC FLYWAY LONGEST MIGRATION IN THE WORLD. Diomedea exulans guided by their sense of smell. North - Flight Direction: Northeast to Southwest est a | - 60 THE LIVES OF BIRDS Defense’ Strategies irds have many ) = including cats, snakes, crocodiles, and other birds. To — @ " BIRDS 61 Defense of the Brood > Hatching and youth are times of critical vulnerability for birds. During * these phases, they are forced to keep still because they are easy prey. For this reason, parents permanently watch over their nests, even attacking strangers if they get too close. -. FEIGNING INJURY A very widespread behavior is to pretend to be wounded or sick. This allows a bird to avoid being defend themselves inst these predators, birds use various strategies, the most common of which is camouflage. Some birds blend in with their surroundings and thus go unnoticed by their enemies. Chaparrel birds, whose plumage colors and + chosen as prey. This behavior is common among that keep still in the presence of unknown animals, feigning death, i 0 Pineons. whereas others face an enemy and fight. It is not uncommon to see magpies, thrushes, and other birds chasing away strangers that get close to their nests.» P ’ % ’ ATTACK PROTECTION _ In other situations, birds adopt openly aggressive When a parent detects danger, it gets close to its 7 behaviors in the presence of intruders or predators. young and covers them so that they are not alone. Magpies can even hound and chase away eagles if the This behavior is common among tropical birds e latter threaten their brood. Such active defenses are (tropical seabirds). Several species of curlews and * - s % Individual 4 iy Among solitary birds, it is co t : flee quickly if a stranger is present. 4 all solitary birds react this way, though; some have developed specific techniques to defend more common among birds of prey. sandpipers place their young betwee: legs, whel a carry their chi jacks Collective Strategies themselves. : ay aie Birds that have group behaviors usually ‘ 7 develop group strategies to protect ESCAPE themselves against predators. Being numerous is a In the presence of terrestrial predators, a bird's first reaction is to take flight. If the bird cannot fly, it lo k for shelter or a hiding place. _ guarantee that the species will go on. They also adopt other tactics as a group. COLONIES A great number of birds can defend themselves better from predators when in groups. For that reason they even form colonies with other bird species when raising their young: on™ Ae WN N iy dense formation. If they are near a tree, they do not hesitate to hide in it. Wee - FLOCK . : "e In the presence of predators, birds form flocks that a . synchronized manner, which makes it hard for the _ ' EXPANSION . ® predators to focus on any one individual. o Owls spread out their wings to look bigger than they really are. > A ’ ATTACKS AND COLLECTIVE . . : i. Many birds that live in groups have developed several ‘ .. . e “ he ' hounding behaviors in the presence of potential enemies. ; , \\\ ” y They perform them to help an individual that is in danger Q\ AN P . or a to flee. L \\ ZZ» ; WARNING : a ; . They emit callings that warn the whole colony. The great majority of species have a specific and characteristic cry - that is usually simple, brief, and very audible. rer, fe a their excreriaag inthe face «(i . They often agi these warnings while guapting postures birds that prey on them. This distracts the predator (such as stretching the neck or shaking the wings) that and makes it possible to escape. v a alone are enough to warn other individuals of the intruder's presence. te — Ee CAMOUFLAGE 7 > : is Very common and is one of the most efficient defensive strategies: " Many birds develop plumage to imitate the dominant colors and e : > = : shapes of the environment where they live. When they notice the al presence of a potential enemy, they stay motionless to avoid calling ad 3 Bors attention to themselves. There are a few notable cases, such as that = eo < of the tawny frogmouth (Podargus strigoides), pictured above. May partridges and terrestrial birds are experts at the art of blending i with the landscape; the rock ptarmigansfor example, has white > plumage in the winter that becomes terra-cotta in the summer. = — vs. = a eee *? G » = as Diversity and Distribution he environment in which an organism usually lives is called its habitat. In their habitats, birds find food, the best places to build nests, and escape routes in case of danger. An almost universal pattern of distribution shows that more species live in the tropics than elsewhere. With evolution, birds with a common origin have diversified as they have begun to occupy different environments. This phenomenon is called adaptive radiation. We find ocean birds, which have undergone many changes in order to live near the sea, as ONE BIRD, ONE NAME FRESHWATER BIRDS WHERE THEY LIVE ARMED TO HUNT NO FLYING ALLOWED TALKATIVE AND COLORFUL MARINE RESIDENTS THE PERCHERS CLUB well as birds that live in freshwater environments, in forests, and so on. Each type has acquired special physical traits and behaviors as a result of the adaptive process. 64 DIVERSITY AND DISTRIBUTION BIRDS 65 One Bird, One Name o learn more about different birds, we give each species a name. Ancient peoples grouped birds according to practical traits and mystical beliefs. They used birds as food or considered them to be bad omens or symbols of good luck. The people who developed scientific thought created a classification system that took into consideration the external form as well as the behavior of these vertebrates; hence, the denominations predator, wading bird, and songbird were developed, among others. The most recent system of classification, which is based on genetic and j Diversity and the Environment Living birds are distributed among a wide variety of habitats. They can be found | , Avs Wea a . in aquatic (freshwater or marine) and aero-terrestrial environments. Marine birds live on cliffs, on islands, or in mangrove swamps. They are excellent fishers, and they use seashores or crannies between rocks as refuges for nesting. In freshwater bodies, such 4 as rivers and streams, ducks feed on plants and surface microorganisms. Muddy shores : se are rich in insects and mollusks, which are the favorite dishes of ibis. Herons, storks, and egrets spear fish with their sharp bills as they wade in water with their long legs without getting wet. Forests, jungles, mountain ranges, and wide plains form most of the world's aero-terrestrial environments. In jungles and forests, predatory birds hunt their prey, while trogons and parrots gorge on insects and fruit. Rocky peaks are the refuge of condors, which fly for hours in search of the remains of dead animals. Ostriches run over prairies and savannas. r] i ot ‘ Eagles, V ures, / and Falcons COLIIFORMES 6 SPECIES H Mousebirds (ans _ PSITTACIFORMES 360 SPECIES ie CUCULIFORMES F A ; ‘ ‘ _ Parrots, Parakeets, evolutionary criteria, has generated a hierarchical Opisthocomus hoazin ee nieces eae beries acletiog izati f th ti ta tl b i d t d is a tropical bird species that inhabits the ple AU eee lA and Macaws organization of names that IS constantly being updated. 317 SPECIES : Amazon. The presence of talons on the chicks' heels links them to their earliest ancestors, including Archaeopteryx. Pigeons and Doves PICIFORMES 382 SPECIES . . Woodpeckers, What Is a Classification? PHYLUM CLASS FAMILY GENUS SPECIES : Tene oe Since the early Renaissance in the 16th - Hirundo ristica 7 century, scientific classifications assigned - — Hirundo (barn swallow) 1 compound names to birds, as well as to other Hirundinidae b se living creatures. The first part stands for a genus a and the second for a specific name. Thus, the rock (domestic) pigeon is called Columba livia in Viren oltvoceus ro prong \ scientific terms. The discovery of new species in Vireo (red-eyed vireo) Hummingbird ‘ r : . ae gbirds different parts of the world widened the array of Vireonidae and Swifts é CHARADRIIFORMES birds so that compound names were no longer 350 SPECIES UPUPIFORMES enough. The level of family was established to t Seagulls, Lapwings, 1 SPECIES group genera of birds that share similar traits. In "me alr and Plovers Haanae turn, bird families that share common traits —— P were grouped into orders. These were then Chordata Aves di ae combined into a category called class. Classes Torus Larus atricilla a include all current and extinct birds. Birds share (laughing gull) —_ a higher category in the hierarchy-the phylum- Laridae J a» STRIGIFORMES 7. with fish, amphibians, reptiles, mammals, and qv as S TROCGONIFORMES vertebrates in general. & 39 SPECIES : st Trogons and ef CICONIIFORMES E e Quetzals CAPRIMULGIFORMES , 120 SPECIES 190 SPECIES = 109 SPECIES Herons, Storks, Moorheiis, (e anes 5 Potoos, Frogmouths, Ibises, and Egrets t a and Nightjars . Fa - >< = - SPHENISCIFORMES ‘ pe, = a 18 SPECIES G72 “a y Penguins WT df \ i ‘be ‘ | \ GAVIIFORMES PROCELLARIIFORMES PODICIPEDIFORMES ANSERIFORMES PELECANIFORMES en ae N \ 5 SPECIES 110 SPECIES 21 SPECIES 150 SPECIES 62 SPECIES | | mailin \ f Loons (diving birds) Albatrosses, Petrels, Grebes Ducks, Geese, Pelicans, Boobies, | b 7 and Fulmars and Swans and Cormorants y. } Ah A FCoe Es IDILOEE y 1 SPECIES) Flamingos | urkeys, Quails, asa cats Ss, and Pate BIRDS 67 66 DIVERSITY AND DISTRIBUTION Where They Live NUMBER OF Biodiversity in the World Spores Fh The most diverse regions in terms of bird “> upto 200 ith their mobility, birds have conquered all areas of the Earth. Despite this Heal) popultions are the woples Betaise of the lesan hes ‘ i" : s sige favorable conditions of abundant food and warm @ 400 - 600 characteristic, there are few cosmopolitan species—that is, most birds have specific climate found in them. Temperate regions, however, @ 600-800 habitats determined by climate and geographic features. Count de Buffon in the 18th Many MIGIF Ses Oni are sleet inatare: TOPrTagta tng 200; 00 ‘ : n- 7 7 . birds from tropical and polar regions. Cold regions, @ 1000 - 1200 century was the first person to notice that living beings are not distributed homogeneously. By on the other hand, have little diversity but are rich in @ 1200 - 1400 population density. The rule is that diversity of life- @ 1400 - 1600 analyzing how animals were dispersed on the planet, he realized that different places had forms happens in places where the environment @ 1600 - 1800 different types of fauna. After the work of naturalist Charles Darwin and ornithologist Philip Sclater, it became clear that organisms are situated in specific biogeographic regions. @ ASIA COUNTRIES WITH THE 7 MOST SPECIES Palearctic ) - More than 1,500 PAINS a Species 9% fd NORTH ; 73 families Because of similar climatic conditions, Colombia } \) Fratercula artica , i Nearctic “AMERICA a q many authors merge the Palearctic and Brazil " EUROPA CHARACTERISTICS Neoarctic regions, calling the combined Peru Species = 4 Climatic barrier of cold weather region Holarctica. Ecuador P ise iis 7 and oceanic isolation Indonesia 62 Families ; : E Low diversity of species More than 1,000 CHARACTERISTICS Oceania Most are migratory species Bolivia Climatic barrier of cold weather S ~ Many. insectivorous and aquatic birds Venezuela and oceanic isolation es l pecies 2% China Most migrating species i : 5 a 15 Families ve Endemic Avifauna: wood grouse, India Many insectivorous and aquatic birds CHARACTERISTICS waxwings, flycatchers, cranes f . Mexico Affinity with Palearctic Esigcaresiana nierienokelinaics AFRICA rs Democratic Republic ee ‘ of the Congo -Aasnieavit aes Pacific CENTRAL Gliders, divers, and swimmers Pe ndemic Avifauna: loons and puffins @ y p Ocean AMERICA Abundance of fish-eating species \ > Kenya Many cosmopolitan species Pare 4 Argentina ] ndian ag Seat aoa to Neotropic Genie _ Afrotropic i peek a @ Environmen i sheathbills, petrels, penguins, a ie te! oe Species and seagulls Species 19% 2 a F™@ Birds are found in all habitats of the world, although 86 Families 73 families Indomalaya Le most live in tropical regions. Their ability to adapt, ) y) “ eaniet purge 2 Be to ee CHARACTERISTICS. 32% CHARACTERISTICS © & l / } Species 16 % Pear ee eee ey ieee ce aaicne Soatian eee Long-lasting geographic Maritime and desert isolation 66 families succeeded in acclimating themselves. They have undergone a isolation : 9 highly varied array of changes in form and behavior. Emperor = e Great number of Passeriformes CHARACTERISTICS penguins not only nest in Antarctica but they also incubate Many primitive species Many flightless birds ——= : Vv their eggs between their feet for 62 to 66 days. Great numbers of frugivores Affinities with the Afrotropical zone The male Lichtenstein's sandgrouse has Endemic Avifauna: ostriches, Tropical birds developed a sponge of feathers to bring Endemic Avifauna: rheas, SOUTH turacos, cuckoos Many frugivores water to its chicks, and tinamous, oilbirds, hoatzins, AMERIGA hummingbirds have special cotingas, and stripe-backed Endemic Avifauna: ioras, pittas, swifts wings that enable them to antbirds OCEANIA a at This region undoubtedly has the greatest Australasia : diversity of birds. The variety in the South American tropics, the most important l 59 Species 15% tropical zone in the world, is one and a 9 64 families half times greater than that of tropical barge di ng lnalhtl i teastaorti A Africa. With more than 1,700 species, SO le CHARACTERISTICS Colombia, Brazil, and Peru are the countries with the greatest diversity of avifauna. Even Ecuador, a much smaller country, has more than 1,500 species. HOATZIN Opisthocomus hoazin requires less severe adaptations. OSTRICH Struthio camelus Long isolation Many flightless and primitive birds Endemic Avifauna: emus, kiwis, cockatoos, birds of paradise 68 DIVERSITY AND DISTRIBUTION No Flying Allowed few birds have lost their ability to fly. Their main characteristic is wing loss or reduction, although for some 4 ~*~ Such birds weigh more than 39 pounds (18 kg). This is the case with runners (ostriches, cassowaries, emus, rheas, kiwis), extremely fast birds that live in remote areas of New Zealand, and swimmers, such as penguins, that have developed extraordinary aquatic abilities. Super Swimmers Penguins’ bodies are covered with three layers of small, overlapping feathers. A penguin has small limbs and a hydrodynamic shape that helps it swim with agility and speed. Dense, waterproof plumage and a layer of fat insulate the bird from the low temperatures of the regions where it lives. Since its bones are rigid and compact, it is able to submerge itself easily. This adaptation distinguishes it from flying birds, whose bones are light and hollow. FLIPPERS The short, compact wings look like flippers. They are essential to the penguin's underwater movements. Rockhopper Penguin Eudyptes crestatus HUNTING The wings work like flippers. The foot—with four joined toes pointing BREATHING RELAXING When looking for food, When resting in the penguins need to leave the + water, they move slowly. water and take a breath They float on the surface backward—and the tail between plunges. with their heads up and steer the direction of balance their bodies with the dive. their wings and feet. a remarkable size may be the cause of their inability to fly. ATROPHIED WINGS | The Ratites Running birds belong to 59 ft the group of the ratites (L8 m) (rata = raft, an allusion to the flat sternum). The front limbs either are.atrophied or have functions unrelated to flying. The hind limbs have very strong muscles as well as sturdy, vigorous bones. Another difference is found in the sternum. It is a flat bone without a keel, which flying \ : and swimming birds possess. A single species inhabits eastern and southern Africa. Adults reach a height of 9 feet (2.75 m) and a weight of 330 pounds (150 kg). in-the Southern Hemisphere. The Tinamidae, native to Central and South America, belong to this group (partridges). *poundls (150 kg). Running and Kicking Ostriches usually run to escape from predators or to hunt small lizards and rodents. In both cases, because of their strong legs, they are able to reach a speed of 45 miles per hour (72 km/h) and to maintain it for 20 minutes. When running is not enough to protect the bird, kicking is a valid recourse that discourages the attacker. In courtship displays, forceful stamping is also used to win over females. PELVIS STRUTHIONIFORMES The ostrich is the only species in this group. It uses its wings for balance when. running fast. It has only two Wild ratites can be found only é toes on each foot. The adult . male can weigh up to 330 RHEIFORMES Rhea are common.in South American countries, such as Argentina. They look like ostriches but are smaller. < “Their three-toed then to 7 neck a make the BIRDS 69 CASUARIIFORMES BMIES Agile runners and 2 swimmers. The colors on their necks and heads are fur _ distinctive. A bony hoof Us have four bt, and their protect m In many cases, running birds can be found in many parts of the world because of human intervention. The area where flightless birds have diversified the most is Oceania, due to continental isolation. Der ee ep oe “ ; tis az : A IBIS (Ibis sp.): Some filtrate, STORK (Ciconia sp.): It and others fish. fishes with its long bill. aA “» ma | White Ibis Edocimus albus A DUCK'S DIET - HOW THEY USE THEIR FEET TO SWIM A duck moves its feetyinytwo ways. To advanci uses its webbed feet to. row. It closes the toe: SHOEBILL (Balae-niceps rex): It eats among floating sedges. THE LEGS OF AN IBIS keep the bird above the water but close enough to It swims on the surface, It sticks its head into the It floats face-down looking for food water, abruptly pushes ip ake the bottom * fish. Ibis also stir up the underneath the water. back its feet, and turns its h its bill. ' 4 beds of lakes and ponds. neck downward. Pails - ; HERON (Egretta sp.): It COMMON SPOONBILL HAMMERKOP (Scopus - r , fishes with its sharp bill. (Platalea leucorodia): It eats umbretta): It fishes and fone i v " several types of aquatic animals. hunts small animals. a. cf # : A os 74 DIVERSITY AND DISTRIBUTION Armed to Hunt irds of prey are hunters and are carnivorous by nature. They are perfectly equipped to eat living animals. Their eyesight is three times sharper than that of human beings; their ears are designed to determine the precise status of their prey; they have strong, sharp talons; and they can kill a small mammal with the pressure of their talons alone. Their hook-shaped bills can kill prey by = tearing its neck with a single peck. Eagles, falcons, vultures, and owls A vuneited are examples of birds of prey. Birds of prey can be diurnal or nocturnal, “ p maint on cane leslie and they are always on the lookout. © ; a Nae Diurnal and Nocturnal Eagles, falcons, and vultures are diurnal birds of prey, whereas owls are nocturnal—that is, they are active during the night. These two groups are not closely related. These birds' main prey includes small mammals, reptiles, and insects. Once they locate the victim, they glide toward it. Nocturnal birds of prey are specially adapted: their eyesight is highly developed, their eyes are oriented forward, and their hearing is sharp. The feathers on their wings are arranged in such a way that they make no noise when the bird is flying. can determine the location of degrees and a bifocal vision Red-Backed Hawk In order to protect themselves while prey with great precision. of 50 degrees. BRO AEE, sleeping during the day, they have dull plumage, which helps them blend in with —— their surroundings. CERE Fleshy formation, | —________| Bills The bills of birds of prey are hook- shaped. Some birds of prey have a tooth that works like a knife, allowing them to kill their prey, tear its skin and muscle tissues, and get to the food easily. The structure and shape of the bills of birds of prey changes depending on the species. somewhat thick and Scavengers (for example, vultures and condors) have weaker bills because the tissues of animals in decomposition are softer. Other species, such as falcons, catch prey with their talons and use their bills to finish it off with a violent stab to the neck, breaking its spine. BALD EAGLE Its hook-shaped bill is common to many birds of prey. SPARROW HAWK FALCON GOSHAWK The study of pellets makes (8 km) Its thin bill enables it to It can break the spine Its strong bill can catch it possible to determine IS THE DISTANCE FROM GRIFFON VULTURE FISHING EAGLE rn GOSHAWK SPARROW HAWK take snails out of their of its prey with its prey as large as hares. the fauna of small areas WHICH A FALCON CAN Its long toes do not have Tts toes have rough scales that look It has calluses at the tips of Its feet have tarsi and short, shells. upper bill. with great precision. PERCEIVE A PIGEON. a good grasp. like thorns, which help it to eatch fish. _its toes. strong toes. EURASIAN EAGLE OWL BALD EAGLE Bubo bubo Haliaeetus leucocephalus Its ears are asymmetrical and Tt has a visual field of 220 BIRDS 75 HOW THE VULTURE HUNTS DIMENSIONS The wings of birds of prey are adapted to suit their flying requirements. They can measure up to 10 feet (3 m). a ee | | (itl to 9.5 ft (095-29 m). eee eal | | = 45 to 8 ft (135-245 m) - 7 Thanks to their * n thermals, vultures can find tarcasseson s—sknOwiift he able to Eoaiett | mr ye . again a - ep: “ea - a ~ , see1c 94 to 5 ft (2-15 m) e~—_\>-* ‘ 4 : \ 2.6 to 6.4 ft (0.8-195 m) soft 2.2. to 4.1 ft (0.67-1.25 m) NOSTRIL Olfactory TIP canals Where the tooth is located that the bird uses as pincers to catch its prey in flight. The osprey also has thorns on the soles of its feet, which help it to catch fish. Zone-Tailed Hawk Buteo albonotatus OWL PELLETS Owls produce pellets. They swallow their prey whole and regurgitate the indigestible substances. SA yt - a 76 DIVERSITY AND DISTRIBUTION Talkative and Colorful arrots form a very attractive bird group with a great capacity for learning. This group LP comprises cockatoos, macaws, and parakeets. They share physical characteristics, such as a big head, a short neck, a strong hook-shaped bill, and climbing feet. They have plumage in many colors. Toucans and woodpeckers share with parrots the colors of their feathers and their type of feet. Toucans have a wider, thicker bill, but it is light. Woodpeckers are climb a strong, straight bill, a tail of stiff feathers, and a distinctive crest. They form num and most nest in trees. — oe Eating, Climbing, and Chattering Parrots use their bills to feed and to move about tree branches; they use their bills as an extension of their feet to give them support when they climb. Parrots also have a curved profile, a pointed tip on their upper mandible, and sharp edges on their Th dap ability to imitate the human voice has made on them very popular. However, they are far » UPPER PART OF HOOK from being able to produce language. In , Sharp projection reality, they are merely good imitators: they used to open seeds use their excellent memory to imitate sounds. pressure is exerted They do this when they are hungry or when and fruits are torn they detect the presence of unknown people. Open. UPPER AND LOWER MANDIBLES The hook-shaped bill is flexible; the mandibles are joined to the skull by hinges. At its base, the upper mandible has a fleshy protuberance called a cere. It is where the most WOODPECKERS hollow out tree trunks with pecks in order to build a nest and to feed on insects that eat wood. TOUCANS Their big bills have serrated edges that suit their diet of fruit. They live in the South American jungles. . -% - | THE HABITAT OF we WOODPECKERS XS They live in the woods and EAN yy can often be heard — yi : ~* \ \ ts \ .\ there. Their , t i" adaptations to — arboreal life are demonstrated by their strong, 4) thick bills and their stiff tails, which they use for support, together with their feet. They use their hearing to locate tree-boring insects; they then peck the wood incessantly until they find them. Q ALS = They belong to the family Trogonidae. They have feet adapted to arboreal life. Males have brilliant plumage and long, attractive tails. COCKATOO HYACINTH _ WINGS Usually they are \ short and rounded, suitable for flying among branches. FEET In som > = They use it ta | with their bi y a a FEATHERS AND COLORS They have toug} lustrous plumag 1 abundan en feathers helps them to c leaves. In we America ues of blue, hide amo the array of colors include yellow, and red. HOOKED BILL 78 DIVERSITY AND DISTRIBUTION The Perchers Club asserines—or Passeriformes, the scientific name—form the widest and most diverse order What distinguishes them? Their feet are suited for perching and, therefore, for living among tr although they can also stroll on the ground and through the brush. They inhabit terrestrial — environments all over the world, from deserts to groves. Their complex sounds and songs originate from « very well-developed syrinx. Their chicks are nidicolous—that is, naked and blind at birth. In their youth, they are agile and vivacious, with very attractive, abundant, and colorful plumage. — THE SMALLEST Passerines are small in comparison with other birds. Their size varies from 2 inches (5 cm) (bee hummingbirds, Mellisuga helenae) to 7 inches (19 cm) (Chilean swallow, Tachycineta leucopyga) to 26 inches (65 cm) (common raven, Corvus corax). RAVENS 26 in (65 cm) They eat everything: fruits, insects, reptiles, small mammals, and birds. They are skillful robbers of all kinds of food. HUMMINGBIRDS 2 in (5 cm) SWALLOWS 7 in (19 c They get so much energy from Swallows have great nectar that they can double agility and skill. These their body weight by eating. popular migratory birds However, they use this energy have bodies suited for up during their frantic flights. long trips. Family Album Four basic groups have been established to facilitate the study of families: passerines with wide bills; ovenbirds, whose plumage is dull and brown (ovenbirds are noted for the great care they take in building nests); lyrebirds, whose tails have two external feathers that are longer than the others; and songbirds, with their elaborate and pleasant singing. Songbirds form the most numerous and varied group; it includes swallows, goldfinches, canaries, vireos, and ravens. PASSERIFORMES BIRDS Passerines have been classified into 79 families, with more than 5,400 different species. D0 % THE PERCENTAGE OF BIRDS THAT ARE INCLUDED IN THE ORDER PASSERIFORMES ~LYREBIRDS There are only two species of these Passeriformes, and they are found only in Australia. They are very melodic and are excellent imitators of other birds. They can even imitate the sound of inanimate objects, such as horses’ hooves. PERCHING FOOT Three toes project forward, and the well-developed hallux projects backward. This type of foot allows the bird to hold on tightly to branches. 4 WIDE BILLS They are native to Africa and Asia and inhabit tropical zones with dense vegetation. They eat insects and fruits. They produce nonvocal sounds with the flapping of their wings. They do this during courtship, and the sound can be heard 200 feet (60 m) away. “They: range from one hemisphere to the Oe: “other, They raise their chicks in the north and fly to the south to spend winter there. They fly all the way to Tierra del Fuego. Their sense of direction is remarkable. They can find and reuse their nests after returning from a migration. gener. birds perfo BARN SWALLOW (Hirundo rustica) (22.0 Barn swallows spend most of their time traveling to temperate zones. State south, and South America. The barn swallow travels 14,000 miles Bronchial — Muscles Bronchial Ring In the summer, during the reproductive season, they live in the Northern Hemisphere on the American continent. In al, neotropical migratory are those that reproduce above the Tropic of Cancer. When winter arrives in the Northern Hemisphere, they rm a mass migration to the occupying the Caribbean ,000 km) during its migratory trip from the United Ss to southern Argentina. OVENBIRDS AND THEIR RELATIVES Their nests are completely covered structures, similar to ovens. Other members of this family build nests with leaves and straw, weaving interesting baskets. Still others dig tunnels in the ground. ROBIN CHICKS (Erithacus rubecula) 82-83 88-89 Although their natural habitats are humid groves, they usually seek 84-85 90-91 shelter in cities, always close to water. 86-87 82 HUMANS AND BIRDS Rites and Beliefs Birds have long enjoyed a prominent place in religion—first as totems and then as iconic representations of gods. Many religions have featured deities with the wings or heads of birds. Birds were also celestial messengers, and the future was interpreted through their flights. The crow was Apollo's messenger in ancient Greece; the Maya and Aztecs had Quetzalcéatl, their supreme god, who was named after the quetzal (a brightly colored Central American bird); and the Egyptians represented their fundamental god Horus with a falcon. FENGHUANG QUETZAL GARUDA FRESCO was the messenger bird of Pictured above is a detail of a Pictured above is a : Xi Wangmu, goddess of Mayan ceramic piece featuring winged deity, featured on a ’ fertility and eternity in quetzals, Mesoamerican birds fragment of a mural from ancient China. A detail of a with long green tails, from which, the Hindu temple of painting in the caves of according to myth, the god Garuda, in Ananta ~ Mogao, Dunhuang, China, Quetzalcéatl took his clothing and Samarkhom, es is pictured above. name: “feathered serpent.” Bangkok, Thailand.” ¥ Bird Symbolism Throughout history and across cultures, human beings have used birds to symbolize several concepts. The fascination that their flight creates was source of inspiration for such interpretations. Tod strongest and most widespread association is the flight of birds with freedom. In distant times (and distant times), however, birds have represented ma things, from fertility and happiness, with their sprin to deep mourning, in the case of crows and vult Wisdom has been associated with owls, and shi with crows. According to a certain modern tal e, sto responsible for bringing babies, and eggs are the un symbol of gestation. Pa aid EAGLE In Greek mythology, it was the symbol of Zeus. The Romans used it on their legions’ banners. For many native North American cultures, it represented war, and it was the emblem of feudal lords and emperors. Today it is the national symbol of Mexico and the United States. DOVE S} Doves currently stand for peace, but in ancient Greece, Syria, and Phoenicia, they were used as oracles. In Mesopotamia and Babylon, they embodied fertility. For Christians, they symbolize the Holy Spirit and the Virgin Mary. Birds and Human Culture irds fly, sing, dance, and have showy plumage. Because of these qualities, they have fascinated human beings throughout history. Some species, such as eagles, have played an important role in world literature because of their aggressiveness and beauty. Some birds have also been assigned symbolic meanings: doves, which currently represent peace, are one example. Human beings have also been able to make use of birds. In the past, they were often used by sailors to find land, and in other cases they were trained to hunt. e - ' Falconry This practice originated in Asia, in the homeland of the nomadic Mongols—descendants of Genghis Khan—where, to this day, it is commonly used as a form of subsistence by part of the population. It consists of using birds of prey (mainly falcons) to hunt. Trained birds are typically carried, hooded, and perched on their masters’ arms. When released, they fly at high altitudes looking for prey, and then dive toward the ground to hunt it. They carry the prey back to their masters, who reward them with food. The basic training process takes a little over a month and a half. HORUS, THE FALCON, is an important god in Egyptian mythology. His eyes represent the sun Dressing Up in Feathers Almost all cultures have used bird feathers for decorative and ritualistic purposes. Their use as ornaments extended to North and South America, Africa, and the Western Pacific. North American indigenous peoples featured them on their war outfits, Hawaian kings wore them on their royal costumes, and the Mayans and Aztecs used them in works of art. bod wy COMPETITOR BIRDS as When birds share a habitat with humans, they often compete for resources (light, water, space, and nutrients). a 3 This is the case with birds -_ that feed on cultivated ; crops. Urban areas, which . have buildings that offer good nesting sites, attract 8 many birds. This fact can be commonly observed in squares and open spaces, where pigeons and sparrows form veritable flocks. r- and the moon, and together with Sethhe ELEMENTS watches over the boat of Ra, which carries the - : ete ific cloth dead away on the Nile. Wry i . dy irds and masters wear specific clothes. Seer eS A , In addition to gloves, hoods, and straps, . ; wd Roe radio transmitters are now also used to Ww : : hy locate the birds as they fly. @ PIGEON Sometimes their numbers in urban areas become excessive. SPARROW The sparrow is one of the birds best adapted to the urban environment. NORTH AMERICAN INDIGENOUS MAN wearing a war costume covered with feathers | environment. "i UMANS AND BIRDS ow to Get to Know Birds _ rnithology (from the Greek ornitho, “bird,” and logos, “science”) is a branch of zoology that studies birds. Ornithologists and a great number of bird lovers, who enthusiastically want to know more about these creatures, carry out the task methodically and patiently. They observe, analyze, and register birds’ sounds, colors, movements, and behavior in their natural environments. To undertake this fieldwork, they develop methods and techniques and use technological resources to track pte ie te STUDIES om +) Many studies on anatomy, physiology, and genetics of specimens and different bird species ; nucse Gees are carried out in happens to the laboratories. times of the year. — Although seemingly a ih « small detail, clothes can be a hindrance. They CAMERA WITH ZOOM LENS A camera with a powerful lens provides the opportunity to record details that simple cameras cannot. BINOCULARS They make it possible to see details in color and shape without disturbing the birds. Their usefulness depends on the power of their lenses. Catching Birds MIST NET These fine nets are usually placed over swamps or marshes, and they can catch small birds. Once the birds are identified with a ring or some other tag, they are set free. CANNON NETS These nets are “shot” over birds using cannons or rockets. They unroll and catch birds as they are eating or resting. They are used to catch large birds. HELIGOLAND TRAP ists of a large barbed- innel or corridor that in a box. Birds caught like this are tagged so that they can be monitored and studied later on. Scientists take ge of molting to study ey are changing irds stand on their it difficult to e any rings on ic chips are planted in their skin. The latter technique is less harmful because it does 7) : hurting the bird or causing it nge its activity. not potentially hinde the animal. BIRDS 85 The Marking of Captured Birds This technique provides data on migration, survival, and reproduction rates, among other data. The bird should not suffer adverse effects in its behavior, longevity, or social interactions. Under no circumstances should this en procedure hurt a bird. To avoid hurting birds, rings are designed to be placed on them rapidly and easily, yet to stay in place until the research is completed. RINGED Numbered aluminum rings are used. When placing one ona bird, one should make sure that it slides and turns around the tibiotarsus to avoid WING MARKERS They are very visible and can be codified for individual identification. They stay on the bird = of time and are normally used on birds of prey. NECK MARKERS When placed appropriately, necklaces are effective markers with few adverse effects on geese, swans, or other aquatic birds with long necks. NASAL MARKERS These are colored, numbered plastic disks placed on the bill. They are fastened to the nasal orifices of aquatic birds. PAINTS AND DYES Birds that visit environments with dense vegetation are normally marked with nontoxic colorings on the feathers of their highest and most visible body parts. eS ener az - = ~ — “? - : we ow > oa os 86 HUMANS AND BIRDS BIRDS 87 Among Us PARKS AND GARDENS Royal peacocks and green peafowls share these places, where they can find the microhabitats of The Urban Environment I This setting is characterized by environmental and climatic factors that are different from the natural ones. It has more varieties of plants, higher average he urban environment presents opportunities for birds. It offers advantages In finding food and insects on which they feed. Parks and gardens may temperatures, less wind, more rain, cloudier skies, and less shelter. People, young and old, give bread crumbs to these interested visitors. When birds come Have pans Mat ateivistted hy otter Diu species a solar radiation, Polluted air and soil are harmful factors for — : : . . . e . well. Few species nest in these places because these both humans and birds. to cities, houses and parks offer them protection. They can find more options when it comes to spaces offer little quiet. building a nest. Seagulls and owls have changed their behavior by adapting to the city, and other species, such as some sparrows, are no longer able to survive without a human presence. However, not everything is an advantage. In the city, birds have to face dangers and obstacles that do not exist in ree tia were originally migratory, but as 10% 15% 1.5° H H . li . 4 RAIN WIND TEMPERATURE their natural habitat: a utility wire or a car can be fatal. thy ated ae oe TenreRs nonmigratory. DECREASE DOWNTOWN GROVE Where to Find Them URBAN CENTERS With the arrival of cold weather, different bird species from the countryside and the mountains come to the city. In general, they stay until the beginning of spring. In the winter, more birds, such as In big cities, groups of birds can be found in different areas. Busy and noisy areas, such as squares, parks, and gardens, attract many species. Calm, deserted spaces, such as cemeteries or deserted buildings, are chosen by Ghiffchafis) great tits, and robing, caniée observed in cities SPARROWS birds in search of peace. Other places where birds choose to eat and sleep include Small birds with a plots and landfills with lots of food, as well as nooks in high places, such as highly varied diet balconies, belfries, and roosts. FALCONS Diurnal birds of prey. They nest on the roofs of high buildings. PLOTS AND CEMETERIES Plants with seeds usually grow in these places, which are located far from urban centers. For this reason, magpies and nightingales favor them. DAY/NIGHT Artificial night lighting intensifies birds' activities. They organize their tasks according to street lighting. PIGEONS spend a lot of time together. They are granivores but eat all kinds of food. SWIFTS are insectivores. They catch their prey in flight. ABANDONED BUILDING nest in holes or crannies, always near water. STORKS build their on rooftops. >. ROBINS NN They get close only \ to find food. Their \ trills and plumage Population Control are attractive. ests Without enough predators and with an abundance of food, urban bird populations grow exponentially. FEEDER WITH DIET f | FRUITS Some species, which are 9 veritable strategists, benefit for Ei tivities. F RAVENS, CROWS, AND rom ae ad ay af RELATED BIRDS example, seagulls can feed on LIVE IN MOSCOW. garbage; great tits drink milk from containers by adroitly uncapping them; and some magpies have learned to tear l 60 ¢ ¢ ¢ cardboard containers to eat 9 SEAGULLS usually fight among themselves for the food they get from landfills. OWLS LANDFILL Belfries or abandoned the eggs inside. Laer buildings are the homes or DESCEND ON THE SQUARES AND STREETS OF BARCELONA. dormitories of these birds. j 88 HUMANS AND BIRDS a BIRDS 89 2" le When porapaed to other farm animals, birds grow and reproduce easily. They need to have a place with appropriate | temperature, humidity, a ett in order | } Bird Domesticators 4 Sa have been selectively *. bred by humans for he breeding of birds in captivity has great social and ee: ae ae ao economic value. This activity is carried out/alljover the cam WA cnn NN Pa) we on industrial poultry farms and family farm ba f) fl i my raised for consumption and sale. A great variety of domestic birds 1 have been developed from species inhabiting natural environments. | We use their flesh and eggs as food and their feathers in coats to protect us against the cold. We also use birds for communication and as colorful and melodic pets. They are so dependent on people that in some cases they cannot survive when they are freed. to yield the desired amount of meat or eggs. For this reason, it is necessary to maintain continuous environmental and sanitary Control == of the area in which they are bred, Ideally they should be able to walk, run, scratch the earth in search of food, and take sunbaths. Additionally, to protect them from predators and from inclen ent awecttier, it is important to\shelter At Your Service fe Domestic birds have been bred from the following orders: Galliformes (hens, quails, turkeys, and pheasants), Anseriformes (ducks and geese), Columbiformes (pigeons), Passeriformes (canaries), and Psittaciformes (parakeets and parrots). In poultry farming, they are divided according to their use: barnyard birds (Galliformes, Anseriformes, and Columbiformes) and companion birds or pets (Passeriformes and Psittaciformes). Commercial poultry farming of barnyard birds generates high revenues worldwide. Farmers can take advantage of the fact that birds are very active during the day, MIXED DIET ~ that they readily live in groups, and that they : Birds look for insects and have a high reproductive rate due to polygamous plant shoots as they peck behavior. Pets have commercial appeal, with the soil. The breeder their colorful plumage, ability to express TURKEY GOOSE DUCK Y complements this diet 4 Ten es drink 7, oad we 05 Ja ’ 1) of w he farmer ae them with water in We which co themselves, and friendliness toward humans. On the American continent, Contemporary domestic These birds are an with ptitionglly These characteristics make them much- these birds were domesticated breeds descend from wild important source of — appreciated pets. by the indigenous pre- Asian and eastern Lid rt bas ee ae Columbians from a wild European species. They are eee out Mexican species called voracious, which makes. consumption anductsis Meleagris gallopavo gallopavo. fattening them easy. less widespread. BIRD FLU This disease, also called avian influenza A, PATHS INTO THE BODY Conjunctiva SIZE COMPARISON is caused by a virus whose strains have Digestive Tract Respiratory Tract ) various levels of virulence. It Urogenital Tract Needles Bacteria disseminated from Asian markets, where Skin Virus Wounds the overcrowding of domestic birds is common. This promoted the spread of the disease to wild birds. As of 2006, more than 30 million birds had succumbed to this disease. Cats, pigs, and human beings have also been infected. The domestication of birds is a very old activity, as shown by records from different cultures in different parts of the world. It was related to the adoption of a sedentary way of life by human populations. 4 The virus can be transmitted to the most common of domestic birds: chickens. The H5N1 virus is transmitted to 5000 BC 2000 BC 1492 AIRMAIL For more than 1,700 years, human humans through beings have used pigeons to send THE COMMOTION AND H Fi y i messages. Armies have used them FEAR OVER DISEASE ne econ ‘ I Far East Mexico as communication aids during HAVE REDUCED THE Ducks carry the : : e records — Descendants of the royal The Spanish colonizers wars. Pigeon keeping is the DEMAND FOR THE H5N1 virus but domestic geese duck (Anas platyrhynchos) _ encountered turkeys practice of breeding and preparing CONSUMPTION OF PreuiMonente Ada: cinni d Aicated in thi d Rieatedib pigeons to become messengers, a DOMESTIC BIRDS IN oe Wy eeeeening §=were'comes: ical geal b Is : ones ey, task that makes the most of their MAJOR EUROPEAN this disease. 5000 BC. area of the Asian continent inhabitants of the agility and intelligence. CITIES BY HALF. (what is now China). New World. ~ 3 —_ 90 HUMANS AND BIRDS the world's avifauna is to learn about the extinction of birds and its magnitude. @ The Most Important Causes Fl Birds are very sensitive to changes in their habitats, Leff and this is the main cause of extinction (87 percent of species are affected by it). Excessive hunting is another of the greatest dangers, affecting 29 percent of the endangered species in the world. The introduction of foreign species is yet another major danger, jeopardizing 28 percent of species. In addition, the intervention of human beings through the destruction of habitats and the introduction of pollution combined with the occurrence of California natural disasters harms more than 10 percent of species. POISONING Most birds of prey 666666686 are endangered by oe 86 om egies Pesticides are ; Pesticides the excessive use of sprayed on crops nonbiodegradable to eliminate pests, pesticides. and they stick to the seeds. Granivorous Birds NORTH AMERICA UNITED STATES Endangered Species ince early civilization, people have affected the Earth's environment. The cutting of trees in rainforests and woodlands has destroyed many bird habitats, the loss of which is the leading cause of bird extinctions today. Also, the introduction of animals such as cats, dogs, and rats to new areas has created a threat for many bird species. Indirect poisoning with pesticides, the trafficking of exotic birds as pets, and the sale of feathers have done further damage to many species. Fortunately, all is not lost. The first step to conserving CALIFORNIA CONDOR Gymnogyps californianus Until 1978, there were 30 specimens in the wild. Bred in captivity, new specimens have been set free since 1993. Their adaptation is being studied. Atlantic Ocean Everplades @ HYACINTH MACAW Anodorhynchus hyacinthinus It is estimated that 1,000 to 9,000 specimens live in CENTRAL : the Amazon. AMERICA Pacific Ocean COLOMBIA Small quantities of e e w poison in seeds accumulate in larger ECUADOR x "4 amounts in birds and other Birds of Prey granivorous animals. PERU C-— ROYAL CINCLODES Cinclodes aricomae live on humid mountain ranges, ie chee MANGROVE FINCH at altitudes between 11,500 and in tah eas Camarhynchus heliobates 15,000 feet (3,500-4,500 m). easing | There are about 100 Their number is unknown. pesticides impacts aes f hunting birds the remaining species on the most. Galapagos Islands. SOUTH PEREGRINE ANE FALCON @ Nahuel Huapi e SAVING THE PEREGRINE FALCON FROM EXTINCTION B | r d 1942 1960 1970 1986 INTERNATIONATI There were 350 Peregrine falcons Falcons were 850 birds were BirdLife International couples of disappeared in the wild bred in captivity set free in the It monitors endangered species and peregrine because of excessive at Cornell southern develops conservation programs. falcons in the use of pesticides University, tobe United States. United States. (DDT and dieldrin). set free later. BIRDS 91 CLASSIFICATION OF RISK EXTINCT BIRDS ly m Extinct in the Wild Critical Risk Endangered Vulnerable Although the responsibility ISG, cs ma eN yl * Species surviving Extinction is Fast-decreasing _High risk of of human beings is LPS ot ‘ only in captivity imminent population extinction in the wild undeniable, many species became extinct because of natural phenomena. BIRDS OF THE WORLD However, all the extinctions 7,775 1,212 4 179 from the 18th century to date j Non-endangered Endangered Extinct in At critical are related to human activities. Dodo from species (or no species the wild risk Mauritius information Quickly available) 679 788 Vulne: Species about to be endangered EUROPE INDIAN VULTURE Gyps indicus Its population has decreased significantly as a result of the veterinary use of diclofenac. The vulture eats the carrion of animals treated with this drug and becomes poisoned. rable AFRICA @ Prince Albert Tsavo @ Serengeti @ Wankie @ @ Kriiger 20 4 100 + A 80 + Alarming Data §@ Five percent of the planet's surface = ¢g (Lefl houses three fourths of endangered species. This area coincides with tropical 2 ees oo 40 + regions where biodiversity is greater. For this reason, tropical countries top the list to the right. On some islands, the 20 + proportion of endangered birds is very high: in the Philippines and in New Zealand, 0 it includes 35 to 42 percent of avian fauna. 350 l Endangered MALAYSIAN COCKATOO ———O Cacatua haematuropygid PHILIPPINES It is estimated that there are : between 1,000 and 4,000 indian individuals remaining. It was Ocean hunted indiscriminately. INDONESIA exterminated by colonizers and SPECIES HAVE GONE EXTINCT SINCE THE 18TH CENTURY. seafarers in the 17th century ASIA Pacific Ocean BENGAL VULTURE Gyps bengalensis From 1996 to date, its population has fallen by 95 percent, especially in India. CHINA } Celebes LEGEND @ SHELTERS AND SANCTUARIES FOR ENDANGERED BIRDS YELLOW-CRESTED COCKATOO Cacatua.sulphurea 2.0% In three generations, its population fell by 80 percent because of hunting. 1s is OF THE EARTH'S aie hy ISLAND SURFACE IS HOME TO ALL vo Anas nesiotis ENDANGERED 78 76 75 Indonesia Brazil Colombia China Peru BIRD SPECIES. Only 50 individuals remain OCEANIA _ because of the introduction of mammals to the island. 74 NEW ZEALAND 42 35 25 20 India Philippines Ecuador New United Zealand States 92 GLOSSARY Glossary Adaptation Change in the body of a bird or another animal that allows it to reproduce better in a given environment Adaptive Radiation Evolution of an initial species, adapted to a given way of life, into other species, each adapted to its own way of life Aerodynamic Having an appropriate shape to decrease resistance to the air. Birds' bodies are aerodynamic. Alulae Rigid feathers whose function is to decrease air turbulence during flight Amino Acid Molecule from which proteins are produced Ancestor Progenitor, more or less remote, that passes down a set of characteristics to its descendants Angle of Attack The change in position of a bird's wing to increase or decrease speed and altitude while hunting prey by air Apterylae Naked areas of the skin where feathers do not grow Atrophy Significant decrease in the size of an organ. The wings of nonflying birds have undergone atrophy during evolution. Barbs Thin, straight, parallel blades, perpendicular to the shaft. They resemble the leaves of a palm tree. Bill Hard cover of a bird's mandibles; also called the bill. Biodiversity Variety of species that live in a given natural or artificial environment Biogeographic Regions Geographic regions that biologists analyze to determine the distribution of animals and other living organisms, according to the geographic conditions of a place. Migratory birds usually travel through different biogeographic regions between winter and summer. Biped Aero-terrestrial animal that walks on its posterior limbs. Birds are bipeds. Briny Water sample or body of water containing between 0.08 and 4.25 ounces (0.5-30 g) of salt per gallon of aqueous solution Bronchus Each of the branches into which the trachea divides. The syrinx originates in the bronchi. Calamus The lower part of the vane that is wider, hollow, and, in general, naked. The feather is attached to the skin through the calamus. Camouflage A characteristic that enables the animal to blend into its environment. It allows the animal to go unnoticed in the presence of predators. Carnivore An animal that feeds on meat Carrion The remains of dead animals used as food by some birds or other animals. Vultures are scavengers (i.e., animals that feed on carrion). Center of Gravity Point at which the sum of all the gravitational forces that act on a body converge Cere Thin skin layer that covers the base of the bill Chick A baby bird that has just come out of the eggshell and that has not yet left the nest. Its diet and safety depend on its parents. Chorion One of the coverings that wraps the embryo of reptiles, birds, and mammals Class One of the many divisions scientists use to classify animals. Birds form a class of their own. Climate Average temperature, humidity, and pressure that determine the atmospheric conditions of a region and that are related to other geographic characteristics of that region Cloaca The widened and dilatable final portion of the intestine of a bird or other animal in which the urinogenital tubes converge Courtship Behavior patterns that males and females follow to try to attract partners Coverts Layers of contour feathers that provide a bird's body and wings with support and an aerodynamic surface Crepuscular Active at dawn or twilight, when there is little light Crest Extended or raised feathers located on the upper part of a bird's head Crop Membranous sac that communicates with a bird's esophagus, where food is softened Dermal Papilla Structure from which a feather develops. It is composed of epidermal and dermal cells. Display Behavior directed at attracting the attention of a partner. It can also be done to threaten or distract another animal. Distribution Place where a species is located. It includes the area the species occupies in different seasons. Down Feather A very thin and light feather, similar to silk, that birds have underneath their external plumage. Down feathers constitute the first plumage of chicks. Ecosystem Community of living beings whose vital processes are interrelated and develop according to the physical factors of the same environment Egg Large rounded shell, laid by a female bird, that contains a yolk and a white. If fertilized, the egg has a tiny embryo that will develop into a chick (the chick feeds itself on the yolk and white). When ready, the chick will break the eggshell. Egg Tooth Sharp calcium growth, in the shape of a tooth, that forms on the tip of a chick's bill during the embryonic phase. The chick uses the egg tooth to break its shell at birth. Environment The natural conditions, such as vegetation and land, that surround animals and influence their development and behavior Epiphysis Endocrine gland located below the corpus callosum in the brain. It produces a hormone that regulates sexual activity. Evolution Gradual process of change that a species undergoes to adjust to the environment Extinct No longer existing. Many bird species are now extinct (for example, ictiornites). Feather Each unit of the covering (plumage) of a bird. The feathers are composed of a hard substance called keratin. They have a long quill, to which two blades are joined. The blades—formed by a great number of barbs, uniformly distributed—give the feather its shape and color. Fertilization Union of the reproductive cells of a male and a female that will create a new individual Field Mark Natural distinct feature or artificial identification of an individual of a bird species BIRDS 93 that helps ornithologists distinguish it from other individuals of the same or other avian species Fledgling Very young bird that lives in the nest where it was raised Fossils Vestiges of ancient creatures of different types (vegetal or animal) on a stone substratum. Fossils can be found in the geologic strata of the Earth's surface. Gastric Juice Set of fluids produced by the stomach glands of birds and other animals Gizzard Muscular stomach of a bird. It is very robust, especially in granivores, and it is used to grind and soften the food by means of mechanical pressure. The food arrives at the gizzard mixed with digestive juices. Gland Type of structure that is present in most multicellular living beings. It produces substances that act either inside or outside a bird's body. Gonad Organ that makes male or female gametes. In birds, the testicles and ovaries are gonads. Granivore Bird that feeds on seeds or grains. Many birds are granivores (for example, parrots and toucans). Gular Sac Skin fragment in the shape of a sac that hangs from the lower mandible of certain birds (for example, pelicans) 94 GLOSSARY Habitat Native or natural environment of an animal or plant Hatching Cracking of the eggshell so that the bird cancome out Histologic Related to tissues and their study. When the anatomy of a bird is studied, the tissues that form the bird's organs are analyzed. Hormones Secretion of certain glands that circulates through the body. They excite, inhibit, or regulate the activities of organs or of systems of organs. Horn Made of horn or of a consistency similar to that of horn. The bill of birds is hornlike. Hypophysis Internal secretion organ located at the hollow of the skull's base (called silla turca). It is composed of two lobes: one anterior and glandular and the other posterior and nervous. The hormones produced by the hypophysis influence growth and sexual development, among other things. Hypothalamus Region of the encephalon located at the cerebral base, joined to the hypophysis by a nerve stem, in which important centers for vegetative life are found Incubation The act of keeping the eggs warm so that the embryos inside can grow and hatch. Usually the chick's parents use their own bodies to warm the eggs, but some birds use sand or decomposing plants to cover them. Insectivore Bird that eats insects as part of its diet Instinct Innate behavior that a bird or other animal develops and that is not learned. The offspring of ducks start to swim by instinct. Invertebrate Animal that lacks a spinal column. Worms, crabs, and jellyfish are examples. Lethargy Sleep through which a bird can reduce its cardiac rhythm and its body temperature to save energy, especially at night and during extended periods of cold Malpighian Layer Layer of epithelial cells that forms the bird's epidermis Mangrove Swamp Type of ecosystem often considered a type of biome. It is composed of trees that are very tolerant to salt. These trees are found in the intertidal zone of tropical coasts. Areas with mangrove swamps include estuaries and coastal zones. Migration The movement of birds from one region to another; it usually takes place in the spring and fall. It is also common among other species of animals. Molt Process through which birds lose old worn feathers, replacing them with new ones Monogamous Birds that mate with only one individual of the opposite sex. Many penguins have monogamous behavior. Morphology Study of the form of an object or structure. For instance, the morphology of the feet of birds is an area of study. Nectar Sweet and sugary secretions found in flowers that attract birds and other animals. Hummingbirds feed on nectar. Nidicolous A helpless chick that depends on its parents’ care after birth Nidifugous A chick that can move and leave the nest as soon as it breaks its shell. In less than a day, such chicks can move agilely. Nocturnal Active at night. Many birds of prey, such as owls, specialize in nocturnal hunting. Nutrient Any substance obtained through diet that participates in the vital functions of a living being. Omnivore Bird that has a varied diet, including animal and vegetal foods Pelagic Birds that live in areas over open waters, away from the coast Pellet (Bolus) Small, hard mass that some birds regurgitate (vomit). It contains parts of the food that they could not digest, such as bones, fur, feathers, and teeth. Pigment Substance that colors the skin, feathers, or tissues of animals and plants Piscivore Birds living in continental or oceanic waters that feed on fish Pollution A consequence of human actions for natural environments. The emission of industrial gases into the atmosphere, for example, produces pollution. Polygamy Reproductive relationship between one animal of one sex and several animals of the other. When one male mates with several females, it is called polygyny. Only rarely do females have multiple male reproductive partners (polyandry). Population Set of individuals of the same species that live together in the same space at the same time Predator Animal that hunts other animals. Birds of prey hunt other birds, mammals, and vertebrates. Prey Animal hunted by another to serve as food for the latter. Animals that hunt prey are called predators. Protein Organic macromolecule that is part of living beings. By including proteins in their diet, birds get the necessary amino acids to build their own organs. Protein Cord Embryonic structure: each of the two filaments that sustain the yolk of the egg within the white Proventriculus The first portion of the stomach, or the true stomach, of a bird. The other portion of a bird's stomach is the gizzard. Rectrices Technical term used by ornithologists to describe a bird's tail feathers Scale Dermic or epidermic layer that totally or partially covers the feet of birds. They are reptilian vestiges. Song Sound or series of sounds produced by a bird to demarcate its territory or to find a mate. The songs of birds can be simple or elaborate, and some are very melodic. Songbirds Singing birds. Passerines include songbirds. Species Set of individuals that recognize themselves as belonging to the same reproductive unit Sternum Central chest bone. The sternum of flying birds has a large surface in which muscles are inserted. Survival A bird's ability to face the demands of its environment and of intra- and interspecies relationships Swamp Depression on the ground in which water is gathered, sometimes called a marsh. Its bottom is more or less boggy. It is the habitat of many wading birds. Thermal Hot air current that rises. Many birds make use of it to gain height effortlessly. BIRDS 95 Theropods Group to which carnivorous dinosaurs belong Training Teaching an animal new skills. Carrier pigeons are trained. Tundra Vast plains without trees in the Arctic regions of northern Asia, Europe, and North America Uropygial Gland Produces an oily secretion that birds, using their bills, spread on their feathers to make them impermeable Vertebrate Animals that have a spinal column, such as birds, fish, reptiles, amphibians, and mammals Virus Infectious agent that depends on a living being to reproduce. Avian flu is transmitted this way. Vulnerable Birds that are endangered in their natural habitats Yolk Yellow part of the egg. If the egg is fertilized, a small embryo grows that will use the yolk (and white) as food. Young Bird or any other animal at an early stage of life. Some young show color patterns that are very different from that of adults of the same species, which makes it difficult for predators to identify them. 96 INDEX BIRDS 97 Index A adaptation aquatic life, 5 cellulose digestion, 57 environment, 66 flightless birds, 29 flying, 8f, 12, 24-25 foot, 20-21 hatching, 53 marine birds, 70, 71 perching, 13, 79 swimming, 68 urban habitats, 83 walking, 7 adaptive radiation, 62 aero-terrestrial habitat, 65 African ostrich flightless birds, 68-69 weight, 8 Afrotropic region, 67 albatross birth, 52 classification, 64 gliding, 35 incubation (egg), 52 migration routes, 59 wings, 29 altitudinal migration, 58 anatomy external features, 8-9 internal organs, 14-15 skeleton and musculature, 12-13 See also specific body parts by name, for example, wing ankle, 21 annual life cycle, 42-43 Anseriformes (bird classification), 64, 72 Antarctic bird: See penguin apteria, 27 Apterygiformes (bird classification), 65, 69 aquatic bird classification, 64, 65 foot adaptation, 20 physical adaptations, 5 powder down, 27 See also marine bird arboreal theory (evolution), 24 Archaeopteryx, 10-11 arctic tern, migration, 39, 58 aricari, bill, 19 artery, 15 Asia bird domestication, 89 migration routes, 59 Australasia, 67 Australian bowerbird, courtship behavior, 46 avian influenza A, 88 Aztec culture, 82 B bald eagle birds of prey, 74 talons, 21 bar-headed goose flight altitude, 38 migration routes, 59 barn swallow, migration, 58, 59, 79 bat, wing, 24 beak: See bill Bengal vulture, 91 bill, 18-19 birds of prey, 74 ducks, 73 food filtration, 56 identification, 9 modern bird, 12 parrot, 76 binocular vision, 17 binoculars, 84 biodiversity endangered species, 90-91 geographical regions, 66-67 running birds, 69 biogeographic region, 66-67 bird flu: See avian influenza A bird of prey, 74-75 pesticide poisoning, 90 vision, 17 birdcall, communication, 44 warnings, 61 birdsong, communication, 44-45 birdwatching, 84 black grouse, courtship display, 31 black swan, flight speed, 38 blackbird, urban habitats, 87 blood circulation: See circulatory system blue-and-white swallow, 80 blue-footed booby, courtship behavior, 43 bone: See skeletal system brain Archaeopteryx, 10 sound production, 44 breathing: See respiratory system brown pelican, 70 Bubo capensis, 6, 7 Buffon, Georges-Louis Leclerc, Count de, 66 C California condor, captive breeding, 90 call: See birdcall camera, 84 camouflage defense strategies, 60 molting, 32 Campbell Island teal, 91 canary, 88 cannon net, 85 Cape gannet marine birds, 70 migration routes, 58 captive breeding, 90 carnivorous bird gizzard, 14 See also bird of prey carpal bone, 13 carpometacarpus, 13 Caspian tern, migration routes, 59 Casuariiformes (bird classification), 65, 69 Central America, migration routes, 58 Charadriiformes (bird classification), 64, 65, 73 China, birds in symbolism, 82 chough, flight altitude, 38 circulatory system, 15 classification, 64-65 claw, 21 climbing, foot adaptation, 20 cockatoo, endangered species, 91 collarbone Archaeopteryx, 11 modern bird, 12-13 coloration, 77 flesh, 12 seasonal changes, 32 common loon, 70 common spoonbill, feeding, 73 common waxbill, 20 communication, 44-45 compass-and-triangulation system (migration), 59 condor captive breeding, 90 dimensions, 75 contour (feather), 26 coracoid, 13 courtship, 46-47 annual life cycle, 43 black grouse, 31 hummingbird, 37 tail feathers 30 covert (feather), 26 crane courtship behavior, 47 migration routes, 59 crop (esophagus), 14 crossbill, bill, 19 curlew sandpiper, migration routes, 59 cursory theory (evolution), 24 D Darwin, Charles, 10 data collection, 85 defense camouflage: See camouflage claw, 21 individual behavior, 60 group behavior, 61 diet, 56-57 adaptation of bill, 18 courtship food, 46 dive fishing, 71 flight needs, 36-37 nidicolous birds, 55 nidifugous birds, 54 Universe of Birds, 5 digestive process, 14 digestive system, 14-15 dinosaur fossil, 10 diurnal bird of prey, 74 See also specific birds by name, for example, eagle diving bird, 73 dodo, 91 domestication, 88-89 dove, symbolism, 83 down (feather), 26 duck feeding, 62, 72 human consumption, 88 swimming mechanism, 72 dust bath, 27 E eagle birds of prey, 74-75 carrying ability, 25 feeding strategies, 57 migration routes, 59 speed, 39 symbolism, 82-83 talons, 20, 21 ear external anatomy, 9 senses, 16 egg, 50-51 incubation, 52 egg tooth, 53 Egyptian mythology, birds in symbolism, 82-83 eider, flight speed, 38 embryo formation, 50-51 endangered species, 90-91 epiphysis: See pineal gland equipment, bird watching, 84-85 esophagus, crop, 14 Eurasian eagle owl, 74 Europe, migration routes, 58-59 evolution, 10-1] flight adaptation theories, 24 excretory system, 14 extinction, risk, 91 See also endangered species eye, 17 eyesight: See vision F falcon bill, 19 speed, 39 urban habitats, 86 falconry, 82 false knee: See ankle farm production, 88-89 feather camouflage, 60 color, 77 external anatomy, 8-9 flight, 26-27 growth and molting, 32-33 human uses, 83 parrot, 22-23 seasonal color changes, 32 98 INDEX BIRDS 99 tail function, 30 See also tail feeding strategy, 57 femur, 13 finch, 90 fish, in diet, 57 fishing method, 71 flamingo bill, 19 food filtration system, 56 milk feeding, 56-57 flapping flight, 36-37 flapping wing, 12 flight, 22-39 adaptations and mechanisms, 8, 12 diet, 56-57 oxygen needs, 14 See also wing flight pattern, 35 flightless bird, 68-69 geographic distribution, 67 wings, 29 flying animal, 25 foot, 20-21 Archaeopteryx, 11 birds of prey, 75 external anatomy, 9 marine adaptations, 70 perching adaptations, 13, 79 skeleton and musculature, 13 zygodactyl, 77 fossil record bones, 24 German findings, 10 freshwater bird, 72-73 frigatebird, reproductive season, 43 fruit, in diet, 57 fulvous whistling duck, 72-73 furculum: See collarbone G Galliformes (bird classification), 65, 69 geographic distribution, 66-67 Passerines, 79 Germany, fossil findings, 10 gizzard, types, 14 gliding, 34-35 golden plover flight endurance, 39 migration routes, 58 goose domestic breeds, 88 flight altitude, 38 flight pattern, 35 goshawk birds of prey, 74 courtship behavior, 46 grain food, 57 granivorous bird, gizzard, 14 grasping mechanism, 13 foot adaptation, 20 great crested grebe courtship behavior, 46 lobed toes, 21 greenfinch, bill, 19 grey crowned crane, courtship behavior, 47 group defense behavior, 61 growth stage nidicolous birds, 55 nidifugous birds, 54 gull herring gull, 70 urban habitats, 86 H habitat, 65 destruction, 90 direct observation, 84 terrestrial, 65 urban habitats, 83, 86-87 woodpecker, 76 See also aquatic bird; freshwater bird; marine bird hammerkop, feeding, 73 hatching, 52-53 postnatal development, 54-55 See also egg hatching muscle, 53 hawk, bill, 74 hearing, 16 heart, 15 Heligoland trap, 85 heron bill, 19 feeding, 73 imperial heron, 27 tricolored heron, 20-21 white heron, 4, 5 herring gull, 70 hoatzin, 64, 66 Holarctica, 67 human anatomy comparison, 10 leg, 21 vision compared, 17 human interaction, 82-83 domestication, 88-89 humerus, 13 hummingbird bill, 19 courtship behavior, 37 external anatomy, 12 flight mechanism, 37 internal organs, 14-15 migration routes, 58 Passeriformes, 78 ruby-throated hummingbird, 58, 67 tongue, 57 wine-throated hummingbird, 8 hunting bird: See bird of prey hyacinth macaw, 90 hypophysis, 42 I ibis, 73 identification, 9 captured birds, 85 See also classification imperial heron, 27 imperial shag, 70 incubation (egg), 52 incubator bird, 54 India domestication, 89 representation of god, 82 Indian vulture, 91 Indomalaya region, 67 insectivore, 57 J jaw, 19 jawbone, Archaeopteryx, 10 Jurassic Period, Archaeopteryx, 10-11 K keratin, 27 kiwi, 69 knee, 21 L latitudinal migration, 58 laying (egg): See egg Leclerc, Georges-Louis, Count de Buffon, 66 leg, 20-21 grasping mechanism, 13 muscles, 13 lek ritual, 46 lesser spotted eagle, migration routes, 59 life cycle, annual, 42-43 little masked weaver, nest building, 49 longitudinal migration, 58 loon: See common loon lung, 15 lyrebird, 78 M Malaysian cockatoo, 91 mangrove finch, 90 marine bird, 65, 70-71 gliding, 35 See also aquatic bird marine glider, 34 marking (captured bird), 85 Mayan culture, 82 meat, in diet, 57 metabolism, 9 Mexico, domestication, 89 migration, 58-59 artic tern, 39 Passerines, 79 Universe of Birds, 4-5 mimicry of sound, 76, 78, 79 mist net, 85 molting, 32-33 monocular vision, 17 monogamy, 47 musculature, 12-13 mythology, 82-83 N nasal marker, 85 Nearctic region, 66 neck marker, 85 nectar, 57 Neotropic region, 66 nest construction, 49 types, 48 nesting, 5 partridge, 41 net, types, 85 nidicolous bird, 54, 55 nidifugous bird, 54 nocturnal bird, 74 See also owl North America indigenous peoples, 83 migration routes, 58 northern harrier, courtship behavior, 46 northern wheater, migration routes, 59 nostril, 71 nuptial display: See courtship O Oceania, 66 Origin of Species, The (Darwin), 10 ornithology, 84-85 ostrich African ostrich, 8, 68-69 distribution, 67 ovenbird, 79 owl birds of prey, 74 Bubo capensis, 6-7 diet, 57 urban habitats, 86 oxygen, consumption, 14 P Palearctic region, 67 parental care (evolution), 24 parrot feathers, 22-23 flight speed, 38 talking birds, 76 partridge nesting, 41 red-legged partridge, 54 passerine (Passeriformes), 78-79 external anatomy, 9 100 INDEX BIRDS 101 classification, 64, 65 pelican brown pelican, 70 flight, 34-35 resting pose, 42-43 pelvis, Archaeopteryx, 11 penguin external anatomy, 8 feather coverage, 27 incubation (egg), 52 mating behavior, 47 molting, 32 observation, 85 swimming adaptations, 68 swimming speed, 39 perching foot adaptation, 20 skeleton and musculature, 13 See also passerine peregrine falcon migration routes, 58 pesticide poisoning, 90 speed, 39 pesticide, poisoning, 90 pheasant, flight speed, 38 pigeon incubation (egg), 52 messenger service, 88 milk feeding, 56-57 skeleton, 10 urban habitats, 83, 86 wing mobility, 11 pineal gland, 42 plumage: See feather pneumatic bone, 13 Podicipediformes (bird classification), 65, 73 polyandry, 47 polygamy, 47 polygyny, 47 population control, urban habitats, 87 postnatal development, 54-55 poultry farming, 88-89 powder down, 27 preening, 27 ptarmigan, molting, 32 pterodactyl, wing, 24 pterylae, 27 puffin, 66 pygostyle, 11, 13 See also tail ()-R quetzal, 76, 82 radius, 13 ratite, 69 raven, 19,78 religion, birds as symbols, 82-83 reproduction courtship: See courtship egg, 50-51 hypophysis, 42 reptile, bird evolution, 24 respiratory system, 15 rhea, 69 ribs, Archaeopteryx, 11 ringed bird, 85 robin, 80-81, 87 rockhopper penguin, 68 royal cinclode, 90 royal eagle, speed, 39 royal swift, flight speed, 38 ruby-throated hummingbird bird distribution, 67 migration routes, 58 ruff, courtship behavior, 43 running bird flightless birds, 69 foot adaptation, 20 running theory (evolution), 24 Ruppell's griffon vulture, 39 S salt gland, 71 scale (bird skin) feet, 21 types, 25 Scots dumpy rooster, spurs, 21 seagull, urban habitats, 86 seasonal color change, 32 seed food, 57 seizing: See grasping mechanism sense, 16-17 external anatomy, 9 shoebill, feeding, 73 Siberian crane, migration routes, 59 sight: See vision skeletal system, 12-13 Archaeopteryx, 11 legs, 21 running birds, 69 See also under specific topic, for example toe skull Archaeopteryx, 10 modern bird, 12 sleep regulation, 42 smell, 16 snow bunting, migration routes, 58 snowy egret, courtship behavior, 46 song: See birdsong songbird classification, 64, 65 distinction, 9 Passeriformes, 78-79 sound production recording, 84 songbirds, 78, 79 talking birds, 76 South America domestication, 89 migration routes, 58 species diversity, 66 sparrow urban habitats, 83, 87 white-throated sparrow, 8-9 sparrowhawk, 74 species classification: See classification speed, 38-39 spin tailed swift, speed, 39 spine Archaeopteryx, 10 bones, 13 spoonbill: See common spoonbill spur, 21 stability, 8 starling defense formation, 61 flight speed, 38 sternum, modern bird, 12-13 stork feeding, 73 flight speed, 38 migration routes, 58 urban habitats, 86 Struthioniformes (bird classification), 65, 69 swallow, 78, 79, 80 swan flight altitude, 38 migration routes, 59 swift, urban habitats, 86 symbolism, 83 syrinx, sound production, 44, 79 T tail, 30-31 Archaeopteryx, 11 pygostyle, 11, 13 tail feather, 8 talon, Archaeopteryx, 11 tarsometatarsus, 13 Archaeopteryx, 11 terrestrial animal, speed of movement, 39 terrestrial glider, 34, 35 terrestrial habitat, 65 territorial demarcation, 45 theropod, 10 thigh, 21 tibia, 13, 21 tibiotarsus, 21 toe anatomy, 9, 13 Archaeopteryx, 11 types, 20 tongue hummingbird, 57 internal organs, 15, 16 toucan bill, 19 colorful birds, 76 touch, 16 Triassic Period, theropodan reptile, 10 tricolored heron, 20-21 turkey, 88 U-V ulna, 13 urban habitat, 83, 86-87 vein, 15 velociraptor, 10 vibrissae, 27 vision, 16, 17 vulture endangered species, 91 feeding practices, 75 flight altitude, 39 W wading bird, 73 walking bird, adaptations, 7, 20 wandering albatross migration routes, 59 distances, 40 wings, 29 water absorption, 14 waxhill: See common waxbill white heron, 4, 5 white stork, migration routes, 58 white-throated sparrow, 8-9 wide bill, 79 wine-throated hummingbird, 8 wing, 28-29 birds of prey, 75 feathers, 9 gliding, 34-35 markers, 85 skeleton and musculature, 12-13 types and evolution, 24 wing loading, 29 winglet, 34 wingspan, 29 woodpecker, 76 wrist joint, Archaeopteryx, 11 Y-Z yellow-crested cockatoo, 91 zone-tailed hawk, 74-75 BIRDS Britannica Illustrated Science Library thevetoramra Britannica About the pagination of this eBook Due to the unique page numbering scheme of this book, the electronic pagination of the eBook does not match the pagination of the printed version. To navigate the text, please use the electronic Table of Contents that appears alongside the eBook or the Search function. For citation purposes, use the page numbers that appear in the text. MAMMALS Britannica Illustrated Science Library Encyclopaedia Britannica, Inc. Chicago = London = New Delhi ™ Paris =™ Seoul = Sydney ® Taipei = Tokyo Britannica Illustrated Science Library © 2008 Editorial Sol 90 All rights reserved. Idea and Concept of This Work: Editorial Sol 90 Project Management: Fabian Cassan Photo Credits: Corbis, ESA, Getty Images, Bryan Mullennix—Riser/Getty Images, Graphic News, NASA, National Geographic, Science Photo Library Illustrators: Guido Arroyo, Pablo Aschei, Gustavo J. Caironi, Hernan Cajfiellas, Leonardo César, José Luis Corsetti, Vanina Farias, Manrique Fernandez Buente, Joana Garrido, Celina Hilbert, Jorge Ivanovich, Isidro Lépez, Diego Martin, Jorge Martinez, Marco Menco, Marcelo Moran, Ala de Mosca, Diego Mourelos, Pablo Palastro, Eduardo Pérez, Javier Pérez, Ariel Piroyansky, Fernando Ramallo, Ariel Roldan, Marcel Socias, Néstor Taylor, Trebol Animation, Juan Venegas, Constanza Vicco, Coralia Vignau, Gustavo Yamin, 3DN, 3DOM studio Composition and Pre-press Services: Editorial Sol 90 Translation Services and Index: Publication Services, Inc. Portions © 2008 Encyclopzedia Britannica, Inc. Encyclopaedia Britannica, Britannica, and the thistle logo are registered trademarks of Encyclopeedia Britannica, Inc. Britannica Illustrated Science Library Staff Editorial Michael Levy, Executive Editor, Core Editorial John Rafferty, Associate Editor, Earth Sciences William L. Hosch, Associate Editor, Mathematics and Computers Kara Rogers, Associate Editor, Life Sciences Rob Curley, Senior Editor, Science and Technology David Hayes, Special Projects Editor Art and Composition Steven N. Kapusta, Director Carol A. Gaines, Composition Supervisor Christine McCabe, Senior I/lustrator Media Acquisition Kathy Nakamura, Manager Copy Department Sylvia Wallace, Director Julian Ronning, Supervisor Information Management and Retrieval Sheila Vasich, Information Architect Production Control Marilyn L. Barton Manufacturing Kim Gerber, Director Encyclopzedia Britannica, Inc. Jacob E. Safra, Chairman of the Board Jorge Aguilar-Cauz, President Michael Ross, Senior Vice President, Corporate Development Dale H. Hoiberg, Senior Vice President and Editor Marsha Mackenzie, Director of Production International Standard Book Number (set): 978-1-59339-797-5 International Standard Book Number (volume): 978-1-59339-808-8 Britannica Illustrated Science Library: Mammals 2008 Printed in China ENC YCLOPADIA Britannica www.britannica.com Wikelaalaarels — Close Relatives Humans belong to the primate group. Hominids (orangutans, gorillas, and chimpanzees) are the largest of these, weighing between 105 and 595 pounds (48-270 kg). In general, males are larger than females, with robust bodies and well- developed arms. Their vertical carriage differentiates their skeletons from those of other primates. Gorillas inhabit only the equatorial jungles of western Africa. They support themselves on their forelimbs while walking. Normally c *: ae, their height varies between 4 and 6 feet (1.2-1.8 m), but, if they raise their forelimbs and stand erect, they can be over 6.5 feet tall (2 m). CRANIUM ALWAYS 98° F Relatively large (372 C) compared to the size of The ability to the body. And the brain maintain a constant is more developed and body temperature is more complex than that —_ not a characteristic of any other animal. unique to mammals; —— . birds also have that a ability. “SI The tiny bones of the ear form a system for sensing. and transmitting sound. Formed by a single bone, called the dentary, and teeth specialized for each function. The entire Cranium has a very simplified bone structure. Homeothermy The ability to keep body temperature relatively constant, independent of the ambient temperature. Hibernating species are the exception; they must lower their body temperature to enter into this state of reduced metabolic activity. Contrary to popular belief, bears do not truly hibernate but rather enter into a period of deep sleep during winter. GRIZZLY BEAR (BROWN BEAR) Ursus arctos Limbs Mammals have four limbs that are adapted for moving about on land. Their forelimbs have certain other abilities (swimming, manipulation, attack and defense, protection). The exceptions are the cetaceans, so adapted to marine life that they only have two fingerless limbs, and seals (Phocidae). ELEPHANT SEALS Family Phocidae Take Habitat into Account MAMMALS 15 Between every mammal and its natural habitat there is a relationship that exists and is expressed in the animal's physical characteristics. Just as the flippers of the elephant seal are used to swim and hunt fish, mimicry and running are vital for deer. Physiology is a special instrument of adaptation to the environment, as in the case of the camel. f\ 4 Aquatic Temperate Forests i a Desert Meadow or Pastureland Secrete the milk with which the females feed their young during their first months of life. These glands give the class its name. GORILLA Gorilla gorilla y Formed by an otiter layer, (epidermis), another deeper ne (dermis), ¢ f and a fatty substratu that contributes to *shomeothermy. a a>)" Tropical Tropical Taiga Tundra Savanna Rainforest } AN UNCOMMON PRIMATE Humans have adapted to They often create tools to almost all habitats through — help them adapt to their their ability to modify environment. In this way, certain elements of their they do not need to rely habitat to their advantage. —_ on natural evolution alone. ‘e homeothermic—which means they are capable of maintaining a rnal body temperature despite environmental conditions. This ability wed them to establish themselves in every region of the asis is achieved by a series of processes that tend vels and concentrations of minerals and » blood in equilibrium as well as cumulation of waste nong other things. < # A Perfect System Polar bears, like all mammals, keep their internal temperature constant. These bears tolerate the extreme cold of the Arctic ice because they have developed a sophisticated system to increase their ability to isolate and capture sunlight. Their transparent hair receives a large part of it and therefore appears to be white. The hair transmits this light inward, where there is a thick layer of black skin, an efficient solar collector. Their fur is made up of hollow hairs, approximately 6 inches (15 cm) long, which insulate the bear in Great Swisnthers Polar bears swim with ease in open waters and reach a speed of 6 miles an hour (10:kim/h). They propel themselves with their great front paws and use their back feet as rudders. The bear's hair is hollow = and filled.with air, which helps with buoyancy. When the bear dives, its eyes remain open. SHELTERED CU The cubs are born in winter, and the skin of the mother generates heat that protects the = cubs fromthe ‘«& extreme cold. but also an energy critical levels—at il -75° F (-50° to ases and begins to rapidly burn energy from fat ood. In this way, the polar bear maintains its ody temperature. '~ Re 3 HAIR RESPIRATORY An Hollow chamber PATHWAYS impermeable, with air The bears have translucent membranes in their surface snouts that warm and humidify the air before it reaches the lungs. Outer UNDERFUR ( }—- PRINCIPAL FAT RESERVES Thighs, haunches, and abdomen When they tire of swimming, they rest, floating. They manage to cross distances of over 37 miles (60 km) in this manner. gin ERT — Forelimbs function as a motor. HYDRODYNAMIC low temperatures and keep the skin from —_— = ma getting wet when in the water. "POLAR BEAR™ ANATOMY a4 - 7 nat = 5 ~ ~ — Be —" x - ein = —— 3 ae te ed - = ~-2-t + 7 ENTRANCE wre nae ; -, i " 4 é poly eee ‘a F ‘ oD eT. ee) lari oo "ect wees Y a. ie a pee Ne hh = ay Vey a < a iv eh ration TRAVEL SOUTH, ESCAPING THE BREAKUP OF THE ARCTIC ICE. UNDER THE ICE Females dig a tunnel in the spring; when they become pregnant, they hibernate SECONDARY without eating and can lose ACCESS 45 percent of their weight. TUNNEL je CHAMBER OR REFUGE MAIN ACCESS TUNNEL their extremities and their tails over their bodies as a of blanket. In this way, the surface area subjected to heat loss will be minimal. Hot-climate animals stretch out their bodies to dissipate heat. Their palms have surfaces with small papillae that create friction with ice, keeping them from slipping. f What They Are Like ll mammals have stereoscopic vision, which gives them depth perception. Moreover, in the case of hunters such as tigers, their night vision is six times keener than that of humans. There are many species that have a very keen sense of smell, and the sense of taste is closely linked to that of smell. Hair, too, performs Panthera tigris tigris is the largest member of the feline family, easily recognized by its orange fur with black stripes and white spots. various functions in these animals' lives—conserving body heat, providing protection, and serving as camouflage. Those that have almost no hair and live in environments where the GRACE AND MOVEMENT DEVELOPED SENSES EXTREMITIES SOFT CONTACT WHAT DOESN'T RUN, FLIES LOOKS THAT KILL temperature is very low, such as whales, have developed a layer of fat under their skins. 20 WHAT THEY ARE LIKE Grace and Movement orses, one of the odd-toed, hoofed, ungulate mammals, are considered symbols of grace and freedom. They have great vigor and can run swiftly because their spine bends very little, preventing unnecessary expenditure of energy during the rising and falling of their body mass. They are equipped with strong, light, and flexible bones, and their muscles work by contraction, arranged in pairs or groups that pull in opposing directions. @ MAMMALS 21 ORBITAL > ATLAS AXIS CAVITY First cervical vertebra Second cervical vertebra is articulated, allowing the nape to allows lateral movement—necessary bend up and down. for the horse to turn. Atlas & a> NASAL CAVITY VERTEBRAE 7 CERVICAL = > FROM 17 T0 19 Correct position of \ DORSAL an equestrian Normally there are : 18, but the number Axis is often higher or P t R lower. ower to Run Skeleton IFS) Horses are one of the most powerful mammals and achieve BUCCAL Lali great speeds relative to their body mass. The natural purpose CAVITY of their musculature is to allow them to flee their enemies. This 50R6LUMBAR 7 SACRAL 18 COCCYGEAL —_ ability has allowed the species to survive for millions of years. Their eae —— great energy is generated by contracting muscles. number of very mobile vertebrae. pices The medullary canal Bone Endomysium Muscle fascicle in each maxillary Harrows. (between fibers) aos bone, including: SCAPULA : df tts a2 —Muscle fiber Tum , eas |e” | 4 (cell) 3 molars “7%! <*5 3 premolars L — 6 incisors PELVIS 5 é 2 canines a ie Wagtea Ischium —C) go’ 782 as Perimysium rae \ i ; oe Blood Vessel j \ rte STERNUM VP STERNOCEPHALICUS Epinysiurn is the bone that er { | - ah) TENDONS joins the ribs in 7 @ = are lengths of connective tissue ie iy of the e that secure one end of a muscle we sas OUrmng (striated muscle tissue) to a bone Pain eage (bone tissue). Ligaments connect a ee ing - HUMERUS bones to one another. VISE Era SUP POnt ULNA PATELLA See, ace GALLOPING LEGS Tip of FLEXOR The hind legs generate the impetus and the leap, the Tarsus CAUDAL and the front legs bear the weight upon landing. To DEEP PECTORAL \e EXTENSOR CARPI save energy, the spine hardly arches when running. FIBULA MUSCLE \ " RADIALIS In felines, however, which are lighter, it does. ® COMMON DIGITAL TIBIA _ 4 EXTENSOR EQUINE FOOT Lateral Digital Extensor ANNULAR Metacarpus ] Twins LIGAMENTS Third Phalanx y Second Phalanx a KNEE Lateral Band 5 MPH Navicular Bone Collateral DEEP DIGITAL (80KMH) Ligament FLEXOR TENDON THE SPEED REACHED He oe BY A RUNNING HORSE ee IS THE NUMBER Plantar Pad METACARPUS —————* ) OF BONES IN THE SKELETON : OF A HORSE O————- METATARSUS THE HORSE IN ACTION HOOF Heel (excluding the 7 Because they Bar —__——__ 4% tailbones) have this kind of { a “nail," horses are —- Frog PASTERN called ungulates, PHALANGES ee en — $e — as are tapirs and = Sole rhinoceroses. Horseshoe MAMMALS 23 22 WHAT THEY ARE LIKE FIRST FINGER Extremities ammals' extremities are basically either of the foot or chiridium type but modified according to the way in which each species moves about. Thus, for example, they become fins for swimming in aquatic mammals and membranous wings in bats. In land mammals, these variations depend on the way the animal bears its weight in walking: those that use the whole foot are called plantigrades; those that place their weight on their digits, digitigrades; and those that only touch the ground with the tips of their phalanges, ungulates. e Chiroptera From the Greek, meaning “winged hand,” this is how bats are designated because their forelimbs are modified, the fingers thinning and lengthening to be able to support a membrane that functions as a wing. The hind limbs did not change similarly: they have claws. SECOND FINGER THIRD FINGER FOURTH FINGER PATAGIUM 4 LEFT FOOT OF Functionally Adapted CHIMPANZEE Another criterion for classifying mammals by their legs, in addition ance METATARSAL , to their morphology, is the function the legs perform. Cats, dogs, and horses have four limbs for locomotion. Primates have differentiated forelimbs, and they also use legs to capture food or bring it to their mouth. Others use legs to swim or fly. KEY ’ ES Tibia/Fibula BIG TOE——© PHALAN) Ma Tarsi BE Metatars Cetaceans Ma Phalanges Whales adapted so well to the sea that they seem to be fish. But inside their fins —modified front legs— there is a bony structure similar to that of a hand with fingers. They have no hind limbs: the tail, placed horizontally and used to move in the water, has no connection to those limbs. Tail METATARSAL » toes . SCAPULA UNGULIGRADE I UNGULIGRADE II Lies ip pie aaa WALK OR CLIMB CUNEIFORM BONES aa HORSES GOATS : There is a fundamental differen HORIZONTAL IN If you observe their The majority of ungulates, RUNNING SPECIES between the Bexnan foot and Fie. MAMMALS THAT ULNA footprints, you will see such as goats, have an HAVE FEWER. that only their hooves even number of toes. They Bt a rey ae ies mney eos ~~ SWIM, AS DISTINCT RADIUS long, prehensile digit in its foot FROM FISH are called artiodactyls as opposed to perissodactyls, leave marks. Horses' hooves are made up of similar to that in its hand. Monkeys use their feet to grab branches as EVOLUTION It is thought that Felines only ne toe: elie they move through the trees. METACARPI ime Chimpanzee Human CUBOID BONES The futon of ia ras is to PHALANGES marine ungulates, support their agile and elastic whose spines LYING FOOTPRINTS SCAPHOIE Say, bodies, allowing them to move alate up and Other species of unguligrades (or simply ungulates) about. The front paws also help aie can have more toes that make up their hooves, but in hunting to catch and hold prey. they do not place weight on more than two of them. ASTRAGALUS RETRACTABLE NAIL DIGITIGRADE PLANTIGRADE DOG HUMAN NAIL ——————_p Phalanx ELASTIC LIGAMENT These mammals place Primates, and of course When the tendon contracts, HIPPOPOTAMUS PIG CHEVROTAIN DEER CAMEL the full surface of their toes (or some of them) on the ground much of the sole of the when walking. They foot when walking, piece itis usually leave the mark particularly on the of their front toes and a small part of the forefoot as a footprint. Dogs and cats are the best-known examples. humans, bear their weight on their toes and metatarsus. Rats, weasels, bears, rabbits, skunks, raccoons, mice, and hedgehogs are also plantigrades. DIGITAL PAD this ligament retracts, and then the nail does, too. TENDON 24 WHAT THEY ARE LIKE MAMMALS 25 | : J What Doesn't Run, Flies = on siherian ) f ie like Flyin hey are meteors of flesh, bone, and hot blood. Cheetahs are the fastest of ee oy Squirre the land animals and unique members of the Felidae family, which hunt 4 fede thse ahaa using their keen vision and great speed. They can reach over 70 miles per TAKEOFF IN THE AIR LANDING as common squirrels, to which hour (115 km/h) in short runs and reach 45 miles per hour (72 km/h) in an anes ee Seg eee : ; L j pe TOES Fale : average of only 2 seconds. They can get above 60 miles per hour (100 km/h), towatd ancitet ene cuban of san tek he aaa ng dus: before Fancang te lowers Upon landing, t grabs live in the mixed forests of but they can sustain that speed for only a few seconds. They look like leopards jumps and stretches its legs. Thanks to legs, using the membrane pita Sessa ieee vie or lee Europe derass Sa ri : aaa 7 4 u that it can glide from the top of one tree like an air brake. It lands its toes. and into East Asia. although their physical characteristics are different: they are longer and to the trunk of another. very gently on all four paws. thinner, and their heads are smaller and rounded. e@ NOSTRILS TAIL : SHOULDER HEAD Cheetahs @ START ® SPINAL Very wide, they allow Large compared to EXTENDING Fi ¢ miles The extensive Small and Whereas tigers prefer to lie in wait for Leek CONTRACTION it to ei HUTS a oe of the a THE SPINE per hour [eior of He sO prey and then jump on it, the cheetah egins Ong Then it gathers its legs oxygen as It runs. It acts aS a pilvo Ina counterthrust opposing S oulder allows wi 4 OW alr : a by lengthening A A used to suddenly the contraction, the spine d 15 km/h) it to take very resistance. uses explosive speed of over 60 miles per : : under its body, contracting alee tend Fei d hour (100 km/h) to run its prey down. le etiive and its cervical spine to the Slang: ditechon. sate tg A aged MAXIMUM SPEED, BUT CAN long leaps. extending its maximum. can cover 26 feet (8 m) ina BE MAINTAINED FOR ONLY four legs. single stride. 550 YARDS (500 M) ‘ Ae LIMBS Long and agile. It has a powerful, flexible skeleton and musculature. | SECOND POINT OF CONTACT Extending its four Order Carnivora Family Felidae legs again, it picks up Epeeeecnene FIRST POINT OF CONTACT a Sloth F supporting itself on jubatus (Africa) As it runs, only one leg EP b a | y These animals are notable for their Aciane touches the ground at a (18) GALS Wet Lye tremely sl tabolism. Th cinonyx time, But during the aera ee metabolism. They f= F : , take half a minute to move a f venaticus (Asia) cervical contraction, the ZIGZAGGING limb! They are also somewhat entire body lifts from the AT HIGH myopic, their hearing is ground. SPEED mediocre, and their sense PAWS of smell barely serves to BIPEDS VERSUS mech DIGITS distinguish the plants eetans Can A QUADRUPEDS i make sharp turns 5 in the hands on which they teed. while running at Aitken They are at the extreme high speed. * opposite of cheetahs. However, since they : NAILS practically live perched in ine easd trees, they do not need to i move or see or hear precisely. ; 5 eee eae are Useanne their way of life. 18 MPH (29 KM/H) 23 MPH (37 KM/H) 42 MPH (67 KM/H) 50 MPH (80 KM/H) 70 MPH (115 KM/H) a eae nie allowing them SIX-LINED RACERUNNER HUMAN BEING GREYHOUND HORSE CHEETAH ahatichestahe. to grip the Cnemidophorus Track record: Asafa Powell (Jamaica), A dog witha light skeleton An anatomy designed for It only takes 2 seconds to reach a firmly grip the ground better. THREE-TOED SLOTH Native to the Amazon River basin sexlineatus 110 yards (100 m) in 9.77 seconds and aerodynamic anatomy — running, powerful musculature speed of 45 miles per hour (72 km/h). ground. 26 WHAT THEY ARE LIKE Looks That Kill igers are the largest of the world's felines. Predators par excellence, they have physical skills and highly developed senses that they use to hunt for prey. Their daytime vision is as good as that of humans, except for a difficulty in seeing details. However, at night, when tigers usually hunt, their vision is six times keener than that of a human being, because tigers’ eyes have larger anterior chambers and lenses and wider pupils. Seeing Even in the Dark Hunting animals depend on the keenness of their senses to detect their prey. Felines can dilate their pupils up to three times more than humans, and they see best when light is dim and their prey's movements are very subtle. A system of 15 layers of cells forms a sort of mirror (tapetum lucidum) located behind the retina or back of the eye. This mirror amplifies the light that enters and is also the reason that the animal's eyes shine in the dark. At the same time, their eyes are six times more sensitive to light than those of people. Tigers' nocturnal vision also increases because of the great adaptability of their circular pupils when they are completely open. tt a1 yy 5 ae mp te C Y AN¢ Y % i | ANS It PA Pg Ay T Tw, (Me yo Tigers have a 255° gh VEL ha) Yai } angle of vision, of EI PFEL which 120° is binocular, whereas humans have 210° with 120° of it binocular. FOCUS 2 gq 50 times THE LIGHT AMPLIFICATION CAPABILITY OF THE RETINA OF FELINES ‘CONJUNCTIVA CORNEA BINOCULAR VISION Part of the field of vision of one eye overlaps that of the other eye, which makes three-dimensional x2 = Ls a loo Foe She ee - s vision possible. S a ; : : : Sas Je Thi re tia Sat Se : " 2 ‘ RETINA OF A Hunters’ skills SZ Wz id DI ont hye aa ; Sse : — MOCTURNAL depend on oa : : ; Poa xh : : genni ogee binocular vision, SME A “b ‘ =a NRA -- 2 = Roe ht because it allows . ¥ ap cy ZF , , o Fann ae A > Se x : ora ; them to judge the aes, ee = ns Se : : ed distance and size of their prey. PUPILS They regulate the passage of light to the retina by contracting in bright light and dilating in the dark. In each species of mammal, the pupils have a distinctive shape. , a Pa CAT RETINA LIGHTS OR COLORS The retina's sensitivity to light depends on rod- Shaped cells, and forms and colors depend on other Cells, which are cone-shaped. In tigers, the former predominate. DOG WITH LONG SNOUT 28 WHAT THEY ARE LIKE MAMMALS 29 Sense of Smell Their most developed sense; they have 220 million olfactory cells in their nasal cavities. Mucous tissue, located in the nasal conchae of the snout, warms and moistens the air that they inhale. covers these bones is responsible for secreting mucus that traps inhaled particles. Developed Senses The ett tat | : ogs have inherited from wolves great hearing and an excellent sense of smell. Both perform an essential role in their relationship to their surroundings and many of their social activities. However, they are very dependent on the keenness of their senses depending on the habitat in which they develop. Whereas humans often remember other people as images, dogs do so with their sense of smell, their most important sense. They have 44 times more . . . “ 4A 4 olfactory cells than people do, and they can perceive smells in an area covering some 24 / fy ie al square inches (150 sq cm). Dogs can discern one molecule out of a million other ones, ft = Dendrites and they can hear sounds so low that they are imperceptible to people. eee ayer Hearing INSIDE THE COCHLEA parent The auditory ability of dogs is four times greater than that of ; ; rie - human beings, and it is highly developed. Their ability depends pails — i on the shape and orientation of their ears, which allow them to sas he AURICULAR locate and pay closer attention to sounds, although this varies Organ CARTILAGE by breed. They can hear sharper tones and much softer sounds, of Corti and they can directly locate the spatial reference point where a noise was produced. Dogs hear sounds of up to 40 kilohertz, whereas the upper limit for human hearing is 18 kilohertz. Scala Tympani Nerve / Fiber A SEMICIRCULAR AUDITORY Over CANALS NERVE | 1 000 times ~ THE CAPABILITY OF A DOG'S SENSE ee OF SMELL COMPARED TO THAT OF INCUS (ANVIL) ee? heer MALLEUS (HAMMER) , COCHLEAR @ STAPES (STIRRUP) NERVE f COCHLEA Taste -MIDDLE EAR ane Dogs perceive the chemical substances that foods are made of by means of receptor cells found in the taste buds located at the back of the tongue and in the soft part of the palate. AUDITORY CANAL TASTE BUDS TYMPANIC MEMBRANE Dispersed throughout the tongue. Complex INTERNAL interactions among STRUCTURE OF them determine taste by means of nerve endings. The dome diverts sounds toward the OVAL EUSTACHIAN bulla, which sends WINDOW TUBE - TASTE electric signalsto == ; L RECEPTORS THE TONGUE the brain. Individual receptor AND TASTES heed ed | Sweet tastes are : information to the wee AUDITORY LEVELS , olfactory centers of experienced in the Ohertz 1 10 100 1,000 10,000 20,000 40,000 the brain. front part of the People |! ! ! , cagitr:, & SOR tongue, sour ones Foxes g = in the center, and Mice yo we a g salty ones in the Bats a 5 5 back. On either Frogs i a a side salty and Elephants 1 SSIET sweet are mixed. Birds | 30 WHAT THEY ARE LIKE MAMMALS 31 soft Contact HAIR Diverse Hairs J WOOL FIBER STRUCTURE . Protofibri] —-————————— Nase The majority of mammals’ fur is BAT HAIR ; aoe dmired, adored, and coveted by humans, a mammal's fur coat is much more than ee PIES UO CN ON FIVE ee see a skin covering. It acts as a protective layer against mechanical injuries, prevents pple to a group of proteins called % Series ona invasion by germs, and regulates the loss of body heat and moisture. In many co melanins. Each coat has different "¥ Cortex 90% —, Medulla layers. Guard hairs are the first layer, . species, such as the Arctic fox, it provides camouflage by changing color and texture providing protection. Underneath Cuticle 10% . that, there is a fine layer called ENLARGED from winter to summer. a underfur, formed by constantly = WooL Scaly Cuticle growing short hairs that renew ra This is the the coat. ate most complex = natural textile Sas or ; fiber in existence. 4 + 7 = It absorbs moisture Fur and Mimicry The Skin = eres Mammals from cold regions, such as polar bears, have white fur to camouflage EPIDERMIS ———_ themselves in snow. Others, such as polar, Outer layer POLAR PORCUPINE QUILLS : A formed by BEAR HAIR = or Arctic, foxes and the American hare, 3 : q lled d hairs, th change their fur color with the seasons, resistant, flat | -_- a ae Bales guamu nalts ley ore . g Antal ee act " cells DERMAL PAPILLA hairs is hollow and i ~ located outside the fur. In the case seine ‘ hie anata cc attaches the De ean te =< of the porcupine, they have been summer fur would make them easy prey. dermis to the insulating capability é — modified to form defensive quills. Lions beige color el them avoid bang epidermis. of the inner layer. = 5 () 000 iscovered while they stalk their prey. g MERKEL'S DISK ) By Bese ee rn oe THE NUMBER OF QUILLS THAT DERMIS = under the skin's a COVER A PORCUPINE (148 PER Layer with blood F surface that = SQUARE INCH [23 PER SQ CMI) vessels, glands, responds to light, 4 and nerve endings. continuous touch J WINTER Arctic foxes have two kinds of color phases. White phase foxes are almost pure white in It is a layer of sebaceous glands that secrete an oily substance, and pressure Giacy ee mide [i Skin ~ Insulating Insulation is one of the functions O—————- Mini-quills Sharp scales teed sebum, on the SEBACEOUS of animals’ skins and hair. It not i \ camouflage themselves surface of the skin. GLAND only helps to conserve body in the snow and ice. % secretes a waxy warmth but also, as in the case 3 substance, Ol of camels, protects them from ' sebum, which : excessive heat. Its color often i moistens the skin, blends in with its surroundings, ¢ making it serving as camouflage. ERECTION € waterproof. MECHANISM 5 Base of ; . > OUTER | When the quill ry SUMMER ot PACINIAN ral touches a strange a The fur coat of the ~ CORPUSCLE Epidermis surface, it exerts a By Arctic'fox(Alopex. x, | light downward /agopus) in summer is FATTY TISSUE ;? Sense receptors pressure on the half as thick as that of This is a specialized A under the dermis. epidermis. icy coq winter, with less than conjunctive tissue ¥ The Pacini receptors | half the underfur. In made up primarily of lie under the layer The fine tissue sainale turn sary connective cells called of deep fat and Sue Se eal 4 brown to grayish color, adipocytes, which detect vibration and P breaks. and those that have a store energy in the pressure. ( “plue” phase are browner and darker. form of triglycerides. SWEAT GLANDS When the body is hot, the glan¢ chs porate teal ocd secrete sweat, which passes LAYER OF FAT EXCESSIVE UV RAYS. through the sweat ducts to the GREY WOLF « surface of the skin. ’ Min, The erector pili muscle receives the contact signal and contracts. EAT TO LIVE 34-35 44-45 36-37 46-47 38-39 40-41 50-51 42-43 48-49 52-53 54-55 56-57 58-59 34 BEHAVIOR AND LIFE CYCLE Life Cycle irth, maturity, reproduction, and death: this life cycle has certain particularities among mammals. As a general rule, the larger a mammal, the longer the members of its species tend to live but the fewer offspring are born to a single female per litter or reproductive season. Most mammals, including humans, are placental mammals; their vital functions are fully developed inside the body of the mother. @ 90 Years A WHALE'S AVERAGE LIFE SPAN—THE GREATEST OF ANY LIVING MAMMAL Placental Mammals They male Weaning oe f natural This is the largest group of mammals, the one that has are or dig 35 TO 40 DAYS XU multiplied most on the planet, although its form of underground. Young rabbits remain with their Se al gestation and lactation produces great wear and tear on the females, making them less prolific. They are generally polygenetic: a few males (the most competitive) fertilize many females, and other males, none. Only 3 percent of mammals are } . rr, monogamous in each season. In these cases, males participate in rearing the offspring, as they also do when resources are scarce. If resources are abundant, the females take care of the young alone, and the males mate with other females. Maturity 5 TO 7 MONTHS The better rabbits are fed, the more quickly they become capable of reproducing. They are considered adults at 8 or 9 months, when they weigh some 2 pounds (900 g). mother even after nursing ends for protection and the inculcation of species-specific behavior. They have four to five pairs of breasts. Lactation 25 TO 30 DAYS fed upon milk, although they can digest solid food after 20 days. The young abandon the burrow after 35 or 40 days and remain in the area where they were raised (philopatry). Female rabbits can mate at any time. Longevity 4 to 10 years Gestation 28 TO 33 DAYS EASTERN They spend it in a collective ; COTTONTAIL burrow (warren) duginthe == sem RABBIT ground and covered with a. They are born mh ! oe tati d fur. Th 4 inches \ | . floridanus vegetation and fur. The 10 x » without fur, with female will abandon it as (0 cm) oe 4 _) semitranslucent soon as lactation ends. | = skin. AT BIRTH The young weigh NUMBER OF OFFSPRING som ts 18) ounces (40-50 g). They do not open their eyes until the 10th day. Goat all all ail OFFSPRING 3 to 9 Young Dog wf of of pf eee, PER LITTER, AND Rat EAE AEMRMR ME 610 FROM 5 TO 7 ARC A AR A A A OFFSPRING LITTERS PER YEAR In general, it is inversely proportional to the species' size. Cow rr 1 OFFSPRING / + \\ | / \ , Marsupial Se | arsupia Ss \ {| The young animal fastens itself to its mother and is carried around by her, clinging to her shoulders. Very short gestation period, after : which they develop in a sort of partially Y, open pouch (the marsupium), which the female carries on her belly. The majority of the roughly 300 known species of BANISHED marsupials are solitary, except in mating OFFSPRING periods. In general, they are promiscuous iain insane animals, although some, such as wallabies the offspring and other Bie, young males apart. x‘ (small kangaroos), tend to mate with the same female all their life. Dominant males mate with all the females. Lactation 22 WEEKS A muscle inside the pouch prevents the infant from falling out. At 22 weeks, it opens its eyes, anda type of pap produced by Some females By the end of strong males. lactation, fur its mother is added to its croleily diet, which will prepare it f for an herbivorous diet. KOALA Phascolarctos cinereus | Gestation Gaieh 35 DAYS With its extremities and functional organs barely developed at birth, the newborn must crawl by itself from the cloaca to the pouch to continue its development. 1 offspring 1 BIRTH PER YEAR GESTATION PERIODS Monotremes In the Pouch balun ONT HS Mammals whose females lay eggs are generally 2 TO 3 MONTHS Elephants solitary species for most of the year. Platypuses After breaking the shell, the | are seen as couples only when they mate. Although they have a period of courtship for one to three months, the males have no | relationship with the females after copulation or with the offspring. Short- beaked echidna females practice polyandry, copulating with various males in various seasons. young are suckled while they remain in a kind of pouch of Giraffes the female. Gibbons I ae I Dogs i ox COMPARISON OF EGG SIZE The shell is soft and facilitates the offspring's birth. Unlike birds, they do not have beaks. Undeveloped Newborn Limbs Offspring Incubation 12 DAYS Eggs gestate for a month t before hatching. They incubate within a pouch for about 10 days to remain at the proper temperature until the young are born. Chicken ae . Echidna ..: inch 1to3 leave to look for \, MAMMALS 35 Leaving the Pouch 1 YEAR The offspring reaches a size that allows it to fend for itself. It has already incorporated herbivorous food into its diet. The mother can become pregnant again, but its young will remain nearby. Sexual Maturity 3 TO 4 YEARS _At two years, koalas ~~ valready have developed sexual organs (females earlier than males). But , they do not start mating until one or two years later. LONGEVITY People 70 years Elephants 70 Horses 40 Giraffes 20 Cats 15 Longevity Dogs 15 15 to 20 years Hamsters 3 Underground cave or a cave among rocks The fur is . already spiny. Weaning 4 TO 6 MONTHS After three months, the offspring can leave the burrow or remain in it alone for up toa day and a half before finally separating from the mother. Longevity 50 years SHORT-BEAKED ECHIDNA Tachyglossus aculeatus = auty and Height», SS 2. ) Ae. Dermis Fibrous tissue , that protects - ‘ x Near the end of Sat: # a female with whom.to mate is the great rs oe summer, stags display . — i their new antlers, effort of the male's life, a competition with other — ales of his own species. Each animal-has-its» ticular nuances. For stags, antlers play a fundamental 1 Winning the heart of their chosen one. Whichever which will be larger and heavier than the previous ones. Fe: stag has the most beautiful, longest, and sharpest horns ~~ will be the winner. Thus, he will be able to defend his =. territory, court the female, and reproduce. Horns are shed every . year. Animals between ' the ages of 6 and 10 display the finest antlers. Stags rub their antlers against-trees.and bushes to get rid of the membrane that covers them. 2 New antlers are covered with a fine membrane, called velvet, that will stay on the horns until they are fully developed. <— 1 / At the onset of ’ autumn, stags begin to lose their antlers, which will be replaced by new ones. Antlers FORK PALM Fights Red Deer When two males fight over a harem, IR These are svelte, robust, well- each will display his antlers to Le@ formed animals with a majestic frighten his rival. The horns can also and haughty carriage. They are very be used to defend against predators. timid and fearful, and it is thought that the species is 400,000 years old. They are active at daybreak and evening, and males usually live alone. Females A\W \ - ray} oe = PEDICLE d d in herds. ; r i crn —— porns and Antlers Bellows 4 7 : outgrowths of the cranium, Sonorous and discordant, they begin Opin oiagecctvia noe 31 inches covered by ategument that forms a sheath. to be heard when spring arrives, Family Cervidae ia (80 cm) _ They appear in bovids of both sexes and are announcing the beginning of rut, or mating generally permanent. Antlers are also season. They not only attempt to keep a extensions of the cranium; they are limited competitors away with their call but they Diet Herbivorous to the deer family, are present only in males, _ also use the sound to attract unattached Species Cervus elaphus Weight 400 pounds and are replaced annually. females to join the male's herd. (male) (180 kg) is > . > ra a J ‘ 38 BEHAVIOR AND LIFE CYCLE ee. * ne O44 . MAMMALS 39 i, — a . Oviparous Mammals LN eine * For reproduction, the female or a mammal to lay eggs seems improbable, but the surprising dite: makes a deep burrow, where it monotreme females, instead of giving birth to young, are oviparous. Ne dys tape ee ee ‘ a ‘ , Oh Sty : iniShes digging the burrow. They are warm-blooded, have hair, and feed their newborn through ) Ae teva TBS Geb Pen Shh Son mammary glands despite having no nipples. Platypuses seem like a ty oe yee PLR ges / Rep roductive: = cocktail of nature, inasmuch as parts of their bodies resemble those of ‘ do PANT EE 1 ce SYS Fuse Aycle: 3 a sel : other types of animal. The other monotremes, echidnas, are covered SO 48 i, Cpe EE [fe he ae ; mse 2 2 é : . é a's “OF a va “ jtaig ie platypus. hasithree” réproductive cycles atu 7 with spines, and their young grow in the mother's pouch. arf ALIA ED ee 2 BL "—_‘and/spenitl lost of the year in solitude, Platypusest, igs if PEF GE LBs “are seen aS couples‘only whensthey mate. aTheychave.a ta —= OS het Te S/ ie + Peridtl of courtship before copulation, whichis =" ~"-» — a Fg ¢: SL Lye performed by.a juxtaposition Of cloacae, THEI va > .. The eggs are covered by gt Pusge DHE fs © Show © reproductive tate i is low sincethewlay only one,to” —- 7? a soft shell, and incubation toh ay ey Ae * three éggs. The female platypus digs a buwow > lasts two weeks. C gtts. kA - before laying her eggs, wheréas:echidnas haye a 72 ~ Z pouctrin which they incubate their young. s* ™ Combining the skin of a mole, the tail of a beaver, the feet z = = f - Unlike the hair on the other parts of its of a frog, and the beak of a duck, platypuses are Soe ’ ~body, the hair in the echidna's > % semiaquatic mammals endemic to the eastern part of Australia . g 2 a > pouch is soft. and to the island of Tasmania. They construct burrows in Z . riverbanks consisting of a long passageway. a . Family Ornithorhynchidae = ~ Species Ornithorhynchus | ! anatinus —— 16 TO 24 INCHES — . = - - (40-60 CM) ~ . Diet Herbivorous ~~ ~ Weight 5.5 pounds (2.5 kg) 3 5 4 After 16 weeks, the young The mother has no nipples, begin to feed on ants and but milk comes out through ther small insects. = pores in her abdomen, from — which the offspring si HAIR EYES The sharp spines are kept closed originate within the fur. The egg is the size of a Cycle iq ™: grape and stays at the bottom of the female's ncubating pouch. It underwater. a s 11 days to hatch. 1/3 inch ' BILL SNOUT (9 mm) has sensitive pret . iti eer a een Rae search for and W/L A Mog” Be cre att inc on electroreceptors that — e | Lives in Australia, New Guinea, and Tasmania. It catch food. Wie front feet uh can perceive the electric | has an elongated snout in the form of a beak, no hold on to the field generated by the teeth, and a long, retractable tongue. It is a notable RETRACTABLE mother's pouch, muscles of their prey. digger and hibernates underground. Echidnas can live up TONGUE where it crawls in to 50 years, and their hair varies according to the species. A sticky substance search of food. on the long and Family Tachyglossidae slender tongue Seventy days ~ 2 . later it will leave Species = Tachyglossus aculeatus ,* } allows it to catch " : si NN termites and ants. LIMBS dee pra have claws at the tips mother will place of their feet, which help it wd a alba where she wi in digging rapidly. ' ! feed it for three —_12 TO 35 INCHES — more months. (30 TO 90 CM) 40 BEHAVIOR AND LIFE CYCLE Efficient Nursery \\ | arsupial females carry their newborn offspring in their marsupium, a pouch attached to their belly. The offspring are not very well developed when they come l into the world after a gestation period that varies from two to five weeks. Upon emerging, the offspring must immediately climb with their front paws to the marsupium to survive. Once inside, they will be protected. They are continually supplied with milk through their mother's four teats, helping them complete their growth before leaving the pouch for the outside world. ¢ Red Kangaroos PRODUC ip Kangaroos are a family comprising several groups, including great wallabies and tree-dwelling kangaroos. Kangaroos, the prototypical marsupial, live in Australia and in Papua New Guinea, never more than 9 miles (15 km) from water. They have large, muscular . oO a SSS hind legs that they use to take great consecutive leaps, reaching speeds i H of 15 to 20 miles per hour (24-32 km/h). They are able to maintain 2 days! |236 days 238 days their balance standing only on their hind legs. Their hee! bone RUT AND NEW! iTHE OFFSPRING =| RUT AND NEW (calcaneus) is long and acts as a lever. CONCEPTION! Ge NeDENE i CONCEPTION Family Macropodidae Species Macropus rufus The female can give birth to an offspring while -— another one is in aa .. the marsupium. :) Females are half this size. dibads 1 When preparing for the birth of an offspring, the female kangaroo licks its coat to form a kind of path some 5.5 inches (14 TEAT cm) long, which the offspring will follow to grows in reach the entrance to the pouch located tandem with the higher up on the belly. offspring and can reach 4 inches (10 cm) long. Then it contracts again. 2 Small kangaroos are born after a few weeks of gestation in an early stage of their development, weighing less than 0.2 ounce (5 g). They cannot see or hear. They only move their front paws, with which they drag themselves, following their mother's trail of saliva and guided by their sense of smell. Two UTERUSES The marsupial female has two uteruses. The baby kangaroo must \ get to the pouch within three minutes or it will not survive. sc gy Lact 0.8 inch At eight months, the Upon reaching the marsupium, the baby offspring leaves the pouch fastens its mouth upon one of the four teats (2 0 mm) and begins to add grass to inside. At this point, the baby is red and its diet, but it will looks very fragile. However, it will grow THE SIZE OF AN OFFSPRING WHEN continue to be suckled continuously over the next four months, IT ENTERS THE MARSUPIUM until it is 18 months old. during which it will not leave the pouch. 42 BEHAVIOR AND LIFE CYCLE Miraculous Placenta he largest reproductive group is formed by placental mammals, in which the unborn offspring develop in the | female's uterus. During gestation, food and oxygen pass from the mother to the fetus through an organ known as the placenta, which allows the exchange of substances through the blood. At birth, the offspring often have no hair, are deaf and blind, and feed on milk secreted by the female's mammary glands, which become active after birth. e Gestation of Rats 5 Gestation lasts between 22 and a 24 days. Whereas the placenta is discoid and hemochorial, the ovaries are essential for maintaining gestation. If an ovariectomy is performed at any stage of gestation, it will always bring about a miscarriage or the reabsorption of the fetuses since the placenta does not produce sufficient progesterone to maintain gestation. The growth of the uterine horns becomes visible on the thirteenth day of gestation. f composed of four cells and \ | is covered with a thin layer . § of glycoprotein. It implants itself in the uterus. The blastocyst has now implanted and established itself in the uterus. The fetus begins to form, and the blastocyst becomes a yolk sac. EYE begins to develop and q BRAIN can now be The brain is observed. forming; it appears ica transparent. The embryo has now fastened itself to the embryonic sac (a sort of balloon that covers the fetus) and to the placenta. The brain, eyes, and legs begin to form. 2% il At this point, the embryo is l y ) Rat embryo at the two-cell stage. By the second day, it will have four cells, and on the third day, it will enter the uterus. ORGANS Internal organs begin to form and become visible. Placenta From whales to shrews, placental mammals are characterized by gestating their young inside the mother and giving birth when they are well developed. To do so, they have a special organ, the placenta. This is a spongy tissue that completely surrounds the embryo, allowing the exchange of substances through the blood. In this way, the mother can transfer nutrients and oxygen to the embryo, at the same time that she absorbs the metabolic waste of her future offspring. After birth, the placenta is immediately devoured by the mother, who uses her teeth to help the young leave the structure. EYELIDS They grow very rapidly, and by day 18 the eyes are already covered. TOES Toes on the front limbs can also be distinguished. MAMMALS 43 SPINE The spine can be distinguished and is ready to support the little rat. ORGANS The organs are now almost complete and ready to go out into the world. 0.4 inch @o mm) Eyes and extremities are now visible, and the internal organs begin to develop. A pre-cartilaginous Extremities are maxillary and the outer ear in the process of begin to form. formation. SPINE Cervical and lower lumbar vertebrae begin to develop. LEGS PLACENTA The fetus is attached to the placenta. The eyelids grow very rapidly, and within a few hours the eyes will be completely covered. The palate has already completed its development, and the umbilical cord retracts. Only a few days are left before the female will give birth to a new litter of little rats. At birth, they are helpless despite the fact that all their organs are developed. 44 BEHAVIOR AND LIFE CYCLE The First Days ammals whose offspring develop within the uterus devote a lot of attention to their young compared to other animals, because their pups are unable to live on their own at birth. That is why they are cleaned, fed, and warmed. Dogs have various developmental stages. First is the neonatal stage, which lasts from the opening of the pups' eyes until they begin to hear. Then comes the socialization stage, which runs from days 21 to 70, and, finally, the juvenile stage, from 70 days on. = ee , j tion Period This period is essential in the reproductive process of mammals. The young of most placental mammals are totally dependent in the first stages of their life on mammary milk secretion. YEARS 4. 3-4 years 34 24 18 18 months months 7-10 14 months i v Lion Dog ise) = cy = = Se = =. nc 3& eS ta a BS) o Like humans, dogs develop slowly after birth, because they are not fully developed when they come into this world and are incapable of living on their own. They need a structured environment in which they are cared for by their parents and other members of the pack. The first pup is born WET HAIR between 1 and 2 Once dry, pups seek ¢ hours after a teat from which to contractions \ suck colostrum, begin. , en, "=" which consists of, 1 — 2s ~ among other things, Ss immunological , = substances. - ‘ MEMBRANE Placenta, which covers the pup ~ - at, we > 7 ** LS Sy 4 a Cf of LA The mother builds a den in a warm place away from noise. At 20 days, pups start to hear and ‘ react to sound. This period, in which pups depend totally on the mother, lasts from birth to 15 or 20 days, when the pups open their eyes. But until then, they are completely dependent on their mother, seek contact with the mammary glands, and whimper if they are alone. They have little ability to keep themselves warm, and they even need the stimulation of their mother to pass body wastes. EYES remain shut until the second or third week. TACTILE Xx They push with their snout until they are hidden. . EXTENSOR REFLEX ; At 12 days, pups extend their hind legs when picked up. bo The relationships of pups to their mother and siblings are essential to dogs' later development, because, although their social structures and relationships are largely innate, they must be shaped, tested, and practiced to develop properly. Natural weaning involves offering pups predigested food as a replacement for milk. When the mother comes back from hunting, its mouth has an odor, and the pups, stimulated by the odor, smell her, lick her snout, rub it, and nibble her jaws and face, which stimulates the regurgitation of food. At this stage, in which the pups have milk teeth, they can begin to eat these foods. The mother lies down to make it easier for the pups to reach her. MAMMALS 45 Op —— SKIN Short and soft hair Pups At birth, pups do not innately recognize members of their species; they do not seem to know that they are dogs. They must learn this, and the mother and the rest of the litter are in charge of teaching them this. TRANSPORT To move her weak pups, which cannot yet walk, the mother picks them up by the skin on the napes of their necks and places them in the den. Fifteen days after birth, mother dogs experience what is called the bonding phenomenon: they become aware of the litter's existence, see them as a group, and notice if any puppy is missing. The mother moves the pups without hurting them. STANDING UP The mother no longer needs to lie down and is free to move away. STRENGTH The pups are now able to be on their own. «7 46 BEHAVIOR AND LIFE CYCLE Trademark he exclusive characteristic of mammals, the one that immediately identifies them, is the presence of milk-producing glands with which the females of all mammalian species feed their offspring after they are born. The number and arrangement of mammary glands vary by species. Teats are arranged in pairs and are present in both sexes, although only females possess functional mammary glands—and that only while lactation lasts. How a Cow Gives Milk pageant GLANDS IN FEMALE MAMMALS First impulse: This impulse is The brain gives PIG DOG ry \ With suction, the transmitted by off oxytocin, JZ . Ka =A neurohormonal the inguinal nerve sending a signal to , v wy r Ww reflex related to lactation tothe spinal cord and the heart through a branch iy A \ / generates a nerve impulse. from there to the brain. —_ of the jugular vein. | ) J Brain Pr 6 iS \ . P i) .SHEEP / \ 2 HORSE / ) — Inguinal ify 4)) é\ 6 Nerve } 4 } 4 | \ 4 - rt! \ Bone Structure PO ay (posterior view) =a Milk ejection in The hormone is , the udder is distributed to : produced by the the entire body ’ contraction of through the arterial , Suspensory myoepithelial cells, system. This is how it \ Ligaments which constrict the reaches the heart and ro alveoli. then the udder. Abdominal Wall Muscle Udder “i Mammary Cows and mares have two . tymphiNode mammary glands that mh = together form an udder. It Pree begins to function after | birth and stops when the offspring stop nursing. It is regulated by pituitary, RIGHT thyroid, placental, and FRONT - adrenocortical hormones. QUARTER , ’ Mammary J Parenchyma ie GALLONS (15 L) OF MILK CAN BE STORED IN THE BOVINE UDDER. LEFT REAR QUARTER 4 ] e<) om ‘ee that drain into a common duct og SECONDARY GLANDULAR DUCTS PRIMARY Milk circulates , GLAND DUCTS through this duct a from the lobules to the teat cistern. SPHINCTER MUSCLE TEAT DUCT id Alveolus The functional unit of milk production BLOOD CAPILLARIES INTERNAL CAVITY (LUMEN) Milk secretion is stored here. MILK DUCT MYOEPITHELIAL CELLS COMPOSITION OF MILK (%) PROTEINS CASEIN FAT When the ducts contract in response to the oxytocin hormone (the ejection, or let- down, reflex), milk flows ” through the lactiferous ducts to the mammary gland's cistern. CARBOHY- RESIDUES DRATES Human 1.2 05 38 70 0.2 Horse 2.2 13 17 6.2 0.5 Cow 3.5 2.8 3.7 4.8 0.7 Buffalo 4.0 350-15 48 0.7 Goat 3.6 2:f Ad 47 0.8 Sheep 5.8 49 79 45 0.8 ad = NORMAL STATE BEHAVIOR AND LIFE CYCLE Development and Growth lay is much more than entertainment for young mammals. This activity, which may appear to have no specific purpose, is the way in which they learn to be part of their species in the early stages of their lives, simultaneously acquiring the basic means of survival. In their games, chimpanzees perform primary instinctive activities that, with time and improvement, will become perfected instinctive activities. These include using tools, balancing in trees, and forming communication. Young chimpanzees express themselves by means of sounds, facial gestures, and body postures they imitate from adults. Play also allows them to develop their muscle strength and achieve good motor coordination. are emitted by chimpanzees, including its pant-hoot: screams and grunts that can be heard a mile and a quarter (2 km) away. Pant-hoots are unique to the This expression This expression —_ This gesture individual and can help to identify communicates transmits indicates terror. submission. worry. each member of the group. Play also functions as a method of learning to survive in a wild habitat. It trains carnivores in hunting techniques and herbivores in detecting, and fleeing from, danger. MAMMALS Chimpanzees are characterized by their long arms, which are endowed with great strength, and by their opposable thumbs. The digits of their hands 4 and feet are large, allowing them to climb with great ease. They can hold onto a branch with their foot while they pluck its fruit with their hand. Opposable Thumb When they move around ite on all fours, they bear OG their weight on the soles , of the feet and the knuckles of their hands. The use of tools is not common in mammals. However, chimpanzees are capable of using objects as tools, a skill they acquire by observing adults. They can use sticks to eat termites or use leaves as spoons to drink water. Some mammals, especially chimpanzees, communicate through facial expressions. This ability is well developed in the young primates, which express fear, submission, and worry, among other feelings. THEY CAN LEARN AND EXPRESS WORDS USING SIGN LANGUAGE. What we humans call play appears to be limited only to mammals, because they have well-developed senses, intelligence, and the ability to learn. It is through play that mammals carry out their learning. They have sensory abilities very similar to “~~ those of people, and { they distinguish smells better. Because of their large brains, they are very intelligent and can communicate with people by signs. Play also helps encourage apes to identify with their species. It provides a basis for learning to communicate through the use of sounds and body posture to express, for example, submission or domination. A chimpanzee pokes a stump in search of termites, using a stick as a tool. Only 15 minutes of play with peers per day will moderate the effects of social isolation. A great entertainment for apes is hanging from trees. This exercise improves their coordination and arm strength. BEHAVIOR AND LIFE CYCLE Of Flesh Thou Art a MAMMALS 5 Family Felidae Size a= Species Panthera leo female? Weight 265-410 pounds The bulk of their diet (120-185 kg) consists of large mammals, although they also catch small mammals, birds, or he carnivore group is composed of species & _ whose diet is based on hunting other 7 of * animals. The kind of teeth they have help ri ~ them efficiently cut and tear the flesh of their 7 os captured prey. Lions, the most sociable of the felines, have good vision and sharp hearing; they live in packs, and when they go hunting, they do so as a group. ~ - a to Lions are characterized by a strong, muscular physique. A male requires 15.5 pounds of meat (7 kg) a day, whereas a female needs 11 pounds (5 ‘ kg). They have a short digestive tract, which rapidly absorbs nutrients from the ingested meat. UPPER PER ..__ PREMOLARS SANINE | eT fT. eo _ re UPPER 4 INCISORS « The Hunt LYING IN AMBUSH Hidden in the grass, the lioness silently approaches the prey. Other females wait CARNASSIAL : in hiding. MOLAR ; They, arevery large; and the dental crowns are-two,long blades arranged as shears that fit into’each other. Together they slice and cut flesh to perfection. LOWER INCISORS ANTERIOR PREMOLARS y CREF Rubi ti reptiles when the BUFFALO opportunity arises. They are not scavengers. They generally eat only fresh meat, something they have killed or succeeded in taking away from another predator. Short, with a uniform brown color. They have an off-white tuft of hair on the chin. Their vision is six times better than that of humans. They also have binocular vision, essential for locating prey. Measures some 35 inches (90 cm) in length and allows : ‘s them to keep their balance while running. They also use it to shoo away flies. AQ Peis OF MEAT CAN BE EATEN BY : | A LION IN A SINGLE MEAL. i Se 2 . VLETHAL BITEage W the prey falls, and the lioness sinks her fangs into the neck until she kills it. The other females approach. a” ACCELERATION When only a few yards away, it starts running to catch the zebra. It exceeds 30 miles per. hour,(50 km/h); and the’other lionesses cooperate inthe hunt. The lioness hurls the weight of her body-on the-zebra's neck, trying to knock it down; if she succeeds, the hunt will be successful. Sy mS a a) . ; i 52 BEHAVIOR AND LIFE CYCLE MAMMALS 53 NB The rumen creates an environment appropriate for the growth and reproduction of microbes. The absence of oxygen inside it favors the growth of bacteria that can digest plant cell walls to produce simple sugars (glucose). Microbes ferment glucose and provide energy to grow and produce volatile fatty acids as the final product of fermentation. Herbivores uminants, such as cows, sheep, or deer, have stomachs made of four chambers with which they carry out a unique kind of digestion. Because these animals need to eat large quantities of grass in very short times—or else be easy targets for predators!—they have developed a digestive system that allows them to swallow food, store it, and then return it to the mouth to chew calmly. When animals carry out this activity, they are said to ruminate. Only small particles reach the omasum, the third stomach. Many are recycled and absorbed as nutrients. Filter inside the omasum KEY rumen produce amino acids, the building blocks of proteins. RUMEN F ; : As they grow, microbes in the : - mama INGESTION AND mam ACID DIGESTION FERMENTATION Bacteria can make use of mam DIGESTION AND } j ammonia or urea as sources of RUMINATION ABSORPTION RETICULUM ‘ | nitrogen to produce amino acids. ’ Without bacterial transformation, mame REABSORPTION FERMENTATION SMALL ammonia and urea would be of no OF NUTRIENTS AND DIGESTION INTESTINE use to cows. Teeth Herbivorous animals such as horses and bovids have molars with a large flat surface that reduces food to pulp, as well as incisors for cutting grass. Grinding is also done by the molars. When cows feel satiated, Cows wrap Then they chew they regurgitate balls of their tongues it with lateral food from the rumen and around the food. movements. chew them again in the ABOMASUM ENAMEL ; mouth. This is called rumination; it stimulates salivation, and, as digestion is a ia very slow process, cows make use of rumination to improve ROOT their own digestion together : with the intervention of | Cows lightly chew grass and anaerobic microorganisms such ingest it into their first two as protozoa, bacteria, and fungi. stomachs: the rumen and the reticulum. Food passes continually from the rumen to the reticulum (nearly once every minute). There various bacteria colonies begin fermenting the food. CEMENT -———-O DENTINE ——————o PULP. ————a After the main process of digestion and absorption of nutrients, what remains continues through the small and large intestines. There the remaining digestive products ferment, and wastes, or feces, are formed. INCISORS The abomasum secretes strong acids and digestive enzymes that finish breaking down the food bolus (the mass of chewed food). helps ruminants reduce the size of the process that allows them to obtain energy ingested food particles. It is part of the from plant cell walls, also called fiber. @ om Db C D REGURGITATION REMASTICATION REINSALIVATION REINGESTION 54 BEHAVIOR AND LIFE CYCLE The Great Chain WOLF eats prey that it catches but can also compete | Large carnivores are at aintaining ecological balance requires the existence of heen cen with scavenger birds. prey and predators. Predatorial species bring about a chain—there are no other | V I sustained reduction in the number of individuals of the ee cde prey species. If predators did not exist, their prey would probably proliferate until the ecosystem collapsed, because there would SMALL- not be enough food for them all. Disappearance of predators is pele arenes \y GEOR FROY'S CAT the cause of many imbalances created in certain habitats by large felines and dogs, it is in likes to hunt larger danger of extinction as a result of human activity. animals (such as deer). people, whose predatory ability exceeds that of any other living species. Like all other animal species, mammals do not make up a food chain in themselves, instead depending at all times on the participation of plants and other animals. Small Omnivores Equilibrium of the System 13 There is a very efficient natural equilibrium in the food chains of a Small carnivores feed on small, aise pe Hit ane Not Only Mammals A as é é » amphibians, as well as on other Ferrets are important in terrestrial ecosystem, of which mammals form various parts. For herbivorous mammals or on birds, : p : meets i z mammals, such as rats, mice, controlling rodents, but i this balance to be maintained, there can never be more herbivores than fish, or invertebrates. At the same and moles. They also eat fruit gi " ‘ plant food or enough carnivores to overwhelm the herbivores. If there time, they must be on guard : ‘ they must simultaneously were more herbivores than plant food, they would eat all the vegetation against other, larger species. guard against birds of prey. and then suffer a drastic population reduction. A similar situation would occur if there were enough carnivores to overwhelm the herbivores. Kings of the Jungle Lions are great carnivores (one of the largest in size) and strong, with little or no competition. Cheetahs will rapidly flee from lions if the latter arrive to challenge them for their food. Only when a lion is alone might a pack of hyenas, for example, confront it to steal its meal. Energy is transferred from one level to another in an ecosystem. At each level, a small amount of energy is lost. What is retained at one level is the potential energy that will be used by the next. Biomass is the total mass of living matter; it can apply to a specific level of the trophic pyramid, a population of individuals of the same species, or a community of different species. A J Tertiary 4 a Si, “Ail Consumers Energy aoe vf) \% \ Consumed Competition i ~s \ ul iE pas : | Super-adapted Secondary Within the same level, different Rerause’se their hich CHEETAH GAZELLE Consumers herbivorous rodents (such as varied plant diet Pee P, rats and prairie dogs) compete d rn il h ak ra Primary i with each other for food. fo a SUSU TY AVE: 110: = —— f = 3 Consumers L problem surviving. z - LO OF Pu Varied Diets ff ms Te | : : J lf sn wp ig Sees ‘a ii algae), because they depend on ey the chain branches out. CAPE them for subsistence. And other ‘ BUFFALO mammals feed on them. ie lee » = AN) “4 fi 4 —— 7 { WM @ ZEBRA Scavengers Level 1 Because of photosynthesis, only plants and algae can transform inorganic matter into organic matter. They form the beginning of the food chain. eat meat from animals that are already dead. Some carnivores become scavengers under conditions of scarcity. MAMMALS 57 Th t dani Brey Ae) Record the When a predator is detected, the lookout warns its group one that kills the greatest so that all of them can take cover in a nearby hole. This number of meerkats role rotates among different members of the group, and the warning is given by a very wide repertoire of sounds, each of which has a distinct meaning. . —-_ - Binocular and in color, it allows ee It is common to see them to locate ( : their greatest them in the highest prdaiors: birds places of their territory on rocks or c 3 rCiz c OFFSPRING Vein he father or mothe Standing watch gives the Cry nger, all Merun to hide rr IW. defend their territory and stand watch: The" iy dominant male is the - reproducer. ineacicts useit = 1 toBalancess “= ; The meerkats' largest t: iF ‘ predator. To detect Oia theta in 8 ~*~ before it is!€en is of f tuple os! tion. - ~*~ bad . 58 BEHAVIOR AND LIFE CYCLE plays an important role, allowing wolves to Wolves = in So ciety ri oats b ocial units and mutual aid are common in mammals’ lives, except for a few species that live alone or in small families. Wolves are social animals that live closely attached to a group—the pack—that forms the basis of their social structure. Behavior in a pack is highly regulated and hierarchical. a . There are two hierarchies in the pack: one of males and another of females. At the top of each are the alpha (or dominant) male and female. Underneath this pair is a group of subdominant wolves among whom there may be little or no difference in rank. Among females, a strong dominant- submissive relationship is observed between beta and gamma wolves, as well as of the alpha female over those two. oa” i Made up of the breeding pair, which is dominant, and their descendants. Only the breeding pair, however, are permanently dominant. A relationship of dominance-submission between sexes is also established. The alpha female exercises clear dominance over the subdominant males. The highest-ranking adults live in the central area or home. The territory proper lies in the periphery and is inhabited by subadults and members of lower social rank. Between these two areas is that of vital domain, an intermediate area inhabited by all members. The territory can extend over 100 square miles (300 square km). is inhabited by the highest- ranking animals. is inhabited by wolves of lower social rank. is inhabited indiscriminately by all the wolves. This posture implies submission and nonaggression. Fights and confrontations within the pack are rituals by means of which relations of power and hierarchical status are established and delimited. Low-ranking High-ranking Tt crouches in front of the snout of the dominant and gives it rapid licks, submitting to the hierarchy. The low-ranking wolf advances with submissive posture: ears laid back and its tail between its legs. Then it lies down and urinates while the dominant smells its genitals to identify it. MAMMALS 59 Although it looks like the wolves are playing in this picture, they are actually carrying out a game involving power and hierarchy. IS THE SIZE OF THE PACK DEPENDING ON THE AVAILABILITY OF FOOD. Wolves live in packs made up of two to three pairs of adults and their various generations of offspring. They cooperate in a hunting, killing animals == several times larger than themselves. Although 95 they share food, wolves <4 have a hierarchical order that obliges the young to make way for larger and older family members. Diversity DEEP SLEEP NOCTURNAL FLIGHT RATIONED WATER PLAYING HIDE AND SEEK RECORD BREATH-HOLDERS THE LANGUAGE OF WATER AERIAL ACROBATICS LIVELY TUNNELS NATURAL BUILDERS DISTINCTIVE STRIPES Zebras' stripes extend down to the underbelly. ‘ They confuse predators. PE eis wef here is great variety among them. For example, here you will energy during times when food is scarce. of certain mammals to adapt to the hot mammals, and in this chapter discover that there are species, such as Here we will also show you how the and dry conditions of the desert. Camels, we try to show you some bats, that are expert fliers, while others, bodies of some mammals (whales and in particular, are very adept when it representatives of the most such as dormice, enter into a deep dolphins) are adapted to aquatic life. In comes to retaining and efficiently using outstanding differences among winter sleep that allows them to save addition, we will also consider the ability liquids. DIVERSITY Dormice build their nests out of twigs, moss, and leaves, although they can also hibernate in trees, stone walls, or old buildings, creating a nest from fur, feathers, and leaves. They then settle into the nest, forming a ball. When they cannot find a natural refuge, dormice may settle into birds' nests with total impunity. Deep Sleep ow many times have you heard the expression “dead as a dormouse”? The comparison is no accident, although it should be understood that dormice do not die: they merely hibernate. In the cold season, low temperatures and scarcity of food lead many mammals to enter into lethargic states. Body temperatures drop, heart rates and respiration slow down, and they lose consciousness. @ J HOLLOW BALL ee BALL ‘ Dormice begin to Like‘an ovenbird form a ball out of nest, the ball these materials, in must be hollow 4 imitation of the so it can shelter posture they will the dormouse. FINISHEDIIESEE RAW MATERIALS adopt during With an entrance in To build their nests, hibernation. front, the hollow ball dormice collect has been transformed t twigs, leaves, moss, into a nest. 7) ° feathers, and hair. Weight loss after consuming all theinreserves During this period, dormice enter into a de€p. % ' sleep. Body temperature drops to 342F (1° C), C appreciably decreasing the,héart rate. In-fact, HAZEL The energy they consume during hibernation is , up to 50 minutes can transpire between breaths: THEIR BODY DORMOUSE obtained from the subcutaneous fat layer built up is what they can weigh e », Throughett thesesnonths, they slowly use up J TEMPERATURE Muscardinus during the autumn. Their nutrition comes from after accumulating fat \ KR \ helt reserves/fosifig up to 50 percent of their DURING in leaves, bark, nuts, and other (mainly plant) foods. é \) body weightsfheir endocrine system is almost avellanarius Before the arrival of winter, they stock up on mri Late bese! ves before ) totally, aterest: the thyroid ceases functioning, a | HIBERNATION SSS dried fruits to increase their energy, allowing Dormicearetver hibernating. does the-interstitial tissue of the testicles. Habitat Almost all Europe them to easily climb trees and walls. Before fond of oak pets : 4 @ ‘ i aa ss hibernating, they spend all i Habits Hibernate 4 months their time eating, | \ : of the year accumulating . — — x | od - reserves for j ¥ Gestation winter. ‘ 2 r POSITION OF THE BODY 5 } \ 1 Anta ae x 1 = TAIL 3 J ve . — They cover : {poi ' Sgt BS he ta part of the < A é < > - body with it. — ae - m Ff: SSD ‘ } ‘ p ih HEAD > Weight : > . ‘ a Cae alt rn” ; ’ : Sd, By j ; They hide it 2 ounces ! ( = ) . <4 47 . ‘ A”. OUReT, er ae we A betiind their H (51g) 35 C — Sat 24 2) Ss : : 4 “ } . | } long tail. it —— 4 to 7 inches THEIR NORMAL BODY Sa) le aS ae Bi le oe ; S41 a : i J | 1h (10-17 cm) TEMPERATURE. p= % 4 ee B78 Sas ey f : «s ne FEET 4 , remain flexed Tey @ | j during these ; 8 months / 4 months?) > YL re 3 They are conscious They remain in a s Phew yA — - rand.active. f state‘of hibernation. 4 > (2) . :) # RESPIRATION ENERGY: HEART ‘ f J “o “/ Fifty. minutes They obtain it from the Heartbeats val > ; 4 V4 ; C7 P :- a can pass subcutaneous fat reserves decrease ix Sob a j t v AN) F > : Az between’breaths. they accumulated.in the fall. considerably. » ny te , at ; ¢ y oe vay Py * A, a . > ake ve” : : : : aw a, 1. 4 _ | J é \ > ' CHESTNUT ! Q \ Its caloric en + § > contribution Y Ch N ‘ O UTS’. increases rf a at é ithou h the F : é . j — )" = Pencil their energy Za v ge ! , BIORHYTHM OF A DORMOUSE WHILE\HIBERNATING Pe Sallis reserves ——— | 7 " and insects, . : B € e f r f/\' ? j dormice begin to . ' Sad | ? TEMPERATURE s feed on nuts prior . ih y . . Pp = ; Tt —-—— yt - to hibernation. “a : . s . = D \ wth , — q . ‘ ; \ OTHER PLACES FOR HIBERNATION werd oe O——.— ACORNS f . The nuts of oak 4 BIRD'S NEST HOLE IN ° trees (genus y “5 If they do not TREE Quercus) are a 4 se ‘ sm, find a place to ‘an also serve RESPIRATION favorite food of " s “ig build theirnest, Yas a burrow for dormice. hey maystake hibernation. IRR ABE BIBI PaO Da AD BRI DR NDP PBRPLED OLD overga bird'ssnest: Prior Deep Brief Deep After Feeding Hibernation® Activity |Hibernatiof| Hibernation 64 DIVERSITY MAMMALS 65 Rationed Water The Hump as a Reserve RESISTANCE TO THIRST AND HUNGER Formed by the accumulation of fat during periods of abundant : Dromedaries can amels have developed a sophisticated physiology in order to face life in hot climates. Their nese BUSING. Se CHER IMesc ie alee 2elh SCR a go without food 4 5 re Ei ‘ absence of plant foods. This chemical reaction provides camels with a THE AMOUNT OF WATER and water for kidneys are capable of greatly distilling their urine to prevent water loss. When sandstorms small but invaluable amount of metabolic water. The breakdown of the DROMEDARIES CAN amt Cie cs g i i fat produces hydrogen, which combines with inhaled oxygen to CONSUME IN 10 MINUTES sie CY \ ry worsen, camels curl up on the ground and close their eyes and nasal openings to protect eRe ESTEE OTE Alcala ete Gn 122° F (50° C). HL themselves. When water and food are scarce, they are able to endure by consuming the reserves iymph, and plasma, they can go without food and water for long BS Sidse he einai they have accumulated and stored in the hump and internal sacs. ae Tf all the hump's be ec ioe water is used up, it hangs off to one They also have oval-shaped red blood cells, which can easily move hhangs off to side of the body. throughout the body even when the blood has become thickened from dehydration. HUMP Fat accumulates and prevents the excretion of water from the whole body. This allows camels to use a minimum of water. 40% The maximum percentage of body / weight camels can lose without dying Camelus : z DE e@ dromedarius ‘ : Speer ins ant = BODY NOSE eI Their mucus structure is 100 | f C Habitat Arabia and Africa iaiabraheie times more complex than that ’ ay l pounds 7 f fh d retains 66 4 Kg Food Berpivarous their bodies act as coer e ite ars Foire ‘ ’ =. Average life span 50 years heat retainers, and = : pueag > CAN WELCH THIS UC = during the night, HAIR & | = the excess is so thick that it prevents / 2 pounds | 2 quarts ¥ , ™ temperature heat from reaching the skin. . rs 1 eal f ; P - ' dissipates by When cold is intense, the hair 4 (Ql kg) (2 )) N n = keeps the camel warm with . ——_ | conduction. its own body heat. ‘ v4 of consumed fat of metabo i | a : : : water ~ Weight ) : tar . > ; ' ounds y | > (600 kg) © 4 /. feet : r : (3 m) ; 1 &@ idnevs ERYTHROCYTES 240% : : = > The percentage by which greatly distill the urine, preventing — f an erythrocyte can swell, unnecessaty water Hiss lie vane may Normal increasing its ability to get as thick as syrup and contain : Erythrocyte double the salt of seawater. In this Swollen Bap sbole Water way, camels eliminate impurities Erythrocyte and filter the blood, losing as little water as possible. KIDNEYS concentrate urine to retain water. KNEES ‘ have calluses so camels can kneel without getting burned. recovers part of the water. Because the loop is longer in dromedaries than in any other -" mammal, water tal ci s fora _— 7 ' ig time. - 7 The “ i — s Se ies. —- r . of a ae - ~ @ 66 DIVERSITY MAMMALS 67 > ars _ “it - : — _—s Se | =—"E ae eel es — — | - — z 4 - # ail Z | Ney & | . . . . DiGwell a Adaptation in Respiration ae Einan % ~ a When they dive t t denth hal tivat Upon submerging, it fills The heartirate slows An ample blood flow, + at ak a3 © a Be S, wre Wy ~~ stele! wath water, mach foals sh during the al in permlobin, . . ; an entire physiological mechanism that makes maximum the spermaceti oil an ive, limiting oxygen ransports elevate perm whal es are unique animals whos € species | Mt S. On the use of their oxygen reserves. This produces what is called a makes it denser. conor levels of oxygen to the th ili - iv Naximium ) thoracic and pulmonary collapse, causing air to pass from the body and brain. one hand, they nave tne abiil ! aximum a n : se a, : ma lungs to the trachea, reducing the absorption of the toxin ' and remain under water without oxygen TO up 0 this by nitrogen. They also rapidly transmit nitrogen from the blood to ne “lL eans of a complex phy in it -al mechanism that, 0 (elae rate, the lungs at the end of the dive, thus reducing the circulation of “ = oer re. . ; : lig ; * blood to the muscles. Sperm whales' muscles contain a large 1 use alr in the nu FITIZE mi, or gans amount of myoglobin, a protein that stores oxygen, allowing the ; ab fr : | Ln nly on rm whales to stay underwater much longer. h . a ot y a = < ON THE SURFACE WHEN THEY DIVE RETIA MIRABILIA LUNGS va @) m ] nN utes Blowholetremaine powerful muscles ~~ The retia is a network of absorb TIME THEY CAN SPEND open, allowing the tightly close the “ sled vessels (miabilia) ahaa HOUT BREATHING. whales to breathe as opening of the entering the brain. a — Py 2 mutch oxygen as they blowhole, keeping a P can before diving. water from entering. ner Pn oe ~ sill oxygen into its bod ere. WD eve re through spiracles located on the top of its head. he. REPRIORISRZAING Oxyceene Sperm whales can allocate oxygen to certain vital organs, \ such as the lungs and heart, directing it away from the t digestive system. . Weight : = yD 20 to 90 tons By Comparison $ , 11 elephants of 8 tons apiece OT Kren — * at ee MOUT Because of the placement Nostril of the nostrils, sperm wists can swim with their A mouth open and capture Muscle etree prey. They feed on squid. Spenuacelt Organ Sperm whales' ability to dive to great depths could be due in part to their spermaceti organ, located in their heads. It consists of a large mass of waxy oil that helps them both float and take deep dives. Its density changes with temperature and pressure change. It, like the melon of a dolphin, directs sound, focusing clicks, since its eyes are of little use when far from light. Teeth They have 18 to 20 conical teeth, weighing up to 2 pounds (1 kg) apiece, in each lower mandible. Mandibular Bone COMPOSITION 90% Spermaceti Oil “. x prope ae a dive, the heart — rate drops (a condition known as bradycardia), _ which lowers oxygen | consumption. Making Use e 5 r j A ee: ¥ of Oxygen Sperm whales can dive deeper and stay submerged longer than any other mammal, because they have various ways of saving O oxygen: an ability to store it in @) their muscles, a metabolism that can function anaerobically, and AMOUNT OF AIR the inducement of bradycardia REPLACED IN ONE during a dive. BREATH 89% AMOUNT OF AIR REPLACED IN ONE BREATH the whale’ main means of propulsion. Dive True diving champions, sperm whales can dive to depths of 9,800 feet (3,000 m), descending up to 10 feet (3 m) per second in search of squid. As a general rule, their dives last about 50 minutes, but they can remain underwater up to two hours. Before beginning a deep dive, they lift their caudal fin completely out of the water. They do not have a dorsal fin, but they do have a few triangular humps on the posterior part of their body. | OFEET (OM) — \ _ ON THE SURFACE a They inhale oxygen through the blowhole located at the top of the head. + 3,300 FEET (1,000 M) 90 MINUTES They store 90 percent of their oxygen in their muscles, so they can be submerged for a long time. Di 0 FEET (0 M) 7 \__ ON THE SURFACE - They exhale all the air from their lungs; this is called spouting, or blowing. 68 DIVERSITY MAMMALS 69 FORCE OF STARTS UPSIDE Aerial pect DOWN The cat begins to fall upside down and will turn 1802 e —~ . .. . . . . . . . ..»,-, = i ———_ ll ‘iti re upon its axis (in two stages), Cr O a 1CS aiid landing upright. ats have a surprising ability to land upright. The secret lies in their skeleton, which is more flexible and has more bones than that of any other mammal. Cats' reflexes allow them to twist using the physical principle of the conservation of angular momentum. The principle, first formulated by Isaac Newton, FIRST TWIST In this maneuver, the cat rotates the front half of its body 1802 on its body's axis. The other half rotates only slightly as a result. a Strong Slight Rotation aA > Front states that all bodies in circular elf movement tend to a constant amount of energy. Thus, the more the animal = extends its legs to its axis of wth Messterator® INDEPENDENCE Like a skater who extends or rotation, the slower it rotates, legs in to its axis to The “Brake” H H A increase the speed of Tt extends its hind : folds the arms to control the red istri buti ng the total ile as legs perpendicular to speed of rotation, the cat energy of the system. If the * the axis and reduces moves its hind legs—but the speed of rotation of this part. independently of each other. animal tucks in its legs, it rotates more rapidly. @ LIKE A SKATER Name Domestic cat ri | . 1 ue Family Felidae i 7 Species Felis catus i { Adult Weight 4 to 15 pounds (2-7 kg) Longevity 15 years Dimensions ’ Itidraws its hind : legs in to the axis of the body. i f t f 10 inches (25 cm) It extends its front legs at right -— Axis — > 5 | ee angles to the axis. To reduce To increase I i 12 inches i rotation rotation 4inches (30cm) opens arms to closes arms to. (10 cm) W 4 increase the reduce the radius radius of rotation. of the rotation. *e SECOND TWIST The cat lowers its hind legs and completes a full rotation on its axis. It again carries Time of the Fall IF A fall from a short distance usually causes Le more harm than one from a considerable Front Half ‘oe : ie . . 4 out two more rotations, one : , .% } : ; height, because the cat adopts a defensive The extended legs oa oe . i ; tighter than the other: posture only when it senses acceleration in the reduce the speed fall. Upon reaching terminal velocity, it can of rotation of this ; accelerate no faster, and the cat relaxes, vee It rotates _ ; Sees stretches out, and offers resistance to the fall. . oa acon Back Half .¢ AXIS Now the folded TW i =—s >, Relaxation legs increase the O Terminal speed of rotation Front Back velocity of this part. Half Half a . The tail Defensive stabilizes the posture weight of the body during the descent. FOUR FEET PLACED UNDER THE BODY With four feet positioned under the body, the cat bends its spine like a parachute and then merely corrects its posture for landing. Equilibrium IM§ The inner ear in the temporal bone Leff is divided into the cochlea, the vestibule, and three semicircular canals. Inside there is a system of cilia (sense receptors) and a viscous substance (endolymph) that generates the | sense of balance when the two come in contact with each other. Tt extends the hind legs to the height of e the front legs. Cross section of Bulla a semicircular It holds the canal cilia, which are equilibrium receptors. T° ELONGATION CAPACITY Extreme Flexibility Cats do not have a clavicle, and the articulations of their vertebrae are more flexible than those of most mammals. They can travel five times the length of their body in one leap. l/ 8 of a second TIME IT TAKES TO ROTATE AND LAND ON ITS FEET 1/2 SECOND LATER During a rotation, endolymph moves the cilia in the direction opposite the body's motion. QUICK AND PRECISE SHAKE During the rotation, endolymph At the moment LANDING i ici of landing, the Its front legs make the first can splash into the semicircular cat slightly contact with the ground. canals. To return the liquid to its flexes its feet to Then it lands on its hind legs, place, the cat gives a quick cushion the blow. shake of its head. and, finally, it relaxes its tail. 70 DIVERSITY MAMMALS 71 Natural Builders hey have no bricks or cement, but beavers, semiaquatic rodents, ) skillfully manage to build lodges of great architectural of J yy / ip J / Beavers continually repair the dam and add materials to it. Floating material carried along by the water is retained in the dam, along with the roots of vegetation that grows upon it, strengthening the entire structure. beauty. They do not work alone, and it is usual for them , to act in family groups. Everyone collaborates in building the CNA home, which is generally located next to a river or lake SAMY SF : surrounded by forested areas and which can be entered by only through aquatic tunnels. The task is difficult, and beavers work their whole lives enlarging, repairing, and improving their dwelling. / [oe i f Underwater ROOF Entrance Made of trunks, branches, AMERICAN stones, and mud. In this BEAVER These are unique structures, of which Galant aes aes dacbicie lr decnemecae a the f there are several types, which vary by water level, and second, to enlarge Castor canadensis ue : area. They are made of interwoven sticks, the flooded areal around the den. branches, grasses, and moss, and they Dams are built out of sticks and tree have a central chamber accessible trunks. Habitat Temperate forests in the from underwater. This chamber has : United States and Canada its floor above the water line, has of OFFSPRING DRY AREA Famil Castoridae two entrances, and can measure er ~ ~ . live with their parents. Covered with y more than 7 feet (2 m) wide ‘ }. ‘ and_are independent SSF tree bark, grass, Food Herbivorous and 3 feet (1 m) high ( d : after thrée years.* and little pieces ‘ = : <= of wood Up to 28 inches (70 cm) EXIT —_— Weight Beavers have 66 pounds webbed feet that (30 kg) they use to dive 12 inches and for other (30 cm) quick movements. maintain the structure of the dam, holding the Beavers can have positive and . tree trunks in place. negative effects. They create wetlands CHANGES ‘4 . . : y ; A for other species and prevent erosion f9 Their introduction into ei? la 4% ‘ y : Ar | . ry ee = rote tia in some cases. However, their dams ; a ne A f +3 C Y : os \ can also cause floods and create 7 tee co mLChithal stagnant water, thus : an they become a pest. destroying other habitats. : - UNDERWATER TUNNEL Mee LEE . Beavers frequently work in groups to gnaw down a trunk tunnels, generally a and carry it away. One of them cuts the tree with its remaining underwater pes Be teeth while the others stand guard. This work takes iaative minutes. . , eae about 15 minutes, and then the tree falls. = THE FOUNDATION Their mandibles In winter, they store and teeth are fresh branches in strong, and they the pond to serve as use their front a food reserve. feet as hands. ENTRANCE Their powerful Here is where BRANCHES incisors grow they enter; it is The material most used throughout their lives a straight path in constructing the at an incline. lodge. They are used to make the ceiling and to keep the inside dry. but are kept at manageable length by wear and tear from the constant work of cutting down trees. 72 DIVERSITY Nocturnal Flight ats are the only mammals that can fly. Scientists call them Chiroptera, a term derived from Greek words meaning “winged hands.” Their forelimbs have been _/ transformed into hands with very long fingers joined together by a membrane (called the patagium) that forms the surface of the wing. These mammals’ senses are so sensitive that they can move and hunt quickly and accurately in the dark. e Hibernation These bats spend the winter in a lethargic state hanging by their feet, faces down, in caves and other dark places. Bats are warm- blooded animals while they are active and become similar to cold-blooded creatures when they are asleep. They enter into a state of hibernation more rapidly and easily than any other mammal, and they can survive in cold temperatures for many months—even inside refrigerators—without needing to feed. Y nour ie \ THE SPEED SOME BATS : ) MAY REACH DURING FLIGHT HUMERUS RADIUS THUMB SECOND (/ FINGER A wre wy \ Y Forests of Ghana and Congo Famil FOURTH amily Pteropodae Length of wingspan 14 inches (36 cm) xpert Pilo Moved by their chest and back muscles, bats' wings push downward and backward, generating both thrust and lift. Then the wings spread sideways and upward. Finally they move forward until the tips almost rub the bat's head. Many of these flying mammals can drift through the air, gliding without flapping and maneuvering by folding their wings. Their Radar ‘ , Flexible Wings Most of the time bats fly at night in The animal emits an acoustical The patagium is formed by the near-total darkness. Instead of light, vibration imperceptible to the membranes between the digits. In they use a natural system similar to human ear because of its high some species, the wings are also frequency (about 18 kHz). The sonar or radar to guide themselves. signal strikes the objects extended by an additional membrane This system makes use of acoustical around it. (uropatagium), which joins the hind signals the bats themselves emit while HAND OR WING limbs to the tail. Their wings are not only used for flying (pushing the air as if they were oars in water) but also ELASTIC FIBERS tat The texture of the wing is help to maintain a constant body flying. This system allows them to 2] When the signals bounce back, The first finger, or recognize the location of any object in Lie ety! ulate and is front of them or of prey, along with its difference—the faster and ) | | } i BE g used as a claw. ; direction, size, or speed. It is as if they more intense the return signal, Powerful muscles soft and flexible. It is temperature and to trap insects, upon were seeing without light. the nearer the object or prey. move the entire wing. UROPATAGIUM _ lined with blood vessels. which bats feed. 74 DIVERSITY Playing Hide and Seek | ust lik an species of the animal kingdom, some mammals that live in the wild rely on their bodies' colorations or appearances to disguise their presence. Some mammals imitate objects in their environment, and others take on the appearances of other fain stripes, for example, give these animals a very showy appearance—but when mov natural envifonment, zebras are camouflaged. So in MAMMALS In Motion The patterns of tigers’ coats are useful in concealing their contours, _ especially when they are movin _among the shrubs and bush lains where they hunt. Elk jowever, can be concealed e vegetation they resemble only so as they keep still. - 5 na Is. Zebras’ <5 y in their J and crypsis, . ( A céloration of af makes it difficult fely onjspeed and sharp senses to distingui prey from another. Kicking and biting, zebi defend themselves from attacks by feline predators. The felines also make use of camouflage strategies to make attacks one on one. Many ani make use of element their surroundings or even of other living organi camouflage themselves. Sloths are anofher exa of then ammals, they have ng .. to avoid notices lage used by animals incapable of defending themsel 1 other way. Aggressive mimicry, on the other hand, 9 Ws organisms to surprise and attack their prey. This Occurs, for example, with wild felines (mountain lions, 6¢ Which take advantage of their skin colors and their fur to go unnoticed in their ecosystems, Zebras travelil herds as a natural form of self-protection. The disruptive — en some much darker rest of STRIPES Ls The coloration of ~ : t their coat changes’ : with the incidence and intensity of sunlight. i; f Y, Different erns at does not id colors of ey are very Skillful at branches—their small size and short Inerable when they are on the ground. surrounding it. Nevertheless, it does have 7? patterns that allow it, with the help of N ions, to disguise n one setting of ty itat. In the ite iform ae v aay . y ~ PROTECTIVE _ FUR ‘sg 4 2. * “S< SURROUNDINGS _ Shades and differences = ae *¥ Many have a coat that of color in the coat are = & ‘ changes color depending similar to tho: e on the surroundings. tread dry leaves. 7 sy 76 DIVERSITY MAMMALS 77 aE . %. = The Language of Wate eee (3). Spounds : po Interpretation «= jin i aay : é ; , z , ee ae The middl ds th t HUMAN BRAIN RPMI EBATN he ways in which cetaceans communicate with others of their epee FUN * sounds to the inner eat Gade Dobhinsbertnenences” H icti i 1 i ay tor ; from 100 Hz up to 150 kHz (the kind are among the most sophisticated in the animal kingdom. as with other o ean MEF ely un 15 Dolphins, for example, click with their mandibles when in trouble TE a aie = kHz). Low-frequency signals . . . . . an essential role in rea and whistle repeatedly when afraid or excited. During courtship and theformation of * ~ Fa ireot conte mating, they touch and caress. They also communicate through visual papal strata, cetaceans that cannot live alone. signals—such as leaping—to show that food is close by. They have a wide variety of ways to transmit important information. — © MORE NEURONS A dolphin's brain, which processes the . . signals, has at least : double the Common Name Bottlenose dolphin MELON . convolutions of those Family Delphinidae ; , is an organ filled with low- : 2 of humans, as well as : density lipids that concentrate Species Tursiops truncatus Ly to 13 feet (2-4 m)— and direct the pulses emitted, Adult Weight 330 to 1,400 pounds They reach sending waves forward. The (150 to 650 kg) —— a 22 noe shape of the melon can be varied > Longevity 30 to 40 years (35 km/h) to better focus the sounds. SPIRACLE LIP = NASAL e AIR SAC DORSAL FIN allows dolphins to maintain their equilibrium in the water. LARYNX CAUDAL FIN has a horizontal axis (unlike that of fish), which serves to propel dolphins forward. Emission Sounds are generated by air passing through the respiratory e chambers. But it is in the melon that resonance is generated and amplified. Greater frequencies PECTORAL and intensities are achieved in FIN this way. INHALATION The spiracle opens so oxygen can enter. Spiracle HOW THE pig) the lungs g , SOUND IS PRODUCED The nasal air sacs begin to inflate. The nasal air sacs deflate They can go 12 minutes without taking in oxygen. cd Air in the lungs EXHALATION Air resonates in the nasal sacs and is emitted under pressure through the spiracle. oot Riese atts Low-frequency signals are used for communication with other dolphins, and high-frequency signals are used as sonar. mile per second (1.5 km/s) SOUND WAVES TRAVEL 4.5 TIMES FASTER IN WATER THAN IN AIR. Echolocation The dolphin emits a series of clicking sounds from the nasal cavity. nearly 50 percent more neurons. MIDDLE The melon concentrates These waves bounce the clicks and projects off objects they SIGNAL them forward. | encounter in their way. WITH ECHO Click Click Echo 00 UL) mee Part of the signal bounces back and returns to the dolphin Os | 6s | 12 | 18s | in the form of an echo. The intensity, pitch, and return time of the echo indicate the size, position, and direction of the obstacle. 78 DIVERSITY Lively ‘Tunnels abbits are gregarious animals that live in colonies in a series of burrows called warrens. The burrows are dug underground and are inhabited by females of high social rank. Rabbits are principally nocturnal and spend most of the day hidden in the burrow, leaving to eat when night falls. @ 7 RABBIT FOOTPRINTS Their footprints are unmistakable, the result of ~ : their peculiar way of The area around the burrow needs two things before the Pits 2 rabbits will at (60 m) walking and jumpin = n comfortable—grass and teal pe — oe cover. Generally rabbits GO FROM ITS BURROW.»s dee eae are ; build warrens in meadows ai : ] near thickets or rocks. __- \ mi 4 ‘ ‘ ’ - ~ . . — 6 inches Py \ a sae a Se oe “a : (15 cmp Danger Print es ; Se Piece any = dh du Warren t This is the main part of the burrow, where the adult rabbits tive. Itis madeiip of a.complex network of In the presence of strangers orin other cases of danger, rabbits thump the ground with the back part of their hind feet, warningsthe When they thump; tabbits produce.a sound that allthe rabbits%in, the interconnected.corridors and chambeks. MOUNDS others hot to leave ‘the burrow: colony hears Ifta rabbit is a, trapped, it will ‘emit.a * sharp squeal that.can be y heard throughout the area. ? * FooD . DEPOSIT ee ae _—. a. =, wr 2 > a, dpe SSE ic “at > - s “ yore # *" ~ ' «> ; ull i O=—~ PROTECTED INTERIOR Cc) . y + “a - Interior tunnels are lined with vegetation and, » rabbit fur to keepithem from deteriorating andito - - protect thempsfiom ._” moisture. ~ os _ " = on - Rabbits that a Wa. \ : = ~S ~ i receive the : : > ty 7; ~ warning will lt “ Po ae ‘- . remain in place, ~~ % ~ ~ s% -~ 7 }, § motionless. w& & am 7 ~ . ps x tt ~) b ity b es . - te . ' a . » a * _. =e + d \ : -_ - « > s - OF a La Hind Feet Then it lets its hind feet land in front of Front Feet. Whenit jumps,.it first-lands onjits frontfeet, which-are bunched together. Both feet leave almost, This gives, rabbit a single footprint; footprints, their small and not very Peculiart¥-shaped " distinct, appearance, »-""" %, 3 ee ; 7 ~ " L at r = ‘ “a, W ? RABBIT FOOTPRINT’ PATTERNS sa = ’ They always follow. this Y’ as igh at 7 | oe ge hp a z brine 1 —_ rene 4 * —_ —_ * Walking, Rabbit Jumping Rabbit 3 New Hop , It begins-the cycle again by-pushing off with-the’hind-feet: ary ty “ ¥. « x \ head ~ w > \ ¥ ; ere. ri : - ' , . - ° ™ a = { . > | ye = Secondary corridors -~ * \ pr are often smaller.and not interconnected. : at They feed ’on herbaceous, and , - \ The offspring of the younger females live grassy plants, roots, and bulbs. } there Some of their excrement is soft, Leak. get ‘ / covered with mucus, and is re- m" ‘ ingested, the equivalent of : i + i =a, When the mother,leaves \ bovine rumination. } 5, ) her offspring she seals - f the\ entrance with dirt to protect them from ys - ‘ 5 to 8 inches"%™, (12-20 cm) . FOOD CELLARS \ ~ ae 3 to 10 feet - i ee The*Secondary corridor 7 c = : has only one.exit, which y ——) , is not connected:to the s warren or other areas. } — ail | o 4 =o. ~—— P rr —— ——_ Ca “ 4. ¥ IS HOW LONG. A BURROW TUNNEL CAN BE. The young rabbit will grow in safety there me! until it is capable of fending for itself. =—_ - qa o ss Pay Relationship with People he history of cats goes back 12 million years to the time when felines began to populate the Earth. However, their domestication began 4,000 years ago. The Egyptians decided to incorporate them into their home life, thus keeping rats away. Then the Phoenicians took them to Italy and the rest of Europe. One of the subjects Cats are excellent companion animals and are known for their great independence and cleanliness. discussed in this chapter has to do with the things that threaten the existence of many animal species, including the loss of natural habitats, poaching, pollution, and illegal pet trafficking. Within the MYTHS AND LEGENDS EACH IN ITS PLACE RAISING HOGS MILK PRODUCTION THE HUMAN THREAT next 30 years, almost one fourth of the Earth's mammals could disappear. 82 RELATIONSHIP WITH PEOPLE PEGASUS Winged horse, son of Medusa, who flew to Olympus and was received by Zeus. Thereafter, he transported thunderbolts for the king of the gods, who placed his figure in the night sky. TROJAN HORSE Unable to capture the city of Troy during a siege that lasted 10 years, the Greeks built a hollow wooden horse, concealed warriors inside it, and left it on the beach. The Trojans, thinking it a gift from Poseidon, brought it into the city. At night, the warriors left their hiding place and opened the city's gates to the remainder of the Greek army, burning and seizing the city. Myths and Legends | uman history has always been intimately linked with the various mammals—after all, people are mammals, too! Numerous myths and legends have arisen from this relationship, such as that of the wolf goddess Luperca, who saved Romulus and Remus from death—or the story of the birth of the Minotaur, in which a queen was caused to fall hopelessly in love with a bull and give birth to a monster with a bull's head and man's body. The origin of each myth springs from a particular tradition and means something different in each culture. @ In Western culture, the Greeks and Romans have been the great producers myths and legends relatin animals to humans. Huma: bodies with the heads of bulls or the limbs of horses are some of many examples. MAMMALS 83 MINOTAUR 3 ; In Greek mythology, this In Eastern culture, animals, especially mammals, U have played a leading role in myths and legends. was a creature born Sometimes one animal has various meanings in with the body of a man various cultures. To Egyptians, cats represent and the head of a bull harmony and happiness, but the Buddhist world disapproves of cats because they, along with snakes, were the only ones who did not cry at Buddha's death. that ate human flesh. It was born on the island of Crete of a forced sexual relationship between Pasiphae, wife of King Minos, and a white bull that Poseidon gave the king to use as a sacrifice. UNICORN This stone seal depicting a unicorn is found in the National Museum of Jal eA Ad Le } Pakistan in Karachi ; % a ? and dates from the { we , = year 2300 BC. ™% ; ie ‘ LION The Manjusri Buddha, seated on the mythical lion who is the guardian of Buddhist doctrine of ig n CERBERUS This was the monstrous, three-headed hound of Hades, or hellhound, which guarded the kingdom of the dead, preventing the dead from leaving and the living from entering. 84 RELATIONSHIP WITH PEOPLE Each in Its Place | ature takes care of maintaining its equilibrium, providing each animal its own role within the food chain. When one of the roles is removed, equilibrium in the region is lost. In Australia, dingoes were a big problem for sheep farmers, who built a great fence to protect their flocks. This barrier left the wild dogs without prey and other species able to move about more freely in search of food. Dingoes are classified as pests both for farm animals as well as for rabies control. The Great Fence sae sd was designed to keep dingoes out of the southeastern 4 i og 4 part of Australia, protecting flocks of sheep. It ran for a thousands of miles and was largely successful in its objective. The number of dingoes in the area declined, and, although the loss of sheep to predators was reduced, this decline led to an ecological imbalance } by increasing the competition for pastureland among rabbits and kangaroos. The Introduction of the Dingo/ Tt is thought that dingoes were domesticated animals > of the Australian Aborigines who lived in the region. These mammals originated in Asia and were brought to Australia by humans. They are medium-sized wild dogs with thick tails and are notable for having a very distinctive howl instead of a bark. When European pioneers arrived in Australia, dingoes were accepted, but this rapidly changed when sheep became an important part of the economy. CHAIN Because of the building of the barrier, herbivorous animals have more space to graze, safe from the presence of dingoes. DINGO The leading predators of sheep, dingoes were isolated from the area. 3,300 miles (5,320 km) THE LENGTH OF THE GREAT FENCE. Dingoes were soon trapped, hunted, and poisoned. SHEEP Their population increased with the absence of the dingo. KANGAROO They found greater freedom to move about rate | in search of food. became scarce, making it difficult for herbivores such as kangaroos and sheep to find food. DINGO. y5 *"-iconnet oot” eae eS. * Canis dingo» « Aa ~ ‘ Its shape changes according to its upkeep: The Australian government subsidizes the undertaking, but sheep . farmers are the ones who @ AREA FREE OF DINGOES maintain its mame ORIGINAL COURSE CURRENT COURSE ——a : re ~* . Wool Industry Australia is second in the world in wool » borders, constituting’10 percent of world wool production: In 1989, when part,of the . famous fence collapsed; about 20,000 sheep were lost to dingoes. . . production. It has 110 million'sheep within its 86 RELATIONSHIP WITH PEOPLE MAMMALS 87 e e S I | S og farming is one of the oldest forms of livestock production. In fact, the biggest hog producers, the Chinese, began raising hogs more than 7,000 years ago. But raising hogs has become more and more complex. Today, to produce large litters and high-quality pork as quickly as ; possible, pigs are crossbred. Older sows coming from the breeding room and Once impregnated, they are taken to the gestation room, where they will remain for They give birth to litters of 10 young replacement gilts 114 days, or until two or to 12 animals and can produce ‘ti heratth ill three days before giving over 3 gallons (12 |) of milk Porl« Prot du ct tio 1) 1 Pe eens ane ea ; daily. Feeding is unrestricted so PUI FruUUuaee : be naturally or artificially birth. To prevent problems Soe ERO cow ie catIetE The recently weaned ‘ The use of genetics in a pig nursery is complex impregnated. when they GIVE birth, they A Tea Sie piglets enter nursery 2 = é and important because breeds of pigs are very receive a restricted diet so 9. crates kept at an (— a . —--,) specific. Here are the most notable differences they do not get fat. ambient temperature among various breeds. averaging 772 F (25° C). % sal They are given an initial ‘ pd - = s tion and remain here eee MEAT BREEDS MATERNAL BREEDS he Cuts i te have high weight gain, a They are very prolific, Thesanimallcan be-soldiasa BECON EOIN AND CHOR SS TALL from day 21 to day 45. ; {| good build, and a high have good maternal skills, 4 d aig hs Ses | me el} ; ; » A food-conversion efficiency. and produce a large ressed carcass oF In pleces nee Tinea ha This period lasts y number of piglets. and taken to supermarkets. / approximately 90 . > Its meat will be used to af = " ‘ days. When the pigs make sausages or left as Ke ee _— = <> are 150 days old, they entire cuts. weigh about 210 Hampshire 7 SHOULDER RIBS HAM beanies ie Sa = i -%. BLADE as, Landrace , by Once they weigh between 210 and Duroc fi 220 pounds (95-100 kg), the pigs are transferred to the slaughterhouse. ro There they are given an electric shock Yorkshire : “e that renders them unconscious = before they are killed. They are Pietrain scalded in hot water to detach their hair, are bled, and are CROSS TO OBTAIN A ag FOR CONSUMPTION 100% 100% \ Meat breed Maternal breed tela a ner 50% Meat breed” 100% 50% Maternal bxeed in sw | 75% Maternal breed .. Meat beet s Y 4 25% Meat breed a FAT 62.5% Meat breed ~ °375% Maternal breed ae et FEED es It is co mmo to use growth hormones to increase food conversion efficiency and the lean-meat cohtent in the dressed carcass. carcass is prepared for final then eviscerated, and the \ butchering. 88 RELATIONSHIP WITH PEOPLE - : ! MAMMALS 89 —— an — 7 not easy to offer a supply of fresh milk to popular drink produced industrially. KEY 1 Milk Status JAI Raw “ARI ME Sterilized Mechanically HE Skimmed milked milk comes MC out at about 992 F ae (37° C). It is ME Homogenized immediately cooled mmm Pasteurized to less than 392 F (4° C) to prevent spoilage. The mi controlled is ¢ contamination, and it i: D the 1542 F (57-682 C) for removed from t yt in large tanker trucl { MECHANICAL MILKING STEEL TEAT CUP e e } 10G High-pressure streams of milk | AST T Louis Pasteur | ensures that the collide with a piston, reducing _ ensures that potentially harmful 1822-95 the size of the fat particles. French chemist. Among ntil the 18th century, milk was a little-consumed product because it could be kept for only a few hours without spoiling. It was Only in the 20th century, after the discovery of pasteurization, allowing milk to be preserved, did milk become a universally Skim Milk ’ Pasteurized, Tank = ANALYSIS REC ION AND Homogenized COLLECTION e in the plant, i TERILIZATION HEAT Milk Tank hi osphatase Milk is heated to EXCHANGE Teat Vacuum Pump SEALING MACHINE ‘ Milk ‘ is maintained in aseptic The difference “ z conditions. Processing and in pressure extracts MAIN DAIRY BREEDS utter and whipped expiration dates are _ the milk. ; ream, the cream is heated to 260° stamped on the container. BK HOLSTEIN-FRIESIAN F (127° C) to reduce its water — | product is uniform in microorganisms are eliminated from the milk i other things, he consistency. It consists but does not change the milk's properties. It = ; 5 : fs r a discovered that the , of the dispersion of Milk Picton Smaller begins with rapid heating from a source of decomposition of food : oe the milk's fat globules Pipeline Particles indirect heat, followed by circulation through is caused by bacteria, = ee by means of friction a cold pipe for quick cooling. and he invented the first meet urban needs. created under very ae Snir substances — high pressure. ° = HEATING COOLING Peroxide solutions are used to sterilize the containers, and reagent strips are used to ensure that no peroxide residue remains. HOMOGENIZER Hot Water 1622 F Cold Water 392 F (72° C) (4° C) CONTROL ROOM The various steps of the processes carried out in modern plants are automated ie ; ~ x : ww - a « 4 ‘ . & “= a and controlled by computers ° rige d = a, ee — P< from a central office. “if it is between 1352 and transportation or processing, eliminating germs while retaining the properties of raw ilk. From Germany. For igre han a00 years, content. For yogurt and cheese, proportions of milk and cream are these black and 5 white cows have mixed together and appropriate adapted to bacteria cultures are added. different climates. MILK PRODUCTS 7 VO EESE YOGURT BUTTER (17th century). They are notable for their DULCE DE red spots. ECHE JERSEY The most widespread English breed. Its angular frame makes it ideal for milk production. FILLING MA Except in the life milk, the machine fills containers that will allow the milk to be preserved for two weeks under adequately cold conditions. AYRSHIRE From southwestern Scotland. The oldest of the milk breeds 90 RELATIONSHIP WITH PEOPLE The Human Threat ver the next 30 years, almost a quarter of the mammals could disappear from the face of the Earth, according to the United Nations. The eminent collapse reflects DEGREE OF THREAT Extinct In the Wild Critically Endangered 500 individuals Has not been seen for 30 years Survives in captivity Families of Primates Fl Twenty-five percent of the 625 [Lalli species and subspecies of primates are in danger of extinction. The principal causes are deforestation, FAMILY HYLOBATIDAE Gibbon Siamang an unequivocally human stamp: hunting, deforestation, pollution, urbanization, Endangered 1,000 to 2,000 individuals midisenimanaieeorruchcaliuniing, FAMILY PONGIDAE and massive tourism. Experts calculate that more than 1,000 mammals are Vulnerable Up to 5,000 individuals a Cale ar eioe | anetale the countries of Gabon and Congo, endangered or vulnerable, and 20 areas of the ey where the majority of chimpanzees planet have been identified where probabilities of extinction may exist in the near future. e@ Affected Regions @ MAMMALS AT CRITICAL RISK O UP TO 10 SPECIES ALREADY EXTINCT @ MORE THAN 10 SPECIES ALREADY EXTINCT IUCN. and gorillas live, the population decreased by more than half between 1983 and 2000. Chimpanzee vi © There are 781 threatened species in the ASIA “Thiol bawoaciaiias tial Leff region of sub-Saharan Africa, and in South eT | ” Asia there are 726. South America contains The World Conservation another 346 endangered species, and Central and — Union was created m North America have 63 endangered mammals. EUROPE 1948, bringing together NOMBRE Se a Otter 81 nations and nearly ot AMERICA Enhydra lutris oO 10,000 specialists. x @ & a Lotaleaperia we aa bid Once a continuous line of sea otter ° ® More than one out of every five species colonies stretched from the Kuril @ * of mammals is endangered: 20 to 25 > Islands of Japan to California. Today 2 ° Se s percent of existing mammalian species. only a few colonies remain in Alaska e @® and in the lower United States. ®e 1,097 o .¢ P a Threatened aw ° ; ° ? = e ee oO a rT Atlantic species ° ape Dama Gazelle © & eo | : E 4 2 A on Deer ee AEG c hie The degradation of their APETEA ° e ° « ° ANTONE Species . 7 habitat, as well as e Hippopotamus @ S that are not ®e unregulated hunting, threaten 7 e bad e These are among the threatened or their existence. In the Sahara, C) i a for ee there Pacific Ocean e their population fell by 80 e Fou ia ee Shae Aen ane ® 2 o Orangutans SUTIN ATEE ey percent in only 10 years. Be aly population in Zambia Pongo pygmaeuspygmaeus (Borneo) 162 583 ° es . and the Democratic Tan Pongo pygmaeus abelii (Sumatra) iti i Ocean a Critical Vulnerable ° * ce hs as ei ‘ Bag Found in the tropical forests of the islands Southern - a oe” YR : &% of Borneo and Sumatra. Indiscriminate SOUTH = : , logging, mining, and forest fires isolat 348 Chinchilla ———@-© auunica fe Right Whale =e e ° ihe Wien fant eeerces We neal Endangered Chinchilla brevicaudata —« @™® Eubalaena australis Py: e capture of their young, which are then sold They live in the Andes z A : * as pets. Mountains of Chile and Peru. ee oe ees ee nee . ~~ ad Hainan Black-crested Gibbon # Indiscriminate hunting has thei Aa ‘titi ey ab ai A oe d wi es Nomascus nasutus sp. hainanus ® » decreased the species, and it Me errata oe Ll These primates are among the five bad is endangered. they are relatively easy to capture. Itis species in most danger of extinction. ENDANGERED BY COUNTRY estimated that only 3,000 exist today. Only 30 black-crested gibbons are OCEANIA aa Indonesia has the most endangered known to exist. ° species, followed by the “country of 5 A 1 6 o 120 Fi ki 2 P é tigers,” India. In Latin America, ) Brazil is first and Mexico second. 100 ' - Dolphin 80 80 75 i Cetaceans Giant Panda I Gray whales, which inhabit the Harbor Porpoise | 60 a arbor Porpois LLefl_ waters of the northern Pacific and the Ailuropoda melanoleuca 40 39 38 Arctic, are protected. In 1970, sperm whales Sperm Whale EI One thousand bears survive in reserves 32 29 were declared endangered, and today hunting Blue Whale created in China. The disappearance of their on — them is prohibited. The Indian Ocean has been habitat—caused by the felling of bamboo, declared a whale sanctuary in an effort to exenee~s. their natural food—as well as the extreme 5 curb hunting, but 7 out of 13 great whales Gray Whale ie difficulty they have reproducing in captivity in hale (because of their timidity) are the principal reasons for the decrease in this species. remain in danger of extinction, as do a similar China Cameroon Tanzania Russian Thailand U.S. - & number of dolphin species. Federation Indonesia India Brazil 92 GLOSSARY Abomasum Last of the four chambers into which ruminants’ stomachs are divided. It secretes strong acids and many digestive enzymes. Agouti Rodent mammal of South America measuring approximately 20 inches (50 cm) and having large feet, a short tail, and small ears. Albumin Protein found in abundance in blood plasma. It is the principal protein in the blood and is synthesized in the liver. It is also found in egg whites and in milk. Alveolar Gland Functional production unit in which a single layer of milk-secreting cells is spherically grouped, having a central depression called a lumen. Biome Land or water ecosystem with a certain type of predominant vegetation and fauna. Biped Adjective applied to species of mammals that walk on two feet. Bradychardia Lowering of cardiac frequency to below 60 beats per minute in humans. Bunny This is a young or growing rabbit. Carnassial A typical sharp premolar present in carnivorous animals that helps them cut and tear the flesh of their prey more efficiently. Carpus Bone structure of the wrist, located between the bones of the forearm and the metacarpus. It is made up of two rows of bones. Chiridium A muscular limb in tetrapods. It is a long bone whose anterior end articulates with the scapular belt. The posterior end articulates with two bones that connect to the joints of the digits. Cloaca The open chamber into which the ducts of the urinary and reproductive systems empty. Cochlea A structure shaped like a coiled spiral tube, located in the inner ear of mammals. Concha The arched, osseous plate found in each of the nostrils. Cones The photoreceptor cells in the retina of vertebrates. They are essential for distinguishing colors. Convolution Each of the slight elevations or folds that mark the surface of the cerebral cortex. Cortex The outer tissue of some organs, such as the brain and kidney. Counter Shading The characteristic of protective coloration in the hair or fur of certain mammals that are dorsally dark and ventrally lighter. Cynodonts Animals that, beginning in the Triassic Period, start to exhibit characteristics essential to the lives of warm-blooded animals, making them relatives of true mammals. They include the Mammaliaformes. Dendrite The branched elongation of a nerve cell by means of which it receives external stimuli. Dermis The inner layer of the skin, located under the epidermis. Dichromatic Refers to mammals, such as mice and dogs, that have two types of cones in their retinas and can only distinguish certain colors. Digitigrade Refers to animals that use only their digits to walk. One example is dogs. Dimorphism Two anatomical forms in the same species. Sexual dimorphism is common between males and females of the same species. Domestication The process by which an animal population adapts to human beings and captivity through a series of genetic changes that occur over time, as well as by means of adaptation processes brought about and repeated over generations. Echolocation The ability to orient and maneuver by emitting sounds and interpreting their echoes. Ecosystem A dynamic system formed by a group of interrelated living beings and their environment. Embryo A living being in the first stages of its development, from fertilization until it acquires the characteristic appearance of its species. Endemism The characteristic of a specific area where animal or plant species are natively and exclusively found. Endothermy The ability to regulate metabolism to maintain a constant body temperature independent of the ambient temperature. Epidermis The outer layer of the skin formed by epithelial tissue covering the bodies of animals. Erythrocyte A spherical blood cell containing hemoglobin, which gives blood its characteristic red color and transports oxygen throughout the body. It is also known as a red blood cell. Estrus The period of heat, or greatest sexual receptivity, of the female. Ethology The science that studies animal behavior. Eumelanin One of the types of melanin, a darkish brown color pigment. Eutheria One of the infraclasses into which the Theria subclass is divided, applied to animals that complete their development in the placenta. Fetlock Joint In quadrupeds, the limb joint between the cannon bone and the pastern. Follicle A small organ in the form of a sac located in the skin or mucous membranes. Gestation The state of an embryo inside a woman or female mammal from conception until birth. Glomerulus A ball-shaped structure such as the renal glomeruli, which are formed by a tiny ball of capillaries and which filter the blood. Habitat The set of geophysical conditions in which an individual species or a community of animals or plants lives. Hibernation The physiological state that occurs in certain mammals as an adaptation to extreme winter conditions, exhibited as a drop in body temperature and a general decrease in metabolic function. Hock The joint located between the metatarsal and tarsal bones of the hind limbs of a quadruped. Homeostasis The set of self-regulating phenomena that keeps the composition and properties of an organism's internal environment constant. Homeothermy Thermoregulation characteristic of animals that maintain a constant internal temperature, regardless of external conditions. Body temperature is usually higher than that of the immediate environment. Hoof Horny, or cornified, covering that completely envelops the distal extremity of horses’ feet. Iris The membranous disk of the eye between the cornea and the lens that can take on different MAMMALS 93 coloration. In its center is the pupil, which is dilated and contracted by the muscle fibers of the iris. Keratin A protein rich in sulfur, it constitutes the chief element of the outermost layers of mammals' epidermises, including hair, horns, nails, and hooves. It is the source of their strength and hardness. Lactation The period in mammals’ lives when they feed solely on maternal milk. Litter All the offspring of a mammal born at one time. Mammaliaformes See Cynodonts. Mammalogy The science of studying mammals. Mammary Gland One of a pair of external secretion organs characteristic of mammals. It provides milk to the young during lactation. Marsupial Mammals whose females give birth to unviable infants, which are then incubated in the ventral pouch, where the mammary glands are located. They belong to the Metatheria infraclass. Marsupium The pouch, characteristic of female marsupials, that functions as an incubation chamber. It is formed by a fold of the skin and is attached to the outer ventral wall. The mammary glands are found there, and the offspring complete the gestation period there. 94 GLOSSARY Melanin The black or blackish-brown pigment found in the protoplasm of certain cells. It gives coloration to the skin, hair, choroid membranes, and so on. Metacarpus The set of elongated bones that make up the skeleton of the anterior limbs of certain animals and of the human hand. They are articulated to the bones of the carpus, or wrist, and the phalanges. Metatheria The infraclass of the Theria subclass, it contains species that reproduce partially inside the mother and then continue their development inside the marsupium. Molt The process by which certain animals shed their skin or feathers; or, when plants shed their foliage. Monotremata The only order of the Prototheria subclass, it consists of egg-laying mammals with a marsupium in which they incubate their eggs. The mammary glands are tubular and similar to sweat glands. They are distributed in four families, half of which are now extinct. Multituberculate A group of mammals that lived predominantly during the Mesozoic Era and that became extinct during the early part of the Cenozoic Era. Neuron A differentiated cell of the nervous system capable of transmitting nerve impulses among other neurons. It is composed of a receptor site, dendrites, and a transmission (or release) site—the axon, or neurite. Nostril Each of the openings of the nasal cavities that lead to the outside of the body. Omasum A ruminant's third stomach chamber. It is a small organ with a high absorptive capacity. It permits the recycling of water and minerals such as sodium and phosphorus, which may return to the rumen through the saliva. Oviduct The duct through which the ova leave the ovary to be fertilized. Oviparous Refers to animals that lay eggs outside the mother's body, where they complete their development before hatching. Papilla Each of the small, conical elevations on skin or mucous membranes, especially those on the tongue, by means of which the sense of taste functions. Pasteur, Louis (1822-95) The French chemist who developed pasteurization and other scientific advances. Pasteurization The process that ensures the destruction of pathogenic bacteria and the reduction of benign flora in milk without significantly affecting its physicochemical properties. Patagium The very fine membrane that joins the fingers and anterior limbs with the body, feet, and tail of bats. Pheomelanin One of the types of melanin, a yellowish-red pigment. Pheromone A volatile chemical substance produced by the sexual glands and used to attract an individual for reproductive purposes. Phylogeny The origin and evolutionary development of species and, generally, genealogies of living beings. Placenta The spongy tissue that completely surrounds the embryo and whose function is to allow the exchange of substances through the blood. It also protects the fetus from infections and controls physiological processes during gestation and birth. Placentalia The name by which the species in the Eutheria infraclass orders are also known. Plantigrade Refers to mammals that use the entire foot in walking. Humans are plantigrade. Polyandry Refers to the relationship in which a female copulates with various males during one breeding period. Polyestrous Refers to an animal that has multiple annual breeding, or reproductive, periods. Polygyny The social system of certain animals, in which the male gathers a harem of females. Prototheria A subclass of the mammal class, it has a single order, Monotremata. Quadruped Refers to a four-legged animal. Rabbit Warren A burrow that rabbits make to protect themselves and their offspring. Reticulum The second chamber of a ruminant's stomach. It is a crossroad where the particles that enter and leave the rumen are separated. Only small particles of less than a 12th of an inch (2 mm) or dense ones greater than 1 ounce per inch (1.2 g per mm) can go on to the third chamber. Retina The inner membrane of the eyes of mammals and other animals, where light sensations are transformed into nerve impulses. Rod Along with cones, rods form the photoreceptor cells of the retina of vertebrates. They are responsible for peripheral and night vision, though they perceive colors poorly. Rumen The first chamber of a ruminant's stomach. It is a large fermentation vessel that can hold up to 220-265 pounds (100-120 kg) of matter in the process of being digested. Fiber particles remain there between 20 and 48 hours. Ruminate The process of chewing food a second time, returning food to the mouth that was already in the chamber that certain animals (ruminants) have. Scapula Triangular bone, also called the shoulder blade. With the clavicle, it forms the scapular belt. Scavenger Animals that eat organic forms of life that have died. They help maintain the equilibrium of the ecosystem by feeding upon dead animals, breaking them down. Spermaceti A waxy substance contained in the organ that bears the same name, located in the head of the sperm whale. It is believed that it aids deep dives, although some specialists believe that it may assist echolocation. Spinal Cord An extension of the central nervous system. Often protected by vertebrae, this soft, fatty material is the major nerve pathway that carries information to and from the brain and muscles. Synapsids These are also known as therapsids and are described as mammal-like reptiles. They are a class of amniotes that were characterized by a single opening in the cranium (fenestra) behind each eye in the temple. They lived 320 million years ago, during the late Carboniferous Period. It is believed that modern mammals evolved from them. Tapetum Lucidum A layer of cells located behind the retina of some vertebrates that reflects light toward the retina, increasing the intensity of the light it receives. It heightens the perception of light in near-darkness. Trichromatic Refers to mammals whose eyes have three classes of cones—sensitive to red, green, or blue. MAMMALS 95 Trophic Chain System formed by a group of living beings that successively feed on each other. Udder Saclike organ containing the mammary glands of certain female mammals. Ungulate A mammal that supports itself and walks on the tips of its digits, which are covered by a hoof. Uropatagium The membrane that bats have between their feet. It also encloses the tail. Viviparous Refers to animals in which the embryonic development of offspring occurs inside the mother's body and the offspring emerge as viable young at birth. Vomeronasal Organ An auxiliary organ of the sense of smell located in the vomer bone between the nose and the mouth. Sensory neurons detect different chemical compounds, usually consisting of large molecules. Warren A burrow where certain animals raise their young. Weaning The process by which a mammal ceases to receive maternal milk as its subsistence. Whiskers Very sensitive hairs of many mammals. They are often located near the mouth, like a mustache. 96 INDEX MAMMALS 97 Index A acoustical guidance system bats, 72 See also echolocation Africa, endangered species, 90-91 aggressive mimicry, 74, 75 American beaver, 70-71 antler, 36-37 Arabian camel (dromedary camel), 64-65 Arctic fox, 30 artificial insemination, 86-87 Asia, endangered species, 91 Australia, 10-11, 84-85, 91 Ayrshire (breed of cattle), 88 B bacteria, ruminants, 53 Bastet, 83 bat, 23, 31, 60, 72-73 bear brown, 15 grizzly, 15 polar, 6-7, 16-17, 31 beaver, 12, 70-71 bellow, 37 See a/so communication Bengal tiger, 18-19 binocular vision, 14, 26, 51, 57 biomass, 54 birth, 44 blood, 67 blowhole, 67 blue whale, 5 body temperature, 14, 16-17 balling up, 62-63 camel, 64 dormice, 62 fur, 8 hibernation, 15, 62 See also homeothermy bonding phenomenon, 45 bone: See skeleton Borneo, 91 bottlenose dolphin, 14, 76-77 bradycardia, 67 brain, 15, 77 breathing, 66-67 breeding, 86 brown bear (grizzly bear), 15 buffalo, 55 burrow, rabbits, 78-79 C call, 72 See also communication camel, 15, 61, 64-65 camouflage, 30, 74-75 carnivore, 50-51, 54 cat (feline) balance, 68-69 camouflage, 74-75 cheetahs, 24-25, 55 companion to humans, 80-81 domestic, 68-69 equilibrium, 69 flexibility, 69 Geoffroy's cat, 55 history, 80 lions, 50-51, 55 mythological, 83 paws, 23 skeleton, 68 small-spotted genet, 54 tigers, 19, 26-27, 74-75 vision, 26-27 caudal fin, 76 Cerberus, 82 cetacean (aquatic mammal), 15, 23, 66-67, 76- 77,90-91 See also dolphin; sea lion; seal; whale cheetah, 24-25, 55 chimpanzee, 22-23, 48-49, 91 chinchilla, 30, 90 chipmunk, 14, 75 Chiroptera (bat), 23, 72-73 circulatory system, 14 claw, 23, 25 coati, 31 cochlea, 28, 69 coloration, 74-75 colostrum, 44 communication bats, 72 chimpanzees, 48, 49 deer, 37 dolphins, 76-77 meerkats, 57 playing, 48-49 rabbits, 78 underwater, 76-77 wolves, 58 companion animal, 80-81 consumer, trophic pyramid, 54 continent, 11 corpuscle, 31 cottontail rabbit, 34 cow, 46-47, 52-53, 88 cranium (head), 15 Cretaceous Period, 8, 12 D dairy farm, 88-89 dam, 70-71 Dama gazelle, 90 deer, 36, 52-53 defense mechanism, 74-75 dentition: See teeth dermis, 30-31 digestion, 52-53 digitigrade (foot), 22 dingo, 84-85 diving, whales, 67 dog developmental stages, 44-45 dingoes, 84-85 field of vision, 27 greyhound, 24 mythological, 82 nose, 29 paw, 22 sense of hearing, 28 sense of smell, 28-29 sense of taste, 29 dolphin, 14, 76-77 domestic cat, 68-69 dormouse, 60-61, 62-63 dorsal fin, 76 dromedary camel (Arabian camel), 64-65 E eagle, 57 ear anatomy, 8, 28 bones, 15 cats, 69 cochlea, 69 dogs, 28 eastern cottontail rabbit, 34 eating giraffes, 32-33 ruminants, 52 echidna, 10, 35, 38-39 echolocation, dolphins, 77 ecology, 54-55 ecosystem, 54-55 egg, 32, 35, 38 elephant seal, 13, 15 endangered species, 5, 90-91 endolymph, 69 energy, trophic pyramid, 54 epidermis (skin), 30-31 equilibrium, 69, 84-85 erythrocyte (red blood cell), 64 Europe, endangered species, 90 Eutheria: See placental mammal evolution, 74 extinction, 90-91 causes, 81 polar bears, 7 See also endangered species extremity, 22-23 fins, 23 opposable thumbs, 49 wings, 23 eye, 26-27 F falling, feline equilibrium, 68-69 family, 59 farming, 86 fat reserve, 17 fat storage, 62-63, 65 fatty tissue, 30 feline: See cat ferret, 55 fin, 23, 76 finger, 49 flexibility, 68-69 flight, 24-25, 72-73 flying squirrel, 24-25 food dormice, 62 lions, 51 pork, 86-87 food chain, 54-55, 84-85 foot, 9, 20 fossil, 11 fox, 30 fruit bat, 73 fur, 30-31 body temperature, 14 camel, 64 camouflage, 30, 74-75 functions, 19, 30, 75 hair types, 31 mimicry, 75 polar bear, 15, 16, 17 G game chimpanzees, 48 wolves, 59 gazelle, 55, 90 genet, 54 genetics, 86 Geoffroy's cat, 55 gestation, 11, 35, 42 giant panda, 91 gibbon, 91 giraffe, 13, 32-33, 74 gland milk-producing, 46-47 sebaceous, 31 sweat, 14, 30 goat, 22 Gondwana (continent), 11 gorilla, 14-15, 91 gray whale, 90-91 greyhound, 24 grizzly bear (brown bear), 15 growth hormone, 87 H habitat, 15, 90-91 Hainan black-crested gibbon, 91 hair body temperature, 14 camel, 64 camouflage, 30 functions, 19, 30, 75 98 INDEX MAMMALS 99 mimicry, 75 polar bear, 15, 16, 17 types, 31 hand, 9 hare, 27, 30 hazel dormouse, 62 hearing, 28 See also ear herbivore, 52-53, 54 hibernation bats, 73 body temperature, 5, 15 dormice, 62 polar bear, 17 weight loss, 63 hierarchy, social, 58-59 hippopotamus, 91 hog (pig), 86-87 Holstein (breed of cattle), 88 homeostasis, 16 homeothermy (body temperature) balling up, 62-63 dormice, 62 hibernation, 5, 15 polar bears, 16-17 See also body temperature hominid, 15 homogenization, 89 hoof, 20, 22 horn, 36-37 horse, 20-21, 22, 24, 82, 83 human adaptation, 15 animal relationships, 80-91 brain, 77 classification, 15 destructiveness, 5 feet, 22-23 field of vision, 27 survival, 4-5, 15 hunting cheetahs, 24 lions, 50-51 tigers, 26 wolves, 59 hyena, 55 I Indonesia, 91 insulation, 31 IUCN (World Conservation Union), 91 J jackal, 56 jaw, 15 Jersey (breed of cattle), 88 Jurassic Period, 8, 12 K kangaroo, 40-41, 84-85 kidney, 64 koala bear, 35 L lactation cows, 46-47 distinguishing feature, 46 kangaroo, 40 marsupials, 40 placental mammals, 44 platypus, 39 rabbits, 34 weaning, 34 language monkeys, 49 underwater, 76-77 See also communication legend, 82-83 life cycle, 34-35, 40 life span, 34 ligament, 20 limb fins, 23 functions, 15, 22 wings, 23 lion, 50-51, 55, 83 livestock cows, 88 hogs, 86-87 sheep, 84-85 locomotion, 22, 79 longevity, 35 loop of Henle, 64 Luperca, 82-83 M macaque monkey, 30 mammal aquatic: See cetacean Australian, 84-85 beginnings, 4-5, 7, 8 body temperature: See body temperature; homeothermy bone structure, 8-9 camouflage, 30, 74-75 carnivores, 50-51, 54 circulatory system, 14 classifying, 22 coloration, 74-75 common characteristics, 14-15, 16-17, 46-47 communication: See communication dentition: See teeth diversity, 5, 60-79 education, 48-49 endangered, 5, 90-91 extinction, 7, 81, 90-91 extremities, 22 family, 59 fastest, 24 features, 8-9 feeding, 34: See also lactation flying, 24-25, 72-73 food chain, 54-55, 84 foot, 9 fur: See fur habitat, 15 hair: See hair hand, 9 herbivores, 52-53, 54 hierarchy, 58-59 humans: See human insulation, 31 lactation: See lactation life cycle, 34 life span, 34, 35 marsupials: See marsupial mimicry, 74-75 monotremes: See monotreme movement, 20-21, 22, 79 mythological, 82-83 nocturnal, 72-73 number of species, 5, 14, 90 omnivores, 13, 55 origins, 4-5, 7, 8 placental: See placental mammal playing, 48-49, 59, 76 posture, 9 prominence, 12 reproduction: See reproductive cycle; sexual reproduction running, 20, 24-25, 51 sense of smell, 28-29 senses, 19, 28-29 skeletal structure, 20-21 skin, 30-31 slowest, 74 social groups, 56-57, 58-59 socializing, 48-49 species, 5, 14, 91 subclasses, 10 tail, 9, 21, 25, 51 types, 9 ungulates, 20 vertebrate, 21 vision, 14, 18 water conservation, 64-65 Mammaliaformes, 8 mammary gland, 15, 46-47 mandrill, 13 marsupial, 9, 10 defining characteristics, 11 gestation, 35 kangaroo, 40, 84-85 koala bear, 35 opossum, 11 pouch, 40-41 Tasmanian devil, 11 wallaby, 35 marsupium, 40-41 mating, 36-37 meerkat, 56-57 melon, dolphins, 76, 77 Merkil's disk, 31 metabolism, 17, 25 Metatheria: See marsupial migration, polar bears, 17 milk, 15, 34, 40, 46-47, 88-89 See also lactation milk production, 88-89 mimicry, 30, 74 Minotaur, 82, 83 monkey chimpanzee, 22-23, 48-49 endangered, 91 gibbon, 91 hanging, 49 macaque, 30 mandrill, 13 monocular vision, 14 monotreme, 9, 10, 32, 35, 38-39 morganucodon, 8-9 mouth, 15 movement, 22 multituberculate, 9 muscle, 20 myoglobin (protein), 67 myth, 82-83 N nest, 63, 78-79 Newton, Isaac, 68 night vision, 18, 26-27 North America, endangered species, 90 nose camel, 64 dog, 28-29 O Oceania, 10-11 offspring, 34-35 omnivore, 13, 55 opossum, 11 opposable thumb, 49 orangutan, 91 organ, 64 otter, 90 oxygen, 66, 67 P pack, 58-59 panda bear, 91 pant-hoot, 48 Pasteur, Louis, 89 pasteurization, 88-89 pastureland, 84-85 patagium, bats, 73 100 INDEX MAMMALS 101 paw, 23, 25 pectoral fin, 76 Pegasus, 82 pet, 80-81 photosynthesis, 54 physiology, 15 pig (hog), 86-87 placenta, 42, 43 placental mammal, 9, 10, 11 branches, 12 defining characteristics, 12-13, 42-43 development, 42-43 lactation, 44 life cycle, 34 plantigrade (foot), 22 platypus, 10, 35, 38-39 playing, 48-49, 59, 76 polar bear, 6-7, 16-17, 31 porcupine, 31 pork, 86-87 pouch, 40-41 predator, 54 prehensile digit, 22 primate characteristics, 15 chimpanzee, 22-23, 48-49 endangered, 91 feet, 22-23 gibbon, 91 gorilla, 14-15 hanging, 49 hominid, 15 human: See human mandrill, 13 producer, trophic pyramid, 54 protective mimicry, 74 protein, 67 Prototheria: See monotreme pulmonary collapse, 67 pupil, 26 puppy, 44-45 Q quill, 31 R rabbit, 34, 78-79, 85 raccoon, 12 rat, 42-43 red deer, 36-37 red kangaroo, 40 regurgitation ruminants, 52 weaning, 45 reproductive cycle echidnas, 35, 38-39 kangaroo, 40 koala, 35 length, 35 marsupial, 40 monotremes, 35, 38-39 placental mammals, 12, 42-43 platypus, 38-39 rabbit, 34 rat, 42-43 reptile, 8 respiration cheetah, 24 underwater, 66-67 retina, 27 rodent beaver, 70-71 chipmunk, 14 dormice, 60-61, 62-63 flying squirrel, 24-25 gestation, 42-43 multituberculates, 9 rat, 42-43 semi-aquatic, 70-71 squirrel, 24-25 ruminant, 52-53 rumination, 52-53 running, 20, 24-25, 51 S scavenger, 55 sea lion, 31 sea otter, 90 seal, 13, 15 sexual reproduction, 32 echidna, 38-39 marsupial, 35 mating, 36-37 monotremes, 38-39 pigs, 86-87 platypus, 38-39 red deer, 36 sheep, 52-53, 84 shelter beaver dam, 70-71 rabbit burrow, 78-79 short-beaked echidna, 35 shrew, 5 siamang, 91 Siberian flying squirrel, 24-25 sight: See vision sign language, chimpanzees, 49 skeleton cats, 68 horses, 20-21 skin, 15, 30-31 slaughterhouse, 87 sloth, 25, 74 small-spotted genet, 54 smell, sense of, 28-29 social structure meerkats, 56 wolves, 58-59 socialization, chimpanzees, 48-49 sound wave, 77 South America, endangered species, 90 southern right whale, 90-91 species endangered, 5, 90-91 number, 5, 14, 91 sperm whale, 66-67, 90 spermaceti organ, sperm whales, 66 spiracle, 66, 76 squirrel, 24-25 stereoscopic vision, 18 sternum, 20 stomach, ruminants, 52-53 Sumatra, 91 sweat gland, 14, 30 T tail cheetah, 25 lion, 51 rodent, 9 structure, 21 Tasmania, 11 Tasmanian devil, 11 taste, 29 teat, 46 teeth beavers, 70, 71 carnivores, 50 growth, 14 herbivores, 52 horses, 20 Mammaliaformes, 8 types, 14 whales, 66 temporal bone, 69 tendon, 20 territory, 57 Tertiary Period, 8 Theria (mammal subclass), 10 thoracic collapse, 67 three-toed sloth, 25 thumb, 49 tiger Bengal, 18-19 camouflage, 74-75 vision, 26-27 titi monkey, 91 tongue, 29 tool, chimpanzees, 49 tooth: See teeth Triassic Period, 8 Trojan horse, 82 trophic pyramid, 54-55 tunnel, 78-79 U udder, 46 ungulate, 20, 22 unicorn, 83 uropatagium, 73 UV radiation, 30 Vv vertebra, 21 vision binocular, 14, 26, 51, 57 lions, 50-51 monocular, 14 night, 18, 26-27 stereoscopic, 18 tigers, 26-27 W Wales, 4 wallaby, 35 warren, rabbits, 78 water conservation, camels, 64-65 weaning, 45 whale blue, 5 fins, 23 gray, 90-91 life span, 34 southern right, 90-91 sperm, 66-67, 90 wing, 23, 72-73 wolf, 30, 55, 58-59, 82-83 wool, 31, 85 World Conservation Union (IUCN), 91 Z zebra, 51, 55, 60-61, 74 oe MAMMALS Britannica Illustrated tReYeLOramA Britannica aR HUMANE \goaNal < ad) | 4 ad About the pagination of this eBook Due to the unique page numbering scheme of this book, the electronic pagination of the eBook does not match the pagination of the printed version. To navigate the text, please use the electronic Table of Contents that appears alongside the eBook or the Search function. For citation purposes, use the page numbers that appear in the text. HUMAN BODY I Britannica Illustrated Science Library a = Tokyo Britannica Illustrated Science Library © 2008 Editorial Sol 90 All rights reserved. Idea and Concept of This Work: Editorial Sol 90 Project Management: Fabian Cassan Photo Credits: Corbis, ESA, Getty Images, Graphic News, NASA, National Geographic, Science Photo Library Illustrators: Guido Arroyo, Pablo Aschei, Carlos Francisco Bulzomi, Gustavo J. Caironi, Hernan Cafiellas, Leonardo César, José Luis Corsetti, Vanina Farias, Manrique Fernandez Buente, Joana Garrido, Celina Hilbert, Inkspot, Jorge Ivanovich, Ivan Longuini, Isidro Lopez, Diego Martin, Jorge Martinez, Marco Menco, Marcelo Moran, Ala de Mosca, Diego Mourelos, Laura Mourelos, Pablo Palastro, Eduardo Pérez, Javier Pérez, Ariel Piroyansky, Fernando Ramallo, Ariel Roldan, Marcel Socias, Néstor Taylor, Trebol Animation, Juan Venegas, Constanza Vicco, Coralia Vignau, Gustavo Yamin, 3DN, 3DOM studio Composition and Pre-press Services: Editorial Sol 90 Translation Services and Index: Publication Services, Inc. Portions © 2008 Encyclopzedia Britannica, Inc. Encyclopaedia Britannica, Britannica, and the thistle logo are registered trademarks of Encyclopeedia Britannica, Inc. Britannica Illustrated Science Library Staff Editorial Michael Levy, Executive Editor, Core Editorial John Rafferty, Associate Editor, Earth Sciences William L. Hosch, Associate Editor, Mathematics and Computers Kara Rogers, Associate Editor, Life Sciences Rob Curley, Senior Editor, Science and Technology David Hayes, Special Projects Editor Art and Composition Steven N. Kapusta, Director Carol A. Gaines, Composition Supervisor Christine McCabe, Senior I/lustrator Media Acquisition Kathy Nakamura, Manager Copy Department Sylvia Wallace, Director Julian Ronning, Supervisor Information Management and Retrieval Sheila Vasich, Information Architect Production Control Marilyn L. Barton Manufacturing Kim Gerber, Director Encyclopzedia Britannica, Inc. Jacob E. Safra, Chairman of the Board Jorge Aguilar-Cauz, President Michael Ross, Senior Vice President, Corporate Development Dale H. Hoiberg, Senior Vice President and Editor Marsha Mackenzie, Director of Production International Standard Book Number (set): 978-1-59339-797-5 International Standard Book Number (volume): 978-1-59339-809-5 Britannica Illustrated Science Library: Human Body I 2008 Printed in China ENC YCLOPADIA Britannica www.britannica.com Contents What Are We Made Of? Page 6 Bones and Muscles Page 18 : Internal Systems and Organs Page 34 a FS? — AE Pi — “an hz The Senses i ds h ZA and Speec Page 68 Si =~) a — Control A Centers Page 80 i ewiRiy. WN A LIVING STRUCTURE The skeleton consists of 206 separate bones, which differ in form, size, and name. It supports and shapes the body, protects the internal organs, and—in the bone marrow of certain bones—manufactures various types of blood cells. A Perfect Machine ow can we understand what we are? What are we made of? Are we aware that all that we do—including reading this book—is the work of a marvelous machine? We know very little about how we are able to be conscious of our own actions; nevertheless, even though we are usually not very aware of